OPERATOR'S MANUAL

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CMA-9000

OPERATIONAL PROGRAM
S/W 169-614876-300

Esterline CMC Electronics

600 Dr. Frederik Philips Boulevard
Ville Saint-Laurent, Quebec, Canada
H4M 2S9

Publication No. 9000-GEN-0150 November 19, 2009

Item No.: 930-600086-000 Revision 2 March 01, 2010

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

 WE VALUE YOUR COMMENTS

PLEASE EVALUATE OUR PUBLICATION

AND LET US KNOW

Although we constantly strive for accuracy and clarity, we may make errors on occasion.
If we do, we would appreciate your comments to improve this manual.

Please use our web-based Customer Support Request form at

http://www.cmcelectronics.ca/customer-support-request-form.aspx to inform us of any
correction or send us a marked-up copy of this publication using the form below. We will
acknowledge your comments and notify you of any intended action.

Your assistance in improving this manual is sincerely appreciated.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Subject Section/Appendix

Introduction Section 1
CMA-9000 FMS Control and Display Section 2
Preflight Section 3
Departures Section 4
Enroute Section 5
Arrivals Section 6
Approach Section 7
Post-Flight Procedures Section 8
Direct-To/Intercept Section 9
Holding Pattern Navigation Section 10
Tactical Functions Section 11
Navigation Sensors Section 12
CMA-9000 FMS Pages - Radio Tuning Section 13
Performance Functions Section 14
RNP Capability Section 15
MCDU Functions Section 16
Abnormal Procedures Section 17
CMA-9000 FMS Pages - Detailed Descriptions Appendix A
Navigation Leg Type Definitions Appendix B
Navigation Displays Appendix C
CMA-9000 FMS Display Pages Flow Diagrams Appendix D
System Messages and Remote Annunciations Appendix E
Index INDEX

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page TC-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page TC-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

Subject Page
SYSTEM OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................... 1-2
A. FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (FMS) WITH EMBEDDED DISPLAY UNIT ..................................... 1-2
B. EXTERNAL GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) RECEIVER........................................................ 1-2
NAVIGATION MODES........................................................................................................................................ 1-3
CIVIL NAVIGATION MODE................................................................................................................................ 1-3
A. GPS ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
B. DME/DME.................................................................................................................................................. 1-4
C. VOR/DME/TACAN .................................................................................................................................... 1-5
D. Inertial ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
E. KALMAN FILTER ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5
F. DEAD RECKONING (DR)......................................................................................................................... 1-5
MILITARY NAVIGATION MODE........................................................................................................................ 1-6
A. Hybrid GPS/Inertial.................................................................................................................................. 1-7
B. GPS (or cGPS/mGPS* for dual GPS installations) ............................................................................... 1-7
C. DME/DME.................................................................................................................................................. 1-8
D. VOR/DME/TACAN .................................................................................................................................... 1-8
E. Hybrid INS/DVS........................................................................................................................................ 1-8
F. Inertial ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-8
G. DVS ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-8
H. KALMAN FILTER ..................................................................................................................................... 1-9
I. DEAD RECKONING (DR) ............................................................................................................................. 1-9
WAYPOINT NAVIGATION ................................................................................................................................. 1-9
TERMINAL AREA OPERATIONS AND GPS INSTRUMENT APPROACHES............................................... 1-11
NAVIGATION DATABASE............................................................................................................................... 1-11
PHASES OF FLIGHT........................................................................................................................................ 1-11
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS.............................................................................................................. 1-12

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 1

INTRODUCTION

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (FMS) provides a complete Global Navigation System (GNS)
and area navigation (RNAV) solution for world-wide four-dimensional aircraft navigation in the oceanic/remote,
en-route, terminal and non-precision approach. It includes extensive flight management capabilities and a full
range of navigation and flight planning features, together with simple route and flight plan creation and
modification procedures. A world-wide subscription navigation database, stored in a non-volatile memory,
provides the CMA-9000 FMS with information on waypoints, navaids and airports. In addition the database is
capable of storing customer defined routes and waypoints. The CMA-9000 FMS is a Flight Management
System (FMS) which also integrates the functionality of Radio Management System (RMS) and Control Display
Unit (CDU) into a standalone, cockpit mounted enclosure.

The CMA-9000 FMS accepts data from the following external navigation sensors, if installed:

Sensors Civil Certified/Approved/Military

Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) Civil certified
VHF Omni-directional Range (VOR) Civil certified
TACAN Civil and Military installations
External GPS Civil certified or Military (not approved for civil certified
installation)
External Embedded GPS/INS (EGI) Military (not approved for civil certified installation)
Inertial Reference System (IRS) Civil certified
Doppler Velocity Sensor (DVS) Military (not approved for civil certified installation)
Air Data Computer Civil certified
Heading Source (AHRS) Civil certified
AHRS (when used with Kalman Filtered Navigator) Civil certified

Information from these sensors is combined with air reference data inputs of heading, true air speed and altitude
to determine aircraft position. This position is then used for navigating along a programmed flight plan created
by selecting waypoints along a desired route from the navigation database (flight planning).

In dual/triple CMA-9000 FMS installations, the systems can be configured in either independent or synchronized
mode automatically upon startup.

Flight management capabilities include:

• Multi-sensor navigation modes with available sensors
• Standard Instrument Departure (SID)
• Standard Terminal Arrival Routes (STAR)
• GPS instrument approaches
• Direct-to/intercept navigation, holding patterns, procedure turns, arcs, offset tracks and search patterns
• Automatic waypoint sequencing, with and without turn anticipation
• Required and actual navigation performance (RNP/ANP)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

• Required time of arrival (RTA)

• Fuel management and radio tuning functions
• CARP

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

A. FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (FMS) WITH EMBEDDED DISPLAY UNIT

The provides a color display of alphanumeric data. An alphanumeric keyboard allows data entry, data
editing and system control of the flight management functions.

The display is a sunlight readable color Active Matrix Liquid Crystal Display (AMLCD). Dedicated function
keys and line select keys allow easy operator control of flight management functions. The keyboard panel is
integrally lit from a panel light dimming bus. The CMA-9000 FMS panel is illustrated in Section 2 along with
an explanation of the keys and their function.

For the control of the display brightness, two options are proposed. The first option consists in the
combination of light sensors and manual brightness setting. Two light sensors on the CMA-9000 FMS front
panel sense any change in the cockpit ambient light level. This results in an increase or decrease in display
brightness relative to a manual brightness setting. The second option consists in an external dimming bus.

The Flight Management Unit (FMU) accepts data from external navigation sensors and performs all the
signal processing and computations required to generate high performance navigation data. The FMU
accepts operator’s commands from the alphanumeric keyboard, provides navigation, steering and status
data on its own display and to the primary navigation flight displays. The FMU also provides suitably
formatted outputs for the flight guidance system.

B. EXTERNAL GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) RECEIVER

The external GPS Receiver receives signals transmitted by US DoD Global Positioning System satellites. It
provides all the signal processing and computational capability required to determine aircraft position,
velocity and time. The sensor continuously monitors the integrity of the satellites using a high performance
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitor (RAIM).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAVIGATION MODES

The CMA-9000 FMS is providing a Military or Civil configuration option; integrity monitoring and resulting
consequences as required by TSO-C115b, AC20-130A and DO-236A are the main differences between the two
options.

CIVIL NAVIGATION MODE

When in the civil navigation option, the sensor navigation solutions will be assumed not to have integrity unless
proven otherwise. The navigation modes selection logic is geared to safety (integrity) and the CMA-9000 FMS
may force mode transitions to remain in a navigation mode with integrity, thereby also preventing unnecessary
alarms from being raised. This configuration option is intended to fully comply with TSO-C115, AC20-130A and
the integrity requirement of DO-236A.

The CMA-9000 FMS will determine integrity, availability and accuracy for each navigation mode solution.

A navigation solution will be available if sufficient data required to compute the solution is received from the
sensor source and no critical failures are detected. For each navigation solution, a horizontal position sensor
value, Navigation Performance (NP), will be determined. The probability of the error exceeding the NP
-5
containment value will be no more than 10 per hour for the variables monitored. For some navigation solutions,
insufficient data may not ensure that the required probability is always met. In this case, when in the military
navigation option, the CMA-9000 FMS will nevertheless compute a NP value using the available data. In this
same case, when in the civil navigation option, the CMA-9000 FMS will make the NP value unavailable.

When in the civil navigation option, a navigation solution will be deemed to have integrity if:
• The solution’s NP value is less than the active error limit and,
• For some sensors where the NP does not include all the necessary variables to ensure the required
probability is always met, other criteria ensuring integrity are met. If integrity can never be assured, the
CMA-9000 FMS will declare the navigation solution for a specific sensor never having integrity. The error
limit can be configured to either Phase of Flight (POF) or Required Navigation Performance (RNP).

All accuracy-based transitions will use the 95% probability error statistics and will include a hysteresis value of
100m, except for the transition from GPS to INS/GPS sensor and the transition from VOR/DME with integrity to
DME/DME with integrity. The transitions for these two cases will be done without hysteresis. This is also
applicable when the navigation sensor cross-check is configured. In a configuration with multiple FMSs, a
hysteresis of 100m will also be applied when switching from a sensor to another identical sensor but from a
different FMS.

The CMA-9000 FMS has the following navigation modes: Hybrid GPS/INS, GPS (or cGPS), mGPS, DME/DME,
VOR/DME/TACAN, hybrid INS/DVS, Inertial, Doppler, KALMAN and Dead-Reckoning (DR). The availability of
specific navigation modes depends on the equipment configuration.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Available sensors are selected in the following order of priority, based on nominal accuracy performance:

Navigation modes Applicability

GPS GPS sensor
DME/DME DME sensor
VOR/DME/TACAN* NAV, DME sensors
NAV, DME, TACAN* sensors
Inertial EGI sensor
IRS sensor
Emulated INS via KALMAN FILTER APIRS/AHRS equipment
Dead Reckoning N/A

*When TACAN is proven accurate for Civil navigation.

A. GPS

GPS is normally the highest priority navigation mode of the FMS and will be used when sufficient satellite
coverage exists in the phases of flight for which it is approved.

The GPS mode will be selected for navigation when its RAIM function (or FMS’s computed NAIM when a
backup navigation sensor is also available to the FMS) computes a Horizontal Integrity Limit (HIL) value
which is less than the GPS Position Integrity Alert Limit (GPIAL). The latter is a function of the current phase
of flight and of the Required Navigation Performance (RNP). When the HIL exceeds the alert limit, or if the
GPS loses its RAIM function, then:

• If GPS is the only sensor available for navigation:

GPS will remain selected for navigation, but the GPS Integrity annunciator will illuminate and the “GPS
POS UNCERTAIN” alert message will be displayed.

If at any time GPS becomes unavailable for navigation, the CMA-9000 FMS will revert to the Dead
Reckoning (DR) mode of navigation, the GPS integrity annunciator will illuminate, and the “GPS NAV
LOST” alert message will be displayed.

• If additional sensors are available and approved for the phase of flight (DME/DME or
VOR/DME/TACAN):

The CMA-9000 FMS will continuously compute an ANP based on the difference of two positions (GPS
and other sensor) and the accuracy of the other sensor. If this ANP exceeds the required accuracy, or if
at any time the GPS sensor becomes unavailable for navigation, the CMA-9000 FMS will revert to the
next best IFR-approved navigation mode, the GPS Integrity annunciator will illuminate, and the “GPS
NAV LOST”* alert message will be displayed.

B. DME/DME

DME/DME is used in areas with sufficient DME and TACAN coverage, provided the appropriate navigation
database is configured. In this mode the CMA-9000 FMS automatically tunes the DME transceiver,
acquiring distance information from up to six DME and TACAN (DME capable) ground stations. The DME
distance is corrected for slant range error. Information on the DME facilities in use is displayed on the DME
STATUS page, and individual stations can be inhibited from the navigation solution from the DME
DESELECT page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. VOR/DME/TACAN

VOR/DME navigation is used in areas with sparse DME coverage where there are less than three DME
stations available. This mode combines co-located DME or TACAN distance and VOR or TACAN bearing
to determine position. Tuned facility information is displayed on the VOR/DME/TCN STATUS page.

D. Inertial

This navigation mode is available in military or civil configuration when an EGI or Inertial is configured. The
CMA-9000 FMS inertial navigation mode is based on the following parameters:
• Present Position Latitude and Longitude;
• North-South velocity;
• East-West velocity.

The CMA-9000 FMS is using the raw INS position and velocities provided by the EGI or Inertial equipment.

E. KALMAN FILTER

The KALMAN sensor interface is used when stand-alone GPS navigation and radio navigation are not
possible. Initiation of the KALMAN navigation mode is automatic upon loss of GPS and radio navigation.

The CMA-9000 FMS will use the Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS), and the GPS, to provide
a KALMAN filter navigation mode. In this mode, the primary navigation sensor will be a GPS receiver.

The AHRS is used as a dead-reckoning navigation system by emulating an Inertial Navigation System (INS)
with a KALMAN filter performing closed-loop GPS based correction and alignment of the INS position. The
KALMAN Filter provides the means to combine both navigation modes so that accurate navigation can
continue for some time after the GPS is lost. The amount of time available will depend on the performance
of the AHRS used (typically 2 minutes).

F. DEAD RECKONING (DR)

When the external sensor data inputs become insufficient to maintain the normal navigation modes, the
CMA-9000 FMS reverts to the dead reckoning mode of navigation. The CMA-9000 FMS must then rely on
the last known aircraft position, combined with heading and TAS inputs, and the last valid computed wind,
for its aircraft position calculation. Prolonged DR operation will result in decreased position accuracy. Alerts
are provided when the estimated position accuracy exceeds the requirements for each phase of flight.

The CMA-9000 FMS will automatically recover its normal modes of operation and position accuracy upon
restoration of the external sensor inputs.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MILITARY NAVIGATION MODE

The Military Navigation mode does not comply with TSO C115b and TSO C129a.

When in the military navigation configuration option, the sensor navigation solutions will be assumed to have
integrity unless proven otherwise. The navigation modes selection logic is geared to accuracy performance and
the CMA-9000 FMS will not necessarily force mode transitions based on the integrity. Some integrity monitoring
is nevertheless performed to raise alarms. The pilot is expected to consider navigation mode alarms and force
navigation sensor selections if necessary.

When the military navigation configuration option is selected and the navigation sensor cross-check* option is
activated, the FMS will activate a different GPS group sensor selection logic by comparing the INS/GPS, military
GPS, and civil GPS positions to one another. INS/GPS, military GPS, and civil GPS navigation mode transitions
occur based on position error discrepancies while providing the crew with the appropriate alert messages.

*The sensor cross-check function is an alternate way to compute pseudo integrity when sensors without integrity
are installed.

When in the military navigation option, integrity is only required and defined for navigation solutions with GPS
input during the approach phase. Not having integrity does not prevent a navigation mode solution from being
used; however, it reduces its priority in the modes selection logic. Availability decides if a sensor can be used at
all.

All accuracy-based transitions will use the 95% probability error statistics and will include a hysteresis value of
100m, except for the transition from GPS to INS/GPS sensor. This is also applicable when the navigation sensor
cross-check is configured.

The CMA-9000 FMS has the following navigation modes: Hybrid GPS/INS, GPS (or cGPS), mGPS, DME/DME,
VOR/DME/TACAN, hybrid INS/DVS, Inertial, Doppler, KALMAN and Dead-Reckoning (DR). The availability of
specific navigation modes depends on the equipment configuration.

Available sensors are selected in the following order of priority, based on nominal accuracy performance:

Navigation modes Applicability

Hybrid GPS/INS EGI sensor
GPS (or cGPS *) GPS sensor
mGPS EGI sensor
DME/DME DME sensor
VOR/DME NAV, DME sensors
NAV, DME, TACAN sensors
Hybrid INS/DVS EGI sensor
DVS sensor
Doppler velocity sensor DVS sensor
Inertial EGI sensor
IRS IRS sensor
Emulated INS via KALMAN FILTER APIRS/AHRS equipment
Dead Reckoning N/A

* cGPS is displayed for the civil GPS when dual GPS is configured along with a Litton LN-100GT EGI.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Hybrid GPS/Inertial

The hybrid GPS/INS mode is offered only when the CMA-9000 FMS is configured in military mode and an
EGI is configured. The highest priority will be given to the hybrid GPS/INS sensor if it is configured and no
invalid flag is associated to its combined GPS/INS solution. If a flag is associated with the combined solution
the equipment may still provide pure GPS or INS solutions. The priority associated to these solutions will
follow the order listed above.

B. GPS (or cGPS/mGPS* for dual GPS installations)

GPS is normally the highest priority navigation mode of the FMS and will be used when sufficient satellite
coverage exists in the phases of flight for which it is approved.

The GPS mode will be selected for navigation when its RAIM function (or FMS’s computed NAIM when a
backup navigation sensor is also available to the FMS) computes a Horizontal Integrity Limit (HIL) value
which is less than the GPS Position Integrity Alert Limit (GPIAL). The latter is a function of the current phase
of flight and of the Required Navigation Performance (RNP). When the HIL exceeds the alert limit, or if the
GPS loses its RAIM function, then:

• If GPS (or cGPS) is the only sensor available for navigation:

GPS will remain selected for navigation, but the GPS Integrity annunciator will illuminate and the “GPS
POS UNCERTAIN”* alert message will be displayed.

NOTE: This message is enabled in either of the following two cases:

• When a GPS or an EGI other than the LITTON LN-100 GT is configured and the POF (Phase of
Flight) error limits are selected in the configuration;
• When an EGI LITTON LN-100 GT is configured and the GPS integrity result bits sent by the
EGI are set.

If at any time GPS becomes unavailable for navigation, the CMA-9000 FMS will revert to the Dead
Reckoning (DR) mode of navigation, the GPS integrity annunciator will illuminate, and the “GPS NAV
LOST” alert message will be displayed.

• If additional sensors are available and approved for the phase of flight (DME/DME or
VOR/DME/TACAN):

The CMA-9000 FMS will continuously compute an ANP based on the difference of two positions (GPS
and other sensor) and the accuracy of the other sensor. If this ANP exceeds the required accuracy, or if
at any time the GPS sensor becomes unavailable for navigation, the CMA-9000 FMS will revert to the
next best IFR-approved navigation mode, the GPS Integrity annunciator will illuminate, and the “GPS
NAV LOST”* alert message will be displayed.

For dual GPS installations comprising an embedded GPS/INS (EGI) consisting of the following equipment:

• INS/GPS (equipment: LN-100GT)

• military GPS sensor (as received from LN-100GT)
• civil GPS

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

When sensor cross-checking is configured, the FMS uses a modified algorithm to determine the mode
transitions between the INS/GPS, military GPS, and civil GPS sensors. Ultimately, the FMS will transition to
the best available navigation mode based on the information it has on each of its interfacing sensors.

* When dual GPSs are configured (civil and military from EGI), the messages which are triggered may vary
slightly (e.g. cGPS POS UNCERTAIN / mGPS POS UNCERTAIN or cGPS NAV LOST / mGPS NAV LOST) –
the detailed full list of messages is provided in Appendix E.

C. DME/DME

DME/DME is used in areas with sufficient DME and TACAN coverage, provided the appropriate navigation
database is configured. In this mode the CMA-9000 FMS automatically tunes the DME transceiver,
acquiring distance information from up to six DME and TACAN (DME capable) ground stations. The DME
distance is corrected for slant range error. Information on the DME facilities in use is displayed on the DME
STATUS page, and individual stations can be inhibited from the navigation solution from the DME
DESELECT page.

D. VOR/DME/TACAN

VOR/DME navigation is used in areas with sparse DME coverage where there are less than three DME
stations available. This mode combines co-located DME or TACAN distance and VOR or TACAN bearing
to determine position. Tuned facility information is displayed on the VOR/DME/TCN STATUS page.

E. Hybrid INS/DVS

The CMA-9000 FMS uses the hybrid INS/DVS position and velocities provided by the EGI sensor for
navigation.
It sets INS/DVS Navigation solution accuracy to the EGI sensor supplied Quality Factor value for the
INS/DVS solution.

F. Inertial

This navigation mode is made available in military or civil configuration when an EGI or Inertial is configured.
The CMA-9000 FMS inertial navigation mode is based on the following parameters:
• Present Position Latitude and Longitude;
• North-South velocity;
• East-West velocity.

The CMA-9000 FMS is using the raw INS position and velocities provided by the EGI or Inertial sensor.

G. DVS

The CMA-9000 FMS uses the Doppler Velocity Sensor position and velocities complemented with the pitch,
roll and selected heading for navigation.
It sets DVS Navigation solution accuracy to the DVS Quality Factor value for the DVS solution.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

H. KALMAN FILTER

The KALMAN sensor interface is used when stand-alone GPS navigation and radio navigation are not
possible. Initiation of the KALMAN navigation mode is automatic upon loss of GPS and radio navigation.

The CMA-9000 FMS will use the Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS), and the GPS, to provide
a KALMAN filter navigation mode. In this mode, the primary navigation sensor will be a GPS receiver.

The AHRS is used as a dead-reckoning navigation system by emulating an Inertial Navigation System (INS)
with a KALMAN filter performing closed-loop GPS based correction and alignment of the INS position. The
KALMAN Filter provides the means to combine both navigation modes so that accurate navigation can
continue for some time after the GPS is lost. The amount of time available will depend on the performance
of the AHRS used (typically 2 minutes).

I. DEAD RECKONING (DR)

When the external sensor data inputs become insufficient to maintain the normal navigation modes, the
CMA-9000 FMS reverts to the dead reckoning mode of navigation. The CMA-9000 FMS must then rely on
the last known aircraft position, combined with heading and TAS inputs, and the last valid computed wind,
for its aircraft position calculation. Prolonged DR operation will result in decreased position accuracy. Alerts
are provided when the estimated position accuracy exceeds the requirements for each phase of flight.

The CMA-9000 FMS will automatically recover its normal modes of operation and position accuracy upon
restoration of the external sensor inputs.

WAYPOINT NAVIGATION

The CMA-9000 FMS navigates from waypoint to waypoint sequentially, automatically changing the legs, and
displays all required navigation parameters, computed according to the relationships and direction sense
illustrated in Figure 1-1.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NORTH

WIND DIRECTION
(WD)

BEARING TO
WINDSPEED WAYPOINT (BRG)
(WS) D
IN
A DW
HE ND
DESIRED WI E D
E
TRACK SP S)
DRIFT (W
(DTK) ANGLE S
OS
(DA) CR IND
RIGHT W
TRACK ANGLE ERROR
GROUND (TKE) LEFT
TRACK ANGLE
(TK) ) )
S GS
(TA E D(
ED PE
SP
E DS
R O UN
HEADING AI GR
(HDG) RUE
T

"TO"
WAYPOINT
CROSS-TRACK E .
E LIN POINTS
DISTANCE URS Y
(XTK) LEFT IRE D CO EEN WA
DES E BETW
IRCL
AT C
GRE

0012033

Figure 1-1 Navigation Relationships

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The CMA-9000 FMS steering function anticipates the next leg prior to reaching the active (TO) waypoint so that
the aircraft turns are smooth without any overshoot. Waypoints may be defined as either fly-by (with turn
anticipation) or fly-over (no turn anticipation). For fly-over transition the aircraft is considered to have passed a
given point when it has crossed the perpendicular to the desired track at that point. Thus, for leg sequencing to
occur, the aircraft needs only to pass abeam the waypoint.
For fly-by leg transition, leg switching, in most cases, occurs when the aircraft passes the bisector of the active
leg and the next leg.

After the last defined waypoint is overflown, or when a route discontinuity is active, the CMA-9000 FMS will
provide guidance along the extension of the last leg (when configured FIXED wing) or towards the last overflown
waypoint (when configured ROTOR), but will prevent autopilot-coupled navigation by disengaging the LNAV
mode of the autopilot/flight director (AP/FD) system.

Angular inputs to the CMA-9000 FMS may be referenced to either magnetic or true north. The input mode is
installation dependent as defined in the Airplane/Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement. The reference used for
the CMA-9000 FMS angular displays and outputs to the flight instruments, can also be selected by the operator.

TERMINAL AREA OPERATIONS AND GPS INSTRUMENT APPROACHES

Standard Instrument Departures (SID), Airways, Standard Terminal Arrival Routes (STAR), STAR transitions,
GPS and GPS overlay instrument approaches, and approach transitions, can be selected from for the
departure/arrival airports. These procedure may be modified on the LEGS pages.

The implementation of the GPS instrument approach procedures is based, not only on TSO-C129a, but also on
the evolving Required Navigation Performance (RNP) airspace concept. The transition from en-route through
terminal to non-precision approach is effectively a seamless series of waypoints/legs with progressive increases
in HSI lateral deviation display sensitivity (to reduce flight technical error), and reductions in RNP value, and
appropriately-timed alert or advisory messages.

NAVIGATION DATABASE

The navigation database includes most of the information that the operator would normally determine by
referring to the navigation charts. The database may be tailored to specific customer needs and contains such
data as en-route and terminal VHF, NDB navigation facilities, airports, waypoints and named intersections. All
ARINC 424 procedural legs are implemented. The leg types and the corresponding displays are illustrated in
Appendix B.

PHASES OF FLIGHT

The phases of flight are defined as follows:

Approach: When below 15,000 feet AGL and within 2 nm of the FAF, with all GPS instrument approach
conditions satisfied.

Terminal: For arrivals, when below 15,000 feet AGL and within 30 nm radial distance of the arrival airport,
but not in approach phase of flight. For departures, when below 16,000 feet AGL and less than
33 nm radial distance from the departure airport.

En-route: When in neither approach nor terminal phases of flight.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A - Above (altitude)
AA - Air-To-Air
AAIM - Aircraft Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
AC - Aircraft
ACCUR - Accuracy
ACID - Aircraft Identifier
ACT - Active
ACMS - Aircraft Conditioning Monitoring System
ACQ - Acquisition mode
ADC - Air Data Computer
ADF - Automatic Direction Finder
ADIRS - Air Data Inertial Reference System
ADS - Automatic Dependent Surveillance
ADx - Primary (AD1) or Secondary (AD2) ADF radio
AF - Initial Approach Fix
AFCS - Automatic Flight Control System
AFMS - Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
AG - Air-To-Ground
AGC - Automatic Gain Control
AGL - Above Ground Level
AHCAS - Advanced Helicopter Cockpit and Avionics System
AHRS - Attitude Heading Reference System
ALT - Altitude
AMLCD - Active Matrix Liquid Crystal Display
AMU - Audio Management Unit
ANP - Actual Navigation Performance
ANT - Antenna
AP/FD - Autopilot/Flight Director
APIRS - Aircraft Piloting Inertial Reference System
APPR - Approach
ARC - Arc to Fix/Radius to Fix
ARINC - Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ARPT - Airport
ARR - Arrival
ATA - Actual Time of Arrival
ATC - Air Traffic Control
ATK - Along Track Distance
ATOS - Airborne Tactical Observation and Surveillance System
ATT - Attitude

BARO - Barometric
BRT - Brightness
BRG - Bearing
BW - Back Course Marker

Cx - COM radio (primary : C1, secondary : C2)

CAP - Capable
CARP - Calculated Air Release Point
CDI - Course Deviation Indicator
CDU - Control Display Unit

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CF - Final Approach Course to fix

CFG - Configuration
CHK - Checker
CLR - Clear
CMx - Primary (CM1) or Secondary (CM2) COM radio
CMA - Canadian Marconi (Avionics)
CMD - Command
CMU - Communications Management Unit
COM - Communication
COMMS - Communication Radios
CON - Connection
CONC - Concentrator
COORD - Coordinates
CPS - Compass
CRP - Computed Air Release Point
CRS - Course (desired track) of route leg or to waypoint
CRZ - Cruise
CTR - Center

DA - Drift Angle
DEL - Delete
DEP - Departure
DES - Destination
DESEL - Deselected
DEST - Destination
DF - Direct To Fix
DGNSS - Differential Global Navigation Satellite System
DIFF - Differential
DISCON - Route Discontinuity
DIS - Distance
DIST - Distance
DLU - Data Loader Unit
DMAP - Digital Map
DME - Distance Measurement Equipment
DOD - Department Of Defense
DOP - Dilution of Precision
DR - Dead Reckoning
DTG - Distance To Go
DTK - Desired Track
DTO - Direct To
DTRA - Transition Distance
DTW - Distance To Waypoint
DVS - Doppler Velocity Sensor

E - East
E/W - East/West
EDT - Edit
EFA - Estimated Fuel at Arrival
EFIS - Electronic Flight Instrumentation System
EGI - External Embedded GPS/INS
EHE - Estimated Horizontal Error
EHSI - Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator
ENRT - En-Route
EQUIP - Equipment
ESC - Escape Point

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

EST - Estimated
ESS - External Sub-System
ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE - Estimated Time Enroute
EW - Electronic Warfare
EXEC - Execute

FAF - Final Approach Fix

FDE - Failure Detection and Exclusion
FF - Final Approach Fix
FFK - Front panel Function Key
FL - Flight Level
FLT - Flight
FMx - Flight Management (FM1, FM2)
FMS - Flight Management System
FMU - Flight Management Unit
F/O - First Officer
FOM - Figure of Merit
FPU - Floating Point Unit
FR - From
FREQ - Frequency
FSD - Full Scale Deflection
FT - Feet
FTE - Flight Technical Error

GD - Guard
GDOP - Geometric Dilution of Precision
GLNS - GLONASS
GLONASS - Global Navigation Satellite System (Russian)
GMT - Greenwich Mean Time
GNS - Global Navigation System
GNSSU - Global Navigation System Sensor Unit
GPIAL - GPS Position Integrity Alert Limit
GPP - Gessellschaft Fur Prozessrechner Programmierung mbH ( German company that makes
HCS)
GPS - Global Positioning System
GS - Ground Speed
GSM - Global Navigation System Sensor Module
GWT - Gross Weight

/H - Holding Pattern
HARP - High Altitude Release Point
HAT - Height Above Terrain
HCS - Helicopter Communication System
HDG - Heading
HDOP - Horizontal Dilution of Precision
HF - High Frequency
HFOM - Horizontal Figure Of Merit
HIL - Horizontal Integrity Limit
HOR - Horizontal
HR - Hour
HIS - Horizontal Situation Indicator
HT - Height
HW - Hardware
HYB - Hybrid

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

IAF - Initial Approach Fix

IAS - Indicated Airspeed
IC - Intercom
ICAO - International Civil Aviation Organisation
ID - Identifier
IDENT - Identifier
IDT - Identifier
IF - Intermediate Fix
IFDS - Integrated Flight Display System
IFR - Instrument Flight Rules
in Hg - Inches of Mercury
ILS - Instrument Landing System
IM - Innner Marker
INBD - Inbound
INACT - Inactive
INIT - Initialize
INT - Integrity
INTC - Intercept Course
INS - Inertial Navigation System
IP - Identification Point
IRS - Inertial Reference System
ITU - Telecommunication Union

JOY - Joystick

KG - Kilogram
KT - Knot(s)

L - Left
LAT - Latitude or Lateral
LB - Pound
LDA - Landing distance available
LDR - Light Detector
LIB - Library
LNAV - Lateral Navigation mode of the autopilot/flight director system
LOC - Localizer
LOCB - Localizer Backcourse approach
LONG - Longitude
LRU - Line Replaceable Unit
LSK - Line Select Key
LVL - Level
LW - Light Weight

M - Meter
MA - Missed Approach Point when not RW
MAG - Magnetic
MAGVAR - Magnetic Variation
MAHP - Missed Approach Holding Point
MAINT - Maintenance
MAP - Missed Approach Point
MB - Millibars (hectopascal)
MC - Mission Computer
MCDU - Multipurpose Control and Display Unit
MCP - Mode Control panel

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-15
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MDA - Minimum Descent Altitude

MDA-DA - Minimum Descent Altitude-Decision Altitude
MEW - Mean Effective Wind
MGRS - Military Grid Reference System
MHz - Mega Hertz
MID - Maritime Identification Digits
MIN - Minute
MLS - Microwave Landing System
MM - Middle Marker
MOD - Modified
MRK - Mark
MSG - Message
MSLA - Mean Sea Level Altitude
MTBF - Mean Time Between Failures

N - North
Nx - NAV radio (primary : N1, secondary : N2)
NAV - Navigation or Navaid
NDB - Non-directional Beacon
NDBD - NDB approach with DME facility (GPS or NDB/(DME))
NM - Nautical Mile
NOTAMS - Notices To Airmen
NP - Navigation Performance
NPA - Non-Precision Approach
NVx - Primary (NV1) or secondary (NV2) NAV radio
NVM - Non-Volatile Memory
VNAV - Vertical Navigation
NVIS - Night Vision Imaging System

/O - Overfly Waypoint
OAT - Outside Air Temperature
OEI - One Engine Inoperative
OFST - Offset
OGE - Out of Ground Effect
OM - Outer Marker
OP - Operations (independent/synchronized)
ORIG - Origin

PBD - Place/Bearing/Distance
PBPB - Place/Bearing-Place/Bearing
PEE - Position Estimation Error
PERF - Performance
PG - Page
PIT - Programmable Interrupt Timer
PLS - Personnal Locator System
POF - Phase of Flight
POS - Position
PPOS - Present Aircraft Position
PREDEF - Predefined
PREV - Previous
PRN - Pseudo Range Number
PROG - Progress
P-T - Procedure Turn
PWR - Power

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

QFE - A method of setting the altimeter to compensate for changes in barometric pressure and
runway elevation. Pilot receives information from airfield and adjusts his altimeter
accordingly and it will read zero altitude at touchdown on the runway.
QNH - The more common method of setting the altimeter to compensate for changes in barometric
pressure. Pilot receives information from airfield, adjusts his altimeter accordingly and the
altimeter will read airfield elevation at touchdown.

/R - Radial-To
R - Right
RAD - Radial
RADALT - Radar Altitude
RADAR - Radio Detecting And Ranging
RAIM - Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitor
RALT - Radio Altimeter
RCU - Remote Control Unit
RCV - Receive only
REC - Flight Recorder
REF - Reference
REL - Relative
RES - Reserve
RESEL - Reselect
RF - Radio Frequency
RFMS - Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement
RIB - Radio Interface Board
RMS - Radio Management System
RNAV - Required Navigation
RNG - Range
RNP - Required Navigation Performance
RTA - Required Time of Arrival
RTC - Real Time Clock
RTE - Route
RW - Runway Threshold

/S - Search Pattern
S/W - Software
S - South
SAR - Search and Rescue
SARSAT - Search And Rescue Satellite Aided Tracking
SAT - Satellite
SATCOM - Satelite Communication System
SD - Slowdown Point
SDF - Simplified Directional Facility
SEL - Selected
SID - Standard Instrument Departure
SIMUL - Simulation
SMS - Short Message Service
SP - Space
SPD - Speed
SQK - Squawk
SSM - Sign Status Matrix
SSR - Secondary Surveillance Radar
STAR - Standard Terminal Arrival Routes
STAT - Status
STBY - Standby

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-17
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STC - Supplemental Type Certificate

STS - Status
SURF - Surface
SYNC - Synchronization

/T - Tactical Direct-To
T - Angle referenced to True North
TACAN - Tactical Air Navigation
TACT - Tactical
TAS - True Air Speed
TCN - TACAN
TD - Touchdown Fix when not RW
TDN - TransDowN
TE - Trailing Edge
TEL - Telephone
TEMP - Temperature
TERM - Terminal
TF - Track To Fix
TGL - Temporary Guidance Leaflet
TK - Track (Actual)
TKE - Track Angle Error
TOGA - Take-Off/Go-Around
TP - Turn Point
TPDR - Transponder
TR - Transmit/Receive
TRANS - Transition
TRK - Track
TRG - Transmit on Guard
TSE - Total System Error
TSO - Technical Standard Order
TTFF - Time To First Fix
TTG - Time To Go
TTS - Time To Station
TX1 - V/UHF1 Transmitting
TX2 - V/UHF2 Transmitting

UF - UHF radio
UHF - Upper High Frequency
UTC - Universal Time Coordinates
UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator

V - Velocity (VX, VY, VZ)

VAL - Value
VDOP - Vertical Dilution of Precision
VECT - Vector
VERT - Vertical
VFOM - Vertical Figure Of Merit
VFR - Visual Flight Rules
VHF - Very High (30-300 MHz) Frequency
VNAV - Vertical Navigation
VUHF - Very Upper High Frequency
VIR - VOR ILS Receiver
VIS - Visible
VOR - VHF Omni-directional Radio Range
VORD - VOR/DME approach (GPS or VOR/DME)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-18
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

W - West
WD - Wind Direction
WPT - Waypoint
WS - Windspeed
WT - Weight
WGS - World Geodetic System
WGT - Weight
WXR - Weather Radar

XFILL - Cross FMS Fill

XPDR - Transponder
XMT - Transmit
XTE - Extended Trailing Edge Point
XTK - Cross Track

Z - Zulu (UTC) time

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-19
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 1-20
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 2 - CMA-9000 FMS CONTROL AND DISPLAY

CONTENTS

Subject Page

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

CMA-9000 FMS and MCDU DISPLAY PANEL ................................................................................................. 2-1
GENERAL RULES OF DISPLAY OPERATION .............................................................................................. 2-16
WAYPOINT NAMES AND OTHER CONVENTIONS ....................................................................................... 2-19

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 2

CMA-9000 FMS CONTROL AND DISPLAY

GENERAL

The CMA-9000 FMS is provided with an embedded Color Display Unit (CDU) and a Multipurpose Control
Display Unit (MCDU). The MCDU can be interfaced with up to seven other ARINC-739 capable LRUs (ACARS,
SATCOM, ACMS,…). The display section of the CMA-9000 FMS is a color Active Matrix Liquid Crystal Display
(AMLCD) providing fourteen lines of twenty-four characters.

The CMA-9000 FMS and the MCDU have a full alphanumeric keyboard, with special function keys. These
special function keys are in fact Front Panel Function Keys (FFKs) (e.g. INIT/REF, RTE, DEP/ARR, etc.). There
are six line select keys (LSK) on each side of the display area. The functions of the LSKs are specific to each
screen page.

CMA-9000 FMS and MCDU DISPLAY PANEL

The front panel arrangement of the CMA-9000 FMS is illustrated in Figure 2-1. The data is presented on a 3 X
4 inch Active Matrix Liquid Crystal Display (AMLCD). The display format is partitioned into specifically defined
areas.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FAIL MSG POS NPA TX1 TX2 9

CMC ELECTRONICS

10 10

18
16

32 11
INIT DEP
REF
RTE ARR
LEGS PROG EXEC

31 1 2 3 RADIO TPDR MARK HOLD MSG BRT 12

30 4 5 6 A B C D E F G 13
7 8 9 H I J K L M N 14
29
. 0 +/ - O P Q R S T U 17
28 CLR
/ SP V W X Y Z
27

26 25 24 23 22 21 20 33 19 15 0611006

Figure 2-1 CMA-9000 FMS Front Panel (Hardware variation 030/430)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FAIL MSG POS NPA GSM SMS

CMC ELECTRONICS

INIT DEP
REF
RTE ARR
LEGS PROG EXEC

SQK
1 2 3 RADIO ANS IDT
HOLD FIX BRT

4 5 6 A B C D E F G
7 8 9 H I J K L M N
. 0 +/ - O P Q R S T U
/ SP V W X Y Z CLR

0610006

Figure 2-2 CMA-9000 FMS Front Panel (Hardware variation 001/101/301/501)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FAIL MSG POS NPA GSM SMS

CMC ELECTRONICS

INIT DEP
REF
RTE ARR
LEGS PROG EXEC

1 2 3 RADIO FUEL MARK HOLD FIX BRT

4 5 6 A B C D E F G
7 8 9 H I J K L M N
. 0 +/ - O P Q R S T U
/ SP V W X Y Z CLR

0610007

Figure 2-3 CMA-9000 FMS Front Panel (Hardware variation 002/003/005/102/103/302/303/502/503)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FAIL MSG RNP IND ATC

CMC ELECTRONICS

INIT DEP
REF
RTE ARR
LEGS PROG EXEC

1 2 3 RADIO FMC VNAV HOLD FIX BRT

4 5 6 A B C D E F G
7 8 9 H I J K L M N
. 0 +/ - O P Q R S T U
/ SP V W X Y Z CLR

0611003

Figure 2-4 CMA-9000 FMS Front Panel (Hardware variation 045/445)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FAIL MSG RNP IND ATC

CMC ELECTRONICS

INIT DEP
REF
RTE ARR
LEGS PROG EXEC

1 2 3 RADIO TACT VNAV HOLD ATC BRT

4 5 6 A B C D E F G
7 8 9 H I J K L M N
. 0 +/ - O P Q R S T U
/ SP V W X Y Z CLR

0610005

Figure 2-5 CMA-9000 FMS Front Panel (Hardware variation 050)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Figure 2-6 CMA-9000 FMS Front Panel (Hardware variation 106/506)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Figure 2-7 CMA-9000 FMS Front Panel (Hardware variation 290)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Figure 2-8 CMA-9000 FMS Front Panel (Hardware variation 060/460)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Figure 2-9 CMA-9000 FMS Front Panel (Hardware variation 070/470)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The items mentioned in the first column are used for referencing to annunciators and keys of Figure 2-1.

Display Screen:

1. Provides 14 lines of 24 characters.

The color and font size conventions used in the display are configurable. Each item can be displayed with a
predefined color and a predefined font size. Under the approved STANDARD configuration, the color
convention is as follows:

AMBER: The AMBER color is used only in case of critical alert conditions requesting immediate
crew attention or action (e.g. alert scratchpad messages). The MESSAGE RECALL
page(s), provides the alert conditions. The amber color is not configurable for these
conditions.

CYAN: Page titles, prompts and inactive route and GLONASS related information. In reverse
video for certain status indications.

GREEN: Fixed data fields, field titles and waypoint names. In reverse video for temporary
states prompting crew attention. In reverse video for navigation and guidance actions
(e.g. missed approach initiation, manual waypoint sequence, hold exit initiation).

MAGENTA: Depending on configuration, used in normal video, or reverse video, to identify the
active TO waypoint on ACT RTE LEGS 1/X, and PROGRESS pages.

RED: Reserved for maintenance purposes only. Major change (e.g. confirmation of system
re-configuration).

WHITE: Computed (dynamic) data, data units, scratchpad data, data entry error, and
advisory/maintenance messages. Depending on configuration in reverse video for
active TO waypoint on ACT PROGRESS, and ACT RTE LEGS 1/X pages.

Three different font sizes are used, as follows:

LARGE: Manual entries, and waypoint information from the navigation database.
MEDIUM: Computed or system generated data.
SMALL: Data field units.

In brief, the color convention for the STANDARD configuration is as follows:

Items Font Color

Page Title Large Cyan
Active waypoint Large Reverse video magenta
Page prompt Large Cyan
Legs page waypoint Large Green
Fix caption Medium Green
Units Small White
Tuning in progress Medium Reverse video white
Active waypoint being sequenced (fly-by transition) Large Reverse video white
Entered data Large White
Computed data Medium White
Temporary states pilot attention requested Large Reverse video green

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ANNUNCIATORS:

The following are the possible annunciators which are avaialble for the different CMA-9000 H/W panel variations.

NOTE: That the physical location of these annunciators may vary depending on the specific panel (see front panel
figures provided earlier in this section for specific panel variation annunciator locations).

FAIL Annunciator - illuminates at maximum brightness with the display blank upon detection of a major CMA-
9000 FMS failure (e.g. CMA-9000 FMS system is halted).

MSG Annunciator - illuminates when a new alert message appears in the scratchpad. The annunciator stays
lit as long as the condition causing the alert message remains, or until the message is acknowledged by
pressing the CLR key, or until the message is viewed on the MESSAGE RECALL page. New alert messages
also cause the remote MSG annunciator to illuminate on the instrument panel in the pilot's field of view
(advisory messages do not). Any acknowledged alert message is available for recall on the MESSAGE
RECALL page as long as the condition causing it remains.

POS Annunciator - illuminates when the CMA-9000 FMS is in dead reckoning navigation mode.

RNP Annunciator - illuminates when the FMS ANP exceeds the RNP for the phase of flight.

OFST Annunciator - illuminates during offset (parallel track) navigation or CARP temporary position updates.

NPA Annunciator - illuminates when Non-Precision Approach has been initiated.

IND Annunciator - illuminates when the FMS operates on INDEPENDENT mode.

TX1 Annunciator - illuminates when the configured V/UHF unit #1 emits RF power (radio is transmitting).

TX2 Annunciator - Illuminates when the configured V/UHF unit #2 emits RF power (radio is transmitting).

GSM Annunciator - illuminates for incoming call on the GSM network.

ATC Annunciator - illuminates when a connection is established with an Air Traffic Control Center.

SMS Annunciator - illuminates when the Short Message Service text message has been received.

V/UHF Annunciator - illuminates when the VUHF radio reports to the FMS that it is transmitting.

HF Annunciator - illuminates when the HF radio reports to the FMS that it is transmitting.

SENSOR - Item 9:

9. LDR Sensor - detects ambient light conditions in order to perform auto-brightness control of display screen
and annunciators.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

KEYS AND ANNUNCIATORS- Items 10-33:

10. Line Select Keys (LSK) - There are twelve LSKs on the CMA-9000 FMS panel, six on either side of the
display. LSKs are identified by their location from top to bottom of the screen and as left or right, e.g. LSK 1L,
LSK 6R. Entry of data from the scratchpad into the selected field is accomplished by pressing the adjacent
LSK which moves the data from the scratchpad to the selected field. Data entries are permitted only on lines
adjacent to the LSKs. Data can also be duplicated from a data field into the scratchpad by pressing the LSK
adjacent to the desired data line. Inward pointing arrow symbols indicate that an option may be selected in
that field. Outward pointing arrow symbols indicate that a new page will be displayed when the adjacent LSK
is pressed, or that an action will be initiated.

11. EXEC Annunciator - illuminates when a modification to the active route is in process but has not been
executed. When the EXEC annunciator is lit, the impact of the data displayed on the LEGS page may be
reviewed on other CMA-9000 FMS pages, except the PROGRESS pages, and may be made active for
guidance of the aircraft by pressing the EXEC key.

12. EXEC Key - is used to accept modifications to the active route (flight plan) performed on the LEGS, RTE
(route), Departures/Arrivals, SAR, or HOLD pages or VNAV pages, or Tactical Approach pages.
Modifications to the active flight plan will turn on the EXEC annunciator and display in reverse video a MOD
status in the page title line and also an ERASE prompt. When data entries have been made active (by
pressing the EXEC key), the title MOD status will revert to ACT (active). Until the MOD status is made active,
the CMA-9000 FMS will continue to use the previous active data for navigation and guidance even though it is
not displayed. Any modification can be erased (cancelled) prior to EXECution by pressing the ERASE LSK.

13. BRT Key - controls the brightness of the screen and annunciators. After an elapsed time of 5 seconds, the
first press of this key will always increase brightness, each depression of the BRT key alternately brightens or
dims the display.

NOTE1: When night and NVG mode selected and short power interruption occurs, the brightness of the
display may require minor re-adjustments.

NOTE2: When external dimming control is selected in the configuration, the brightness of the screen and
annunciators can also be controlled by an external system providing a 0-5 VDC to the FMS.

14. MSG Key (VAR 030, 070, 470) - accesses the MESSAGE RECALL page for display of System Alert
messages.

FIX key (VAR 040, 060, 460) - provides access to FIX page for all fix and abeam waypoint functions.

ATC (VAR 050) - provides access to CPDLC/ATC related pages (if functionality configured).

TACT (VAR 106/506) - provides access to tactical related functions.

MARK (VAR 290) - when pressed creates a Mark On Top waypoint with the CMA-9000 FMS present
position. It provides access to the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page where this waypoint is stored.

15. CLR Key - clears one character to the left during scratchpad data entry. When pressed and held for more
than 1 second, it clears the entire scratchpad. The CLR key also clears alert and advisory messages from
the scratchpad. The DELETE message can be cleared by a single press of the CLR key. Pressing the CLR
key with the scratchpad empty will display DELETE in the scratchpad. The delete process is completed by
pressing the LSK next to the data to be removed.

16. PROG Key - accesses the PROGRESS pages for display of current flight and navigation status information.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

17. HOLD Key (all variations except 106/290/506) - if no holding pattern exists in the flight plan, brings LEGS
page in view with “/H” in the scratchpad for line selection of the desired holding fix waypoint. If a holding
pattern already exists in the flight plan, accesses the HOLD page for the definition of holding pattern
parameters at the designated waypoint or present position.

FIX key (VAR 290) - provides access to FIX page for all fix and abeam waypoint functions.

VNAV (VAR 106/506) - provides access to the vertical navigation functions.

18. LEGS Key - displays LEGS pages containing detailed data concerning each leg of the flight plan.

19. DEP ARR Key - provides access to the DEP/ARR page for the selection of departure and arrival procedures
and runways.

20. TPDR Key (VAR 030/430) - provides access to the ATC radio control page. This page allows the pilot to
control the operation of the ATC Transponder.

ANS Key (VAR 001/101/301/501) - SMS annunciator active: displays the newest message of the short
message service on its dedicated page. GSM annunciator active: accepts the phone call when pressed the
first time, hangs up when pressed a second time. Priority is given to GSM.

FUEL Key (VAR 002, 003, 005, 102, 103, 106, 302, 303, 502, 503, 506) - Provides a quick access function
to Fuel estimation and status pages.

TACT (VAR 050) - provides access to tactical related functions.

FMC COMM (VAR 045, 060, 445, 460) - provides access to FMS datalink related pages.

MSG Key (VAR 290) - accesses the MESSAGE RECALL page for display of System Alert messages.

ATC (VAR 070/470) - provides access to CPDLC/ATC related pages (if functionality configured).

21. RTE Key - provides access to the ROUTE page for the definition of routes.

22. RADIO Key - provides access to RADIO tuning functions.

ATC (VAR 060/460) - provides access to CPDLC/ATC related pages (if functionality configured).

23. INIT REF Key - provides access to pages and various reference data pages.

24. SP Key - provides a "space" character for separation of words.

NOTE1 If the NEXT functionality is configured, the INIT/REF, RTE, DEP/ARR, LEGS, PROG, FREQ, FUEL
and HOLD keys allow the access to the following page.

NOTE2 If the key is pressed for more than 1 second, the MESSAGE RECALL page will be displayed.

25. Plus-Minus [+/-] Key - pressing the [+/-] will first display the "-" (minus) symbol. Pressing it a second time will
display the "+" (plus) symbol.

26. Slash (/) Key - separates data fields in scratchpad data entry.

27. Decimal (.) Key - provides decimal point for numeric data entries.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

28. Alpha-Numeric Keyboard - allows entry of alpha-numeric data.

29. NEXT Key - when multiple-page displays are indicated in the page title line, pressing the NEXT key advances
the display to the next higher page number or to page 1 if presently on the last page.

30. PREV Key - when multiple-page displays are indicated in the page title line, pressing the PREV key backs up
the display to the previous page or to the last page if presently on page 1.

31. MENU Key - Provides access to the MCDU MENU 1/2 page that allows access to other subsystems
connected to the MCDU (e.g. CMU, IFDMU, SATCOM, onside and cross-side FMS).

32. MENU Annunciator - Illuminates when a sub-system, other than the one the MCDU is currently connected to,
is requesting the crew attention.

For example, if any of the installed subsystems that uses the ARINC 739 MCDU as control head (e.g. CMU,
IFDMU, SATCOM) is requesting crew attention while the MCDU is connected to the FMS, the MENU light will
be turned on. Converselly, if the MCDU is connected to any of the above mentioned sub-systems and the
FMS is requesting attention, the MENU annunciator will also be turned on.

The FMS requests attention (e.g. MENU light on) when the MCDU is logged on a subsystem different from
the FMS and the FMS generated a new alert or maintenance message.

33. SQK_IDT key (VAR 001/101/301/501) - Provides a quick access function to Squawk ident of the active
ATC transponder.

MARK Key (all variations except 290) - when pressed creates a Mark On Top waypoint with the CMA-9000
FMS present position. It provides access to the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page where this waypoint is stored (if CFG
KEY 2 is configured to MARK).

VNAV (VAR 040, 050, 060, 070, 460, 470) - provides access to the vertical navigation functions.

HOLD Key (VAR 290) - if no holding pattern exists in the flight plan, brings LEGS page in view with “/H” in the
scratchpad for line selection of the desired holding fix waypoint. If a holding pattern already exists in the flight
plan, accesses the HOLD page for the definition of holding pattern parameters at the designated waypoint or
present position.

NOTE: Items 16 to 19 and 20 to 23 may be configured to function as a NEXT key allowing the crew to scroll
through the similar pages. For example, if this configuration option is selected, pressing PROG twice will
provide access to the second PROGRESS page (e.g. PROGRESS 2/X page).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-15
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

GENERAL RULES OF DISPLAY OPERATION

The operating procedures detailed in the following sections are governed by a general set of rules for CMA-
9000 FMS operation. Familiarity with these rules will greatly simplify the process of learning system operation.

A typical screen page is illustrated below as an aid in describing the various page layouts, page prompts, and
data entry rules.
PAGE
NUMBER
AND
ACT,MOD STATUS PAGE TITLE
NUMBER OF
FIELD [CYAN] [CYAN]
PAGES
[LARGE] [LARGE]
[CYAN]
[LARGE]

MOD RTE1 LEGS 1/2

BOX DATA 299o 2.25N M COMPUTED
FIELD CAFTA A AND RECEIVED
[GREEN] THEN DATA
[LARGE] [WHITE]
†††††
[MEDIUM]
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
YZP01
299o 10.6N M DATA FIELD
DASH UNIT
DATA
YZP02
[WHITE]
FIELD [SMALL]
[GREEN] -----
[LARGE]
<ERASE LEGS ETA> PAGE
PROMPT
[BLUE
ERASE [LARGE]
PROMPT SCRATCHPAD
[GREEN] [WHITE]
[LARGE] MESSAGES
[LARGE] DISPLAYED IN THE
SCRATCHPAD
[AMBER]
[LARGE]

Figure 2-10 Basic Display Format

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Page Title - the name of the page is shown on the top line of the display.

Page Number - when a display consists of several pages (as indicated in the upper right of the page), the
additional pages may be displayed by pressing the NEXT or PREV keys. When the NEXT key configuration
option is selected, the Front-panel Function Keys (FFKs) (elements 14 to 23 on Figure 2-1) can be used as a
NEXT key as well.

Page Prompt - the LSK adjacent to a page prompt will display the associated screen page.

Scratchpad - the scratchpad is located on the bottom (14th) line of the display. Keyboard entries are displayed
in the scratchpad and then moved to the data field by pressing the appropriate Line Select Key (LSK). Error
checking for invalid format or data type, or out of range values, is performed when the LSK is pressed. Copying
data from a data field into the scratchpad is accomplished by pressing the appropriate LSK when the scratchpad
is empty. Data in the scratchpad remains there when a new page is selected, and can thus be carried over for
entry into other pages.

Messages - the System Alert messages can either be displayed in the scratchpad and placed on the “Message
Recall” list, or placed only on the “Message Recall” list depending on the system configuration. REFER TO
APPENDIX E OF THIS MANUAL FOR THE LIST OF MESSAGES.

ALERT MESSAGES

A. Sytem Alert

• Require immediate pilot action.

• Displayed in amber in the MESSAGE RECALL page.
• Displayed in amber in the scratchpad until acknowledged.
• Alert Messages are the highest priority scratchpad messages (cannot be typed over or overwritten by
any other message type or data entry), They must must be acknowledged by pressing the CLR key
before data entry can take place.

B. Maintenance Alert
• Indicates a particular CMA-9000 FMS failure condition.
• Displayed in amber on the MAINT MESSAGES page.
• Never displayed on the scratchpad.
• Have priority over Maintenance Advisory messages.

ADVISORY MESSAGES

A. Maintenance Advisory
• Displayed in white on the MAINT MESSAGES page.
• Displayed on the scratchpad unless an associated collector message exists and is active (until
acknowledged).

B. Status Advisory
• Do not require immediate pilot action but indicate a particular equipment failure condition.
• Displayed in white on the MAINT MESSAGES page and on the scratchpad.
• Lowest priority scratchpad messages (can be typed over and overwritten by any other message type).
• Data entered into the scratchpad by pressing an LSK, or via the keyboard, takes priority over
maintenance advisory messages.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-17
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Data Entry
• Entry error advisory messages are identified in the scratchpad by a leading "!".

Both the MESSAGE RECALL page and the MAINT MESSAGES page can be accessed via the [INIT REF] key,
via the MSG key or by pressing and holding the[ INIT REF] key for more than 1 second.

When more than one new alert message occurs, the CMA-9000 FMS MSG annunciator will stay illuminated until
all the messages have been viewed in turn by pressing the [CLR] key which deletes the current message and
displays the next one. Alert messages are prioritized with the highest displayed first.

Messages may also be cleared from the scratchpad by viewing them on the MESSAGE RECALL page or
MAINT MESSAGES page. Some messages are cleared automatically when the condition causing the message
was corrected or is no longer appropriate.

ERASE Prompt [LSK 6L] - Whenever a modification to the active flight plan is in progress, the ERASE prompt
appears. Pressing the ERASE prompt LSK erases all modifications and restores the display of the active flight
plan.

Dash Data Fields - a dash data field (-----) implies an optional data entry.

Box Data Fields - a box data field ( ) implies a mandatory data entry.

ACT, MOD Status - leg modifications to the active flight plan will display the MOD status (in reverse video)
ahead of the page title. Upon execution of modifications (by pressing the EXEC key) the MOD status will return
to ACT status in normal video.

Slash Rule [/] - the slash key " / " is used to separate two items of data entered in the same data field (such as
wind direction and speed).

If a single entry is made without being preceeded or followed by a slash, it will be entered into the data area
closest to the LSK (e.g., into the first area for a left side LSK, and into the second area for a right side LSK).
Otherwise, to force a single data item to be entered into the correct area of the field, it must be preceeded or
followed by a slash as appropriate.

Blank Fields - a blank field " " on certain pages implies that the data has not yet been computed.

Asterisk Fields - an asterisk field " **** " on certain pages implies that the data exceeds the maximum value for
that field, or that the information is not received by the external equipment.

Leading Zeros - leading zeros are only required during data entry for: 1. Angular data (bearing, course,
wind direction, etc.)
2. Latitude/longitude coordinates
3. Runway identifiers

Cancellation of Slash Symbol Waypoint Legends (/H, /O, /S) - any procedure attached to a waypoint and
identified by a legend consisting of the slash symbol followed by a single letter, such as a holding pattern (/H), or
a waypoint converted to fly-over (/O), or a search pattern (/S) can be cancelled by using the slash key alone
without a letter and the appropriate LSK. In the case of a holding pattern or search pattern, this should be
performed prior to the waypoint becoming the active waypoint.

NOTE: Cancellation of the procedure does not delete the waypoint.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-18
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

WAYPOINT NAMES AND OTHER CONVENTIONS

Terminal Area Waypoints - where specific identifiers have not been assigned, the following two-character
prefix codes are added to the runway identifier (number) to create terminal area and approach-related waypoints
in the navigation database:

AF - Initial Approach Fix

CF - Final Approach Course Fix
FF - Final Approach Fix
IF - Intermediate Fix
MA - Missed Approach Point when not RW
SD - Step-down Fix
RW - Runway Threshold
OM - Outer Marker
MM - Middle Marker
IM - Inner Marker
BM - Back Course Marker
TD - Touchdown Fix when not RW

Unnamed Turnpoints and Intersections - where no name has been assigned to a turnpoint or intersection,
the waypoint name in the navigation database is created by adding the distance of the point from the nearest
applicable navigation facility to the facility identifier, e.g. SEA77.

Temporary Waypoints - place/bearing/distance (PBD), place/bearing-place/bearing (PBPB) and along track

waypoints are automatically named by adding a sequence number to the first three characters of the reference
waypoint, e.g. ANC01. Similarly, the names of waypoints entered in latitude/longitude are created by adding a
sequence number to the prefix WPT.

DME ARC Waypoints - the waypoint name in the navigation database is created by adding the radial from the
DME station in degrees followed by the radius of the arc in nautical miles (represented by a letter: A = 1 nm, B =
2 nm, J = 10 nm, etc) to the prefix D, e.g. D173J.

Conditional Waypoints - a conditional waypoint is used in the navigation database when a route leg does not
terminate at a defined latitude and longitude. Such legs include radar vectors, intercepts, and course or heading
legs, or a leg with a manual or an altitude termination. Conditional waypoint names are displayed in
parentheses as shown below. Conditional waypoints cannot be used for direct-to navigation, nor as references
for temporary waypoint creation, and cannot be copied into the scratchpad.

(INTC) - Leg terminates at the interception of the next leg.

(3000) - Leg terminates at the altitude shown. When a conditional altitude waypoint is active and where
a suitable altitude input is not available, a NEXT WPT prompt is displayed at LSK 6R of
PROGRESS 1/4 page, and a MANUAL WPT SEQUENCE alert message is displayed.
Operator action is required to sequence to the next waypoint.

(VECT) - Leg is a radar vector. As described above, operator action is required to sequence to the next
waypoint.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-19
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Course Legends - courses may be displayed with the following legends depending on the leg type, as listed
below:

CRS - Indicates a course leg inbound to the next waypoint

FR FIX - Indicates a course outbound from the FIX

HDG - Indicates a heading leg

HOLD AT - Replaces the TO WPT course on RTE LEGS 1/X and PROGRESS 1/4 pages when navigating a
holding pattern

P-T - Appended to the courses of the outbound legs of the procedure turn

Course Prefixes - the required turn direction (L or R) is added as a prefix to the displayed course, and is most
commonly used at the inbound turn of a procedure turn and in missed approaches.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 2-20
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 3 - PREFLIGHT

CONTENTS

Subject Page
CONDENSED PREFLIGHT PROCESS........................................................................................................... 3-1
PREFLIGHT...................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
START-UP AND INITIALIZATION................................................................................................................... 3-2
ACTIVE DATABASE SELECTION.................................................................................................................. 3-5
CMA-9000 FMS DISPLAY SETUP .................................................................................................................. 3-6
SYSTEM POSITION, DATE AND TIME UPDATE........................................................................................... 3-7
ANGULAR REFERENCES FOR NAVIGATION AND DISPLAY .................................................................... 3-8
ACTIVE ROUTE SELECTION USING THE CUSTOM ROUTE NAME......................................................... 3-10
ROUTE SELECTION FROM THE LIST OF CUSTOM ROUTES .................................................................. 3-11
ACTIVE ROUTE SELECTION USING THE USER ROUTE NAME .............................................................. 3-12
ROUTE SELECTION FROM THE LIST OF USER ROUTES........................................................................ 3-13
BUILDING A ROUTE VIA WAYPOINT INSERTION ..................................................................................... 3-14
BUILDING A ROUTE VIA AIRWAY INSERTION.......................................................................................... 3-15
BUILDING A DEPARTURE PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... 3-16
VERIFYING ACTIVE ROUTE LEGS BY COURSE AND DISTANCE........................................................... 3-17
INITIAL LEG ................................................................................................................................................... 3-17
CANCELLING ANY PROCEDURE OR ROUTE MODIFICATION................................................................ 3-17
ACCESSING INIT/REF INDEX PAGES......................................................................................................... 3-18
CRUISE PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS INITIALIZATION (if configured) ............................................. 3-19
FUEL PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS INITIALIZATION (if configured) ................................................. 3-20
FUEL AND WEIGHT PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS INITIALIZATION (if configured) ......................... 3-20
EFIS DISPLAY (EFIS-EQUIPPED AIRCRAFT ONLY and if configured)................................................... 3-22
GPS SATELLITE DESELECTION (If configured)........................................................................................ 3-23
DUAL FMS OPERATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 3-23
SYNCHRONIZED OPERATIONS .................................................................................................................. 3-24
INDEPENDENT OPERATION........................................................................................................................ 3-26
RADIO TUNING OPERATION - DUAL FMS or FMS and RADIO HEAD .................................................... 3-26

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 3

PREFLIGHT

CONDENSED PREFLIGHT PROCESS

This page sequence gives an overview of the Preflight operations of the CMA-9000 FMS. The intent of each step
is summarized on the next page.
FMS1 IDENT 1/2 If radios are used 1A.
NAV DATABASE ACTIVE RADIO 1/4
K L M W W 0 6 9 7 OCT10-NOV06/03 04 05
POS INIT/REF S E C O N1/2D <VHF1 118.400 ↔ 125.150
K L MFWMWS0 6P9O7S NOV07-DEC04/96
DR -- --
O P P R ON47 G R Ao26.28
M C F G o18.67
W122 NO <VHF2 151.000 ↔ 1 2 4 . 6 5 0
6 1 4R0E0F0 -WACT
0A0Y5P O IRTENT
1 0 0 7 71/3
7 YJN A ----
U SOTROIMNG 4ID7NAo 3
CKBFI T1A.B8A0
SWE 1 2 2 oD1A8TD.EE0S0T <NAV1 115.80 ↔ 1 1 6 . 7 0
E C -MKSEA
ROTDEES T M A R 2 1 / 0PANC
2 YUL 109.30H YQB
S ERRUACT
USTANDBY NDWAATYARTE B A S E1 LEGS DFALTTE N1/2O <NAV2 116.30 ↔ 1 1 2 . 8 0
E C ------
U D2T6E4SoT M A R 2 1 / KL007
0
S E T I N1S2 .P8ONSM 2 SBY
JOH .
/H CO ROUTE
. <ATC1 2200 ↔ 1500
<SETUP o
U T C2 6 2 FMS1 SETUP POSKSEAPANC1
INIT>
1D1A3TNEM 1/3 CTL C1 C2 IC N1 N2
D173J
1757:04z DISPLAY 280/1600A
OCT20/99 <VOL FMS 7 OR6 4 3 3
<RTE 2>MAG XFILL
o
6 3ACT R ARTE
R C A N1C CO1 0ROUTES>
.6N M
1. <SETUP FUEL 1/2
D233JT IMMAEX R A N G E GOR1600A
ROUTE>FOFSSSE TW T 1B.
5736o0 NCMR S
0>UTC 1 0 . 0+5.0
N M9 7H0 R0 SK G
OFFSET RADIO 1/3
2. ANC /oFAF
C OEONRDDU R A N C E FDUAETLU MW T COM1 122.075 128.050C O M 2
5132o+ 4C4R.S0
0>LAT_LONG 5 .---.- M1N4M0 0 K G
0 9 N WGS84<
128.050 125.000
RW06R /oFAF
FUEL FLOW MILEAGE
3. NAV1 114.35 109.05 N A V 2
110K G / H R 100K G / N M 108.50 111.00AUTO
F U E LLEGS
R E M A I N ILEGS
N G A TETA>
FIX A T C 1 5739 109.0 A D F 1
892K G ZCH C 1211 2182.0 ANT
4. UNIT FM1 350LS 60LS F M 2
<POS INIT KG<
ROUTE> 119LS 61LS
250.050 U H F
5. <RTE 2 FUEL 399.975

6. <PHONE RADIO DETAILS>

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PREFLIGHT

1. IDENT - check software version number. Check Configuration Number. Check active database date and
interchange if necessary.

2. RADIO - check frequencies (if radios are used).

3. POS INIT/REF - check aircraft present position, time and date.

4. MOD, ACT RTE, DEPARTURES - enter route, confirm CMA-9000 FMS flight plan matches clearance.

5. ACT RTE LEGS - check all course and distances between waypoints of the active route.

6. SETUP - check display reference (MAGNETIC, TRUE).

7. FUEL (only if configured) - if a fuel computer is not configured, enter fuel quantity and fuel flow, for
computation of maximum range and endurance, and the fuel remaining over a desired waypoint.

8. GPS SAT DESELECT - only if ARINC 743A GPS is configured): check that GPS satellites are not
deselected or deselected according to NOTAMs.

A detailed description of each display page is contained in Appendix A. Radio display pages are detailed in
Section 13.

START-UP AND INITIALIZATION

1. Verify that all relevant circuit breakers are on.

2. The CMA-9000 FMS will show a white display while testing the FAIL, MSG, POS, OFST, NPA, TX1, TX2,
HF, V/UHF, IND, RNP, GSM, SMS and EXEC annunciators. Refer to section 2 for applicable annunciator.
After these tests, it displays the RADIO (Horizontal or Vertical) page or the IDENT 1/2 power up page based
on the configuration page.

RADIO PAGE Type HORIZONTAL: Or

RADIO 1/4
04 05
1L
<VHF1 118.400 ↔ 125.150
1R
-- --
2L <VHF2 151.000 ↔ 1 2 4 . 6 5 0 2R
YJN A ----
3L <NAV1 115.80 ↔ 1 1 6 . 7 0 3R
YUL 109.30H YQB
4L <NAV2 116.30 ↔ 1 1 2 . 8 0 4R
SBY
5L <ATC1 2200 ↔ 1500 5R
CTL C1 C2 IC N1 N2
6L <VOL FMS 7 6 4 3 3 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RADIO PAGE Type VERTICAL:

RADIO 1/3
COM1 122.075 128.050C O M 2
128.050 125.000
1L 1R
NAV1 114.35 109.05 NAV2
2L 108.50 111.00AUTO
2R
A T C 1 5739 109.0 A D F 1
3L C 1211 2182.0 ANT 3R
FM1 350LS 60LS F M 2
4L 119LS 61LS 4R
250.050 U H F
5L 399.975 5R

6L <PHONE RADIO DETAILS> 6R

Or
FMS1 IDENT 1/2
NAV DATABASE ACTIVE
K L M W W 0 6 9 7 OCT10-NOV06/09
1L 1R
SECOND
2L KLMWW0697 NOV07-DEC04/09
2R
OP PROGRAM CFG NO
3L 614876-300 00777 3R
CUSTOM DATABASE DATE
4L EC-RTEST MAR21/09 4R
USER DATABASE DATE
5L EC-UDTEST MAR21/09 5R

6L <SETUP POS INIT> 6R

3. Adjust the intensity of the CMA-9000 FMS display by pressing and holding the BRT key until a comfortable
viewing level is obtained.

Each depression of the BRT key alternately brightens or dims the display. On initial power up, or when a
time interval of more than 5 seconds has elapsed since the last time the [BRT] key was pressed, the first
press of this key will always increase brightness.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4. If RADIO page is displayed then press [INIT REF], <IDENT> (LSK 1L) to display the IDENT 1/2 page.

FMS1 IDENT 1/2

NAV DATABASE ACTIVE
K L M W W 0 6 9 7 OCT10-NOV06/09
1L 1R
SECOND
2L KLMWW0697 NOV07-DEC04/09
2R
OP PROGRAM CFG NO
3L 614876-300 00777 3R
CUSTOM DATABASE DATE
4L EC-RTEST MAR21/09 4R
USER DATABASE DATE
5L EC-UDTEST MAR21/09 5R

6L <SETUP POS INIT> 6R

5. Verify the OP PROGRAM (software version) and CFG NO. (system configuration) against the Aircraft Flight
Manual Supplement.

If either software or configuration numbers are incorrect, maintenance action is required.

6. Verify the date of the active database cycle.

If all identification data is correct, system start up and initialization is complete.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACTIVE DATABASE SELECTION

CAUTION: When the active database is changed, any existing active route is deleted.

1. Copy the SECOND cycle date into the scratchpad, by pressing LSK 2R.

2. Move the cycle date into the ACTIVE field by pressing LSK 1R.

The active database cycle is replaced by the second database cycle, as shown by the interchange of cycle
dates. The active database cycle is displayed in large font. The active database can only be changed on
the ground.

Display the IDENT 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <IDENT> and [NEXT].

This page displays the identification of the magnetic variation, the OEI definition (loaded flight data) and Tactical
Approach Database (if configured).

FMS1 IDENT 2/2

1L 1R
MAGVAR MODEL
2L 2005 (DEF)
2R
OEI MODEL (DEF) DATE
3L SPUMA MKII+ NOV06/09
3R

4L 4R
TACTICAL DATABASE DATE
5L SWISS_AREA5 DEC19/09 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CMA-9000 FMS DISPLAY SETUP

From the IDENT 1/2 page, go to DISPLAY 1/1 page, by pressing [INIT REF] and <DISPLAY> (LSK 4L).

DISPLAY 1/1

1L
<PARALLAX 1R

2L 2R
DISPLAY
3L >COLOR 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

1. Press LSK 1L and adjust display PARALLAX for proper viewing angle.

2. Press <DISPLAY> (LSK 3L) and select color or monochrome for this test. Re-select color thereafter.

3. Press <INIT/REF> (LSK 6L).

4. Press <IDENT> (LSK 1L) to return to the IDENT 1/2 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM POSITION, DATE AND TIME UPDATE

From the IDENT 1/2 page go to POS INIT/REF 1/2 page by pressing <POS INIT> (LSK 6R).

POS INIT/REF 1/2

FMS POS GPS
1L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R

2L 2R
INS MODE NAV TIME
3L NAVIGATION 00H34.7 3R

4L 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z OCT20/04 5R

6L <SETUP UPDATE POS> 6R

NOTE: Position/time/date cannot be updated if the NAV mode is GPS, INS/GPS (and cGPS/mGPS if GPS and
EGI are installed).

At power up the system position is the last calculated position prior to shutdown, or the current GPS
position, if available. Initialization of position, date and time is not normally required. If GPS is available,
the CMA-9000 FMS internal clock is updated to GPS-based UTC and date.

Unless an INS is configured and the GPS position is available, a manual initialization of position, date,
and time is not normally required except during an initial aircraft installation, or possibly after a
maintenance action. In this case, if GPS position is unavailable, the alert message “SET INS POS”
appears.

If the navigation mode is not GPS (nor INS/GPS, cCGS, mGPS):

1. Enter the new time into the scratchpad, e.g. 175704.

2. Move the new time to UTC field by pressing LSK 5L.

and/or

3. Enter the new date to the scratchpad, e.g. OCT20/04.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4. Move the new date to the DATE field by pressing LSK 5R.

To initialize the position use the POS INIT/REF 1/2 page:

POS INIT/REF 1/2

FMS POS DR
1L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R
REF WAYPOINT
2L KBFI N 4 7 o3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o1 8 . 0 0 2R
INS MODE SET ALT
3L GROUND ALIGN 025 1234F T 3R
ALIGN SET INS POS
o o
4L >SEA N47 26.28 W122 18.67 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z OCT20/04 5R

6L <SETUP CMD NAV> 6R

1. Enter the airport identifier into the scratchpad.

2. Move the airport identifier to the REF WAYPOINT field by pressing LSK 2L.

REF WAYPOINT and INS mode fields blank on aircraft lift-off.

3. Line select airport or INS position into the scratchpad (by pressing LSK 2R or LSK 4R, or enter any other
desired position into the scratchpad (e.g. N472628W1221867).

4. Move the new position to the POSITION field by pressing LSK 1R.

ANGULAR REFERENCES FOR NAVIGATION AND DISPLAY

Display the INIT/REF INDEX 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF]. From the INIT/REF INDEX 1/2 page, display the
SETUP 1/1 page by pressing <SETUP> (LSK 5L).

FMS1 SETUP 1/1

DISPLAY
1L
>MAG 1R
TIME OFFSET
2L >UTC +5.0H R S 2R
COORD DATUM
3L >LAT_LONG WGS84< 3R

4L 4R
FMS OPERATION
5L >SYNCHRONIZED 5R

6L <POS INIT ROUTE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The default angular reference of all NAVIGATION DISPLAYS (heading, course, actual track, and bearing) is
MAGNETIC NORTH (degree symbol), and that of WIND DIRECTION is TRUE NORTH (T symbol).

If configured, and the cockpit true/mag switch is not installed, change the navigation reference DISPLAY to
TRUE or MAGNETIC by pressing LSK 1L. In some installations, the display reference of the navigation angles
can only be controlled by a true/mag cockpit switch. In this case the MAG/TRUE DISPLAY prompt (at LSK 1L) is
removed from the SETUP page.

Upon entering the polar region (latitude above N73 or below S60), the angular reference automatically reverts to
true north and the reference toggling is inhibited.

If the angular reference was magnetic previous to entering the polar region, an advisory scratchpad message is
displayed to inform the crew of the change from magnetic to true north.

Upon the airplane leaving the polar region, the system behaviour depends upon the aircraft installation.

If the true/mag cockpit switch is not installed, the angular reference display is maintained to True and the
True/Mag toggling capability is restored. An advisory scratchpad message prompts the crew to check the angular
reference.

If the true/mag cockpit switch is installed, the FMS uses the switch to determine the angular display reference. If
the switch was set to Mag previous to entering the Polar region, the FMS automatically reverts the reference to
MAG and displays an advisory message to indicate the true to magnetic reversion.

Select time reference to LOCAL or UTC by pressing LSK 2L.

If UTC time is selected enter the local time offset from the UTC time by pressing LSK 2R. (Validity checking
ensures entry is between +/-12.0 hours and steps are 0.5 hours).

Press <COORD> (LSK 3L) and select coordinates. Possible values are LAT_LONG, UTM, MGRS and
SWISS_GRID.

Only one coordinate system is active for both entry and display of positional information at any given time.
Swiss Grid position is defined as Northing and Easting coordinates up to 999 km, locating a position to within 10
meter square. The CMA-9000 FMS is able to display to full range of the Swiss Grid coordinate system.
However, the CMA-9000 FMS will only accept manual entries within the following limits:

062 - 302 (Northing)

480 - 865 (Easting)

Press <DATUM> (LSK 3R) and select appropriate datum. Fifty-one possible values can be configured (e.g.:
WGS84, ARC 1960, AUSSIE 84).

NOTE: If the SWISS_GRID coordinates are chosen, the DATUM is set to CH1903 and cannot be changed.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACTIVE ROUTE SELECTION USING THE CUSTOM ROUTE NAME

Display the RTE 1/X page by pressing the [RTE] function key.
MOD RTE 1 1/3
ORIGIN DEST
1L
KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF KSEAPANC1 3R

4L <ERASE RTE1 CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <BACKTRACK USER ROUTES> 5R

OFFSET
6L <RTE 2 R0.0N M 6R

1. Key in the custom route identifier into the scratchpad, e.g.: KSEAPANC1.

2. Move the custom route name to the CO ROUTES field by pressing LSK 3R.

"MOD" status is displayed in the title line. A "!WAIT" advisory message appears in the scratchpad while the
route information is being extracted from the navigation database.

3. Verify the ORIGIN and DEST identifiers.

4. Enter flight number into the scratchpad. Move to the FLT NO field by pressing LSK 2R.

5. Accept the new active route by pressing [EXEC].

"MOD" status in the title line changes to "ACT". The selected route is now active.

NOTE: With an ELBIT, EURONAV, or EURONAV_A702 DMAP configured, the CMA-9000 FMS will
automatically display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page if valid DMAP waypoints are received and DMAP
APPEND mode is ON. If the DMAP APPEND mode is OFF and valid DMAP waypoints are
received, the DMAP WPT page will be displayed. The DMAP APPEND prompt appears on the RTE
1/X page only if a DMAP (ELBIT, EURONAV, or EURONAV_A702 type only) is configured.

NOTE: When loading a custom route in flight, the CMA-9000 FMS will append a "+" to the custom route
identifier on the RTE page thus indicating that the custom route has been appended to the end of the
current flight plan.
When a custom route is inversed, the route name is preceded by the prefix INV in reverse video.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ROUTE SELECTION FROM THE LIST OF CUSTOM ROUTES

With the ACT or MOD RTE 1/X page displayed:

Display the custom routes by pressing <CO ROUTES> (LSK 4R).

SELECT CO ROUTE 1/1

1L
KSEAPANC KSEAPANC1 1R

2L KSEAPANC2 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
LOAD
5L >DIRECT 5R

6L <ROUTE 6R

Custom routes are displayed left to right, sorted by origin identifier.

NOTE: If the display of the CO ROUTE is configured to ORIG_DEST, the entry of an ORIGIN or both
ORIGIN and DEST identifiers on RTE x 1/X page will reduce the custom routes list, when on
ground, to those specified in the ORIGIN or ORIGIN and DEST fields. When airborne, all custom
routes are displayed. If CO ROUTE is configured to ALL, every CO ROUTE in the custom database
will be displayed.

1. Display the desired route by pressing [NEXT] or [PREV] as often as required.

2. Select route identifier by pressing the appropriate LSK.

3. Select the direction in which the route is loaded by toggling DIRECT/INVERSE using LSK 5L.

4. The RTE 1/X page is re-displayed. Verify the ORIGIN and DEST identifiers.

5. Accept the new active route by pressing [EXEC].

When airborne, selecting a custom route will replace the destination with the selected custom route
destination and will insert a discontinuity after the active waypoint followed by the selected custom route
waypoints. If a procedure (for e.g. STAR or Approach) is part of the flight plan, the whole procedure is
replaced by the selected custom route.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACTIVE ROUTE SELECTION USING THE USER ROUTE NAME

Display the RTE 1/X page by pressing the RTE function key.
MOD RTE 1 1/3
ORIGIN DEST
1L
KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF KSEAPANC1 3R

4L <ERASE RTE1 CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <BACKTRACK USER ROUTES> 5R

OFFSET
6L <RTE 2 R0.0N M 6R

1. Press the <USER ROUTES> prompt (LSK 5R) the USER ROUTES 1/X page is displayed.

2. Select from the USER ROUTES 1/X page the user route identifier, e.g.: KSEAPANC1.

The RTE 1/X page is re-displayed with the user route identifier displayed at the ROUTE field, LSK 3R.

"MOD" status is displayed in the title line. A "!WAIT" advisory message appears in the scratchpad while the
route information is being extracted from the navigation database.

3. Verify the ORIGIN and DEST identifiers.

4. Enter flight number into the scratchpad. Move to the FLT NO field by pressing LSK 2R.

5. Accept the new active route by pressing [EXEC].

"MOD" status in the title line changes to "ACT". The selected route is now active.

NOTE: When loading a user route in flight, the CMA-9000 FMS will append a "+" to the user route identifier on
the ROUTE page thus indicating that the user route has been appended to the end of the current flight
plan.
When a user route is inversed, the route name is preceded by the prefix INV in reverse video.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ROUTE SELECTION FROM THE LIST OF USER ROUTES

With the ACT or MOD RTE 1/X page displayed:

Display the user routes by pressing <USER ROUTES> (LSK 5R).

USER ROUTES 1/1

0001M0009M WPT01WPT09
1L 1R

2L WPT01WPT10 STATION010
2R

3L STATION015 ---------- 3R

4L 4R
LOAD
5L >DIRECT 5R

6L <ROUTE DELETE ALL> 6R

User routes are displayed left to right, in the order of entry.

1. Display the desired route by pressing [NEXT] or [PREV] as often as required.

2. Select route identifier by pressing the appropriate LSK.

3. Select the direction in which the route is loaded by toggling DIRECT/INVERSE using LSK 5L.

4. The RTE 1/X page is re-displayed. Verify the ORIGIN and DEST identifiers.

5. Accept the new active route by pressing [EXEC].

When airborne, selecting a user route will replace the destination with the selected user route destination
and will insert a discontinuity after the active waypoint followed by the selected user route waypoints. If a
procedure (for e.g. STAR or Approach) is part of the flight plan, the whole procedure is replaced by the
select user route.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

BUILDING A ROUTE VIA WAYPOINT INSERTION

When no custom route is available, a route can be created by first defining the origin and destination airports on
the ROUTE page, followed by entry of the individual waypoints on the RTE x LEGS page.

Display the ACT or MOD RTE x 1/X page by pressing [RTE].

ACT RTE 1 1/3

ORIGIN DEST
1L KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF KSEAPANC1 3R

4L <ERASE RTE1 CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <BACKTRACK USER ROUTES> 5R

OFFSET
6L <RTE 2 R0.0N M 6R

1. Key the departure airport identifier into the scratchpad and move it to the ORIGIN field by pressing LSK 1L.

"MOD" status is displayed in the title line. The "ERASE RTE" prompt is displayed at LSK 4L (displayed only
when xFMU is not configured) and the EXEC annunciator illuminates.
“BACKTRACK” prompt is displayed at LSK 5L only if configured.

2. Key the destination airport identifier into the scratchpad and move it to the DEST field by pressing LSK 1R.

3. Display the MOD RTE x LEGS 1/1 page by pressing [LEGS].

The TO WPT identifier field contains boxes.

4. Key the identifier of the first waypoint into the scratchpad and move it to the TO WPT location by pressing
LSK 1L.

The direct course and distance from present position to the TO WPT is computed and displayed, and the
INTC CRS prompt is displayed at the LSK 6R location with dashes ("---") in the intercept course field.

NOTE: The minimum route comprises of the origin and destination airports (or waypoints if configured to
ROTOR) and a single waypoint. If desired, direct-to navigation from the present position to the first
waypoint of the route can be initiated at this time as described in Section 9 (Direct-To/Intercept).

5. Key in all subsequent waypoint identifiers in turn, inserting them into the route by pressing the appropriate
left hand LSK. Press [NEXT] as required to display a new RTE x LEGS page.

6. Additional temporary waypoints can be inserted into the route as described in Section 5.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

BUILDING A ROUTE VIA AIRWAY INSERTION

When no custom route is available, a route can be created by first defining the origin and destination airports on
the ROUTE page, followed by entry of the individual airway identifier on the ROUTE page.

1. Key the departure airport identifier into the scratchpad and move it to the ORIGIN field by pressing LSK 1L.

"MOD" status is displayed in the title line. The "ERASE" prompt is displayed at LSK 6L and the EXEC
annunciator illuminates.

2. Key the destination airport identifier into the scratchpad and move it to the DEST field by pressing LSK 1R.

3. Display the RTE x 2/X page by pressing [NEXT].

MOD RTE 1 2/3

VIA TO
1L LACRE3 HUMPP 1R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
2L 2R

3L J20 OCS 3R

4L J154 RAMMS 4R

5L DIRECT GWENS 5R
OFFSET
6L <ERASE R0.0N M 6R

4. Key the identifier of the first waypoint into the scratchpad and move it to the TO location by pressing
LSK 1R.

DIRECT is displayed below VIA, indicating that the first flight leg will be from Present Position direct to the
first waypoint of the desired airway.

5. Key in the airway identifier and move it to the airway field by pressing LSK 2L, a box data field appears
against LSK 2R.

6. Key in the next airway identifier and move it to the airway field by pressing LSK 3L, the waypoint at the
junction of the two airways appears in the box data field against LSK 2R and a box data field appears
against LSK 3R.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-15
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

7. Key in all subsequent airway identifiers in turn, inserting them into the route by pressing the appropriate left
hand LSK. Press NEXT as required to display a new ROUTE page.

NOTE: The route structure can be modified by defining the waypoint identifier at which the desired airway is
terminated and repeating the procedure for entering the following airways.

If a departure or an arrival is selected on the DEP/ARR page, the procedure and the transition name will
be displayed in the VIA and TO fields.

If a waypoint is inserted immediately before an already inserted waypoint, a DIRECT TO to the entered
waypoint will be created followed by a route discontinuity and a DIRECT TO to the already inserted
waypoint.

The route structure can also be modified by adding and/or erasing waypoints on the selected RTE x
LEGS page.

8. Display the first leg by pressing [LEGS] and [PREV] or [NEXT] as required.

9. Close-up any route discontinuity as described in Section 5.

10. Verify the course, distance, altitude/speed advisory of each airway leg in turn by pressing [NEXT] as
required to display all legs.

11. Make the selected route active by pressing [EXEC].

BUILDING A DEPARTURE PROCEDURE

For departures from an airport, Standard Instrument Departures (SID) can be incorporated into the route by
manual entry of the individual waypoint identifiers. Legs which are defined by course/heading legs rather than
by waypoints can be created by combinations of place/bearing/distance and place/bearing-place/bearing
waypoints as described in Section 5, or by direct-to or manual navigation once airborne.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

VERIFYING ACTIVE ROUTE LEGS BY COURSE AND DISTANCE

Display the MOD RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS].

MOD RTE 1 LEGS 2/4

299o 39.6N M
1L CAFTA 1R
298o 154N M
2L YZP 2R
307o 86.7N M
3L MOCA1 3R
306o 165N M
4L BKA 4R
282o 197N M
5L KILLA 5R

6L <ERASE LEGS ETA> 6R

1. Verify the course and distance of all route legs.

2. Display all route legs in sequence by pressing [NEXT] as often as required.

3. Return to the MOD RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS] or [PREV] as required.

4. Make the route active by pressing [EXEC].

The "MOD" status in the title line changes to "ACT", the ERASE prompt disappears and the EXEC
annunciator extinguishes.

INITIAL LEG

Following the waypoint of a route, navigation and guidance is computed initially for the leg from present position
direct to the first waypoint. On takeoff, the CMA-9000 FMS automatically re-computes a Direct-To to the first
waypoint.
If a runway and SID are selected and the first leg is not a Direct-To leg, navigation and guidance is computed
initially from the runway threshold to the first waypoint. On take-off, the CMA-9000 FMS automatically re-
computes the initial leg using the present position as the start of the leg.

To navigate a different first leg, follow any of the route modification procedures described in Section 5.

CANCELLING ANY PROCEDURE OR ROUTE MODIFICATION

During any procedure which involves a modification to the active route, an ERASE prompt is displayed at
LSK 6L. Prior to EXECuting the procedure, it can be cancelled and all route modifications deleted by pressing
<ERASE> (LSK 6L).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-17
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACCESSING INIT/REF INDEX PAGES

Display the INIT/REF INDEX 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF].

FMS1 INIT/REF INDEX 1/2

1L
<IDENT WPT DATA> 1R

2L <POS INIT WPT LISTS> 2R

3L <CTR LEGS NEAREST> 3R

4L <FIX INFO MARK ON TOP> 4R

5L <SETUP NAV STATUS> 5R

6L <MSG RECALL DES+SAR> 6R

Display the INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 page by pressing [NEXT] or [PREV].

FMS1 INIT/REF INDEX 2/2

1L <CENTRAL CLR DISPLAY> 1R

2L SIMULATE> 2R

3L TIMER> 3R

4L <PLAN DATA EFIS> 4R

5L <FUEL DATA LOAD> 5R

6L <FLIGHT LOG MAINT> 6R

NOTE: All prompts displayed on the INIT/REF INIDEX pages are configurable and the page layouts illustrated
above are provide as examples only. In this particular example, LSK 5L, LSK 6L, LSK 2R, LSK 3R and
LSK 4R are installation dependent, and thus may not appear as shown above. LSK 5R appears only
when the aircraft is on ground for maintenance database loading. LSK 6R appears only when the
aircraft is on ground for maintenance operations.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-18
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CRUISE PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS INITIALIZATION (if configured)

When a modification is made to the origin airport or associated departure procedure, the TRANS ALT field will
be update to show the navigation database extracted value, if one exists, otherwise the configured FMS default
value will be displayed.

When a modification is made to the destination airport or associated arrival procedure, the TRANS LVL field will
be update to show the navigation database extracted value, if one exists, otherwise the configured FMS default
value will be displayed.

The Transition Altitude and Transition Level are user modifiable.

Additional details on the TRANS ALT and TRANS LVL fields can be seen on the PLAN DATA page in Appendix
A.

For flight planning calculations while on ground, the CMA-9000 FMS will provide user modifiable Cruise TAS
and Cruise Wind values.

Upon a warm or cold start, the CMA-9000 FMS will keep the Cruise TAS value prior to the power down. Upon a
change in configuration, the CMA-9000 FMS will set the Cruise TAS value in accordance with the aircraft type:

ROTOR:
CRZ_TAS: 130KTS
FIX:
CRZ_TAS: 480KTS

The CMA-9000 FMS will reset the Cruise Wind value to zero after a cold start on ground. Upon a warm start or
cold start in air, the CMA-9000 FMS will keep the Cruise Wind value prior to the power down.

Display the INIT/REF INDEX 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF].

1. Display the PLAN DATA 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT] and <PLAN DATA> (LSK 4L).

PLAN DATA 1/1

TRANS ALT CRZ WIND
1L
18000F T 300T / 90K T 1R
TRANS LVL CRZ TAS
2L F L 180 360K T 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

2. To modify the TRANS ALT and/or TRANS LVL field(s), key in the transition altitude (e.g.: "18000" in feet or
"180" in flight level) and move it into the either the TRANS ALT or TRANS LVL field by pressing LSK 1L or
2L, respectively.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-19
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. Key in the cruise wind (e.g. 300/90) and move it into the CRZ WIND field by pressing LSK 1R.

4. Key in the planned cruise true airspeed (e.g. 360) and move it into the CRZ TAS field by pressing LSK 2R.

FUEL PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS INITIALIZATION (if configured)

These are not mandatory entries.

Refer to Section 14, Performance functions.

FUEL AND WEIGHT PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS INITIALIZATION (if configured)

If the FUEL+WEIGHTS option is configured for the FUEL pages, the CMA-9000 FMS provides on the RTE x
FUEL 2/2 page several fields used by the operator to enter the empty weight, optional equipment weight, crew
weight, cargo weight and total fuel weight including reserve. These values are used by the CMA-9000 FMS to
calculate the initial Gross-Weight (GWT) estimate, displayed on the RTE x FUEL 1/2 page. Once the initial GWT
is accepted by the CMA-9000 FMS, the Gross Weight will be continuously estimated by subtracting the fuel
consumption based on the average fuel flow. The display of the GWT units will match the display of the fuel flow
units that is, if the fuel flow is displayed in Kg/Hr or Lb/Hr, then the GWT will also be displayed in Kg or Lb
respectively.

CAUTION: The unit selection on the FUEL 1/2 and FUEL 2/2 pages has to be consistent with other fuel indicators
configured in the cockpit. Verify units on the FUEL pages and on other fuel indicators.

Display the INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], [PREV] or [NEXT].

Display the RTE x FUEL 1/2 page by pressing <FUEL> (LSK 5L) on the INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 page or the
[FUEL] functional key (if configured).
ACT RTE 1 FUEL 1/2
MAX RANGE GROSS WT
760N M 9700K G
1L 1R
ENDURANCE FUEL WT
2L 01+21 1400K G
2R
FUEL FLOW MILEAGE
3L 110K G / H R 100K G / N M
3R
FUEL REMAINING AT FIX
4L 892K G ZCH 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L 6R

1. Key in the current fuel weight (e.g. 9700) and move it into the FUEL WT field by pressing LSK 2R.

2. Key in the current fuel flow (e.g. 110) and move it into the FUEL FLOW field by pressing LSK 3L.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-20
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. UNIT at LSK 5R toggles between LB and KG.

Maximum range and endurance are calculated based on entered fuel quantity and fuel flow rate. The
maximum range is computed along the track to the FIX waypoint (if the FIX is defined) or with the current
track, given current or estimated fuel weight (excluding the reserve), fuel flow, and ground speed (if the FIX is
not defined). The endurance is computed using the given current or estimated fuel weight (excluding the
reserve) and fuel flow.

CAUTION: On power interruptions, the fuel units will revert to the configured units (from maintenance page).
Verify units when reading or entering values.

Display the RTEx FUEL 2/2 page by pressing [NEXT] or [PREV].

ACT RTE 1 FUEL 2/2

FUEL+RES EMPTY WT
1L 1700K G 5000K G 1R
RESERVE EQUIP WT
2L 300K G 700K G 2R
CREW WT
3L 300K G 3R
CARGO WT
4L 2000K G 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

4. Key in the fuel weight including reserve (e.g. 1700) and move it into the FUEL+RES field by pressing
LSK 1L.

5. Key in the fuel reserve weight (e.g. 300) and move it into the RESERVE field by pressing LSK 2L.

6. Key in the aircraft empty weight (e.g. 5000) and move it into the EMPTY WT field by pressing LSK 1R.

7. Key in the optional equipment weight (e.g. 700) and move it into the EQUIP WT field by pressing LSK 2R.

8. Key in the total crew weight (e.g. 300) and move it into the CREW WT field by pressing LSK 3R.

9. Key in the total cargo weight (e.g. 2000) and move it into the CARGO WT field by pressing LSK 4R.

10. UNIT at LSK 6R toggles between LB and KG.

NOTE: The quantities on the RTEX x FUEL 2/2 page are displayed in white except for the case of an IFDS
EFIS installation when:
• The quantities are displayed in amber as long as the GROSS WT DISCREPANCY alert message is
active; and
• The quantities are displayed in white when there is no difference between the gross weight sent by
the IFDS and the CMA-9000 FMS-computed gross weight.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-21
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

EFIS DISPLAY (EFIS-EQUIPPED AIRCRAFT ONLY and if configured)

Display the INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], [PREV] or [ NEXT].

FMS1 INIT/REF INDEX 2/2

1L 1R

2L SIMULATE> 2R

3L TIMER> 3R

4L <PLAN DATA EFIS> 4R

5L <FUEL DATA LOAD> 5R

6L <FLIGHT LOG MAINT> 6R

The EFIS prompt (LSK 4R) is displayed only if an EFIS is configured (except for the IFDS or AHCAS or
COLLINS-84 EFIS which does not allow background data). The <MAINT> prompt (LSK 6R) displays the
Maintenance menu. Access to these pages is protected by a PASSWORD.

Display the EFIS 1/1 page by pressing <EFIS> (LSK 4R).

EFIS 1/1
NAVAID AIRPORT
1L
>ON ON< 1R
NDB USER WPT
2L >ON ON< 2R
SARSAT BULLS EYE
3L >ON ON< 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

The default state (ON, OFF) of the display elements are configured at the time of installation.

1. Add the desired element to the EFIS display by pressing the appropriate LSK until ON is displayed.

Transmission of selected data to the EFIS will be initiated.

2. To halt transmission of a undesired data element, press the appropriate LSK until OFF (declutter) is
displayed.

All the initial EFIS database symbol settings will be preserved after a power outage (if configured accordingly).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-22
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

GPS SATELLITE DESELECTION (If configured)

If required by NOTAM deselect the indicated satellite(s). Refer to Appendix A, GPS SAT DESELECT 1/1 page
for the deselection commands.

Otherwise ensure that no satellites are deselected.

DUAL FMS OPERATIONS

In dual CMA-9000 FMS installations, the operator can set the CMA-9000 FMS to operate in either synchronized
or independent mode from the SETUP 1/1 page. The operating mode can be configured to automatically
startup in either synchronized or independent mode.

From the INIT/REF INDEX 1/2 page, display the SETUP 1/1 page by pressing <SETUP> (LSK 5L).

FMS1 SETUP 1/1

DISPLAY
1L >MAG 1R
TIME OFFSET
2L >UTC +5.0H R S 2R
COORD DATUM
3L >LAT_LONG WGS84< 3R

4L 4R
FMS OPERATION
5L >SYNCHRONIZED 5R

6L <POS INIT ROUTE> 6R

1. Select either INDEPENDENT or SYNCHRONIZED mode of operation.

NOTE: When the XFMS synchronization option of the FMS is configured to ALWAYS, manual selection of
independent mode is inhibited.
When the XFMS synchronization option of the FMS is configured to NO (e.g. independent) manual
selection of the independent and synchronized modes are inhibited.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-23
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

2. Press LSK 5L, confirm by pressing LSK 6R or cancel by pressing LSK 6L.

After confirming change to independent mode, the alert scratchpad message “FMS INDEPENDENT OP” is
displayed by all CMA-9000 FMSs.

NOTE: Selection from independent to synchronized mode is prevented with the display of the alert message
“UNABLE FMS-FMS SYNC” when:
• communication between the CMA-9000 FMSs has been lost,
• on-side CMA-9000 FMS is in a holding pattern,
• on-side CMA-9000 FMS is in a GPS approach,
• any CMA-9000 FMS in a missed approach procedure,
• a conflicting operational s/w part number,
• one CMA-9000 FMS has a different active navigation database,
• user databases are different.
• Tactical approach databases are different.

NOTE: On synchronization, the flight plan is transferred from the CMA-9000 FMS where the synchronization
was done to the other CMA-9000 FMSs overriding any existing flight plan.

SYNCHRONIZED OPERATIONS

NOTE: To operate correctly in the synchronized mode the CMA-9000 FMSs must contain the same databases.
Furthermore the active database must be the same in all CMA-9000 FMSs.

In the synchronized mode of operation, the following items are automatically synchronized between all CMA-
9000 FMSs:

• CMA-9000 FMS position initialization

• UTC entry
• Date Entry
• Time system selection (UTC/LOCAL)
• Time offset
• Coord-datum selection
• Database selection
• Flight plan entries or changes (on pressing [EXEC] to activate the flight plan)
• Backtrack route deletion request (on pressing [EXEC] key to activate the backtrack route)
• TRUE/MAG Display reference setting
• TRUE/MAG Wind reference setting
• Altimeter setting
• System wind, track and ground speed entries (allowed only in Dead Reckoning)
• RNP entry
• Missed approach request
• Hold exit request and hold entry procedure
• Selection/deselection of synchronized navigation (using the best overall sensor)
• Alert messages and their fault sources
• Clearing of alert and advisory messages
• System sensor for navigation
• Navigation data (present position, ground speed, track, ANP)
• Flight number entry
• Transition altitude/level entry
• Availability of GPS approach integrity

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-24
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

• TAS (offside TAS used when onside TAS source unavailable)

• Heading (offside heading used when onside heading source unavailable)
• Airport and waypoint reference
• Deselected GPS satellites for predictive RAIM
• HSI sensitivity entry
• Altitude upon on-side source failure
• Current status of the guidance intercept logic
• Start radio self-test command
• LNAV discrete
• DME scanning control status
• DME Hold dual tuning parameters
• Transponder dual tuning parameters
• Auto/MANUAL VOR Tuning status
• DME scanning selection of stations from active scanning side to passive side
• Auto VOR Tuning Control status
• User database modifications
• Temporary waypoint list
• Fuel data

Only one CMA-9000 FMS can change an active flight plan at any time. If one CMA-9000 FMS is already in
MOD status (route modifications in progress), any attempt to change the flight plan of another CMA-9000 FMS
will bring in view the “ !CDU ENTRY CONFLICT” message in the scratchpad.

In synchronized mode, both CMA-9000 FMS will use the best system sensor for navigation and guidance
computations (unless deselected on the DESELECT 1/1 page). Therefore, CMA-9000 FMS present position,
track and ground speed are synchronized.

NOTE: In a civil configuration with multiple FMSs, a hysteresis of 100 meters applies when switching from a
sensor to another identical sensor but from a different FMS. This is illustrated by the following
example: if FMS1 and FMS2 are both in GPS navigation mode (with each FMS receiving its own
onside GPS position) and the overall FMS system position is that of GPS1, the FMS system position
will not switch to become that of GPS2 until GPS2’s position is at least 100 meters better than the
current system position (e.g. GPS1’s position).

In synchronized mode of operation, the GPS integrity annunciator will illuminate only if the GPS integrity
is lost on all GPS sensors.

When synchronized, an CMA-9000 FMS will change to independent mode if its Phase of Flight is
different from the other CMA-9000 FMS(s) for more than 30 seconds.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-25
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INDEPENDENT OPERATION

In the independent mode of operation, all entries made on either CMA-9000 FMS are not reflected on the other
CMA-9000 FMS. However, the active or inactive flight plan can still be copied from one CMA-9000 FMS to the
other via the RTE XFILL prompt (LSK 4L) on the RTE 1/1 page. If the navigation database or the operational
program is not the same on all CMA-9000 FMSs when a flight plan transfer is attempted, the alert message
“UNABLE FMS-FMS SYNC” is displayed on the scratchpad line. When the flight plan transfer is completed, the
copied flight plan appears as a modification on the other CMA-9000 FMS. The modified route becomes active
by pressing [EXEC].

During independent operation and if the navigation mode is GPS, the alert message GPS-GPS POS
DISAGREE is displayed in the scratchpad if the CMA-9000 FMS position is significantly different than that of the
other CMA-9000 FMS.

NOTE: Due to slight variations in the position computation made by each CMA-9000 FMS, leg sequencing may
not occur at exactly the same time on all CMA-9000 FMSs while in independent operation.

RADIO TUNING OPERATION - DUAL FMS or FMS and RADIO HEAD

The radio tuning feature does not use CMA-9000 FMS cross talk to establish synchronization. It uses burst
tuning and the radios’ feedback to establish synchronization. Its operation will not be affected by the selection of
synchronized or independent mode of operation.

In a DUAL FMS architecture, when the standby frequency is entered, it is cross talked to the cross-side FMS
(both FMS always display the same standby frequency of the same radio).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 3-26
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 4 - DEPARTURES

CONTENTS

Subject Page

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1

SID SPECIFICATION IN FLIGHT .................................................................................................................... 4-3
CONDENSED SID AND SID TRANSITION PROCESS .................................................................................. 4-3
STANDARD INSTRUMENT DEPARTURE (SID) SELECTION ...................................................................... 4-4
ALTIMETER SETTING..................................................................................................................................... 4-6

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 4-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 4-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 4

DEPARTURES

CAUTION: In case of disagreement between the published SID information and CMA-9000 FMS displayed
information, the operator MUST follow the published SID directives.

INTRODUCTION

The complete departure procedure, including Standard Instrument Departure (SID) and SID transition, can be
loaded into the route at the same time or in segments, depending on the ATC clearance received. The
segments are selected from lists of named procedures extracted from the navigation database for the specified
origin airport.

When a SID is selected, the waypoints and procedural legs are extracted from the navigation database,
procedural leg types are decoded, and all resulting waypoints are inserted into the route in the correct order.

SID transitions are appended to the route after the SID and are usually separated from it by a route
discontinuity, unless the last waypoint of the SID and the first waypoint of the en-route portion of the route are
identical. Figure 4-1 shows a typical SID and SID transition.

The SID transition is linked to the appropriate waypoint of the en-route portion, and enroute waypoints preceding
the intersecting waypoints are deleted. If there is no SID transition, the SID is separated from the en-route
portion by a route discontinuity. For certain types of SID and transition, the waypoints may not be loaded into
the route until the runway is selected.

ATC clearances which modify the selected SID procedures can be incorporated by selection of the new
procedure while the aircraft still on ground. This results in the automatic deletion of the waypoints associated
with the cancelled procedure.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 4-1
November 19, 2009
 SAN MARCUS
D
(H) 114.9 RZS CHATY TWO DEPARTURE (CHATU2.CHATY)

Figure 4-1
N34 30.6 W119 46.3
(RWYS 6L/R AND 7L/R)(DME REQUIRED)
Expect clearance to filed altitude 3 minutes
after departure.
R1
0 9° TAKE-OFF
SA Runways 6L/R: Climb via a 040° heading for
(C N M
HA A vector to V-23. Thence via (transition or
FILLMORE assigned route).
V2 TY2. RCUS D
5 R (L)112.5 FIM Runways 7L/R: Climb via a 070° heading for
60 - 1 8 ZS)
21 0 6 N34 21.4 W118 52.9 vector to V-23. Thence via (transition or
HENER assigned route).
HE NE R
28
9° D N34 19.9 Transitions:
W119 13.7 (C HATY2.HENER) 0°
25
D27 V186 R09 San Marcus (CHATY2. RZS): From Chaty Int
6 7 ° 2 7
V27- 18 D 6000 V 18 7° N34 15.5 to RZS VOR: Via V-23, and FIM R-097 to FIM
DEANO 60 00 17 6 W118 35.4 VOR, then FIM R-250 to Deano Int then RZS

D16
V 59
N34 19.0 D22 10 600 7 R-109 to RZS VOR. Cross Charty Int at or
0 1
1

W119 25.0 2 above 5400'.

60 0

89 1 6 D 0 0°

3 11
0

°
16
Direct distance from Los Angeles Intl to:
Chaty Int 20 NM
CHATY
N34 14.5 W118 35.0
D20

AT OR ABOVE
5400'
VENTURA
D

and must not be retained for reference

(L)108.2 VTU
N34 06.9 W119 03.0
V23

This page is printed under user's responsibility

g
hd
323
7 DM

0°
°
E

04

LOS ANGELES
D
(H)113.6 LAX 070° hdg
N33 56.0 W118 25.9
CHATY TWO DEPARTURE (CHARTY2.CHARTY) (PILOT NAV)

LOS ANGELES INTL

126

9812020

Typical Standard Instrument Departure with Transition Procedure

November 19, 2009

CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Page 4-2
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NOTE: When stringing a SID procedure to an Enroute Transition or Enroute segment at their common
waypoint, if speed and/or altitude constraints exist for this waypoint in both procedures, the
constraint(s) from the SID procedure are retained.
The SID altitude/airspeed constraint(s) will probably be lower/slower than the Enroute Transition or
Enroute constraints.

CAUTION: During Standard Instrument Departures, the CMA-9000 FMS does not support the low speed flight
regime of aircraft in which the bank angle is limited by the autopilot to 15 degrees as a function of
airspeed and aircraft flap/slat configuration. Where required by the magnitude of the track angle
change, the CMA-9000 FMS will use up to a maximum of 30 degree bank angle in computing the roll
steering command to the autopilot. Crews should therefore exercise caution when engaging LNAV in
this flight regime and may wish to use the heading select mode until sufficient airspeed is allowing
bank angles larger than 15 degrees. No difficulties are anticipated for engaging LNAV when track
angle changes are less than 15 degrees.

SID SPECIFICATION IN FLIGHT

The CMA-9000 FMS allows the insertion of a SID procedure in flight providing the CMA-9000 FMS is configured
as a ROTOR-type aircraft.

The CMA-9000 FMS allows the activation in flight of an inactive route containing a SID, subject to the
specification of the inactive runway.

The CMA-9000 FMS prefixes an inactive SID sequence with the corresponding inactive runway waypoint on
activation in flight.

The CMA-9000 FMS allows navigation database, custom database, user database and digital map (DMAP)
waypoints as origin and destination airports if it is configured for a ROTOR-type aircraft.

CONDENSED SID AND SID TRANSITION PROCESS

This section provides an overview of the process of selecting the SID and SID transition procedures. The intent
of each step is summarized on the next page.

1. MOD, ACT ROUTE - Select departure/arrival index page.

2. DEP/ARR INDEX - Select departure.

3. DEPARTURES - Select SID, SID transition,and/or runway.

4. MOD, ACT LEGS - Confirm the SID, SID transition and/or runway procedure agrees with the clearance,
then execute the modified route.

5. ALTIMETER SETTING- If CMA-9000 FMS does not have access to baro-corrected altitude, enter QNH on
PROGRESS 3/3 or 4/4 page, to convert pressure altitude to baro-corrected altitude for altitude terminated
legs.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 4-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A detailed description of each CMA-9000 FMS page is contained in Appendix A.

STANDARD INSTRUMENT DEPARTURE (SID) SELECTION

This procedure is based on the SID and SID transition depicted in Figure 4-1 and assumes that only these
portions of the departure are to be loaded at this time.

Display the DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1 page by pressing:

• [DEP/ARR] (if on ground).
• [DEP/ARR] (if airborne and midway point of active route not reached yet).
• From ARRIVALS 1/1 page.
• From DEPARTURES 1/1.

NOTE: If the CMA-9000 FMS is configured for two routes (RTE 1 and RTE 2), the origin and destination of
the inactive route are also displayed. The active route information is displayed in white text. The
inactive route origin and destination airport codes are displayed in cyan.

DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1

ACT RTE 1
1L <DEP KSEA ARR> 1R

2L PANC ARR> 2R
RTE 2
3L <DEP KSEA ARR> 3R

4L PANC ARR> 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

1. Display the DEPARTURES 1/X page by pressing the DEP prompt at LSK 1L.

The DEPARTURES 1/X page is displayed, with the origin airport ICAO code included in the title line. Lists of
SIDs and runways for that airport are displayed

KBFI DEPARTURES 1/1

SIDS RTE 1 RUNWAYS
1L
LACRES 13R 1R

2L QUIET1 31L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <DEP/ARR ROUTE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 4-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

2 Display the desired RUNWAY by pressing the PREV or NEXT key as required, and select the RUNWAY by
pressing the appropriate right hand LSK.

The message “SET QNH” will be displayed in the scratchpad if the CMA-9000 FMS is not receiving Baro
corrected altitude. (See ALTIMETER SETTING procedure in this section). This message is installation
dependent and will not be displayed if deconfigured.

NOTE: Once a runway is selected, then only those SIDs applicable to that runway will be displayed.

3. Display the desired SID by pressing the PREV or NEXT key as required, and select the SID by pressing the
appropriate left hand LSK.

The SID list is replaced by the selected SID, with the legend "<SEL>" beside the name. Transitions available
for the selected SID are listed below the SID, under the heading "TRANS". If no transitions are available, the
word "-NONE-" is displayed. If no runway was selected, a list of runways applicable to the selected SID
appears on the right hand side of the page.

KBFI DEPARTURES 1/1

SIDS RTE 1 RUNWAYS
1L
LACRES<SEL> <SEL> 13R 1R
TRANS
2L HUMPPS 2R

3L ORTIN 3R

4L VAMPS 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE ROUTE> 6R

4. Display the desired SID transition by pressing the PREV or NEXT key as required, and select the transition
by pressing the corresponding left hand LSK.

KBFI DEPARTURES 1/1

SIDS RTE 1 RUNWAYS
1L LACRES<ACT> <ACT> 13R 1R
TRANS
2L VAMPS <ACT> 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <DEP/ARR ROUTE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 4-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The list of transitions is replaced by the selected transition, with the legend "<SEL>" beside the name.

NOTE: Any selected element can be changed by pressing the appropriate left/right hand LSK to re-display the
desired list (toggles the selection).

5. Display the first SID leg by pressing LEGS and PREV or NEXT as required.

NOTE: For certain types of SID and SID transition, the selection of the runway may also be required before the
SID waypoints are loaded into the route from the navigation database. The message “!SELECT
TRANS/RUNWAY” is then displayed in the scratchpad.

6. Close-up any route discontinuity as described in Section 5.

7. Verify the course, distance, altitude/speed advisory, and procedural leg type information of each SID leg in
turn by pressing NEXT as required to display all legs.

NOTE: Pressing ERASE (LSK 6L) at any time during this procedure will cause all selections made up to that
time to be deleted.

8. Make the selected SID and SID transition active by pressing EXEC.

The message “SET QNH” will be displayed in the scratchpad if the CMA-9000 FMS is not receiving Baro-
corrected altitude. (See ALTIMETER SETTING procedure in this section). This message is installation
dependent and will not be displayed if deconfigured.

On DEPARTURES page, the active SID and SID transition are now shown with the legend "<ACT>" beside
the name(s).

ALTIMETER SETTING

Baro-corrected altitude is required to ensure proper sequencing of attitude-terminated legs. If the aircraft
installation provides only a pressure altitude input to the CMA-9000 FMS, manual entry of the altimeter
correction is necessary to convert this input to baro-corrected altitude. Refer to the approved AFMS/RFMS for
further details.

Display the PROGRESS 3/3 or 4/4 page by pressing PROG and PREV.

PROGRESS 3/3 or 4/4 page includes the altitude, QNH altimeter setting and QNH altimeter reference.

PROGRESS 3/3
HEADWIND CROSSWIND
1L
027K T R44K T 1R
TRUE W I N D MANUAL TAS
2L >020T / 45K T 240K T 2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
3L 178o/L000o 177o/220K T
3R
MAGVAR TKE/XTK
4L W015.6o L002o/RO.10N M 4R
ALT(CORR)
5L 34245F T 5R
QNH SET QNH REF
6L >1 0 1 3 M B 1013M B 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 4-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

To enter an altimeter setting, enter value in Inches of Mercury (inHg) or in Millibars (MB) and line select it to
LSK 6L respectively on PROGRESS 3/3 page or on PROGRESS 4/4 page.

When the installation provides for pressure altitude and for hybrid INS/GPS altitude, PROGRESS 4/4 page
fields LSK 6L or 6R display the calculated mean sea level QNH for reference.

NOTE: The CMA-9000 FMS will select and use the altitude from the priority list below:
• baro corrected altitude
• pressure altitude
• IRS baro-inertial altitude
• GPS altitude*
• EGI hybrid inertial altitude.

*For installation including GPS and EGI, the CMA-9000 FMS will select the altitude from the GPS used for
navigation (civil or military from EGI).

For entries, units are automatically detected and decimal point entry is not required.

NOTE: This altimeter setting will be used until after landing, or until leaving the terminal area. The altimeter
setting is cancelled and the field displays dashes ("--.--") on leaving the terminal area (distance from
the departure airport is greater than 33 nm, or the altitude is greater than 16,000 feet above airport
elevation).
When no altimeter setting is defined, field displays boxes ( . ) on entering the terminal area
(distance from the destination airport is less than 30 nm, or the altitude is less than 15,000 feet above
airport elevation). This indicates a mandatory input is required.

A baro-corrected altitude is computed and displayed next to LSK 5L (PROGRESS 3/3) or (PROGRESS 4/4).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 4-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 4-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 5 - ENROUTE

CONTENTS

Subject Page

CONDENSED EN-ROUTE PROCESS ............................................................................................................ 5-1

LEAVING THE TERMINAL AREA................................................................................................................... 5-3
DISPLAYING THE LEGS OF THE ROUTE..................................................................................................... 5-3
INSERTING WAYPOINTS ............................................................................................................................... 5-4
A. PLACE/BEARING/DISTANCE WAYPOINTS ............................................................................................ 5-4
B. PLACE/BEARING-PLACE/BEARING WAYPOINTS ................................................................................ 5-4
C. ALONG-TRACK WAYPOINTS.................................................................................................................... 5-5
D. LATITUDE/LONGITUDE WAYPOINTS ...................................................................................................... 5-6
E. NAVIGATION DATABASE WAYPOINTS .................................................................................................. 5-6
INSERTING A RADIAL-TO SEGMENT........................................................................................................... 5-7
ROUTE DISCONTINUITIES............................................................................................................................. 5-8
ROUTE DISCONTINUITY CLOSE-UP ............................................................................................................ 5-9
WAYPOINT DELETION ................................................................................................................................... 5-9
A. BY CLOSE-UP METHOD ............................................................................................................................ 5-9
B. BY CLEAR KEY ......................................................................................................................................... 5-10
FLY-OVER AND FLY-BY WAYPOINTS........................................................................................................ 5-10
A. TO CONVERT TO FLY-OVER FROM FLY-BY ........................................................................................ 5-10
B. TO CONVERT TO FLY-BY FROM FLY-OVER ........................................................................................ 5-11
LEG SEQUENCING ....................................................................................................................................... 5-12
A. FLY-BY WAYPOINTS ................................................................................................................................ 5-12
B. FLY-OVER WAYPOINTS........................................................................................................................... 5-12
ETA AND EFA................................................................................................................................................ 5-14
WAYPOINT LATITUDE/LONGITUDE DISPLAY........................................................................................... 5-15
PROGRESS ALONG THE ROUTE (DISTANCE-TO-GO, ETA) ................................................................... 5-16
REQUIRED TIME OF ARRIVAL COMPUTATION ........................................................................................ 5-17
WIND COMPONENTS, NAVIGATION ANGLES AND AIR DATA ............................................................... 5-18
OFFSET TRACK INITIATION ........................................................................................................................ 5-19
OFFSET TRACK CANCELLATION .............................................................................................................. 5-20
POSITION FIX INFO DISPLAY...................................................................................................................... 5-21
DOWNTRACK FIX CREATION ..................................................................................................................... 5-22
CURRENT NAVIGATION MODE STATUS ................................................................................................... 5-25
GPS SENSOR AND SATELLITE STATUS ................................................................................................... 5-26
PREDICTIVE RAIM REQUESTS ................................................................................................................... 5-27
PREDICTIVE RAIM SATELLITE DESELECTION......................................................................................... 5-28
GLONASS STATUS 1/2................................................................................................................................. 5-29
GLONASS STATUS 2/2................................................................................................................................. 5-29
WAYPOINT INFORMATION FROM THE NAVIGATION DATABASE ......................................................... 5-30
DUPLICATE IDENTIFIER SELECTION ........................................................................................................ 5-30
RNP MODIFICATION..................................................................................................................................... 5-32

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 5 - ENROUTE

CONTENTS

Subject Page

ROUTE 2 OPTION ......................................................................................................................................... 5-33

A. INACTIVE ROUTE MANIPULATIONS (SUMMARY)............................................................................... 5-34
B. INACTIVE ROUTE MANIPULATIONS (DETAILED STEPS) .................................................................. 5-34
NEAREST....................................................................................................................................................... 5-36
TIMER (If configured) ................................................................................................................................... 5-39
TIMER 1/1 page (If configured) .................................................................................................................... 5-39

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 5

ENROUTE

CONDENSED EN-ROUTE PROCESS

This page sequence gives an overview of the CMA-9000 FMS pages used in the en-route phase of flight. The
intent of each step is summarized on the next page.
ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/2
299o 39.6N M
CAFTA
298o
ACT RTE 1 LEGS 154N M
ETA 1/4
ETA WIND
YZP FL350B
320
CAFTA
o 1916.4Z 300T/ 90
ACT RTE 415 .LEGS 0 N M POS 1/2
YZP01
YZP
THEN
1950.2Z 300T/ 90
CAFTA
††††† ACT PROGRESS 1/4
MOCA1 D I S22C08O00N0TT1.I87NTZU IY3TQD0YT03GT-6/N4M39 0 8 7E3T2A
- - R O U T EYZP
KILLA CAFTA1 8 T3 5Y.Q2 2T 2 4108 1676.792Z <
BKA 228004T 4 . 5 Z 3ACT 00 / 90
MOCA1 PROGRESS 2/4
TOU LEGS 1 9FTR OYM8POS>
Q
8 . 3 N M A L1T8F3T0 . 5 Z A T A
2 T2 2 2 8 7 3 2
KILLA 2 1 2 7 . 0WZI N3D0 0 / 9 0 T K / G S
BKA TRUE TSEA 1300 1803.1Z
1. >020 1
/9TT45O YKQTACT 3 6 4
28
3
1
DRTA
T
T8G7/ 2 2 8 K TE T E
3 2PROGRESS 3/4
<LEGS LEGS POS> T K E M/ X 0
T0K+ 1 7 . 9 <
KILLA ARRIE__ R T A W PTT 1 7 . 2 N RTA
R 0 0 0 / L 0 . 0 0 N M
1 9NTE XY TQ 3 6 4 3 8 7 3 2
CAFTA 1938.0Z
2. I 7ACT LPROGRESS 4/4
<LEGSR NETA
P / TOUANP H S.
R T A T6A8SLEGS>
S MC A 0
N E+ 3 0 . 5
0 DIS
1 . 0 0 / 0 D. E0 S5TN M H E A D W1I.N0DN M CROSSWIND
248K T 288N M
3. N A V PANC
MODE 027
RTA WIND1 2 7K9TN M 0 5 + 4 7 . 2 R44K T
<G P S HDG/DA TAS
0 2 0 T / 4 5 Ko T
290 / L11o 240K T
4. MAGVAR
E019.9o

5.
ALT (CORR)
34245F T
QNH SET QNH REF
6.
>2 9 . 9 2 I N H G 29.92I N H G

7.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NOTE: Progress pages can be in a set of 3 or 4 (depending on configuration).

1. LEGS - displays each route leg and waypoint. Waypoints may be modified or created, and direct-
to/intercept, fly-over or holding procedures performed on these pages.

2. LEGS ETA - displays ETA for each waypoint on the corresponding LEGS page.

3. LEGS POS - displays position in latitude and longitude for each waypoint in the corresponding LEGS page.

4. PROGRESS 1/4 - displays current active waypoint, distance to go (DTG), course, estimated time of arrival
(ETA), next waypoint, wind, current track and ground speed (TK/GS), track angle error and cross track
(TKE/XTK), Required and Actual Navigation Performance (RNP/ANP), HSI scaling, and Navigation Mode.

5. PROGRESS 2/4 - displays identifier of the last (FROM) waypoint overflown, its crossing altitude (ALT) and
actual time of arrival (ATA). Displays the distance to go (DTG), estimate time of arrival (ETA), for the
ACTIVE, NEXT and DESTINATION waypoints of the route.

6. RTA PROGRESS 3/4 - used to compute the TAS required to reach a waypoint at a required time of arrival
(RTA). After entry of RTA waypoint, displays WIND used for RTA or recommended RTA TAS computation.

7. PROGRESS 4/4 - displays the wind components (HEADWIND or TAILWIND, CROSSWIND), Heading and
Drift Angle (HDG/DA), True Air Speed (TAS), Magnetic Variation, System Altitude in feet (ALT), System
Altitude in meters (when configured), QNH Altimeter setting (QNH SET) and QNH Altimeter Reference
(QNH REF).

or:

If the 3-set PROGRESS pages is configured then above steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 are replaced with:

4. PROGRESS 1/3 - displays identifier of the last (FROM) waypoint overflown, its crossing altitude (ALT) and
actual time of arrival (ATA). Displays the distance to go (DTG), estimate time of arrival (ETA), for the
ACTIVE, NEXT and DESTINATION waypoints of the route. Also displays Required and Actual Navigation
Performance (RNP/ANP), HSI scaling, and Navigation Mode.

5. PROGRESS 2/3 - used to compute the TAS required to reach a waypoint at a required time of arrival (RTA).
After entry of RTA waypoint displays WIND used for RTA or recommended RTA TAS computation.

6. PROGRESS 3/3 - displays the wind components (HEADWIND or TAILWIND, CROSSWIND), True/
Magnetic Wind, True Air Speed (TAS), Heading and Drift Angle (HDG/DA), Track and Ground Speed
(TK/GS), Magnetic Variation, Track Angle and Cross-track error (TKE/XTK), System Altitude in feet (ALT),
System Altitude in meters (when configured), QNH altimeter setting (QNH SET) and QNH Altimeter
Reference (QNH REF).

Detailed descriptions of each display page are contained in Appendix A. Sections 6 and 7 describe arrival and
approach procedures. Direct-to and holding pattern procedures are contained in Sections 9 and 10
respectively.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

LEAVING THE TERMINAL AREA

On leaving the terminal area, when the radial distance from the departure airport becomes greater than 33 nm
or the aircraft climbs above 16,000 feet above airport elevation, the CMA-9000 changes from terminal to en-
route phase of flight, with the following indications:
1. HSI lateral deviation sensitivity changes from 1 nm to 5 nm full scale over a ten (10) second period.

2. On the PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4 page the RNP value changes from 1 nm to 2 nm.

NOTE: The FMS will generate the SET QNH message when at a distance greater than 33 nm from the origin
airport or crosses through the transition altitude (TRANS ALT) and either of the following condition
exist:

a) An installed cockpit baro/standard altimeter reference selector is set to “baro” reference, or,
b) The FMS receives a QNH input that indicates a non-standard altimeter setting.

Refer to SET QNH message logic in Section E for more details.

DISPLAYING THE LEGS OF THE ROUTE

Display the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing the [LEGS] functional key.

The active leg to the TO waypoint and the next four legs are displayed. The distance to the TO waypoint is the
distance-to-go from the present position; for subsequent legs it is the leg length.

NOTE: Depending on the configuration, the identifier of the TO waypoint is displayed in reverse video, magenta
or white.

Display all the legs in sequence by pressing [NEXT] as often as required.

NOTE: The maximum number of waypoints in a flight plan allowed by the system is 199 (e.g. maximum of 40
LEGS page can be used).

The legs of the inactive route (if RTE2 option is configured) can also be viewed in the RTE x LEGS 1/X page by
pressing the <RTE x LEGS> prompt (LSK 6L) on the ACT RTE x LEGS page.

NOTE: The pages related to the inactive route are displayed in cyan.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INSERTING WAYPOINTS

A. PLACE/BEARING/DISTANCE WAYPOINTS

With the desired reference waypoint identifier in the scratchpad by keyboard entry or LSK action:

1. Key the bearing and distance separated by a slash (/), into the scratchpad. e.g.: YZP320/45.

2. Display the desired insert location in the route by pressing [LEGS], and [NEXT] or [PREV] as required.

Move the waypoint to the desired place in the route by pressing the appropriate LSK.

The new waypoint is inserted ahead of the existing waypoint. The new waypoint identifier is created with a
name based on the first three characters of the reference waypoint identifier followed by a sequence number,
e.g.: YZP01.

3. Verify the waypoint entry by checking the course and distance of the previous and next legs.

MOD RTE 1 LEGS 2/4

299o 39.6N M
1L
CAFTA 1R
298o 154N M
2L YZP01 2R
THEN
3L 3R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
4L MOCA1 4R
306o 165N M
5L BKA 5R

6L <ERASE LEGS ETA> 6R

4. Make the modified route active by pressing [EXEC].

NOTE: The system allows for a maximum of 99 temporary waypoints in a flight plan.

B. PLACE/BEARING-PLACE/BEARING WAYPOINTS

With the first reference waypoint identifier in the scratchpad:

1. Key into the scratchpad the bearing of the waypoint from the first reference waypoint followed by a slash
(/) and the second reference waypoint and bearing e.g. CAFTA268/YZP148.

2. Display the desired insert location in the route by pressing [LEGS] and [NEXT] or [PREV] as required.

3. Move the waypoint to the desired place in the route by pressing the appropriate LSK.

The new waypoint is inserted ahead of the existing waypoint. The new waypoint identifier is created based on
the identifier of the first reference waypoint as described in the previous procedure, e.g. CAF01.

4. Verify the waypoint entry by checking the course and distance of the previous and next legs.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

5. Make the modified route active by pressing [EXEC].

Waypoints entered by means of place/bearing-place/bearing will be displayed as place/bearing/distance

waypoints, based on the first reference waypoint.

NOTE: The system allows for a maximum of 99 temporary waypoints in a flight plan.

C. ALONG-TRACK WAYPOINTS

An along-track waypoint lies on the inbound (outbound) course to (from) the reference waypoint at the
selected distance. No course change occurs at the along-track waypoint.

With the reference waypoint identifier in the scratchpad:

1. To enter a new waypoint AFTER the reference waypoint, key in /, and distance, e.g. KILLA/20.

or:

2. To enter a new waypoint BEFORE the reference waypoint, key in /, [+/-], distance, e.g. KILLA/-20.

or:

3. To move an initial DME ARC fix along the arc, key in /, desired radial from the DME station, e.g.
D173J/203.

then:

4. Display the reference waypoint location in the route by pressing [LEGS] and [NEXT] or [PREV] as
required.

5. Move the waypoint to the reference waypoint in the route by pressing the appropriate LSK.

NOTE: All along-track waypoints must be inserted at the reference waypoint location, independently of their
actual relative position relative to that waypoint.

6. Verify the waypoint entry by checking the course and distance of the previous and next legs.

7. Make the modified route active by pressing [EXEC].

NOTE: If the leg created by the along-track waypoint overlaps an adjacent waypoint, such that a course
reversal is created, the along-track waypoint is not accepted and the data entry error message "!OUT
OF RANGE" is displayed.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

D. LATITUDE/LONGITUDE WAYPOINTS

1. Key the coordinates into the scratchpad (LATITUDE, LONGITUDE) e.g. N60W146.

NOTE: Coordinates must be entered with whole degrees and optionally whole minutes with a resolution of up to
0.01 minutes.

2. Display the desired insert location in the route by pressing [LEGS] and [NEXT] or [PREV] as required.

3. Move the waypoint to the desired place in route by pressing the appropriate LSK.

4. Verify the waypoint entry by checking course and distance of the previous and next legs.

5. Make the modified route active by pressing [EXEC].

The waypoint name is automatically named "WPT" followed by a sequence number (e.g. WPT01).
Alternatively, the waypoint name can be automatically named using the latitude and longitude degree
components (e.g. N60W120). This option is selectable through configuration pages.

NOTE: The system allows maximum 99 temporary waypoints in a flight plan.

E. NAVIGATION DATABASE WAYPOINTS

1. Key the new waypoint identifier into the scratchpad.

2. Display the desired insert location in the route by pressing [LEGS] and [NEXT] or [PREV] as required.

3. Move the waypoint to the desired place in the route by pressing the appropriate LSK.

If the identifier is not found in the navigation database, the message "!NOT IN DATABASE" will be displayed in
the scratchpad.

4. Verify the waypoint entry by checking course and distance of the previous and next legs.

5. Make the modified route active by pressing [EXEC].

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INSERTING A RADIAL-TO SEGMENT

A Radial-To segment is first defined in the RADIAL-TO page accessed in one of the following ways:
• by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL> (LSK 6R), entering the waypoint ident in the REF ID
field at LSK 1L and then pressing <RADIAL-TO> (LSK 4R);
• by typing /R in the scratchpad and pressing the LSK corresponding to the waypoint on which the operator
wants to define a Radial-To procedure.

NOTE: A"RADIAL-TO" can also be inserted in the inactive route by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or
<TACTICAL> (LSK 6R), [NEXT] (for the INACT DES+SAR or TACTICAL 2/2), entering the waypoint
ident in the REF ID field at LSK 1L and <RADIAL-TO> (LSK 4R).

RTE 1 RADIAL-TO 1/1

FIX
1L
YUL 1R
INBD CRS
o
2L 016 2R
DISTANCE
3L 10.0N M 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NEW RADIAL-TO 6R

1. Enter the parameters defining a Radial-To procedure: waypoint identifier, inbound course (radial) and
distance.

2. Access the ACT RTE x LEGS or RTE x LEGS page(s) by pressing NEW RADIAL-TO at LSK 6L. The
corresponding RTE x LEGS page(s) is accessed with the Radial-To information in the scratchpad.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 2/4

299o 39.6N M
1L
CAFTA 1R
298o 154N M
2L YZP 2R
307o 86.7N M
3L MOCA1 3R
306o 165N M
4L BKA 4R
282o 197N M
5L KILLA 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

YUL076/10.0/R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Press the LSK (1L, 2L, 3L, 4L or 5L) where the segment is to be inserted.

NOTES:

a) If the reference point is not part of the selected route, then the segment is inserted between the waypoint
corresponding to the LSK pressed and the following waypoint.
b) If the reference waypoint belongs to the route, the route is modified as follows:

1- The insertion waypoint is two places ahead. The Radial-To segment replaces the segment between the
insertion waypoint and the next.

2- The insertion waypoint is one waypoint ahead of the reference waypoint. Radial-To segment replaces the
segment between the insertion and the reference waypoints.

3- The insertion waypoint is the reference waypoint. The following segments replace the segment between
the preceding and the reference segment. The segment created between the preceding and the Radial-To
entry waypoints is followed by the Radial-To segment.

4- The insertion waypoint follows the reference waypoint. This is an abnormal situation, where the Radial-To
flight path is flown back and forth at the reference waypoint. A discontinuity is created at the next waypoint.

5- The insertion waypoint is more than one waypoint passed the reference waypoint. The Radial-To segment
is introduced as described for a reference waypoint that does not belong to the route. However the route
will be comprised of a closed loop section.

ROUTE DISCONTINUITIES

Under normal conditions, the active route will form a continuous path of linked waypoints (legs). However, a
ROUTE DISCONTINUITY will be inserted into the flight plan if the end of a leg is indeterminate, or when the
entered waypoint is not part of the existing active flight plan.

Under these conditions, “THEN” followed by a boxed data field and ROUTE DISCONTINUITY lines are inserted
immediately after the new waypoint. Along-track waypoints do not create a ROUTE DISCONTINUITY.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 2/4

299o 39.6N M
1L
CAFTA 300-320 1R
298o 154N M
2L YZP FL350B 2R
320o 45.0N M
3L YZP01 3R
THEN
4L ††††† 4R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
5L KILLA 5R

6L <ERASE LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A ROUTE DISCONTINUITY can be inserted into the flight plan by selecting RTE DISCON (LSK 1R) on the the
DES+SAR or TACTICAL 1/2 or INACT DES+SAR or TACTICAL 2/2 page. The active or inactive RTE x LEGS
page will be displayed with " " in the scratchpad. Insert the " " into the flight plan by pressing the
appropriate left LSK. The ROUTE DISCONTINUITY will be inserted before the selected waypoint.

ROUTE DISCONTINUITY CLOSE-UP

CAUTION: Close-ups can occur only upwards, e.g. moving a downtrack waypoint to an earlier location. Moving a
waypoint downwards (e.g. to a later location) causes the waypoint to be DUPLICATED into the new
location.

With ACT (or MOD) LEGS page displayed showing "THEN" and "ROUTE DISCONTINUITY" lines:

1. Display the next desired waypoint in the route by pressing [NEXT] as required.

2 Key in, or copy the waypoint identifier into the scratchpad by pressing the appropriate LSK.

3. Display the page with the THEN box data field by pressing [PREV] as often as required.

4. Move the waypoint to the THEN field by pressing the appropriate LSK.

5. Verify the entry by checking course and distance of the previous and next legs.

6. Make the modified route active by pressing [EXEC].

NOTE: To minimize keystrokes, the close-up of a route discontinuity should be performed before EXECuting
the route modification which causes it.

WAYPOINT DELETION

A. BY CLOSE-UP METHOD

1. Display the waypoint to be deleted by pressing [LEGS] and [NEXT] or [PREV] as required.

2. Copy the waypoint identifier following the one to be deleted into the scratchpad by pressing the
appropriate LSK.

3. Move the waypoint to the location of the waypoint to be deleted by pressing the appropriate LSK.

The selected waypoint is deleted from the route.

4. Verify the entry by checking the course and distance of the previous and next legs.

5. Make the modified route active by pressing [EXEC].

NOTE: In this case, a ROUTE DISCONTINUITY is not created.

"Close up" is the simplest method to delete a number of consecutive waypoints, but this can also be performed
by a series of [CLR] key operations.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. BY CLEAR KEY

1. Start the deletion by pressing [CLR].

"DELETE" message is displayed in the scratchpad.

NOTE: "DELETE" is displayed only when the scratchpad is empty.

2. Display the desired waypoint by pressing [LEGS], and [NEXT] or [PREV] as required.

3. Delete the selected waypoint by pressing the appropriate LSK.

A "ROUTE DISCONTINUITY" is inserted in place of the deleted waypoint. Any holding pattern or search
pattern associated with the deleted waypoint will also be deleted.

4. Verify the entry by checking course and distance of the previous and next legs.

5. Make the modified route active by pressing [EXEC].

FLY-OVER AND FLY-BY WAYPOINTS

Waypoints are loaded into the route as fly-by (with turn anticipation) or fly-over (no turn anticipation) as coded in
the navigation database. By default, all waypoints, including manually-entered temporary waypoints, are initially
defined as fly-by unless specifically coded as fly-over. Any waypoint can be converted from one type to the
other, with the exception that the missed approach waypoint is always defined as a fly-over waypoint and cannot
be modified.

With any ACT or MOD RTE x LEGS page displayed:

A. TO CONVERT TO FLY-OVER FROM FLY-BY

1. Display the DES+SAR or TACTICAL 1/2 page, and select "FLY-OVER" by pressing [INIT REF],
<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL> (LSK 6R) and <FLY OVER> (LSK 6L).

The ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page is displayed with "/O" in the scratchpad.

NOTE: A"FLY-OVER" can also be inserted in the inactive route by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or
<TACTICAL> (LSK 6R), [NEXT] (for the INACT DES+SAR or TACTICAL 2/2) and <FLY-OVER>
(LSK 6L).
The inactive RTE y LEGS 1/X page is displayed with "/O" in the scratchpad.

or:

Key in "/O".

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

2. Display the desired waypoint by pressing [LEGS], and [PREV] or [NEXT] as required (on the active or
inactive route).

3. Move the "/O" to the waypoint location by pressing the appropriate left hand LSK.

The legend "/O" is displayed to the right of the waypoint name.

4. Make this route modification active by pressing [EXEC].

The waypoint is now defined as a fly-over waypoint and turn anticipation is inhibited for that waypoint only.
The switch to the next leg will occur automatically on crossing over or abeam the waypoint.

B. TO CONVERT TO FLY-BY FROM FLY-OVER

CAUTION: Special care should be taken if any fly-over waypoint extracted from the navigation database is
converted to fly-by (particularly the final approach fix and missed approach holding fix). The crew will
remain responsible at all times for remaining within protected airspace, and for compliance with all
altitude constraints.

1. Display the desired waypoint by pressing [LEGS] and [PREV] or [NEXT] as required.

2. Key in “/”, and move the “/" to the waypoint location by pressing the appropriate left hand LSK.

The legend "/O" is removed from the waypoint name.

3. Make this route modification active by pressing [EXEC].

The waypoint is now defined as a fly-by waypoint and turn anticipation will occur at the appropriate
distance prior to reaching that waypoint.

NOTE: The missed approach waypoint is always defined as a fly-over waypoint, and cannot be converted to
fly-by. Any holding pattern or search pattern defined at a waypoint is cancelled if that waypoint is
converted to a fly-over waypoint.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

LEG SEQUENCING

A. FLY-BY WAYPOINTS

The CMA-9000 FMS sequences fly-by waypoints when crossing the bisector of the active leg and next leg,
or when passing the wayline of the active leg, whichever occurs first. In certain exceptional cases where the
next leg is short, sequencing may occur based on crossing the wayline of the next leg, if that is the first
situation to occur. If the aircraft is performing a downwind approach to a runway, sequencing of the FAF will
only be possible after the aircraft has turned towards the runway.

During the first half of the fly-by leg transition, between the initial turn point and the leg switching point
(bisector), the active waypoint is displayed in white reverse video on the LEGS and PROGRESS pages.
Also, during that period, the waypoint alert information sent to the EFIS will remain on to indicate the
transition (except for Rockwell Collins 3 EFIS, where no waypoint alert is generated during this segment).
This highlights the fact that the HSI is displaying guidance information relative to the next leg whereas the
current active leg has not been sequenced yet. The white waypoint annunciation is an option configurable
(ON/OFF) in the CMA-9000 FMS maintenance pages.

B. FLY-OVER WAYPOINTS

The CMA-9000 FMS sequences fly-over waypoints when passing the wayline of the active leg.
ACT RTE 1 LEGS 2/4
299o 39.6N M
1L
CAFTA 1R
298o 154N M
2L YZP /o 2R
307o 86.7N M
3L MOCA1 3R
306o 165N M
4L BKA 4R
282o 197N M
5L KILLA 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

WPT04
(fly-over)

Act wpt = WPT04

Act wpt = WPT03

WPT03
(fly-by)

WPT02 Sequence
(fly-by) at bisector

TA
D
Act wpt = WPT02

WPT01

LEGEND:
Entered flight plan displayed on GAMA EFIS
Flight path followed by Guidance
Bisector
Wayline
TAD Turn Anticipation Distance
Waypoint symbol
WPTXX Waypoint identifier 0510010

Figure 5-1 Bi-sector and Circular transition

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ETA AND EFA

Display the desired waypoint in the route by pressing [LEGS], [PREV] or [NEXT] as required.

1. Display the ACT RTE x LEGS ETA 1/X or RTE x LEGS ETA 1/X page by pressing <LEGS ETA> (LSK 6R).

RTE 2 LEGS ETA 2/4

ETA EFA
1L
CAFTA 1916.4z 1 3 2 8 KG
1R

2L YZP 1950.2z 1185KG

2R

3L MOCA1 2000.7z 1179KG 3R

4L BKA 2044.5z 950KG 4R

5L KILLA 2127.0z 792KG 5R

6L <LEGS SIMUL RTE2> 6R

ETAs are based on measured wind and forecast waypoint winds (performance data is also used if it is
available).

While on ground, ETEs are displayed instead of ETAs and they are based on the CRZ TAS as entered in the
PLAN DATA page.

EFAs are based either on the current fuel flow and ground speed if a fuel computer is configured or on the fuel
flow entered by the pilot on the FUEL 1/2 page.

2. Return to the previously displayed RTE x LEGS page by pressing [LEGS] or the <LEGS> prompt at LSK 6L.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

WAYPOINT LATITUDE/LONGITUDE DISPLAY

Display the coordinates for each waypoint by pressing [LEGS], <LEGS ETA> (LSK 6R), <LEGS POS>
(LSK 6R).

ACT RTE 1 LEGS POS 1/2

1L CAFTA. 1R
18T YQ 3643 8732
2L YZP 2R
18T YQ 2240 6672
3L MOCA1 3R
19T YQ 2222 8732
4L BKA 4R
19T YQ 3643 8732
5L KILLA 5R
19T YQ 3643 8732
6L <LEGS ETA LEGS> 6R

Return to the LEGS page by pressing [LEGS] or the <LEGS> prompt (LSK 6R).

NOTES:
1. Flight plan waypoint modifications are not permitted on the RTE x LEGS POS Y/X page.
2. The position displayed on the ACT RTE x LEGS POS or RTE x LEGS POS page depends on the
selection for the coordinate system made on the SETUP 1/1 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-15
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PROGRESS ALONG THE ROUTE (DISTANCE-TO-GO, ETA)

NOTE: Similar information is available on PROGRESS 1/3 and PROGRESS 2/3 page, when CMA-9000 FMS is
configured for the three set PROGRESS pages.

Display the PROGRESS 1/4 page by pressing [PROG].

ACT PROGRESS 1/4

280T DTGN M ETA
1L ARRIE 35.2 1817.9Z <
1R
280T
2L TOU /o 88.3 1830.5Z
2R
TRUE W I N D TK/GS
3L >020T/ 45K T 281T/228K T
3R
TKE/XTK
4L R000o/L0.00N M 4R
RNP/ANP HSI SCALE
5L 1.00/0.05N M 1.0N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

1. When operating outside the polar region (latitude above N73° or below S60°) the crew can toggle the
display reference of the wind direction to either TRUE or MAGNETIC by pressing LSK 3L. Upon entry in the
polar region the wind direction reference is forced to TRUE and the toggling is inhibited by removing the
prompt “<” at LSK 3L.

2. To override the current RNP, enter into the scratchpad the desired RNP value and then press LSK 5L.
Manually entered RNP value will be displayed in large font size.

NOTE: If the entered RNP exceeds the default RNP for the phase of flight, an alert message "VERIFY RNP
VALUE" will be displayed in the scratchpad.

3. To view the status of the current navigational sensor, press LSK 6L and the POS INIT/REF 2/2 page is
displayed.

4. Display PROGRESS 2/4 page by pressing [NEXT].

ACT PROGRESS 2/4

FROM ALTF T ATA
1L
SEA 1300 1803.1Z
1R
TO DTGN M ETE
2L ARRIE 17.2 00+17.9<
2R
NEXT
3L TOU 68.7 00+30.5 3R
DEST
4L PANC 1279 05+47.2 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PROGRESS 1/4 and 2/4 pages always show the information for the currently active route. Route modifications
which have not yet been EXECuted are ignored.

NOTE: When established in a hold, the FROM and TO waypoints become the same and the TO waypoint
course is replaced by the title "HOLD AT". The ATA is the time of entry of the hold, on the first crossing
of the holding waypoint. The distance-to-go to the TO WAYPOINT is from present position direct to the
holding waypoint. The ETA to the TO WAYPOINT is for the next crossing of the holding waypoint. The
ETAs and distances to go for the next and destination waypoints are based on the holding waypoint
location and current TAS.

REQUIRED TIME OF ARRIVAL COMPUTATION

With the desired waypoint identifier in the scratchpad:

Display the RTA PROGRESS 3/4 or 2/3 page by pressing [PROG], [PREV], [PREV] or [PROG], [NEXT]
respectively.

1. Move the waypoint identifier into the RTA WPT field by pressing LSK 1L.
ACT RTA PROGRESS 3/4
RTA WPT RTA
1L
CAFTA 1938.0Z
1R
RTA TAS DIS
2L 248K T 288N M
2R
RTA WIND
3L 020T / 45K T
3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

2. Key in the required time of arrival (e.g.: 1938) and move the entry into the RTA field by pressing RTA
(LSK 1R).

The computed ETA is replaced by the manual entry of RTA, displayed in LARGE font. The required TAS to
reach the RTA waypoint at the required time is computed. RTA WIND is current wind, or CRZ WIND if on the
ground. Manual entry of the RTA TAS will result in a new ETA. Manual entry of RTA WIND allows the
evaluation of the ETA for the given waypoint.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-17
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

WIND COMPONENTS, NAVIGATION ANGLES AND AIR DATA

Display the PROGRESS 3/3 or 4/4 page by pressing [PROG] and [PREV].

PROGRESS 3/3 or 4/4 page includes the display of wind, aircraft heading, drift angle, true air speed, magnetic
variation, altitude, QNH altimeter setting and QNH Altimeter Ref (if configured).

NOTE: The QNH ALTIMETER REF is displayed at 6R and therefore computed by the CMA-9000 FMS only
when the 4-page set PROGRESS is configured and when the pressure altitude (from ADC) and hybrid
INS/GPS altitude (from the EGI/GPS) are available.

The HEADWIND (TAILWIND) field displays the present headwind or tailwind components in knots. The sense
of the CROSSWIND component is the side FROM which the wind is blowing.

ACT PROGRESS 4/4

HEADWIND CROSSWIND
027K T R44K T
1L 1R
HDG/DA TAS
2L 290o/ L11o 240K T
2R
MAGVAR
3L E019.9o 3R

4L 4R
ALT(CORR) METRIC ALT
5L 34245F T 1044M 5R
QNH SET QNH REF
6L >2 9 . 9 2 I N H G 29.92I N H G 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-18
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

OFFSET TRACK INITIATION

Display the ACT RTE x 1/X page by pressing [RTE].

ACT RTE 1 1/3

ORIGIN DEST
1L
KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF KSEAPANC1 3R

4L <ERASE RTE1 CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <BACKTRACK USER ROUTES> 5R

OFFSET
6L <RTE 2 R0.0N M 6R

1. Enter the desired track offset in nautical miles (e.g.: L10.0) and move the entry into the OFFSET field by
pressing LSK 6R.

2. Initiate the capture of the offset track by pressing [EXEC].

Navigation and guidance will now be relative to the offset track. If the CMA-9000 FMS is autopilot-coupled,
the CMA-9000 FMS will capture the offset track at a 45 degree angle if the offset value is greater than the
normal cross-track limit. Offset route waypoints are located on the bisector of the angle between the original
route legs. The OFST annunciator of the FMS illuminates.

NOTE: Offset track navigation can be initiated only on legs defined by two waypoints or on direct-to.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-19
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

OFFSET TRACK CANCELLATION

Automatic Cancellation:

An active offset path is automatically cancelled upon any of the following conditions:

• Active leg is not a TF (track to fix) or DF (direct to fix) leg; or

• A direct-to/intercept is executed; or
• Active leg is part of an approach; or
• Holding Pattern or search pattern defined on the active waypoint; or
• Next leg is a DME arc
• Active TO waypoint is designated as fly-over

Manual Cancellation:

Display the ACT RTE x 1/X page by pressing [RTE].

1. Set the offset value to zero by entering 0 (zero) into the scratchpad and moving it into the OFFSET field by
pressing LSK 6R.

or:

2. Delete the offset value by pressing [CLR] and then LSK 6R.

3. Initiate return to the original track by pressing [EXEC].

The advisory message "END OF OFFSET" is displayed in the scratchpad. The FMS OFST annunciator is
turned off. Navigation and guidance will now be relative to the original track. If autopilot-coupled, the CMA-
9000 FMS will capture the original track at a 45 degree angle if the offset value was greater than the normal
cross-track limit.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-20
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

POSITION FIX INFO DISPLAY

With the desired waypoint identifier in the scratchpad:

Display the FIX INFO 1/1 page by pressing [FIX] or [INIT REF], <FIX INFO>.

FIX INFO 1/1

FIX CRS/DIS REF
o
1L
ANN 310 / 456N M TO< 1R

2L -- DOWNTRACK FIXES --
2R
RAD/DIS DTG ETA
3L ---o/ - - - N M 3R

4L ---o/ - - - N M 4R

5L <ABEAM 5R

6L 6R

1. Enter the waypoint identifier in the scratchpad and move it into the FIX field by pressing LSK 1L.

The bearing (radial) and distance FROM the FIX to the aircraft are displayed. The displayed reference of the
bearing (radial) (e.g. true or magnetic North) is consistent with the other navigation angles as described in the
SETUP page in Section 3.

2. Display the reciprocal by pressing REF (LSK 1R).

The course and distance TO the FIX from the aircraft are displayed as seen in the figure above.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-21
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DOWNTRACK FIX CREATION

With the desired reference waypoint identifier in the scratchpad:

Display the FIX INFO 1/1 page by pressing [FIX] or [INIT REF], <FIX INFO>.

1. Move the waypoint identifier into the "fix" field by pressing LSK 1L.

FIX INFO 1/1

FIX CRS/DIS REF
o
1L
ANN 310 / 466N M TO< 1R

2L -- DOWNTRACK FIXES --
2R
RAD/DIS DTG ETA
3L 175o/ 80 N M 4 2 0 N M 2 0 3 3 . 0 Z 3R

4L 4R

5L <ABEAM 5R

6L <ERASE FIXES 6R
ANN175.0/79.9

2. To create a downtrack fix along the flight plan where the radial from the entered "fix" intersects, key in the
radial (e.g. 175) and press LSK 3L or LSK 4L. or:

3. To create a downtrack fix along the flight plan where the distance from the entered "fix" intersects, key in /,
distance (e.g. /80) and press LSK 3L or LSK 4L. or:

4. To create a downtrack fix along the flight plan where the aircraft will be directly abeam the entered "fix",
press <ABEAM> (LSK 5L).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-22
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The distance to go (DTG) and ETA to the intersection point are displayed. If the radial, distance or abeam fix
does not intercept the route ahead of the aircraft, or the intersection point does not lie within 500 nm of the
reference fix, then the advisory message "!INVALID INTERSECTION" is displayed. Figure 5-2 shows a typical
downtrack fix creation involving the radial, distance or abeam fix intercepting the route ahead of the aircraft.
The displayed reference of the bearing (radial) (e.g. true or magnetic North) is consistent with the other
navigation angles as described in the SETUP page in Section 3.

FIX INFO 1/1

FIX CRS/DIS REF
o
1L ANN 310 / 456N M TO< 1R

2L -- DOWNTRACK FIXES --
2R
RAD/DIS DTG ETA
3L 175o/ 80 N M 5 4 7 N M 0 3 0 7 . 2 Z 3R
o
4L 163 / 100N M 520N M 0239.2Z 4R

5L ABEAM 5R
216o/ 6 0 N M 5 9 9 N M 0400.6Z
6L <ERASE FIXES 6R
ANN216.3/60.2

5. Line select the intersection to the scratchpad by pressing LSK 3L, LSK 4L, or LSK 5L.

The intersection is displayed as a Place Bearing/Distance in the scratchpad e.g. ANN216.3/60.2.

NOTE: When the FIX is a 7-character waypoint identifier, the intersection is displayed as a waypoint
coordinate.

6. Display the desired location in the route by pressing [LEGS] and [NEXT] or [PREV] as required.

7. Move the waypoint to the desired place in the route by pressing the appropriate LSK.

8. Verify the waypoint entry and make the modified route active by pressing [EXEC].

NOTE: When no intersection is found with the active Flight Plan, the FIX INFO page will retain the radial or
distance entry.

If an ARINC 702 type EFIS is configured, it will display a green circle around the FIX waypoint. The
EFIS will display the radial as a line extending from the FIX. The distance is displayed as a circle with
its radius equal to the distance value entered.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-23
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

M
100N
BKA

ABEAM CROSSING
ANN 216/60

ANN
M
60N
6°
R-21 REFERENCE
FIX
MOCA1
75°
R-1

RADIAL CROSSING
ANN 175/80

DISTANCE CROSSING
ANN 163/100

YZP
4

G704127.cdr

Figure 5-2 Typical Downtrack Fix Creation

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-24
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CURRENT NAVIGATION MODE STATUS

Display the ACT PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4 page by pressing [PROG].

ACT PROGRESS 1/4

280T DTGN M ETA
ARRIE 35.2 1817.9Z <
1L 1R
280T
2L TOU 88.3 1830.5Z
2R
TRUE W I N D TK/GS
3L >020T / 45K T 281T/228K T
3R
TKE/XTK
4L R000o/L0.00N M 4R
RNP/ANP HSI SCALE
5L 1.00/0.05N M 1.0N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

NOTE: The current navigation mode (NAV MODE) of the CMA-9000 FMS is displayed at LSK 6L. The Required
Navigation Performance (RNP) for the phase of flight and the current estimated navigation performance
(ANP) are displayed in nautical miles. The Required Navigation Performance (RNP) may be manually
entered by keying in RNP in nautical miles (e.g. 1.0) and moving it to the RNP field by pressing LSK 5L.
If the entered RNP exceeds the RNP for the phase of flight then the "VERIFY RNP VALUE" alert
message is raised. Refer to Section 15 RNP Capability for additional information.

More information on the NAVigation mode can be found on the POS INIT/REF 2/2. To access the POS
INIT/REF 2/2 page press the <NAV MODE> (LSK 6L).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-25
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

GPS SENSOR AND SATELLITE STATUS

Display the NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R).

NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1

1L <PREDICT RAIM GPS> 1R

2L <GLONASS DME> 2R

3L <DVS VOR/DME/TCN> 3R

4L <INS/GPS INS> 4R

5L <INS/DVS 5R

6L <INIT/REF DESELECT> 6R

Display the GPS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing GPS (LSK 1R).

Two GPS monitor pages are displayed, accessible by pressing the [NEXT] or [PREV] functional key.

NOTE: DME, VORDME, VORDME/TCN, INS, KALMAN, DVS, INS/GPS and INS/DVS prompts are displayed
only if their interfaces are configured.

For dual GPS installations with a civll GPS and a Litton LN-100GT EGI configured, selection of LSK 1R will
display the following page which can then be used to call up the specific civil or miltary GPS status page:

GPS NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1

C GPS>
1L 1R

2L M GPS>
2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-26
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PREDICTIVE RAIM REQUESTS

CAUTION: It is not recommended to perform manual predictive RAIM requests when the aircraft is about to enter
the approach phase of flight as the CMA-9000 FMS automatically sends predictive RAIM requests as
well. No manual predictive RAIM request should be done when the aircraft is within DTG=6 nm to the
FAF waypoint.

Display the NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R).

Display the GPS PREDICT RAIM 1/1 page by pressing <PREDICT RAIM> (LSK 1L).

GPS PREDICT RAIM 1/1

IDENT 1145Z NONE
1L
PANC 1150Z ENRT
1R
ETA 1155Z TERM
2L 1200Z 1200Z APPR
2R
1205Z APPR
3L 1210Z TERM
3R
1215Z NONE
4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS SAT DESEL> 6R

The GPS PREDICT RAIM 1/1 page for the destination airport is displayed, with the current estimated time
of arrival (ETA) in the LSK 2L field. The arrival times listed on the right hand side of the display are for the
ETA (at the centre in reverse video), and at intervals of 5 minutes before and after the ETA, up to a
maximum of 15 minutes. After a short delay, the results of the predictive RAIM computation are displayed
for each arrival time. The possible outcomes are:

DISPLAYED PREDICTED HIL (NOTE 1)

APPR Less than or equal to 0.3 nm.
TERM Greater than 0.3 nm but less than or equal to 1.0 nm.
ENRT Greater than 1.0 nm but less than or equal to 2.0 nm.
(NOTE 2)
NONE Greater than 2.0 nm.
" **** " No computed HIL data due to lack of current almanac information, or due to GPS sensor
failure.

1. To determine the predicted HIL for any waypoint, key the waypoint identifier into the scratchpad and move it
to the IDENT field by pressing LSK 1L.

The ETA field is replaced by dashes ("---"), and the right side of the display blanks.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-27
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

2. Key the ETA for the new waypoint into the scratchpad and move it to the ETA field by pressing LSK 2L.

The range of arrival times appears on the right side of the display and after a short delay the predicted HIL
value for each arrival time is displayed.

NOTES:

1. A HIL prediction can be initiated at any time and for any waypoint stored in the system whether or not it is part
of the active route. If the identifier is that of an airport, and an approach has been selected, the integrity
computation is based on the missed approach waypoint, otherwise the airport reference location is used. If the
waypoint is not part of the route, the ETA must also be entered.

2. Also used for oceanic/remote phase of flight.

If the predictive RAIM function indicates that GPS instrument approach integrity will not be available at
the ETA, the operator should modify the ETA (new ETA attainable by flying at a different speed or making
a flight plan change), conduct the approach with other approved equipment, or discontinue IFR
operations.

PREDICTIVE RAIM SATELLITE DESELECTION

Display the GPS SAT DESELECT page by pressing <SAT DESEL> (LSK 6R) from the GPS PREDICT RAIM
1/1 page.

GPS SAT DESELECT 1/1

DESEL -SATELLITE PRN--
-- 01 02 03 04 05
1L 1R
RESEL 06 07 08 09 10
2L -- 11 12 13 14 15
2R
16 17 18 19 20
3L 21 22 23 24 25 3R
26 27 28 29 30
4L 31 32 4R

5L 5R

6L <PREDICT RAIM 6R

GPS Satellites can be excluded from the PRAIM calculations if a satellite is known to be providing erroneous
data. Satellite status information may be obtained from Notices to Airmen (NOTAM).

1. Key into scratchpad the satellite Pseudo Range Number (PRN).

2. Press LSK 1L to deselect the satellite. The corresponding number will appear in reverse video white color.

Or

3. Press LSK 2L to re-select the satellite. The corresponding number will reappear in mdieum font white color.

More then one satellite can be excluded from the PRAIM calculations. The deselected satellites are
automatically re-enabled at the next system power on.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-28
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

GLONASS STATUS 1/2

Display the GLONASS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT/REF], <NAV STATUS>, <GLONASS>.

GLONASS STATUS 1/2

OP MODE
1L NAV
1R
SAT VIS SAT TRK
2L 8 5
2R
HOR FOM VER FOM
3L 20 M 65M
3R
HOR DOP VER DOP
4L 1 2 4R
HOR INT
5L O.20NM 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

NOTE: The GLONASS STATUS 1/2 page is only used to display the GLONASS transmitted parameters. The
field descriptions are identical to the GPS STATUS 1/2 page. The GLONASS page is displayed in cyan
color to emphasize the fact that GLONASS is not used by the FMS for navigation.

GLONASS STATUS 2/2

Display the GLONASS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing [INIT/REF], <NAV STATUS>, <GLONASS>.

GLONASS STATUS 2/2

POSITION
o o
1L N45 30.91 W073 38.02
1R
TK/GS VER SPD
o
2L 072 /600KT +220FT/MIN
2R
MSL ALT
3L +12000FT
3R

4L 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1506:24Z JUL11/99 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

NOTE: The GLONASS STATUS 2/2 page is only used to display the GLONASS transmitted parameters. The
field descriptions are identical to the GPS STATUS 2/2 page. The GLONASS page is displayed in cyan
color to emphasize the fact that GLONASS is not used by the FMS for navigation.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-29
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

WAYPOINT INFORMATION FROM THE NAVIGATION DATABASE

1. Key in the desired identifier (waypoint, navaid, airport, temporary waypoint), or copy it into the scratchpad
from any other page.

2. Display the WPT DATA 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <WPT DATA> (LSK 1R).

WPT DATA 1/1

YUL WPT POS
N45o28.08 W073o44.48
1L 1R
BRG/DIS 295T/91.0N M
2L 2R
DATABASE NAVIGATION
3L 3R
REGION CAN CY
4L TYPE/CLASS VORDME/H/C 4R
ELEVATION +230F T
5L FREQ 116.30M H Z 5R
DECLIN W016o
6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

3. Move the scratchpad entry to the ID field by pressing LSK 1L.

4. Detailed information appropriate to the selected identifier type is displayed in one or two pages as required.
If the identifier is not contained in the database, the "!NOT IN DATABASE" advisory message is displayed in
the scratchpad.

DUPLICATE IDENTIFIER SELECTION

The SELECT WPT 1/X page is automatically displayed when multiple occurrences of the entered identifier are
found in the navigation database. The duplicated identifier is incorporated into the page title line. Duplicated
identifiers are listed on as many pages as necessary, in order of increasing distance from the previous waypoint.

NOTE: Display the desired coordinates by pressing [NEXT] as required and then select it by pressing the
appropriate left or right hand LSK.

SELECT WPT RNG 1/1

SAM SK VHF NAV
N05o59.50 W073o25.30
1L 1R
SPA AD WAYPOINT
2L S12o19.50 E134o53.30
2R
CAN CY AIRPORT
3L N45o27.00 W073o44.00 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-30
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The display reverts to the page where the duplicated identifier was entered, with the selected identifier in the
data field.

When the operator enters in the flight plan (active or inactive) a waypoint identifier which is not unique, then the
"SELECT WPT" page is displayed if any of the two entry modalities was used:

1. Via the FMS keypad;

2. Via the FMS line select key from any page except the "RTE x LEGS" page(s) or the "PROGRESS" page(s)
or the "RTE x" page(s).

The operator selected waypoint via the "SELECT WPT" page is inserted in the flight plan followed by a
discontinuity.

When the operator enters a unique waypoint identifier in the flight plan (active or inactive) via the FMS keypad
or via the FMS line select key from any page except the RTE x LEGS page(s) or the "PROGRESS" page(s) or
the "RTE x" page(s), the waypoint is inserted in the flight plan followed by a discontinuity.

When the operator inserts a waypoint copied using the FMS line select key on the "RTE x LEGS" page or the
"PROGRESS" page or the "RTE x" page in the flight plan (active or inactive), a close up to that particular
waypoint will be done (if the waypoint is inserted before its current position in the flight plan) or the waypoint will
be inserted in the flight plan followed by a discontinuity (if the waypoint is inserted after its current position in the
flight plan).

If the operator inserts in the active route (inactive route) a waypoint copied from any inactive route (active route)
page then the behavior will be the same as when entering an identifier using the FMS keypad.

NOTE: The flight plan can contain waypoints with the same identifier but with different coordinates (a frequent
case being user waypoints named by the operator with an identifier already existing in the navigation
database).

The custom database (usually built using a navigation database) should not contain duplicate waypoints
compared with the navigation database.
If duplicate waypoints exist then the custom database occurrence will not be shown on the SELECT
WPT page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-31
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RNP MODIFICATION

Refer to Section 15 RNP Capability for a detailed description of the CMA-9000 FMS RNP capability.

Display the PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4 page by pressing [PROG].

ACT PROGRESS 1/4

280T DTGN M ETA
ARRIE 35.2 1817.9Z <
1L 1R
280T
2L TOU 88.3 1830.5Z
2R
TRUE W I N D TK/GS
3L >020T / 45K T 281T/228K T 3R
TKE/XTK
4L R000o/L0.00N M 4R
RNP/ANP HSI SCALE
5L 1.00/0.05N M 1.0N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

1. Key into the scratchpad the desired RNP (Required Navigation Performance in nautical miles) and move it
to the RNP field by pressing LSK 5L.

The entered RNP value is displayed in LARGE font. If the entered RNP value exceeds the default RNP for
the phase of flight then the alert message "VERIFY RNP VALUE" will be displayed in the scratchpad.

2. To revert to the default RNP for the phase of flight, press [CLR] then LSK 5L.

The default value for the phase of flight (Enroute=2.0; Terminal=1.0; Approach=0.3) is displayed in the RNP
field in medium font.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-32
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ROUTE 2 OPTION

When configured with RTE 2 option, two independent routes (RTE 1 and RTE 2) may reside in the CMA-9000
FMS at the same time. The CMA-9000 FMS allows activation of one route as the active flight plan. The other
flight plan is stored as the inactive route. The default route at power-up, with both routes empty, is RTE 1.

The inactive route may be manually created or selected from the stored custom routes. It may also be copied
from the active route. The procedures to create, select, and/or edit the inactive route are identical to those of
the active route.

When configuring the NO xFMS option, the prompt ERASE RTEx appears at LSK 4L when RTE x is defined. It
allows to erase the RTE x.

1. Display the ACT RTE x 1/X page by pressing [RTE] (a route has been previously entered and executed).

ACT RTE 1 1/2

ORIGIN DEST
1L KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L 23R AS007 2R
ROUTE
3L KSEAPANC1 3R

4L <ERASE RTE1 CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <BACKTRACK USER ROUTES> 5R

OFFSET
6L <RTE 2 R0.0N M 6R

2. Access the inactive route by pressing LSK 6L (e.g. RTE 2).

NOTE: The inactive route pages are displayed in monochrome cyan to distinguish them from the active route
pages.

RTE 2 1/2
ORIGIN DEST
†††† ††††
1L 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- -------- 2R
ROUTE
3L ---------- 3R

4L CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <RTE COPY USER ROUTES> 5R

6L <RTE 1 ACTIVATE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-33
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. INACTIVE ROUTE MANIPULATIONS (SUMMARY)

1. Using the procedures outlined in Section 3, enter the origin, destination, and waypoints, or select a
stored custom route as the inactive route. Next, press <CONFIRM>, (LSK 6R) to save the modifications
or <CANCEL> (LSK 6L) to delete them.

NOTE: In the case of a dual CMA-9000 FMS installation, the inactive route modification is cross-talked to the off-
side FMS upon pressing the <CONFIRM> prompt.

If the EFIS model permits, the EFIS displays the inactive flight plan in cyan when an inactive route page is
displayed on the FMS.

2. The inactive route is edited directly on the ROUTE, LEGS, DEP/ARR and HOLD pages. Both active and
inactive routes have their own independent set of ROUTE, LEGS, DEP/ARR, FUEL and HOLD pages.

3. To ACTIVATE the inactive route, press LSK 6R on the inactive RTE page, followed by pressing the
[EXEC] key.

NOTE: The following RTE COPY procedures highlight the basic steps required to select, then activate a second
route.

B. INACTIVE ROUTE MANIPULATIONS (DETAILED STEPS)

1. To copy the active route, e.g. RTE 1, to the inactive route, press LSK 5L of the inactive RTE page. RTE
1 remains active and continues to be used for navigation.

RTE 2 1/2
ORIGIN DEST
1L
KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L 23R AS007 2R
ROUTE
3L KSEAPANC1 3R

4L CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <RTE COPY USER ROUTES> 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

2. Press LSK 6R to CONFIRM copying of the route. ERASE RTE2 appear at LSK 4L when RTE 2 is
defined.

NOTE: The copied route contains the current active TO and subsequent waypoints. Overflown waypoints are
not copied.

In the case of a dual CMA-9000 FMS installation, the inactive route is crosstalked to other FMU's upon
each CONFIRM of flight plan changes and upon synchronization.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-34
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. Press [LEGS] to display the RTE 2 waypoints. Modify the RTE x LEGS page as required to build a new
flight plan based on the current active route.
RTE2 LEGS 1/5
299o 39.6N M
1L
CAFTA 1R
298o 154N M
2L YZP 2R
307o 86.7N M
3L MOCA1 3R
306o 165N M
4L BKA 4R
282o 197N M
5L KILLA 5R

6L <RTE 1 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

4. Access the RTE x LEGS ETA and FUEL pages to perform predictions as for the active route. Predictions
are based on the aircraft’s present position direct to the first waypoint in the inactive route.

5. When changes are completed, press the [RTE] key to access the RTE 2 page.

RTE 2 1/2
ORIGIN DEST
1L
KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L 23R AS007 2R
ROUTE
3L KSEAPANC1 3R

4L CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <RTE COPY USER ROUTES> 5R

6L <RTE 1 ACTIVATE> 6R

6. Press <ACTIVATE> (LSK 6R) to the inactive route.

7. The RTE 2 LEGS page is displayed. Press the [EXEC] key to confirm activation of RTE 2.

MOD RTE 2 LEGS 2/4

299o 39.6N M
1L
CAFTA 1R
298o 154N M
2L YZP 2R
307o 86.7N M
3L MOCA1 3R
306o 165N M
4L BKA 4R
282o 197N M
5L KILLA 5R

6L <ERASE LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-35
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

8. Prior to pressing <ACTIVATE>, <ERASE> (LSK 6L), may be used to cancel activation.

9. The LEGS page title legend changes from MOD to ACT. The former inactive route, now active, is
displayed in multiple colors.

10. The previously active route’s TO and subsequent waypoints now form the inactive route (displayed in
cyan).

NEAREST

The CMA-9000 FMS presents information about the current airspace by providing bearing and distance with
respect to a center reference waypoint of the 50 closest waypoints within a distance of 640 nautical miles for
either of the following categories of waypoints:

• AIRPORT
• Non Directional Beacon (NDB)
• VHF NAV
• CUSTOM WPT
• USER WPT

The respective waypoints are displayed in order of distance from the closest to the farthest. By default, the
reference point is selected to be the current position of the aircraft. The first time the NEAREST page is accessed
after a cold start, the center reference waypoint is set to the present position (PPOS). If the reference waypoint is
the present position, distance and bearing information are refreshed every 10 seconds, otherwise for any other
waypoint type, the bearing and distance are computed once (before the respective page is exited and entered
again). For the NEAREST USER WPTS page the bearing and distance of each displayed waypoint are updated
every 10 seconds regardless of the center reference waypoint type.

Display the NEAREST page by pressing [INIT REF] and <NEAREST> (LSK 3R) or [INIT/ REF], <BULLS EYE>,
[PREV], <NEAREST> {if Tactical Config BULLS EYE is configured}.

NEAREST 1/1

1L
<AIRPORT USER WPTS> 1R

2L <VHF NAV CUSTOM WPTS> 2R

3L <NDB 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-36
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Display NEAREST AIRPORT 1/X page:

NEAREST AIRPORT 1/13

ID/BRG/DIS/NAME
1L CFYF 125o/ 0.4NM
1R
FORT YOUTH
2L KPT0 205o/ 9.4N M
2R
POINTS ZERODE INTERNATIO
3L CYUL 125o/19.4N M
3R
DORVAL INTERNATIONAL
4L KBBF 165o/53.4N M 4R
BOX BAY
5L <DIRECT-TO R E F I D P P O S 5R

6L <NEAREST DES+SAR> 6R

Press [INIT REF], <NEAREST> (LSK 3R) and <AIRPORT> (LSK 1L) to display the NEAREST AIRPORT
1/X page. Information for 4 airports is displayed on each page. To view the other pages press [NEXT] or
[PREV].

When entering any NEAREST AIRPORT page, the first entry of the respective page is displayed in reverse
video. By pressing any other LSK the corresponding identifier is displayed in reverse video and it is copied
in the scratchpad.

Any location contained in this page can be selected as a DIRECT-TO destination. The destination is
selected by pressing the corresponding LSK of the desired destination and then pressing <DIRECT-TO>
(LSK 5L). The MOD RTE x LEGS 1/X page is displayed and the selected waypoint identifier is inserted as
the first waypoint of the page.

Also any location displayed on one of the NEAREST AIRPORT pages can be selected as a DES+SAR or
TACTICAL destination. The destination is selected by pressing the corresponding LSK of the desired
destination and then pressing <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL> (LSK 6R). The DES+SAR or TACTICAL 1/2
page is displayed and the selected waypoint identifier is inserted in the REF ID filed (LSK 1L).

The center reference waypoint (LSK 5R) is set to the present position (PPOS) when the page is accessed
after a cold start. The center reference waypoint can be selected from any of the following databases:
Navigation Database, Custom Database, User Database, Temporary Waypoint List, Active Route or Inactive
Route.

To modify the source of the reference computation, press LSK 5R.

Whenever one of the following conditions occurs, the center reference waypoint is set to PPOS and the
NEAREST waypoint list is refreshed:

The center reference waypoint is a User or Temporary or Route waypoint and the waypoint is deleted.

The center reference waypoint is from the User database and the database is updated.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-37
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. DISPLAY NEAREST VHF NAV:

NEAREST VHF NAV 1/5

ID/BRG/DIS ID/BRG/DIS
MRS ML
1L 1R
036o/0.09N M 306o/0.73N M
2L MBO MTG
2R
127o/5.99N M 242o/6.38N M
3L AN AVN 3R
335o/31.2N M 329o/39.2N M
4L LUC DGN 4R
094o/45.5N M 049o/50.8N M
5L <DIRECT-TO REF ID PPOS 5R

6L <NEAREST DES+SAR> 6R

Press [INITREF], <NEAREST> and <VHF NAV > to display the NEAREST VHF NAV 1/X page. The
information for 8 waypoints is displayed on each page. To view the other pages press [NEXT] or [PREV].

Any location contained in this page can be selected as a DIRECT-TO destination. The destination is
selected by pressing the corresponding LSK of the desired destination and than pressing <DIRECT-TO>
(LSK 5L). The MOD RTE LEGS 1/X page is displayed and the selected waypoint identifier is inserted as the
first waypoint of the page.

Also any location displayed on one of the NEAREST VHF NAV pages can be selected as a DES+SAR or
TACTICAL destination. The destination is selected by pressing the corresponding LSK of the desired
destination and then pressing <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL> (LSK 6R). The DES+SAR or TACTICAL 1/2
page is displayed and the selected waypoint identifier is inserted in the REF ID filed (LSK 1L).

The center reference waypoint (LSK 5R) is set to the present position (PPOS) when the page is accessed
after a cold start. The center reference waypoint can be selected from any of the following databases:
Navigation Database, Custom Database, User Database, Temporary Waypoint List, Active Route or Inactive
Route.

To modify the source of the reference computation, press LSK 5R.

When the center reference waypoint is changed, the list is re-ordered by proximity using the entered
waypoint.

Whenever one of the following conditions occurs, the center reference waypoint is set to PPOS and the
NEAREST waypoint list is refreshed.

1. The center reference waypoint is a User or Temporary or a Route waypoint and the waypoint is deleted.

2. The center reference waypoint is from the User database and the database is updated.

NOTE: The NEAREST NDB, NEAREST USER WPTS, and NEAREST CUSTOM WPTS pages are
similar to the NEAREST VHF NAV pages.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-38
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TIMER (If configured)

The CMA-9000 FMS provides a timer, which may be used as a count-up or countdown timer, and which will
generate a TIMER ALARM alert message upon expiration.

The CMA-9000 FMS allows the user to either enter in an alarm time or a count-down value (range from 0 to 23
hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds).

With the timer not activated, and a valid alarm time entered, the user has the ability to add 5, 15 or 30 minutes
to the alarm time.

By initiating the timer to start, if an alarm time was set, then the time remaining is displayed in the countdown
field. Similarly, if a countdown time was set, the corresponding alarm time is displayed.

Once activated, the CMA-9000 FMS enables the user to update the timer, stop or deactivate/clear the timer.

The TIMER continues to function in the background, even though the page is no longer displayed, until the timer
reaches zero, or is manually stopped.

TIMER 1/1 page (If configured)

Display TIMER 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT] and <TIMER> (LSK 3R).

A. Display when no data is entered or after pressing [CLR]:

TIMER 1/1
ALARM TIME COUNTDOWN
1L ----:--z 0000:00 1R

2L ADD 5 MIN> 2R

3L ADD 15 MIN> 3R

4L ADD 30 MIN> 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-39
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Display after an alarm time is entered:

TIMER 1/1
ALARM TIME COUNTDOWN
1L 1234:12z ----:-- 1R

2L ADD 5 MIN> 2R

3L ADD 15 MIN> 3R

4L ADD 30 MIN> 4R

5L >START CLEAR> 5R

6L 6R

C. Display after a countdown time is entered:

TIMER 1/1
ALARM TIME COUNTDOWN
1L
----:--z 2354:56 1R

2L ADD 5 MIN> 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L >START CLEAR> 5R

6L 6R

D. Display after timer alarm triggered:

TIMER 1/1
ALARM TIME COUNTDOWN
1L
1234:12z ----:-- 1R

2L ADD 5 MIN> 2R

3L ADD 15 MIN> 3R

4L ADD 30 MIN> 4R

5L >START CLEAR> 5R

6L 6R
TIMER ALARM

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 5-40
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 6 - ARRIVALS

CONTENTS

Subject Page
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................ 6-1
CONDENSED ARRIVAL PROCESS ................................................................................................................. 6-2
STANDARD TERMINAL ARRIVAL ROUTE (STAR) SELECTION .................................................................. 6-2

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 6-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 6-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 6

ARRIVALS

CAUTION: In case of disagreement between the published arrival information and CMA-9000 FMS displayed
information, the operator MUST follow the published arrival information.

INTRODUCTION

The complete arrival procedure, including Standard Arrival Route (STAR) and STAR transition can be loaded
into the route at the same time or in segments, depending on the ATC clearance received. The segments are
selected from lists of named procedures extracted from the navigation database for the destination airport.

When an arrival procedure is selected, the waypoints and procedural legs are extracted from the navigation
database, procedural leg types are decoded, and all resulting waypoints are inserted into the route in the correct
order.

The first waypoint of the STAR (or STAR transition) is linked to the coinciding waypoint of the en-route portion,
and subsequent en-route waypoints are deleted. If the first waypoint of the STAR (or STAR transition) does not
coincide with any en-route waypoint, then the STAR (or STAR transition) is separated from the en-route portion
by a route discontinuity. For certain types of STAR and transition, the waypoints may not be loaded into the
route until the approach is selected.

Approach transitions are appended to the route after the STAR and are usually separated from it by a route
discontinuity, unless the last waypoint of the STAR and the first waypoint of the approach transition are identical.
Arrival waypoints may include speed and altitude constraint advisories.

If the aircraft installation provides only a pressure altitude input to the CMA-9000 FMS, manual entry of the
altimeter correction is necessary to convert this input to baro-corrected altitude. Refer to the approved
AFMS/RFMS for further details. When required, entry of the altimeter correction for the destination airport
should be performed as soon as received, and prior to reaching a radial distance of 30 nm from the destination
airport and an altitude below 15,000 feet above, the destination airport elevation.

NOTE: When stringing STAR and Approach Transitions procedures at their common waypoint, if speed and/or
altitude constraints exist for this waypoint in both procedures, the constraint(s) from the Approach
transition are retained.
The Approach altitude/airspeed constraint(s) will probably be lower/slower than the STAR constraints.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 6-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CONDENSED ARRIVAL PROCESS

This page provides an overview of the process of selecting the arrival procedures. The intent of each step is
summarized on the next page.

1. MOD, ACT ROUTE - select departure/arrival index page.

2. DEP/ARR INDEX - select arrival at desired airport (origin or destination).

3. ARRIVALS - select STAR and STAR transition.

4. MOD, ACT LEGS - confirm the arrival procedure agrees with the clearance, then make the modified route
active.

A detailed description of each page appears in Appendix A.

STANDARD TERMINAL ARRIVAL ROUTE (STAR) SELECTION

This procedure is based on the STAR and STAR transition depicted in Figure 6-1 and assumes that only these
portions of the arrival are to be loaded at this time.

Display the DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1 page by pressing DEP/ARR.

DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1

ACT RTE 1
1L
<DEP KSEA ARR> 1R

2L PANC ARR> 2R
RTE 2
3L <DEP KSEA ARR> 3R

4L PANC ARR> 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

1. Display the ARRIVALS 1/1 page for either the origin or destination airport by pressing the ARR prompt at
LSK 1R or 2R respectively.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 6-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ANCHORAGE, ALASKA
ANCHORAGE INTL ATIS 118.4 ANCHORAGE INTL

AMOTT FIVE ARRIVAL (AMOTT.AMOTT5)

ELMENDORF AFB
ALASKA
Direct distance from Amott Int to: ANCHORAGE Intl
213
Anchorage Intl 43 NM 144
ANCHORAGE
Direct distance from ANC VOR to: ALASKA
Anchorage Intl 6 NM Merrill
213

ANCHORAGE
D
(H) 114.3 ANC
N61 09.0 W150 12.4
SPARREVOHN
D
(H) 117.2 SQA N
N61 05.9 W155 38.1 ctors
NOT TO SCALE r ve urse 221°
rada ach co R
ect
Exp l appro
SPA n a
079° RRE AMOTT to fi 37
VOH N60 53.9 W151 21.8
N (SQ
A. AM
V508 OTT5 D
)

(ENA
12000

.20 NAI
24

KE OTT5)
80'

18
106

. AM
° 7000
CARBU KENAI

00
114
112.8 AKN 0 T5) 041 D

7000
319°
1500 U. AMOT 117.6 ENA
(H)

21
008.8° / 107.1 B 56 R260
(CAR NEARR D27 ° N60 36.9 W151 11.7
N60 15.5 W154 58.1 BU 117 2
CAR D V46 N60 43.7
00
140
W152 04.8 N60 33.3
°
048° 041 W151 23.8
NONDA S 5)
CK OTT
N60 19.3 W153 48.0 TU . AM 14°

(HOM. AMOTT5
CK
S R2
0
5)

HOMER
TU 0
TT

4 ( 7 7

7000
D4 3
MO

51
.A

°
034
KN
(A

KUCKS
N

292
27

N60 13.4 W152 27.4

O

338°
°
LM
V4

13 000
SA

2
14
NG

HOMER
KI

D
(H) 114.6 HOM
N59 42.6 W151 27.4
0°
7000 66 4
R17
5
V43 TT5)
350° K. AMO K
1°

(OD ODIA
02

8
120
K

KING SALMON
D KODIAK
112.8 AKN
(H) D
N58 43.5 W156 45.1 (H) 117.1 ODK
N57 46.5 W152 20.4

AMOTT FIVE ARRIVAL (AMOTT.AMOTT5)

TRANSITIONS
Carbu (CARBU.AMOTT5): From Carbu W/P to Amott Int
Via a 048° course. Thence
Homer (HOM.AMOTT5): From HOM VOR to Amott Int:
Via Hom R-338. Thence
Kenai (ENA.AMOTT5): From ENA to Amott Int:
Via ENA R-319. Thence
King Salmon (AKN.AMOTT5): From AKN VOR to Amott Int:
Via AKN R-021 and ANC R-221 To Nearr Int, then ANC R-221.
Thence
Kodiak (ODK.AMOTT5): From ODK VOR to Amott Int:
Via ODK R-350 and HOM R-170 to HOM VOR, then via
HOM R-338. Thence
Sparrevohm (SQA.AMOTT5): From SQA VOR to Amott Int:
Via SQA R-079 and ENA R-260, then via ANC R-221. Thence
Tucks (TUCKS.AMOTT5): From Tucks Int to Amott Int:
Via ENA r-214 and HOM R-338. Thence
FOR
ARRIVAL
From Over Amott Int via ANC R-221 to ANC VOR.
ILLUSTRATION
Expect radar vectors to final approach course after
passing Amott Int.
PURPOSE ONLY
9804079

Figure 6-1 STAR, STAR Transition

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 6-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The ARRIVALS 1/X page for the selected airport is displayed, with the airport name included in the title line.
Lists of STARs, approaches and runways for that airport are displayed.

PANC ARRIVALS 1/1

STARS RTE 1 APPROACHES
1L
AMOTT5 VORD06R 1R
RUNWAYS
2L ELLAM2 06L 2R

3L TAGER1 06R 3R

4L YESKA1 14 4R

5L 24L 5R

6L <DEP/ARR ROUTE> 6R

2. Display the desired STAR by pressing the PREV or NEXT key as required, and select the STAR by pressing
the appropriate left hand LSK.

The STAR list is replaced by the selected STAR, with the legend "<SEL>" beside the name. Transitions
available for the selected STAR are listed below the STAR, under the heading "TRANS". If no transitions are
available, the word "-NONE-" is displayed. A list of the approaches and runways applicable to the selected
STAR appears on the right hand side of the page.

NOTE: If an approach has already been selected, then only those STARs applicable to that approach will be
displayed.

PANC ARRIVALS 1/1

STARS RTE 1 APPROACHES
1L
AMOTT5<SEL> <SEL>VORD06R 1R
TRANS RUNWAYS
2L ODK <SEL> O6L 2R

3L 06R 3R

4L 14 4R

5L 24L 5R

6L <ERASE ROUTE> 6R

3. Display the desired STAR transition by pressing the PREV or NEXT key as required, and select the
transition by pressing the corresponding left hand LSK.

The list of transitions is replaced by the selected transition, with the legend "<SEL>" beside the name.

NOTE: The selected procedure can be changed by pressing the appropriate left hand LSK to re-display the
desired list (toggles the selection).

4. Display the first STAR leg by pressing LEGS and PREV or NEXT as required.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 6-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NOTE: For certain types of STAR and STAR transition, the selection of the approach or approach transition
may also be required before the STAR waypoints are loaded into the route from the navigation
database. The message !SELECT TRANS/APPR/RWY is then displayed in the scratchpad.

MOD RTE1 LEGS 2/3

175o 213N M
1L
ODK 1R
352o 119N M
2L HOM 2R
340o 71.4N M
3L AMOTT 3R
042o 36.8N M
4L ANC 4R

5L ----- 5R

6L <ERASE LEGS ETA> 6R

5. Close-up any route discontinuity as described in Section 5.

6. Verify the course, distance, altitude/speed advisory, and procedural leg type information of each STAR leg
in turn, pressing NEXT as required to display all legs.

7. Make the selected STAR and STAR transition active by pressing EXEC.

On re-display of the ARRIVALS page, the active STAR and STAR transition are shown with the legend
"<ACT>" beside the name(s).

NOTE: Pressing ERASE (LSK 6L) at any time during this procedure will cancels any modification currently in
progress.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 6-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 6-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 7 - APPROACH

CONTENTS

Subject Page

SECTION 7-1 LATERAL NAVIGATION............................................................................................................ 7-1

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-1
CONDENSED APPROACH PROCESS .......................................................................................................... 7-4
ENTERING THE TERMINAL AREA ................................................................................................................ 7-8
ALTIMETER CORRECTION ............................................................................................................................ 7-8
GPS INSTRUMENT APPROACH SELECTION ............................................................................................ 7-10
VECTORING TO FINAL APPROACH FIX .................................................................................................... 7-12
CIRCLING APPROACHES ............................................................................................................................ 7-13
VFR APPROACHES ...................................................................................................................................... 7-14
MISSED APPROACH INITIATION ................................................................................................................ 7-15
NEW APPROACH AFTER A MISSED APPROACH .................................................................................... 7-17
MODIFYING APPROACH PROCEDURES ................................................................................................... 7-18
APPROACH MODE DESELECTION............................................................................................................. 7-19
DME ARC INTERCEPTION ........................................................................................................................... 7-19
DELETION OF PROCEDURE TURNS .......................................................................................................... 7-21

SECTION 7-2 VERTICAL NAVIGATION ........................................................................................................ 7-22

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-22
VNAV APPROACH MODE ............................................................................................................................ 7-22
PROCEDURE FOR SELECTING VERTICAL NAVIGATION........................................................................ 7-25
VNAV APPROACH TERMINATION .............................................................................................................. 7-27

SECTION 7-3 TACTICAL APPROACH .......................................................................................................... 7-28

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 7-1

LATERAL NAVIGATION

CAUTION: In case of disagreement between the published approach information and CMA-9000 FMS displayed
information, the operator MUST follow the published approach information.

The CMA-9000 FMS is approved for instrument approach navigation (except ILS, LOC, LOC-BC,
LDA, SDF and MLS) provided the required sensor(s) outlined below is used.

GENERAL

The navigation database can contain GPS, GPS overlay, ILS approaches and non-precision approaches.
Approach types are identified by their prefix followed by the runway number:

GPS - GPS approach (GPS)

ILS - ILS approach (reference only)
LOC - Localizer approach (reference only)
LOCB - Localizer Backcourse approach (reference only)
NDB - NDB approach (GPS or NDB)
* NDBD - NDB approach with DME facility (GPS or NDB/(DME))
RNAV - RNAV approach (GPS or VOR/DME)
VOR - VOR approach (GPS or VOR)
VORD - VOR/DME approach (GPS or VOR/DME)

* Use of the DME for this approach type is optional

( ) Required sensor.

Approach transitions are appended to the route after the STAR and are usually separated from it by a route
discontinuity, unless the last waypoint of the STAR and the first waypoint of the approach transition are identical.
Approach transitions may include procedure turns. Missed approach procedures are loaded as part of the
approach. Arrival waypoints may include speed and altitude constraint advisories. Figure 7-1 shows a typical
approach involving a full procedure turn and missed approach.

If a runway is selected rather than an approach, only the runway threshold waypoint is loaded into the route.

Baro-corrected altitude is required to enable automatic sequencing of procedure legs with altitude terminations.
If the aircraft installation provides only a pressure altitude input to the CMA-9000 FMS, manual entry of the
altimeter correction on the PROGRESS 1/X page is necessary to derive the baro-corrected altitude. Refer to
the approved AFMS/RFMS for further details. When required, entry of the altimeter correction for the arrival
airport should be performed as soon as received, and prior to reaching a radial distance of 30 nm from, and an
altitude below 15,000 feet above, the arrival airport.

When the approach transition includes a procedure turn, the CMA-9000 FMS creates two outbound legs based
on the procedure turn reference fix, followed by a turn in the correct direction to intercept the inbound course to
the final approach fix.

The still-air lengths of the procedure turn outbound legs are computed based on a time of 1 minute and 45
seconds respectively at a speed of 180 knots. The two outbound waypoints are named using the first three
characters of the procedure turn reference fix, with the suffix PT added. The last character (L or R) indicates the
direction of the turn at that waypoint. In addition, the courses of the two outbound legs have the legend P-T.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The CMA-9000 FMS provides navigation and guidance in the normal fashion for the two outbound legs of the
procedure turn, followed by a turn to intercept the final approach course inbound to the final approach fix. When
the maximum allowable procedure turn distance is less than 10 nm, the length of the first outbound leg may be
reduced. As a result, navigation and guidance may sequence to the second outbound leg almost immediately
after crossing the procedure turn reference fix.

CAUTION: During the procedure turn, it is the responsibility of the crew to ensure that the maximum distance from
the procedure turn reference fix is not exceeded and that the aircraft remains within protected airspace
at all times. The distance-to-go shown on the PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4 page cannot be used for this
purpose, except when the FAF is the TO WPT. The distance from the procedure turn reference fix
can be monitored using the FIX page, as described in Section 5.

Deletion of the procedure turn reference fix or the first outbound waypoint results in the deletion of the entire
procedure turn. The two outbound waypoints cannot be copied to the scratchpad, and cannot be used as
reference waypoints.

ATC clearances which modify the selected arrival procedures can be incorporated at any time by selection of
the new procedure. This results in the automatic deletion of the waypoints associated with the cancelled
procedure.

NOTE: When stringing an Approach procedure to an Approach Transition or STAR procedure at their common
waypoint, if speed and/or altitude constraints exist for this waypoint in both procedures, the constraint(s)
from the Approach procedure are retained.
The Approach altitude/airspeed constraint(s) will probably be lower/slower than the Approach Transition
or STAR constraints.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Figure 7-1 Typical Arrival Procedure

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CONDENSED APPROACH PROCESS

The following describes the process of selecting the approach procedures.

1. MOD, ACT ROUTE - select departure/arrival index page.

2. DEP/ARR INDEX - select arrival at desired airport (origin or destination).

3. ARRIVALS - select APPROACH and APPROACH transition.

4. MOD, ACT RTE x LEGS - confirm that the approach procedure agrees with the ATC clearance, then make
the modified route active.

A detailed description of each page is contained in Appendix A.

The procedure described below is based on the approach shown in Figure 7-2, and assumes that the STAR has
already been selected and made active.

Display the DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1 page by pressing [DEP/ARR].

1. Select the desired arrival by pressing LSK 1R or 2R.

PANC ARRIVALS 1/1
STARS RTE 1 APPROACHES
1L
AMOTT5 VORD06R 1R
RUNWAYS
2L ELLAM2 06L 2R

3L TAGER1 06R 3R

4L YESKA1 14 4R

5L 24L 5R

6L <DEP/ARR ROUTE> 6R

The ARRIVALS 1/X page is displayed, with the airport name included in the title line. Approaches are listed on
the right hand side of the page, followed by the runways. The selected STAR and STAR transition are
displayed on the left hand side of the page with the legend "<ACT>" beside the name. If a STAR has already
been selected, only those approaches applicable to that STAR are displayed.

2. Display the desired approach by pressing [PREV] or [NEXT] as required, and select the approach by
pressing the appropriate right hand LSK.

The approach list is replaced by the selected approach, with the legend "<SEL>" beside the name. Approach
transitions (initial approach fixes) available for the selected approach are listed below it. If no transitions are
available, the word "-NONE-" is displayed.

NOTE: Do not select a runway before the approach unless a VFR approach is planned, since this results in
only the runway threshold waypoint being loaded into the route.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. Display the desired approach transition by pressing [PREV] or [NEXT] as required, and select the approach
transition by pressing the corresponding right hand LSK.

The list of transitions is replaced by the selected transition, with the legend "<SEL>" beside the name.

PANC ARRIVALS 1/1

STARS RTE 1 APPROACHES
1L AMOTT5<SEL> <SEL>VORD06R 1R
TRANS TRANS
2L ODK <SEL> ANC 2R

3L D173J 3R

4L D350J 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE ROUTE> 6R

NOTE: For CMA-9000 FMS arrivals, the selection of the approach transition may not be necessary in order to
avoid duplication of numerous legs. (The STAR procedure may lead up to the FAF already).

4. Display the first approach leg (normally the approach transition waypoint, if selected) by pressing [LEGS]
and [PREV] or [NEXT] as required.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ANCHORAGE, ALASKA
5400' 5° ANCHORAGE INTL
085° 20
VOR or GPS Rwy 6R
8000'
VOR 114.3 ANC
2100'

MSA

340°
ANC VOR PANC Apt. Elev 144'

15
[D233J] D10.0 R-350 (IAF)

rc
10

EA

T
oP
DM
Lake
0N Hood
(IAF) D5.1 Merrill
10

Strip
160

CAMPBELL LAKE
ANCHORAGE
338 CMQ [RWØ6R]
D
(H) 114.3 ANC
61-10

053° 356'
5

053°
568'
233°
10.0
8°
1 in = 5NM

1600
18
8°

D10.0
00

[D233J]
MISSED

ANC
g

.3
hd

°
APCH FIX

114
173
0°

g
20

hd
0°
0

20
16
10 00
173°

No

353°
DM
PT
E

D21.8
Ar
c
A
EN 7 °
61-00
150-30
(IAF)
[D173J] 150-10 150-00 0 3 .6
7
NAPTO
11
5

VOR
°
233 D3.5
D5.1
1600' 1600' 053
15 NM (1476')
053°
(1476') °
V M
3.5 1.6 TDZE 124'
Climbing RIGHT turn to 2000' via 200° heading and
MISSED APPROACH:
outbound on ANC VOR R-173 to NAPTO INT and hold.

STRAIGHT-IN LANDING RWY 6R CIRCLE - TO - LAND

MDA(H) 620' (496')
Max 90
ALS out Kts MDA (H)

ATIS 118.4
ANCHORAGE Approach (R) 118.6
FOR ILLUSTRATION ANCHORAGE Tower 118.3
PURPOSE ONLY Ground 121.9
Alt Set: INCHES
9804077

Figure 7-2 GPS Overlay Approach

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

5. Close-up the route discontinuity if present, as described in Section 5.

MOD RTE 1 LEGS 2/3

042o 36.8N M
1L
ANC 1R
233o P-T 3.00N M
2L ANCPTL 2R
188o P-T 2.25N M
3L ANCPTR 3R
R053o CRS 4.86N M
4L ANC FAF 4R
053o CRS 5.09N M
5L RW06R /oMAP 5R

6L <ERASE LEGS ETA> 6R

6. Verify the course, distance, speed/altitude advisory (if displayed), and procedural leg type information of
each approach leg in turn, including the missed approach procedure, pressing [NEXT] as required to display
all legs.

MOD RTE 1 LEGS 3/3

053o CRS 0.74N M
1L (544) 1R
R200o HDG 12.4N M
2L (INTC) 2R
173o CRS 13.5N M
3L NAPTO 3R

4L ----- 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE LEGS ETA> 6R

7. Make the selected approach and approach transition active by pressing [EXEC].

On re-display of the ARRIVALS page, the active approach and approach transition are shown with the
"<ACT>" legend beside the name.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ENTERING THE TERMINAL AREA

On entering the terminal area, the GPS instrument approach phase of flight (approach mode) will be armed
automatically, or an operator action may be required using an instrument panel-mounted switch, depending on
the installation. Refer to the AFMS for details.

When the radial distance from the destination airport becomes less than 30 nm; and the aircraft descends below
15,000 feet above airport elevation the following indication occurs:

• On the PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4 page the RNP value changes from 2 nm to 1 nm.

• NOTE: The above indication will occur only if the RNP had not already been set manually to a value less
than or equal to 1 nm.

ALTIMETER CORRECTION

CAUTION: The CMA-9000 FMS altimeter setting entry should be verified using standard crew cross-check
procedures because of the potential impact on missed approach navigation and guidance. The baro-
corrected altitude generated by the CMA-9000 FMS using the manually-entered altimeter setting
provides the automatic waypoint sequence function for altitude-terminated legs of the missed
approach. An error in the CMA-9000 FMS altimeter setting may therefore cause the aircraft to exceed
the protected airspace due to an early or late waypoint sequence.

NOTE: If the FMS is configured for VNAV, local altimeter setting is a mandatory input to enable the VNAV
approach guidance.

Display the PROGRESS 3/3 or 4/4 page by pressing [PROG], [PREV].

ACT PROGRESS 4/4

HEADWIND CROSSWIND
1L
027K T R44K T 1R
HDG/DA TAS
2L 290o/L11o 240K T
2R
MAGVAR
3L E019.9o 3R

4L 4R
ALT (STD)
5L 0 FT 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACT PROGRESS 4/4

HEADWIND CROSSWIND
027K T R44K T
1L 1R
HDG/DA TAS
2L 290o/L11o 240K T
2R
MAGVAR
3L E019.9o 3R

4L 4R
ALT (CORR)
5L 34245F T 5R
QNH SET
6L >††. ††I N H G 6R

ACT PROGRESS 4/4

HEADWIND CROSSWIND
027K T R44K T
1L 1R
HDG/DA TAS
2L 290o/L11o 240K T
2R
MAGVAR
3L E019.9o 3R

4L 4R
ALT (CORR)
5L 5372F T 5R
QNH SET
6L >2 8 . 3 7 I N H G 6R

When the installation provides for altitude, PROGRESS 4/4 page fields LSK 6L or 6R display the calculated
mean sea level QNH for reference.

To enter an altimeter setting, enter value in Inches of Mercury (inHg) or in Millibars (MB) and line select it to
LSK 6L respectively on PROGRESS 3/3 page or on PROGRESS 4/4 page.

The altimeter setting is displayed in LARGE font, and the baro-corrected altitude computed. This field is also
displayed, in small font, when both the QNH and baro-corrected altitude are received by the FMS. This field is
not displayed when the baro-corrected altitude is received but no external QNH is available to the FMS. This
field is not displayed when the altitude source is GPS, INS or manual.

For entries units are automatically detected and decimal point entry is not required.

NOTE: This altimeter setting will be used until after landing, or until leaving the terminal area. The altimeter
setting is cancelled and the field displays dashes ("--.--") on leaving the terminal area (distance from
the departure airport is greater than 33 nm, or the altitude is greater than 16,000 feet above airport
elevation).
When no altimeter setting is defined, field displays boxes ( . ) on entering the terminal area
(distance from the destination airport is less than 30 nm, or the altitude is less than 15,000 feet above
airport elevation). This indicates a mandatory input is required.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

If the installation provides a baro-correction, a baro-corrected altitude is computed and displayed next to LSK 5L
(PROGRESS 3/3) or (PROGRESS 4/4).

NOTE: The CMA-9000 FMS will generate the alert message "SET QNH" while airborne and 30 nm or less from
the destination airport and below the transition level (TRANS LVL) if the system altitude is standard.

GPS INSTRUMENT APPROACH SELECTION

CAUTION: Straight line flight from waypoint to waypoint, as loaded from the navigation database, does not ensure
compliance with the published procedure. Should differences arise between the approach chart and
the navigation database, the published chart, supplemented by NOTAMS, takes precedence.

Provided the approach has been armed, when a valid approach has been selected and loaded into the active
flight plan from the navigation database, the approach phase of flight is activated automatically 2 nm prior to the
FAF, as described below.

NOTE: Selection of a new destination airport will result in the deletion of all approach and missed approach
waypoints from the flight plan.

NOTE: If a holding pattern is defined at the FAF, the CMA-9000 FMS will stay in terminal phase of flight on
entering the hold and execute the approach on exiting the hold.

Even in GPS navigation mode, the CMA-9000 FMS will not enter approach mode when flying an ILS,
LOC-BC, LOC-circle to land, LDA, LOC, SDF and MLS type approach.

At 3 nm inbound to the FAF: The advisory message HSI SCALE TO CHANGE is displayed. In installations
requiring manually arming of the approach mode, the ARM APPROACH advisory message is repeated, if the
approach mode has not yet been armed.

At 2 nm inbound to the FAF: With GPS approach integrity predicted to exist at the FAF, the Missed Approach
Point (MAP), and the current aircraft position, the CMA-9000 FMS transitions automatically to the approach
mode, with the following indications:

• NPA annunciator illuminates and when configured, GPS APPR CAP remote annunciator also illuminates.
• HSI lateral deviation sensitivity changes from terminal to apporach phase of flight (1 nm to 0.3 nm) full scale.
• When configured, MISSED APPR prompt is displayed at LSK 6R on RTE LEGS 1/X, VNAV 1/1 and
PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4 pages.
• On the PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4 page the RNP value changes from 1 nm to 0.3 nm.

NOTE: The legend of the "GPS APPR CAP" annunciator may vary depending on the aircraft installation. Refer
to the AFMS/RFMS for further details.

NOTE: The 3 nm and 2 nm inbound distances to the FAF are measured along the CMA-9000 FMS-predicted
path. These distances may not necessarily coincide with the DTG (distance to go) to the FAF displayed
on the HSI/CDU. DTG is a direct distance to the waypoint.

CAUTION: If, as part of the approach procedure, the aircraft is cleared direct-to the Missed Approach Holding
Point (MAHP), line selecting the MAHP identifier from the RTE x LEGS page to the scratchpad and
moving it to the TO waypoint field will result in all remaining approach waypoints to be deleted.

To avoid this situation, the MAHP identifier must be manually typed into the scratchpad and then
moved to the TO waypoint field. A discontinuity will be added after the direct-to waypoint followed
by the rest of the approach procedure.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

At the missed approach point: If the missed approach procedure has not been initiated, the following
indications occur:

• TO/FROM flag on the HSI displays FROM indicating that the MAP waypoint has been overflown.
• Distance-to-go to the MAP displayed on the RTE LEGS 1/X and PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4 pages starts to
increase.
• Navigation and guidance continue along the extension of the final approach course.

If the FMS is configured for VNAV, the VNAV Approach terminates when crossing the runway threshold.

NOTE: That the missed approach point may not necessarily coincide with the runway threshold. For details on
the CMA-9000 Display Panel and (E)HSI indications associated to the VNAV Approach termination,
refer to the “Vertical Navigation” sub-section.

CAUTION: The missed approach point (MAP) is not sequenced unless the pilot manually initiates the missed
approach by selecting MISSED APPR> prompt, when it is configured, (e.g. PROGRESS 1/X page) or
by pressing the TOGA switch, if the MISSED APPR> is not configured.

NO APPR INTEGRITY alert: The CMA-9000 FMS determines the availability of approach integrity prior to the 2
nm point along track to the FAF.

Depending on the installation, the approach integrity is defined for civil and military navigation configuration as
follows:
• For civil navigation configurations, the CMA-9000 FMS uses a Predictive RAIM function to predict the
availability of approach integrity;
• For military navigation configurations without a Predictive RAIM function available, the current GPS Group
NP (Navigation Performance) value is used in place of Predictive RAIM HIL and assumed to be the same at
the FAF and MAP as at the current position.
• For military navigation configuration with EGI and civil GPS installed, the CMA-9000 FMS uses the Predictive
RAIM function of the civil GPS, and the military GPS Navigation performance to determine the approach
integrity. Moreover supplemental integrity is provided by comparing:
• Civil and military GPS positions;
• INS/GPS and military GPS positions.
If the position difference between the 2 sensors compared is smaller than the maximum accuracy of the 2
sensors, the integrity is valid for the approach phase of flight.

If the Predictive RAIM of the CMA-9000 FMS determines the approach integrity will not be available at the FAF
and/or the MAP, the CMA-9000 FMS remains in the terminal phase of flight and the following occurs at 2 nm
inbound to the FAF:

• NPA annunciator does NOT illuminate and when configured, GPS APPR CAP remote annunciator does not
illuminate.
• Alert message NO APPR INTEGRITY is displayed, with illumination of the remote MSG annunciator.
• When configured, MISSED APPR prompt (LSK 6R) is displayed on RTE x LEGS 1/X, VNAV 1/1 and
PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4 pages.
• HSI lateral deviation sensitivity and RNP remains at 1 nm.

If the FMS is configured for VNAV, the VNAV Approach terminates. For details on the CMA-9000 Display Panel
and HSI indications associated to the VNAV Approach termination, refer to the “Vertical Navigation” subsection.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

If after transitioning to the approach phase of flight, a loss of GPS approach integrity is detected after passing
the FAF inbound, then the following events are delayed until 5 minutes after the loss is detected:

• The LNAV STEERING is set to INVALID;

• NO APPR INTEGRITY alert message displayed in the scratchpad;
• The discrete output APPROACH ENABLED (if configured) and the GPS APPR CAP remote annunciator
extinguish;
• When configured, <MISSED APPR> prompt (LSK 6R) is displayed on RTE x LEGS 1/X and PROGRESS 1/3
or 1/4 pages.

NOTE: In GPS overlay approaches, there may be a difference between the distance-to-go displayed by the
CMA-9000 FMS and the DME distance from the facility shown on the approach chart. Operators need to
take this into account when interpreting the CMA-9000 FMS distance information.

NOTE: If the HDOP exceeds 4 anytime during the approach, the approach will be cancelled immediately (e.g.
no 5 min delay).

NOTE: Operators should be aware that when flying a GPS overlay approach, a charted track defined by a VOR
radial may differ slightly from the CMA-9000 FMS-displayed course due to differences in the magnetic
variation value used to define the VOR magnetic track and that computed by the CMA-9000 FMS local
magnetic variation model. Both methods of navigation should result in the same track over the ground.

VECTORING TO FINAL APPROACH FIX

ATC (Air Traffic Control) clearance to the FAF can be handled by converting the loaded approach into a straight-in
approach. This is accomplished by direct-to navigation to intercept the inbound course to the final approach fix
(FAF).

With the ACT or MOD RTE LEGS 1/X page displayed:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/3

042o 36.8N M
1L ANC / 1R
233o P-T 3.00N M
2L ANCPTL 2R
188o P-T 2.25N M
3L ANCPTR 3R
R053o CRS 4.86N M
4L ANC FAF 4R
053o CRS 5.09N M
5L RW06R /oMAP 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

ANC

1. Copy to the scratchpad, the FAF identifier, and move it to the TO WPT location by pressing LSK 1L.

2. Key-in the desired inbound course to the FAF and press <INTC CRS> (LSK 6R).

The intercept course changes to LARGE font and is copied to the TO WPT course.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. Verify the course and distance of the leg to the TO WPT, and make the direct-to intercept active by pressing
EXEC.

Navigation and guidance to intercept the inbound course to the FAF on the current heading is provided.

A straight-in approach can also be created in advance by inserting a temporary waypoint into the route as an initial
approach fix (IAF) created as a place/bearing/distance waypoint based on, the FAF. On receipt of the ATC
clearance, direct-to navigation to this temporary IAF, or to intercept the new leg inbound to the FAF, can then be
performed.

CIRCLING APPROACHES

Navigation and guidance to the landing runway during a circling approach procedure can be obtained, while
retaining the correct missed approach procedure waypoints, by using direct-to intercept navigation to the landing
runway threshold waypoint at the appropriate time.

With the primary GPS or GPS overlay instrument approach procedure loaded into the route and made active:

1. At a convenient time, prepare for the circling maneuver by entering the landing runway number in the
scratchpad.

NOTE: The prefix "RW" is not required, but a leading zero must be used (e.g. 14 or RW14, 06L or RW06L).

2. Display the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS], and move the landing runway number identifier
to the TO WPT field by pressing LSK 1L.

The "INTC CRS" prompt is displayed at LSK 6R with dashes ("---") as the default inbound course. A route
discontinuity is inserted after the landing runway threshold waypoint.

3. Key in the landing runway heading as the intercept course, and select the direct-to intercept mode by
pressing <INTC CRS> (LSK 6R).

The inbound course is moved to the INTC CRS prompt field in LARGE font and is also copied to the to
waypoint course.

MOD RTE 1 LEGS 1/2

290o CRS 22.2N M
1L RW29 /o 178 1R
THEN
2L †††††
2R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
3L YJN FAF 900 3R
051o CRS 2.66N M
4L RW06 /oMAP 183 4R
050o CRS 0.71N M
5L ( 536) 536A 5R
INTC CRS
6L <ERASE 290o 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4. Verify the course of the intercept leg and distance to the to waypoint.

NOTE: Do not press [EXEC] until visibility conditions permit the circling maneuver to the landing runway.
Navigation and guidance displays and autopilot/flight director operation will continue to be referenced to
the current leg of the original instrument approach procedure until [EXEC] is pressed.

5. When visibility conditions permit, make the direct-to course intercept to the landing runway active by
pressing [EXEC].

Navigation and guidance to the landing runway threshold waypoint on the selected inbound course is
provided.

NOTE: If a missed approach is necessary during the circling maneuver, direct-to navigation (with or without an
intercept) to the missed approach holding fix, or to an intermediate missed approach waypoint, will
initiate the required navigation and guidance.

VFR APPROACHES

Display the ARRIVALS 1/X page for the desired airport by pressing DEP/ARR.

NOTE: If the DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1 page is displayed, select the desired arrival airport by pressing the
appropriate <ARR> prompt (LSK 1R or LSK 2R).

PANC ARRIVALS 1/1

STARS RTE 1 APPROACHES
1L
AMOTT5<ACT> <SEL> 06L 1R
TRANS
2L ODK <ACT> 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE ROUTE> 6R

1. If an approach is already selected, delete it by pressing LSK 1R.

All approaches and runways are listed.

2. Display the desired runway by pressing [PREV] or [NEXT] as required and select it by pressing the
appropriate right hand LSK.

The APPROACHES field title is replaced by RUNWAYS with the selected runway displayed below it with the
legend "<SEL>".

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. Display the MOD RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS].

The runway threshold waypoint is inserted into the route preceeded by a route discontinuity.

4. Create an initial approach fix at a suitable distance from the runway threshold on the backwards extension
of the runway heading using a place/bearing/distance temporary waypoint.

NOTE: The temporary IAF is optional since direct-to navigation to the runway threshold intercepting the
inbound course will accomplish the same result.

5. Make the modified route active by pressing [EXEC].

Direct-to navigation to the temporary IAF, or to intercept the inbound leg to the runway threshold will provide
the necessary navigation and guidance.

MISSED APPROACH INITIATION

CAUTION: If the missed approach described on the LEGS page differs from the published missed approach,
then fly the missed approach utilizing the Autopilot HDG SEL mode instead of LNAV (FMS).

CAUTION: If direct-to navigation is executed at low altitude while in the approach phase of flight, an immediate
normal direct-to maneuver is performed, and the CMA-9000 FMS reverts to terminal phase of flight.
The crew remains responsible at all times for complying with all obstacle avoidance and altitude
restrictions during the direct-to navigation.

CAUTION: When the first leg of a missed approach is an altitude-terminated leg and the missed approach point is
crossed at an altitude that higher than the normal MDA, the FMS will sequence the altitude-terminated
leg earlier than would normally be the case, and in some cases will result in an immediate turn
upon crossing the Missed Approach Point, in the direction of the leg following the altitude-terminated
leg. If that following leg involves intercepting a course, then under certain wind conditions and
geometries of the leg to be intercepted, a valid intercept may not occur. In such case, the FMS will
command a Direct-To the termination of the leg to be intercepted. The DIRECT-TO FIX alert message
will be generated. In such cases the pilot should fly the missed approach manually or using the
Autopilot HDG SEL mode instead of the LNAV (FMS) mode, until the aircraft is in an acceptable
position to continue with FMS commanded flight path.

When in the approach phase of flight, the missed approach can be initiated at any time by:

1. Pressing <MISSED APPR> (LSK 6R) (e.g PROGESS 1/X page) when configured, or

2. Pressing the standard Take-Off/Go-Around (TOGA) switch, or

3. Initiating direct-to navigation to any waypoint.

When a missed approach is initiated:

• The CMA-9000 FMS reverts to the terminal phase-of-flight.

• NPA annunciator extinguishes when configured, GPS APPR CAP remote annunciator also extinguishes.
• HSI NAV flag disappears from view (if it had been displayed as a result of lack of approach integrity).
• When configured, the <MISSED APPR> prompt (LSK 6R) disappears from the RTE x LEGS 1/X, VNAV 1/1
and PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4 pages.
• NO APPR INTEGRITY alert message disappears (if displayed).
• On the NAV STATUS page, RNP value changes from 0.3 nm to 1.0 nm.
• On overflying the MAP, navigation and guidance sequences to the first waypoint of the missed approach
procedure.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-15
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Navigation and guidance for the missed approach procedure is provided in the normal fashion, including the
holding pattern at the missed approach holding fix (if coded in the navigation database), except that manual leg
sequencing may be required for legs with alititude terminations, as noted below.

CAUTION: During Missed Approaches, the CMA-9000 FMS does not support the low speed flight regime of
aircraft in which the bank angle is limited to 15 degrees as a function of airspeed and aircraft flap/slat
configuration. Where required by the magnitude of the track angle change, the CMA-9000 FMS will
use up to a maximum of 30 degree bank angle in computing the roll steering command to the
autopilot. Crews should therefore exercise caution when engaging LNAV in this flight regime and may
wish to use the heading select mode until the required airspeed is achieved that allows larger bank
angles than 15 degrees. No difficulties are anticipated for engaging LNAV when track angle changes
are less than 15 degrees.

The results of the various means of initiating a missed approach are summarized below.

1. When the MISSED APPR prompt is configured and the missed approach is initiated by pressing the
MISSED APPR line select key, the LNAV steering output remains valid, and the autopilot/flight director
therefore will remain in LNAV-engaged mode (if active). The CMA-9000 FMS reverts to the terminal phase-
of-flight.

2. If the missed approach is initiated by pressing the TOGA switch, the LNAV autopilot/flight director mode
automatically remains valid. The CMA-9000 FMS reverts to the terminal phase of flight.

3. If the autopilot/flight director mode is changed from LNAV-engaged to any other mode, the CMA-9000 FMS
steering signal output will no longer be used, however the CMA-9000 FMS remains in the approach phase
of flight.

4. When configured, if the <MISSED APPR> LSK is pressed before reaching the MAP, navigation and
guidance is provided along the final approach course until reaching the MAP, followed by sequencing to the
missed approach procedure waypoints.

Manual Waypoint Sequencing: When a baro-corrected altitude input is provided to the CMA-9000 FMS, the
sequencing of missed approach legs with an altitude termination (waypoint identifier is an altitude displayed in
parentheses) will be automatic. If no baro-corrected altitude input is available, automatic leg sequencing is not
possible at such waypoints, and a manual leg sequence must be accomplished. When such a waypoint
becomes the active waypoint, the following occurs:

• MANUAL WPT SEQUENCE alert message is displayed with illumination of the remote MSG annunciator.
• <NEXT WPT> prompt is displayed at LSK 6R on the RTE x LEGS 1/X and PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4 pages.
Waypoint sequencing occurs when <NEXT WPT> is pressed.

NOTE: When a holding pattern is part of the missed approach procedure, the CMA-9000 FMS will
automatically exit the holding pattern after performing a single race track. If it is required to continue
the hold, a new holding pattern must be manually entered. Please refer to the holding pattern section
for details.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

With ACT RTE LEGS 1/X displayed:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/1

053o CRS 3.09N M
1L RW06R /oMAP 1R
053o CRS 0.74N M
2L (544) 2R
R200o HDG 12.4N M
3L (INTC) 3R
173o CRS 13.5N M
4L NAPTO /H 4R

5L ----- 5R

6L MISSED APPR> 6R

1. Initiate the missed approach by pressing <MISSED APPR> (LSK 6R).

Navigation and guidance for the first missed approach leg is provided.

NOTE: The <MISSED APPR> prompt will only be displayed if it is configured otherwise the sole means to initiate
the missed approach manouver is to press the TOGA switch.

NEW APPROACH AFTER A MISSED APPROACH

With the desired ARRIVALS 1/1 page displayed:

PANC ARRIVALS 1/2

STARS RTE 1 APPROACHES
1L
AMOTT5 <SEL>VORD06R 1R
TRANS
2L ELLAM2 ANC 2R

3L TAGER1 D173J 3R

4L YESKA1 D350J 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE ROUTE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-17
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

1. Delete the "<ACT>" approach by pressing LSK 1R.

All approaches and runways are displayed.

2. Select the desired approach (and transition) by pressing the appropriate right hand LSK(s).

NOTE: If the same approach is to be flown a second time, delete and reselect the existing approach, or
approach transition, by pressing LSK 1R or LSK 2R and then pressing the appropriate right hand
LSK(s).

3. Display the MOD RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS].

The waypoints of the new approach procedure are separated from the TO WPT by a route discontinuity.

4. Initiate navigation to the first waypoint of the new approach procedure by direct-to navigation, with or without
an intercept, as required by the clearance.

5. Verify the course and distance of the new approach procedure legs, pressing [PREV] or [NEXT] as required.

6. Make the new approach procedure active by pressing [EXEC].

NOTE: EXECution of the new approach procedure causes all remaining waypoints of the current missed
approach procedure to be deleted, except the active waypoint. If automatic leg sequencing from the
active waypoint to the first waypoint of the new approach procedure is desired, simply close up the route
discontinuity by copying the first waypoint of the new approach procedure to the scratchpad and pressing
LSK 2L. Make the new route active by pressing [EXEC].

MODIFYING APPROACH PROCEDURES

To accommodate changes in approach clearances, new procedures can be selected at any time.

Display the ARRIVALS 1/1 page for the desired airport by pressing [DEP/ARR].

NOTE: The ARRIVALS 1/1 page for the destination airport will be displayed by default if the aircraft is more
than halfway to its destination. Otherwise, if the DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1 page is displayed, select the
desired arrival airport by pressing the appropriate <ARR> prompt (LSK 1R or LSK 2R).

1. Press the appropriate right LSK. Pressing LSK toggles the selection status between selected and not
selected.

The selected approach procedure (or portion thereof) is deleted. Repeat this process as required.

NOTE: Deleting the approach will re-display all approaches and runways. Deleting only the approach transition
results in display of only the transitions appropriate to the selected approach.

2. Select the new procedure(s) as described in previous sections.

3. Display the MOD RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS], and verify the course and distance of the legs
of the modified approach procedure, pressing [PREV] or [NEXT] as required.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-18
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4. Make the modified route active by pressing [EXEC].

NOTE: Special care is required when verifying the legs of a modified approach procedure, particularly when
only a partial reselection has been made. Route discontinuities may exist, and certain waypoints of the
retained segment(s), which may have been deleted automatically as part of the loading of the original
approach procedure, may have to be re-inserted individually into the route by manual entry.

APPROACH MODE DESELECTION

If the approach mode is active (e.g. the transition to the approach phase of flight occurred at the 2 nm point
inbound to the FAF), it can be deselected, while retaining the waypoints of the approach and missed approach,
by:

1. initiating a missed approach procedure as described above or

2. executing direct-to navigation to any waypoint as described in Section 9; or

3. if not yet at the FAF, by defining a holding pattern at the FAF, as described in Section 10.

DME ARC INTERCEPTION

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/2

264o 12.8N M
1L
JOH 1R
262o 113N M
2L D173J 2R
263o RARCANC 10.6N M
3L D233J 3R
053o CRS 10.0N M
4L ANC FAF 4R
053o CRS 5.09N M
5L RW06R /oMAP 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

The CMA-9000 FMS provides automatic, autopilot-coupled interception of a DME arc at the arc's starting point.
Interception of the arc at an intermediate point on the arc must be accomplished manually, as follows:

1. Disengage LNAV.

2. Perform a Direct to the arc's starting waypoint.

3. Manually fly the intercept.

NOTE: When the arc capture criteria are met (combination of XTK and TKE), leg sequencing to arc navigation
occurs automatically, indicated by an automatic waypoint sequence to the waypoint terminating the arc,
and rotation of the HSI course pointer to the arc's tangential course at the aircraft position.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-19
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4. Re-engage LNAV.

or:

Autopilot-coupled interception of the arc at an intermediate point on the arc may be accomplished by moving the
arc's starting point along the arc to the desired radial from the DME station as follows:

With the arc's starting waypoint identifier in scratchpad:

1. Key in /, radial of the desired intermediate point on the arc from the DME station e.g. D173J/220.

2. Display the arc's starting waypoint location in the route by pressing [LEGS] and [NEXT] or [PREV] as
required.

3. Line select the scratchpad entry to the arc's starting waypoint location.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/2

264o 12.8N M
1L
JOH A 1R
264o 120N M
2L D220J 2R
310o RARCANC 2.45N M
3L D233J 3R
053o CRS 10.0N M
4L ANC FAF 4R
053o CRS 5.09N M
5L RW06R /oMAP 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

The new arc's starting waypoint is displayed with a new identifier derived from the entered radial e.g. D220J.

4. Make the modified route active by pressing [EXEC].

Once established on the arc, the HSI course pointer displays the tangential course along the arc path. Lateral
deviation is measured from this tangential course. Near the end of the arc, sequencing to the next waypoint
occurs automatically, with the turn anticipation point computed such that no overshoot of the next navigation leg
will occur up to maximum ground speed of 315 knots.

At any time on the arc, the message HIGH ARC EXIT SPEED may be generated to indicate that the
combination of true air speed and wind will cause an overshoot of the next navigation leg.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-20
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DELETION OF PROCEDURE TURNS

If an approach transition including a procedure turn has been loaded into the route, it can be readily deleted and
converted into a straight-in approach.

With the ACT or MOD RTE x LEGS 1/X page displayed:

1. Line select to the scratchpad (do not key in), the procedure turn reference fix LSK 4L.
ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/3
042o 36.8N M
1L
ANC / 1R
233o P-T 3.00N M
2L ANCPTL 2R
188o P-T 2.25N M
3L ANCPTR 3R
R053o CRS 4.86N M
4L ANC FAF 4R
053o CRS 5.09N M
5L RW06R /oMAP 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

ANC

2. Move the procedure turn reference fix to the TO WPT location by pressing LSK 1L.

The procedure turn reference fix and the two outbound waypoints are deleted from the MOD route, and the
FAF waypoint becomes the TO WPT, with the correct inbound course to the FAF displayed as the default
intercept course.

NOTE: The procedure turn also can be deleted by deleting the reference fix by means of the [CLR] functional
key. However, depending on the order of the deletion and direct-to navigation actions, the intercept
inbound course may have to be entered manually since the default value will be that of the original leg
inbound to the reference fix.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-21
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 7-2

VERTICAL NAVIGATION

GENERAL

This section applies to those aircraft installations where the FMS is configured for VNAV. Refer to AFMS for
further details.

Current CMA-9000 FMS implementation supports a VNAV Approach mode. The Vertical Navigation (VNAV)
function provides advisory geometric vertical guidance on the HSI glideslope scale and is not coupled to the
autopilot/flight-director system. An invalid condition for VNAV will bring the glideslope flag in-view and prevent
display of misleading information.

CAUTION: When the VNAV approach function is utilised during non-precision approaches, it is mandatory for
the crew to have the VNAV approach page displayed on the CMA-9000 Display Panel.

In all instances, the altimeter MUST remain the primary altitude source for the crew.

VNAV APPROACH MODE

Within the terminal area, the FMS provides airplane vertical deviation advisory information, with respect to a
path projected backward at a specified vertical path angle (VPA) from the runway threshold crossing height
(TCH) and passing through the final approach fix (FAF). For vertical profile view, refer to Figure 7-3. Laterally,
the glidepath is centered on the final approach course with its width limited to +/- 6.0 nm inbound to FAF and
limited to +/- 0.6 nm from FAF up to the runway threshold. If the aircraft position is outside this zone defining
the glidepath width, or if the aircraft is not inbound to the landing runway vertical deviation advisory information
will not be provided (e.g. glideslope pointer will be biased out-of-view). For plan view, refer to Figure 7-4.

NOTE: FMS must be in GPS NAV mode for display of vertical deviation information.
If the selected approach name (as it appears on the VNAV page title) does not include a runway
number (e.g. 19L), then the VNAV glidepath calculation cannot be activated since the approach does
not have an associated runway threshold.

The glidepath will automatically be activated upon entering the terminal area, provided the aircraft is positioned
within the zone defining the glidepath width as described above.

When the glidepath is activated, the deviation from the vertical path is being actively computed and displayed on
the HSI/ADI depending on the installation.

The FMS can be configured for temperature compensation. The compensation may be required for destination
airport temperature conditions deviating from the ISA temperature. When configured a system alert message,
"SET AIRPORT TEMP" will be displayed in the scratchpad when the aircraft enters the terminal area. If the
airport temperature is entered into the FMS, the vertical deviation information will include temperature
compensation.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-22
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CAUTION: In warm temperature conditions, the temperature compensated altitudes presented on the VNAV
Approach and LEGS CMA-9000 Display Panel pages will be lower than the charted procedure
altitudes.

Temperature compensation is applied to altitudes for all approach and approach transition waypoints.

The FMS determines the VPA for the selected approach based on the following priority scheme :

1. Use VPA encoded in the navigation database ; or

2. Compute VPA based on vertical path joining FAF altitude plus 50ft and runway threshold elevation plus 50ft
; or

3. If no FAF altitude is encoded, use 3.00 degrees vertical path projected backward from the runway elevation
plus 50ft.

NOTE: When following the VNAV profile, upon overflying the FAF, the crew may notice a difference between
the indicated altitude and the FAF charted altitude. The indicated altitude will be 50 ft or more above
the FAF charted altitude. The reason for this difference is because the FMS computes the target vertical
profile using the VPA determined by the above priority scheme.

If the computed VPA is below 2.75 degrees, an alert message (“LOW GLIDEPATH ANGLE”) will apprear in the
scratchpad.

If the computed VPA exceeds 3.77* degrees, an alert message ("HIGH GLIDEPATH ANGLE") will appear.

NOTE: Maximum value is configurable up to 10.0 degrees depending on the installation.

CAUTION: If LOW or HIGH GLIDEPATH ANGLE message are displayed, the crew has to verify the VPA
displayed on the VNAV approach page. If VPA is appropriate, the approach can be conducted. If
VPA is inapropriate (exceed aircraft performance limitation or does not correspond to approach
plate value) stop using the FMS for this advisory VNAV approach and advise maintenance
operation. Guidance will still be provided in case HIGH/LOW glidepath message are displayed.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-23
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

VDEV
FAF

50 FT VER
TI CAL
MINIMUM ALTITUDE RESTRICTION PAT
H
RWY
MDA WPT

VPA TCH = 50 FT

RUNWAY
THRESHOLD
ELEVATION 0101031

Figure 7-3 Profile View of Vertical Path for a VNAV Approach

HSI SCALE TO CHANGE

ADVISORY MESSAGE
3NM
6NM 2NM
INB GPS
O
COU UND APPROACH CAP
GLDEPATH RSE ANNUNCIATOR
WIDTH
.6NM
IAF FAF .6NM
MAP

6NM 2NM
3NM

VDEV FS=±500FT VDEV FS=±200FT

BEGINNING
OF TERMINAL
AREA 0403010

Figure 7-4 Plan View of the VNAV Approach Zone Along the Glidepath

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-24
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PROCEDURE FOR SELECTING VERTICAL NAVIGATION

1. With a valid approach selected, press [VNAV] to display the VNAV Approach page.

ACT VNAV NDB24L 1/1

MDA-DA
1L
----- 1R
105o 27.5N M
2L EBMOK 1500A 2R
259o FR 33.2N M
3L EBM-05 3000A 3R
MAG W I N D GS
4L >2 4 3 o / 3 0 K T 130K T 4R
CYUL TEMP
5L †††o C 5R
QNH VPA
6L ††††† -3.00o 6R

2. If baro-corrected altitude is not available to the FMS then QNH entry from CMA-9000 Display Panel pages
must be performed. In this case white boxes are displayed at LSK 6L
Enter the QNH value (refer to NOTE [1]).

3. Assuming a Minimum Descent Altitude-Decision Altitude (MDA-DA) of 710ft, enter 710 in scratchpad.
Enter the MDA-DA at LSK1R. The MDA entry is optional.

4. If the temperature entry is configured to “MANDATORY”, then a manual entry of the temperature must be
performed. In this case white boxes are displayed at LSK 5L otherwise dashes are displayed.

The temperature entry must be within -55°C to +55°C.

4.1 Assuming a temperature of -25°C is reported at the destination airport, enter −25 in the scratchpad. Press
LSK 5L and then press the [EXEC] key. All altitudes, including the MDA-DA, for approach and approach
transition waypoints are corrected for the specified temperature (refer to NOTE [2] and [3]).
To review the charted altitudes, simply clear the temperature field by pressing [CLR], LSK 5L on the VNAV
Approach page and then [EXEC].

4.2 Press [LEGS] to review temperature compensated altitudes. Adjusted altitudes will be displayed in reverse
video white.
ACT RTE1 LEGS 1/2
105o 27.5N M
1L EBMOK 3850A
1R
259o FR EBMOK 5.70N M
2L EBM-05 3850A
2R
239o CRS 3.01N M
3L SLOKA 3850A
3R
239o CRS 6.24N M
4L M FAF 1900 4R
239o CRS 3.83N M
5L RW24L /oMAP 167 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-25
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

5. When the glidepath is active, current aircraft altitude relative to the vertical path is indicated by the
installation dependent vertical deviation/glideslope pointer. The computed vertical deviation and target
vertical speed are displayed on the active VNAV Approach page [NOTE 5].
ACT VNAV NDB24L 1/1
MDA-DA
1L
710 1R
239o CRS 3.34N M -3.0o
2L RW24L /oMAP 350A
2R
239o HDG 4.41N M
3L (700) 710A 3R
MAG W I N D GS VDEV
4L >2 4 3 o / 3 0 K T 120K T 38 4R
CYUL TEMP TGT VS
5L - 25o C -385F P M 5R
QNH
6L >2 9 . 9 2 i n H g MISSED APPR> 6R

6. Coincident with the lateral deviation scale change, the vertical deviation scale changes at 2 nm inbound to
the FAF from 500ft full-scale to 200ft full-scale. When on final approach, a Missed Approach prompt
appears at LSK 6R when it is configured.

ACT VNAV NDB24L 1/1

MDA-DA
1L
710 1R
239o CRS 3.34N M -3.0o
2L RW24L /oMAP 350A
2R
239o HDG 4.41N M
3L (700) 710A 3R
MAG W I N D GS VDEV
4L >2 4 3 o / 3 0 K T 120K T 38 4R
CYUL TEMP TGT VS
5L - 25o C -385F P M 5R
QNH
6L >2 9 . 9 2 i n H g MISSED APPR> 6R

7. The VNAV Approach terminates when crossing the runway threshold. If sequencing the missed approach
point and the same approach is re-selected, the entered MDA-DA value is retained. Similarly, the QNH and
Airport Temp entries are retained if approach for same destination airport is re-selected.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-26
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NOTES: [1]: CMA-9000 Display Panel entry of QNH can be in inHg or mb. Decimal point need not be entered.
Local altimeter setting within terminal area is a mandatory input to enable VNAV approach
guidance. In installations where baro-corrected altitude is provided to the FMS from an Air Data
Computer the QNH field (LSK 6L) will be blank.
Refer to the section titled:
“CMA-9000 Display Panel ENTERED ALTIMETER CORRECTION”
for further details.

[2]: When TEMP ENTRY field of VNAV CONFIG page is set to ALERT, and no data entry was made
previously an alert message "SET AIRPORT TEMP" will be displayed in the scratchpad at LSK 5L
upon entering the terminal area with an approach selected.

[3]: If an inactive route definition is in progress upon a temperature entry in the VNAV approach page,
the message “!CONFIRM INACTIVE ROUTE” will be displayed.

[4]: If the aircraft is outside of the zone defined by the glidepath width as specified above or if the
aircraft is not inbound to the landing runway:

• Target vertical speed and vertical deviation is not displayed on this page.
• The vertical deviation/ glideslope pointer is biased-out-of-view.
• The VPA for the approach is also displayed at LSK 2R and/or LSK 3R when the FAF or the
MAP is the active waypoint or NEXT waypoint.

VNAV APPROACH TERMINATION

The VNAV Approach mode will become unavailable under any of the following conditions:

• The FMS navigation mode is not GPS (or cGPS or mGPS or INS/GPS).
• Altitude input is invalid.
• FMS detects an abnormal variation of the altitude rate.
• FMS system valid flag set invalid by hardware fault.
• FMS altitudes disagree.
• FMS altitude is not baro-corrected in terminal area.
• For nav database approaches: the computed glidepath angle for the selected runway exceeds 10.00
degrees.

The VNAV Approach page will cease to display ACT in the title and the FMS will bias the HSI Vertical Deviation
pointer out of view.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-27
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 7-3

TACTICAL APPROACH

See Section 11 for specifics on the TACTICAL APPROACH function.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 7-28
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 8 - POST FLIGHT PROCEDURES

CONTENTS

Subject Page
POSITION ACCURACY CHECK - FLIGHT TERMINATION .................................................................................. 8-1
TAKE-OFF AND LANDING TIMES (if configured)................................................................................................. 8-2

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 8-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 8-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 8

POST-FLIGHT PROCEDURES

POSITION ACCURACY CHECK - FLIGHT TERMINATION

1. With the INIT/REF INDEX 1/2 page displayed, press POS INIT (LSK 2L).

POS INIT/REF 1/2

FMS POS DR
1L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R
REF WAYPOINT
2L KBFI N 4 7 o3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o1 8 . 0 0 2R
INS MODE SET ALT
3L STANDBY -----F T 3R
ALIGN SET INS POS
o o
4L >GND . . 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z OCT20/04 5R

6L <SETUP 6R

2. Verify the present position.

NOTE: A position check can be performed, when over a known reference point, in flight by copying the present
position into the scratchpad by pressing LSK 1R. This frozen present position can be stored for later
analysis as a temporary waypoint at the end of the active route.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 8-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TAKE-OFF AND LANDING TIMES (if configured)

FLIGHT LOG 1/1

TAKEOFF LANDING
1235.4Z 1335.4Z
1L 1R
INFLIGHT AIR MILES
2L 01+00.0 560N M
2R
LANDINGS
3L 12 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

1. Display the INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 page by pressing INIT REF, and then NEXT.

2. Display the FLIGHT LOG 1/1 page by pressing FLIGHT LOG (LSK 6L).

NOTE: The initial takeoff time should only be reset following a ground to air transition for FIXED wing aircraft
and the first ground to air transition following a cold start on the ground for ROTOR aircraft.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 8-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 9 - DIRECT-TO/INTERCEPT

CONTENTS

Subject Page
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................. 9-1
NAVIGATION OF DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT WHEN CMA-9000 FMS IS CONFIGURED FOR A
"STANDARD" DIRECT-TO ........................................................................................................................... 9-1
DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT PROCEDURE......................................................................................................... 9-3
A. DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT IN THE ACTIVE ROUTE ................................................................................ 9-3
B. DIRECT-TO AN OFF-ROUTE WAYPOINT ................................................................................................ 9-3
C. DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT IN THE INACTIVE ROUTE ............................................................................ 9-4
NAVIGATION OF DIRECT-TO WITH INTERCEPT ........................................................................................... 9-4
DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT WITH AN INTERCEPT PROCEDURE................................................................... 9-7
A. ON THE DEFAULT INBOUND COURSE (LEG INTERCEPT) .................................................................. 9-7
B. ON A MANUALLY ENTERED INBOUND COURSE (COURSE INTERCEPT) ......................................... 9-8

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 9-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 9-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 9

DIRECT-TO/INTERCEPT

INTRODUCTION

The active flight plan may be modified at any time by the entry of a direct-to procedure to navigate the aircraft
directly to a downtrack waypoint or to intercept a course inbound to a waypoint. The direct-to waypoint may be
an existing waypoint on or off the route. Entry of an off-route waypoint will create a discontinuity in the active
route which can be closed up as described in Section 5. When the direct-to waypoint is already part of the
current flight plan, all flight plan waypoints prior to the direct-to waypoint will be deleted.
The following describes the Direct-To a fixed course/Direct-To a heading and the Direct-To a waypoint
procedures.

NOTE: The direct-to function can be defined as standard or moving_dtk (via a configurable option). In addition
to this selection, a tactical direct-to function can also be available. When both are configured, they co-
exist in the FMS. (Refer to Section 11 for the tactical direct-to function or the direct-to a moving
waypoint).

NAVIGATION OF DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT WHEN CMA-9000 FMS IS CONFIGURED FOR A

"STANDARD" DIRECT-TO

When a Direct-to a waypoint procedure is executed the CMA-9000 FMS calculates an intercept course to the
waypoint based on the aircraft velocity, present position, track, and wind velocity.

Roll steering command, track angle error (TKE), and lateral deviation (XTK) are provided to guide the aircraft to
intercept the calculated course.

Figure 9-1 illustrates the Direct-To a waypoint procedure.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 9-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

WP2

WP1

PPOS

00 03
33

30

06
27

09
24

12
21 15
18

0703001

Figure 9-1 "Standard" Direct-To a Waypoint Procedure

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 9-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT PROCEDURE

A. DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT IN THE ACTIVE ROUTE

1. Display ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS].

2. Display the desired waypoint by pressing [NEXT] or [PREV] as required.

3. Key in, or copy the waypoint identifier into the scratchpad by pressing the appropriate LSK.

4. Return to the first ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS] or [PREV] as required.

5. Move the waypoint identifier to the TO WPT field by pressing LSK 1L.

"ACT" status on the title line is replaced by "MOD". The direct course and distance from aircraft present
position to the TO waypoint is displayed.

6. Verify the inbound course and distance of the leg to the TO WPT.

Information on any other page can be verified prior to making the direct-to leg active.

7. Make the direct-to leg active by pressing [EXEC].

NOTE: Waypoints between the old TO WPT and new one are deleted from the active route. The "MOD"
status in the title line is replaced by "ACT". Navigation and guidance change to the new leg from
present position to the TO waypoint. If autopilot-coupled, the aircraft will immediately start to turn
towards the direct-to waypoint.

NOTE: A direct to a waypoint may also be achieved by using the DIRECT-TO prompt.

B. DIRECT-TO AN OFF-ROUTE WAYPOINT

1. Key in the off-route waypoint identifier.

2. Display the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS].

3. Move the waypoint identifier to the TO WPT field by pressing LSK 1L.

"ACT" status on the title line is replaced by "MOD". The direct course and distance from aircraft present
position to the TO waypoint is displayed.

"THEN" and "ROUTE DISCONTINUITY" lines are inserted immediately after the new TO waypoint.

4. Verify the inbound course and distance of the leg to the TO WPT.

5. Make the direct-to leg active by pressing [EXEC].

6. Close up the route discontinuity as defined by the ATC clearance.

NOTE: This procedure may result in the creation of an “orphan” waypoint. That is, an isolated waypoint with no
connection to the rest of the flight plan.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 9-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT IN THE INACTIVE ROUTE

1. Display the inactive RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [RTE] followed by LSK 6L <RTE 2> or <RTE 1>
(e.g: In order to access whichever is the inactive route, e.g: RTE 1 or RTE 2).

NOTE: The active RTE page field will show the text “ACT” to the left of the title of the RTE page when a
route/flight plan exists whereas the inactive route does not show the text “ACT”.

2. Display the desired waypoint by pressing [NEXT] or [PREV] as required.

3. Key in, or copy the waypoint identifier into the scratchpad by pressing the appropriate LSK.

4. Return to the first inactive RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS] or [PREV] as required.

5. Move the waypoint identifier to the TO WPT field by pressing LSK 1L.

6. Verify the inbound course and distance of the leg to the TO WPT.

Information on any other page can be verified prior to making the direct-to leg active.

7. Insert the direct-to leg in the inactive route by pressing <CONFIRM>.

NOTE: A direct to a waypoint may also be achieved by using the DIRECT-TO prompt.

NAVIGATION OF DIRECT-TO WITH INTERCEPT

When the Intercept Course function is executed (EXEC key pressed), which may be performed either on the
ground or airborne, the navigation and guidance data output by the CMA-9000 FMS (desired track, track angle
error, crosstrack distance) are relative to the specified intercept course inbound to the waypoint. The mode used
is dependent on the aircraft installation. The CMA-9000 FMS initially enters a Track Hold mode (TRK
configuration) or a Heading Hold (HDG configuration) mode or keeps the wings level (LEVEL configuration) prior
to capturing the intercept leg.

A. When configured for constant track (TRK), or constant heading (HDG), the CMA-9000 FMS enters the
Track/Heading Hold mode when the following conditions are satisfied (refer to Figure 9-1):

• The direct-to/intercept function has been executed (EXEC key pressed).

• The aircraft is airborne and on a valid intercept track/heading.
• The LNAV mode of the autopilot/flight director (AP/FD) system is engaged.

The order in which the conditions occur is not important. When all three conditions are satisfied, the current
aircraft track/heading is maintained until the intercept leg is captured by the lateral steering function of the
CMA-9000 FMS, or until LNAV is disengaged. If LNAV is disengaged and a new track/heading is
established, re-engaging LNAV will cause the CMA-9000 FMS to maintain the new track/heading.

When the CMA-9000 FMS is in Track/Heading Hold mode, continuous checks are performed by the CMA-
9000 FMS to determine if the intercept is achievable. These checks are performed when Track/Heading
Hold is first activated and are repeated periodically until the leg is captured by the CMA-9000 FMS steering
function.

Cancellation of Track/Heading Hold occurs under the following conditions:

CAUTION: Paragraph 1. below may result in a small track/heading change.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 9-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

1. If the predicted intercept point is very close (e.g. less than 0.1 nm) to the leg's termination waypoint and
the airplane is turned from a valid heading intercept, then a path is calculated direct-to the waypoint and
a DIRECT TO FIX alert message is displayed. The display of guidance data remains relative to the
intercept course.

NEXT
WAYPOINT
INTERCEPT
FIX

INTERCEPT
COURSE
TO FIX

6
INTERCEPT
COURSE
CAPTURE

5
TRACK IS
MANTAINED

4
ENGAGE
LNAV
1
DISENGAGE
LNAV

3
FLY HEADING SELECT MODE
UNTIL ON DESIRED HEADING

2
SET UP DIRECT - TO INTERCEPT
LEG ON MCDU AND EXECUTE
PROCEDURE. 0703003

Figure 9-2 Direct-To/Intercept Phases (Heading Hold Mode)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 9-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

2. If the present aircraft track/heading does not cross the intercept leg or the track angle error is larger than
135-degree, then:

a. If the cross-track distance is greater than the 45-degree leg capture distance, the CMA-9000 FMS
causes the LNAV mode to disengage and the “NOT ON INTERCEPT TRK” or “NOT ON
INTERCEPT HDG” message is displayed.

b. If the cross-track distance is less than the 45-degree capture distance, path capture is passed over
to the normal CMA-9000 FMS steering function. No advisory message is displayed.

3. If the track angle error relative to the intercept course is greater than 90-degree, and the aircraft present
position is past the abeam point to the intercept fix, the LNAV AP/FD mode will not engage and the
“NOT ON INTERCEPT TRK” or “NOT ON INTERCEPT HDG” message will be displayed.

When the “NOT ON INTERCEPT TRK” or “NOT ON INTERCEPT HDG” message is displayed, the CMA-
9000 FMS is no longer in Track/Heading Hold mode, and aircraft automatic guidance is controlled by the
normal AP/FD modes. However, if LNAV is disengaged and a new track/heading is established to intercept
the course, re-engaging LNAV will cause the CMA-9000 FMS to return to Track/Heading Hold mode using
the new aircraft track/heading.

If the CMA-9000 FMS LNAV discrete is not configured, the information regarding the AFCS (Auto Flight
Control System) LNAV status is sent through other means to the CMA-9000 FMS. When the CMA-9000 FMS
receives this information the roll command output value changes to compute the value required to intercept the
angle (value which was frozen at the moment the AFCS LNAV switch was pressed).

B. When configured to remain wings level, the CMA-9000 FMS keeps the roll command to a zero value until
initiating the turn to capture the intercept leg. If the intercept is not achievable the FMS will trigger the alert
message “NOT ON INTERCEPT HDG” or “NOT ON INTERCEPT TRK”.

In configurations where LNAV input is not available, if the intercept is not achievable or a "direct to fix" mode
has been initiated, the CMA-9000 FMS continues to monitor the conditions for a valid intercept. If a valid
intercept is detected, the CMA-9000 FMS will remove the alert message and resume the normal intercept
procedure.

In configurations where LNAV input is available, at any time prior to initiation of the inbound turn, the action
of disabling LNAV input, selecting a new heading, and re-enabling LNAV input will cause the CMA-9000
FMS to set roll command to zero until the inbound turn is initiated once again.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 9-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT WITH AN INTERCEPT PROCEDURE

A. ON THE DEFAULT INBOUND COURSE (LEG INTERCEPT)

Enter the identifier of the desired direct-to waypoint in the scratchpad:

1. Display the first ACT LEGS page by pressing LEGS.

2. Move the waypoint identifier to the TO WPT field by pressing LSK 1L.

The "INTC CRS" prompt is displayed, at the LSK 6R location, with the default inbound course shown in
medium font size. If the direct-to waypoint is part of the active route, the default inbound course is the
inbound course of the route leg to the selected waypoint. If it is an off-route waypoint, the default inbound
course is direct from present position and is also displayed as the TO WPT course.

MOD RTE 1 LEGS 1/1

101o CRS 32.4N M
1L
RW06R /oMAP 1R
081o CRS 1.67N M
2L (4000) 2R
086o HDG 12.1N M
3L (INTC) 3R
089o CRS 4.55N M
4L JCT /H 4R
R120o FR NANCY 22.1N M
5L NA16R /o 5R
INTC CRS
6L <ERASE 089o> 6R

3. Select the direct-to intercept mode with default inbound course by pressing INTC CRS (LSK 6R).

The default inbound course changes to LARGE font, and is copied to the TO WPT course. The current
track/heading will not intercept the inbound course prior to reaching the TO WPT, a "NOT ON
INTERCEPT TRK" or "NOT ON INTERCEPT HDG" advisory message will be displayed.

4. Verify the course and distance of the leg to the TO WPT.

NOTE: If the aircraft track/heading is incorrect, turn the aircraft to the correct track/heading prior to pressing
EXEC key.

5. Make the direct-to leg active by pressing EXEC.

The "MOD" status in the title line is replaced by "ACT". Navigation and guidance will change to the new
leg from present position to intercept the inbound course to the TO waypoint on the current track/heading.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 9-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. ON A MANUALLY ENTERED INBOUND COURSE (COURSE INTERCEPT)

With the identifier of the desired direct-to waypoint in the scratchpad:

1. Display the first ACT LEGS page by pressing LEGS.

2. Move the waypoint identifier to the TO WPT field by pressing LSK 1L.

3. Key in the inbound course.

4. Select the direct-to intercept mode by pressing INTC CRS (LSK 6R).

The "INTC" prompt is displayed, at the LSK 6R location, with the scratchpad inbound course shown in LARGE
font size. The scratchpad inbound course is also copied to the TO WPT course. If the current track/heading
will not intercept the inbound course prior to reaching the TO WPT, a “NOT ON INTERCEPT TRK” or "NOT
ON INTERCEPT HDG" advisory message will be displayed.

5. Verify the course and distance of the leg to the TO WPT.

NOTE: If the aircraft track/heading is incorrect, turn the aircraft to the correct track/heading prior to pressing
EXEC key.

6. Make the direct-to leg active by pressing EXEC.

The "MOD" status in the title line is replaced by "ACT". Navigation and guidance change to the new leg from
present position to intercept the inbound course to the TO waypoint on the current track/heading.

NOTE: If a new heading clearance is received to intercept the inbound course, steering aircraft to new heading
and re-engaging LNAV will cause the CMA-9000 FMS to fly the new intercept heading.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 9-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 10 - HOLDING PATTERN

NAVIGATION

CONTENTS

Subject Page
GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
ENTRY PROCEDURES.................................................................................................................................... 10-2
A. SECTOR 1 APPROACH - PARALLEL ENTRY ....................................................................................... 10-2
B. SECTOR 2 APPROACH - OFFSET ENTRY (also called TEARDROP) ................................................. 10-4
C. SECTOR 3 APPROACH - DIRECT ENTRY ............................................................................................. 10-6
HOLDING PATTERN GEOMETRY .................................................................................................................. 10-8
HOLDING PATTERN AT A ROUTE WAYPOINT ............................................................................................ 10-8
HOLDING PATTERN AT AN OFF-ROUTE WAYPOINT ............................................................................... 10-11
HOLDING PATTERN AT PRESENT POSITION............................................................................................ 10-12
SECOND HOLDING PATTERN ..................................................................................................................... 10-12
MODIFYING AN EXISTING HOLD................................................................................................................. 10-13
A. PRIOR TO HOLD ENTRY....................................................................................................................... 10-13
B. AFTER HOLD ENTRY INITIATED ......................................................................................................... 10-13
EXITING A HOLDING PATTERN................................................................................................................... 10-14
A. EXIT OVER FIX (HOLD AT) WAYPOINT............................................................................................... 10-14
B. EXIT BY DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION TO THE HOLDING FIX................................................................ 10-15
C. EXIT BY DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION TO ANY WAYPOINT ................................................................... 10-15
CONTINUE TO HOLD .................................................................................................................................... 10-15
HOLDING PATTERN DELETION .................................................................................................................. 10-16
A. PRIOR TO ENTRY .................................................................................................................................. 10-16
B. AFTER HOLD ENTRY INITIATED ......................................................................................................... 10-16

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 10

HOLDING PATTERN NAVIGATION

GENERAL

The CMA-9000 FMS can navigate a race-track holding pattern at a holding fix. The parameters of the desired
holding pattern may either be entered before take-off or while flying enroute. The holding fix is entered as a
waypoint. This waypoint may be preselected, so that upon reaching it, the CMA-9000 FMS will provide
guidance to enter and continue the holding pattern until such time as the pattern is terminated either
automatically or by operator action.

The shape and terminology of the figure below depicts a right turn holding pattern. For left turn holding patterns,
the corresponding entry and holding procedures are symmetrical with respect to the inbound track.

The holding pattern entry procedures described below may be flown manually or under autopilot control. When
holding patterns are flown manually, intermediate points of the holding pattern procedure (including entry
procedures) must be overflown and should be flown slightly outside the polygone (either the triangle or
rectangle) represented in the figure (examples) provided in the Entry Procedures section. The course pointer on
the HSI will always show the inbound course.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ENTRY PROCEDURES

The entry into the holding pattern will be according to the track angle in relationship to the three entry sectors
shown below.

70º
3
1

40º

2 3

70º

0603001

A. SECTOR 1 APPROACH - PARALLEL ENTRY

1. On reaching the holding fix, the aircraft will turn onto an outbound heading so as to fly a leg parallel to
the inbound leg for a length of approximately 2.6 times the turn radius; and then:

2. Turn left on to the holding side to intercept the inbound track; and then:

3. Upon flying over the holding fix, turn right and follow the holding pattern.

The following figures shows the parallel entry and expected aircraft guidance on a typical* GAMA EFIS
display.

* For COLLINS EFIS-84 display system, no holding pattern is displayed; rather the crew is provided with an
‘/HL’ or ‘/HR’ appended to the holding fix’s waypoint name to indicate a left or right hand rotation hold
pattern, respectively.

NOTE: The advisory message PARALLEL HOLD ENTRY is displayed as soon as either of the following
conditions are fulfilled:
• one minute prior to the holding fix when the aircraft is on track inbound to the holding fix
independently of the ground speed
• one minute prior to the holding fix if the ground speed is greater than 250 kts
• ten seconds prior to the holding fix if the ground speed is less than 250 kts
The message is removed as soon as the holding fix is overflown a second time.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MUR/O

02 03

01 SHU/H

02 03

01 SHU/H

02 03

01 SHU/H

0709252

Figure 10-1 Parallel Entry

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. SECTOR 2 APPROACH - OFFSET ENTRY (also called TEARDROP)

1. On reaching the holding fix, the aircraft will turn to the heading required to fly a 40° track relative to the
reciprocal of the inbound track on the holding side; then:

The following figures show the teardrop entry and expected aircraft guidance on a typical* GAMA EFIS
display.

* For COLLINS EFIS-84 display system, no holding pattern is displayed; rather the crew is provided with an
‘/HL’ or ‘/HR’ appended to the holding fix’s waypoint name to indicate a left or right hand rotation hold
pattern, respectively.

NOTE: The advisory message TEARDROP HOLD ENTRY is displayed as soon as either of the following
conditions are fulfilled:
• one minute prior to the holding fix when the aircraft is on track inbound to the holding fix
independently of the ground speed
• one minute prior to the holding fix if the ground speed is greater than 250 kts
• ten seconds prior to the holding fix if the ground speed is less than 250 kts
The message is removed as soon as the holding fix is overflown a second time.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Figure 10-2 Teardrop Entry

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

2. Fly outbound until the turn distance needed to acquire the inbound leg is reached; and then:

3. Turn right to intercept the inbound track of the holding pattern.

4. On the second arrival over the holding fix, the aircraft will turn right to follow the holding pattern.

C. SECTOR 3 APPROACH - DIRECT ENTRY

On reaching the holding fix, the aircraft will turn right to follow the holding pattern.

The following figures show the direct entry and expected aircraft guidance on a typical* GAMA EFIS display.

* For COLLINS EFIS-84 display system, no holding pattern is displayed; rather the crew is provided with an
‘/HL’ or ‘/HR’ appended to the holding fix’s waypoint name to indicate a left or right hand rotation hold
pattern, respectively.

NOTE: The advisory message DIRECT HOLD ENTRY is displayed as soon as either of the following
conditions are fulfilled:
• one minute prior to the holding fix when the aircraft is on track inbound to the holding fix
independently of the ground speed
• one minute prior to the holding fix if the ground speed is greater than 250 kts
• ten seconds prior to the holding fix if the ground speed is less than 250 kts
The message is removed as soon as the holding fix is overflown.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MUR/O

01

SHU/H

02

03

MUR/O

01

SHU/H

02

03

0709250

Figure 10-3 Direct Entry

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HOLDING PATTERN GEOMETRY

The initial geometry of the holding pattern is computed on the first fly-over of the holding fix, based on current
TAS and computed wind, and at a bank angle for a rate one (1) turn, or not exceeding the maximum configured
roll, whichever is less. The size of the holding pattern is compared to the dimensions of the protected airspace,
less a small buffer, defined by ICAO for the maximum holding speed (see Table10-1) and maximum wind for
that altitude. On each subsequent fly-over of the holding fix the holding pattern geometry is recomputed using
the current TAS and wind.

If the combination of actual holding speed and wind will cause the ICAO holding pattern protected airspace to be
exceeded, the alert message HIGH HOLDING SPEED is generated one (1) minute prior to reaching the holding
fix on entry, and on each subsequent fly-over of the fix.

NOTE: When buffet protection is configured, the CMA-9000 FMS removes the buffet limit during a hold to ensure
that the bank angle limit does not cause an increase in the holding pattern area.

Aircraft Type Altitude (feet) Maximum IAS (knots)

Fixed wing, slow 0-14,000 170

Fixed wing, fast 0-14,000 230
(Aerobatic) 14,000-20,000 240
20,000-34,000 265
34,000 and above 0.83 Mach
Helicopter 0-6,000 100
6,000-14,000 170

Table 10-1 ICAO Maximum Holding Speeds

NOTE: The holding pattern geometry provides parallel inbound and outbound legs.

HOLDING PATTERN AT A ROUTE WAYPOINT

With any ACT LEGS page displayed:

Press HOLD, the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page is displayed with "/H" in the scratchpad.

or:

Display the DES+SAR or TACTICAL 1/2 or INACT DES+SAR or TACTICAL 2/2 page, and select "HOLD" by
pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL> (LSK 6R) and <HOLD> (LSK 3R).

NOTE: The holding pattern can also be inserted in the inactive route by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or
<TACTICAL> (LSK 6R), [NEXT] (for the INACT DES+SAR or TACTICAL 2/2) and <HOLD> (LSK 3R).
The inactive RTE y LEGS 1/X page is displayed with "/H" in the scratchpad.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

or:

Key in "/H".

MOD RTE 1 LEGS 1/4

299o 39.6N M
1L
CAFTA 1R
298o 154N M
2L YZP 2R
307o 86.7N M
3L MOCA1 3R
306o 165N M
4L BKA 4R
282o 197N M
5L KILLA 5R

6L <ERASE LEGS ETA> 6R

/H
or:

Press [LEGS] and key in /H.

then:

1. Display the desired HOLD FIX waypoint by pressing [PREV] or [NEXT] as required.

2. Move the /H prompt to the desired holding waypoint by pressing the appropriate LSK.

The MOD HOLD page is displayed. Default values of hold parameters are displayed (right turn, inbound
course equal to course of route leg to holding waypoint, and leg time of 1 or 1.5 minutes depending on aircraft
altitude at the time the hold entry is initiated). Follow the manual entry procedure below to modify any hold
parameters. If present in the navigation database, speed and altitude restrictions are also displayed.

When the aircraft crosses 14000 ft, the HOLD leg time does not change automatically.

3. Change the turn direction by pressing LSK 2L.

and/or:

4. Key in the new inbound course into the scratchpad and move it to the INBD CRS field by pressing LSK 3L.

and/or:

5. Key in the new leg time/leg distance into the scratchpad and move it to the TIME/LEG DIS field by pressing
LSK 4L.

The field which has not been entered (either time or distance) is replaced by dashes.

then:

6. Verify the new holding pattern parameters.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

7. Arm the hold by pressing [EXEC].

RTE 1 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L KILLA 220/ 5000A 1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >RIGHT z
2R
INBD CRS
3L 050 o
3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L 1.0M I N / --.-N M 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L MANUAL ARMED 5R

6L <NEW HOLD 6R

9. Return to the RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS].

The previously displayed ACT x LEGS 1/X page is displayed with "/H" legend beside the waypoint identifier. The
holding pattern is now armed at the selected waypoint. On reaching this waypoint, navigation and guidance is
provided to perform a standard entry and on the HOLD 1/X page, the title line status will be shown as "ACT
HOLD".

On reaching the holding waypoint the course to the TO WPT displayed on the RTE x LEGS 1/X and PROGRESS
1/3 or 1/4 pages is replaced by the legend "HOLD AT", and a HOLD prompt is displayed at LSK 6R.

A navigation database holding pattern used for a course reversal is identified as EXIT TYPE “ONCE”. The exit of
this type of holding pattern is performed automatically by the CMA-9000 FMS upon completion of the entry
procedure (e.g.: second crossing of the holding fix).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HOLDING PATTERN AT AN OFF-ROUTE WAYPOINT

Key a valid off-route waypoint identifier followed by /H into the scratchpad (e.g.: KILLA/H).

NOTE: If the waypoint is not in the navigation database, the temporary waypoint should be created and inserted
in the desired location in the route (as described in Section 5) before defining the holding pattern.

MOD RTE 1 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L KILLA 220/ 5000A 1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >RIGHT Z
2R
INBD CRS
3L 282 o
3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L 1.0M I N / - - . - N M 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L MANUAL INACTIVE 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

1. Display the desired location in the route by pressing [LEGS] and [NEXT] as required.

2. Move the waypoint entry to the desired location by pressing the appropriate LSK.

The MOD HOLD page is displayed. Modify the holding pattern parameters as required, following the manual
entry procedure described previously.

3. Verify the holding pattern parameters, and arm the hold by pressing [EXEC].

NOTE: If the off-route waypoint is made the TO WPT, EXECuting the holding pattern ALSO results in direct-to
navigation to the holding waypoint without an intercept course. If an intercept course is required,
return to the LEGS page and setup the intercept course prior to pressing EXEC.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HOLDING PATTERN AT PRESENT POSITION

1. Display the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page with the /H prompt in the scratchpad by pressing HOLD.

If a holding pattern has already been defined, the HOLD 1/1 page is displayed. Press NEW HOLD (LSK 6L) to
display the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page, with a HOLD PPOS prompt displayed at LSK 6R.

NOTE: To cancel the procedure at this stage, press [LEGS]. The <HOLD PPOS> prompt at LSK 6R is
replaced by the normal <LEGS ETA> prompt.

2. Select the present position hold mode by pressing <HOLD PPOS> (LSK 6R).

The MOD HOLD 1/X page is displayed, with the holding waypoint identifier shown as "PPOS". If necessary,
modify the hold parameters following the manual entry procedure described above.

3. Verify the pattern parameters.

4. Initiate an immediate entry to the hold at present position by pressing [EXEC].

The present position is defined at the moment the [EXEC] key is pressed.

The "MOD" status in the title line changes to "ACT". The CMA-9000 FMS performs a standard entry to the
hold. If the inbound course is not aligned with the current course, an appropriate standard hold entry
procedure will be followed.

NOTE: A holding pattern at present position can only be initiated using the procedure described above. The
manual entry of "/H" cannot be used.

After EXECuting a hold at the present position, PPOS/H is shown in the first position of the ACT RTE x
LEGS 1/X page. If, subsequently, a DIRECT-TO a waypoint not existent in the current route is
performed, then the holding pattern is exited, the PPOS/H is deleted from the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X
page, and the respective waypoint is inserted in the first position of the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page
followed by a discontinuity and the initial route.

SECOND HOLDING PATTERN

With the ACT HOLD or HOLD page displayed:

1. Initiate the definition of a new hold by pressing <NEW HOLD> (LSK 6L).

2. Follow any of the previously described hold definition procedures.

The HOLD page title line will display 1/X instead of 1/1. Holding patterns are displayed in the order of route
waypoints. When in ACT HOLD or HOLD pages, all holding patterns in the route can be displayed using
[NEXT] or [PREV] keys.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MODIFYING AN EXISTING HOLD

A. PRIOR TO HOLD ENTRY

1. Display the HOLD 1/X page by pressing [HOLD].

2. Modify the holding parameters.

HOLD page title line will display MOD HOLD.

3. Verify the new pattern parameters, and accept them by pressing [EXEC].

B. AFTER HOLD ENTRY INITIATED

1. Display the HOLD 1/X page by pressing [HOLD].

When the aircraft is in the holding pattern, the ACT HOLD page is displayed.

2. Modify the holding parameters.

The HOLD page title line will change from ACT HOLD to MOD HOLD.

3. Verify the new pattern parameters, and make them active by pressing [EXEC].

The HOLD page title line will change from MOD HOLD to HOLD.

NOTE: The new parameters become effective for navigation and guidance only on the next fly-over of the
holding fix, at which time the HOLD page title line will change from HOLD to ACT HOLD.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

EXITING A HOLDING PATTERN

A. EXIT OVER FIX (HOLD AT) WAYPOINT

1. Display the ACT HOLD 1/X page by pressing [HOLD].

(Refer to HOLD 1/1 page in Appendix A for details.)

ACT RTE 1 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L
KILLA 220/ 5000A 1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >RIGHT 2332.5Z 2R
INBD CRS
3L 050 o 3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L 1.0M I N / - - . - N M 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L MANUAL IN PROGRESS 5R

6L <NEW HOLD EXIT HOLD> 6R

2. Arm the exit hold procedure by pressing <EXIT HOLD> (LSK 6R).

The "EXIT HOLD" prompt disappear, the status changes to EXITING HOLD and the <ERASE> prompts
displayed in green reverse video. "ACT" status in the title line changes to "MOD", and the EXEC annunciator
illuminates.

NOTE: The hold exit can be cancelled at this point by pressing <ERASE> (LSK 6L). The prompt reverts to
"NEW HOLD", the <EXIT HOLD> prompt is displayed in green reverse video, the status changes to IN
PROGRESS, "MOD" status reverts to "ACT", and the EXEC annunciator extinguishes.

3. Initiate exit from the hold by pressing [EXEC].

On the RTE x LEGS 1/X, PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4, and VNAV 1/1 pages, the legend “HOLD AT” is replaced
with “EXIT HOLD” upon arming the holding pattern exit.

Navigation and guidance is provided for an immediate turn (not applicable to the first outbound turn) towards
the holding fix to exit the holding pattern over the fix, followed by continuation of the active route. The
immediate turn is not applicable for the very first holding pattern turn. If crew must exit the pattern during the
first run, a direct-to procedure to the next waypoint (e.g. waypoint following the holding fix) must be executed
as described below, Exit By Direct-To Navigation To Any Waypoint.

If an entry into the holding pattern is being performed, the entry procedure is completed normally prior to
exiting the hold. Sequencing of the holding fix is done without turn anticipation (Fly-over).

In order to sequence the holding fix and proceed with the holding fix sequence when the pattern is flown
manually, the aircraft must overfly (or pass outside) the second temporary (diagonally opposite to the holding
fix) waypoint as shown in Entry Procedures subsection.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. EXIT BY DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION TO THE HOLDING FIX

Perform a standard direct-to procedure to the holding fix.

When the direct-to is executed, navigation and guidance is provided for an immediate turn towards the
inbound holding course. Sequencing of the holding fix is done with turn anticipation (Fly-by).

C. EXIT BY DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION TO ANY WAYPOINT

Perform a standard direct-to procedure to any waypoint.

When the direct-to is EXECuted, navigation and guidance is provided to turn in the shortest direction to the
direct-to course.

CONTINUE TO HOLD

When a procedure is define with an exit type equals to ONCE or AT TGT ALT, and it is required to stay in the
hold, the following procedure should be executed:

1. Display the ACT HOLD 1/X page by pressing [HOLD].

Refer to HOLD 1/1 page in Appendix A for details.

ACT RTE 1 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L
ESPIG 2000A 1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >LEFT 1425.1Z 2R
INBD CRS
3L 306 o 3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L -.-M I N / 5 . 0 N M 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L >O N C E EXIT ARMED 5R

6L <NEW HOLD RESUME HOLD> 6R

2. Resume the exit hold procedure by pressing <ONCE> (LSK 5L).

The "RESUME HOLD" prompt disappear, the status changes to RESUMING HOLD, the exit type changes to
MANUAL and the <ERASE> promtps displayed in green reverse video. "ACT" status in the title line changes
to "MOD", and the EXEC annunciator illuminates.

NOTE: The resuming hold can be cancelled at this point by pressing <ERASE> (LSK 6L). The prompt reverts to
"NEW HOLD", the <RESUME HOLD> prompt is displayed in green reverse video, the status changes to
EXIT ARMED, "MOD" status reverts to "ACT", and the EXEC annunciator extinguishes.

NOTE: After the ONCE or AT TGT ALT procedure has been changed to a manual hold, it is impossible to return
to the hold procedure fetched from the navigation database.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-15
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. Confirm the resume hold procedure by pressing <EXEC> (LSK 6R).

The "RESUME HOLD" prompt is changed to EXIT HOLD, the status changes to IN PROGRESS, and the
<NEW HOLD> promtps is displayed. "MOD" status in the title line changes to "ACT", and the EXEC
annunciator extinguishes.

HOLDING PATTERN DELETION

A. PRIOR TO ENTRY

1. Display the desired holding waypoint by pressing [LEGS], [NEXT] or [PREV] as required.

2. Key in /.

3. Cancel the hold by pressing the appropriate LSK.

The "/H" legend at the selected waypoint is deleted. The waypoint is NOT deleted from route.

4. Accept the modified route by pressing [EXEC].

B. AFTER HOLD ENTRY INITIATED

Perform any exit hold procedure.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 10-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 11 - TACTICAL FUNCTIONS

CONTENTS

Subject Page
SEARCH PATTERN (If configured) ............................................................................................................. 11-1
SEARCH PATTERN IN THE ACTIVE ROUTE.............................................................................................. 11-5
SEARCH PATTERN IN THE INACTIVE ROUTE ........................................................................................ 11-12
SEARCH PATTERN AT AN OFF-ROUTE WAYPOINT.............................................................................. 11-12
SEARCH PATTERN USING THE SEARCH AND RESCUE MENU ........................................................... 11-13
SEARCH PATTERN AT PRESENT POSITION (IN FLIGHT ONLY) .......................................................... 11-13
MODIFYING AN EXISTING SEARCH PATTERN ....................................................................................... 11-15
EXITING A SEARCH PATTERN ................................................................................................................. 11-15
A. EXIT BY DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION TO ANY WAYPOINT ............................................................... 11-15
B. AUTOMATIC EXIT .............................................................................................................................. 11-15
DISPLAYING THE SEARCH PATTERN PARAMETERS AFTER SEARCH DEFINITION ........................ 11-15
SEARCH PATTERN DELETION ................................................................................................................. 11-16
A. PRIOR TO ACTIVATION (INACTIVE) ................................................................................................ 11-16
B. AFTER ACTIVATION (ENGAGED) .................................................................................................... 11-16
MARK ON TOP (If configured) ................................................................................................................... 11-16
HOVER PROCEDURE (TRANSDOWN TO HOVER) (If configured) ........................................................ 11-18
USER DATABASE....................................................................................................................................... 11-23
A. MANUAL ENTRY OF A FIXED USER WAYPOINT IN THE DATABASE ......................................... 11-24
B. MANUAL ENTRY OF A MOVING USER WAYPOINT IN THE DATABASE ..................................... 11-25
C. MANUAL ENTRY OF AN AIRPORT TYPE USER WAYPOINT IN THE DATABASE ...................... 11-27
D. DELETE A USER WAYPOINT FROM THE USER DATABASE ....................................................... 11-27
E. DELETE ALL THE USER WAYPOINTS FROM THE USER DATABASE ........................................ 11-29
F. VIEW ALL THE USER WAYPOINTS IN THE DATABASE ............................................................... 11-30
G. CREATING A USER WAYPOINT FROM A DMAP WAYPOINT ....................................................... 11-30
H. CREATING A USER WAYPOINT FROM A MARK ON TOP OR A JOYSTICK POSITION ............. 11-31
I. CREATING A USER WAYPOINT FROM A FLIR POSITION ............................................................ 11-32
J. SAVING THE DATABASE FOR USE BY ANOTHER AIRCRAFT .................................................... 11-33
CENTRAL CLEAR? (If configured)............................................................................................................ 11-34
BACKTRACK ROUTE (If configured)........................................................................................................ 11-35
RENDEZ-VOUS WITH A MOVING WAYPOINT (If configured) ................................................................ 11-37
NAVIGATION OF DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT WHEN CMA-9000 FMS IS CONFIGURED FOR A "MOVING
DTK" DIRECT-TO...................................................................................................................................... 11-38
NAVIGATION OF TACTICAL DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT ......................................................................... 11-39
TACTICAL DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT PROCEDURE............................................................................... 11-39
A. TACTICAL DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT IN THE ACTIVE ROUTE ..................................................... 11-39
B. TACTICAL DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT IN THE INACTIVE ROUTE ................................................. 11-40
BULLS EYE (If configured) ........................................................................................................................ 11-41
TACTICAL APPROACH (if configured)..................................................................................................... 11-47
ENTERING A TACTICAL APPROACH....................................................................................................... 11-56
TACTICAL APPROACH SELECTION FROM DATABASE (Optional)...................................................... 11-57
DESELECTING A TACTICAL APPROACH FROM FLIGHT PLAN ........................................................... 11-57
MODIFICATION OF A TACTICAL APPROACH IN FLIGHT PLAN ........................................................... 11-58
DELETING A TACTICAL APPROACH ....................................................................................................... 11-58

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 11 - TACTICAL FUNCTIONS

CONTENTS

Subject Page
CALCULATED AIR RELEASE POINT (CARP) AND HIGH ALTITUDE RELEASE POINT (HARP) (If
configured) ............................................................................................................................................... 11-59
INITIATION OF A CARP/HARP PROCEDURE........................................................................................... 11-62
CARP PLAN 1/3 (If configured) ................................................................................................................. 11-65
CARP PLAN 2/3 (If configured) ................................................................................................................. 11-68
CARP PLAN 3/3 (If configured) ................................................................................................................. 11-72
CARP PROGRESS X/X (when X/X = 4/4 if 3 page set and CARP is configured or X/X = 5/5 if 4 page set
and CARP is configured)......................................................................................................................... 11-75
CARP SEQUENCE OF EVENTS................................................................................................................. 11-78
CARP ALERT MESSAGES ......................................................................................................................... 11-80
EXIT FROM CARP ....................................................................................................................................... 11-81
CARP RE-ENTRY ........................................................................................................................................ 11-81
CARP WIND ENTRY.................................................................................................................................... 11-82
CARP SPEED TARGET ON DISPLAY SYSTEM........................................................................................ 11-82
POSITION UPDATES FOR CARP - GENERAL.......................................................................................... 11-83
CARP TEMPORARY POSITION UPDATE ................................................................................................. 11-83
CARP MARK TEMPORARY POSITION UPDATE...................................................................................... 11-84
ENDING A TEMPORARY CARP POSITION UPDATE............................................................................... 11-85
COSPAS/SARSAT DISTRESS BEACON HANDLING (If configured) ..................................................... 11-86
TARGET POSITION RECEPTION (from ATOS and/or RADAR, if configured) ...................................... 11-88
ATOS FLIGHT PLAN TRANSFER TO FMS (if ATOS is configured) ....................................................... 11-89
FMS WAYPOINT TRANSMISSION TO RADAR (if FIAR 1500B RADAR is configured) ........................ 11-92

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 11

TACTICAL FUNCTIONS
NOTE: The following functions can only be used in aircraft conducting military, para-military, search
and rescue, coast-guard or police operations.

These functions are not covered by any TSO performance standards.

SEARCH PATTERN (If configured)

NOTE: SAR patterns are limited to use under Visual Flight Rules only, unless the aircraft is 2000 feet above all
obstacles within 10 nautical miles of the aircraft flight path.

The CMA-9000 FMS can navigate three types of search patterns from a search fix: expanding square, creeping
ladder and sector search (Figure 1). The parameters of the desired search pattern may either be entered before
take-off or while en-route to the search area. Based on parameters entered, the FMS computes the maximum
ground speed at which the search should be performed. If the aircraft speed exceeds the maximum SAR ground
speed computed, the pattern will not be flown optimally and overshoot will occur. The starting point of the search
pattern is entered as a waypoint. This waypoint may be pre-selected, so that upon reaching it, the CMA-9000
FMS will provide guidance to enter and continue the defined pattern until such time as the pattern is terminated
either automatically or by operator action.

Alternately, the search pattern may be initiated at present position by selecting the PPOS prompt (LSK 5L) on
the RTE x SQUARE, LADDER, or SECTOR 1/X page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-1
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PT T
W AR
ST
1) EXPANDING SQUARE

START
WPT

2) CREEPING LADDER

LEG
LENGTH

3) SECTOR SEARCH 0709268

Figure 11-1 Search Patterns

The FMS treats SAR waypoints as fly-by waypoints (e.g. involving turn anticipation). Crews should be aware of
this characteristic when defining the search on the SAR page. Refer to Figure 11-2 (a), which is an example of
a ladder pattern for a search field of 5 nm in width that needs to be flown with a track spacing of 1 nm. When
defining the dimensions of the search area, it is recommended to increase the leg length (or diameter for the
sector pattern searches) by twice the turn radius (r) as shown in Figure 11-2 (b) in order to start and end the
turns outside the search field.

Failure to take this characteristic into consideration may cause a loss of visibility during the turns, depending on
aircraft type (fixed wing vs rotor, banking capability).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-2
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Figure 11-2 Ladder Search Pattern Details

The following table provide the value for twice the turn radius. It can be added to the search area when entering
leg length for ladder pattern searches or diameter for the sector pattern searches.

Maximum Ground Speed Maximum Bank Angle

(knots) (degrees)
15 20 25 30

50 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.1

60 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.2
70 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2
80 0.7 0.5 0.4 0.3
90 0.9 0.6 0.5 0.4
100 1.1 0.8 0.6 0.5
110 1.3 1.0 0.8 0.6
120 1.6 1.2 0.9 0.7
130 1.8 1.4 1.1 0.9
140 2.1 1.6 1.2 1.0
150 2.4 1.8 1.4 1.1
160 2.8 2.0 1.6 1.3
170 3.1 2.3 1.8 1.5
180 3.5 2.6 2.0 1.6
190 3.9 2.9 2.3 1.8
200 4.4 3.2 2.5 2.0
210 4.8 3.5 2.8 2.2
220 5.3 3.9 3.0 2.4

Table 11-1 Twice the Turn Radius in nautical miles function of Max Bank Angle and Max Ground Speed

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-3
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

When entering the ladder search, the FMS treats the entry waypoint of the search pattern as a fly-over. Hence
the crew should ensure that the pattern is entered without a significant course change at the pattern entry
waypoint, to avoid a large overshoot.

Figure 11-3 Ladder Search Pattern Details

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-4
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SEARCH PATTERN IN THE ACTIVE ROUTE

Display the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing the [LEGS] functional key. Enter “/S” in the scratchpad.

The RTE LEGS 1/X page is displayed with "/S" in the scratchpad.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/3

161o 0.81N M
1L
SEA 1R
281o 54.2N M
2L ARRIE 2R
279o 52.6N M
3L TOU 3R
297o CRS 164N M
4L FINGS 4R
293o 45.8N M
5L ZES 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

/S

then:

1. Display the desired SEARCH FIX waypoint by pressing [PREV] or [NEXT] as required.

2. Move the "/S" prompt to the desired search waypoint by pressing the appropriate LSK key.

The MOD RTE x SQUARE 1/1 page is displayed. Default values of search parameters are displayed.

NOTE: The SAR Bearing field displays the value of the current bearing to the respective waypoint.
Follow the manual entry below to modify any search parameters.

3. Change the pattern type by pressing [PREV] or [NEXT]. By pressing once the [NEXT] functional key, the
MOD RTE x LADDER 1/1 page is displayed. Another press of the [NEXT] functional key will display the
MOD RTE x SECTOR 1/1 page.

and/or:

4. For SQUARE and LADDER search, key in the leg length (between 0.1 and 40 nautical miles) into the
scratchpad and move it to the TRACK SPACING or LEG LENGTH field by pressing LSK 1R.

and/or:

5. For SECTOR search, key in the diameter value of the leg length (between 0.1 and 40 nautical miles) into the
scratchpad and move it to the DIAMETER field by pressing LSK 1R.

and/or:

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

6. For LADDER search, key in the leg width (between 0.1 and 4.0 nautical miles) into the scratchpad and move
it to the TRACK SPACING field by pressing LSK 2R.

and/or:

7. For SECTOR search, key in the angle (between 5 and 90 degrees) into the scratchpad and move it to the
ANGLE field by pressing LSK 2R.

and/or:

8. If needed, key in the new search bearing into the scratchpad and move it to the SAR BRG field by pressing
LSK 3R.

then:

9. Verify the NEW search pattern parameters.

MOD RTE 1 SQUARE 1/1

ID TRACK SPACING
1L
ARRIE 1.0N M 1R
REF ID
2L ----- 2R
SAR BRG
3L 281 T 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 72 KT SQUARE 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE ACTIVATE> 6R

MOD RTE 1 LADDER 1/1

ID LEG LENGTH
1L
ARRIE 2.0N M 1R
REF ID TRACK SPACING
2L ----- 2.0N M 2R
SAR BRG
3L 281T 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 100K T LADDER 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE ACTIVATE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MOD RTE 1 SECTOR 1/1

ID DIAMETER
1L
ARRIE 4.0N M 1R
REF ID ANGLE
2L ----- 30o 2R
SAR BRG
3L 281 T
3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 107K T SECTOR 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE ACTIVATE> 6R

10. Arm the search by pressing <ACTIVATE> and [EXEC].

11. Return to the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS].

The ACT RTE LEGS 1/X page is displayed with "/s" legend beside the search waypoint identifier. The
search pattern is now armed at the selected waypoint. On reaching this waypoint, navigation and guidance
is provided to perform the selected pattern

On reaching the search waypoint, the course to the TO WPT displayed on the RTE LEGS 1/X and
PROGRESS 1/4 pages is replaced by the legend "SEARCH", and the Distance to go is the direct distance
to the search waypoint.

NOTE: Only one search pattern may be defined in the route at a given time.

A second possibility for defining a search pattern at a route waypoint is the following:

1. Display the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing the [LEGS] functional key.

2. Press the LSK corresponding to the waypoint on which the search pattern will be defined.

The ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page is displayed with the respective waypoint displayed in the scratchpad.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/3

161o 0.81N M
1L
SEA 1R
281o 54.2N M
2L ARRIE 2R
279o 52.6N M
3L TOU 3R
297o CRS 164N M
4L FINGS 4R
293o 45.8N M
5L ZES 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

ARRIE

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. Press [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL> (LSK 6R).

The DES+SAR or TACTICAL 1/2 page is displayed with the respective waypoint displayed in the REF ID
field (LSK 1L).

DES+SAR 1/2
REF ID
1L
ARRIE RTE DISCON> 1R
RAD/DIS
2L ---T/----NM HOVER> 2R

3L <SQUARE HOLD> 3R

4L <LADDERACT RADIAL-TO> 4R

5L <SECTOR TACT DTO> 5R

6L <FLY OVER DIRECT-TO> 6R

4. Press one of the 3 search patterns available (SQUARE on LSK 3L, LADDER on LSK 4L, SECTOR on LSK
5L).

The ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page is displayed with the respective waypoint followed by “/S” displayed in the
scratchpad.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/3

161o 0.81N M
1L
SEA 1R
281o 54.2N M
2L ARRIE 2R
279o 52.6N M
3L TOU 3R
297o CRS 164N M
4L FINGS 4R
293o 45.8N M
5L ZES 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

ARRIE/S

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

5. Press the LSK corresponding to the field where the search pattern needs to be inserted in the flight plan.

The MOD RTE x SQUARE 1/1 page (the search page corresponding to the LSK pressed in step 4) is
displayed with the respective waypoint displayed in the ID field.

MOD RTE 1 SQUARE 1/1

ID TRACK SPACING
1L
ARRIE 1.0N M 1R
REF ID
2L ----- 2R
SAR BRG
3L 281 T 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 72 KT SQUARE 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE ACTIVATE> 6R

6. If necessary, change the pattern type by pressing [PREV] or [NEXT]. In the case shown above, by pressing
once the [NEXT] functional key, the MOD RTE x LADDER 1/1 page is displayed. Another press of the
[NEXT] functional key will display the MOD RTE x SECTOR 1/1 page.

7. If necessary, change the pattern parameters (TRACK SPACING, LEG LENGTH, SAR BRG, DIAMETER
and ANGLE).

8. Press ACTIVATE (LSK 6R) and the EXEC functional key.

The waypoint identifier followed by “/S” is inserted in the flight plan and the CMA-9000 FMS will provide
guidance for the defined search pattern as soon as the search origin will be reached.

A third possibility for defining a search pattern at a route waypoint is the following:

1. Display the DES+SAR or TACTICAL 1/2 page and select the search pattern by pressing one of the search
pattern prompts provided on LSK 3L (SQUARE), LSK 4L (LADDER), LSK 5L (SECTOR).

The search pattern page is displayed.

RTE 1 SQUARE 1/1

ID TRACK SPACING
1L
1.0N M 1R
REF ID
2L 2R
SAR BRG
3L 000º 3R
ACTIVE SAR
4L NONE 4R

5L 5R

6L <PPOS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

2. Enter the waypoint identifier in the ID field.

RTE 1 SQUARE 1/1

ID TRACK SPACING
1L ARRIE 1.0N M 1R
REF ID
2L ----- 2R
SAR BRG
3L 000 T
3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 72 KT SQUARE 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL ACTIVATE> 6R

3. If necessary, change the pattern parameters (TRACK SPACING, SAR BRG, DIAMETER, and ANGLE).

4. Activate the pattern by pressing LSK 6R.

The MOD RTE x SQUARE 1/1 page is displayed.

MOD RTE 1 SQUARE 1/1

ID TRACK SPACING
1L
ARRIE 1.0N M 1R
REF ID
2L ----- 2R
SAR BRG
3L 281 T
3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 72 KT SQUARE 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

5. Press the [EXEC] functional key.

The search pattern is added as the first waypoint in the legs page followed by a discontinuity and the
original flight plan.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/3

254o 55.6N M
1L
ARRIE /S
1R
THEN
2L 2R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
3L SEA 3R
281o 54.2N M
4L ARRIE 4R
279o 52.6N M
5L TOU 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

6. Press [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL> (LSK 6R).

The DES+SAR or TACTICAL 1/2 page is displayed with the status “ACT” (reverse video white) appended to
the prompt if an activated square search pattern is in the flight plan.

DES+SAR 1/2
REF ID
1L
ARRIE RTE DISCON> 1R
RAD/DIS
2L ---T/----NM HOVER> 2R

3L <SQUAREACT HOLD> 3R

4L <LADDER RADIAL-TO> 4R

5L <SECTOR TACT DTO> 5R

6L <FLY OVER DIRECT-TO> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SEARCH PATTERN IN THE INACTIVE ROUTE

The same steps can be applied for the insertion of the search pattern procedures in the inactive route. Press
<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL> [NEXT] to access the INACT DES+SAR or TACTICAL 2/2 page. These steps
relate to the inactive route pages:

RTE y 1/X and RTE y LEGS 1/X.

NOTE: The insertion of a search pattern in an inactive route is disallowed when the active route is being
modified. Data entry advisory message “!ACTIVE ROUTE IN MOD” is displayed in this case.

INACT DES+SAR 2/2

REF ID
1L
WPT04 RTE DISCON> 1R
RAD/DIS
T
2L --- /----NM 2R

3L <SQUAREACT HOLD> 3R

4L <LADDER RADIAL-TO> 4R

5L <SECTOR TACT DTO> 5R

6L <FLY OVER DIRECT-TO> 6R

SEARCH PATTERN AT AN OFF-ROUTE WAYPOINT

Key in a valid off-route waypoint identifier followed by "/S" into the scratchpad (e.g.: AAA/S).

NOTE: If the waypoint is not in the navigation database, the temporary waypoint should be created and
inserted in the desired location in the route (as described in Section 3) before defining the search
pattern.

1. Display the RTE x LEGS page so that the search pattern can be inserted at the desired location in the route
by pressing [LEGS] and [NEXT] as required.

2. Move the waypoint entry to the desired location by pressing the appropriate LSK.

The MOD RTE x SQUARE 1/1 page is displayed. Press [NEXT] or [PREV] to select a different search
pattern. Modify the search pattern parameters as required, following the manual entry procedure described
previously.

3. Verify the search parameters, and arm the search by pressing the <ACTIVATE> and [EXEC] keys.

NOTE: If the off-route waypoint is made the TO WPT, executing the search pattern also results in Direct-To
navigation to the search waypoint without an intercept course. If an intercept course is required,
return to the RTE LEGS page and setup the intercept course prior to pressing the [EXEC] key.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SEARCH PATTERN USING THE SEARCH AND RESCUE MENU

1. Display the SQUARE/SECTOR/LADDER 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or

<TACTICAL>, and choose one of the three search patterns.

2. Define a search pattern origin by either entering a previously defined ID (Nav, Custom, User database
or Temporary waypoint), or by defining a position relative to a REF ID (Nav, Custom, User database or
Temporary waypoint).

3. Verify the search parameters and arm the search by pressing the <ACTIVATE> and [EXEC] keys.

NOTE: This method of initiating a search pattern inserts the designated search pattern origin at the top of
the ACT LEGS page and initiates a Direct-To navigation to the search pattern origin.

SEARCH PATTERN AT PRESENT POSITION (IN FLIGHT ONLY)

1. Display the default values of the search parameters SQUARE/LADDER/SECTOR 1/X page by pressing
[INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL> (LSK 6R), and <SQUARE> (LSK 3L), or <LADDER> (LSK 4L), or
<SECTOR> (LSK 5L).

The MOD RTE x SQUARE 1/1 page is displayed. Press [NEXT] or [PREV] to select a different search
pattern. The PPOS prompt is displayed at LSK 5L.

RTE 1 SQUARE 1/1

ID TRACK SPACING
1L
1.0N M 1R
REF ID
2L 2R
SAR BRG
3L 000 T 3R
ACTIVE SAR
4L NONE 4R

5L 5R

6L <PPOS 6R

2. Select the present position search mode by pressing SEARCH PPOS (LSK 6R).

The MOD RTE x SQUARE/SECTOR/LADDER 1/1 page is displayed with the search waypoint identifier
shown as "PPOS". If necessary, modify the search parameters following the manual entry procedure
described above.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MOD RTE 1 SQUARE 1/1

ID TRACK SPACING
1L
PPOS 5.0N M 1R
REF ID
2L ----- 2R
SAR BRG
3L 236 T
3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 163 KT SQUARE 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

3. Verify the pattern parameters.

4. Initiate an immediate search at present position by pressing the [EXEC] key.

The present position is defined at the moment the [EXEC] key is pressed.

The "MOD" status in the title line disappears.

NOTE: A search pattern at present position can only be initiated using the procedure described above while
in flight. The manual entry of "/S" cannot be used.

After EXECuting a search at the present position, PPOS/S is shown in the first position of the ACT
RTE x LEGS 1/X page. If, subsequently, a Direct -To a waypoint not existent in the current route is
performed, then the search pattern is exited, the PPOS/S is deleted from the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X
page, and the respective waypoint is inserted in the first position of the ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page
followed by a discontinuity and the initial route.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MODIFYING AN EXISTING SEARCH PATTERN

NOTE: Modification to the search parameter is allowed only prior to search mode engagement. If the engaged
search pattern needs to be changed, execute a Direct-To the search waypoint and re-define the search
pattern as needed.

1. Display the SQUARE/SECTOR/LADDER 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>
(LSK 6R), and <SQUARE> (LSK 3L), or <LADDER> (LSK 4L), or <SECTOR> (LSK 5L).

2. Modify the search parameters.

The search page title line will display MOD.

3. Verify the new pattern parameters, and accept them by pressing the <ACTIVATE> and [EXEC] keys.

EXITING A SEARCH PATTERN

A. EXIT BY DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION TO ANY WAYPOINT

Perform a standard Direct-To procedure to any waypoint.

When the Direct-To is executed, navigation and guidance is provided to turn in the shortest direction to the
Direct-To course.

B. AUTOMATIC EXIT

After 80 search waypoints, the CMA-9000 FMS will automatically sequence to the next flight plan waypoint.
The advisory message "END OF SEARCH" will then appear in the scratchpad.

DISPLAYING THE SEARCH PATTERN PARAMETERS AFTER SEARCH DEFINITION

Display the SQUARE/SECTOR/LADDER 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>
(LSK 6R), and <SQUARE> (LSK 3L), or <LADDER> (LSK 4L), or <SECTOR> (LSK 5L).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-15
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SEARCH PATTERN DELETION

A. PRIOR TO ACTIVATION (INACTIVE)

1. Display the desired search waypoint by pressing [LEGS], [NEXT] or [PREV] as required.

2. Key in “/”.

3. Cancel the search by pressing the appropriate LSK.

The "/s" legend at the selected waypoint is deleted. The waypoint is not deleted from route.

4. Accept the modified route by pressing [EXEC].

B. AFTER ACTIVATION (ENGAGED)

Perform a standard Direct-To procedure to any waypoint.

MARK ON TOP (If configured)

The CMA-9000 FMS can store the current system position in the predefined store point label "ONTOP". This
position is displayed on the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page and can be used also for creating a new user waypoint.

This function allows the operator to create a waypoint instantly when flying over a landmark or a mission
significant point.

A. {If CFG KEY 2 is not configured to the MARK functional key}. Press [INIT REF].
INIT/REF INDEX 1/2

1L
<IDENT WPT DATA> 1R

2L <POS INIT WPT LISTS> 2R

3L <CTR LEGS NEAREST> 3R

4L <FIX INFO MARK ON TOP> 4R

5L <SETUP NAV STATUS> 5R

6L <MSG RECALL DES+SAR> 6R

To access the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page, press <MARK ON TOP> (LSK 4R) or <[INIT REF], <WPT LISTS>,
<PREDEF WPT> and [NEXT].

NOTE: The display below does not contain the LAST PLS position (PLS equipment not configured) and the
UPDATE POS prompt (EGI or DVS equipment not configured).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PREDEF WPT 2/2

MARK ON TOP 1234:12z
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1L 1R
LAST JOYSTICK 1148:57z
2L N44o12.34 W100o01.02
2R
LAST PLS 1315:10z
3L N43o56.78 W095o17.66
3R
PLS DATA 123.12NM/122o
4L >E N A B L E D 4R

5L <UPDATE POS MARK> 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

Pressing <MARK>, (LSK 5R) stores the current CMA-9000 FMS system position in the predefined store
point label “MARK ON TOP”.

B. {If CFG KEY 2 is configured to MARK}. The [MARK] functional key becomes active and the softkey
<MARK ON TOP> (LSK 4R on the INIT/REF INDEX 1/2 page) is not displayed.

INIT/REF INDEX 1/2

1L <IDENT WPT DATA> 1R

2L <POS INIT WPT LISTS> 2R

3L NEAREST> 3R

4L <FIX INFO 4R

5L <SETUP NAV STATUS> 5R

6L <MSG RECALL DES+SAR> 6R

Press [MARK] or
[INIT REF], <WPT LISTS> ,<PREDEF WPT>, and [NEXT] to access the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page.

NOTE: The display below presents the LAST PLS position (PLS equipment configured) and the UPDATE
POS prompt (EGI or DVS equipment configured).

PREDEF WPT 2/2

MARK ON TOP 1315:10z
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1L 1R
LAST JOYSTICK 1148:57z
2L N44o12.34 W100o01.02
2R
LAST PLS 1234:12z
3L N43o56.78 W095o17.66 3R
PLS DATA 123.12NM/122o
4L >E N A B L E D 4R

5L <UPDATE POS 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-17
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

After pressing the MARK functional key the current CMA-9000 FMS system position is stored in the predefined
label “MARK ON TOP”.

The CMA-9000 FMS Weather Radar or AHCAS EFIS input interface decodes the selected Joystick
Latitude/Longitude received from the Weather Radar or AHCAS joystick equipments and displays this data in
the field “LAST JOYSTICK” (if configured) along with the time of reception.

The CMA-9000 FMS computes the PLS waypoint position in latitude and longitude and in bearing/distance from
the aircraft present position using the range and steering angle data provided by the PLS. This data is displayed
in the field “LAST PLS” (this field is displayed on the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page if the PLS equipment is
configured).

Press <NEW USER WPT>, LSK 6L to store the waypoint in the User Database. The position of the waypoint with
the most recent time of reception is transferred into the USER WPT 1/2 page. Refer to the USER DATABASE
procedure section in Section 11-4.

To insert any of the three positions present on the page in a flight plan, press one of the LSKs (1R, 2R, or 3R) to
copy the point in the scratchpad, and follow the waypoint insertion procedures as presented in Section 3.

The UPDATE POS prompt opens the page with the same name which allows manual updates of the following
navigation modes: INS/GPS {SAGEM SIGMA50H EGI configuration only}, INS/DVS {SAGEM SIGMA50H EGI
configuration only}, INS {Litton LN_100GT EGI configuration only}, and DVS {DVS configuration only}. Refer to
the UPDATE POS in section 12.

HOVER PROCEDURE (TRANSDOWN TO HOVER) (If configured)

The CMA-9000 FMS can also manage a transdown profile to hover based on the definition of a mark point
MRK, a track at MRK opposite to a wind direction, and a hover height at the MRK point. The theoretical profile
for height and speed used to go from the current height and speed value to the final height and speed value is
taken into account.
The TDN and MARK points are treated as flyover waypoints. No other waypoint can be inserted between them.

The transdown to hover flight profile is split in two phases:

• In the first phase the CMA-9000 FMS computes a trajectory in order to put the aircraft in the correct wind
direction. The helicopter is brought to a point TDN facing the wind. The TDN point located at the same
altitude as the beginning of the maneuver is obtained by calculating a guided automatic transition distance
(DTRA) to the MRK point.
• The second phase deals with the transition from TDN to MRK: it is characterized by a fixed bearing and,
before engaging the transition, the distance is recalculated based on true airspeed (TAS) and current
altitude (a command is then sent to the AFCS, which begins the descent and deceleration profiles).

The definition of the MRK point can be done by waypoint marking or by waypoint selection on the CMA-9000
FMS CDU. Thus the MRK point may be entered manually, selected from the database or defined as the present
position. The MRK point may be defined on the CMA-9000 FMS CDU by the MARK key (if available). In addition
the CMA-9000 FMS provides two input types to mark a point.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-18
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

• One input allows the CMA-9000 FMS to receive a position for the MRK point from an external device such
as a Weather Radar or DMAP.
• The other input (installation-dependent) allows the CMA-9000 FMS to receive a position for the MRK point,
to activate and execute the hover procedure by pressing an external push-button.

Unless wind parameters are manually entered on the PROGRESS 1/4 page, the wind used for the hover
procedure is the one computed by the CMA-9000 FMS at reception of the procedure request (wind direction
frozen at procedure execution time, wind module frozen when overflying the TDN waypoint).

CAUTION: The transdown to hover procedure will be executed over flat surfaces in an obstacle free environment.
If the procedure is flown without the CMA-9000 FMS being coupled to an auto-pilot, it will be flown as
close as possible to the EFIS-displayed flight path.

Two scenarios are represented in Figures 11-4 and 11-5:

• The MARK point is designated by either using the joystick on the weather radar or by entering its
coordinates on the CMA-9000 FMS CDU (Figure 11-4).
• The MARK point is designated when overflying a certain point (Figure 11-5).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-19
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MARK

WIND TDN

0109018

Figure 11-4

WIND

MARK

TDN

0109017

Figure 11-5

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-20
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Display the HOVER 1/1 page by pressing:

[INIT REF],<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>,<HOVER> or
[INIT REF],<WPT DATA>,<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>,<HOVER> or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<PREDEF WPT>,select waypoint identifier or coordinates,<DES+SAR> or
<TACTICAL>,<HOVER> or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<DMAP WPT>,select DMAP waypoint identifier,<DES+SAR> or
<TACTICAL>,<HOVER> or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<PREDEF WPT>,[NEXT],<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>,<HOVER> or
[INIT REF],<MARK ON TOP>,<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>,<HOVER> or
[MARK] {if CFG KEY 2 configured to MARK},<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, <HOVER> or
{if FTDN command of IFDS is sent}

Unless the entry is made from the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page, enter or designate the Hover (MRK) point using LSK
1L or LSK 1R on the HOVER 1/1 page. The identifier (LSK 1L) or the coordinates (LSK 1R) of a waypoint can
be changed as long as there is no hover procedure defined in the active route.

If the system wind is not available, the wind parameters can be entered manually on the PROGRESS 1/4 page.

Activate the procedure using the ACTIVATE prompt on LSK 6R. At this point it is still possible to change the
MRK point if needed. Otherwise press [EXEC] to insert the TDN and MRK waypoints in the flight plan and
initiate the guidance.

NOTE: The Hover height is entered on the AFCS and displayed on the CMA-9000 FMS HOVER page.

One of the following actions can be used to exit the hover procedure:

• Initiating another hover procedure.

• Initiating a Direct-To a waypoint procedure.
• Cancelling the route.

_ _ HOVER 1/1

1L WPT01 MARK ON TOP POS

1R
N40o09.61 W089 o20.27
2L RADALT HOVER HEIGHT
2R
2560 FT 80 FT
3L TRUE WIND VELOCITIES
3R
020T/45KT VX +25.5 KT
4L VY +25.5 KT 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL ACTIVATE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-21
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

After the <ACTIVATE> key (LSK 6R) has been pressed, the HOVER 1/1 page is displayed:

MOD HOVER 1/1

1L
WPT01 MARK ON TOP POS
1R
N40o09.61 W089o20.27
2L RADALT HOVER HEIGHT
2R
2560 FT 80 FT
3L TRUE WIND VELOCITIES
3R
020T/45KT VX +25.5 KT
4L VY +25.5 KT 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

At the same time the Transdown (TDN) and Mark (MRK) waypoints are inserted in the RTE1 LEGS:

MOD RTE 1 LEGS 1/2

286o 2.8N M
1L WPT02 / O TDN
1R
255o 0.1N M
2L WPT01 / O MRK
2R
THEN
3L †††††
3R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
4L KLAX 4R

5L 5R

6L LEGS ETA> 6R

After the [EXEC] key has been pressed.

ACT HOVER 1/1

1L
WPT01 MARK ON TOP POS
1R
N40o09.61 W089o 20.27
2L RADALT HOVER HEIGHT
2R
2560 FT 80 FT
3L TRUE WIND VELOCITIES 3R
020T/45KT VX +25.5 KT
4L VY +25.5 KT 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R
TRANSITION DOWN

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-22
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The corresponding LEGS page is:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/2

286o 2.8N M
1L
WPT02 / O TDN
1R
255o 1.2NM
2L WPT01 / O MRK
2R
THEN
3L †††††
3R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
4L KLAX 4R

5L 5R

6L LEGS ETA> 6R
TRANSITION DOWN

USER DATABASE

The CMA-9000 FMS contains a User database which is used to store user waypoints and user routes. User
waypoints can be:
• entered from the scratchpad or
• received from the digital map or
• loaded from or saved to the DLU.

It is also possible to associate the existing route (MOD/ACT) with a user route created by the user and stored in
the User database.

NOTE: A Central Clear discrete input is provided in order to clear the CMA-9000 FMS routes and user
database. The aircraft installation provides the means to action this input.

User waypoints can be defined as different types:

• Waypoint (fixed or moving);
• Airport;
• VHF NAV (TACAN only).

A new user waypoint can be created on the USER WPT pages either by directly entering the coordinates of
the new waypoint or by using a known position as reference and a radial/distance from the reference position
to the desired user waypoint position.

Moving waypoints may be created if the Moving Waypoint configuration option is selected.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-23
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. MANUAL ENTRY OF A FIXED USER WAYPOINT IN THE DATABASE

Display the WPT DATA 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <WPT DATA> (LSK 1R).

WPT DATA 1/1

ID
1L ----- 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

1. Press the <NEW USER WPT> prompt at LSK 6R.

USER WPT 1/2

††††† I D / P O S
FREE= 459
o o
††† ††.†††††† ††.††
1L 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L --- /---N M 2R
TYPE
3L >FIXED 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
o o
5L --- --.-- ---- --.-- 5R

6L <WPT DATA WPT LIST> 6R

2. Enter the waypoint identifier in the ID field at LSK 1L.

3. Enter the position at LSK 1R or enter the Bearing/Distance at position LSK 2L. By entering a
Bearing/Distance, the CMA-9000 FMS computes a position using as reference the present position and
displays the coordinates of the user waypoint to be displayed on LSK 1R. The number of available
waypoints are displayed in the “FREE=“field (a maximum of 460 user waypoints can be defined).

USER WPT 1/2

ADFF I D / P O S ACT RTE
1L
N45o12.23 W043o32.12 1R
BRG/DIS TRK/GS
T T
2L 223 /115N M 111 /222K T 2R
TYPE
3L MOVING 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
4L ADED 000o/0.00N M 4R
REF WPT POS
o o
5L N45 12.23 W043 32.12 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-24
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4. When the mandatory fields are filled (e.g. name and position of the new user waypoint), a
CANCEL/CONFIRM prompt is displayed. Press <CONFIRM> to accept (LSK 6R) or <CANCEL>
(LSK 6L).

B. MANUAL ENTRY OF A MOVING USER WAYPOINT IN THE DATABASE

Access the USER WPT 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <WPT DATA> (LSK 1R), and <NEW USER WPT>
(LSK 6L).

USER WPT 1/2

††††† I D / P O S
FREE= 459
o o
1L ††† ††.†††††† ††.††
1R
BRG/DIS TRK/GS
T T
2L --- /---N M / KT
2R
TYPE
3L >FIXED 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <WPT DATA WPT LIST> 6R

1. To create a moving waypoint, toggle the “Type” prompt (LSK 3L) from Fixed to Moving.

2. Enter the waypoint identifier in the ID field at LSK 1L.

3. Enter the position at LSK 1R or the Bearing/Distance at position LSK 2L.

4. Enter the Track and Ground Speed of the moving waypoint at LSK 2R.

5. When the mandatory fields are filled, a CANCEL/CONFIRM prompt is displayed. Press <CONFIRM>
(LSK 6R) to accept or <CANCEL> (LSK 6L).

USER WPT 1/2

ADFF ID/POS FREE= 459
1L N45o12.23 043o32.12 1R
BRG/DIS TRK/GS
2L 223T/115N M 111T/ 22K T 2R
TYPE
3L >MOVING 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
4L ADED 000o/0.00N M 4R
REF WPT POS
5L N45o12.23 W043o32.12 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-25
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

6. After confirming, the moving waypoint is saved in the user database and can be viewed in the user
waypoint list (user waypoints are displayed in alphabetical order on the USER WPT LIST 1/1 page).
Access the USER WPT LIST 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <WPT LISTS> (LSK 2R), and <USER
WPT> (LSK 1L). The moving waypoints are identified by displaying the symbol MOV in reverse video
besides and underneath the waypoint identifier. The distance from the present position to the user
waypoints is also displayed in the USER WPT LIST 1/X page.

USER WPT LIST 1/2

DIS NM DIS NM
1L
<ADFF 20.1 GABRE 0 . 7 9 > 1R
MOV
2L <BINDY 28.9 HEC 82.7>
2R

3L <CIVET 36.3 INTC 32.6>

3R
MOV
4L <DAG 81.6 LAHAB 24.1> 4R

5L <DOWNE 21.5 LAX16 23.8> 5R

MOV
6L <NEW USER WPT DEL ALL> 6R

7. Any user waypoint (fixed or moving) can be visualized and modified by pressing the corresponding LSK
on the USER WPT LIST 1/X page. The WPT DATA 1/1 page will be displayed and changes can be
performed on the parameters. If a moving waypoint which is present in the active route is displayed then
“ACT RTE” field at LSK 3R is displayed in reverse video.

WPT DATA 1/1

ADFF MOVING WPT POS
1L
N45o12.23 043o32.12 1R
T
B R G / D I S 134 /123N M
2L 2R
DATABASE USER ACT RTE
T
3L T R K / G S 111 / 23K T
3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <EDT/NEW WPT DES+SAR> 6R

NOTE: The distance is displayed with “***” when the distance is above 500 nm.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-26
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. MANUAL ENTRY OF AN AIRPORT TYPE USER WAYPOINT IN THE DATABASE

Access the USER WPT 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <WPT DATA> (LSK 1R), and <NEW USER WPT>
(LSK 6L).

1. Enter the waypoint identifier in the ID field at LSK 1L.

2. Enter the position at LSK 1R or enter the Bearing/Distance at LSK 2L.

NOTE: The steps 1 and 2 can be replaced by entering a known identifier in LSK 4L and defining a
radial/distance from the reference position to the desired user waypoint position.

3. Press [NEXT] to display the USER WPT 2/2 page.

4. Toggle Identifier type (WAYPOINT, AIRPORT, VHF NAV) at LSK 1R and select AIRPORT.

5. Enter the airport ELEVATION at LSK 5R (mandatory field). When the mandatory fields are completed
(e.g. name and position of the new user waypoint), a CANCEL/CONFIRM prompt is displayed. Press
<CONFIRM> (LSK 6R) to accept or <CANCEL> (LSK 6L).

USER WPT 2/2

ID FREE= 459 TYPE
1L YUL AIRPORT> 1R
REGION
2L CAN/CY 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
ELEVATION
5L 323F T 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

D. DELETE A USER WAYPOINT FROM THE USER DATABASE

Any existing user waypoint can be deleted from the user database by displaying the waypoint information and
then using the CLR functional key. This user waypoint deletion can be performed in several ways:

1. With the USER WPT 1/2 page displayed press the CLR functional key and then LSK 1L. The
CANCEL/CONFIRM prompt is displayed. Press <CONFIRM> (LSK 6R) to accept or <CANCEL> (LSK
6L).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-27
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

USER WPT 1/2

ADFF ID/POS FREE= 459
1L
N45o12.23 043o32.12 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L 223 /115N M 2R
TYPE
3L >FIXED 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
4L ----- 000o/0.00N M 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

2. With the WPT DATA 1/1 page displayed press the CLR functional key and then LSK 1L. The
CANCEL/CONFIRM prompt is displayed. Press <CONFIRM> (LSK 6R) to accept or <CANCEL> (LSK
6L).

WPT DATA 1/1

ADFF MOVING WPT POS
1L
N45o12.23 043o32.12 1R
T
B R G / D I S 134 /123N M
2L 2R
DATABASE USER ACT RTE
T
3L T R K / G S 111 / 23K T 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

3. With the USER WPT LIST 1/1 page displayed, press the CLR functional key and then the LSK
corresponding to the user waypoint that has to be deleted. The CANCEL/CONFIRM prompt is displayed.
Press <CONFIRM> (LSK 6R) to accept or <CANCEL> (LSK 6L).
USER WPT LIST 1/2
DIS NM DIS NM
1L
<BASET 2 0 . 1 GABRE 0 . 7 9 > 1R
MOV
2L <BINDY 28.9 HEC 82.7>
2R

3L <CIVET 36.3 INTC 32.6>

3R
MOV
4L <DAG 81.6 LAHAB 24.1> 4R

5L <DOWNE 21.5 LAX16 23.8> 5R

MOV
6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-28
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E. DELETE ALL THE USER WAYPOINTS FROM THE USER DATABASE

All the user waypoints can be deleted from the user database using a single prompt DELETE ALL on the
USER WPT 2/2 page.
The same prompt is also available from the USER WPT LIST X/Y page.
Access the USER WPT 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <WPT DATA>, <NEW USER WPT>, [NEXT].

USER WPT 2/2

ID FREE= 459 TYPE

1L 1R
ADFF WAYPOINT<
2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <WPT DATA DELETE ALL> 6R

On the USER WPT 2/2 page press the DELETE ALL prompt (LSK 6R) and a CANCEL/CONFIRM prompt is
displayed. Press <CONFIRM> (LSK 6R) to accept or <CANCEL> (LSK 6L).

NOTE: If a moving waypoint is present in the active or modified route, pressing the DELETE ALL prompt
will display the advisory message !MOV WPT IN ROUTE instead of the CANCEL/CONFIRM
prompt.

USER WPT 2/2

ID FREE= 459 TYPE
1L
YUL NDB NAV> 1R
REGION
2L ---/-- 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-29
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

F. VIEW ALL THE USER WAYPOINTS IN THE DATABASE

The complete list of the user waypoints can be viewed by pressing [INIT REF], <WPT LISTS>, <USER
WPT>. Up to 10 user waypoints are displayed on a single page and a maximum of 460 waypoints can be
defined. To view the other pages press [NEXT] or [PREV].

USER WPT LIST 1/2

DIS NM DIS NM
1L <BASET 2 0 . 1 GABRE 0 . 7 9 > 1R
MOV
2L <BINDY 28.9 HEC 82.7>
2R

3L <CIVET 36.3 INTC 32.6>

3R
MOV
4L <DAG 81.6 LAHAB 24.1> 4R

5L <DOWNE 21.5 LAX16 23.8> 5R

MOV
6L <NEW USER WPT 6R

G. CREATING A USER WAYPOINT FROM A DMAP WAYPOINT

If either an ELBIT, EURONAV, or EURONAV_A702 Digital Map is configured, the DMAP WPT pages display
a list of waypoints received from the DMAP. A total of 40 user waypoints are reserved for storage of position
designation received from the digital map. These 40 waypoints are automatically created from the positions
received from the DMAP.

To access the DMAP WPT X/Y page, press [INIT REF], <WPT LISTS> (LSK 2R), and <DMAP WPT> (LSK
2L).

DMAP WPT 10/10

FREE= 2
1L
037M 1R
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
2L 038M 2R
N45o38.25 W122o46.20
3L 3R

4L 4R

5L DELETE ALL> 5R

6L <NEW_USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

038M

1. Press the key corresponding to the reference identifier of the waypoint to store in the user database at
LSK 1L, 2L, 3L or 4L. This action copies the identifier into the scratchpad.

2. Press <NEW USER WPT> at LSK 6R. This causes the display to open the USER WPT 1/2 page. The
DMAP reference identifier appears in the REF WPT ID field at LSK 4L, and the waypoint position
appears in the POSITION field at LSK 1R and REF WPT POS at LSK 5L.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-30
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

USER WPT 1/2

ID/POS FREE=458
1L
N45o12.23 043o32.12 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L 223 /115N M 2R
TYPE
3L >FIXED 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L 038M 000 /0.00N M 4R
REF WPT POS
5L N45o12.23 W043o32.12 5R

6L <WPT DATA WPT LIST> 6R

3. If desired, enter a radial/distance at LSK 4R. Enter a new waypoint identifier in the scratchpad and
press LSK 1L.

4. Press <CONFIRM> (LSK 6R) to accept or <CANCEL> (LSK 6L).

H. CREATING A USER WAYPOINT FROM A MARK ON TOP OR A JOYSTICK POSITION

Once the Mark On Top or the Joystick (if configured) has been acquired as described in the MARK ON TOP
Section, the new waypoint position appears on the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page at LSK 1R (Mark On Top) and
LSK 2R (Last Joystick).
PREDEF WPT 2/2
MARK ON TOP 1234:12z
N45°34.25 W122°45.12
1L 1R
LAST JOYSTICK 1148:57z
2L N44°12.34 W100°01.02
2R
LAST PLS 1315:10z
3L N43°56.78 W095°17.66 3R
PLS DATA 123.12N M /122°
4L >E N A B L E D 4R

5L <UPDATE POS MARK> 5R

6L <NEW_USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-31
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

1. By pressing the <NEW USER WPT> prompt (LSK 6L) the USER WPT 1/2 page is displayed and the
most recent acquired position (between the MARK ON TOP and the LAST JOYSTICK) is transferred to
the REF WPT ID and POS field. The identifier is displayed at LSK 4L and the WPT POS is displayed at
LSK 5L. The identifier is either ONTOP or JSTCK depending on which waypoint is transferred from the
PREDEF WPT 2/2 page.

USER WPT 1/2

ID/POS FREE=458
1L
N45o12.23 043o32.12 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L 223 /115N M 2R
TYPE
3L >FIXED 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ONTOP 000 /0.00N M 4R
REF WPT POS
5L N45o12.23 043o32.12 5R

6L <WPT DATA WPT LIST> 6R

2. Enter an identifier for the new waypoint in the scratchpad and press LSK 1L.

3. Press <CONFIRM> (LSK 6R) to accept or <CANCEL> (LSK 6L).

I. CREATING A USER WAYPOINT FROM A FLIR POSITION

If FLIR is configured, the FLIR position appears on the PREDEF WPT 3/3 page at LSK 1R (FLIR POS).

PREDEF WPT 3/3

FLIR POS
N45°34.25 W122°45.12
1L 1R
PPOS 270°/30.0NM
2L BULL 220°/20.0NM
2R
REL BRG ALT
3L +020° 3047 F T
3R

4L 4R

5L <BULLS EYE TGT 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

1. By pressing the <NEW USER WPT> prompt (LSK 6L), the USER WPT 1/2 page is displayed and enters
the last updated position of the FLIR into POS field at LSK 1L. The identifier (FLIR) is displayed at LSK
4L and the WPT POS is displayed at LSK 5L on the USER WPT 1/2 page.

2. Enter an identifier for the new waypoint in the scratchpad and press LSK 1L on the USER WPT 1/2
page.

3. Press <CONFIRM> (LSK 6R) to accept or <CANCEL> (LSK 6L) on the USER WPT 1/2 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-32
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

J. SAVING THE DATABASE FOR USE BY ANOTHER AIRCRAFT

The user data accumulated during the missions can be retrieved from the CMA-9000 FMS using a serial
(e.g. Targa) data loader. This data can then be loaded into any CMA-9000 FMS.

1. By pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT], <DATA LOAD>, the DATA LOAD 1/1 page is displayed. Toggle the
TYPE prompt (LSK 1L) till it indicates USER_DATA.

DATA LOAD 1/1

TYPE
1L
>USER_DATA 1R
STATUS
IDLE 0000K B
2L 2R

3L 3R

4L
LOAD> 4R

5L 5R

6L <INIT/REF SAVE> 6R

2. Press SAVE (LSK 6R) to start data download from the CMA-9000 FMS to the Data Loader Unit (only
when aircraft on ground).

DATA LOAD 1/1

TYPE
1L
>USER_DATA 1R
STATUS
2L SAVING TO DISK 0014KB
2R
56%
3L 3R

4L <ABORT 4R

5L 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-33
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CENTRAL CLEAR? (If configured)

When configured, the CMA-9000 FMS accepts a Central Clear command via an external input or via an FMS
command from a line select key. When the external option is selected, the aircraft installation provides the
means to action this input.

Upon detection of the active state of the Central Clear function (either via the discrete input or via the CDU), the
CMA-9000 FMS will purge its internal memory of all User route(s), User waypoint(s), Temporary waypoint(s),
DMAP waypoint(s), Predefined waypoint(s), Active route, Inverse route, Inactive route, Sarsat waypoint(s), Bulls
Eye waypoints, phone data phone book, active phone number, all SMS messages, pre-can messages, tactical
approach database and the Reference waypoint on POS INIT page.

To display the CENTRAL CLEAR ? page, press [INIT REF], [NEXT] and <CENTRAL CLEAR>.

CENTRAL CLEAR ?

1L 1R

2L ARE YOU SURE YOU 2R

WANT TO PERFORM A
3L CENTRAL CLEAR AND 3R
DELETE ALL DATA?
4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-34
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

BACKTRACK ROUTE (If configured)

The CMA-9000 FMS provides an backtrack route function which retraces the route flown allowing an aircraft to
fly back, from the present position to the origin, following the same sequence of waypoints flown but excluding
any waypoints associated to the following special procedures:

• STAR;
• SID;
• APPROACH;
• TACTICAL APPROACH
• HOVER,
• SAR (LADDER, SQUARE, and SECTOR patterns),
• HOLDING.

NOTE: The origin of a SAR or HOLDING procedure is included in the inverse route.

When a manual Direct-To or a Direct-To with Intercept is performed in the active route, the CMA-9000 FMS
adds a temporary waypoint to the inverse route to mark the present position except when on ground or during
the special procedures mentioned above.

All legs in the backtrack route are flown as Track between two Fixes (ARINC 424 TF leg type), except for the
first leg, which is flown as a Track between two Fixes (ARINC 424 TF leg type) only if the previously flown leg is
preserved. Otherwise, the first leg is flown as a Direct To Fix (ARINC 424 DF leg type).
Activation of the backtrack route while in-flight is configurable with two following options. The resulting modified
route consists of:

A. Configuration Option 1 (default)

If a current active TO waypoint is defined:

• the current active TO waypoint, starting at the Top waypoint location on the MOD LEGS page,
followed by a discontinuity, then
• a temporary waypoint to mark the present position and then
• the waypoints of the backtrack route.
Otherwise,
• a temporary waypoint to mark the present position, starting at the Top waypoint location on the MOD
LEGS page; then
• the waypoints of the backtrack route.

B. Configuration Option 2

• the first waypoint of the backtrack route, starting at the Top waypoint location on the MOD LEGS page,
which is the last overflown waypoint with its course set in the opposite track direction (e.g. original
track - 180º); then
• the remaining waypoints of the backtrack route.

Following activation of the backtrack route while on ground, the resulting modified route consist of the waypoints
of the backtrack route, starting at the Top waypoint location on the MOD LEGS page, regardless of the selected
configuration option.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-35
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

When the Inactive route is engaged, the CMA-9000 FMS keeps the existent waypoints in the backtrack route
and continues adding waypoints to the same backtrack route list as the new route is flown.

The backtrack route records the waypoint attribute (flyby or flyover).

The backtrack route is available only from the active route page.

1. Display the ACT RTE 1 1/X page by pressing the RTE functional key:

ACT RTE 1 1/3

ORIGIN DEST
1L KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF KSEAPANC1 3R

4L <ERASE RTE1 CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <BACKTRACK USER ROUTES> 5R

OFFSET
6L <RTE 2 R0.0N M 6R

2. Display the MOD RTE LEGS 1/X page by pressing the <BACKTRACK> prompt (LSK 5L).

When the backtrack route is selected, the CMA-9000 FMS creates a temporary waypoint to mark the
present position. This temporary waypoint is inserted in the modified route under the discontinuity.

3. Verify the waypoint entry by checking course and distance of the previous and next legs.

4. Make the modified route active by pressing EXEC.

NOTE: The system allows maximum 50 temporary waypoints in a flight plan.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-36
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RENDEZ-VOUS WITH A MOVING WAYPOINT (If configured)

The CMA-9000 FMS is capable of providing aircraft guidance to a “rendez-vous” point with a moving waypoint
(defined as described in the Sub-Section, Manual Entry Of A Moving User Waypoint In The Database). The
“rendez-vous” is an intercept point with the moving waypoint trajectory.

A rendez-vous position is determined once a moving waypoint is inserted in the flight plan and every 10 seconds
from there on. The rendez-vous position is recomputed as long as the Time To Go (TTG) is over one minute.

In the case of an achievable rendez-vous, the CMA-9000 FMS uses the rendez-vous position in the flight plan
and provides guidance data relative to the direct course computed inbound to this rendez-vous position.

In the case of an unachievable rendez-vous, the CMA-9000 FMS uses the moving waypoint position in the flight
plan and provides guidance data relative to the bearing to the moving waypoint.

The CMA-9000 FMS defines the moving waypoint inserted in the route as a fly-over.

The CMA-9000 FMS considers a rendez-vous unachievable in any of the following conditions:

1. The moving waypoint is the active waypoint and interception of the moving waypoint is not possible within a
traveling distance of 500 nautical miles from the current position.

2. The moving waypoint is in the active route but is not the active waypoint and interception of the moving
waypoint is not possible within a traveling distance of 500 nautical miles from the previous waypoint.

3. The moving waypoint is in the modified route but is not the first waypoint and interception of the moving
waypoint is not possible within a traveling distance of 500 nautical miles from the previous waypoint.

4. The moving waypoint is the first waypoint of the modified route and interception of the moving waypoint is
not possible within a traveling distance of 500 nautical miles from the current position.

In condition 1, the CMA-9000 FMS generates a !RENDEZVOUS UNACHIEVABLE alert message and
invalidates its roll command output.

In conditions 2 to 4, the CMA-9000 FMS generates a !RENDEZVOUS UNACHIEVABLE advisory message.

When a rendez-vous is determined while on ground, the CMA-9000 FMS uses the CRZ_TAS and CRZ_WIND
values on the PLAN DATA page for the rendez-vous computation.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-37
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAVIGATION OF DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT WHEN CMA-9000 FMS IS CONFIGURED FOR A "MOVING

DTK" DIRECT-TO

When Direct-To a waypoint procedure is executed the CMA-9000 FMS provides Roll steering, track angle error
and lateral deviation guidance to the FD/AP based on the aircraft present position and track.

Initially the CMA-9000 FMS uses the bearing from the aircraft position to the Direct-To waypoint as the intercept
course, because the aircraft position is changing the intercept course changes. The aircraft remains on the variable
intercept course and consequently the lateral deviation is kept centered until the track angle error becomes smaller
than +/-2 degrees. During this phase the aircraft is flown using the roll steering (the lateral deviation does not yet
convey useful information).

When the track angle error becomes smaller than +/-2 degrees the intercept course becomes fixed in space. The
lateral deviation varies according to the aircraft position and can now be used for guidance along with the roll
steering command.

Figure 11-6 illustrates the Direct-To a waypoint procedure, including the expected desired track and lateral
deviation indications on the HSI at points of interest along the procedure.

WP2

WP1

PPOS Direct-To
executed at
this point

00 03
33
30

06
27

09
24

12

21 15
18
00 03
When TKE < 2 degrees 33
intercept course is fixed;
30

06

deviation needle is
27

09

00 03
When TKE > 2 degrees
according to aircraft 33
24

12

intercept course is variable;

position
30

06

21 15
18
deviation needle is
27

09

centered
24

12

21 15
18

0703004

Figure 11-6 "Moving DTK" Direct-To a Waypoint Procedure

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-38
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAVIGATION OF TACTICAL DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT

When a Tactical Direct-To a waypoint procedure is executed, the CMA-9000 FMS provides Roll steering, track
angle error and lateral deviation guidance to the FD/AP based on the aircraft present position and track.

The Tactical Direct-To behaves similarly as the “Moving DTK” Direct-To (refer to Section 9). The difference
between the Tactical Direct-To and the “Moving DTK” Direct-To consists in the condition to freeze the direct track
to the active waypoint. In the case of the Tactical Direct-To, this condition is the minimum turn distance (as
opposed to the +/- 2 degrees track difference in the case of a “Moving DTK” Direct.-To).

TACTICAL DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT PROCEDURE

A. TACTICAL DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT IN THE ACTIVE ROUTE

1. Display the DES+SAR OR TACTICAL 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>.

2. Enter the waypoint identifier in the REF ID field.

3. Press <TACT DTO> (LSK 5R).

4. The waypoint identifier followed by the “/T” qualifier is displayed in the scratchpad and the ACT RTE x
LEGS 1/X page is displayed.

5. Move the waypoint identifier to the TO WPT field by pressing LSK 1L.

"ACT" status on the title line is replaced by "MOD". The direct course and distance from aircraft present
position to the TO waypoint is displayed.

6. Verify the inbound course and distance of the leg to the TO WPT.

Information on any other page can be verified prior to making the tactical direct-to leg active.

7. Make the tactical direct-to leg active by pressing [EXEC].

Another method of initiating a Tactical Direct-To is using the “/T” qualifier directly:

1. Display ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS].

2. Display the desired waypoint by pressing [NEXT] or [PREV] as required.

3. Key in, or copy the waypoint identifier into the scratchpad by pressing the appropriate LSK.

4. Key in the “/T” qualifier after the waypoint identifier.

5. Return to the first ACT RTE x LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS] or [PREV] as required.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-39
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

6. Move the waypoint identifier to the TO WPT field by pressing LSK 1L.

"ACT" status on the title line is replaced by "MOD". The direct course and distance from aircraft present
position to the TO waypoint is displayed.

7. Verify the inbound course and distance of the leg to the TO WPT.

Information on any other page can be verified prior to making the tactical direct-to leg active.

8. Make the tactical direct-to leg active by pressing [EXEC].

B. TACTICAL DIRECT-TO A WAYPOINT IN THE INACTIVE ROUTE

1. Display the INACT DES+SAR OR TACTICAL 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or
<TACTICAL> , [NEXT].

2. Enter the waypoint identifier in the REF ID field.

3. Press <TACT DTO> (LSK 5R).

4. The waypoint identifier followed by the “/T” qualifier is displayed in the scratchpad and the RTE x LEGS
1/X page is displayed.

5. Move the waypoint identifier to the TO WPT field by pressing LSK 1L.

6. Verify the inbound course and distance of the leg to the TO WPT.

Information on any other page can be verified prior to making the tactical direct-to leg active.

7. Insert the tactical direct-to leg in the inactive route by pressing <CONFIRM>.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-40
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

BULLS EYE (If configured)

Display BULLS EYE 1/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <BULLS EYE> {if no CFG KEY is configured to BULL} or
[BULL] {if any CFG KEY is configured to BULL}. Press [NEXT] or [PREV] to scroll to page 2/3 or 3/3.

The BULLS-EYE pages are used to define a reference point which will be used by a number of aircraft in a
mission. The purpose of the BULLS-EYE is to identify present positions of these aircraft as well as the target
position always relative to this reference point. Only the aircraft which are part of the mission know the reference
point.

1. Create the Bulls Eye reference point (use BULLS EYE 3/3 page). Definition of Bulls Eye can be achieved by
typing a waypoint ident (from any FMS databases) on LSK 1L. This will take the waypoint coordinates and
ident and assigned them to the Bulls Eye reference point. Bulls Eye can also be defined by entering directly
coordinates on LSK 1R. In this case the ident will always be “BULL”.

2. An alternative way can also be made using a reference waypoint. The reference waypoint ident can be
entered at LSK 4L. Then the relative radial/distance from the reference waypoint to the Bulls Eye can be
entered at LSK 4R. In any case, the Bulls Eye waypoint definition or modification can only be done when it
is not part of the flight plan.

NOTE: If FLIR is configured, a Bulls Eye target can also be made from the PREDEF WPT 3/3 page.
Selecting LSK 5L from the PREDEF WPT 3/3 page will access the BULLS EYE 2/3 page and enter
the last received position and altitude of the FLIR into the Bulls Eye target position (via the bulls eye
target reference waypoint) and MSL altitude field.

A. Initial entry page.

BULLS EYE 3/3
BULL BULL ID/POS
o o
1L . . 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L --- /---N M 2R

3L 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <NEAREST WPT LIST> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-41
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. After modifying the Bulls Eye waypoint and entering all mandatory fields.

BULLS EYE 3/3

BULL B U L L I D / P O S
1L
N43o26.20 E004o52.32 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L 015 /270N M 2R

3L 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
4L ABCDE 000o/0.0N M 4R
REF WPT POS
5L N43o26.20 E004o52.32 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

C. After entering DELETE on the Bulls Eye waypoint.

BULLS EYE 3/3

BULL B U L L I D / P O S
1L N43o26.20 E004o52.32 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L 015 /270N M 2R

3L 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
4L ABCDE 000o/0.0N M 4R
REF WPT POS
5L N43o26.20 E004o52.32 5R

6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

Press cancel to delete or confirm to enter data.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-42
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. Then the Bulls Eye target point can be created (use BULLS EYE 2/3 page). Definition of Bulls Eye Target
can be achieved by typing a waypoint ident (from any FMS databases) on LSK 1L. This will take the
waypoint coordinates and the ident and assigned them to the Bulls Eye Target point. Bulls Eye Target can
also be defined by entering directly coordinates on LSK 1R. In this case the ident will always be “BETGT”.

BULLS EYE 2/3

BETGT T G T I D / P O S A C T R T E
1L
N43°26.20 E004°52.32 1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
T
2L 015 /270N M 111 / 222K T
T
2R
TYPE MSL ALT
3L MOVING ------F T 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
o o
5L --- --.-- ---- --.-- 5R

6L <SARSAT WPT DES+SAR> 6R

An alternative entry can also be made using a reference waypoint. The reference waypoint ident can be entered
at LSK 4L. Then the relative radial/distance from the reference waypoint to the Bulls Eye can be entered at LSK
4R. The Bulls Eye target can be defined as either a fixed waypoint or a moving waypoint. This selection is made
via the LSK 3L. When the Bulls Eye target is a moving waypoint, a track and ground speed is required to be
entered. This entry is done via LSK 2R. As an option, the Bulls Eye target altitude can be entered on LSK 3R.

In any case, the Bulls Eye Target point definition or modification can only be done when it is not part of the flight
plan.

A. Initial entry page for fixed Bulls Eye target.

BULLS EYE 2/3

BETGT TGT ID/POS
o o
1L
. . 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L --- /---N M 2R
TYPE MSL ALT
3L >FIXED ------F T 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
o o
5L --- --.-- ---- --.-- 5R

6L <SARSAT WPT DES+SAR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-43
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Initial entry page for moving Bulls Eye target.

BULLS EYE 2/3

BETGT TGT ID/POS
o o
1L . . 1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
T T
2L --- /---N M / KT
2R
TYPE MSL ALT
3L >MOVING ------F T 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <SARSAT WPT DES+SAR> 6R

C. After modifying data for a moving Bulls Eye Target waypoint in the active route.

BULLS EYE 2/3

BETGT T G T I D / P O S A C T R T E
1L N43o26.20 E004o52.32 1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
T T
2L 015 /270N M 111 /222K T 2R
TYPE MSL ALT
3L >MOVING ------F T 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L BULL 000 /0.0N M 4R
REF WPT POS
o o
5L N43 26.20 E004 52.32 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

D. After modifying the Bulls Eye Target and entering all mandatory fields (the active route does not contain
the Bulls Eye Target waypoint if it is moving).
BULLS EYE 2/3
BETGT T G T I D / P O S
1L
N43o26.20 E004o52.32 1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
T T
2L 015 /270N M 111 /222K T 2R
TYPE MSL ALT
3L >MOVING ------F T 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L BULL 000 /0.0N M 4R
REF WPT POS
5L N43o26.20 E004o52.32 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-44
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E. After entering DELETE on the Bulls Eye Target waypoint.

BULLS EYE 2/3
BETGT T G T I D / P O S
1L N43o26.20 E004o52.32 1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
T T
2L 015 /270N M 111 /222K T 2R
TYPE MSL ALT
3L >MOVING ------F T 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
4L BULL 000o/0.0N M 4R
REF WPT POS
5L N43o26.20 E004o52.32 5R

6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

Press cancel to delete or confirm to enter data.

4. Once the Bulls Eye reference point and the Bulls Eye target point have been defined, BULLS EYE 1/3 page
allows a review of all information on the same page

A. When no Bulls Eye waypoint and no Bulls Eye Target waypoint have been created.

BULLS EYE 1/3

PPOS REF
1L FR<
1R
TGT POS
2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
ETA DELTA ALT
5L FT 5R

6L <EFIS 6R

B. When the Bulls Eye Target (moving) rendezvous is achievable and part of the active route.

BULLS EYE 1/3

PPOS REF
o
1L BULL 010 /33.0N M FR<
1R
TGT POS BETGT ACT RTE
2L PPOS 012o/36.0N M
2R
BULL 098o/26.0N M
3L RDV POS BERDV
3R
PPOS 322o/60.0N M
4L BULL 122o/26.3N M 4R
ETA DELTA ALT
5L >1 6 1 5 . 2 Z +4000F T 5R

6L <EFIS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-45
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

When a rendezvous point is achievable, the rendezvous bearing and distance relative to the aircraft
present position and to the Bulls Eye reference point are displayed. Also, the Bulls Eye target estimate
time of arrival (ETA) or estimated time en-route (ETE) and delta altitude are displayed on LSK 5L and
LSK 5R respectively.

C. When the Bulls Eye Target rendezvous is unachievable.

BULLS EYE 1/3
PPOS REF
o
BULL 010 /33.0N M FR<
1L 1R
TGT POS BETGT
2L PPOS 012o/36.0N M
2R
BULL 098o/26.0N M
3L RDV POS UNACHIEVABLE 3R

4L 4R
ETA DELTA ALT
5L > +4000F T 5R

6L <EFIS 6R

D. When the Bulls Eye Target is fixed.

BULLS EYE 1/3
PPOS REF
o
BULL 010 /33.0N M FR<
1L 1R
TGT POS BETGT
2L PPOS 012o/36.0N M
2R
BULL 098o/26.0N M
3L 3R

4L 4R
ETA DELTA ALT
5L >1 6 1 5 . 2 Z +4000F T 5R

6L <EFIS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-46
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TACTICAL APPROACH (if configured)

NOTE: The TACTICAL APPROACH function has been designed to make as much use of the FMS’s already
existing VNAV approach mode function. Consequently, much of the logic which tactical approaches uses
is exactly the same as that which applies to the VNAV approach function.
Additional details on this can be found in the VNAV APPROACH MODE section of Section 7.

Tactical approaches are intended to allow the operator to perform approaches to any crew-selected or defined
waypoint (e.g. navigation database waypoint, user waypoint, or temporary waypoint). The tactical approach
geometry relative to this waypoint, known as the Tactical Approach Runway Threshold Waypoint, is created by the
operator. The Tactical approach can also be selected from the ARRIVALS page when a tactical approach
database has been previously loaded in the FMS. The FMS provides the crew with advisory vertical guidance
(e.g. Vertical Track Deviation) while conducting a tactical approach. The FMS also provides lateral guidance to
conduct the approach and the missed approach segment of the tactical approach.

Once the pseudo-runway threshold is defined, the operator must enter on the TACTICAL APPR 1/3 page the
required fields to define the geometry of the tactical approach procedure to be conducted.
Initial Tactical Approach page display when runway threshold is defined from the LEGS page (PARKK/A entered).

MOD TACTICAL APPR 1/3

REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
----- / NM
1L o 1R
TIAF (-3.0 ) ALT
o
--- /3.00NM FT
2L 2R
TFAF FAF ALT
o
/5.00NM FT
3L 3R
PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
FT
4L 4R
VPA TRANS LVL
o
5L -3.0 FL060 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

The crew has to enter the following mandatory information before the Tactical Approach can be executed:

A. The Final Approach Course (LSK 4L). Refer to Figure 11-7.

B. The Runway Elevation (LSK 4R). Runway elevation is defined as the height above WGS-84 reference
ellipsoid. Refer to Figure 11-8.

NOTE: The Missed Approach Point (MAP) altitude constraint will be set to 50ft above the Runway
Elevation.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-47
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Figure 11-7 Tactical Approach Lateral Profile Geometry

TIAF VDEV is relative to

this segment
IAA
(FMS TFAF
calculated)
MAP

Altitude constraint @ TIAF

VPA
(user definable or
(user definable or FMS calculated)
FMS calculated)
Altitude constraint @ TFAF
(user definable or
FMS calculated) Altitude constraint 50 feet
@ MAP

TIAF-to-TFAF TFAF-to-MAP
(user definable) (user definable) Runway elevation
(user definable)

MSL

Figure 11-8 Tactical Approach Vertical Profile Geometry

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-48
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

When mandatory entries are entered the FMS will compute the coordinates and altitude constraints of the TIAF,
TFAF, MAP, TMAP1, TMAP2 waypoints using the default tactical approach parameters.

MOD TACTICAL APPR 1/3

REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
----- / NM
1L o 1R
TIAF (-3.0 ) ALT
o
023 /3.00NM 2592FT
2L 2R
TFAF FAF ALT
o
023 /5.00NM 1639FT
3L 3R
PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
4L
023 0F T 4R
VPA TRANS LVL
o
5L -3.0 FL060 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

NOTE: The Initial Approach Angle (IAA) displayed next to TIAF waypoint is used for quick validation of Vertical
Profile generated (refer to Figure 11-8).

The TRANS LVL field seen on the TACTICAL APPR 1/3 page contains the Transition Level value that is currently
set in the FMS (refer to PLAN DATA 1/1 page, if configured). This value is defined on the PLAN DATA 1/1 page
and is copied over to the TACTICAL APPR 1/3 page. This value cannot be directly modified on the TACTICAL
APPR 1/3 page and is placed here only for operator reference when executing/accepting the tactical approach
procedure that was created.

CAUTION: It is the crew’s responsibility to ensure that the appropriate transition level for the tactical approach
destination was correctly entered.

The crew can manually overwrite the length default values of the initial tactical approach, the final tactical approach
segments, the Initial approach Course, the tactical approach vertical path angle (VPA), the TFAF and the TIAF
altitude constraints. Refer to Table 11-2 for recomputed parameters upon modification of default values.

Table 11-4 specify all defaults, minimum and maximum parameter values than can me manually modified by the
crew. If any parameter is out of range due to manual entry or by tactical approach profile re-computation the
message !OUT OF RANGE will be displayed on the scratchpad and the entry will be rejected.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-49
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Modified Tactical Approach Parameters Will be recomputed Path Affected

Distance
NOTE: Altitude constraints of tactical approach waypoints remain constant when the following parameters
are changed.
• TIAF coordinates, Vertical &
TIAF-to-TFAF distance (LSK 2L)
• AA Lateral
• TIAF coordinates
Vertical &
TFAF-to-MAP distance (LSK 3L) • TFAF coordinates
Lateral
• VPA
Vertical Path Angle
NOTE: The TIAF and TFAF coordinates remains the same when the following parameter is changed.
• TFAF altitude constraint
• IAA
Vertical Path Angle (VPA) (LSK 5L) • TIAF altitude constraint will be set Vertical
to TFAF altitude if computed
TFAF is higher than TIAF.
Course
NOTE: Altitude constraints, VPA, IAA and climb gradients remain the same when the following parameters
are changed.
Initial Approach Course (IAC) (LSK 2L) • TIAF coordinates
Lateral
Altitude
NOTE: The TIAF, TFAF, MAP, TMAP1 and TMAP2 coordinates remain the same when the following
parameters are changed.
• MAP altitude constraint
• TFAF altitude constraint
Runway elevation (LSK 4R) • TIAF altitude constraint Vertical
• TMAP1 altitude constraint
• TMAP2 altitude constraint
• VPA
• IAA
TFAF altitude constraint (LSK 3R) • TIAF altitude constraint will be set Vertical
to TFAF altitude if computed
TFAF is higher than TIAF.
TIAF altitude constraint (LSK 2R) • IAA Vertical

Table 11-2 Tactical Approach Parameters

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-50
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The second Tactical Approach page presents the information related to the Tactical Missed Approach segment.
The FMS automatically generates a Tactical Missed Approach procedure based on default parameters. Refer to
Figure 11-9 and 11-10 for lateral and vertical Tactical Missed Approach Profiles.

MOD TACTICAL APPR 2/3

PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
023 /2.00NM 0FT
1L 1R
TMAP1 ALT
o
2L 023 /4.00NM 353FT
2R
TMAP2 ALT
3L 960FT 3R
CLIMB GRADIENT
4L 2.5 %/2.5 % 4R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
5L ----- / NM 5R

6L
<ERASE 6R

NOTE: Climb Gradient between for the 2 Missed Approach legs is displayed information only and cannot be
modified by the crew.

NOTE: Runway Elevation is displayed for information only and cannot be modified by the crew on this page.
The crew can manually overwrite the default length values of the 2 tactical missed approach segments, the Turn
Missed Approach Course, the TMAP1 and TMAP2 altitude constraints. Refer to Table 11-3 for
recomputed parameters upon modification of default values.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-51
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

se
our
ch C
ro a
App le)
b
sed efina
TMAP2 n Mis (user d
Tur
MAP
Final Approach Course (user definable) TMAP1
(user definable) TO-
P1-
TMA AP2 le)
T M ab
efin
er d
MAP-TO-TMAP1 (us
(user definable)

Figure 11-9 Tactical Missed Approach Lateral Profile Geometry

CLIMB GRADIENT 2 TMAP2

(FMS calculated)
TMAP1
MAP CLIMB GRADIENT 1
(FMS calculated)

Altitude constraint
@ TMAP1
Altitude constraint
Altitude constraint 50 feet
(user definable or @ TMAP2
@ MAP
FMS computed value) (user definable
or
FMS computed value)
Runway elevation
(user definable)
MAP-to-TMAP1 TMAP1-to-TMAP2
(user definable) (user definable)

MSL

Figure 11-10 Tactical Missed Approach Vertical Profile Geometry

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-52
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Modified Tactical Missed Approach Parameters Will be recomputed Path Affected

Distance
NOTE: Altitude constraints of tactical approach waypoints remain constant when the following parameters
are changed.
• TMAP1 coordinates
Vertical &
MAP-to-TMAP1 distance (LSK 1L) • TMAP2 coordinates
Lateral
• CLBGRD1
• TMAP2 coordinates Vertical &
TMAP1-to-TMAP2 distance (LSK 2L)
• CLBGRD2 Lateral
Course
NOTE: Altitude constraints, VPA, IAA and climb gradients remain the same when the following parameter is
changed.
• TMAP2 coordinates
Turn Missed Approach Course (IAC) (LSK 2L) Lateral
Altitude
NOTE: The TIAF, TFAF, MAP, TMAP1 and TMAP2 coordinates remain the same when the following
parameters are changed.
• CLBGRD1
• CLBGRD2
TMAP1 altitude constraint (LSK 2R) • TMAP2 altitude constraint will Vertical
be set to TMAP1 altitude if
computed TMAP1 is higher
than TMAP2.

TMAP2 altitude constraint (LSK 3R) • CLBGRD2 Vertical

Table 11-3 Tactical Missed Approach Parameters

The third Tactical Approach pages gives the crew an overview of all Tactical Approach and Missed Approach
parameters.

MOD TACTICAL APPR 3/3

TACT APPR:
TIAF 2592FT
1L o o 1R
023 3.00NM/-3.0
2L TFAF FAF 1639FT
o o 2R
023 5.00NM/-3.0
3L PARKK MAP 50FT 3R
o
023 2.00NM/2.5 %
4L TMAP1 353FT 4R
o
023 4.00NM/2.5 %
5L TMAP2 960FT 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-53
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Parameters Unit Minimum Default Maximum

TIAF-to-TFAF distance NM 2.00 3.00 20.00
TFAF-to-MAP distance NM 4.00 5.00 20.00
MAP-to-TMAP1 distance NM 1.00 2.00 10.00
TMAP1-to-TMAP2 distance NM 1.00 4.00 20.00
o
Initial Approach Angle (IAA) -10.0 -3.0 0.0
o
Vertical Path Angle (VPA) -10.0 -3.0 -1.0
Climb Gradient 1 (CLBGRD1) % 0.0 2.5 20.0
Climb Gradient 2 (CLBGRD2) % 0.0 2.5 20.0
o Final Approach Final Approach Final Approach
Initial Approach Course (IAC)
Course - 30o Course Course + 30o
Turn Missed Approach Course o Final Approach Final Approach Final Approach
(TMAC) Course - 30o Course Course + 30o

Table 11- 4 Tactical Approach default, minimum and maximum values

As a result of the aforementioned manual entries, the FMS presents to the crew (on the RTE X LEGS page) the
tactical approach procedure waypoints TIAF (e.g. Tactical Initial Approach Fix), TFAF (e.g. Tactical Final Approach
Fix) and the associated pseudo-altitude constraints:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/2

264o 12.8N M
1L
JOH /H
1R
THEN
2L 2R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
3L TIAF 2592 3R
023o CRS 3.00N M
4L TFAF FAF 1639 4R
023o CRS 5.00N M
5L PARKK / A MAP 50 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

The Tactical Missed Approach procedure waypoints are presented as well to the crew.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 2/2

023o 2.00N M
1L TMAP1 353
1R
023o CRS 4.00N M
2L TMAP2 960
2R

3L ----- 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-54
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Figure 11-11 Tactical Approach VDEV indication

CAUTION: The VDEV provided by the FMS is always to the Final Approach segment as depicted on
Figure 11-11.

See additional details on the TACTICAL APPR page in Appendix A.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-55
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ENTERING A TACTICAL APPROACH

A flight plan can only contain a single approach and/or arrival procedure at any given time.
Should an approach already exist in a flight plan, this would need to be removed from the flight plan before the
tactical approach can be inserted.

NOTE: If a second tactical approach is required for planning purposes, it may be defined in the inactive flight plan.

A tactical approach procedure can be entered in any of the following methods:

1. A waypoint identifier or position can be entered into the scratchpad followed by a /A and then line selected
to the desired flight plan location (e.g. enter JFK or N4528.05W07344.45/A in the scratchpad and insert at
appropriate line location on the LEGS page).

2. /A can be entered over an existing flight plan waypoint on the LEGS page thus making the waypoint the
destination for the tactical approach.

3. Via the TACT APPR prompt located on DES+SAR or TACTICAL 2/4 (or DES+SAR or TACTICAL 4/4 for the
inactive route). As is the case for other waypoints entered via the DES+SAR or TACTICAL pages, the
reference waypoint ID (RWY THR WPT for tactical approaches) can be entered in the scratchpad prior to
going to the DES+SAR or TACTICAL page.

4 Selecting LSK 1L on TACTICAL APPR 1/3 if a tactical approach had already been entered and the tactical
approach procedure still exists on this page (e.g. the RWY THR WPT field still shows an waypoint identifier).
This will then copy the RWY THR WPT field value to the scratchpad, append /A to it, and automatically call
up the LEGS page to allow insertion of same tactical approach procedure.

5. Via the TACT APPR prompt located on the TACTICAL 1/2 page (or INACT TACTICAL 2/2 for the inactive
route). As is the case for other waypoints entered via the TACTICAL pages, the reference waypoint ID (RWY
THR WPT for tactical approaches) can be entered in the scratchpad prior to going to the TACTICAL page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-56
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TACTICAL APPROACH SELECTION FROM DATABASE (Optional)

When a Tactical Approach database is loaded in the FMS the crew can select a tactical approach from the
ARRIVALS page.

PANC ARRIVALS 1/2

STARS RTE 1 APPROACHES
AMOTT5 VORD06R
1L 1R
TACT APPR
ELLAM2 TACT24R
2L 2R
ELLAM2 TACT24L
3L RUNWAYS 3R
ELLAM2 06L
4L 4R
TAGER1 06R
5L 5R
<DEP/ARR ROUTE>
6L 6R

NOTE: This can be especially useful once a missed approach has occurred and the crew wishes to now
reattempt a tactical approach to the same tactical landing sight using the same, previously entered, tactical
approach parameters.

DESELECTING A TACTICAL APPROACH FROM FLIGHT PLAN

If a tactical approach exists in the flight plan, it can be deselected from the flight plan by ensuring the following:

1. For the active flight plan, none of the 3 tactical approach created waypoints (e.g. TA01, TA02, or RWY THR
WPT) are the “TO” waypoint, and, then entering a “/” in the scratchpad and line selecting this to the key next to
the RWY THR WPT (e.g. MAP) waypoint of the flight plan.

2. For the inactive flight plan, entering a “/” in the scratchpad and line selecting this to the key next to the RWY
THR WPT (e.g. MAP) waypoint of the inactive flight plan.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-57
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MODIFICATION OF A TACTICAL APPROACH IN FLIGHT PLAN

1. This is achieved by going to the TACTICAL APPR page via any means (e.g. entering /A on top of the
tactical approach MAP on the LEGS page or via the DES+SAR or TACTICAL page 2/4) and changing the
desired tactical approach parameter(s) only when the "TO" waypoint is not part of the entered tactical
approach procedure (e.g. the "TO" waypoint is not TA01, TA02, or MAP).

2. In order to modify a tactical approach which exists in the active flight plan when the active (e.g. TO)
waypoint is a tactical approach procedure waypoint (e.g. either the TA01, TA02, or MAP), the operator will
need to either:

• move the tactical approach procedure downpath by means of a DIRECT TO and then modify the tactical
approach (as described in 1 just above), or
• close-up the tactical approach (e.g. select a waypoint downpath of the tactical approach FAF and bring
this waypoint before the tactical approach procedure in the flight plan). After this the operator can
access the tactical approach procedure via DES+SAR or TACTICAL page 2/4 to make any necessary
changes.

DELETING A TACTICAL APPROACH

If a tactical approach was created, it can be deleted from the FMS by performing any of the following:

1. Entering a new ORIGin on the RTE page.

The above statement also holds true for the following scenario:
When performing an FMS cold-start on ground if the DEST field on the RTE page was a tactical approach
destination.

NOTE: That when this occurs, upon power-up following the long-term power interruption, the ORIG field of the
RTE page will be set equal to the value that existed in the DEST field prior to the power interruption
(e.g. it will be set equal to the RWY THR WPT identifier). The DEST field will then be reset to its blank
default value.

This is done to allow the ORIGin field to already be preset for a subsequent departure from the tactical
approach landing site.

1. In a single FMS installation, by selecting the ERASE RTEx prompt on the RTE x 1/2 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-58
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CALCULATED AIR RELEASE POINT (CARP) AND HIGH ALTITUDE RELEASE POINT (HARP) (If
configured)

NOTE: Hereafter, unless specifically mentioned references to ‘Calculated Air Release Point’ or ‘CARP’ also
includes and pertains to the following procedures: Custom HARP, Custom HAHO, Free Fall.

The Calculated Air Release Point function is a tactical function used for air drops of personnel, cargo, or heavy
equipment. In the FMS, the CARP procedure is defined as a series of six legs/waypoints, as shown in the following
figure, five of which are calculated by the FMS:

1. Identification Point (IP) - Optional user-defined waypoint that may be used as a reference for a Mark on Top
operation.

2. Turn Point (TP) - FMS computed waypoint used to align the aircraft along the track of the drop zone. The TP-
SD leg is a turn such that the track becomes the same direction as the landing zone and the wings are level
upon reaching the slow-down point.

3. Slowdown Point (SD) - FMS computed waypoint used to signal to the pilot that the altitude and speed must be
changed to the CARP target altitude and speed. The SD-CRP leg is along the same track as the drop zone
and its length is computed to allow the aircraft sufficient time to reach the target altitude and speed prior to
reaching CARP.

4. CARP Point (CRP) - FMS computed waypoint indicating that the drop may begin; green light indication. This
waypoint is computed using the provided Point of Impact and Ballistics parameters.

5. Extended Trailing Edge (XTE) Point - FMS computed waypoint indicating the drops must cease; red light
indication. The direction and length of the CRP-XTE leg are the same as the drop zone.

6. Escape Point (ESC) - FMS computed waypoint indicating the aircraft may now change track and proceed with
the following waypoint. This waypoint is computed from the escape time and speed during the drop.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-59
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

N E S C A P E P O IN T
(E S C ) W PT10

W E
T R A IL IN G E D G E
(T E )

D
E X T E N D E D T R A IL IN G E D G E

FT
( X T E - R E D L IG H T )

DROP ZONE

W IN D D IR E C T IO N

N
P O IN T IM P A C T
( P I)

CARP GREEN
D
FT
L IG H T ( C R P )

S L O W D O W N P O IN T
(S D )

W PT09
T U R N IN G P O IN T
(T P ) ID E N T IF IC A T IO N P O IN T
( IP )

Figure 11-12 Typical CARP Profile

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-60
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

W E

S
WPT10
N

WIND DIRECTION

ESCAPE
PARACHUTIST POINT
MAX DRIVE
DISTANCE
RED LIGHT

CRP
(GREEN LIGHT)

SLOWDOWN
POINT
POINT IMPACT(PI)
80

WPT09

IDENTIFICATION
TURNING POINT POINT

Figure 11-13 Typical HAHO Profile

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-61
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The FMS provides horizontal guidance to and from each waypoint of the CARP procedure, including roll
steering outputs, EHSI/EFIS indications, and PROGRESS page displays. Annunciation is provided via CARP
procedure waypoints and drop zone display on EFIS, “CARP Active” and “At CARP” remote annunciators,
CARP PROGRESS page displays and CMA-9000 Display Panel scratchpad advisories.

Two CARP procedures may be simultaneously defined, one on the active route and another on the
inactive route.

INITIATION OF A CARP/HARP PROCEDURE

A CARP procedure can be initiated via the following methods:

A. Assuming no CARP procedure is already included in the flight plan:

1. Press [INIT/REF].

2. Press the ”DES+SAR or TACTICAL” LSK.

3. Press [NEXT]. The following page will then be in view:

DES+SAR 2/4
REF ID
1L WPT03 1R
RAD/DIS
T
2L --- /----N M 2R

3L CARP> 3R

4L TACT APPR> 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

4. Press the “CARP” LSK. This brings up the LEGS page with CRP01/C in the scratchpad.

5. Proceed to steps C2 to C4.

B. Using the tactical function key (if configured):

1. Press [TACT]. This brings up the LEGS page with CRP01/C in the scratchpad.

2. Proceed to steps C2 to C4.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-62
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Execute the following steps:

1. Manually type CRP01/C in the scratchpad.

2. Selected the flight plan location on the LEGS page. This automatically inserts the CARP procedure in the
selected flight plan location and brings up the CARP PLAN 1/3 page in MOD state.

3. Select the type of CARP procedure to perform by toggling the TYPE (LSK 1L) between CUST CARP,
CUST HARP, CUST HAHO, FREE FALL

4. For the selected drop type, enter all desired parameters on the 3 CARP PLAN pages. These may include
patterns defining the landing zone geometry, mission parameters, ballistic data, local pressure, and wind
data as defined in the CARP PLAN pages in Appendix A.

5. Press EXEC. If insufficient parameters are entered, then pressing the EXEC key will display a “!CARP
DATA MISSING” advisory message and prevent the route from being activated. Correct as needed.

The Initialization Point (IP) and drop zone waypoints, Point of Impact (PI) and Trailing Edge (TE), may be
defined relative to one another with Place/Bearing/Distance on the CARP PLAN 1/3 page, refer to Section 5,
INSERTING WAYPOINTS.

1. Press LSK 3R, CARP.

2. The RTE x LEGS 1/1 page is displayed.

MOD RTE1 LEGS 1/1

T
313 13.1N M
1L
YUL
1R
-----
2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE LEGS ETA> 6R

CRP01/C
3. Select a Flight Plan Location.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-63
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4. The CUST CARP selected CARP PLAN 1/3 page is displayed.

MOD RTE1 CARP PLAN 1/3

TYPE
1L
>CUST CARP 1R
----- IDENT POINT (IP)
2L ---o--.-- ----o--.--
2R
POINT IMPACT (PI)
o o
3L . . 3R
TRAILING EDGE (TE)
o o
4L . . 4R
ZONE WIDTH ESC TIME
5L 0.30NM 30SEC 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

5. Toggling between TYPEs will show the following different CARP PLAN pages:

A. The CUST HARP selected CARP PLAN 1/3 page is displayed.

MOD RTE1 CARP PLAN 1/3

TYPE
1L
>CUST HARP 1R
----- IDENT POINT (IP)
2L ---o--.-- ----o--.--
2R
POINT IMPACT (PI)
o o
3L . . 3R
TRAILING EDGE (TE)
o o
4L . . 4R
ZONE WIDTH ESC TIME
5L 0.30NM 30SEC 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

B. The CUST HAHO selected CARP PLAN 1/3 page is displayed.

MOD RTE1 CARP PLAN 1/3

TYPE
1L
>CUST HAHO 1R
----- IDENT POINT (IP)
2L ---o--.-- ----o--.--
2R
POINT IMPACT (PI)
o o
3L . . 3R

4L 4R
ZONE WIDTH ESC TIME
5L 0.30NM 30SEC 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-64
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. The FREE FALL selected CARP PLAN 1/3 page is displayed.

MOD RTE1 CARP PLAN 1/3

TYPE
1L
>FREE FALL 1R
----- IDENT POINT (IP)
2L ---o--.-- ----o--.--
2R
POINT IMPACT (PI)
o o
3L . . 3R
TRAILING EDGE (TE)
o o
4L . . 4R
ZONE WIDTH ESC TIME
5L 0.30NM 30SEC 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

6. Enter CARP parameters on three CARP PLAN pages and press EXEC.

CARP PLAN 1/3 (If configured)

Display CARP PLAN 1/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], <CARP> when a
CARP procedure is in the displayed flight plan or
[TACT] when TACT key is configured and a CARP procedure is in the displayed flight plan.

Automatically accessed whenever /C is entered over a CARP procedure on the LEGS page.

The CARP PLAN pages are used to define the parameters for a CARP procedure. The CARP procedure may
be defined in either the active or inactive route.

A. Active status and sample inputs – Custom CARP.

ACT RTE1 CARP PLAN 1/3

TYPE
1L >CUST CARP 1R
CDFB IDENT POINT (IP)
2L N45 00.00 W072o00.00
o
2R
WPT07 POINT IMPACT (PI)
o o
3L N45 00.02 W072 00.00 3R
WPT08TRAILING EDGE (TE)
4L N45o00.02 W072o00.00 4R
ZONE WIDTH ESC TIME
5L 0.30NM 30SEC 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-65
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Active status and sample inputs - Custom HARP.

ACT RTE1 CARP PLAN 1/3
TYPE
1L >CUST HARP 1R
CDFB IDENT POINT (IP)
2L N45 00.00 W072o00.00
o
2R
WPT07 POINT IMPACT (PI)
o o
3L N45 00.02 W072 00.00 3R
WPT08TRAILING EDGE (TE)
4L N45o00.02 W072o00.00 4R
ZONE WIDTH ESC TIME
5L 0.30NM 30SEC 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

C. Active status and sample inputs - Custom HAHO.

ACT RTE1 CARP PLAN 1/3
TYPE
1L
>CUST HAHO 1R
CDFB IDENT POINT (IP)
2L N45 00.00 W072o00.00
o
2R
WPT07 POINT IMPACT (PI)
o o
3L N45 00.02 W072 00.00 3R

4L 4R
DROP TIME ESC TIME
5L 50SEC 30SEC 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

D. Active status and sample inputs – FREE FALL.

ACT RTE1 CARP PLAN 1/3
TYPE
1L
>FREE FALL 1R
CDFB IDENT POINT (IP)
2L N45 00.00 W072o00.00
o
2R
WPT07 POINT IMPACT (PI)
o o
3L N45 00.02 W072 00.00 3R
WPT08TRAILING EDGE (TE)
4L N45o00.02 W072o00.00 4R
ZONE WIDTH ESC TIME
5L 0.30NM 30SEC 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-66
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACT/MOD/" " RTE x (title): ACT indicates that the EXECuted CARP procedure is active (CARP Active
discrete is on). MOD indicates the CARP procedure modifications have not been EXECuted yet. A blank field
indicates the CARP procedure:

• Is in the active flight plan, but is not considered Active yet (CARP Active discrete is OFF), or
• The CARP procedure for the Inactive route is being displayed.

Also, RTE x (where 'x' can be 1 or 2) indicates for which route the current CARP procedure is being displayed.

TYPE [1L]: Air Release Type selection key - CUST CARP, CUST HARP, CUST HAHO, FREE FALL. The Air
Release Type affects the CARP parameters displayed.

IP [2L]: Optional Waypoint Identifier of the Identification Point (IP). The entry may be in the form of a place-
bearing-distance (wptidBRG/DIS, e.g. WPT07012/112). If an IP position is entered in LSK [2R], then a
temporary waypoint is automatically created and the identifier (WPTXX) is displayed in [2L]. Otherwise, a
database waypoint identifier may be entered in this field.

IP [2R]: Optional Latitude and Longitude coordinates of the Identification Point (IP). The format of the position
must be in the form of latitude and longitude (“NxxWxxx” or “Nxxxx.xxWxxxxx.xx”). If an identifier is entered in
LSK [2L], then its position is automatically displayed here in normal font.

PI [3L]: Waypoint Identifier of the Point of Impact (PI). The entry may be in the form of a place-bearing-distance
(wptidBRG/DIS, e.g. WPT07012/112). If a PI position is entered in LSK [3R], then a temporary waypoint is
automatically created and the identifier (WPTXX) is displayed in [3L]. Otherwise, a database waypoint identifier
may be entered in this field.

PI [3R]: Latitude and Longitude coordinates of the Point of Impact (PI). The format of the position must be in
the form of latitude and longitude (“NxxWxxx” or “Nxxxx.xxWxxxxx.xx”). If an identifier is entered in LSK [3L],
then its position is automatically displayed here in normal font.

TE [4L]: Waypoint Identifier of the Drop Zone Trailing Edge (TE). The entry may be in the form of a place-
bearing-distance (wptidBRG/DIS, e.g. WPT07012/112). If a TE position is entered in LSK [4R], then a temporary
waypoint is automatically created and the identifier (WPTXX) is displayed in [4L]. Otherwise, a database
waypoint identifier may be entered in this field. Not available for CUST HAHO drops.

TE [4R]: Latitude and Longitude coordinates of the Trailing Edge (TE). The format of the position must be in the
form of latitude and longitude (“NxxWxxx” or “Nxxxx.xxWxxxxx.xx”). If an identifier is entered in LSK [4L], then
its position is automatically displayed here in normal font. Not available for CUST HAHO drops.

ZONE WIDTH [5L]: Drop zone width (nm). Default value is 0.30. Range [0.03..9.99]. This field is not displayed
for CUST HAHO.

DROP TIME [5L]: In case of Custom HAHO. Time, in seconds, needed to perform all the intended drops. Used
to compute the best solution. Default is dashes, range [1...999].

ESC TIME [5R]: Desired elapsed time (sec) after reaching the XTE (Red Light) that A/C must maintain current
heading, speed, and altitude. Default value is 30, range [1…999].

CARP PROGRESS [6L]: Access to CARP PROGRESS page. Displayed for the active route only.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-67
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ERASE [6L]: Cancel any active route modifications and/or any CARP parameter changes. Only displayed
when the page is displaying the MOD status. If by pressing ERASE the CARP procedure is removed from the
flight plan, then the LEGS page is automatically displayed.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirm the changes made to the inactive route. If the CARP solution does not exist with the
parameters entered, an advisory message is displayed in the scratchpad and the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts
remain displayed. The user may then correct the parameters, press CANCEL or remove the procedure from the
flight plan.

NOTES:
• Pressing on a waypoint ID or position LSK with an empty scratchpad copies the ID or position to the
scratchpad.

• Waypoint entries may be relative to any waypoint using relative bearing and distance as offsets (e.g.
WPT12123/60 defines a position with a bearing of 123 degrees and distance of 60 nm relative to WPT12).

• Invalid entries in terms of format or range are not accepted by the FMS and an advisory message is
displayed in the scratchpad.

• Pressing the RESET key on the CARP PLAN 3/3 page resets all parameters to their default values (for the
chosen type of CARP/HARP).

CARP PLAN 2/3 (If configured)

Display CARP PLAN 2/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], <CARP>,
[NEXT] when a CARP procedure is in the displayed flight plan or
[TACT], [NEXT] when TACT key is configured and a CARP procedure is in the displayed flight plan.

Automatically accessed whenever /C is entered over a CARP procedure on the LEGS page, [NEXT].

A. Custom CARP view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 2/3

PI ELEV SD DIST
1L
5000F T 3.1N M
1R
IAS/HAT -DROP- TEMP
2L 156K T / 1560F T +20.0oC 2R

3L WIND> 3R
MEAN -WIND- GROUND
4L 020T/45K T 020T / 15K T 4R
PI QNH
5L 29.92I N H G < 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-68
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Custom HARP view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 2/3

PI ELEV SD DIST
1L 5000F T 3.1N M
1R
IAS/HAT -DROP- TEMP
o
2L 156K T / 1560F T +20.0 C
2R
ACTUATION HAT
3L 1560F T WIND> 3R
HI MEAN -WIND- GROUND
4L 020T/45K T 020T / 15K T 4R
LO MEAN WIND GROUND
5L PI QNH 5R
T
0 2 0 /3 5 K T 29.92I N H G <
6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

C. Custom HAHO view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 2/3

PI ELEV SD DIST
1L
5000F T 3.1N M
1R
IAS/HAT -DROP- TEMP
2L 156K T / 1560F T +20.0oC 2R
SAFETY FACTOR
3L 1560F T WIND> 3R
MEAN -WIND- GROUND
4L 020T / 45K T 020T / 15K T 4R
PI QNH
5L 29.92I N H G < 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

D. Free Fall view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 2/3
PI ELEV SD DIST
1L 5000F T 3.1N M
1R
IAS/HAT -DROP- TEMP
2L 156K T / 1560F T +20.0ºC 2R

3L WIND> 3R
MEAN -WIND- GROUND
4L 020T / 45K T 020T / 15K T 4R
PI QNH
5L 29.92I N H G < 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-69
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACT/MOD/" " RTE x (title): ACT indicates that the EXECuted CARP procedure is active (CARP Active
discrete is on).
MOD indicates the CARP procedure modifications have not been EXECuted yet. A blank field indicates the
CARP procedure:

• Is in the active flight plan, but is not considered Active yet (CARP Active discrete is OFF), or
• The CARP procedure for the Inactive route is being displayed.

Also, RTE x (where 'x' can be 1 or 2) indicates for which route the current CARP procedure is being displayed.

PI ELEV [1L]: Point of Impact (PI) elevation (feet) above Mean Sea Level (MSL). Range [-1000…9999]. The
maximum sum of the DROP HAT and PI ELEV is 19999 feet.

SD DIST [1R]: Display and entry of Slowdown Distance (nm), defined as the distance from the Slowdown point
(SD) to the CARP green light waypoint (CRP). The default is the FMS computed value. If insufficient CARP
parameters are available to compute a value, the FMS displays dashes until sufficient parameters are available,
at which time the default value is displayed. Manual entry overrides the FMS computed value. Manual entry
range: 0.0 to 99.9 nm.

DROP IAS/HAT [2L]: Mission Indicated Air Speed (knts) and Height Above Terrain (HAT) (ft) planned for the
drop. The default is boxes. A manual entry is required. When the entered HAT is less than the entered VERT
DIST value, an invalid data entry message is displayed. Range [50...175] / [0...19999]. The maximum sum of
DROP HAT and PI ELEV is 19999 feet. DROP HAT value must be greater than the ACUATION HAT for CUST
HARP. DROP HAT value must be greater than the entered safety factor for CUST HAHO.

DROP TEMP [2R]: Static air temperature ((C) at the drop altitude. The default is the FMS value taken from the
ADC at the current altitude corrected for temperature deviation. Manual entry may override. When temperature
from ADC is not available, the standard day temperature deviation is used to compute the temperature at the
drop altitude. If the drop HAT has not yet been entered, the ADC static air temperature is displayed, if available.
Otherwise dashes are displayed. Range [-99.9…99.9]

ACTUATION HAT [3L]: Displayed for CUST HARP only. Height, in feet, above PI where the parachute cord is
pulled. Actuation HAT must be less than the entered DROP HAT, and greater than the entered DECEL DIST.
Default display is boxes. Manual entry is required. Range [0…19999].

SAFETY FACTOR [3L]: Displayed for CUST HAHO only. A safety buffer (ft) from exit to assembly of
parachutists under canopy and for assembly at a certain altitude once they arrive over the drop zone. The safety
factor must be less than the entered DROP HAT. Default value is 2,000 feet. Range [0…5000].

WIND [3R]: Access to the CRP01 WIND page.

MEAN WIND [4L]: Mean Effective Wind (MEW) direction and speed (() /(kt) or (T)/(kt) from PI altitude to drop
altitude to be used in the FMS CARP calculations. Unit used depends on current display setup (true or
mag).The default display is computed by the FMS based on current and predicted wind at the mission altitude. A
manual entry is allowed. If a ground wind is entered (GROUND WND), then the displayed value is modified to
take into account both the FMS predicted value at the drop altitude and the entered ground wind. Range
[0…360] / [0…99]. Not displayed for CUST HARP.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-70
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HI MEAN WIND [4L]: Displayed for CUST HARP only. Mean Effective Wind (MEW) direction and speed (()/(kt)
or (T)/(kt) from the drop altitude to the actuation altitude to be used in the FMS CARP calculations. Unit used
depends on current display setup (true or mag).The default display is computed by the FMS based on current
and predicted wind at the drop and actuation altitudes. A manual entry may force a specific value, which may be
based on observations by a ground team using the procedure defined in AFI 11-217. Range [0…360] / [0…99].

GROUND WIND [4R]: Wind direction and speed (()/(kt) or (T)/(kt) observed by a ground team at PI (Point of
Impact). Unit used depends on current display setup (true or mag). If a Mean Effective Wind (MEW) has been
entered or a LO MEAN WIND for HAHO, this field is cleared. The default display is dashes. Range [0…360] /
[0…99]

LO MEAN WIND [5L]: Displayed for CUST HARP only. Mean Effective Wind (MEW) direction and speed (°)/(kt)
T
or ( )/(kt) from PI altitude to actuation altitude to be used in the FMS CARP calculations. Unit used depends on
current display setup (true or mag).The default display is computed by the FMS based on current and predicted
wind at the actuation altitude. A manual entry is allowed. If a ground wind is entered (GROUND WND), then the
displayed value is modified to take into account both the FMS predicted value at the actuation altitude and the
entered ground wind. If the actuation HAT has not yet been entered, dashes are displayed. Range [0…360] /
[0…99].

PI QNH [5R]: Altimeter setting at PI in mb or inHg. The displayed unit (mb or inHg) can be toggled via LSK 5R
when the scratchpad is empty. Displayed, in small font, when the FMS altimeter setting (QNH) is used. Manual
entry is allowed in inches of mercury (in Hg) with a range from 27.0 to 32.0 in Hg or in millibars (mb) with a
range from 915 to 1083 mb. When neither a manual PI QNH entry nor the FMS QNH is available, boxes are
displayed.

CARP PROGRESS [6L]: Access to CARP PROGRESS page.

ERASE [6L]: Cancel any active route modifications and/or any CARP parameter changes. Only displayed when
the page is displaying the MOD status. If by pressing ERASE the CARP procedure is removed from the flight
plan, then the LEGS page is automatically displayed.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirm the changes made to the inactive route. If the CARP solution does not exist with the
parameters entered, an advisory message is displayed in the scratchpad and the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts
remain displayed. The user may then correct the parameters, press CANCEL or remove the procedure from the
flight plan.

NOTES:
• Entering DELETE on any field causes it to resume its default value.

• Pressing the RESET key on the CARP PLAN 3/3 page resets all parameters to their default values.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-71
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CARP PLAN 3/3 (If configured)

Display CARP PLAN 3/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], <CARP>,
[PREV] when a CARP procedure is in the displayed flight plan or
[TACT], [PREV] when TACT key is configured and a CARP procedure is in the displayed flight plan.

Automatically accessed whenever /C is entered over a CARP procedure on the LEGS page, [PREV].

A. Custom CARP view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 3/3

FTT VERT DIST
1L
53.4S E C 1560F T 1R
EXIT TIME FALL CONST
2L 45.0S E C 72.0S E C 2R
DECEL QUO DEPL RATE
3L 8.4S E C 18.0F T / S E C 3R

4L 4R

5L RESET> 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

B. Custom HARP view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 3/3

FTT VERT DIST
1L 53.4S E C 1560F T 1R
EXIT TIME FALL CONST
2L 45.0S E C 72.0S E C 2R
DECEL QUO DEPL RATE
3L 8.4S E C 18.0F T / S E C 3R
DECEL TIME HV RATE
4L 3.4S E C 156.6F T / S E C 4R
DECEL DIST
5L 380F T RESET> 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-72
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Custom HAHO view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 3/3

FTT
53.4S E C
1L 1R
EXIT TIME
2L 45.0S E C 2R
DECEL QUO
3L 8.4S E C 3R
SPEED -DRIVE- FACTOR
4L 20.0K T 190% 4R
K-OPEN
5L 60 RESET> 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

D. Free Fall view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 3/3

HORIZONTAL DIST
1L
500M 1R
EXIT TIME
2L 45.0S E C 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L RESET> 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

ACT/MOD/" " RTE x (title): ACT indicates that the EXECuted CARP procedure is active (CARP Active
discrete is on).
MOD indicates the CARP procedure modifications have not been EXECuted yet. A blank field indicates the
CARP procedure:

• Is in the active flight plan, but is not considered Active yet (CARP Active discrete is OFF), or
• The CARP procedure for the Inactive route is being displayed.

Also, RTE x (where 'x' can be 1 or 2) indicates for which route the current CARP procedure is being displayed.

FTT [1L]: Forward Travel Time (sec). The total effective time that the dropped equipment/personnel travels at
the aircraft speed/direction. It is the sum of Exit time and Deceleration Quotient time. When FTT is directly
obtainable from ballistic table, then a manual entry may be performed. The value then appears in large font
while fields DECEL QUO and EXIT TIME show dashes. If the value is calculated from entered values for EXIT
TIME and DECEL QUO, then the value is displayed in normal font. The default value is boxes. If only one of the
two fields EXIT TIME and DECEL QUO is entered, then dashes are displayed for FTT. Operator entry is
mandatory. Range [0.0…99.9]. This field is not displayed for Free Fall.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-73
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HORIZONTAL DISTANCE [1L]: Displayed for Free Fall only. Horizontal distance of fall, in meters, traveled by
the load. Extracted from the free fall ballistic data tables. Default display is boxes. Range [0..999].

VERT DIST [1R]: Displayed for CUST CARP and CUST HARP only. Vertical distance (ft) traveled by the load
until stabilization. Data may be extracted from parachute ballistic data tables. The default value is boxes.
Operator entry is required. When the value entered is too large for the value of MISSION HAT, an invalid data
entry message is displayed. Range [1-2999].

EXIT TIME [2L]: Drop Exit Time (sec). Elapsed time from the green light signal to the exit of the first element
from the airplane. Value may be extracted from parachute ballistic data tables. The default value is dashes. If a
value is entered for DECEL QUO, then the default display is boxes. When an FTT value is manually entered,
then dashes are displayed. Range [0…99.9]. For Free Fall type this field is a required entry.

FALL CONST [2R]: Displayed for CUST CARP and CUST HARP only. A fall time constant, in seconds, used to
determine drift effect during the time the parachutist/load falls after exiting the aircraft until reaching stabilization.
Compensates for the non-linear rate of fall of the load. Data may be extracted from ballistic data tables. The
default value is boxes. Operator entry is required. Range [1…99.9].

DECEL QUO [3L]: Deceleration Quotient (sec). Value may be extracted by the operator from the ballistic tables
in AFI 11-231. The default value is dashes. If a value is entered for EXIT TIME, then the default display is
boxes. When an FTT value is manually entered, then dashes are displayed. Range [0…99.9]. Not displayed for
Free Fall.

DEPL RATE [3R]: Displayed for CUST CARP and CUST HARP only. Deployed rate of fall in feet/second. Sea
level standard day rate of fall of the load after the parachute is fully deployed and the drop is stabilized. Data
may be extracted from parachute ballistic tables. The default display is boxes. Operator entry is required. Range
[1..69.9].

DECEL TIME [4L]: Displayed for CUST HARP only. Deceleration time (sec). Elapsed time from actuation until
deployment. Extracted from the parachute ballistic data tables. Default display is boxes. Range [0...99.9].

DRIVE SPEED [4L]: Displayed for CUST HAHO only. Speed, in knots, the parachute is capable of traveling at.
Default value is 20.8. Range [0..99.9].

HV RATE [4R]: Displayed for CUST HARP only. High velocity rate of fall in feet/second. Sea level, standard day
vertical velocity of the load under free fall (before the parachute is deployed). Data may be extracted from the
parachute ballistic data tables. Default display is boxes. Range [1...999.9].

DRIVE FACTOR [4R]: Displayed for CUST HAHO only. Drive safety factor (%). Percentage of the total
computed drive distance to be used for safety reasons. Default value is 80%. Range [0...100].

DECEL DIST [5L]: Displayed for CUST HARP only. Deceleration Distance (ft). The distance the load descends
from actuation to full deployment of the parachute. Extracted from the parachute ballistic data tables. This
distance must be smaller than the actuation HAT. Range [0...9999].

K-OPEN [5L]: Displayed for CUST HAHO only. Parachute ballistic (glide) constant when deployed
(characteristic to each parachute type). Default value is boxes. Range [0...99].

RESET [5R]: Resets all the CARP parameters on all the CARP PLAN x/3 pages to their default values.

CARP PROGRESS [6L]: Access to CARP PROGRESS page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-74
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ERASE [6L]: Cancel any active route modifications and/or any CARP parameter changes. Only displayed when
the page is displaying the MOD status. If by pressing ERASE the CARP procedure is removed from the flight
plan, then the LEGS page is automatically displayed.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirm the changes made to the inactive route. If CARP data is missing, an advisory message
is displayed in the scratchpad and the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts remain displayed. The user may then
correct the parameters, press CANCEL or remove the procedure from the flight plan.

CARP PROGRESS X/X (when X/X = 4/4 if 3 page set and CARP is configured or X/X = 5/5 if 4 page set
and CARP is configured)

Display ACT PROGRESS X/X page by pressing [PROG] and then [PREV] {If CARP is configured}.

The CARP PROGRESS page is used to display the progress towards the CARP procedure waypoints.
Currently, only one CARP procedure in the active route is supported.

A. Display with no CARP procedure in the flight plan.

ACT CARP PROGRESS 5/5

CARP POS
1L 1R
ATK DISTANCE XTK
2L NM FT
2R
ETE CARP ETA
3L SEC Z
3R
CURRENT TARGET
4L TAS 200K T KT 4R
ALT 11030F T FT
5L 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-75
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Display with CARP procedure in the flight plan.

ACT CARP PROGRESS 5/5

CARP POS NEAR CARP
N 4 5 o0 0 . 0 0 W 0 7 2 o0 0 . 0 0
1L 1R
ATK DISTANCE XTK
2L 3.4N M L1560F T
2R
ETE CARP ETA
3L 17S E C 1234:12Z 3R
CURRENT TARGET
4L TAS 200K T 130K T 4R
ALT 11030F T 10000F T
5L 5R

6L <CARP PLAN CARP MARK> 6R

CARP POSITION (1L): Current position, in geographic coordinates, of the Computed Air Release Point (CRP
waypoint).

STATUS (1R): CARP Status: (blank), ACTIVE, NEAR CARP, AT CARP, DROP ZONE, or ESCAPE.

STATUS MEANING
INDICATION
(blank) The CARP procedure is not active.
ACTIVE A CARP procedure is in the active flight plan and the active waypoint in the flight plan is a
CARP procedure waypoint or less than 20 minutes remain to the CARP green light (CRP).
NEAR CARP The CARP mode is active and the A/C is less than 60 seconds before arrival at the CRP
waypoint (green light).
AT CARP The CARP mode is active and the A/C is less than 5 seconds before arrival at the CRP
waypoint (green light).
DROP ZONE The CARP mode is active and the A/C is within the CARP drop zone. This state begins
0.5 seconds before arriving at the CRP waypoint (green light).
ESCAPE The CARP mode is active and the A/C is beyond the CARP drop zone and prior to the
Escape (ESC) waypoint.

ATK DISTANCE (2L): Along Track Distance (nm) to the CRP green light or XTE or ESC waypoint along the
path defined by the flight plan. Prior to reaching the CARP green light, the distance displayed is that to the
CARP green light waypoint. During the drop (after the CRP waypoint has sequenced), the distance displayed is
that to the XTE waypoint. This field is not displayed when CARP procedure is not yet in the active flight plan.
Range [0...99.9]. '*' symbols are displayed when ATK exceeds the range.

XTK DISTANCE (2R): Cross Track Offset (feet) from the desired path line defined by the CRP (Green Light)
point and the XTE(RedLight) point as computed by the FMS. Field not displayed when CARP procedure not yet
in flight plan. Range [0...9999]. “****” is displayed when XTK exceeds the range.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-76
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CARP ETE (3L): Estimated Time (sec) EnRoute (ETE) to CRP (green light) waypoint or XTE (red light) once
CRP has been sequenced or ESC once XTE is sequenced. The “CARP” indication changes to “XTE” upon
sequencing the CRP waypoint. The “XTE” indication changes to “ESC” upon sequencing XTE.

CARP ETA (3R): Estimated Time of Arrival in (hhmm:ss) at CRP (green light) waypoint, or XTE (Red Light)
once CRP has been sequenced or ESC once XTE has been sequenced.

CURRENT TAS (4L): Current True Air Speed (kt).

CURRENT ALT (4L): Current system altitude (feet).

TARGET TAS (4R): Target True Air Speed (kt). Only displayed after crossing the Slow-Down (SD) waypoint or
less than 60 seconds remain to the CRP waypoint, at which point the TAS derived from the Mission IAS is
displayed. Once the TAS used for the CRP waypoint calculations is frozen, this frozen TAS value is then
displayed until the CARP procedure is terminated.

TARGET ALT (4R): Target altitude (feet). Only displayed after crossing the Slow-Down (SD) waypoint or less
than 60 seconds remain to the CRP waypoint, at which point the altitude derived from the Mission HAT is
displayed. . Once the altitude used for the CRP waypoint calculations is frozen, this frozen altitude value is then
displayed until the CARP procedure is terminated.

CARP PLAN [6L]: If a CARP procedure is defined in the active flight plan, accesses the CARP PLAN 1/3 page;
otherwise, the field is not shown.

CARP MARK [6R]: Equivalent to pressing CARP MARK on the TMP UPDATE POS page. The TMP UPDATE
POS page is displayed, and the flight plan is set to MOD state displaying the ERASE prompt and illuminating
the EXEC key. The IP point is displayed as the reference position, the offset from the reference is R0ft. While
the CARP is not active or CARP waypoint positions are frozen or NO CARP SOLUTION is being displayed, the
CARP MARK text disappears and pressing this LSK has no effect.

NOTE: Except for CURRENT TAS and CURRENT ALT, values are only displayed when a CARP procedure is
in the active flight plan.

NOTE: The accuracy of the fields of this page, including the “status indicator” is in accordance with the update
rate of the FMS pages, e.g. 1 second. Better accuracy is obtained via the status advisory messages and
the “AT CARP” discrete output.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-77
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CARP SEQUENCE OF EVENTS

The following table presents normal events and actions related to CARP procedures. The ordering is typical, but
may vary based on the entered geometry, mission, and ballistic parameters.

Event FMS Action Operator Action

CARP procedure initiated. • CARP procedure waypoints with ETA and drop
zone displayed on the EFIS.
• CARP procedure waypoints displayed on the LEGS
page.
• Mission altitude and IAS are used for the CARP
waypoint calculations.
En route to CARP. • ETA displayed for each waypoint of the CARP • Adjusts aircraft
procedure displayed on the EFIS and on the LEGS speed to meet the
ETA page required time of
arrival.
PROGRESS RTA
page may be used
as an aid.
Less than 20 minutes to • CARP ACTIVE remote annunciator illuminates
CRP or active waypoint is • “ACTIVE” state displayed on the CARP PROGRESS
a CARP procedure page
waypoint. • Along-track and cross-track distance and ETE/ETA
to CARP displayed on CARP PROGRESS page.
• CARP procedure waypoints displayed on the
PROGRESS pages.
Less than 20 minutes to • “20 MIN TO CARP” advisory message displayed on
CRP the scratchpad
Less than 1 minute to IP or • FMS switches to Inertial mode
TP • CARP Plan data modifications prohibited
IP is reached • Position update
optionally
performed.
Less than 10 minutes to • “10 MIN TO CARP” advisory message displayed on
CRP the scratchpad
Turn Point (TP) is reached • HSI scale reduced to 0.3 nm (full scale)
and Cross Track Distance
< 0.3 nm

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-78
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Event FMS Action Operator Action

Slowdown waypoint (SD) • “SLOWDOWN” advisory message displayed on the • Begins slowdown
is reached scratchpad and altitude change
• Current and Target TAS and Altitude displayed on to mission values.
the CARP PROGRESS page
Less than 1 minute to CRP • “1 MIN TO CARP” advisory message displayed on
the scratchpad
• “AT CARP” remote annunciator flashes at a 0.5
seconds rate.
• “NEAR CARP” state displayed on the CARP
PROGRESS page
Altitude < 150 ft of mission • Current altitude is used for CRP, XTE, and ESC
altitude or less than 30s to calculations and to fix Target Altitude on the CARP
CRP PROGRESS page.
Speed < 20 kts of mission • Current groundspeed is used for CRP, XTE, and
speed or less than 30 ESC calculations and to fix Target TAS on the
seconds to CRP CARP PROGRESS page.
Less than 10 seconds to • CRP, XTE, and ESC waypoint positions are frozen
CRP
Less than 5 seconds to • “5 SEC TO CARP” advisory message displayed on
CRP the scratchpad
• “AT CARP” remote annunciator extinguishes
• “AT CARP” state displayed on the CARP
PROGRESS page
CRP waypoint is reached • “GREEN LIGHT” advisory message displayed on • Commands
the scratchpad beginning of drop.
• “AT CARP” remote annunciator illuminates (0.5
seconds before CRP)
• “DROP ZONE” state displayed on the CARP
PROGRESS page (0.5sec before CRP)
XTE waypoint is reached • “RED LIGHT” advisory message displayed on the • Commands end of
scratchpad drop.
• “AT CARP” remote annunciator extinguishes • Cleanup is
• “ESCAPE” state displayed on the CARP performed (doors
PROGRESS page closed…)
ESC waypoint is reached • “CARP ACTIVE” remote annunciator extinguishes
• CARP PROGRESS fields blanked
• Standard FMS navigation modes priority restored.
• Guidance to next waypoint in flight plan provided
• Any existing temporary position update will be
cancelled and is annunciated by generating the
TEMP POS UPDATE END scratchpad message

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-79
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CARP ALERT MESSAGES

The FMS monitors the altitude, speed, and cross-track error during a CARP procedure. The altitude and speed
errors are obtained using the entered mission Indicated Air Speed (IAS) and Height Above Terrain (HAT) values
on the CARP PLAN pages. The errors may be sub-divided in three areas, per the following figure:

Alt Error (ft)

1000

150

-50 -20 A 20 50
-150
TAS
Error
B (kts)

-1000

Figure 11- 14

The FMS response, per area in the figure, is:

A. No alert messages signalled.

B. At one minute from the CRP waypoint, the alert message “CARP ALT NOT MET” or “CARP TAS NOT MET”
is raised. The message is displayed until the error is removed.

NOTE: At 10 seconds prior to reaching the CRP waypoint, the TARGET TAS and ALTITUDE (seen on the
CARP PROGRESS page) are updated to the current TAS and altitude, if the NO CARP SOLUTION
message is not present. For the case when the NO CARP SOLUTION message is present, the
TARGET TAS and ALTITUDE will remain to the last target values prior to the NO CARP SOLUTION
message appearing.
The alert message(s) is, however, still displayed if the error condition persists, leaving the operator
the choice to continue the mission or not. CARP advisory messages and remote annunciators are
provided as usual, allowing the operation to continue.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-80
Revision 1 December 08, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. At one minute from the CRP waypoint, the alert messages “CARP ALT NOT MET” or “CARP TAS NOT
MET”, and “NO CARP SOLUTION” are raised. If the situation is corrected prior to 10 seconds to CRP, then
the situation reverts to A or B; otherwise, “NO CARP SOLUTION” remains until the CARP procedure is
terminated.
Whilst “NO CARP SOLUTION” is displayed, the standard CARP advisories and the AT CARP remote
annunciator are disabled. This alert message may also be raised if not in the inertial navigation mode (e.g.
due to inertial sensors inputs being lost), or baro-altitude or baro-correction input is lost.

The “NO CARP SOLUTION” message will also be displayed if equipment failures preclude a valid CARP
solution computation and a valid offside FMS CARP solution is not available.

The “CARP XTK TOO LARGE” message will be displayed if the aircraft is flying the CARP procedure
between the CRP (Green Light) and XTE (Red Light) waypoints and the cross-track error is larger than half
the drop zone width, as was defined in the CARP PLAN 1/3 page. CARP advisory messages and remote
annunciators are provided as usual, allowing the operation to continue.

EXIT FROM CARP

The FMS will automatically terminate the CARP procedure once the ESC waypoint is sequenced. It is also
possible to exit CARP with a direct-to or close up operation on the LEGS page and then pressing EXEC. The
procedure may also be directly deleted from the flight plan if any of its waypoints is not the active waypoint.

CARP RE-ENTRY

To abort and re-enter a CARP procedure, it is required to perform the following steps:

1. Exit the last CARP procedure (as indicated above). The EXEC key does not have to be pressed.

2. Re-initiate the CARP procedure at the first waypoint location of the flight plan. Refer to Section 11,
INITIATION OF A CARP PROCEDURE for more details.

3. The FMS will retain all the previously entered CARP PLAN values, requiring only the EXEC key to be
pressed.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-81
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CARP WIND ENTRY

The FMS allows for entry of forecast winds at 4 different flight levels in order to compute a more accurate CARP
lateral profile.

If a CARP flight plan already exists, then entering CARP winds is applied to the modified flight plan.

In the absence of any entered wind data, the CARP procedure will assume that no wind exists at the CRP
(green light) waypoint.

The CARP wind page is shown below.

ACT CRP01 WIND 1/1
ALT DIR/SPD
F L ---
1L 1R

2L 2R

3L F L 355 310T / 95 3R

4L F L 100 280 /110

T
4R

5L CARP PLAN> 5R

6L 6R

1. Flight level entries are entered into the scratchpad and line selected to LSK 1L.

2. Flight level entries shown numerical decreasing order on positions LSK 1L to 4L.

3. Once confirmed, a specific wind level entry can be deleted using the CLR key and then line selecting to the
desired flight level.

Details on CARP wind entry are provided on the WIND 1/1 page as outlined in Appendix A.

CARP SPEED TARGET ON DISPLAY SYSTEM

Various cockpit display systems also support displaying the FMS CARP target speed target. For these display
systems, the CARP target speed will only come into view after sequencing the slowdown waypoint of the CARP
flight plan procedure.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-82
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

POSITION UPDATES FOR CARP - GENERAL

In order to ensure continued and stable operation during the CARP drop, one minute prior to the first CARP
procedure waypoint, the FMS will automatically switch to Inertial Navigation mode.

The accuracy of the Inertial at that time will depend on the accuracy and time of its last update. If GPS or
DME/DME or VOR/DME navigation modes were active prior to the switch to Inertial, then the accuracy of the
latter will depend on the accuracy of the previously active FMS mode and the time elapsed since it was
available; the FMS performs corrections to its computed inertial position based on the position drift that existed
when it exited these modes. If only Inertial mode was previously active, then the accuracy will depend on the
time elapsed since the last position update and its accuracy. The accuracy of the active navigation mode may
be viewed on the UPDATE POS 1/2 page.

Two types of position updates are possible on the CMA-9000:

Long-term update: As described in Section 12, POSITION UPDATE.

Temporary update: Position offset applied to the CARP flight plan waypoints and which has a limited
duration; used mainly for local frame shifts during tactical operations. Refer to the next
section, CARP TEMPORARY POSITION UPDATE for more detail on this operation.

CARP TEMPORARY POSITION UPDATE

A "temporary" update used to implement a coordinate frame shift of CARP flight plan waypoint positions from a
local coordinate system to the coordinate system used by the CMA-9000. This is useful when the aircraft is
flying in a region where the local terrain map/database being used is very precise relative to some local
Identification Point (IP) landmark (e.g. bearing and distance to local IP are accurate) but the latitude and
longitude coordinates of the IP are inaccurate/offset with respect to that used by the CMA-9000. Temporary
position offsets strictly apply to CARP procedure waypoints, and the update may only be performed when CARP
is active (the active waypoint is a CARP procedure waypoint or 20 minutes remain to the CARP green light).
This update is performed using a mark on top operation (CARP MARK). When a temporary position offset is
active, the OFST annunciator is illuminated and the EHSI/EFIS indicates POS OFST (or some other appropriate
indication that a position offset is currently active in the FMS’s flight plan).

For CARP mark on top operations, the CARP MARK prompt must be pressed while a reference position is flown
over or abeam. When flying near the waypoint, the user may specify a relative bearing/range or cross-track
offset, which may be obtained from radar or other sensor providing bearing/range data.

Functionality of the CARP temporary position update is described in this section and makes specific references
to the TMP UPDATE POS page; however, additional details on the TMP UPDATE POS page are provided in
Appendix A.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-83
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CARP MARK TEMPORARY POSITION UPDATE

When the CARP status is ACTIVE and there is at least a period of 10 seconds before reaching the CRP (green
light) waypoint and a CARP solution exists (e.g. the NO CARP SOLUTION scratchpad message is not being
annunciated), then the CARP MARK prompt appears on both the TMP UPDATE POS page and CARP
PROGRESS page.

TMP UPDATE POS 2/2

REF BRG/DIST
1L
>----- 000o /0.00N M < 1R
UPDATE POSITION
o o
2L . . 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
o
4L INS 0.07 / 4R

5L 5R

6L <CARP PROG CARP MARK> 6R

ACT CARP PROGRESS 5/5

CARP POS ACTIVE
N 4 5 o0 0 . 0 0 W 0 7 2 o0 0 . 0 0
1L 1R
ATK DISTANCE XTK
2L 3.4N M L1560F T
2R
ETE CARP ETA
3L 17S E C 1234:12Z
3R
CURRENT TARGET
4L TAS 200K T 130K T 4R
ALT 11030F T 10000F T
5L 5R

6L <CARP PLAN CARP MARK> 6R

When the CARP MARK prompt is available, perform the following to apply a temporary position update to the
CARP procedure:

1. Ensure that either the CARP PROGRESS page or the TMP UPDATE POS page is in view.

NOTE: That the TMP UPDATE POS page should be set to show the appropriate REF ID field. Typically,
the REF ID is the IP (Identification Point) waypoint when this optional waypoint has been defined as
part of the CARP procedure.

2. As the aircraft flies over or abeam to the known position, press the CARP MARK prompt (on either the TMP
UPDATE POS or CARP PROGRESS page).
The displayed data corresponds to the position when the CARP MARK prompt was selected.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-84
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. At LSK 1R, enter the desired relative bearing/distance or crosstrack offset at to the known position, as
applicable.

4. Press the EXEC key.

ENDING A TEMPORARY CARP POSITION UPDATE

A CARP temporary position update will end automatically when either:

1. All the waypoints of the CARP procedure are sequenced, or

2. A direct-to is performed, or

3. The CARP procedure is deleted from the flight plan, or

4. A manual CANCEL UPDATE operation is performed. This may only be performed while the CARP waypoint
positions are not frozen (e.g. before 10 seconds to CRP).

To perform a manual CANCEL UPDATE, the following steps must be taken:

1. Press CANCEL UPDATE on the TMP UPDATE POS 2/2 page.

2. Press the EXEC key.

The CANCEL UPDATE feature strictly applies to CARP temporary position updates.

TMP UPDATE POS 2/2

REF BRG/DIST
1L > CYUL 010o /2.10N M < 1R
UPDATE POSITION
o o
2L N45 30.15 W073 43.96 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L INS 0.07 011o/0.10 4R

5L CANCEL UPDATE> 5R

6L <CARP PROG CARP MARK> 6R

The end of a temporary CARP position update is indicated by displaying the TEMP POS UPDATE END status
advisory message.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-85
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COSPAS/SARSAT DISTRESS BEACON HANDLING (If configured)

NOTE: The FMS allows communication with DF equipment (DF-935-12, DF-430-102, or DF-430-112) which
provides information related to COSPAS/SARSAT distress beacons. Distress beacon information can
be used by the FMS for navigation purposes.

To view main COSPAS/SARSAT information press [INIT REF], <WPT LISTS>, <SARSAT WPT>.

SARSAT WPT 1/2

ID/AGE/BRG/DIS
1L
<E L T 0 1 ( 2 6 ) 1R
090T/20.0N M
2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L REF ID PPOS 5R
DISPLAY
6L >A L L DELETE ALL> 6R

The information available from the beacon is:

• Beacon identifier (ELTxx, PLBxx, EPIxx or TSTxx where xx=01...99 or ** if greater than 99).
• Age since last reception of beacon signal.
• Bearing/distance relative to the REF ID (default is present position of aircraft).

The reference identifier (REF ID) can be set to any reference waypoint of the FMS.

Access to details on a specific beacon is achieve by pressing the associated LSK (in this example LSK 1L).
When many beacons are received by the FMS (e.g. maximum of 8 beacons), all beacons are presented on that
page.

SARSAT WPT 1/2

ID/AGE/BRG/DIS
1L
<E L T 0 1 ( * * ) ( 1 8 ) E L T 0 5 > 1R
090T/20.0N M 190T/10.0N M
2L <P L B 0 2 ( 2 6 ) ( 3 2 ) E L T 0 6 > 2R
150T/22.1N M 023T/70.6N M
3L <E P I 0 3 ( 0 0 ) ( 0 5 ) P L B 0 7 > 3R
000T/25.1N M 011T/20.5N M
4L <E L T 0 4 ( 0 2 ) ( 1 0 ) P L B 0 8 > 4R
352T/80.5N M 180T/40.0N M
5L REF ID PPOS 5R
DISPLAY
6L >S E L E C T I O N DELETE ALL> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-86
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

In order to uncluttered the EFIS & DMAP displays, the operator can define which beacon received are to be
displayed on EFIS & DMAP; this is done by:

1. Defining if the received beacon needs to be displayed or not (setting is done from the detail beacon page
named SARSAT DATA page).

2. Toggling the display selection from LSK 6L; toggle option are SELECTION or ALL.

If required, all beacons can be deleted via the DELETE ALL option.

Once a specific COSPAS/SARSAT beacon has been selected, the following information from it is available:

SARSAT DATA 1/3

ELT01 ID/POSP00 DISTRESS
N45o12.07 W043o32.13
1L 1R
BEACON ID(OPER) RX AT
2L ACA1234 2014:57z<
2R
COUNTRY AUX LOC DEV
3L CANADA 121.5MHZ
3R
15 HEX ID DISPLAY
4L A25BC F2D3E 4751F ON< 4R

5L <SARSAT WPT BULLS TGT> 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

The information available from the beacon are:

• Beacon’s identifier (ELTxx, PLBxx, EPIxx or TSTxx where xx=01..99).

• Beacon’s position coordinates.
• Beacon’s resolution (P00, P02, P04, P15).
• Beacon’s type (TEST or distress).
• Beacon’s identification (NATI, ADDR, OPER, SN, NIN, MMSI or RCS).
• Last reception time (or age) of beacon signal (the time/age can be swapped by toggling LSK 2R).
• Beacon’s registration country.
• Beacon’s auxiliary radio-location device.
• Beacon’s 15 hexadecimal identifier.

From this page the operator can:

• Define if the received beacon needs to be displayed or not on the EFIS & DMAP (via the DISPLAY ON/OFF
prompt).
• Return to the previous page (via the SARSAT WPT prompt).
• Define the SARSAT beacon as the Bulls Eye target (via the BULLS TGT prompt).
• Create a new user waypoint as the SARSAT beacon (via the NEW USER WPT prompt).
• Perform search and rescue or any other tactical navigation to the SARSAT beacon (via the DES+SAR or
TACTICAL prompt).

Refer to Appendix A for details on SARSAT pages.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-87
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TARGET POSITION RECEPTION (from ATOS and/or RADAR, if configured)

If configured, the Galileo Avionic ATOS LW equipment (Airborne Tactical Observation and Surveillance System –
Light Weight) and/or FIAR 1500B RADAR equipment can transfer to the FMS a target position upon operator
selection. The operator can subsequently use this position just like any other waypoint (e.g. it can be used to
create a user waypoint; it can be used as the reference ID waypoint for search and rescue operations; it can be
used as the holding pattern entry fix, etc.)

Reception by the FMS of a new target position from either the ATOS or RADAR is communicated to the flight crew
by displaying the NEW TARGET POSITION status advisory scratchpad message.

The operator can then access the newly received position by going to the MISSION page. When the ATOS and/or
RADAR is configured this page can viewed by selecting the MISSION prompt on page INIT/REF INDEX 1/2

FMS1 INIT/REF INDEX 1/2

1L
<IDENT WPT DATA> 1R

2L <POS INIT WPT LISTS> 2R

3L NEAREST> 3R

4L <FIX INFO MISSION> 4R

5L <SETUP NAV STATUS> 5R

6L <MSG RECALL DES+SAR> 6R

The MISSION then shows the latest received target positions from the ATOS and/’or RADAR equipment. The last
target position received (either from the ATOS or RADAR equipment) will show the time it was received by the
FMS in inverse white video font.

MISSION 1/1
RADAR TARGET 1129:51z
1L N45°32.18 W123°00.43
1R
ATOS TARGET 1315:10z
2L N45°34.25 W122°45.12
2R
ATOS TRANSFER STATUS
3L IDLE
3R

4L 4R

5L <RADAR ID X-REF 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-88
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DES+SAR [6R] or TACTICAL [6R]: When TACT key is configured, the DES+SAR prompt is replaced by
TACTICAL. In this case, the prompt gives access to the TACTICAL page instead of the DES+SAR page.
When there is no data in the scratchpad, selection of this key will create a temporary waypoint with the Radar
Target or the ATOS Target position (the most recent one received is selected) and the temporary waypoint ID is
entered in the REF ID field of the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page. When there is a valid position in the
scratchpad, selection of this key will create a temporary waypoint and enter temporary waypoint identifier in the
REF ID field of the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page.
When the inactive route is in modification, instead of accessing the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page, this
prompt gives access to the INACT DES+SAR 1/X 1/Y (or INACT TACTICAL 1/Y) page.

CAUTION: It is the crew’s responsibility to ensure that the appropriate Target Position (Radar or ATOS) is
selected (time in inverse video white) before creating a new user waypoint or accessing the
DES+SAR page. Thus, the recommended practice would be to first transfer the desired target
waypoint position to the scratchpad (e.g: by line-selecting LSK 1L/1R or LSK 2L/2R) and then
creating with this position either a new user waypoint (by selecting NEW USER WPT at LSK 6L) or
by transferring the selected target position to the DES+SAR page (by selecting DES+SAR at LSK
6R).

ATOS FLIGHT PLAN TRANSFER TO FMS (if ATOS is configured)

Upon operator request, the ATOS can transfer mission flight plan waypoints to the FMS that the FMS then loads
into its inactive route. Up to maximum of 99 waypoints can be transferred to the FMS.

A. Default MISSION page is displayed when no target position is received and no ATOS transfer has been
requested.

MISSION 1/1
RADAR TARGET z
1L 1R
ATOS TARGET z
2L 2R
ATOS TRANSFER STATUS
3L IDLE
3R

4L 4R

5L <RADAR ID X-REF 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-89
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. MISSION page is displayed when a flight plan transfer request is received from the ATOS equipment.
Furthermore, reception by the FMS of a request from the ATOS to transfer its mission flight plan waypoints is
also communicated to the flight crew by displaying the ATOS TRANSFER REQUESTED status advisory
scratchpad message.

MISSION 1/1
RADAR TARGET z
1L 1R
ATOS TARGET z
2L 2R
ATOS TRANSFER STATUS
3L REQUESTED START> 3R

4L 4R

5L <RADAR ID X-REF 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

ATOS TRANSFER REQUESTED
C. This page is displayed when the transfer has been initiated by pressing the START> prompt located at LSK
3R.

MISSION 1/1
RADAR TARGET z
1L 1R
ATOS TARGET z
2L 2R
ATOS TRANSFER STATUS
3L IN PROGRESS 3R

4L 4R

5L <RADAR ID X-REF 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

D. This page is displayed when the flight plan transfer from the ATOS has been received successfully.

MISSION 1/1
RADAR TARGET z
1L 1R
ATOS TARGET z
2L 2R
ATOS TRANSFER STATUS
3L COMPLETED
3R

4L 4R

5L <RADAR ID X-REF 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-90
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E This page is displayed when the flight plan transfer from the ATOS failed.

MISSION 1/1
RADAR TARGET 1315:10z
N45°34.25 W122°45.12
1L 1R
ATOS TARGET 1319:20z
2L N43°56.78 W095°17.66
2R
ATOS TRANSFER STATUS
3L FAILED 3R

4L 4R

5L <RADAR ID X-REF 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

NOTE: The 'z' displayed in the TARGET lines are only displayed if the time reference of the FMS is set to UTC.

The FMS will then store the received mission waypoints from the ATOS in its inactive route.

Upon successful mission data transfer from the ATOS, the FMS will create, in the inactive route, origin and
destination airports with the following priority:
• the FMS will use the origin and destination airports currently in the active route (if any are defined), or,
• the FMS will create an origin airport named "ORIG" with the coordinates of the first mission data waypoint
received from the ATOS and a destination airport named "DEST" with the coordinates of the last mission data
waypoint received from the ATOS.

When the ATOS is configured, the FMS continuously transmits its active flight plan waypoints (up to a maximum
of 81) to the ATOS equipment.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-91
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FMS WAYPOINT TRANSMISSION TO RADAR (if FIAR 1500B RADAR is configured)

When the FIAR 1500B RADAR is configured, the FMS continuously transmits (up to) the first 10 active flight
plan waypoints* to the FIAR 1500B RADAR equipment.
* active flight plan waypoints transmitted to the RADAR also include those waypoints that are not seen as actual
waypoints on the LEGS page, such as procedural type waypoints. For example, SAR pattern waypoints do not
appear on the LEGS page (only the first waypoint of the SAR pattern appears) but each of the waypoints
comprising the SAR pattern would be seen on the RADAR ID X-REF 1/1 page.

The operator can cross-reference the FMS waypoints that are transmitted to the EFIS (GAMA) with those seen
on the RADAR’s display by viewing the RADAR ID X-REF 1/1 page.

RADAR ID X-REF 1/1

EFIS RADAR
1L FROM ( ) 0
1R
TO YMX 1
2L NEXT YM01 2
2R
UHU 3
3L UHU01/HL 4
3R
UHU02 5
4L UHU03 6 4R
UHU04 7
5L UHU05 8 5R

6L MISSION> 6R

FROM (1L, 1R): Display the FROM waypoint identifier transmitted to the EFIS and the corresponding waypoint
number used on the RADAR display. For waypoints without identifier created by the FMS, parenthesis (e.g.: "(
)") are displayed to indicate that no identifier is defined. For example, when a direct-to is executed, the FROM
waypoint will be shown as "( )" on the EFIS column.

TO (2L, 2R): Display the TO waypoint identifier transmitted to the EFIS and the corresponding waypoint number
used on the RADAR display.

NEXT (2L, 2R): Display the NEXT waypoint identifier transmitted to the EFIS and the corresponding waypoint
number used on the RADAR display. For waypoints without identifier created by the FMS, parenthesis (e.g.: "(
)") are displayed to indicate that no identifier is defined.

FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINTS (3L, 4L, 5L, 3R, 4R, and 5R): Display the flight plan waypoint transmitted to the
EFIS and the corresponding waypoint numbers used on the RADAR display.

MISSION [6R]: Access the MISSION 1/1 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 11-92
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 12 - NAVIGATION SENSORS

CONTENTS

Subject Page
GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................12-1
GPS NAVIGATION (CIVIL) ..............................................................................................................................12-1
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM PAGES (ARINC 743A/ARINC 743/TRIMBLE TA-12 format)................12-2
MILITARY GPS NAVIGATION.........................................................................................................................12-4
EGI NAVIGATION ............................................................................................................................................12-4
INS/GPS SYSTEM PAGES (EGI format)........................................................................................................12-5
INS/DVS NAVIGATION MODE (SAGEM EGI configuration only) .............................................................12-10
POSITION UPDATE.......................................................................................................................................12-12
DME NAVIGATION ........................................................................................................................................12-16
DME STATION MONITOR .............................................................................................................................12-17
DME STATION DESELECTION ....................................................................................................................12-18
DME STATION RESELECTION ....................................................................................................................12-18
VOR/DME OR VOR/DME/TACAN NAVIGATION MODE .............................................................................12-19
VOR/DME/TACAN STATION MONITOR ......................................................................................................12-19
DOPPLER VELOCITY SENSOR (DVS) NAVIGATION ................................................................................12-20
INERTIAL NAVIGATION VIA KALMAN FILTER ..........................................................................................12-23
KALMAN STATUS 1/1 PAGE........................................................................................................................12-24
INERTIAL NAVIGATION MODE....................................................................................................................12-25
INERTIAL – POSITION INITIALIZATION PROCESS ...................................................................................12-27
IRS SYSTEM PAGES ....................................................................................................................................12-28
INERTIAL NAVIGATION ON HIGH LATITUDE ............................................................................................12-29

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 12

NAVIGATION SENSORS

GENERAL

The CMA-9000 FMS includes the following navigation modes, in decreasing priority order: Hybrid GPS/INS,
GPS (cGPS/mGPS when dual GPS is configured with Litton LN-100GT EGI), DME/DME, VOR/DME/TACAN,
Hybrid INS/DVS, Inertial, DVS, KALMAN and Dead Reckoning. If one or several equipment supporting a
navigation mode is not configured, then only a sub-set of the above mentioned navigation modes will be
available.

Transition from one mode to another is automatic. Manual deselection of all the navigation modes is also
possible using the DESELECT 1/1 page (as described in Section 15).

GPS NAVIGATION (CIVIL)

NOTE: Applicable if an external GPS is configured but not applicable to a hybrid INS/GPS sensor installation
described in section EGI NAVIGATION.

The GPS sensor uses independent channels and can track any combination of GPS satellites. The GPS sensor
computes and outputs three-dimensional position and velocity components, time, ground speed, and track.
Both code and carrier phase tracking are used. Carrier phase tracking greatly reduces position and velocity
errors under highly dynamic aircraft manoeuvres.

The GPS sensor continuously monitors satellite health. All unhealthy satellites are dropped from the position
solution. In addition, all GPS signals-in-space used in the position solution are checked for failure by a Receiver
Autonomous Integrity Monitor (RAIM). It is understood that satellite failures are unannounced and can occur at
any instant. The RAIM continuously calculates the horizontal (HIL) and vertical integrity limits. The integrity limit
gives the radius in the horizontal plane and vertical direction within which the worst-case radial position error will
stay 99.99999% of the time without a satellite failure, and 99.9% of the time in the presence of a satellite failure.
The HIL is compared in the CMA-9000 FMS to the value required for the phase of flight (alert limit), and an alert
is generated when the integrity value exceeds the alert limit. Alert limits are described in Section 15, RNP
Capability Modification.
Furthermore, when the FMS also has available to it a backup sensor, the FMS will use the GPS to backup
sensor position error and backup sensor accuracy in computing a NAIM (Non-Autonomous Receiver Monitor)
HIL value which gets used in determining the GPS navigator’s overall Navigation Performance.

The RAIM function maximises the availability of the oceanic, en-route, terminal, non-precision approach while
guaranteeing the integrity as described above.

When GPS is the sensor used for navigation and the HIL (Horizontal Integrity Limit) is within the phase of flight
limit, the GPS HIL is displayed as the Actual Navigation Performance (ANP) value on the PROGRESS 1/4 (or
PROGRESS 1/3) page. The HIL is displayed on the GPS STATUS 2/2 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The combination of a GPS INT annunciator as well as an alert message GPS NAV LOST provides an indication
between the loss of FDE (Failure Detection and Exclusion) availability and the loss of navigation.

The GPS sensor requires a minimum of four satellites for navigation, five satellites to allow integrity monitoring
and the detection of a failed satellite, and six or more satellites to identify and exclude (isolate) the failed satellite
from the navigation solution. No operator action is required to accomplish satellite failure detection and
exclusion (FDE) as these functions are automatic. Provided adequate signal-to-noise levels exist, any satellite
with an elevation angle of 2° or more above the antenna's local horizon can be acquired, and once acquired, it
will be tracked to an elevation angle of 0° above the horizon.

Typical time-to-first-fix (TTFF) values are 55 seconds (initialized) and 120 seconds (un-initialized, e.g. search-
the-sky mode). Satellite re-acquisition after signal loss is typically 5 seconds. When a sufficient number of
satellites that has been acquired, the GPS sensor enters navigation mode and outputs the required data to the
CMA-9000 FMS.

GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM PAGES (ARINC 743A/ARINC 743/TRIMBLE TA-12 format)

There are no data entries on these pages. For additional information refer to Appendix A.

1.Display the GPS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R), <GPS>
(LSK 1R).

For dual GPS installations, display the cGPS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>
(LSK 5R), <GPS> (LSK 1R), <cGPS> (LSK 1R).

GPS STATUS 1/2

OP MODE
1L NAV
1R
SAT VIS SAT TRK
2L 8 5
2R
HOR FOM VER FOM
3L 20 M 65M
3R
HOR DOP VER DOP
4L 1 2 4R
HOR INT
5L O.20N M 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

2. Display the GPS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R), <GPS> (LSK 1R),
[NEXT].

For dual GPS installations (civil & Litton LN-100GT EGI), display the cGPS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing
[PREV] or [NEXT].

A. For single GPS installations:

GPS STATUS 2/2

POSITION
1L N45o30.91 W073o38.02
1R
TK/GS VER SPD
o
2L 072 /600K T +220F T / M I N
2R
MSL ALT
3L +1 2 0 0 0 F T 3R
GPS HEIGHT
4L +1 1 9 5 1 F T 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1506:24Z JUL11/04 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

B. For dual GPS installations (civil & Litton LN-100GT EGI):

cGPS STATUS 2/2

POSITION
N45o30.91 W073o38.02
1L 1R
TK/GS VER SPD
o
2L 072 /600K T +220F T / M I N
2R
MSL ALT
3L +1 2 0 0 0 F T 3R
GPS HEIGHT
4L +1 1 9 5 1 F T 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1506:24Z JUL11/04 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MILITARY GPS NAVIGATION

For installations where a dual GPS is configured with the Litton LN-100GT EGI, the FMS will also support a
military GPS navigation mode (shown as mGPS on the FMS’s POS/INIT/REF 2/X page).

In such installations when the navigation sensor cross-check option is enabled, the FMS uses a weighting logic
algorithm to compare the position provided by the military GPS to both:
• the position provided by the hybrid INS/GPS sensor of the EGI; and
• the position provided by the civil GPS sensor

Results of this comparison will trigger related alert messages to inform the crew of the position differences and
ensuing navigator changes.

EGI NAVIGATION

Applicable if the Embedded GPS INS (EGI) is configured.

The GPS sensor and INS complementary nature provide reliable and precise navigation even if the GPS
constellation geometry does not provide enough integrity for the route being flown.
The EGI provides a hybrid output that combines the INS and GPS outputs through a Kalman filter. This output
provides a weighted contribution of the INS and of the GPS position. When the GPS signal and constellation
geometry are adequate, the output is based on the GPS position. When the GPS signal quality degrades, the
EGI outputs in a progressive manner, with more of the INS contribution in the solution. In general, the
contribution of the INS drift, when the geometry is not optimal it remains small and allows the segment of the
route to be flown seamlessly.

In addition to the hybrid INS/GPS the EGI also provides a pure GPS and a pure INS position solutions.

The CMA-9000 FMS reverts to the pure GPS position or to another sensor when the quality factor or integrity of
the INS/GPS has degraded below what is required for the phase of flight. In this case the CMA-9000 FMS may
select the pure GPS or pure INS position (available with the Litton LN-100 GT EGI) if the remaining sensors are
not fit for navigation. Refer to General at the beginning of this Section.

The message "INS/GPS POS UNCERTAIN" or "GPS POS UNCERTAIN" is turned on if the CMA-9000 FMS is
forced to continue to use the hybrid INS/GPS or the respective GPS sensor. This happens when the GPS
position has lost integrity and there is no valid backup radio navigation sensor (DME/DME or VOR/DME).

In addition to the INS and GPS navigation mode, the SAGEM SIGMA50H EGI provides a hybrid INS/DVS
navigation solution, which is described below. The CMA-9000 FMS selects this solution according to the same
sensor selection criteria.

The GPS sensor in the EGI follows the same general behaviour as described above in Sub-Section, GPS
Navigation.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INS/GPS SYSTEM PAGES (EGI format)

There are no data entries on these pages except for the INS STATUS page when in ALIGN mode. For
additional information refer to Appendix A.

1. Display the GPS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R), <GPS> (LSK 1R).

For dual GPS installations (civil & Litton LN-100GT EGI), display the mGPS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT
REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R), <GPS> (LSK 1R), <mGPS> (LSK 2R).

A. SAGEM SIGMA50H EGI installation:

GPS STATUS 1/2

POSITION
N45o34.25 W073o38.0
1L 1R
MODE HOR ACCURACY
2L INIT 0.45N M
2R
TK/GS GPS ALT
3L 072o/150KT 5000F T
3R
VERT SPD VER ACCURACY
4L 220 FT/MIN 36F T 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1506:24Z JUL11/04 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

B. LITTON LN_100GT EGI installation:

GPS STATUS 1/2

POSITION
N45o34.25 W073o38.0
1L 1R
MODE HOR ACCURACY
2L INIT 0.45N M
2R
TK/GS GPS ALT
3L 072o/150KT 5000F T 3R
VERT SPD
4L 220 FT/MIN 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1506:24Z JUL11/04 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. LITTON LN_100GT EGI with dual GPS configured:

M GPS STATUS 1/2

POSITION
N45o34.25 W073o38.0
1L 1R
MODE HOR ACCURACY
2L INIT 0.45N M
2R
TK/GS GPS ALT
3L 072o/150KT 5000F T 3R
VERT SPD
4L 220 FT/MIN 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1506:24Z JUL11/04 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

2. Display the GPS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing [PREV] or [NEXT].

For dual GPS installations (civil & Litton LN-100GT EGI), display the mGPS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing
[PREV] or [NEXT].

A. SAGEM SIGMA50H EGI installation:

GPS STATUS 2/2

KEY STATUS FAIL CODE
1L KEY VER 0000
1R
SAT TRK
2L 5
2R
GDOP PDOP
3L 11.0 40.3
3R
HOR DOP VER DOP
4L 2.1 1.0 4R
RAIM HIL WIND
5L 0.34N M 120T/15K T 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. LITTON LN_100GT EGI installation:

GPS STATUS 2/2

KEY STATUS FAIL CODE
KEY VER 0000
1L 1R
SAT VIS SAT TRK
2L 8 5
2R
GDOP PDOP
3L 11.0 40.3 3R
HOR DOP VER DOP
4L 2.1 1.0 4R
EHE
5L 20 M 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

C. LITTON LN_100GT EGI with dual GPS installation:

M GPS STATUS 2/2

KEY STATUS FAIL CODE
KEY VER 0000
1L 1R
SAT VIS SAT TRK
2L 8 5
2R
GDOP PDOP
3L 11.0 40.3
3R
HOR DOP VER DOP
4L 2.1 1.0 4R
EHE
5L 20 M 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

3. Display the INS/GPS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R) and
<INS/GPS> (LSK 4L).

This page displays the outputs of the INS/GPS navigator as well as some INS/GPS inputs from the EGI.
Control over the hybridisation mode is also provided. All status and data fields will show “*” symbols when
the EGI is declared failed and blanks when data is not available.

INS/GPS STATUS 1/2

POSITION
1L N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1R
MODE HOR ACCURACY
2L HYB GPS SEL 0.50N M
2R
TK/GS INS/GPS ALT
o
3L 045 /228K T 5000F T
3R

4L 4R
HYBRIDIZATION
5L >O N 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4. Display the INS/GPS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R), <INS/GPS>
(LSK 5R) and [NEXT].

A. SAGEM SIGMA50H EGI installation:

INS/GPS STATUS 2/2

1L 1R
HDG/DA
2L 060.0o/L015o
2R
PITCH/ROLL
3L D015.0o/R10.5o
3R

4L 4R
AAIM HIL WIND
5L 0.34N M 120T/15K T 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

B. LITTON LN_100GT EGI installation:

INS/GPS STATUS 2/2

1L 1R
HDG/DA
2L 060.0o/L015o
2R
PITCH/ROLL
3L D015.0o/R10.5o 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

5. Display the INS STATUS 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R) and <INS> (LSK 5R).

NOTE: The INS STATUS 1/1 page is available only when the LITTON LN_100GT EGI is configured.

A. Page displayed when INS is in NAV mode:

INS STATUS 1/1

POSITION
1L N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1R
MODE ACCURACY
2L NAVIGATION 2.50N M
2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
o o o
3L 060 /L015 045 /140K T
3R
PITCH/ROLL ALT
4L D015.0o/R10.0o +5000F T 4R
VERT SPD NAV TIME
5L 02H16.7 02H16.7 5R

6L <NAV STATUS UPDATE POS> 6R

B. Page displayed when INS is in GROUND ALIGN mode 100 to 50:

INS STATUS 1/1

POSITION
1L 1R
MODE ACCURACY
2L GROUND ALIGN 75 NM
2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
o o o
3L / / KT
3R
PITCH/ROLL ALT
o o
4L / FT 4R
VERT SPD
5L FT/MIN 5R

6L <NAV STATUS STOP ALIGN> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Page displayed when INS is in GROUND ALIGN mode 49 to 00:

INS STATUS 1/1

POSITION
1L 1R
MODE ACCURACY
2L GROUND ALIGN 40 NM
2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
o o o
3L / / KT
3R
PITCH/ROLL ALT
o
4L / FT 4R
VERT SPD
5L FT/MIN 5R

6L <NAV STATUS CMD NAV> 6R

6. When the EGI is in ALIGN mode and the alignment counter is between 100 and 50 press STOP ALIGN
<LSK 6R> to stop alignment if required.

7. To transition to the degraded NAV mode when the EGI is in the align mode and when the alignment
counter is between 50 and 00 press CMD NAV <LSK 6R> to command NAV mode.

INS/DVS NAVIGATION MODE (SAGEM EGI configuration only)

A stand-alone inertial/DVS navigation mode is selected for use by the CMA-9000 FMS when higher priority
navigation modes are unavailable or not adequate for the phase of flight. For additional information refer to
Section 1.

The EGI INS/DVS navigation mode is based on a hybrid solution based on INS position and DVS velocity.

The SAGEM EGI provides a hybrid output, which combines the INS and DVS solutions. This output provides a
weighted contribution of the INS and of the DVS position.

1. Display the INS/DVS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R) and
<INS/DVS> (LSK 5L).

2. Activate or deactivate the mode using the HYBRIDIZATION prompt (LSK 5L)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. EGI status, position, accuracy, TK and GS are displayed.

INS/DVS STATUS 1/2

POSITION
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1L 1R
MODE HOR ACCURACY
2L HYB DVS SEL 0.50N M
2R
TK/GS
o
3L 045 /228K T
3R

4L 4R
HYBRIDIZATION
5L >O N 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

4. Display the INS/DVS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing [NEXT].

5. EGI Heading, Drift Angle, Pitch and Roll are displayed on page 2/2.
INS/DVS STATUS 2/2

1L 1R
HDG/DA
2L 060.0o/ L15o
2R
PITCH/ROLL
3L D015.0o/R10.5o
3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

POSITION UPDATE

This section describes the procedure to update the INS or the DVS position with the CMA-9000 FMS-computed
or other known positions. It is applicable for the INS/GPS, INS/DVS, and pure inertial or DVS modes.

NOTE: For the SIGMA50H EGI, a manual update of the INS/DVS will automatically update the INS/GPS, and
vice-versa.

The following procedures are based on an installation where the MARK function key has been
configured. For installations where the MARK key is not present, a MARK line select key is provided
in the UPDATE POS page (LSK 6R) and on the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page (LSK 4R).

Access the UPDATE POS 1/1 page by pressing:

UPDATE POS (LSK 6R) in the INS STATUS page or [INIT REF], <POS INIT> (LSK 2L) and <UPDATE
POS> (LSK 6R).

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF
1L >JOYSTICK 1R
ACCUR 0.27N M
2L ---o--.-- ----o--.--
2R
TRUE JOY POS
o o
3L . . 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
o
4L INS/DVS 0.07 / 4R
o
INS/GPS 1.10 /
o
5L DVS 2.01 / 5R

6L <PREDEF WPT MARK> 6R

The PREDEF WPT 2/2 page is accessed by pressing the MARK function key, the MARK softkey from the
PREDEF WPT and the UPDATE POS pages (If configured) or from the weather radar or AHCAS EFIS Joystick.
For additional information refer to Section 11. Manual position update is performed by one of the following
methods:

1. Update by overfly and mark-on-top of a known position, Refer to Section 11, User Database. In this case the
UPDATE POS page has the REF field dashed (LSK 1L) and the CMA-9000 FMS position displayed (LSK
2R) corresponding to moment when the MARK key was pressed.

NOTE: The navigation mode from which the CMA-9000 FMS position is derived can be chosen by deselecting
the other modes on the DESELECT page. The PROGRESS or POS INIT pages indicate the current
CMA-9000 FMS navigation mode.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

• The desired marked CMA-9000 FMS position can be replaced by another known position by entering
the position in the UPDATE POS field at LSK 2R.
• directly by bringing the position entered in the scratchpad
• indirectly with a waypoint ID at (LSK 1L), if desired add a distance/bearing offset at (LSK 1R).
• or by toggling (LSK 1L) to the CMA-9000 FMS or the joystick selection and selecting the
corresponding position.
• Press the MARK key.
• To cancel the position chosen for the update press UNMARK (LSK 6L).
• Select the sensors (INS/DVS (LSK 4L) or DVS (LSK 5L) for which a position update is required.
• Press CONFIRM (LSK 6R). The CMA-9000 FMS then updates the selected navigators with the position
indicated in the UPDATE POS field. Press CANCEL (LSK 6L) if no update is desired.

2. Update by Weather Radar/EFIS AHCAS joystick position selection {when configured}, refer to Section 11,
User Database. In this case the UPDATE POS page has the JOYSTICK as reference and the position
displayed on LSK 2R corresponds to the time when the joystick position was received.

• The desired joystick position can be replaced by another known position by entering the position in the
UPDATE POS field at LSK 2R.
• directly from the TRUE JOY POS (LSK 3R) via the scratchpad if a position was already entered
(toggle LSK 1L until joystick position appears).
• or indirectly with a waypoint ID at (LSK 3L). If the ID for the waypoint is in the database then the
corresponding Lat/Long true joystick position is displayed at LSK 3R. Press LSK 3R to copy this
position in the scratchpad, then LSK 2R to replace the UPDATE POS.
• Press MARK key.
• To cancel the update press the UNMARK (LSK 6L).
• Select the sensors (INS/DVS or DVS) for which a position update is required.
• Press CONFIRM. The CMA-9000 FMS then updates the selected navigators with the position indicated
in the UPDATE POS field.

3. MARK Function Key configured:

A. UPDATE POS 1/1 by pressing the MARK function key. All positions are frozen and sensors are
selectable.

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF
1L
>----- 1R
ACCUR 0.07N M
2L N45o28.08 W073o44.48
2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L <I N S / D V S 0 . 0 7 000o/0.00 4R
INS/GPS 1.10 090o/1.00
5L <D V S 2.01 180o/2.00 5R

6L <UNMARK MARK> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. UPDATE POS 1/1 sensors selected, update ready to be confirmed key pressed and EGI selected.

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF BRG/DIST
1L
>----- 1R
ACCUR 0.07N M
o o
2L N45 28.08 W073 44.48 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L <I N S / D V S 0 . 0 7 000o/0.00 4R
INS/GPS 1.10 045o/1.00
5L <D V S 2.01 180o/2.00 5R

6L <CANCEL CONFIRM> 6R

4. MARK function key not configured, changing the reference with the CMA-9000 FMS position:

A. UPDATE POS 1/1 default state; the CMA-9000 FMS position is used by default.

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF
1L
>F M S ( I N S / G P S ) 1R
ACCUR 0.07N M
2L N45o28.08 W073o44.48
2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L INS/DVS 0.07 000o/0.00 4R
INS/GPS 1.10 090o/1.00
5L DVS 2.01 180o/2.00 5R

6L <PREDEF WPT MARK> 6R

B. UPDATE POS 1/1 pressing the MARK LSK key on the INIT/REF 2/2 page, all positions are frozen and
sensors are selectable.

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF
1L
>F M S ( I N S / D V S ) 1R
ACCUR 0.07N M
2L N45o28.08073o44.48 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L <I N S / D V S 0 . 0 7 000o/0.00 4R
INS/GPS 1.10 090o/1.00
5L <D V S 2.01 180o/2.00 5R

6L <UNMARK MARK> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. UPDATE POS 1/1 sensors selected, MARK key pressed, position update ready to be confirmed and
sensors to be updated (INS/DVS and INS/GPS) selected.

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF BRG/DIST
1L >F M S ( I N S / D V S ) 1R
ACCUR 0.07N M
2L N45o28.08 W073o44.48 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L <I N S / D V S 0 . 0 7 000o/0.00 4R
INS/GPS 1.10 045o/1.00
5L <D V S 2.01 180o/2.00 5R

6L <CANCEL CONFIRM> 6R

5. MARK function key not configured, changing the reference with a waypoint position:

A. UPDATE POS 1/1 pressing LSK 1L, the identity entry prompt appear.

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF
1L >----- 1R
ACCUR
o o
2L . . 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
o
4L INS/DVS 0.07 / 4R
o
INS/GPS 1.10 /
o
5L DVS 2.01 / 5R

6L <PREDEF WPT MARK> 6R

B. UPDATE POS 1/1 waypoint ID entered, MARK key pressed and sensors to be updated (LSK 4L)
selected.

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF BRG/DIST
1L >CYUL ---o /-.--N M 1R
ACCUR 0.27N M
o o
2L N45 28.08 W073 44.48 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L <I N S / D V S 0 . 0 7 000o/0.00 4R
INS/GPS 1.10 045o/1.00
5L <D V S 2.01 180o/2.00 5R

6L <CANCEL CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-15
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. UPDATE POS 1/1 offset entered. The position is updated and CHECK QF appears if the position
difference between the sensor to be updated and the reference position is greater than the accuracy of
the sensor to be updated.

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF BRG/DIST
1L >CYUL 180o /1.00N M 1R
ACCUR 0.27N M
o o
2L N45 28.08 W073 44.48 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L <I N S / D V S 0 . 0 7 180o/1.00 4R
INS/DVS 1.10 045o/1.41
5L <D V S 2.01 180o/1.00 5R

6L <CANCEL CONFIRM> 6R
CHECK QF

DME NAVIGATION

The DME/DME navigation mode is selected for use by the CMA-9000 FMS when higher priority navigation
modes are unavailable or not adequate for the phase of flight. For additional information refer to Section 1.

DME/DME is used in areas with sufficient DME coverage and for which the appropriate navigation database is
installed. In this mode the CMA-9000 FMS automatically tunes the on-board DME equipment acquiring distance
from up to six DME or TACAN ground stations to determine aircraft position.

CAUTION: In DME/DME or VOR/DME modes when a VOR or a DME station is lost or acquired the FMS
system may sense a position change. This situation is similar to when the FMS switches between
navigation modes (GPS, DME/DME, VOR/DME, inertial, DR, etc.) when the integrity of a mode is
not satisfied.

When the FMS is coupled to the autopilot, this newly sensed cross track error causes lateral
steering command and an aircraft heading change as the FMS/autopilot attempts to intercept and
capture the recalculated desired track. This autopilot manoeuvre is proportionate with the calculated
track error and may be judged severe by the pilot. In this case, the pilot should disconnect the
autopilot and ensure correct flight path control, smooth out the correction to, and interception of, the
new calculated track.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DME STATION MONITOR

The DME page displays those stations used by the CMA-9000 FMS in DME navigation. A total of six DME
stations may be used to determine the aircraft's position. At least three stations are required to navigate in
DME/DME mode.

1. Display the DME STATUS 1/X page via the NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

DME STATUS 1/1

ID STAT FREQ DIS
YUL 116.30 25.5N M
1L 1R
IJFK N/A 109.50 NM

2L YJN REJ 118.00 64.5N M

2R
PLB 118.80 12.5N M
3L YQA REJ 119.00 39.0N M
3R
YUD 120.25 99.5N M
4L SCANNING CTRL ACTIVE 4R
POSITION
5L N46o43.31 W078o46.07 5R

6L <NAV STATUS DME DESEL> 6R

2. This page displays the DME stations used by the CMA-9000 FMS for DME navigation, the frequencies
tuned, and the slant range distances. Associated with each station is a status that indicates the following:

"REJ" : station not used in determining a position fix (rejected due to bad geometry).
" " : station used for DME navigation.
"N/A" : station not responding to tuning.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-17
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DME STATION DESELECTION

In some situations, the operator may choose to deselect a DME station due to known problems with the station
so as to prevent the CMA-9000 FMS from using this station in its DME station selection process for DME
navigation. To deselect a DME station, proceed as follows:

1. From the DME STATUS 1/1 page, press <DME DESEL> (LSK 6R).

DME DESELECT 1/1

IDENT FREQ
YUL 116.30M H Z
1L 1R

2L BIG 116.90M H Z
2R

3L YMM 112.00M H Z 3R

4L IJFK 109.50M H Z 4R

5L ---- 5R

6L <DME STATUS 6R

Up to a maximum of 25 stations may be deselected. Press [NEXT] or [PREV] keys to view all DME stations
deselected.

Insertion of more than 5 stations is achieved by moving a station entered in the scratchpad to any of the line
select key locations 1 through 5.

2. Key the DME station identifier into the scratchpad and insert the station into the DESELECTION list by
pressing the appropriate LSK.

DME STATION RESELECTION

To remove a deselected DME navaid from the DME DESELECTION list, proceed as follows:

1. Press the [CLR] key.

2. Press the appropriate LSK.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-18
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

VOR/DME OR VOR/DME/TACAN NAVIGATION MODE

VOR/DME/TACAN Navigation is selected for use by the CMA-9000 FMS when higher priority navigation modes
are unavailable or not adequate for the phase of flight. For additional information refer to Section 1.

The CMA-9000 FMS uses the VOR or TACAN radial bearing in conjunction with a DME or TACAN slant range
from a manually tuned VOR/DME and/or TACAN stations to compute a VOR/DME/TACAN-based position.

At least one VOR/DME or TACAN station, up to a maximum of two VOR/DME and one TACAN stations, must
be tuned to compute the position.

CAUTION: In DME/DME or VOR/DME modes when a VOR or a DME station is lost or acquired the FMS
system may sense a position change. This situation is similar to when the FMS switches between
navigation modes (GPS, DME/DME, VOR/DME, inertial, DR, etc.) when the integrity of a mode is
not satisfied.

When the FMS is coupled to the autopilot, this newly sensed cross track error causes lateral
steering command and an aircraft heading change as the FMS/autopilot attempts to intercept and
capture the recalculated desired track. This autopilot manoeuvre is proportionate with the calculated
track error and may be judged severe by the pilot. In this case, the pilot should disconnect the
autopilot and ensure correct flight path control, smooth out the correction to, and interception of, the
new calculated track.

VOR/DME/TACAN STATION MONITOR

The VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1 page displays those stations used for VOR/DME/TACAN navigation.

1. Display the VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1 page via the NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

2. The station identifier, tuned frequency, station radial, and slant range distance are displayed for every
equipment configured. When there are no stations listed, the station identifier will display blanks. When
there is no equipment configured, all the above fields will display blanks.

NOTE: In the case of a TACAN operating in AA TR or AA REC mode the TACAN identifier (line 3) is not
displayed.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-19
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. The calculated position is also displayed when valid Navaid data is available.

NOTE: The title of this page varies with the installation. If no TACAN is configured the title is VOR/DME
STATUS. If only a TACAN is configured then the title is TACAN STATUS.

VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1

SOURCE/ID FREQ RAD/DME
VOR1 YJN 115.80 260°
1L 1R
DME1 YJN 115.80 130NM
2L VOR2 YUL 116.30 180°
2R
DME2 IABC 109.30H 12.0NM
3L 3R
TCN UHU 99X 150°/ 110NM
4L 4R
POSITION
5L N45°30.91 W073°38.02 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

DOPPLER VELOCITY SENSOR (DVS) NAVIGATION

The purpose of the DVS mode is to provide a stand-alone navigation solution for use when higher priority
navigation modes are unavailable or not adequate for the phase of flight. Refer to Section 1.

If the CMA-9000 FMS is configured for military navigation reversion to the DVS navigation mode is automatic
upon loss of higher priority modes of navigation.

If the CMA-9000 FMS is configured for civil use the DVS navigation solution is considered without integrity and
the corresponding navigation mode will be given the lowest priority.

Depending on the DVS installed in the aircraft, the CMA-9000 FMS will receive and process x and y velocity
data which, when combined with heading and attitude allows the CMA-9000 FMS to compute the aircraft
position, ground speed, altitude, status and maintenance data.

When the DVS navigation solution is available the DVS calculated position with respect to the CMA-9000 FMS
position is available on the POS INIT REF 2/2.
POS INIT/REF 2/2
FMS POS GPS
o o
N47 32.42 E122 18.51
1L 1R

2L MODE STS DIS BRG<

2R
INS/GPS HSEL 0.13 122°
3L GPS 3D 00.0 5°
3R
DME/DME NAV 1.60 112°
4L VORDMTC ACQ ° 4R
INS/DVS NAV 0.13 33°
5L DVS NAV 0.13 10° 5R

6L <SETUP ROUTE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-20
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. RDN-85 DVS installation.

1. Display the DVS STATUS 1/2 page via the NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

2. The velocity in each of the three axes and the DVS functional mode are displayed.
DVS STATUS 1/2
VELOCITIES
VX +25.5 KTS
1L 1R
VY +5.56 KTS
2L VZ +2500 FT/MIN
2R
MODE
3L CALM SEA
3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

The velocities are displayed in reverse video when the RDN-85 DVS is in one of the following modes: TEST,
SILENCE or MEMORY or if one specific velocity is in TEST mode.

DVS STATUS 1/2

VELOCITIES
VX +25.5 KTS
1L 1R
VY +5.56 KTS
2L VZ +2500 FT/MIN
2R
MODE
3L SILENCE
3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

B. ANV353 DVS installation.

1. Display the DVS STATUS 1/2 page via the NAV STATUS INDEX 1/2 page.

2. The velocity in each of the three axes, the DVS operational mode, the beam and surface status are
displayed.

3. The RF mode in effect is displayed. If required toggle using the RF MODE (LSL 4R) to select the
appropriate RF mode.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-21
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4. Toggle the prompt at (LSK 5R) to change the surface type.

DVS STATUS 1/2

VELOCITIES
VX +25.5 K T S
1L 1R
VY +5.56 K T S
2L VZ +2500 F T / M I N
2R
MODE
3L OPER 3R
BEAM STATUS RF MODE
4L 3-BEAMS CONTINUOUS< 4R
STATUS SURFACE
5L LAND AUTO< 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

The velocities are displayed in reverse video when the ANV353 DVS receives invalid velocity data or
when the DVS is in TEST.
DVS STATUS 1/2
VELOCITIES
1L VX +25.5 KTS 1R
VY +5.56 KTS
2L VZ +2500 FT/MIN 2R
MODE
3L OPER 3R
BEAM STATUS RF MODE
4L 3-BEAMS INTERMITENT< 4R
STATUS SURFACE
5L SEA SEA< 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

When the DVS mode is SEA or CALM SEA (RDN 85 only) the CMA-9000 FMS corrects the Doppler
velocities for the water motion.

Enter water motion compensation on page DVS STATUS 2/2.

1. Display the DVS STATUS 1/2 page via the NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page and [NEXT].

2. When the CMA-9000 FMS cannot compute the wind, the current wind direction and speed (in knots) are
displayed in large fonts. Enter the wind direction and speed. Otherwise the value is displayed in medium font
and manual entries are not permitted. When the scratchpad is empty and A/C is outside the polar region
(latitude between N73 and S60), pressing LSK 1L will toggle between the True and Magnetic display
options.

NOTE: The system wind being displayed here is the same as may be observed on the PROGRESS 1/4 page.
For the DVS, the wind value is used by the CMA-9000 FMS in the estimation of surface water current.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-22
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3. Enter the water speed in the direction the current is flowing toward and the current direction.

DVS STATUS 2/2

MAG W I N D
1L >1 2 8 ° / 2 6 K T S 1R
WATER CURRENT
2L 280°/40.0K T S 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

INERTIAL NAVIGATION VIA KALMAN FILTER

NOTE: Applies only if this function is configured. This function is mutually exclusive with the GPS/INS function
described in Section EGI Navigation mode.

The purpose of the KALMAN sensor interface is to provide a stand-alone inertial navigation mode for use when
stand-alone GPS navigation and radio navigation are not possible.

Navigation mode automatically reverts to inertial upon loss of GPS and radio navigation.

The CMA-9000 FMS is using the Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS), and the GPS to provide a
KALMAN Filter navigation mode. In this mode, the primary navigation sensor is the GPS receiver. The AHRS is
used as a dead-reckoning navigation system by emulating an Inertial Navigation System (INS) with a KALMAN
Filter performing closed-loop GPS based correction and alignment of the INS position. Each sensor has specific
performance characteristics and behaviour which, when combined, provide for continuous navigation whenever
the GPS is not available. The GPS receiver has bounded but noisy positioning and velocity errors and the GPS
navigation solution is subject to the availability of the GPS satellite constellation. The AHRS exhibits steady
error growth which, when converted to a dead-reckoning system, will yield steady error growth in the position
and velocity navigation solution. The AHRS-based inertial navigation solution is always available when the GPS
position is lost. The noise characteristic of the AHRS determines the amount of time this position can be safely
used for navigation.

The KALMAN Filter is providing the means to combine both navigation modes so that accurate navigation can
continue for some time after the GPS is lost. The amount of time available will depend on the performance of
the AHRS used (typically 2 minutes). The GPS and the AHRS are integrated via a KALMAN Filter and the
KALMAN Filter is used to continuously correct and align the AHRS-based inertial navigation solution, as if the
inertial navigation solution were static at a known position point. The block diagram is as follows:

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-23
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INS GPS
P ii P ii

CMA-9000

AHRS
Data
INS Kalman

Correction

Figure 12-1 KALMAN Filter Block Diagram

The KALMAN Filter models the evolution of the AHRS errors according to the AHRS model. As long as GPS
can provide measurement data with integrity, the AHRS errors can be continuously estimated and corrected in
the emulated INS navigator. However, once there is no GPS data, the true AHRS errors (as seen at the INS
emulator output) and the KALMAN Filter estimates of these errors will begin to diverge. The rate of divergence
is a direct result of the AHRS quality - worse the AHRS quality, the quicker the INS navigator will diverge from
the true GPS position. Also the GPS receiver will calibrate the INS emulator to the GPS accuracy.
The KALMAN Filtered navigation mode is available 1 minute after power is applied. If power is interrupted for
greater than 50 msec then the KALMAN Filter is re-initialized.

KALMAN STATUS 1/1 PAGE

There are no data entries on this page. For additional information refer to Appendix A.

Display KALMAN STATUS 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, and <KALMAN> (LSK 5R).

KALMAN STATUS 1/1

OP MODE
INI
1L 1R
KALMAN POSITION
o o
2L *** **.** **** **.** 2R
GPS POSITION
3L N45o00.00 W072o00.00 3R
2SIGMA POSERR
4L 230M 4R
GPS READY APIRS READY
5L YES NO 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-24
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INERTIAL NAVIGATION MODE

The purpose of the FMS/inertial sensors interface is to provide a stand-alone inertial navigation mode for use
when stand-alone GPS navigation and radio navigation are not possible.
Reversion to the inertial navigation mode is automatic upon loss of GPS and radio navigation.
Depending on the inertial sensors installed in the aircraft, the FMS will receive and process ARINC 704/571/419
inertial data which may include position, ground speed, altitude, E-W and N-S inertial velocities, baro-inertial
altitude, true and synthetic magnetic heading, status and maintenance data.
The inertial navigation mode is based on the FMS-calculated mixed inertial position, track and ground speed.
The mixed inertial position is computed as a weighted average of the three inertial sensor positions.
When in GPS or DME navigation mode and the ANP is within the phase of flight limit, each FMS calculates a
bias vector between its system position and the mixed inertial position.

When the inertial navigation mode becomes active, the mixed inertial position is corrected with the bias vector in
order to prevent large FMS position change.

The actual navigation performance (ANP) of the mixed inertial position is derived from the inertial drift rate, the time
elapsed since inertial navigation mode became active, and the system ANP when the inertial navigation mode
became active. The FMS computes an inertial ANP based on a drift rate of 2 nautical miles per hour of inertial
navigation.

1. Display the IRS STATUS 1/X page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R) and <IRS> (LSK
4R).

A. LTN_92 installation:
IRS1 STATUS 1/X
POSITION
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1L 1R
MODE PGM NUMBER
2L NAV 92-04-13
2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
o o o
3L 060 / L15 045 /140K T
3R
PITCH/ROLL ALT
4L D15o/ R10o 5000F T 4R
VERT SPD
5L + 1 7 5 FT/MIN MALFUNCT> 5R

6L <NAV STATUS ACCURACY> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-25
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. LTN_101, LASEREF_V and ADIRU installation:

IRS1 STATUS 1/X

POSITION
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1L 1R
MODE
2L NAV
2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
o o o
3L 060 / R99 045 /140K T
3R
PITCH/ROLL ALT
4L D15o/ R10o 5000FT 4R
VERT SPD
5L + 1 7 5 FT/MIN START TEST> 5R

6L <NAV STATUS ACCURACY> 6R

The crew can verify the individual IRS position and ground speed against the FMS system position and ground
speed. It can also verify the individual IRS status, action code, and update mode.

1. Display the POS INIT/REF 3/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <POS INIT> (LSK 2R), [NEXT], [NEXT].

A. LTN_92 installation:
POS INIT/REF 3/3
FMS POS GPS GSK T
N47o32.04 E122o18.50 250
1L 1R

2L 2R
IRS1
3L N47o32.03 E122o18.66 249
3R
IRS2
4L N47o32.04 E122o18.55 250 4R
IRS3
5L N47o32.03 E122o18.77 251 5R

6L <SETUP 6R

B. LTN101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V:

POS INIT/REF 3/3

FMS POS GPS GSK T
N47o32.04 E122o18.50 250
1L 1R

2L 2R
IRS1 (14 MIN)
3L N47o32.03 E122o18.66 249
3R
IRS2 (ATT)
4L N47o32.04 E122o18.55 250 4R
IRS3 REJ
N47 32.03 E122o18.77 251
o
5L 5R

6L <SETUP 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-26
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The crew can monitor the number of inertial sensors are used for navigation in the POS INIT 2/3 page by
pressing [INIT REF], <POS INIT> (LSK 2R), [NEXT].

The number of inertial used for navigation is displayed next to the IRS mode.

POS INIT/REF 2/3

FMS POS INERTIAL
1L N47°32.42 E122°18.51
1R

2L MODE STS DIS ACCUR<

2R

3L GPS DSEL 0.10 0.30N M

3R
DME/DME DSEL 0.34 0.50N M
4L VORDME DSEL 0.30 0.50N M 4R
IRS(x3) NAV 0.00 0.50N M
5L 5R

6L <SET UP ROUTE> 6R

INERTIAL – POSITION INITIALIZATION PROCESS

The IRS initialization of position is commanded by the on side FMS. The IRS can be initialized automatically or
manually:

• When the IRS is in ALIGN mode and GPS has integrity, each FMS automatically initializes its onside IRS.

• When the IRS is in ALIGN mode and GPS integrity is not available, the IRS initialization must be
commanded by the crew by entering aircraft present position into the SET IRS POSITION field of the POS
INIT page. Upon pilot entry of latitude and longitude, the FMS initializes its onside IRS and cross-talks the
initialization data to the other FMS(s). On receipt of the initialization data, the other FMS(s) automatically
initialize(s) its/their respective IRS.

1. Display the POS INIT/REF 1/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <POS INIT>.

POS INIT/REF 1/3

FMS POS GPS
1L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R
REF AIRPORT
2L KBFI N 4 7 o 3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o 1 8 . 0 0 2R
GATE
3L BF1 N 4 7 o 3 2 . 3 0 W 1 2 2 o 1 8 . 7 0 3R
SET IRS POS
o o
4L . . 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z DEC11/00 5R

6L <SETUP 6R

For additional information refer to Appendix A.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-27
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

IRS SYSTEM PAGES

There are no data entries on these pages except for the INS STATUS page when in ALIGN mode. For
additional information refer to Appendix A.

1. Display the IRS STATUS 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <IRS>.

A. Page displayed for LTN92:

IRS1 STATUS 1/1

POSITION
1L N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1R
MODE PGM NUMBER
2L NAV 92-04-13
2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
o o o
3L 060 / L15 045 /140K T
3R
PITCH/ROLL ALT
4L D15o/ R10o 5000F T 4R
VERT SPD
5L + 1 7 5 FT/MIN MALFUNCT> 5R

6L <NAV STATUS ACCURACY> 6R

B. Page displayed for FOR ADIRU, LTN_101 and LASEREF_V:

IRS1 STATUS 1/1

POSITION
1L N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1R
MODE
2L NAV 2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
o o o
3L 060 / R99 045 /140K T 3R
PITCH/ROLL ALT
4L D15o/ R10 5000F T 4R
VERT SPD
5L + 1 7 5 FT/MIN START TEST> 5R

6L <NAV STATUS ACCURACY> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-28
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INERTIAL NAVIGATION ON HIGH LATITUDE

When the system mixed inertial latitude exceeds 85 degrees N or S, the FMS will cease to compute a mixed
inertial position. The system inertial position will slowly transition to coincide with the position of the inertial
sensor closest to the mixed inertial position computed before the FMS present position latitude exceeded N-S
85 degrees.

The true heading, inertial track and ground speed information used by the FMS will be taken from the nearest
IRS. The other inertial sensor(s) will be automatically rejected. If the selected nearest inertial sensor fails, the
system will select the next nearest inertial sensor.
Upon an automatic rejection of an inertial sensor, the character string “REJ” will be displayed in lower case on
the POS REF 2/2 page, adjacent to the rejected sensor.

Upon aircraft position latitude is less than N-S 85 degrees, the rejected inertial sensor(s) will be automatically re-
enabled and the FMS will re-start the computation of the mixed inertial position, track and ground speed.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-29
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 12-30
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 13 - CMA-9000 FMS PAGES - RADIO TUNING

CONTENTS

Subject Page

GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................................13-1
RADIO TUNING LIBRARY .............................................................................................................................13-2
RADIO 1/X or 2/X (Horizontal display format) .............................................................................................13-2
RADIO 2/X PAGE (Horizontal display format).............................................................................................13-9
RADIO 1/X or 2/X (Vertical display format)................................................................................................13-12
RADIO 2/X PAGE (Vertical display format) ...............................................................................................13-16
RADIO TEST X/Y (2/Y or 3/Y or …) PAGE..................................................................................................13-17
RADIO LIBRARY Y/X (2/Y or 3/Y or ...) PAGE............................................................................................13-18
RADIO PWR X/Y (2/Y or 3/Y ...) ...................................................................................................................13-19
NAVIGATION RADIOS (NAV DME RADIO) ................................................................................................13-20
NAVIGATION RADIOS (NAV Page 1/2) ......................................................................................................13-21
NAVIGATION RADIOS (NAV Page 2/2) ......................................................................................................13-22
NAVIGATION RADIOS (ADF RADIO)..........................................................................................................13-23
NAVIGATION RADIOS (ADF Page 1/2).......................................................................................................13-24
NAVIGATION RADIOS (ADF Page 2/2).......................................................................................................13-25
NAVIGATION RADIOS (DF Page 1/1 or 1/2)...............................................................................................13-26
NAVIGATION RADIOS (DF Page 2/2) .........................................................................................................13-30
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (COM RADIO)................................................................................................13-30
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VHF RADIO Page 1/2) .................................................................................13-31
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VHF RADIO Page 2/2) .................................................................................13-32
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (RS-422 FM1 RADIO)....................................................................................13-33
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (RS-422 FM2 RADIO)....................................................................................13-34
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (RS-422 UHF RADIO)....................................................................................13-35
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUHF RADIO) ..............................................................................................13-36
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUF RADIO Page 1/3) – for SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radio...........................13-38
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUF RADIO Page 2/3) – for SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radio...........................13-40
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUF RADIO Page 3/3) – for SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radio...........................13-41
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUF RADIO Page 1/3) – for SRT-651/N-F V/UHF radio ...........................13-42
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUHF RADIO Page 2/3) – for SRT-651/N-F V/UHF radio.........................13-45
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUHF RADIO Page 3/3) – for SRT-651/N-F V/UHF radio.........................13-46
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (HF RADIO) ...................................................................................................13-47
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (HF RADIO Page 1/2)....................................................................................13-47
COMMUNICATION RADIOS (HF RADIO Page 2/2)....................................................................................13-48
TRANSPONDERS (ATC RADIO) .................................................................................................................13-49
TRANSPONDERS (ATC Page 1/2) ..............................................................................................................13-49
TRANSPONDERS (ATC Page 2/2) ..............................................................................................................13-51
IFF TRANSPONDER 1/2...............................................................................................................................13-52
IFF TRANSPONDER 2/2...............................................................................................................................13-53
RADIOS VOLUME 1/1 PAGE .......................................................................................................................13-55
PHONE TOP 1/1............................................................................................................................................13-56
PHONE VOICE CALL 1/2 .............................................................................................................................13-57
PHONE VOICE CALL 2/2 .............................................................................................................................13-59
PHONE READ SMS 1/N ...............................................................................................................................13-61
PHONE SEND SMS 1/3 ................................................................................................................................13-62
PHONE SEND SMS 2/3 ................................................................................................................................13-63

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-i
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 13 - CMA-9000 FMS PAGES - RADIO TUNING

CONTENTS

Subject Page

PHONE SEND SMS 3/3 ................................................................................................................................13-67

PHONE PRECANNED SMS 1/1 ...................................................................................................................13-68
PHONE SMS MESSAGE 1/1 ........................................................................................................................13-70
PHONE STORED SMS 1/1 ...........................................................................................................................13-71
PHONE STORED SMS 1/N...........................................................................................................................13-72
PHONE DIALED TOP 1/N.............................................................................................................................13-73
COM LIBRARY 1/N.......................................................................................................................................13-74
NAV LIBRARY 1/N........................................................................................................................................13-76
ADF LIBRARY 1/N........................................................................................................................................13-77
RS-422 FM1/FM2 LIBRARY 1/N ..................................................................................................................13-78
RS-422 UHF LIBRARY 1/N...........................................................................................................................13-79
VUHF LIBRARY 1/N (SRT-651 V/UHF RADIOS).........................................................................................13-80
PHONE LIBRARY 1/N ..................................................................................................................................13-81
DF LIBRARY 1/N ..........................................................................................................................................13-83
HF LIBRARY 1/N (SRT-170/M2) ..................................................................................................................13-84

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-ii
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 13

CMA-9000 FMS PAGES - RADIO TUNING

NOTE: In the key sequences shown to display the pages, square brackets “[ ]” indicate a function key and
angle brackets “< >“ indicate a line select key (left and right softkeys).

GENERAL

The CMA-9000 FMS offers primary or backup radio tuning of navigation and communication radios. It can
provide tuning for:

• Single or Dual DMEs (Chelton DN-441B, Collins DME-442, or Collins DME-4000)

• Single Collins DME-42
• Single or Dual NAVs (Chelton VN-411B, Collins VIR-432 or Collins NAV-4500)
• Single Collins VIR-32
• Single or Dual ADFs (Chelton DF-431B or Collins ADF-462)
• Single or Dual COMs (Chelton VC-401B, Chelton VC-401C, Collins VHF-422, Collins VHF-4000)
• Single or Dual VUHF radios (Marconi Selenia SRT-651N/A or SRT-651/N-F)
• Single or Dual ATC TRANSPONDERs (Bendix-King MST-67A or Collins TDR-94D)
• Single Audio Management Unit (TEAM)
• Single Direction Finder (Collins DF-430-102)
• Single HF (Collins SRT-170/M2)
• Single IFF Transponder (SELEX Communications M425)

Tuning capabilities include active and standby frequency entry control of all radio modes (including self-test),
and a pilot entered library.

In certain installation architectures supporting multiple FMSs, the crew should attempt to tune the given radio
from any other installed FMS(s) if the original tuning attempt fails. This is valid, for example, when the FMS is
operating in independent mode (as confirmed by the INDEPENDENT OP alert message).

The CMA-9000 FMS provides control and display of the active/standby frequencies and settings of all the radios
interfaced on the RADIO Page. This page provides tuning entries and access to more detailed radio control
pages, where self-test and radio modes can be selected. Upon power-up, the CMA-9000 FMS reads from the
radios their current valid tuned frequencies and settings, or automatically tunes them to the frequencies and
settings used prior to the last power interruption. Two display formats are available for the RADIO top page: a
horizontal or a vertical presentation. In the horizontal display format, the active and standby frequencies are
displayed side by side. In the vertical display format, the active frequency is displayed on top of the standby
frequency.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RADIO TUNING LIBRARY

For pilot convenience, the FMS provides library pages for memorized radio frequencies or channels. There is
one library for each of the following radio types: VHF, V/UHF, COM, NAV and ADF radio types

Library entries consist of the following parameters:

• preset number (mandatory),

• identifier and data (optional),
• frequency or channel (mandatory).

Each library allows for 99 entries. Preset numbers are unique numbers from 1 to 99. The maximum length of the
identifier is 5 characters. Identifiers do not need to be unique, but when tuning by identifier, only the first one
encountered in the library will be used. All libraries are password protected. Scanning and viewing is always
accessible. Changes to a library are allowed only when the library is unlocked.

RADIO 1/X or 2/X (Horizontal display format)

This RADIO top page allows the pilot a variable number and mix of COM, NAV and Surveillance radios
depending on the operational needs (frequently used radios on first page, less used on second and positioned
on any line of a page). COM (VHF), NAV, ADF, VUHF, ATC, DF and Volume Control are supported.

The RADIO 1/X page can be configured as the default cold start power up page of the CMA-9000 FMS.

The RADIO 1/X page is displayed by pressing [RADIO].

The CMA-9000 FMS provides alert mechanisms to inform the pilot of radio failures. Alerts messages are
displayed if radios fail or they are not responding to the tuning request.

General - for all radios the following applies:

Two frequencies/channels are displayed for each radio. When a new frequency/channel is entered, it is placed
to the right of the active frequency, in the stand-by position. The associated line select key toggles the stand-
by/active frequency/channel and vice-versa (when the scratchpad is empty).

The CMA-9000 FMS allows the user to select a frequency by entering one of the following elements in the
scratchpad and pressing the associated line select key:
• a preset number
• the identifier (for NAV radio: from the navigation database as 1st priority and from the radio library as 2nd
priority; for all other radios from the radio library as 1st priority)
• the frequency/channel value

If a valid preset number is entered, the corresponding frequency/channel (from the library) is displayed. Preset
or ident entries have priority over the frequency/channel when entered simultaneously according to the slash
rule (e.g. 01//122.5). In this case the frequency entered will be that of the corresponding preset or ident from the
library.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The CMA-9000 FMS provides a special awareness/status field located above the frequency line. The use of the
special awareness/status field is located in the detailed section of each radio. The status indicates the current
state of the radio.

The special awareness/status field is highlighted in the figure below for a typical radio.

RADIO 2/4
C01 M-SHIP DF C05
1L <VUHF 156.050 ↔ 1 5 6 . 2 5 0 1R

For navigation radios (excluding ATC) the following applies:

The CMA-9000 FMS provides alert mechanisms to inform the pilot of radio failures. Warnings appear if radios
fail or they are not responding to the tuning request.

NOTE: Refer to the specific radio horizontal page description for details.

The CMA-9000 FMS displays all tuned active frequencies in large white font. During the tuning process the
active frequencies are displayed in large inverse white font. If the tuning operation is not successful they are
displayed in small amber font as a warning to the pilot.

The CMA-9000 FMS can be configured to allow burst tuning; either by CMA-9000 Display Panel entry or by a
dedicated radio control head.

The operating frequencies for the Navigation radios are defined in each respective radio section. The CMA-9000
FMS does not accept values out of range. An error message will appear in the scratchpad, if invalid entries are
made by the user.

In some installations, the tuning can be achieved either from the FMS or from a backup controller. If the radio
tuning is disabled from the FMS, entries made to the NAV or ADF radio(s) will generate an entry advisory
message (!RADIO TUNING DISABLED) to inform the pilot that he may no longer tune these radios from the
CMA-9000 FMS.

For communication radios the following applies:

A frequency or channel can be selected by entering the desired value in the scratchpad and pressing the
associated line select key. These radios do not provide tuning validation.

The CMA-9000 FMS does not require trailing/leading zeros for frequency entry.

Generally, the CMA-9000 FMS displays all tuned active frequencies in large white font. During the tuning
process the active frequencies are displayed in large inverse white font. If the tuning operation is not successful
they are displayed in small amber font as a warning to the pilot. Exceptions to these are indicated within each
specific radio section.

In some installations, the tuning can be achieved either from the FMS or from a backup controller. If the radio
tuning is disabled from the FMS, entries made to the COM radio(s) will generate an entry advisory message
(!RADIO TUNING DISABLED) to inform the pilot that he may no longer tune these radios from the CMA-9000
FMS.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Operating Frequencies and Ranges:

The operating frequencies for the Navigation and Communication radios are shown in the table below. An error
message will appear in the scratchpad if invalid entries are made.

RADIO LOWER LIMIT UPPER LIMIT INCREMENT

VOR/ILS/ DME 108.00 MHz 117.95 MHz 50 kHz

(VOR/ILS) 135.95 (DME)
ADF 100.0 kHz 2181.0 1899.0 kHz (See Note 2) 0.5 kHz
MHz 2183.0 kHz
or or
190.0 kHz 1799.0 kHz
2179.0 kHz 2185.0 kHz

RADIO LOWER LIMIT UPPER LIMIT INCREMENT

TRANSPONDER 0 (octal) 7777 (octal) 1
COM 118.000 MHz 135.975 MHz 25 kHz
136.975 MHz (see Note 3)
151.975 MHz (see Note 1)
COM 118.000 MHz 136.975 MHz 25/8.33 kHz
151.990 MHz (see Note 1) (see Notes 3 & 4) or
8.33 kHz
(see Note 4)
UHF 225.000 MHz 399.975 MHz 25 kHz

RADIO LOWER LIMIT UPPER LIMIT INCREMENT

TACAN (CH) 0 X, 0 Y B6X, B6Y 252 channel
TACAN (TX) 1025 MHz 1150 MHz 50 kHz
TACAN (RX) 926 MHz 1213 MHz 50 kHz

RADIO LOWER LIMIT UPPER LIMIT INCREMENT

DF 30.000 Mhz 87.975 Mhz 25 Khz
DF 108.000 Mhz 173.975 Mhz 25 Khz
DF 225.000 Mhz 399.975 Mhz 25 kHz
DF 401.650 MHz(ARGOS)
DF 406 Mhz band (COSPAS / SARSAT)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The CMA-9000 FMS also provides with the capability to tune V/UHF radios. For a frequency in the VHF band,
the CMA-9000 FMS sets the modulation mode depending on the frequency band. For frequency in the UHF
band, the modulation mode is selectable by the user. The modulation mode and the frequency ranges to be
used are given in the following table.

FREQ BAND LOWER LIMIT UPPER LIMIT MODULATION

VHF 30.000 MHz 87.975 MHz FM
VHF (RX only) 108.000 MHz 117.975 MHz AM
VHF 118.000 MHz 136.990MHz AM
VHF 137.000 MHz 155.975 MHz AM
VHF (Maritime Band 156.000 MHz 173.975 MHz FM
– see Note 5)
UHF 225.000 MHz 399.975 MHz AM or FM

NOTES:
(1) The upper limit of the COM radio is configurable. The possible values are 135.975, 136.975, 136.990 and
151.975 MHz.
(2) The legal range is from 190 kHz to 1860 kHz but the radio can tune outside this range. The performance is
not guaranteed for those frequencies. In addition the radio may tune from 2181 kHz to 2183 kHz for marine
distress frequencies.
(3) The COM radio frequencies with increments of 25 kHz
(4) The upper limit of the COM radio frequencies with increments of 8.33 kHz.
(5) Certain frequencies in the maritime band (156.000 - 173.975) can also be tuned by entering the
corresponding maritime channel number, e.g. for those frequencies which have an associated maritime
channel. When in the maritime mode, the FMS automatically commands the +/- 4.6 KHz spacing and the
radio will 'listen' on the offset frequency if such an associated offset exists for the entered maritime channel.
When the operator chooses to command a frequency instead of a maritime channel within this band, the +/-
4.6 KHz maritime offset request is not commanded by the FMS.
(6) All values in table are inclusive.

The CMA-9000 FMS also provides with the capability to tune HF radios with the following frequency ranges:

FREQ BAND LOWER LIMIT UPPER LIMIT

HF 2000.0 KHz 29999.9 KHz

Horizontal RADIO Page Type (VHF1, VHf2, NAV1, NAV2, ATC1, VOL):

RADIO 1/4
04 05
1L
<VHF1 118.400 ↔ 125.150
1R
-- --
2L <VHF2 151.000 ↔ 1 2 4 . 6 5 0 2R
YJN A ----
3L <NAV1 115.80 ↔ 1 1 6 . 7 0 3R
YUL 109.30H YQB
4L <NAV2 116.30 ↔ 1 1 2 . 8 0 4R
SBY
5L <ATC1 2200 ↔ 1500 5R
CTL C1 C2 IC N1 N2
6L <VOL FMS 7 6 4 3 3 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RADIO 1/4
04 05
1L <VHF1 118.400 ↔ 125.150
1R
-- --
2L <VHF2 151.000 ↔ 1 2 4 . 6 5 0 2R
YJN A ----
3L <NAV1 115.80 ↔ 1 1 6 . 7 0 3R
YUL YQB
4L <NAV2 116.30 ↔ 1 1 2 . 8 0 4R
SBY
5L <ATC1 2200 ↔ 1500 5R
CTL C1 C2 IC N1 N2
6L <VOL FMS 7 6 4 3 3 6R

RADIO 1/4
04 05
1L
<VHF1 118.400 ↔ 125.150
1R
-- --
2L <VHF2 151.000 ↔ 124.650
2R
YJN A ----
3L <NAV1 115.80 ↔ 116.70 3R
YUL YQB
4L <NAV2 116.30 ↔ 112.80 4R
SBY
5L <ATC1 2200 ↔ 1500 5R
SBY
6L <IFF 2200 ↔ 1500 6R

Page displayed when IFF power is set to OFF from the RADIO PWR page.

RADIO 1/4
04 05
1L
<VHF1 118.400 ↔ 125.150
1R
-- --
2L <VHF2 151.000 ↔ 124.650
2R
YJN A ----
3L <NAV1 115.80 ↔ 116.70
3R
YUL YQB
4L <NAV2 116.30 ↔ 112.80 4R
SBY
5L <ATC1 2200 ↔ 1500 5R
OFF
6L IFF ---- ↔ ---- 6R

NOTE: The page layout can differ based on the number of radios installed and on which line they are
configured. There may be empty lines. If more than 6 radios are configured, another RADIO top page
2/x will be available. The acronyms of some type of radios are configurable items.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NOTE: It is also possible; for certain HF and V/UHF radios, to configure an external discrete which would inhibit
access to the dedicated radio’s FMS control pages. In such cases, FMS NOT IN CTRL will be displayed in
the field where the radio’s tuning information is normally displayed on this RADIO page. Access to the HF
and V/UHF dedicated radio pages is inhibited by removing the caret next to the radio’s name (as seen in
the example above at LSK3L and 4L).
When radio control is restored to the FMS for any of these radios, the HF and/or V/UHF’s the
settings/selections were made on the alternate control panel(s) will be reflected on the FMS.

The frequency becomes amber when unable to tune a radio.

The area of the RADIO 1/X page located between the preset/ident fields (e.g. just above the are
reserved for special awareness information pertaining to the specific radio(s).
Additionally, this area will display the FMS commanded radio power status for the IFF transponders
(e.g. text showing “OFF” will be displayed in the special awareness field when the IFF power control is
selected to OFF).

Details pertaining to a radio’s specific special awareness field are captured in the dedicated radio’s
section.

VHF1 [1L]: Access to the VHF1 radio page.

VHF2 [2L]: Access to the VHF2 radio page.

VHF1 [1R]: Display and modify the VHF active and standby frequencies/presets. Entry may be made to the
standby position only when a new value is in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad is empty it toggles active/standby
frequencies.

VHF2 [2R]: Display and modify the VHF active and standby frequencies/presets. Entry may be made to the
standby position only when a new value is in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad is empty it toggles active/standby
frequencies.

NAV1 [3L]: Access to the NAV1 radio page.

NAV2 [4L]: Access to the NAV2 radio page.

NAV1 [3R]: Display and modify the NAV active and standby frequencies/ident/preset. Entry may be made to the
standby position only when a new value is in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad is empty it toggles active/standby
frequencies.
When auto-tuning mode is active, an inverse video ‘A’ is displayed next to the active ident/preset. Auto-tuning
mode is entered by assigning “DELETE” (press the [CLR] key) to the NAV1 standby frequency. Returning to
manual tuning mode requires “DELETE” (press the [CLR] key) to be assigned to the NAV1 standby frequency or
swapping of the active and standby NAV1 frequencies.

NAV2 [4R]: Display and modify the NAV active and standby frequencies/ident/ presets. Entry may be made to
the standby position only when a new value is in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad is empty it toggles
active/standby frequencies.
When auto-tuning mode is active, an inverse video ‘A’ is displayed next to the active ident/preset. Auto-tuning
mode is entered by assigning “DELETE” (press the [CLR] key) to the NAV2 standby frequency. Returning to
manual tuning mode requires [“DELETE” (press the [CLR] key) to be assigned to the NAV2 standby frequency or
swapping of the active and standby NAV2 frequencies.

ATCx [5L]: Access to the ATC radio page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ATCx [5R]: Used to display and modify the ATC active and standby codes from the current active transponder
or from the last active transponder when toggled back to standby mode. Default value will be the primary
transponder at power-up (cold start) when both transponders are in standby mode.

NOTE: ATC Radio equipment name can be configured as “ATC”, “TPDR” or “XPDR". The case displayed
above is the “ATC” configuration.

When configured to prevent FMS tuning of the ATC transponder (ATC CONFIG 2/X LSK 5R) and the
MC_FAILED discrete input indicates that the Mission Computer is active, it will reject any data entry or
modification of the data (e.g. standby code) by displaying !MC IN CONTROL data advisory scratchpad
message.

VOL [6L]: Access to the Volume Control page when the FMS has control of the AMU.

VOL [6R]: Provides information as to which equipment (FMS/MC) has control over the AMU and displays the
specific radio volume level.

NOTE: The Volume control and status location can differ based on the number of radios and operator display
configuration preferences. [1L] / [2L] / [3L] / [4L] / [5L] are other possibilities where the Volume Control
could be located.
The following acronyms are used: CTL=Controller, C1=COM1, C2=COM2, IC=InterCom, N1=NAV1,
N2=NAV2.

IFF [6L]: Access to the IFF radio page. When IFF power is set to off from the RADIO PWR page, this line select
key is disabled (IFF radio page cannot be accessed).

IFF [6R]: Used to display and modify the IFF active and standby Mode 3/A codes. Additionally, it is used to
display the master mode status and the mode 1-2-S and C. Line selection of this field is disabled when IFF
power is set to OFF from the RADIO PWR page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RADIO 2/X PAGE (Horizontal display format)

Press [RADIO] [NEXT] to display RADIO 2/X page.

The RADIO 2/4 page is only available when configured.

RADIO 2/4
04 05
1L <VUF1 243.000 ↔ 121.500 1R
16 06
2L <VUF2 156.800 ↔ 156.300 2R
01 --
3L <ADF1 407.0 ↔ 343.5 3R
07 08
4L <ADF2 333.0 ↔ 222.5 4R

5L 5R
<HF 12000.0↔ 6844.5
-- SDETECTED --
6L 6R
<DF SCAN 145.875

RADIO 2/4
04 05
1L <VUF1 243.000 ↔ 121.500 1R
16 06
2L <VUF2 156.800 ↔ 156.300 2R
01 --
3L <ADF1 407.0 ↔ 343.5 3R
07 08
4L <ADF2 333.0 ↔ 222.5 4R

5L 5R
<HF 12000.0 ↔ 6844.5
-- --
6L 6R
<DF SCAN 145.875

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Single SRT-651/N-F V/UHF radio configured in Maritime SHIP and DF modes active. Also, HF radio being
control by alternate cockpit control panel:
RADIO 2/4
C01 M-SHIP DF C05
1L <VUHF 156.050 ↔ 1 5 6 . 2 5 0 1R
-- OFF --
2L <DF SCAN 145.875 2R
01 --
3L <ADF1 407.0 ↔ 343.5 3R
07 08
4L <ADF2 333.0 ↔ 222.5 4R

5L 5R
HF FMS NOT IN CTRL

6L 6R

Single SRT-651/N-F V/UHF radio configured - GUARD activated:

RADIO 2/4
-- GUARD 25
1L <VUHF 121.500 ↔ 1 2 5 . 0 5 0 1R
-- OFF --
2L <DF SCAN 145.875 2R
01 --
3L <ADF1 407.0 ↔ 343.5 3R
07 08
4L <ADF2 333.0 ↔ 222.5 4R

5L 5R
HF FMS NOT IN CTRL

6L 6R

Single SRT-651/N-F V/UHF radio configured - Emergency 243 Guard Precedence activated while DF mode on:

RADIO 2/4
-- EMER DF 25
1L <VUHF 243.000 ↔ 1 2 5 . 0 5 0 1R
-- OFF --
2L <DF SCAN 145.875 2R
01 --
3L <ADF1 407.0 ↔ 343.5 3R
07 08
4L <ADF2 333.0 ↔ 222.5 4R

5L 5R
HF FMS NOT IN CTRL

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Single SRT-651/N-F V/UHF radio configured - V/UHF not being controlled by FMS:
RADIO 2/4
1L VUHF FMS NOT IN CTRL 1R
-- OFF --
2L <DF SCAN 145.875 2R
01 --
3L <ADF1 407.0 ↔ 343.5 3R
07 08
4L <ADF2 333.0 ↔ 222.5 4R

5L 5R
HF FMS NOT IN CTRL

6L 6R

NOTE: The page layout can differ based on the number of radios installed and on which line they are
configured. There may be empty lines. If more than 6 radios are configured, another RADIO top page
2/x will be available. The acronym of some type of radios are configurable items.

VUF1 [1L] or VUHF [1L]: Access to the VUF1 (or VUHF) radio page.

NOTE: If a single V/UHF is installed the radio’s name can be configured to be shown as “VUHF” (this is seen is
several of the above pictures).

VUF2 [2L]: Access to the VUF2 radio page.

VUF1 [1L] or VUHF [1R]: Display and modify the VUF1 (or VUHF) active and standby frequencies/presets.

For the SRT-651/N-F radio, the possible status field indications are:
• EMER (in inverse white video): indicates Emergency 243 Guard Precedence is commanded
• GUARD (in inverse white video): indicates guard frequency is being tuned
• M-CST (normal white video): indicates maritime coast is active
• M-SHIP (normal white video): indicates maritime ship is active
• DF (normal white video): indicates V/UHF direction finder mode has been commanded ON

NOTE: EMER, GUARD, M-CST, and M-SHIP all appear in the same location in the status field and are thus
mutually exclusive of each other. The display priority of EMER and GUARD is higher than that of M-CST
and M-SHIP.

VUF2 [2R]: Display and modify the VUF2 active and standby frequencies/presets.

ADF1 [3L]: Access to the ADF1 radio page.

ADF2 [4L]: Access to the ADF2 radio page.

ADF1 [3R]: Display and modify the ADF active and standby frequencies/presets.

ADF2 [4R]: Display and modify the ADF active and standby frequencies/presets.

HF [5L]: Access to the HF radio page.

HF [5R]: Display and modify the HF active and standby frequencies/ident/preset.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DF [6L]: Access to the DF radio page.

NOTE: This prompt is shown at LSK 2L in several of the above pictures.

DF [6R]: Display and modify the DF active and standby frequencies/identifier/preset.

NOTE: This prompt is shown at LSK 2R in several of the above pictures.

RADIO 1/X or 2/X (Vertical display format)

This page allows the pilot to verify and modify the active frequencies for the COM, NAV, ADF, ATC, FM1(Fug8),
FM2(Fug9), UHF and/or VUHF (SRT-651/N-A only) radios.

The RADIO 1/X page can be configured as the default cold start power up page of the CMA-9000 FMS.

The RADIO 1/X page is displayed by pressing [RADIO].

NOTE: The actual page generated by the system will depend on the Radio Equipment installed and configured
as well as the configured radio names.

General - for all radios the following applies:

Two frequencies/channels are displayed for each radio. When a new frequency/channel is entered, it is placed
below the active frequency, in the stand-by position. The associated line select key toggles the stand-by/active
frequency/channel and vice-versa (when the scratchpad is empty).

The CMA-9000 FMS allows the user to select a frequency by entering one of the following elements in the
scratchpad and pressing the associated line select key:
• a preset number
• the identifier (for NAV radio: from the navigation database as 1st priority and from the radio library as 2nd
priority; for all other radios from the radio library as 1st priority)
• the frequency/channel value

If a valid preset number is entered, the corresponding frequency/channel (from the library) is displayed. Preset
or ident entries have priority over the frequency/channel when entered simultaneously according to the slash
rule (e.g. 01//122.5). In this case the frequency entered will be that of the corresponding preset or ident from the
library.

The CMA-9000 FMS allows the user to select the previous/next preset from the library by entering '+' or '-' in the
scratchpad and pressing the associated softkey.

The CMA-9000 FMS provides frequency/channel validation by verifying the user requested frequency/channel
matches the radio feedback frequency/channel.

NOTE: Refer to the specific radio horizontal page description for details.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

For navigation radios (excluding ATC) the following applies:

The CMA-9000 FMS provides alert mechanisms to inform the pilot of radio failures. Warnings appear if radios
fail or they are not responding to the tuning request.

NOTE: Refer to the specific radio horizontal page description for details.

The CMA-9000 FMS displays all tuned active frequencies in large white font. During the tuning process the
active frequencies are displayed in large inverse white font. If the tuning operation is not successful they are
displayed in small amber font as a warning to the pilot.

The CMA-9000 FMS can be configured to allow burst tuning; either by CMA-9000 Display Panel entry or by a
dedicated radio control head.

The operating frequencies for the Navigation radios are defined in each respective radio section. The CMA-9000
FMS does not accept values out of range. An error message will appear in the scratchpad, if invalid entries are
made by the user.

In some installation, the tuning can be achieved either from the FMS or from a backup controller. If the radio
tuning is disabled from the FMS, entries made to the NAV or ADF radio(s) will generate an entry advisory
message (!RADIO TUNING DISABLED) to inform the pilot that he may no longer tune these radios from the
CMA-9000 FMS.

For communication radios the following applies:

A frequency or channel can be selected by entering the desired value in the scratchpad and pressing the
associated line select key. These radios do not provide tuning validation.

The CMA-9000 FMS does not require trailing/leading zeros for frequency entry.

In some installations, radio tuning can be achieved either from the FMS or from a backup controller. If the radio
tuning is disabled from the FMS, entries made to the COM radio(s) will generate an entry advisory message
(!RADIO TUNING DISABLED) to inform the pilot that he may no longer tune these radios from the CMA-9000
FMS.

For the V/UHF radio, the following applies:

The user interface for the VUHF radio is the same as that of the regular communication radios as described
above but with the following additional features/differences:

In some installations, radio tuning can be achieved either from the FMS or from a backup controller. If the radio
tuning is disabled from the FMS, entries made to the V/UHF radio(s) will inhibit V/UHF page access as well as
generating a data entry error message (!FMS NOT IN CONTROL) in order to inform the pilot that he may no
longer tune these radios from the CMA-9000 FMS.

For frequency in the VHF band, CMA-9000 FMS sets the modulation mode depending on the frequency band.
For frequency in the UHF band, the modulation mode is selectable by the user. The modulation mode and the
frequency ranges to be used are given in the following table.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Radio Models Frequency / Channel Range Channel Spacing Band / Modulation

(MHz) (KHz)

SRT-651/N-A 30.000 - 87.975 108.000 - 25 VHF/FM

or 117.975 25 VHF/AM
SRT-651/N-F 118.000 - 155.975 25 VHF/AM
156.000 - 173.975 25 or 25/8.33* VHF/FM
225.000 - 399.975 25 UHF/AM/FM
400.000 - 469.975** 25 UHF/FM

* Channel spacing is configurable.

** This range only available for SRT-651/N-A radio.

RADIO PAGE Type (COM, NAV, ATC, ADF, FM1, FM2, UHF):

RADIO 1/3
COM1 122.075 128.050C O M 2
Ú 128.050 125.000 Ú
1L 1R
NAV1 114.35 109.05 NAV2
2L Ú 108.50 111.00AUTOÚ
2R
ATC1 5739 109.0 A D F 1
3L ÚC 1211 2182.0 ANTÚ 3R
FM1 350LS 60LS F M 2
4L Ú 119LS 61LS Ú 4R
250.050 U H F
5L 399.975 Ú 5R

6L <PHONE RADIO DETAILS> 6R

NOTE: Page layout can differ based on configured items and position of respective configured items.

RADIO PAGE Type (COM, NAV, ATC, ADF, VUHF*):

* Only SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radio variant can be configured in vertical radio page layout.

RADIO 1/3
C O M 1 122.075 128.050C O M 2
1L Ú 128.050 125.000 Ú
1R
N A V 1 114.35 109.05 N A V 2
2L HOLD108.50 111.00AUTOÚ
2R
A T C 1 7777 109.0 A D F 1
3L ÚC 1211 2182.0 BFOÚ
3R
VUHF 225.000
4L Ú 399.975 4R

5L 5R

6L <PHONE RADIO DETAILS> 6R

NOTE: XX below is based on the configured position of each radio. It can be anything between 1L to 5L or 1R
to 5R.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COM1/2 [XX]: Display and modify the active and standby frequencies/channels of the COM1/COM2 radio. Entry
may be made to the standby position only when a new value is in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad is empty it
toggles active/standby frequencies/channels. If the transmit mode activation (e.g. push-to-talk) is installed, the
frequency/channel is displayed in reverse video black font on green background.

NOTE: Name may differ (COM vs VHF) based on configured name.

NAV1/2 [XX]: Display and modify the active and standby frequencies of the NAV1/NAV2 radio(s). Entry may be
made to the standby position only when a new value is in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad is empty it toggles
active/standby frequencies. When auto-tuning mode is active, an inverse video 'AUTO' is displayed below to the
NAV1/NAV2 fixed caption prompt. Returning to manual tuning mode requires 'DELETE' (press the [CLR] key) to
be assigned to the NAV1/NAV2 standby frequency or swapping of the active and standby NAV1/NAV2
frequencies. When a DME hold is set (via the NAV radio page), an inverse video 'HOLD' is displayed below to
the NAV1/NAV2 fixed caption prompt. Also, when DME hold is set, the double arrow toggle prompt disappears
to indicate that if an entry is made, the entered frequency will correspond to the active frequency (e.g. not the
standby), this is because the frequency displayed next to the HOLD prompt is the hold frequency.

ATC1/2 [XX]: Display and modify active and standby ident of the active ATC radio (in a dual installation). Entry
may be made to the standby position only when a new value is in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad is empty it
toggles between active/standby idents. Also displays the Transponder mode (C= Altitude mode on, blank=
Altitude mode off) below the fixed caption ATC field. When the [SQK/IDT] key is pressed the active Ident code
will be displayed in inverse green for the duration of the Squawk (18 seconds). During the duration of the
squawk, the CMA-9000 FMS is inhibit the toggle operation. If the transponder is in standby, an inverse video
'SBY' is displayed below the fixed caption ATC field.

NOTE: Name may differ (ATC vs TPDR vs XPDR) based on configured name.

ADF1/2 [XX]: Display and modify the active and standby frequencies of the ADF1 or ADF2 radio. Entry may be
made to the standby position only when a new value is in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad is empty it toggles
active/standby frequencies. The ADF mode will be displayed in normal white font below the field ADF. Possible
values are: ADF, ANT, BFO. The BFO status has priority over ADF and ANT.

FM1/2 [XX]: Display and modify the active and standby frequencies of the FM1 / FM2 radio. Entry may be made
to the standby position only when a new value is in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad is empty it toggles
active/standby frequencies. The value displayed starts with the channel (no leading zero), followed by the band
(L for lower and U for upper), and followed by the mode (D for duplex, S for simplex, R for relay).

UHF [XX]: Display and modify the active and standby frequencies of the UHF radio. Entry may be made to the
standby position only when a new value is in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad is empty it toggles active/standby
frequencies.

PHONE [6L]: Access to the PHONE TOP 1/1 page (if PHONE or HCS is configured).

RADIO DETAILS [6R]: Access to the RADIO DETAILS page.

NOTE: This is equivalent of pressing the NEXT key while viewing the RADIO 1/3 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-15
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RADIO 2/X PAGE (Vertical display format)

Press [RADIO] [NEXT] to display RADIO 2/X page.

NOTE: This page is only available in the vertical configuration of radio top page.
RADIO 2/3

1L
<COM1 COM2> 1R

2L <NAV1 NAV2> 2R

3L <ATC1 ADF1> 3R

4L <FM1 FM2> 4R

5L UHF> 5R

6L <PHONE TOP 6R

NOTE: The presentation above may differ. It is based on the configured position and names of each radio. The
term XX below can be anything between 1L to 5L or 1R to 5R.

COM1 [XX]: Access to the COM page (if configured).

NAV1 [XX]: Access to the NAV page (if configured).

ATC1 [XX]: Access to the ATC page (if configured).

FM1 [XX]: Access to the FM1 page (if configured).

PHONE TOP [6L]: Access to the PHONE TOP 1/1 page (if PHONE or HCS is configured).

COM2 [XX]: Access to the COM page (if configured).

NAV2 [XX]: Access to the NAV page (if configured).

ADF1 [XX]: Access to the ADF page (if configured).

FM2 [XX]: Access to the FM2 page (if configured).

UHF [XX]: Access to the UHF page (if configured)

VUHF [XX]: Not shown. Access to the VUHF page (if configured).
Only SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radio variant can be configured in vertical radio page layout.

ATC2 [XX]: Not shown. Access to the ATC page (if configured).

ADF2 [XX]: Not shown. Access to the ADF page (if configured).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RADIO TEST X/Y (2/Y or 3/Y or …) PAGE

The RADIO top pages and RADIO TEST pages are configurable. However, the radio names (same acronyms
as on the RADIO top pages) that appear are the ones whose self-test capability have been configured.

The RADIO TEST page can be available while the aircraft is on the ground (for preflight check and setup) or can
be always available. The selection is done via a configuration option. When configured to be only visible on the
ground, this page is removed from the top-level menu after take-off. When configured to be always visible, the
RADIO TEST page is always visible from the top-level menu but the prompt TEST ALL disappears after take-off.
Individual radio library and self-test functions are always accessible from the specific radio equipment.

Press [RADIO], [NEXT], [NEXT] (When only one RADIO top page is configured) OR
[RADIO], [NEXT], [NEXT], [NEXT]... (When more than one Radio top page is configured) OR
[RADIO], [RADIO], [RADIO]... (When the "Next Keys" is Configured to "Yes" in the "Display Config"
maintenance page).

NOTE: The page number is based on the number of RADIO top page(s).

Unless accessed for the first time the page may display the results of radio test previously done. Pressing the
corresponding LSK brings the radio test states to READY.

The RADIO TEST Y/X page provides the capability of initiating self-tests on the radios.

RADIO TEST 3/4

VHF1 VHF2
1L
>READY READY< 1R
VUF1 VUF2
2L >READY READY< 2R
ATC1 ATC2
3L >READY READY< 3R
NAV1 NAV2
4L >READY READY< 4R
DME1 DME2
5L >READY READY< 5R

6L TEST ALL> 6R

NOTE: The page layout can differ based on the radios equipment installed as well as the configured radio
names

Toggle options for test status are READY, CONFIRM?, INIT, STARTED. Pressing LSK the first time causes
CONFIRM? to appear the second press initiates the tests. Test result is: PASS or FAIL or TIMEOUT. Pressing for
the third timerestores the display to READY.

VHF1 TEST [xL] and VHF2 TEST [xR]: Displays VHF test status & results.

VUF1 TEST [xL] and VUF2 TEST [xR]: Displays VUHF test status & results.

ATC1 TEST [xL] and ATC2 TEST [xR]: Displays ATC test status & results.

NAV1 TEST [xL] and NAV2 TEST [xR]: Displays NAV test status & results.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-17
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DME1 TEST [xL] and DME2 TEST [xR]: Displays DME test status & results.

Where x = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.

Other radios not shown in the figure that can be configured are:
DF, COM, ADF, VUHF.

TEST ALL [6R]: Executes the test (only available when the aircraft is on-ground) for all the listed radios on the
RADIO TEST x/y pages. Pressing the LSK the first time causes CONFIRM? to appear besides each radio LSK.
Pressing the LSK again cause the test to start. The status and test result appear beside each radio's LSK.

CLEAR ALL [6R]: Clears all test results (only available when the aircraft is on-ground).

RADIO LIBRARY Y/X (2/Y or 3/Y or ...) PAGE

The RADIO LIBRARY pages are also configurable and only available while the aircraft is on the ground for
preflight check and setup. After takeoff, they are not required anymore and are removed from the top-level
menu. The RADIO page(s) numbering is then updated accordingly. Individual radio library and self-test functions
are then accessible from the specific radio equipment. Hence, the RADIO page(s) numbering (X/Y) will vary
depending on the number of radios installed, function configured, and phase of flight.

Press [RADIO], [NEXT] (When only one RADIO top page is configured) or,
[RADIO] [NEXT], [NEXT],(When more than one RADIO top page is configured).

The RADIO LIBRARY Y/X page provides capability to access the different radios library.

Entries are only allowed when the library is unlocked. If the library is locked, viewing and scrolling is still
permitted.

RADIO LIBRARY 4/4

1L
<VHF DF> 1R

2L <VUF FM1> 2R

3L <NAV FM2> 3R

4L <ADF UHF> 4R

5L PHONE> 5R
PASSWORD LIBRARY
6L ----- LOCKED< 6R

NOTE: The page layout can differ based on the number of radios installed and on which line they are
configured. There may be empty lines. The acronyms of some type of radios are configurable items.

VHF [1L]: Access to the VHF LIBRARY 1/N page.

VUF [2L]: Access to the VUF LIBRARY 1/N page.

NAV [3L]: Access to the NAV LIBRARY 1/N page.

ADF [4L]: Access to the ADF LIBRARY 1/N page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-18
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DF [1R]: Access to the DF LIBRARY 1/N page.

FM1 [2R]: Access to the FM1 LIBRARY 1/N page.

FM2 [3R]: Access to the FM2 LIBRARY 1/N page.

UHF [4R]: Access to the UHF LIBRARY 1/N page.

PHONE [5R]: Access to the PHONE LIBRARY 1/N page.

PASSWORD [6L]: Unlocks the library pages to allow data entries. Enter the password in the scratchpad and press
the sixth left line select key to unlock library. The password is changed by, entering the old password followed by a
slash and the new password in the scratchpad (e.g. old password/new password). The range of the password is
an integer value from 0 to 32767.

LIBRARY [6R]: Lock the library when it is unlocked by pressing [6R]. If the library is already locked pressing [6R]
has no effect.

RADIO PWR X/Y (2/Y or 3/Y ...)

The RADIO PWR page provides the capability of controlling specific radio power state or all radio power states
at once.
Display and access to the RADIO PWR page will only be available when at least one radio power control is
configured and the aircraft is on the ground.

Press [RADIO], [NEXT] (When only one top RADIO page and no RADIO TEST page displayed) or,
[RADIO], [NEXT], [NEXT] (When only one top RADIO page and one RADIO TEST page displayed) or,
[RADIO], [NEXT], [NEXT], [NEXT] (When two top RADIO pages and one RADIO TEST page displayed) or,
[RADIO], [NEXT], [NEXT], [NEXT], [NEXT] (When two top RADIO pages and two RADIO TEST page are
displayed) or,

NOTES:
• If configured, pressing [RADIO] acts as if the [NEXT] key is pressed.
• The IFF, if configured, is the only radio that can be power controlled by the FMS.
• The page number is based on the number of RADIO top page(s) and RADIO TEST page(s).

RADIO PWR 4/5

IFF PWR
1L >ON 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L ALL OFF< 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-19
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RADIO PWR 4/5

IFF PWR
1L >OFF 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L >ALL ON 6R

NOTE: The page layout can differ based on the radios equipment, configured radio names and assigned power
control.

IFF PWR [1L]: Toggles IFF power status for the IFF transponder. The possible values are OFF or ON.

ALL ON [6L]: Provides the capability of setting the power status to ON for all the specific radios displayed in the
RADIO PWR page.

NOTE: This prompt is not displayed when all the radios shown on the RADIO PWR page(s) are ON.

ALL OFF [6R]: Provides the capability of setting the power status to OFF for all the specific radios displayed in
the RADIO PWR page.

NOTE: This prompt is not displayed when all the radios shown on the RADIO PWR page(s) are OFF.

NAVIGATION RADIOS (NAV DME RADIO)

NOTE: NAV Radio equipment name can be configured as “NAV”, “VOR” or “VIR”.

The FMS will support the following NAV and DME Radios in the frequency range and channel spacing specified
below:

RADIO MODEL FREQUENCY RANGE CHANNEL SPACING NOTE

BK DM-441B 108.00 – 117.95 MHz 50 KHz -
RC DME-442 108.00 – 117.95 MHz 50 KHz -
RC DME-4000 108.00 – 117.95 MHz 50 KHz -
RC DME-42 108.00 – 117.95 MHz 50 KHz -

NOTE: The CMA-9000 FMS does not accept out of range values. An error message will appear in the
scratchpad if invalid entries are made by the user. If the FMS has been disable for radio tuning via a
discrete input, entries made to these radios will generate an error message "RADIO TUNING
DISABLED” to inform the pilot that he may no longer tune this radio from the FMS.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-20
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAVIGATION RADIOS (NAV Page 1/2)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the NAV and DME radios by transmitting and receiving digital
labels capable of controlling up to 2 NAV and 2 DME radios.

Display the first NAV 1/2 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <NAV#> or [RADIO],
[NEXT], <NAV#> or [RADIO], [RADIO]*, <NAV#>.

Display the first NAV 1/2 page from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <NAV#> or [RADIO],
<RADIO DETAILS>, <NAV#> or [RADIO], [RADIO]*, <NAV#>.

NAV 1/2
NAV1 NAV2
b111.90 I Z Z Y U L 116.30b
1L 1R
116.70---- ----112.80
o
2L LOC: RAD: 180o
2R

3L 3R
DME1 HOLD DME2 HOLD
4L >OFF OFF< 4R
DME: 130N M DME:12.0N M
5L 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

NOTE: NAV Radio equipment name can be configured as “NAV”, “VOR” or “VIR". The case displayed above is
the “NAV” configuration.

NOTE: The NAV and DME ident suffix "x" (e.g. NAV, NAV1...) and the side (left or right) where the NAV/DME
units appear is depending on the installation configuration.
* The FMS can be configured so that pressing the RADIO key successively toggles through RADIO
page Y/X.

NAV1 [1L]: Display and modify active/standby NAV frequency, ident and preset of the NAV1 radio. If configured,
the crew has the option to activate or deactivate the VOR auto-tuning mode. The crew may be presented to the
right of the title of this prompt, the text “AUTO” or “MAN” (as a function of what has been configured) to highlight
whether or not the VOR auto-tuning mode is activated or not.

Toggling between auto-tuning and manual tuning can be achieved by selecting and entering “DELETE” (press
the [CLR] key) to the NAV1 standby frequency. Returning to manual tuning mode can alternately be achieved by
swapping the active and standby NAV1 frequencies. Once the switch to automatic occurs the active frequency
will be replaced by a frequency selected automatically and the manually entered frequency will be lost.

NOTE: ILS ident validation within the FMS occurs by referencing the Recommended Navaid embedded within
the approach procedure since validation of the station’s Morse code ident is not available to the FMS.

NAV2 [1R]: Same as above, but referencing NAV2 instead of NAV1.

NOTE: If the NAV function is set to MANUAL, the tuning selection indicator is disabled.

LOC/RAD [2L], [2R]: Depending on the active frequency, the following is displayed:
• NAV VOR radial when VOR frequency is tuned; or
• NAV LOCalizer course when a LOCalizer frequency is tuned.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-21
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DME HOLD [4L], [4R]: Toggles DME hold status for the DME radio (not applicable for the VIR-31). The possible
values are OFF and ON. For the VIR-32/DME-42 radio installation, this field is used as a status field only which
means it cannot be toggled.

DME [5L], [5R]: Displays the DME slant range when VOR or LOCalizer frequency is tuned.

NOTE:
• When valid feedback is received, the DME distance field will show the slant range distance associated to
the DME frequency in small white font. If no distance is received for an otherwise valid frequency (e.g. due
to the station being out of range) this field will be blank. If the feedback from the DME receiver is not valid
(e.g. fail condition), **** is displayed in the slant range field.
• When DME hold is set to ON the system transfers the active preset and frequency to the NAV HOLD slot
and freezes the DME tuning to this frequency. After DME hold has been initiated the active preset and
VOR/ILS frequency can be changed but this will not affect DME tuning.
• Modification of active and standby frequencies is as described for RADIO 1/N page.
• The standby frequencies are entered as stated for the RADIO 1/N page. However, the display is always
large white font since there is no tuning done on the standby frequencies.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the NAV radio is located.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to the NAV Library page.

NAVIGATION RADIOS (NAV Page 2/2)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the NAV and DME radios by transmitting and receiving
digital labels capable of controlling up to 2 NAV and 2 DME radios.

NOTE: This page is only displayed if VOR-auto-tuning or radio test is configured.

Display second NAV 2/2 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <NAV#>, [NEXT] or
[RADIO], [NEXT], <NAV#>, [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <NAV#>, [NEXT].

Display second NAV 2/2 page from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <NAV#>, [NEXT] or
[RADIO], <RADIO DETAILS>, <NAV#>, [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <NAV#>, [NEXT].
NAV 2/2
NAV1 MODE NAV2 MODE
1L
>AUTOMATIC MANUAL< 1R

2L 2R
NAV1 TEST NAV2 TEST
3L >READY READY< 3R

4L 4R
DME1 TEST DME2 TEST
5L >READY READY< 5R

6L <RADIO 6R

NOTE: The NAV and DME ident suffix "x" (e.g. NAV, NAV1...) and the side (left or right) where the NAV/DME
units appear is depending on the installation configuration.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-22
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAV1 MODE [1L]: Toggles NAV1 mode status for the NAV radio. The possible values are AUTOMATIC or
MANUAL.

NAV2 MODE [1R]: Same as above, but referencing NAV2 instead of NAV1.

NAV1 TEST [3L]: Toggles NAV1 test status & results. Toggle options for test status are READY, CONFIRM?,
STARTED. Pressing LSK the first time causes CONFIRM? to appear the second press initiates the tests. Test
result is: PASS or FAIL or TIMEOUT.

NAV2 TEST [3R]: Same as above, but referencing NAV2 instead of NAV1.

DME1 TEST [5L]: Toggles DME1 test status & results. Toggle options for test status are READY, CONFIRM?,
STARTED. Pressing LSK the first time causes CONFIRM? to appear the second press initiates the tests. Test
result is: PASS or FAIL or TIMEOUT.

DME2 TEST [5R]: Same as above, but referencing DME2 instead of DME1.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the NAV radio is located.

NAVIGATION RADIOS (ADF RADIO)

The FMS will support the following ADF Radios in the frequency range and channel spacing specified below:

RADIO MODEL FREQUENCY RANGE CHANNEL SPACING NOTE

RC ADF-462 190.0 to 1799.5 KHz 0.5 KHz -
2179.0 to 2185.0 KHz
BK DF-431B 100.0 to 1899.0 KHz 0.5 KHz See NOTE *
2181.0 to 2183.0 KHz

Figure 13-1 ADF Radio Models, Frequency Range and Channel Spacing

NOTE: *The legal range is from 190.0 KHz to 1860.0 KHz but the radio can tune outside this range. The
performance is not guaranteed for those frequencies. In addition the radio may tune from 2181.0 KHz
to 2183.0 KHz for marine distress frequencies.

NOTE: The FMS does not accept out of range values. An error message will appear in the scratchpad if
invalid entries are made by the user. If the ADF Frequency Source Selection discrete is set then
entries made will generate an error message "RADIO TUNING DISABLED” to inform the pilot that he
may no longer tune this radio from the FMS.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-23
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAVIGATION RADIOS (ADF Page 1/2)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of up to 2 ADF units.

Display the first ADF RADIO page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <ADF#> or [RADIO],
[NEXT], <ADF#> or [RADIO], [RADIO], <ADF#>.

Display the second ADF RADIO page from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <ADF#> or
[RADIO], <RADIO DETAILS>, <ADF#> or [RADIO], [RADIO], <ADF#>.

ADF 1/2
ADF1 ADF2
1L b1234.5 0 1 04 407.0b 1R
1780.6 -- -- 333.5
2L 2R
MODE MODE
3L >ADF ANT< 3R
BFO BFO
4L >OFF ON< 4R
REL-BRG MAG-BRG
5L >2 3 1 o < 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

NOTE: The ADF ident suffix "x" (e.g. ADF, ADF1...) and the side (left or right) where the ADF units appear
are depending on the installation configuration. The tables below provide examples.

ADF1 [1L]: Display and modify active/standby preset number and frequency of the ADF1 radio. Selecting
LSK_1L when the scratchpad is empty will toggle the standby and the active preset/frequency.

ADF2 [1R]: Display and modify active/standby preset number and frequency of the ADF2 radio. Selecting
LSK_1R when the scratchpad is empty will toggle the standby and the active preset/frequency.

MODE [3L,3R]: Displays mode status for the ADF radio. Pressing this softkey selects the next option. The
possible values are ADF and ANT.

BFO [4L,4R]: Displays mode status for the ADF radio. Pressing this softkey selects the next option. The
possible values are ON and OFF.

REL-BRG/MAG BRG/TRUE BRG [5L,5R]: Set and display of the ADF Bearing display mode and Bearing data.
At power on, the FMS will display the last ADF Bearing display mode setting prior to the last FMS power
interruption.

NOTE: The ADF does not provide bearing data while it's mode of operationis is set to "ANT".

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the ADF radio is located.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to the ADF Library page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-24
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAVIGATION RADIOS (ADF Page 2/2)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of up to 2 ADF units.

NOTE: This page is only displayed if radio test is configured.

Display the second ADF RADIO page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <ADF#>, [NEXT]
or [RADIO], [NEXT], <ADF#>, [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <ADF#>, [NEXT].

Display the second ADF RADIO page from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <ADF#>,
[NEXT] or [RADIO], <RADIO DETAILS>, <ADF#>, [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <ADF#>, [NEXT].

ADF 2/2

1L 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
ADF1 TEST ADF2 TEST
5L >R E A D Y READY< 5R

6L <RADIO 6R

NOTE: The ADF ident suffix "x" (e.g. ADF, ADF1...) and the side (left or right) where the ADF units appear
are depending on the installation configuration.

ADF1 TEST [5L]: Toggles ADF1 test status & results. Toggle options for test status are READY, CONFIRM?,
STARTED. Pressing LSK the first time causes CONFIRM? to appear the second press initiates the tests. Test
result is: PASS or FAIL or TIMEOUT.

ADF2 TEST [5R]: Same as above, but referencing ADF2 instead of ADF1.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the ADF radio is located.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-25
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAVIGATION RADIOS (DF Page 1/1 or 1/2)

The FMS will support the following Rockwell-Collins radios:

• DF-430-102
• DF-935-12

In the frequency range and channel spacing specified below, in addition to ARGOS (401.650MHz) and
COSPAS/SARSAT (406MHz) frequencies:

RADIO MODEL FREQUENCY RANGE CHANNEL SPACING NOTE

DF-430-102 30.0 to 87.975 MHz 25 KHz -
108.0 to 117.975 MHz
118.0 to 136.975 MHz
137.0 to 173.975 MHz
225.0 to 399.975 MHz
Supports 401.650 MHz
(ARGOS)
DF-430-102 and DF- Supports 406 Mhz band N/A -
935-12 (COSPAS / SARSAT)

Figure 13-2 DF-1 - DF Frequency Range and Channel Spacing

NOTE: The FMS generates a warning message in the scratchpad whenever the user enters out of range values
or invalid data.

NOTE: For COSPAS/SARSAT operation, please refer to the Tactical section (e.g. section 11).

Display the first DF RADIO page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <DF#> or [RADIO],
[NEXT], <DF#> or [RADIO], [RADIO], <DF#>.

A. DF is in DF mode and FREQ sub-mode. Tactical frequency is detected and data

(bearing/steering/modulation/AGC) is available and displayed.

DF 1/2
DF BEACONS
1L b130.000 0 4
1R
149.875 -- BRG /STEER
2L TAC260o/T45oL
2R
MODE MODE/AGC
3L >DF 45/ 85%
3R
SUB MODE
4L >FREQ 4R

5L 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-26
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. DF is in DF mode and FREQ sub-mode. Tactical frequency is not detected and the data is not available.

DF 1/2
DF BEACONS
b130.000 0 4
1L 1R
149.875 -- BRG /STEER
o o
2L TAC /
2R
MODE MODE/AGC
3L >DF / % 3R
SUB MODE
4L >FREQ 4R

5L 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

C. DF is in SAR mode and ARGOS sub-mode. ARGOS frequency is detected and data is available and
displayed. 401.650 (ARGOS frequency) is displayed in the active frequency field. Frequency toggle prompt
is not displayed in SAR mode. SARSAT WPT page prompt is displayed when at least one SARSAT wpt
exists in the list.

DF 1/2
DF BEACONS
1L 401.650 --
1R
130.000 04 BRG /STEER
2L 260o/F45oR
2R
MODE MODE/AGC
3L >SAR 80/ 75%
3R
SUB MODE
4L >ARGOS 4R

5L SARSAT WPT> 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

D. DF is in SAR mode and SCAN sub-mode. Multiple C-S beacons as well as 121.5MHz beacons detected. C-
S data is available and displayed. LOCK C-S prompt is displayed since multiple beacons are detected.
SCAN is displayed in the active frequency field. Frequency toggle prompt is not displayed in SAR mode.

DF 1/2
DF BEACONS
1L
SCAN -- C-S 121
1R
130.000 04 B R G E/ S T E E R
2L C-S260o/T45oR
2R
MODE MODE/AGC
3L >SAR 45/ 68% 3R
SUB MODE
4L >SCAN LOCK C-S< 4R

5L 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-27
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NOTE: When the SAR mode is active, the letter “S” will be seen in small green font on the RADIO X/Y page as
shown just below.
When the SCAN sub-mode is active, the word “SCAN” is also seen on RADIO X/Y page shown just below.
When the DF is in a scanning mode (TAC SCAN or SAR SCAN) and a beacon is detected, the text
“DETECTED” appears on the RADIO X/Y page.

RADIO 2/4
04 05
1L <VUF1 243.000 ↔ 121.500 1R
16 06
2L <VUF2 156.800 ↔ 156.300 2R
01 --
3L <ADF1 407.0 ↔ 343.5 3R
07 08
4L <ADF2 333.0 ↔ 222.5 4R

5L 5R
-- SDETECTED --
6L 6R
<DF SCAN 145.875

E. DF is in SAR mode and SCAN sub-mode. Multiple C-S beacons as well as 121.5MHz and 243MHz beacons
detected. C-S data is available and displayed. UNLOCK C-S prompt is displayed since the DF is currently
synchronized with one of the C-S beacons. SCAN is displayed in the active frequency field. Frequency toggle
prompt is not displayed in SAR mode.

DF 1/2
DF BEACONS
1L
SCAN -- C-S 243 121
1R
130.000 04 B R G E/ S T E E R
2L C-S260o/T45oR
2R
MODE MODE/AGC
3L >SAR 45/ 68%
3R
SUB MODE
4L >SCAN UNLOCK C-S< 4R

5L 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-28
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

F. DF is in SAR mode and 243 sub-mode. 243MHz beacon detected and data is displayed.

DF 1/2
DF BEACONS
1L
243.000 -- 243
1R
130.000 04 BRG /STEER
2L 260o/T45oL
2R
MODE MODE/AGC
3L >SAR 45/ 85% 3R
SUB MODE
4L >243 4R

5L 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

DF1 [1L]: Display and modify the active/standby DF frequency and preset.

BEACONS [1R]: Displays the types of detected beacons (C-S, 243 and 121).

BRG /STEER [2R]: Depending on the selected mode and sub-mode, the following is displayed:
• In any "DF" sub-mode, the bearing and steering, to the user defined tactical frequency, if tuned and
available; or
• In "SAR SCAN" mode, the bearing and steering of detected C-S beacon(s), if available; or
• In all remaining "SAR" sub-modes, the bearing and steering of the selected detected beacon if detected and
available.

NOTE: The FMS will display the letter "E" in reverse video green just to the right of the text “BRG” when the DF
reports that it is estimating the bearing.
The bearing value will be preceded by a “T” (representing TO) or “F” (representing FROM).
The steering value will indicate “L” (left) or “R” (right) steering.

MODE [3L]: Toggles and display the next DF mode of operation. The possible values are "DF" and "SAR".

MOD/AGC [3R]: Depending on the selected mode and sub-mode, the following is displayed:
• In any "DF" sub-mode, the modulation and AGC (Automatic Gain Control) values of the beacon defined by
the user's tactical frequency, if available; or
• In "SAR SCAN" mode, the modulation and AGC values of detected C-S beacon(s), if available; or
• In all remaining "SAR" sub-modes, the modulation and AGC values of the selected detected beacons(s) if
available.

SUB MODE [4L]: Toggle and display the next available DF sub-mode of operation option. The possible values
are "FREQ", "BUOY", "TAC SCAN", "121", "243", "C-S", "ARGOS" and "SCAN".

LOCK C-S/UNLOCK C-S [4R]: When the DF is in SAR SCAN mode and it detects multiple C-S beacons, an
option to synchronize (or lock) with 1 of these beacons is provided. Once the bearing displayed is that of the
beacon the operator wishes to follow, pressing the "LOCK C-S" prompt will instruct the DF radio to synchronize
with that C-S beacon only.

SARSAT WPT[5R]: Access to the SARSAT WPT 1/2 page.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the DF radio is located.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to the DF Library 1/N page containing frequency presets.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-29
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAVIGATION RADIOS (DF Page 2/2)

This page is only available when "DF TEST" is configured.

Display the first DF RADIO page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <DF>, [NEXT] or
[RADIO], [NEXT], <DF>, [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <DF>, [NEXT].

DF 2/2

1L 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
DF TEST
5L >READY 5R

6L <RADIO 6R

DF TEST [5L]: Display the DF test status & results. Toggle options for test status are READY, CONFIRM?,
STARTED. Pressing LSK the first time causes CONFIRM? to appear the second press initiates the tests. Test
result is: PASS or FAIL or TIMEOUT.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the DF radio is located.

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (COM RADIO)

The FMS will support the following COM Radios in the frequency range and channel spacing specified below:

RADIO MODELS CHANNEL RANGE CHANNEL SPACING NOTE

VC 401B 118.000 to 135.975 25 MHz 1
VC 401C 118.000 to 136.975 25 MHz
VHF-422 118.000 to 151.975 25 MHz
VHF-4000 118.000 to 136.990 8.33, 8.33/25 MHz 2,3
118.000 to 151.990 8.33, 8.33/25 MHz 2,3

Figure 13-3 COM Radio Models, Channel Range and Channel Spacing

NOTE 1: The Channel range and spacing are configurable items.

NOTE2: The Channel Range and spacing is a configurable item. When 8.33 or 8.33_25 KHz channel spacing
is configured, the ARINC Characteristic 716-11 "Airborne VHF Communications Transceiver" provides
the frequency-channel pairing plan. The 8.33 KHz channel spaced frequencies are entered via their
respective channel names instead of an actual frequency.

NOTE 3: 8.33 kHz spacing is not applicable to the Bendix King VC 401B radio.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-30
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NOTE: The FMS does not accept out of range values. An error message will appear in the scratchpad if
invalid entries are made by the user. If the COM Frequency Source Selection discrete is set then
entries made will generate an error message “RADIO TUNING DISABLED” to inform the pilot that he
may no longer tune this radio from the FMS.

The COM VHF radio equipment name can also be configured as COM1/COM2, COM3/COM4 or
VHF/VHF1.

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VHF RADIO Page 1/2)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the VHF radios by transmitting and receiving digital labels
capable of controlling up to two VHF units.
This page allows the pilot to verify and modify the active and standby frequencies for the COM radios. It allows
the pilot to control the operation of these radios.

Display the first VHF 1/2 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <VHF#> or [RADIO],
[NEXT], <VHF#> or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VHF#>.

Display the first VHF 1/2 page from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <VHF#> or [RADIO],
<RADIO DETAILS>, <VHF#> or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VHF#>.

VHF 1/2
VHF1 VHF2
b 118.400 0 4 -- 151.000b
1L 1R
126.400 05 -- 124.650
2L 2R
SQUELCH SQUELCH
3L >OFF ON< 3R

4L 4R
VOICE/DATA
5L DATA< 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

NOTE: The COM VHF radio equipment name can also be configured as “COM" or "VHF".

The VHF ident suffix "x" (e.g. VHF, VHF1...) and the side (left or right) where the COM units appear is
depending on the installation configuration. The tables below provide examples.

VHF1 [1L]: Display and modify active/standby preset number and channel of the VHF1 radio. Selecting LSK 1L
when the scratchpad is empty will toggle the standby and the active preset/frequency.

VHF2 [1R]: Same as above, but referencing VHF2 instead of VHF1 and LSK 2R instead of LSK 1L.

NOTE: It is possible to have "-" in one or both of the active and standby fields after FMS maintenance. Toggling
is not allowed when "-" are present in the standby field. Then, a frequency needs to be entered in the
standby field first before the active/standby field toggling is allowed, otherwise a warning message will
be displayed in the scratchpad.

SQUELCH [3L]: When configured and for VHF-422 and VHF-4000 VHF radios only, toggles COM1 radio
squelch status ON or OFF.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-31
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SQUELCH [3R]: Same as above, but referencing COM2 instead of COM1.

VOICE/DATA [5R]: When voice/data control is configured and for the VHF-422 and VHF-4000 VHF radios only,
allows the crew to place the VHF radio in either the VOICE or DATA mode.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the VHF radio is located.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to the access to the VHF Library page.

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VHF RADIO Page 2/2)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the VHF radios by transmitting and receiving digital labels
capable of controlling up to two VHF units.

NOTE: This page is only displayed if radio test is configured.

Display the second VHF 2/2 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <VHF#>, [NEXT] or
[RADIO], [NEXT], <VHF#>, [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VHF#>, [NEXT].

Display the second VHF 2/2 page from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <VHF#>, [NEXT]
or [RADIO], <RADIO DETAILS>, <VHF#>, [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VHF#>, [NEXT].
VHF 2/2

1L 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
VHF1 TEST VHF2 TEST
5L >R E A D Y READY< 5R

6L <RADIO 6R

NOTE: The COM VHF radio equipment name can also be configured as “COM" or "VHF".

The VHF ident suffix "x" (e.g. VHF, VHF1...) and the side (left or right) where the COM units appear is
depending on the installation configuration. The tables below provide examples.

VHF1 TEST [5L]: Toggles VHF1 test status & results. Toggle options for test status are READY, CONFIRM?,
STARTED. Pressing LSK the first time causes CONFIRM? to appear the second press initiates the tests. Test
result is: PASS or FAIL or TIMEOUT.

VHF2 TEST [5R]: Same as above, but referencing VHF2 instead of VHF1.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the VHF radio is located.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-32
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (RS-422 FM1 RADIO)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the FUG8 radio. The channel number is modified via
scratchpad entry and then pressing [1L]. A channel entry can also be made via the FM1 library page.

Display the FM1 1/1 page by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <FM1>.

FM1 1/1
CHANNEL
1L b 415 0 4 TONE1<
1R
428 03
2L TONE2<
2R
MODE BAND
3L >DUPLEX LOWER< 3R
SQUELCH TX/RX
4L >ON ON/ ON 4R
MODE STATUS PWR
5L CH UNSLECTBL ON 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

For all fields defined below, when a communication failure is detected with the radio, dashes are displayed in
each field.

CHANNEL [1L]: Displays the active and standby preset and channel numbers for the FUG8 radio. Pressing the
LSK when the scratchpad is empty will toggle the standby and active channels. The possible values are from
347 to 510.

MODE [3L]: Displays mode status for the FUG8 radio. Pressing this softkey selects the next option. The
possible values are DUPLEX, SIMPLEX and RELAY.

SQUELCH [4L]: Displays squelch status for the FUG8 radio. Pressing this softkey selects the next option. The
possible values are ON and OFF.

MODE STATUS [5L]: Displays FUG8 mode status. The possible values are OK, PARAM ERROR, H/W
ERROR, PWR OFF and CH UNSLECTBL.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the FM1 radio is located.

TONE 1 [1R]: Pressing this softkey activates the call tone 1 (1750 Hz). While this key is pressed, TONE 1 is
displayed in inverse green large font.

TONE 2 [2R]: Pressing this softkey activates the call tone 2 (2135 Hz). While this key is pressed, TONE 2 is
displayed in inverse green large font.

BAND [3R]: Displays band selected for the FUG8 radio. Pressing this softkey selects the next option. The
possible values are UPPER and LOWER.

TX/RX (4R): Indicates the transmitter & receiver status (indicator only). Possible values are ON and blank.

PWR (5R): Indicates the power status (indicator only). Possible values are ON and blank.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-33
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to FM1 LIBRARY page (last page viewed).

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (RS-422 FM2 RADIO)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the FUG9 radio. The channel number is modified via
scratchpad entry and then pressing [1L]. A channel entry can also be made via the FM2 library page.

Display the FM2 1/1 page by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <FM2>.

FM2 1/1
CHANNEL
b 47 - - TONE1<
1L 1R
65 18
2L TONE2<
2R
MODE BAND
3L >DUPLEX LOWER< 3R
SQUELCH TX/RX
4L >ON ON/ ON 4R
MODE STATUS PWR
5L CH UNSLECTBL ON 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

For all fields defined below, when a communication failure is detected with the radio, dashes are displayed in
each field.

CHANNEL [1L]: Displays the active and standby preset and channel numbers for the FUG9 radio. Pressing the
LSK when the scratchpad is empty will toggle the standby and active channels. The possible values are from 0
to 92.

MODE [3L]: Displays mode status for the FUG9 radio. Pressing this softkey selects the next option. The
possible values are DUPLEX, SIMPLEX and RELAY.

SQUELCH [4L]: Displays squelch status for the FUG9 radio. Pressing this softkey selects the next option. The
possible values are ON and OFF.

MODE STATUS [5L]: Displays FUG9 mode status. The possible values are OK, PARAM ERROR, H/W
ERROR, PWR OFF and CH UNSLECTBL.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the FM2 radio is located.

TONE 1 [1R]: Pressing this softkey activates the call tone 1 (1750 Hz). While this key is pressed, TONE 1 is
displayed in inverse green large font.

TONE 2 [2R]: Pressing this softkey activates the call tone 2 (2135 Hz). While this key is pressed, TONE 2 is
displayed in inverse green large font.

BAND [3R]: Displays band selected for the FUG9 radio. Pressing this softkey selects the next option. The
possible values are UPPER and LOWER.

TX/RX (4R): Indicates the transmitter & receiver status (indicator only). Possible values are ON and blank.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-34
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PWR (5R): Indicates the power status (indicator only). Possible values are ON and blank.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to FM2 LIBRARY page (last page viewed).

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (RS-422 UHF RADIO)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the UHF radio. The frequency is modified via scratchpad
entry and then pressing [1L]. A frequency entry can also be made via the UHF library page.

Display the UHF 1/1 page by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <UHF>.

UHF 1/1
FREQUENCY
b 256.025 - -
1L 1R
253.775 17
2L 2R
GUARD BAND
3L >ON NARROW< 3R
SQUELCH
4L >ON 4R
RADIO----STATUS---MODE
5L OK OK 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

For all fields defined below, when a communication failure is detected with the radio, dashes are displayed in
each field.

FREQUENCY [1L]: Displays the active and standby preset numbers and frequencies of the UHF radio.
Pressing the LSK when the scratchpad is empty will toggle the standby and active frequencies.

GUARD [3L]: Displays guard receiver status for the UHF radio. Pressing this softkey selects the next option.
The possible values are ON and OFF.

SQUELCH [4L]: Displays squelch status for the UHF radio. Pressing this softkey selects the next option. The
possible values are ON and OFF.

RADIO STATUS (5L): Displays UHF radio status. The possible values are OK and FAILPWR OFF.

RADIO [6L]: Access to RADIO top page.

BAND [3R]: Displays band selected for the UHF radio. Pressing this softkey selects the next option. The
possible values are NARROW and WIDE.

MODE STATUS (5R): Displays UHF mode status. The possible values are OK, PARAM ERROR, H/W ERROR,
PWR OFF and FQ UNSLECTBL.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to UHF LIBRARY page (last page viewed).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-35
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUHF RADIO)

The VUHF radio equipment name is COM, however it can also be configured as COM1/COM2 or COM3/COM4 or
VUF/VUHF or VUF1/VUF2.

NOTE: The case displayed in this section is the “VUF” configuration.

The name "VUHF” is only be used in a single VUHF radio configuration.

The FMS supports the following VUHF Radios in the frequency ranges, channel spacing and modulations
specified below:

Radio Model / Frequency / Channel Band / Emergency Notes

Variant Channel Range Spacing (KHz) Modulation Guard Band
(MHz) Frequency
(MHz)
SRT-651/N-A 40.500
or 30.000 – 87.975 25 VHF/FM
SRT-651/N-F 108.000 – 117.975 25 VHF/AM 121.500 1
118.000 – 136.990 25 or 25/8.33 VHF/AM 121.500 2
137.000 – 155.975 25 VHF/AM 121.500
156.000 – 173.975 25 VHF/FM 156.800 3
225.000 – 399.975 25 UHF/AM/FM 243.000
400.000 – 469.975 25 UHF/FM 243.000 4

Figure 13-4: VUHF Radio Model, Frequency/Channel Range, Channel Spacing, Band/Modulation, and
Emergency Guard Band Frequency

NOTE 1: The Channel Range and spacing are configurable items. If 8.33 MHz channel spacing is configured
for the 118.000 - 136.990 MHz band, ICAO Annex 10 "channel" name and Frequency-Channel pairing
applies. For requirement clarity, throughout this section the term "frequency" will be used to refer to all
radio frequency and channel (ATC VHF) bands, except for the "MARITIME" band where the term
"channel" will be used.

NOTE 2: The radio receives only.

NOTE 3: The MARITIME mode is only available if configured for certain V/UHF radios. Paired maritime
channel, frequency, and simplex and half-duplex operation is given in the Maritime Channel -
Frequency pairing Table found in this section.

NOTE 4: The upper UHF band (400.000 to 469.975 Mhz) is only available if configured on the SRT-651/N-A
radio (this frequency range is not available for the SRT-651/N-F radio variant).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-36
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Channel Designator Transmitting Frequencies (MHz)

Ship Stations Coast
Stations
60 156.025 160.625
01 156.050 160.650
61 156.075 160.675
02 156.100 160.700
62 156.125 160.725
03 156.150 160.750
63 156.175 160.775
04 156.200 160.800
64 156.225 160.825
05 156.250 160.850
65 156.275 160.875
06 156.300 156.300
66 156.325 160.925
07 156.350 160.950
67 156.375 156.375
08 156.400 156.400
68 156.425 156.425
09 156.450 156.450
69 156.475 156.475
10 156.500 156.500
70 156.525 156.525
11 156.550 156.550
71 156.575 156.575
12 156.600 156.600
72 156.625 156.625
13 156.650 156.650
73 156.675 156.675
14 156.700 156.700
74 156.725 156.725
15 156.750 156.750
75 156.775 156.775
16 156.800 156.800
76 156.825 156.825
17 156.850 156.850
77 156.875 156.875
18 156.900 161.500
78 156.925 161.525
19 156.950 161.550
79 156.975 161.575
20 157.000 161.600
80 157.025 161.625
21 157.050 161.650
81 157.075 161.675
22 157.100 161.700
82 157.125 161.725
23 157.150 161.750
83 157.175 161.775
24 157.200 161.800
84 157.225 161.825

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-37
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Channel Designator Transmitting Frequencies (MHz)

Ship Stations Coast
Stations
25 157.250 161.850
85 157.275 161.875
26 157.300 161.900
86 157.325 161.925
27 157.350 161.950
87 157.375 161.975
28 157.400 162.000
88 157.425 162.025

Figure 13-5: Maritime Channel-Frequency Pairing

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUF RADIO Page 1/3) – for SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radio

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the VUHF radios by transmitting and receiving digital labels
capable of controlling up to two SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radios.

Display the first VUF 1/3 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <VUF#> or [RADIO],
[NEXT], <VUF#> or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VUF#>.

Display the first VUF 1/3 page from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <VUF#> or [RADIO],
<RADIO DETAILS>, <VUF#> or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VUF#>.

VUF 1/3
VUF1 VUF2
b 118.400 0 4 -- 151.000b
1L 1R
125.150 05 -- 124.650
2L 2R
MODE MODE
3L >AM FM< 3R
FUNCTION FUNCTION
4L >TR_GV TR< 4R

5L >GUARD GUARD< 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

NOTE: The COM VUF radio equipment name can also be configured as “COM" or "VUF".

The VUF ident suffix "x" (e.g. VUF, VUF1...) and the side (left or right) where the radio units appear is
depending on the installation configuration. The tables below provide examples.

NOTE: If single VUHF installed and configured name is VUF, then the display will show VUHF.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-38
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

VUF1 [1L]: Display and modify the active/standby preset number and frequency/channel of the VUF1 radio.
Entry from the keyboard is validated and then the frequency and preset/channel, if available, are placed in the
standby field below the active field, otherwise an error message is displayed in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad
is empty it toggles between active/standby identifiers. During the tuning process, the active frequency is
displayed in large font inverse white color. If the tuning operation is not successful, the frequency is displayed in
small font amber font color as a warning to the pilot. Preset and channel are displayed in small font green color.

VUF2 [1R]: Same as above, but referencing VUF2 instead of VUF1.

NOTE: It is possible to have "-" in one or both of the active and standby fields after FMS maintenance. Toggling
is not allowed when "-" are present in the standby field. At that time, a frequency/channel needs to be
entered in the standby field first before the active/standby field toggling is allowed, otherwise a warning
message will be displayed in the scratchpad.

MODE [3L]/[3R]: Controlling the radio mode. The mode display in associated status field can be AM, FM and
MARITIME.

"MARITIME" option is only available if "VUHF MARITIME BD" is configured and VUF function is set to TR or
TR_G.

FUNCTION [4L]/[5R]: Toggles VUHF function options. The possible values are: TR, TR_GV, TR_GU or TR and
TR_G depending on which option is configured.

GUARD [5L]/[5R]: Enable the Coast GUARD radio setting. It is used to set the VUHF active frequency to
243.000 MHz, mode to AM and function to TR. The active frequency/preset displayed prior to key press will be
transferred in the standby position.

NOTE: When the GUARD key is pressed, GUARD is displayed in large inverse green font for 2 seconds.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the VUFx radio is located.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access the VUHF LIBRARY 1/N page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-39
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUF RADIO Page 2/3) – for SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radio

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the VUHF radios by transmitting and receiving digital labels
capable of controlling up to two SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radios.

Display the second VUF 2/3 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <VUF#>, [NEXT] or
[RADIO], [NEXT], <VUF#>, [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VUF#>, [NEXT].

Display the second VUF 2/3 page from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <VUF#>, [NEXT]
or [RADIO], <RADIO DETAILS>, <VUF#>, [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VUF#>, [NEXT].

VUF 2/3
VUF1 LVL VUF2 LVL
1L
>FULL MED< 1R
SQUELCH SQUELCH
2L >ON ON< 2R

3L >PTT PTT< 3R

4L 4R
VUF1 TEST VUF2 TEST
5L >READY READY< 5R

6L <RADIO 6R

NOTE: The VUF suffix and the side where the VUF unit appears is the same as on the first VUF page.

NOTE: If single VUHF installed and configured name is VUF, then the display will show VUHF.

VUF1 LVL [1L]/[1R]: Toggle and display the next VUHF RF output power level, LOW, MED and FULL in large
font white color. Otherwise the default VUF power level is displayed in small font white color.

SQUELCH [2L]/[2R]: Display squelch status for the VUHF radio. The possible values are OFF and ON.

PTT [3L] ]/[3R]: Enable the PTT switch. The status field displays the enabling/disabling status in large font
green color or large font inverse green while the line select key is "press and hold".

VUF1 TEST [5L]: Displays VUHF1 test status & results. Toggle options for test status are READY, CONFIRM?,
INIT, STARTED. Pressing LSK the first time causes CONFIRM? to appear the second press initiates the tests.
Test result is: PASS or FAIL or TIMEOUT.

VUF2 TEST [5R]: Displays VUHF2 test status & results. Toggle options for test status are READY, CONFIRM?,
INIT, STARTED. Pressing LSK the first time causes CONFIRM? to appear the second press initiates the tests.
Test result is: PASS or FAIL or TIMEOUT.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the VUFx radio is located.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-40
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUF RADIO Page 3/3) – for SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radio

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the VUHF radios by transmitting and receiving digital labels
capable of controlling up to two SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radios.

Display the third VUF 3/3 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <VUF#>, [NEXT], [NEXT]
or [RADIO], [NEXT], <VUF#>, [NEXT], [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VUF#>, [NEXT], [NEXT].

Display the third VUF 3/3 page from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <VUF#>, [NEXT],
[NEXT] or [RADIO], <RADIO DETAILS>, <VUF#>, [NEXT], [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VUF#>, [NEXT],
[NEXT].

VUF 3/3
GUARD ANT GUARD ANT
OFF OFF
1L 1R
GUARD PREC GUARD PREC
2L OFF OFF
2R
DESENS DESENS
3L OFF OFF 3R
TX BLNKNG TX BLNKNG
4L OFF OFF 4R
CP ON CP ON
5L CBIT VSWER CBIT VSWER 5R
M CODE 000 M CODE 000
6L <RADIO 6R

VUF 3/3
GUARD ANT GUARD ANT
1L >OFF OFF< 1R
GUARD PREC GUARD PREC
2L OFF OFF
2R
DESENS DESENS
3L >OFF OFF< 3R
TX BLNKNG TX BLNKNG
4L >OFF OFF< 4R
CP ON CP ON
5L CBIT VSWER CBIT VSWER 5R
M CODE 000 M CODE 000
6L <RADIO 6R

NOTE: The VUF suffix and the side where the VUF unit appears is the same as on the first VUF page.

GUARD ANT [1L]/[1R]: Display/control current guard antenna selection status ON or OFF. When the VUHF
STAT CTRL is configured to ENABLE, the GUARD ANT function option is displayed in large font white color
with a caret in large font green color pointing inward; otherwise it is displayed in small font white color for the left
and right side respectively.

GUARD PREC (2L)/(2R): Display current guard precedence mode state ON or OFF in small font white color.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-41
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DESENS (3L)/(3R): Display/control current desensitization mode state ON or OFF. When the VUHF STAT
CTRL is configured to ENABLE, the GUARD ANT function option is displayed in large font white color with a
caret in large font green color pointing inward; otherwise it is displayed in small font white color for the left and
right side respectively.

TX BLNKNG (4L)/4R): Display/control current transmitted blanking mode state ON or OFF. When the VUHF
STAT CTRL is configured to ENABLE, the GUARD ANT function option is displayed in large font white color
with a caret in large font green color pointing inward; otherwise it is displayed in small font white color for the left
and right side respectively.

CP, CBIT, M CODE [5L]/[5R]: The control panel prompt and status is only displayed if the control panel status
received from the VUF radio is "ON", otherwise the field is blanked. "CP" is displayed in small font green color
for the left and right side respectively.
The continuous bit "CBIT" prompt and status is only displayed if CBIT failures occur and are reported by the
radio, otherwise the field is blanked. "CBIT" is displayed in small font green color and CBIT error codes is
displayed in small font white color for the left and right side respectively.
The maintenance code prompt "M CODE" and status is only displayed if failures occur and are reported by the
radio, otherwise the field is blanked. "M CODE" is displayed in small font green color and "M CODE" error
codes is displayed in small font white color for the left and right side respectively.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the VUF radio is located.

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUF RADIO Page 1/3) – for SRT-651/N-F V/UHF radio

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the SRT-651/N-F VUHF radio.

Display the first VUHF 1/3 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <VUHF> (when the VUF
radio is installed on the first RADIO top page) or [RADIO], [NEXT], <VUHF> (When the VUF radio is installed on
the second RADIO top page) or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VUHF> (When the VUF radio is installed on the second
RADIO top page and the "NEXT Keys" is set to "Yes" in the "DISPLAY CONFIG" maintenance page).

VUHF 1/3
VUHF
1L Ú118.400 0 4
1R
125.150 05
2L >TUNE GUARD 2R
MODE
3L >AM 3R
RX MODE
4L >TR_G 4R

5L >TUNE 243 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-42
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The next several pages will show various examples the VUHF page layout following activation/selection of
several V/UHF functions.

Selection of TUNE 243 activates the 243 Emergency Guard Precedence:

VUHF 1/3
VUHF EMER
1L Ú243.000 - -
1R
230.975 --
2L 2R
MODE
3L >AM 3R
RX MODE
4L >TR_G 4R

5L 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

After TUNE GUARD is selected and prior active frequency was in the range 108.000-155.975 MHz:
VUHF 1/3
VUHF GUARD
Ú121.500 - -
1L 1R
118.400 04
2L 2R
MODE
3L >AM 3R
RX MODE
4L >TR 4R

5L >TUNE 243 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

A maritime band frequency is the active frequency and MAR TYPE is set to SHIP on VUHF page 2/3:

NOTE: for the maritime mode, MAR TYPE (on VUHF 2/3 and consequently on VUHF 1/3) will automatically be
set as function of the entered maritime band frequency.

VUHF 1/3
VUHF
Ú156.050C 0 1
1L 1R
156.850C17
2L 2R
MODE
3L >MAR SHIP 3R
RX MODE
4L >TR_G 4R

5L >TUNE 243 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-43
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

VUHF [1L]: Display and modify the active/standby preset number and frequency/channel of the VUHF radio.
Entry from the keyboard is validated and then the frequency and preset/channel, if available, are placed in the
standby field below the active field, otherwise an error message is displayed in the scratchpad. Preset and
channel are displayed in small font green color. Maritime channel numbers are shown in the form CXX (where
XX=the maritime channel number).
Additionally, guard and emergency 243 activation will be shown next to the text VUHF. To indicate activation of
these, GUARD and EMER, respectively, will be displayed just next to the title text VUHF in inverse white font to
inform the crew of the selection of these prompts.

NOTE:
• It is possible to have dashes "-" in one or both of the active and standby fields after FMS maintenance.
Toggling is not allowed when "-" are present in the standby field. At that time, a frequency/channel needs to
be entered in the standby field first before the active/standby field toggling is allowed, otherwise a warning
message will be displayed in the scratchpad.
• If a maritime channel is entered while in either MAR SHIP or MAR COAST, then this has no effect on the
MAR TYPE setting (e.g. the existing setting is retained).

TUNE GUARD [2L]: Selection of this prompt will tune the radio to emergency frequency corresponding to the
currently active frequency band. That is, once this prompt is selected, the active frequency will be commanded
to either 40.500, 121.500, 156.800 (“C16” will also be shown in preset field), or 243.000 MHz (see table of
Figure 13-4), and the previously active frequency will be moved into the standby field. The receiver mode (RX
MODE) will also change to TR and “GUARD” will be annunciated next to the text at LSK 1L/1R as well on the
corresponding V/UHF radio’s line on the top RADIO page (e.g. RADIO 1/X or 2/X).
Also, once this prompt is activated, the prompt itself is removed from view until the operator makes another
V/UHF radio parameter selection which causes the guard state to no longer be maintained.
When TUNE 243 is activated this prompt is removed from view and unavailable for selection.

MODE [3L]: Possible options are AM, FM, MAR SHIP, and MAR COAST. Depending on the frequency field
value entered, the mode displayed can be either AM or FM. The crew will need to toggle this prompt to enter a
maritime channel based mode of operation.(e.g. MAR SHIP or MAR COAST).

The possible MODE options for the various frequency bands shown in the table shown of Figure 13-4 are
described here:
• when the entered active frequency lies within a frequency range having only AM as a possible
modulation, the MODE will change to "AM".
• when the entered active frequency lies within a frequency range having only FM as a possible
modulation and is not a maritime band frequency having an associated maritime channel, the
MODE will change to "FM"
• when the MODE is AM or FM, the crew may at any time toggle this prompt to enter the maritime
mode.
• while in the maritime mode (MAR SHIP or MAR COAST), if the crew enters a frequency which
exists in the table of figure 13-5, the FMS will automatically display the corresponding maritime
channel and maritime type (SHIP or COAST) for the selected frequency; otherwise, if the frequency
is not in the table, the FMS will set MODE to be that corresponding to the entered frequency’s
modulation.
• when the active frequency lies within a frequency range having either AM or FM, MODE will remain
unchanged from its current setting.
• when entering the maritime mode, the VUHF LVL setting will only be LOW PWR or MED PWR.

RX MODE [4L]: Toggles and displays VUHF receiver mode options. The possible values are: TR, TR_G

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-44
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TUNE 243 [5L]: Selection activates the emergency 243 guard precedence mode within the V/UHF radio.
The FMS will then set the V/UHF control parameters as follows:
• active frequency will be set to 243.000
• the previously active frequency field content will be moved into the standby field
• mode will be set to AM
• receiver mode set to TR_G
• SQUELCH will be set OFF on VUHF page 2/2
• “EMER” will be annunciated next to the text at LSK 1L/1R as well on the corresponding V/UHF radio’s line on
the top RADIO page (e.g. RADIO 1/X or 2/X).
• the TUNE 243 prompt will be removed and only returns once emergency 243 is exitted

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the VUHF is located.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access the VUHF LIBRARY 1/N page.

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUHF RADIO Page 2/3) – for SRT-651/N-F V/UHF radio

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the SRT-651/N-F VUHF radio.

Display the first VUHF 2/3 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <VUHF> , [NEXT] (when
the VUHF radio is installed on the first RADIO top page) or [RADIO], [NEXT], <VUHF> [NEXT] (when the VUHF
radio is installed on the second RADIO top page) or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VUHF> [NEXT] (when the VUHF radio
is installed on the second RADIO top page and the "Next Keys" is set to "Yes" in the "Display Config"
maintenance page).

VUHF 2/3
VUHF LVL
1L
>FULL PWR 1R
SQUELCH
2L >ON 2R
DF
3L >ON 3R
MAR TYPE
4L >SHIP 4R
VUHF TEST
5L >READY | 5R

6L <RADIO 6R

VUHF LVL [1L]: Toggle and display the next VUHF RF output power level, LOW PWR, MED PWR and FULL
PWR in large font white color. In maritime mode, this option can only be set to either LOW PWR or MED PWR
(will be changed to MED PWR if set to FULL PWR when entering maritime mode).

SQUELCH [2L]: Toggle and display the squelch status for the VUHF radio. The possible values are OFF and
ON.

DF [3L] ]: Toggle and display the Direction Finder (DF) status. Used to turn ON or OFF the Direction Finder
mode within the V/UHF radio. The possible values are OFF and ON.
If the DF status is toggled to ON, the RX MODE is changed to display TR_G.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-45
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Any of the following conditions will cause the DF mode to automatically be set to OFF:
• activation of the TUNE GUARD function
• the DF mode is already ON and RX MODE is changed from TR_G to TR
• when the active frequency is changed to a frequency in the range 30.000 to 87.975 MHz

MAR TYPE [4L]: Toggle and display the maritime type. The possible values are: SHIP, COAST. While already
in maritime mode, selecting this prompt will switch the active frequency to the corresponding 4.6 Mhz offset, if
one exists for the given channel.

NOTE: that the selected MAR TYPE is shown at the MODE prompt at LSK 3L.
NOTE: If a maritime channel is entered while in either MAR SHIP or MAR COAST, then this has no effect on
the MAR TYPE setting (e.g. the existing setting is retained).

VUHF TEST [5L]: Displays VUHF1 test status & results. Toggle options for test status are READY, CONFIRM?,
STARTED. Pressing LSK the first time causes CONFIRM? to appear the second press initiates the tests. Possible
test results are: PASS or FAIL or TIMEOUT.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the VUHF is located.

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (VUHF RADIO Page 3/3) – for SRT-651/N-F V/UHF radio

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the SRT-651/N-F VUHF radio.

Display the first VUHF 3/3 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <VUHF> , [NEXT],
[NEXT] (when the VUHF radio is installed on the first RADIO top page) or [RADIO], [NEXT], <VUHF> [NEXT],
[NEXT] (when the VUHF radio is installed on the second RADIO top page) or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VUHF>
[NEXT] [NEXT] (when the VUHF radio is installed on the second RADIO top page and the "Next Keys" is set to
"Yes" in the "Display Config" maintenance page).
VHUF 3/3
GUARD ANT
OFF
1L 1R
GUARD PREC
2L OFF
2R
DESENS
3L OFF
3R
TX BLNKNG
4L OFF 4R
CP ON
5L CBIT VSWER 5R
M CODE 000
6L <RADIO 6R

GUARD ANT [1L]: Display current guard antenna selection status ON or OFF. When the VUHF STAT CTRL is
configured to ENABLE, the GUARD ANT function option is displayed in large font white color with a caret in
large font green color pointing inward; otherwise it is displayed in small font white color for the left and right side
respectively.

GUARD PREC (2L): Display current guard precedence mode state ON or OFF in small font white color.

DESENS (3L): Display current desensitization mode state ON or OFF. When the VUHF STAT CTRL is
configured to ENABLE, the GUARD ANT function option is displayed in large font white color with a caret in
large font green color pointing inward; otherwise it is displayed in small font white color for the left and right side
respectively.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-46
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TX BLNKNG (4L): Display current transmitted blanking mode state ON or OFF. When the VUHF STAT CTRL is
configured to ENABLE, the GUARD ANT function option is displayed in large font white color with a caret in
large font green color pointing inward; otherwise it is displayed in small font white color for the left and right side
respectively.

CP, CBIT, M CODE [5L]: The control panel prompt and status is only displayed if the control panel status
received from the VUHF radio is "ON", otherwise the field is blanked. "CP" is displayed in small font green color
for the left and right side respectively.
The continuous bit "CBIT" prompt and status is only displayed if CBIT failures occur and are reported by the
radio, otherwise the field is blanked. "CBIT" is displayed in small font green color and CBIT error codes is
displayed in small font white color for the left and right side respectively.
The maintenance code prompt "M CODE" and status is only displayed if failures occur and are reported by the
radio, otherwise the field is blanked. "M CODE" is displayed in small font green color and "M CODE" error
codes is displayed in small font white color for the left and right side respectively.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the VUHF radio is located.

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (HF RADIO)

The CMA-9000 FMS also provides with the capability to tune HF radios.

FREQ BAND LOWER LIMIT UPPER LIMIT

HF 2000.0 KHz 29999.9 KHz

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (HF RADIO Page 1/2)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the HF radio by transmitting and receiving digital labels
capable of controlling a single HF radio.

Display the first HF 1/2 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <HF> (when the HF radio is
installed on the first RADIO top page) or [RADIO], [NEXT], <HF> (when the HF radio is installed on the second
RADIO top page) or [RADIO], [RADIO], <HF> (when the HF radio is installed on the second RADIO top page
and the "Next Keys" is set to "Yes" in the "Display Config" maintenance page).
HF 1/2
HF
Ú11279.0 0 4
1L 1R
8891.0 05
2L 2R
MODE
3L >AM 3R

4L ⇑ 4R
3 SQUELCH
5L ⇓ 5R

6L <RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-47
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HF [1L]/[1R]: Display and modify the active/standby preset number and frequency/channel of the HF radio.
Entry from the keyboard is validated and then the frequency and preset/channel, if available, are placed in the
standby field below the active field, otherwise an error message is displayed in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad
is empty it toggles between active/standby identifiers. During the tuning process, the active frequency is
displayed in large font inverse white color. If the tuning operation is not successful, the frequency is displayed in
small font amber font color as a warning to the pilot. Preset and channel are displayed in small font green color.
Frequency entries are to be made in Khz.

MODE [3L]/[3R]: Allows selection and display of the HF mode of operation. The possible mode selections are
"AM", "CW", "LSB" and "USB".

"  " [4L] / [4R] / " " [5L] / [5R]: Display and modify SQUELCH level (0 to 7). When the scratchpad is
empty, the line select keys are used to increment/decrement the squelch level. When a valid squelch level is
entered in the scratchpad and the line select key pressed, the squelch level is set to that new value.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the HF radio is located.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access the HF LIBRARY 1/N page.

COMMUNICATION RADIOS (HF RADIO Page 2/2)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the HF radio by transmitting and receiving digital labels
capable of controlling a single HF radio.

Display the first HF 2/2 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <HF>, [NEXT] (when the HF
radio is installed on the second RADIO top page) or [RADIO], [NEXT], <HF>, [NEXT] (when the HF radio is
installed on the second RADIO top page) or [RADIO], [RADIO], <HF>, [NEXT] (when the HF radio is installed on
the second RADIO top page and the "Next Keys" is set to "Yes" in the "Display Config" maintenance page).

HF 2/2
HF LVL
1L
>LOW PWR 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
HF TEST
5L >OFF 5R

6L <RADIO 6R

HF LVL [1L]/[1R]: Allows selection and display of the HF power settings. The possible power selections are
"LOW PWR", "MED PWR" and "FULL PWR".

HF TEST [5L] / [5R]: Toggles HF test status & results. Toggle options for test status are READY, CONFIRM?,
STARTED. Pressing LSK the first time causes CONFIRM? to appear the second press initiates the tests. Test
result is: PASS or FAIL or TIMEOUT. This field will revert to the "READY" prompt if the HF self test is not
confirmed within 5 seconds.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the HF radio is located.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-48
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TRANSPONDERS (ATC RADIO)

The FMS supports the following ATC Radios in the code range and channel spacing specified below:

NOTE: ATC Radio equipment name can be configured as “ATC”, “XPDR” or “TPDR”.

ATCRBS MODE A
RADIO MODEL INCREMENT NOTE
CODE RANGE (octal)
RC TDR 94D-005 0 to 7777 1 -
BK MST-67A 0 to 7777 1 -

Figure 13-6: ATC Radio Models, Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System

NOTE: The FMS does not accept out of range values. An error message will appear in the scratchpad if
invalid entries are made by the user.

TRANSPONDERS (ATC Page 1/2)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the ATC radios by transmitting and receiving digital labels
capable of controlling up to 2 ATC radios.

Display the first ATC RADIO 1/2 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <ATC> or
[RADIO], [NEXT], <ATC> or [RADIO], [RADIO], <ATC> or [ATC], [TPDR] or [XPDR].

Display the first ATC RADIO 1/2 page from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <ATC> or
[RADIO], <RADIO DETAILS>, <ATC> or [RADIO], [RADIO], <ATC>.
ATC 1/2
ATC1 ATC2
b 1200 2200b
1L 1R
1500 4600
2L 2R
MODE C MODE C
3L >ON OFF< 3R
STATUS STATUS
4L >ACTIVE STANDBY< 4R

5L >IDENT EMERGENCY< 5R
CTL
6L <RADIO FMS 6R

NOTES: The ATC equipment name can also be configured as “TPDR” or “XPDR”.

The ATC ident suffix "x" (e.g. ATC, ATC1...) and the side (left or right) where the ATC units appear is
depending on the installation configuration. The tables below provide examples.

It is recommended to always install the ATC control/status on the first RADIO top page next to line
select keys [5L]/ [5R].

The page title and acronym used must be identical to the Front panel Function Key acronym when
implemented.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-49
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ATC1 [1L]: Displays and allows modification of the active and standby identity code for the ATC1 transponder.
Enter identifier in scratchpad and press LSK 1L. Entry may be made to the standby position only when a new
value is in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad is empty it toggles between active/standby identifiers.

When a radio has been tuned to a new code from a remote control unit (RCU) and the radio is capable of providing
tuning feedback, the new code is displayed in the active field and the current active code is moved in the standby
field. This way, consistent setting is displayed on both control units.
The FMS displays a tuned active code in large font white color. During the tuning process, the active code is
displayed in large font inverse white color. If the tuning operation is not successful, the code is displayed in small
font amber color as a warning to the pilot. If an EMERGENCY request is made when this field already showing the
active code in amber, then this field will change to show the active code in inverse video amber font.

For S/W 300V and higher:

When the ATC is transmitting the “IDENT” pulse (refer to 5L below), the following rules apply:
• entry of an ATC code in the standby field is allowed only for emergency codes
• toggling the standby/active code is allowed only if the standby code is an emergency code
For non-emergency ATC codes, the FMS will display an advisory message (!NO ENTRY ALLOWED) to inform
the user that the FMS cannot accept the command.

ATC2 [1R]: Same as above, but referencing ATC2 instead of ATC1 and LSK 2R instead of LSK 1L.

NOTE: For ATC1 and ACT2 it is possible to have "-" in one or both of the active and standby fields after FMS
maintenance. At that time, a code needs to be entered in the standby position first before the
active/standby field toggling is allowed, otherwise a warning message will be displayed in the scratchpad.

MODE C [3L]: Toggles ATC1 SSR Mode C functions for the ATC radio. The possible values are ON and OFF.

MODE C [3R]: Same as above, but referencing ATC2 instead of ATC1.

NOTE: New code and setting are accepted when the radio is in "STANDBY" mode, but the tuning of the radio
to the new code and/or setting will only occur when the radio status will be set to "ACTIVE"

STATUS1 [4L]: Displays the activity status of the ATC1 transponder. Pressing this softkey selects the next
option. The possible values are ACTIVE and STANDBY. The STATUS1 is automatically switched to ACTIVE
on a transition from ground to airborne and is automatically switched to STANDBY upon a transition from
airborne to ground. Only one ATC unit can be active at a given time, therefore making one of them active will
cause the other to become standby.

STATUS2 [4R]: Same as above, but referencing ATC2 instead of ATC1.

IDENT [5L]: Allow the crew to add the Special Position Identification "IDENT" pulse to the ATCRBS Mode A
reply code on the ATC radio which is "ACTIVE". It is possible to re-initiate the "IDENT" at any time, including
when it is already being transmitted.

EMERGENCY [5R]: Displayed in large font green when the configured emergency code is not 0000, otherwise
the field is blank. Pressing this softkey transmits the configured emergency code to the ATC and sets the
transponder status to active. Displayed in large font inverse green as long as the active code is an emergency
code and the radio is active.

NOTE: Activation of emergency mode on ground will only be possible if the ATC ON GND configuration option
on the A429 ATC CONFIG 1/2 page has been selected.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the ATC transponder is located.

CTL [6R]: Available only when the transponder is configured to be controlled by either the FMS or an external
Mission Computer, otherwise this field is blank. This field displays whether the FMS or the Mission Computer is
in tuning control of the transponder. The crew can tune the transponder from the FMS only when the FMS is in
control.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-50
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TRANSPONDERS (ATC Page 2/2)

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the ATC radios by transmitting and receiving digital labels
capable of controlling up to 2 ATC units.

NOTE: This page is only displayed if radio test is configured.

Display the second ATC RADIO page 1/2 from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <ATC>,
[NEXT] or [RADIO], [NEXT], <ATC>, [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <ATC>, [NEXT] or [ATC] or [TPDR] or
[XPDR], [NEXT].

Display the second ATC RADIO page 1/2 from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <ATC>,
[NEXT] or [RADIO], <RADIO DETAILS>, <ATC>, [NEXT] or [RADIO], [RADIO], <ATC>, [NEXT].
ATC 2/2

1L 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
ATC1 TEST ATC2 TEST
5L >R E A D Y READY< 5R

6L <RADIO 6R

ATC 2/2

1L 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
ATC1 TEST ATC2 TEST
5L >R E A D Y READY< 5R
CTL
6L <RADIO FMS 6R

NOTE: The ATC equipment name can also be configured as “TPDR” or “XPDR”.
The ATC ident suffix "x" (e.g. ATC, ATC1...) and the side (left or right) where the ATC units appear is
depending on the installation configuration.

ATC1 TEST [5L]: Toggles ATC1 test status & results. Toggle options for test status are READY, CONFIRM?,
STARTED. Pressing LSK the first time causes CONFIRM? to appear the second press initiates the tests. Test
result is: PASS or FAIL or TIMEOUT.

NOTE: In dual ATC installations, selecting either LSK 5L or LSK 5R initiates a self-test on ATC1 and ATC2
simultaneously.

ATC2 TEST [5R]: Same as above, but referencing ATC2 instead of ATC1.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-51
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the ATC transponder is located.

CTL [6R]: Available only when the transponder is configured to be controlled by either the FMS or an external
Mission Computer, otherwise this field is blank. This field displays whether the FMS or the Mission Computer is in
tuning control of the transponder. The crew can tune the transponder from the FMS only when the FMS is in
control.

IFF TRANSPONDER 1/2

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the IFF transponder by transmitting and receiving digital
labels. Only single IFF installations are supported.

Display the first IFF 1/2 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <IFF> or [RADIO], [NEXT],
<IFF> or [RADIO], [RADIO], <IFF>.
IFF 1/2
MODE 3/A CODE MODE 1
Ú1200 E M E R ON<
1L 1R
1500 MODE 2
2L ON< 2R
MODE C MODE 3/A
3L >ON ON< 3R
MASTER MODE MODE S
4L >ACTIVE ON< 4R
EMERGENCY
5L >IDENT ON< 5R

6L <RADIO 6R

MODE 3/A CODE [1L]: Displays and allows modification of the active and standby identity code for the IFF
transponder. Enter identifier in scratchpad and press LSK1L. Entry may be made to the standby position only
when a new value is in the scratchpad. If the scratchpad is empty it toggles between active/standby identifiers.
The FMS displays a tuned active code in large font white color. During the tuning process, the active code is
displayed in large font inverse white color. If the tuning operation is not successful, the code is displayed in small
font amber color as a warning to the pilot. If the transponder "IDENT" mode is active, the code is displayed in large
font inverse green color.

New code and setting are accepted when the IFF master mode is in "STANDBY" or mode 3/A is "OFF", but the
tuning of the IFF to the new code and/or setting will only occur when the IFF status will be set to "ACTIVE" and
mode 3/A is "ON". The valid range for the MODE 3/A code is a 4 digit code 0000-7777 (where each digit ranges
from 0 to 7, inclusive). AN "EMER" string is displayed in white inverse video when the EMERGENCY is set to
"ON”.

If the transponder "IDENT" mode is active, attempting to toggle the standby and active fields is not allowed; and
attempting to enter a code in the standby field is not allowed and in both cases, the FMS generates an advisory
message to inform the pilot that the FMS can not accept the command.

MODE C [3L]: Used to enable or disable the IFF transponder Mode C altitude code. The possible values are "ON"
and "OFF".

MASTER MODE [4L]: Displays the current status of the IFF transponder master mode. Pressing this softkey
selects the next option. The possible values are ACTIVE and STANDBY. The Master Mode can be controlled
by an external switch.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-52
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

IDENT [5L]: Allows the crew to add the Special Position Identification "IDENT" pulse to the IFF Mode 3/A reply.
It is possible to re-initiate the "IDENT" period at any time, including those times during which it is already being
transmitted.

The caret in large font green color pointing inward is displayed when the IFF MASTER MODE is "ACTIVE" and
the MODE 3/A is "ON".

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the IFF transponder unit is located.

MODE 1 [1R]: Used to set/unset MODE 1 code transmission. The possible values are "ON" and "OFF". It will be
possible to toggle between ON and OFF only if a valid mode 1 code exists.

MODE 2 [2R]: Used to set/unset MODE 2 code transmission. The possible values are "ON" and "OFF". It will be
possible to toggle between ON and OFF only if a valid mode 2 code exists.

MODE 3/A [3R]: Used to set/unset MODE 3/A code transmission. The possible values are "ON" and "OFF".

MODE S [4R]: Used to set/unset MODE S code transmission. The possible values are "ON" and "OFF". It will be
possible to toggle between ON and OFF only if a valid mode S code exists.

EMERGENCY [5R]: Used to set or unset the EMERGENCY transmission, the possible values are "ON" and
"OFF". Setting this field to “ON” allows the crew to set the IFF master mode to "ACTIVE", Only for CIVIL
emergency, display the "EMERGENCY CODE" that is configured on page A429 IFF CONFIG 1/1 on the active IFF
transponder Mode 3/A code, and set the IFF transponder "PWR" to "ON".

The EMERGENCY field will be set to “OFF” if the IFF transponder status is changed to "STANDBY", or the IFF
EMERGENCY is set to "OFF", or the IFF power is set to "OFF, or, only for "CIVIL" emergency, the IFF transponder
line select key [1L] is pressed (active and standby code toggle field)

NOTE: The selection between the "CIVIL" or "MILITARY" code is made on page IFF 2/2.

IFF TRANSPONDER 2/2

This page allows the pilot to control the operation of the IFF transponder by transmitting and receiving digital
labels. Only single IFF installations are supported.

Display IFF 2/2 page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <IFF>, [NEXT] or [RADIO], [NEXT],
<IFF>, [NEXT], or [RADIO], [RADIO], <IFF>, [NEXT].

IFF 2/2
MD 1 CODE FLIGHT ID
1L 52 CMC42000 1R
MD 2 CODE MD 1 TYPE
2L 3231 2_DIGITS< 2R
MD S ADDR EMER TYPE
3L 01234567 CIVIL< 3R
X PULSE
4L ON< 4R
IFF TEST ANTENNA
5L >READY BOTH< 5R
MD S SQUITTER
6L <RADIO ON< 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-53
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MD 1 CODE [1L]: Used to display and set the two or four digit IFF Mode 1 code. The FMS displays a tuned
active code in large font white color. During the tuning process, the active code is displayed in large font inverse
white color. If the tuning operation is not successful, the code is displayed in small font amber color to indicate a
tuning failure.
Valid range for 2 digit code 00-73 (where tens digit ranges from 0 to 7, inclusive, and the units digit ranges from 0
to 3, inclusive).
Valid range for 4 digit code 0000-7777 (where each digit ranges from 0 to 7, inclusive).

NOTE: New code and setting are accepted when the IFF master mode is in "STANDBY" or the mode 1 is
"OFF", but the tuning of the IFF to the new code and/or setting will only occur when the IFF status will
be set to "ACTIVE" and mode 1 is "ON".

MD 2 CODE [2L]: Used to display and set the four digit IFF Mode 2 code. The FMS displays a tuned active code
in large font white color. During the tuning process, the active code is displayed in large font inverse white color. If
the tuning operation is not successful, the code is displayed in small font amber color to indicate a tuning failure.
Valid range for 4 digit code 0000-7777 (where each digit ranges from 0 to 7, inclusive).

NOTE: New code and setting are accepted when the IFF master mode is in "STANDBY" or the mode 2 is
"OFF", but the tuning of the IFF to the new code and/or setting will only occur when the IFF status will
be set to "ACTIVE" and mode 2 is "ON".

MD S ADDR [3L]: Used to display and set the IFF mode S address... The FMS displays a tuned active code in
large font white color. During the tuning process, the active code is displayed in large font inverse white color. If the
tuning operation is not successful, the code is displayed in small font amber color to indicate a tuning failure.
Any 8-digit octal mode S address can be entered.
Valid range for 8 digit code 00000000-77777777 (where each digit ranges from 0 to 7, inclusive).

NOTE: New code and setting are accepted when the IFF master mode is in "STANDBY" or the mode S is
"OFF", but the tuning of the IFF to the new code and/or setting will only occur when the IFF status will
be set to "ACTIVE" and mode S is "ON".

IFF TEST [5L]: Toggles IFF test status & results. Toggle options for test status are READY, CONFIRM?,
STARTED. Pressing LSK the first time causes CONFIRM? to appear the second press initiates the tests. Test
result is: PASS or FAIL or TIMEOUT.

NOTE: With the IFF MASTER MODE set to ACTIVE, upon self-test activation, the IFF transponder will execute a
more complete/extensive self-test that includes a transponder transmission test.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the IFF transponder is located.

FLIGHT ID [1R]: Allows entry of the IFF transponder's mode S flight ID. This field could contain up to 8
alphanumeric characters.

NOTE: The flight ID seen on this page corresponds to the flight no seen on the RTE page, e.g. changing this field
changes the value seen on the RTE page, and vice-versa.

MD 1 TYPE [2R]: Allows selection of the type of mode 1 code. Toggle options are 2_DIGITS or 4_DIGITS.

EMER TYPE [3R]: Allows selection of the emergency type. The emergency code corresponding to the selected
type will be activated when EMERGENCY is selected on IFF page 1/2. Toggle options are CIVIL or MILITARY.

X PULSE [4R]: Allows to set or unset the IFF X PULSE transmission. Toggle options are ON or OFF.

ANTENNA [5R]: Allows user to control various IFF antenna options. Toggle options are TOP, BOTTOM, or BOTH.

MD S SQUITTER [6R]: Allows to set or unset the IFF MODE-S squitter. Toggle options are ON or OFF.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-54
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RADIOS VOLUME 1/1 PAGE

The page is only available when the MC has failed and the FMS has taken the control of the volume levels.

Access to the RADIO VOLUME page is only available when the FMS has the control of the AMU.

Display RADIO VOLUME page 1/1 from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], <VOL> or [RADIO],
[NEXT], <VOL> or [RADIO], [RADIO], <VOL>.

RADIO VOLUME 1/1

↑ ↑
1L 1R
17 COM1 COM2 6
2L ↓ ↓
2R

3L ↑ ↑ 3R
3 NAV1 NAV2 10
4L ↓ ↓ 4R

5L b 5R
IC 14
6L <RADIO ↓ 6R

NOTE: Only the radio installed and for which the volume level can be controlled are displayed, except IC
which is not a configurable equipment.

↑ [1L]/[1R]/[3L]/[3R]/[5R]: When the scratchpad is empty, the line select keys are used to decrement the
selected radio volume level. When a valid volume level is entered in the scratchpad and the line select key
pressed, the volume of the corresponding radio is set to that new value.
When the MC takes control of the volume levels while in the page, the volume levels will be displayed as status
only, therefore their display will change from large font white color to small font white color. Furthermore, after
exiting the page, access to the Radio Volume page from the RADIO top level page will not be available
anymore.
During the tuning process, the radio volume level is displayed in large font inverse white color. If the tuning
operation is not successful, the volume level is displayed in small font amber color as a warning to the pilot.
Furthermore, the FMS will provide warnings if the AMU or radios fail or are not responding to the tuning request.
The valid volume level range is between 0 and 20.

↓ [2L]/[2R]/[4L]/[4R]/[6R]: When the scratchpad is empty, the line select keys are used to increment the
selected radio volume level. When a valid volume level is entered in the scratchpad and the line select key
pressed, the volume of the corresponding radio is set to that new value.
When the MC takes control of the volume levels while in the page, the volume levels will be displayed as status
only, therefore their display will change from large font white color to small font white color. Furthermore, after
exiting the page, access to the Radio Volume page from the RADIO top level page will not be available
anymore.
During the tuning process, the radio volume level is displayed in large font inverse white color. If the tuning
operation is not successful, the volume level is displayed in small font amber color as a warning to the pilot.
Furthermore, the FMS will provide warnings if the AMU or radios fail or are not responding to the tuning request.
The valid volume level range is between 0 and 20.

RADIO [6L]: Access to the RADIO top level page where the VOLUME is located.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-55
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PHONE TOP 1/1

This page allows the pilot to access phone sub pages. This is the top level entry page for the phone system
(either HCS or Iridium).

Display PHONE TOP 1/1 page by pressing [RADIO], <PHONE>.

NOTE: The PHONE can only be configured in the "vertical"configuration option of the RADIO top page.

PHONE TOP 1/1

1L <VOICE CALL READ SMS> 1R

2L <DIALED SEND SMS> 2R

3L PRE-CANNED SMS> 3R

4L STORED SMS> 4R

5L <PHONE LIBRARY 5R

6L <RADIO 6R

VOICE CALL [1L]: Access to PHONE: VOICE CALL page.

READ SMS [1R]: Access to PHONE: READ SMS page.

DIALED [2L]: Access to PHONE: DIALED TOP page.

SEND SMS [2R]: Access to PHONE: SEND SMS page.

PRE-CANNED SMS [3R]: Access to PHONE: PRE-CANNED SMS page.

STORED SMS [4R]: Access to PHONE: STORED SMS page.

PHONE LIBRARY [5L]: Access to PHONE: LIBRARY page.

RADIO [6L]: Access to RADIO top page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-56
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PHONE VOICE CALL 1/2

This page allows the pilot to transmit/receive Phone Voice Calls.

Display PHONE VOICE CALL 1/2 page by pressing [RADIO], <PHONE>, <VOICE CALL> (When the PHONE or
HCS is configured)

NOTE: The PHONE can only be configured in the "vertical" configuration option of the RADIO top page.

PHONE: VOICE CALL 1/2 PHONE: VOICE CALL 1/2

SELECT NAME OR PHONE# SELECT NAME OR PHONE#

1L DOMINIQUES/915147483000> 1L
<9 8 7 6 5 4 1R
1R

2L 2R 2L 2R

3L 3R 3L 3R
SIGNAL STRENGTH SIGNAL STRENGTH
4L 80% 4R 4L 80% 4R

5L CALL> 5R 5L CALL> 5R

6L <PHONE TOP LIBRARY> 6R 6L <PHONE TOP LIBRARY> 6R

SELECT NAME OR PHONE# [1L]: Displays name and/or phone number. Pressing this soft key will transfer the
content of the scratchpad to this field. If the scratchpad contains a phone number then only the phone number
will appear. If the scratchpad contains a name (as specified in the Phone Library) then the name will appear
followed by the associated phone number (separated by a slash "/" character). When name + phone number
entered the priority is given to the name (e.g. only the name is considered and number is ignored).

NOTE: When a phone number or name/phone number exceed 24 characters, this LSK is also used to return to
the display of the first 23 characters.
In the case where only a phone number is entered and the phone number is longer than 24 characters
then extra digits can be added using the 2 characters "/-". Any digit after the 2 characters "/-" will be
appended to the current phone number.
Valid characters for the name are any letters from A to Z and any digits from 0 to 9 and the character
plus "+". The name must start with a letter.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-57
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SELECT NAME OR PHONE# [1R]: If the phone number or the name/phone number exceeds 24 characters,
then it will be possible to see the extra characters by pressing this soft key. The display will scroll to show the
extra characters.

SIGNAL STRENTGH [4L]: Displays the signal strength of the phone. (This field is only visible for the iridium
phone configuration).

POWER [4R]: Turns the phone ON or OFF.

(This field is only visible for the GSM phone. Not applicable to Iridium configuration).

NOTE: Will display dashes when communication is totally lost.

CALL [5R]: Initiates the phone call. This will transmit a DIAL command to the phone transceiver using the
displayed phone number. When CALL is selected, the page PHONE VOICE CALL 2/2 is automatically
displayed.
For the Iridium phone:
This prompt is blank if:
• No phone number has been entered, or
• The phone is not available (e.g. failed), or
• The call status is: RINGING, DIALING or CONNECTION ESTABLISHED (phone is busy).

For the GSM phone:

in S/W 300: This prompt is blank if:
• No phone number has been entered, or
• The phone is not available (e.g. failed), or
• The call status is: RINGING, DIALING or CONNECTION ESTABLISHED (phone is busy).
in S/W 300V and higher: This prompt is blank if:
• No phone number has been entered, or
• The phone is not available (e.g. failed).

PHONE TOP [6L]: Access to PHONE top page.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to PHONE LIBRARY page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-58
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PHONE VOICE CALL 2/2

This page allows the pilot to transmit/receive Phone Voice Calls.

Display PHONE VOICE CALL 2/2 page by pressing [RADIO], <PHONE>, <VOICE CALL> [NEXT] (When the
PHONE or HCS is configured)

NOTE: The PHONE can only be configured in the "vertical" configuration option of the RADIO top page.

PHONE: VOICE CALL 2/2

CALL RECEIVED:
1L 1R
CALL STATUS
2L RINGING
2R
PHONE STATUS
3L READY
3R
SIGNAL STRENGTH
4L 80% 4R

5L >A N S W E R HANG UP< 5R

6L <PHONE TOP LIBRARY> 6R

CALLING: [1L]: Displays name and/or phone number called. This field is only displayed when the call is
initiated from the FMS.

CALL RECEIVED: [1L]: Displays phone number of the caller (only if available). This field is only displayed
when a call is received by the FMS.

CALL STATUS (2L): Displays the Call Status after a voice call command (dial/answer/hang up) has been
initiated.

For the GSM phone, the possible values are CONNECTION IN PROGRESS, CONNECTION ESTABLISHED,
DISCONNECTED, BUSY, PARAMETER ERROR, CONNECTION ERROR and GSM FAULT. Display is blank if
no voice call command has been initiated in the last 10 seconds.

For the Iridium phone, the possible values are:

--------------: when communication is totally lost with the phone
IDLE: when the phone is working and in idle (no call tx, no call rx)
DIALING: when the FMS is calling someone
RINGING: when the phone receives a call from the network
CONNECTION ESTABLISHED: when the call is in progress
NO DIALTONE: when FMS initiates a call and the phone returns the message NO DIAL TONE
NO ANSWER: when FMS initiates a call and the phone returns the message NO ANSWER
NO CARRIER: when FMS initiates a call and the phone returns the message NO CARRIER
BUSY: when FMS initiates a call and the phone returns the message BUSY
ERROR: when FMS initiates a call and the phone returns an error message.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-59
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PHONE STATUS (3L): Displays the phone status.

For the GSM phone, the possible values are: CONNECTION ACTIVE, CONNECTION NOT ACTIVE,
INCOMING CALL and GSM FAULT.
For the iridium phone, the possible values are: -----------, READY, UNAVAILABLE, UNKNOWN, RINGING, IN
PROGRESS.

NOTE: Will display dashes when communication is totally lost.

SIGNAL STRENGTH [4L]: Displays the signal strength of the phone. This field is only visible for the iridium
phone configuration.

POWER [4R]: (not shown on figure) Turns the phone ON or OFF. Only applicable to GSM phone. Not
applicable to Iridium configuration.

NOTE: Will display dashes when communication is totally lost.

ANSWER [5L]: Transmits an ANSWER command to the phone transceiver. When ANSWER is selected, it is
displayed in inverse green large font for 2 seconds.
For the Iridium phone: This prompt is displayed only when there is a received call, otherwise it is blank.

For the GSM phone:

in S/W 300: This prompt is displayed only when there is a received call, otherwise it is blank.
in S/W 300V and higher: This prompt is blank only if the phone is not available (e.g. failed).

HANG UP [5R]: Transmits a HANGUP command to the phone transceiver. When HANG UP is selected, it is
displayed in inverse green large font for 2 seconds.
For the Iridium phone: This prompt is displayed only when the phone is in ringing state or a call is established,
otherwise it is blank.

For the GSM phone:

in S/W 300: This prompt is displayed only when the phone is in ringing state or a call is established,
otherwise it is blank.
in S/W 300V and higher: This prompt is blank only if the phone is not available (e.g. failed).

PHONE TOP [6L]: Access to PHONE top page.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to PHONE LIBRARY page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-60
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PHONE READ SMS 1/N

This page provides the pilot with access to incoming SMS text messages received from the Phone. The
incoming messages are listed in order of age (most recent message on top). The messages are assigned a
name which includes its time of reception of the format selected on the CONFIG->DISPLAY->DATE selection.
For example (ddmmmyy/hhmm: ss or mmmdd/yy/hhm : ss where, mmm =month alpha, dd =day, yy =year, hh
=hours, mm =minutes and ss =seconds).

NOTE: That if time is UTC a small z is added after the seconds to indicate Zulu time.

Only the most recent 35 incoming messages are listed, older ones (read and unread) are automatically deleted.
New messages appear in white large font until they are read. Messages that have already been opened are
displayed in small blue font.

Display PHONE READ SMS 1/N page by pressing [RADIO], <PHONE>, <READ SMS> (When the PHONE or
HCS is configured)

NOTE: The PHONE can only be configured in the "vertical" configuration option of the RADIO top page.

PHONE: READ SMS 1/N

1L
<01OCT/07/1900:20 1R

2L <01OCT/07/0950:32 2R

3L <02JAN/07/1540:50 3R

4L <1 5 O C T / 0 6 / 0 5 1 4 : 2 0 4R

5L <2 3 J U N / 0 6 / 1 3 0 0 : 3 0 5R

6L <P H O N E T O P 6R

ddMM/yy/hhmm : ss [1L..5L]: Access to PHONE: SMS MESSAGE 1/1 to display a received SMS text message.
The most recently received SMS text message is displayed at [1L] and the oldest received one is displayed at
[5L].

PHONE TOP [6L]: Access to PHONE top page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-61
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PHONE SEND SMS 1/3

This page allows the pilot to select the person to whom the SMS is for.

Display PHONE SEND SMS 1/3 page by pressing [RADIO], <PHONE>, <SEND SMS>. (When the PHONE or
HCS is configured)

NOTE: The PHONE can only be configured in the "vertical" configuration option of the RADIO top page.
PHONE: SEND SMS 1/3
SELECT NAME OR PHONE#
DOMINIQUES/915147483000>
1L 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R
SIGNAL STRENGTH
4L 80% 4R

5L WRITE TXT> 5R

6L <PHONE TOP LIBRARY> 6R

SELECT NAME OR PHONE# [1L]: Displays name and phone number.

For the Iridium phone:
Pressing this softkey will transfer the content of the scratchpad to this field. If the scratchpad contains a
phone number then only the phone number will appear. If the scratchpad contains a name (as specified in
the Phone Library) then the name will appear followed by the associated phone number. When a name &
phone number exceed 24 characters, this LSK is also used to return to the display of the first 23 characters.
If the phone number to enter is longer than 24 characters then extra digits can be added using the
characters /-. Any digit after the characters /- will be appended to the current phone number.
The value is always kept and is reset (e.g. dashes) by a cold start on-ground.

For the GSM phone:

in S/W 300:
Pressing this softkey will transfer the content of the scratchpad to this field. If the scratchpad contains a
phone number then only the phone number will appear. If the scratchpad contains a name (as specified
in the Phone Library) then the name will appear followed by the associated phone number. When a
name & phone number exceed 24 characters, this LSK is also used to return to the display of the first
23 characters.
If the phone number to enter is longer than 24 characters then extra digits can be added using the
characters /-. Any digit after the characters /- will be appended to the current phone number.
The value is always kept and is reset (e.g. dashes) by a cold start on-ground.
in S/W 300V:
This field always shows “GROUND STATION” and doesn’t accept a user entry.

SELECT NAME OR PHONE# [1R]: If the phone number & name exceeds 24 characters, then it will be possible
to see the extra characters by pressing this softkey. The display will scroll to show the extra characters.

SIGNAL STRENTGH [4L]: Displays the signal strength of the phone. This field is only visible for the iridium
phone configuration.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-62
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

POWER [4R]: (not shown on figure) Turns the phone ON or OFF. Only applicable to GSM phone. Not
applicable to Iridium configuration.

NOTE: Will display dashes when communication is totally lost.

WRITE TXT [5R]: Goes into text editing mode. When WRITE TXT is selected, the page 2/3 is automatically
displayed.
The default is blank. The prompt is displayed only when a name/phone number has been entered (on line 1L).
This prompt is blank if:
• No phone number has been entered, or
• The phone is not available (e.g. failed)

PHONE TOP [6L]: Access to PHONE top page.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to PHONE LIBRARY page.

PHONE SEND SMS 2/3

This page allows the pilot to edit the SMS text message and then subsequently transmit the message. The basic
editing features are available on this page, such as: move cursor right, left, up, down, insert and overwrite edit
mode, copy a text line. 6 lines of text are displayed at a time. The pilot can use [NEXT] and [PREV] to move the
cursor up and down to scroll through the entire text message. An auto wrap feature will break lines between
words for readability.

Display PHONE SEND SMS 2/3 page by pressing [RADIO], <PHONE>, <SEND SMS> (When the PHONE or
HCS is configured),or <WRITE TXT> [RADIO], <PHONE>, <SEND SMS> (When the PHONE or HCS is
configured), [NEXT].

NOTE: The PHONE can only be configured in the "vertical" configuration option of the RADIO top page.

This page is displayed as follows when text with more than 6 lines entered (note up and down cursors appearing
in the last column of the editor):

NOTE: When operating in EDIT mode, MOD is displayed in the upper left corner of the page.

MOD PHONE: SEND SMS 2/3

- ENTER MESSAGE BELOW -
1L
SUCCESSFUL. 3 INJURED ^ 1R
PEOPLE FOUND. PREPARE
2L AMBULANCE WHEN HELICO 2R
BACK TO BASE.
3L ESTIMATED ARRIVAL = v 3R
15:28
4L >M O D E INSERT< 4R
EDIT SPARE CHAR= 41
5L <L E F T - M O V E C U R S O R - R I G H T > 5R
FREQ TOP>
6L >P O S R E P O R T C L E A R T E X T < 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-63
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This page is displayed as follows once the SMS text message has been edited and is ready to be transmitted
(READY TO TRANSMIT mode):

NOTE: The message to be transmitted can only contain a maximum of 160 alphanumeric characters.

PHONE: SEND SMS 2/3

- ENTER MESSAGE BELOW -
1L RESCUE RESEARCH 1R
SUCCESSFUL. 3 INJURED
2L PEOPLE FOUND. PREPARE 2R
AMBULANCE WHEN HELICO
3L BACK TO BASE. 3R

4L >M O D E SAVE SMS< 4R

READY TO TX READY
5L TO: CHANGE #> 5R
PETER/5147483000
6L <PHONE TOP TRANSMIT> 6R

[1L], [2L], [3L]: When operating in EDIT mode, if the scratchpad is empty, pressing these softkeys will transfer
the entire text line from the line directly associated with the softkey to the scratchpad. If the scratchpad contains
any text, then the system will copy that text into the line directly associated with the softkey and place the cursor
at the end of this line. In overwrite mode, the text at this line is replaced by the scratchpad text. In insert mode,
the scratchpad text is inserted on this line and the text below this line is pushed down one line.

[1R], [2R], [3R]: When operating in EDIT mode, if the scratchpad is empty, pressing these softkeys will transfer
the entire text line from the line just below the softkey to the scratchpad. If the scratchpad contains any text,
then the system will copy that text into the line just below the softkey and place the cursor at the end of this line.
In overwrite mode, the text at this line is replaced by the scratchpad text. In insert mode, the scratchpad text is
inserted on this line and the text below this line is pushed down one line.

[1R] [3R]: When operating in EDIT mode and when the message text contains more than 6 lines up and down
cursors appear at position 1R and 3R to allow scrolling window movement. The 1R prompt will move the window
one line up and the 3R prompt will move the window one line down.

MODE [4L]: Toggle between EDIT and READY TO TX. The default value when coming from the SEND SMS
1/3 page via the LSK WRITE TXT is EDIT. When operating in EDIT mode, pressing this key exit the EDIT mode
and goes to READY TO TX mode.

INSERT [4R]: When operating in EDIT mode, pressing this key controls the text entry mode by toggling
between INSERT and OVERWRITE entry mode.

NOTE: When OVERWRITE mode is selected, the cursor is displayed in inverse green video.

SPARE CHAR= (4R): When operating in EDIT mode, this field displays the number of spare characters
available.
For the Iridium phone: The maximum number of spare characters is 160.

For the GSM phone:

in S/W 300: The maximum number of spare characters is 160.
in S/W 300V and higher: The maximum number of spare characters is 66.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-64
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SAVE SMS [4R]: This prompt is only available in READY TO TX mode. The default value is READY. When
pressed, the text is saved in the first available slot. Each subsequent press will "push" the older message saved
to the slot n+1 (queue principle). If more than 10 messages were already saved, the last one will be completely
lost. Also, once saved, the prompt changes to SAVED. If the mode goes back to edit then the prompt toggles to
READY.

<LEFT-MOVE CURSOR-RIGHT> [5L],[5R]: When operating in EDIT mode, these keys control the cursor
movement laterally in the text field. Pressing the RIGHT key [5R] when the cursor is at the end of a line or the
LEFT key [5L] when the cursor is at the beginning of a line will cause the cursor to automatically wrap around to
the next or previous line. This entire field disappears when in READY TO TX mode.

TO: (5L): Displays name and/or phone number to whom the SMS is dedicated.

CHANGE # > [5R]:

For the Iridium phone:
When operating in READY TO TX mode, pressing this key allows the operator to change the caller's name
and/or phone number. When CHANGE # is selected, it automatically jumps to the SEND SMS 1/3 page.

For the GSM phone:

In S/W 300:
When operating in READY TO TX mode, pressing this key allows the operator to change the caller's
name and/or phone number. When CHANGE # is selected, it automatically jumps to the SEND SMS 1/3
page.
In S/W 300V and higher: This prompt is blank.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-65
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

POS REPORT [6L]: When operating in EDIT mode, pressing this key enters the current date & time, the flight
identifier (as entered on the RTE page) and the current aircraft position (in whatever format selected on the
SETUP page). The information is entered at the cursor position and started on a new line. Once pressed, the
cursor is set to the end of the position report data. The time format will always be in UTC (e.g. not local). If the
available number of characters is not enough to enter the complete position report information, a data entry
error message is displayed (e.g. !EDITOR BUFFER FULL).

The format of the position report is as follows:

ddmmmyyyy/hhmm:ssUTC
FLT ID=iiiiiiiiii
POS (jjjjjjjjjj)=
pppppppppppppppppppp
where
dd = day (01-31)
mmm = month (jan-dec)
yyyy = year (2008-20xx)
hh = hour (00-23)
mm = minute (00-59)
ss = second (00-59)
iiiiiiiiii = flight id (as entered on the RTE 1/2 page)
jjjjjjjjjj = Datum (as selected on the SETUP 1/1 page)
pppppppppppppppppppp = position (according to coordinate system selected on the SETUP 1/1 page)

PHONE TOP [6L]: Access to PHONE top page. This prompt is only available in READY TO TX mode.

CLEAR TXT [6R]: When operating in EDIT mode, pressing this key clears the entire text message. This prompt
is only available when the message text contains at least one character.

TRANSMIT > [6R]: When operating in READY TO TX mode, pressing this key transmits the entire entered text
message. When TRANSMIT is selected, it automatically jumps to the SEND SMS 3/3 page.
For the Iridium phone:
This prompt is blank if:
• The phone is not available (e.g. failed), or
• The call status is RINGING, DIALING or CONNECTION ESTABLISHED (phone is busy)

For the GSM phone

in S/W 300:
• The phone is not available (e.g. failed), or
• The call status is RINGING, DIALING or CONNECTION ESTABLISHED (phone is busy).
in S/W 300V and higher: This prompt is blank if the phone is not available (e.g. failed).

[NEXT],[PREV]: When operating in EDIT mode, pressing these keys control the cursor movement vertically in
the text field (DOWN/UP). When operating in READY TO TX mode, pressing these keys control the page
displayed.

[CLR]: When operating in EDIT mode, pressing this key deletes the character just before the cursor.

NOTE: If any advisory/alert messages appear on the scratchpad, pressing [CLR] will clear these messages
first.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-66
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PHONE SEND SMS 3/3

This page allows the pilot to enables the pilot to monitor SMS call status & to hang-up during an SMS
transmission.
Access to the PHONE: SEND SMS 3/3 page, from the vertical configuration, is as follows:
[RADIO], <PHONE>, <SEND SMS> (When the PHONE or HCS is configured), <WRITE TXT>, <TRANSMIT> or
[RADIO], <PHONE>, <SEND SMS> (When the PHONE or HCS is configured),[PREV]

Page display when SMS transmission initiated:

PHONE: SEND SMS 3/3

SENDING SMS TO:
1L PETER/5147483000
1R
SMS ERROR CODE
2L 500
2R
PHONE STATUS
3L READY
3R
SIGNAL STRENGTH
4L 80% 4R

5L 5R

6L <PHONE TOP 6R

SENDING SMS TO: [1L]: Displays name and/or phone number to whom the SMS will be transmitted. The
default value is dashes (e.g. when no name / phone number entered).

SMS ERROR CODE(2L): Only when iridium phone configured. Displays the SMS error code received only if
SMS not transmitted properly. Static and dynamic fields are blank as soon as new SMS transmission starts and
remains blank if SMS transmitted properly. The code is a 3 digit value received from the Iridium phone.

PHONE STATUS(3L): Displays the phone status.

For the GSM phone, the possible values are: CONNECTION ACTIVE, CONNECTION NOT ACTIVE,
INCOMING CALL and GSM FAULT.
For the iridium phone, the possible values are: -----------, READY, UNAVAILABLE, UNKNOWN, RINGING, IN
PROGRESS.

NOTE: Will display dashes when communication is totally lost.

SIGNAL STRENTGH [4L]: Displays the signal strength of the phone. This field is only visible for the iridium
phone configuration.

POWER [4R]: (not shown on figure) Turns the phone ON or OFF .Only applicable to GSM phone. Not
applicable to Iridium configuration.

NOTE: Will display dashes when communication is totally lost.

PHONE TOP [6L]: Access to PHONE top page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-67
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PHONE PRECANNED SMS 1/1

Display PHONE PRECANNED SMS 1/1 page by pressing [RADIO], <PHONE>, <PRE-CANNED SMS> (When
the PHONE or HCS is configured), or  [ANS] (When the HCS (GSM phone) and ANS key are configured and no
new unread message nor new received call)

NOTE: The PHONE can only be configured in the "vertical" configuration option of the RADIO top page.

A. This page is defined to allow quick reporting of aircraft status by use of pre-canned SMS text message
templates. Pre-canned templates may be defined and loaded into the system using an external data loader.
Each template includes a header of up to 10 characters for use as a menu item, the template location
[1L…6R] and an expanded text message template. When the pre-canned message contains additional
template text the menu selection is shown with a large white font rather than a small white font for empty
messages. The menus prepared below are from a sample application (NOTE: MISSION 1, 2, 3 and GND
BUSY contain template text while the other selections do not).

NOTE: MISSION 1, 2, 3 and GND BUSY contain template text while the other selections do not.

PHONE:PRECANNED SMS 1/1

1L
>MISSION1 GND FREE<
1R

2L >MISSION2 GND BUSY< 2R

3L >MISSION3 IN SERVICE< 3R

4L AIRBORNE< 4R

5L >E M E R G E N C Y 5R

6L <PHONE TOP 6R

B. Page display after a pre-canned SMS text message containing additional text was selected:

PHONE: SEND SMS 1/3

SELECT NAME OR PHONE#
----------
1L 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R
SIGNAL STRENGTH
4L 80% 4R

5L 5R

6L <PHONE TOP LIBRARY> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-68
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MISSION1 [1L]: Pressing this key can lead to two different results:

1. If the "MISSION 1" pre-canned SMS text message contains additional text, then the displayed page will
automatically change to the SEND SMS page and the “MISSION 1” template SMS text message will be
automatically loaded into this page. This is displayed in the above example where a pre-canned SMS text
message has been created prior to the mission as indicated. The pre-canned message is automatically
opened in EDIT mode with the cursor at line 1 position 1 as shown and OVERWRITE entry mode active.
The pilot can then modify this pre-canned message if required and then send the SMS text message as
indicated in the SEND SMS page description.

2. If the “MISSION 1” pre-canned SMS text message template is empty then the displayed message header
will be automatically sent (e.g. “MISSION 1” is sent as the SMS text message). This implies that the pre-
canned SMS text message is not loaded to the SEND SMS page under these circumstances. When a pre-
canned message containing no additional template text is selected, the displayed font changes from small
white to large inverse green font for 2 seconds in order to indicate that the message is being transmitted.

NOTE: Messages which are sent as displayed are displayed in small white font while messages with additional
pre-canned text are displayed in large white font.

GND FREE [1R]: Same as [1L] for “GND FREE” message.

MISSION2 [2L]: Same as [1L] for “MISSION 2” pre-canned text message.

GND BUSY [2R]: Same as [1L] for “GND BUSY” pre-canned text message.

MISSION3 [3L]: Same as [1L] for “MISSION 3” pre-canned text message.

IN SERVICE [3R]: Same as [1L] for “IN SERVICE” message.

AIRBORNE [4R]: Same as [1L] for “AIRBORNE” message.

EMERGENCY [5L]: Same as [1L] for “EMERGENCY” message.

PHONE TOP [6L]: Access to PHONE top page.

NOTE: Prompt may be overwritten by pre-can message if more than 10 msg loaded.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-69
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PHONE SMS MESSAGE 1/1

This page provides the operator with a display of the incoming SMS text messages. There is a maximum of 160
characters (or 6 lines maximum) that are available for the incoming SMS text message. An auto wrap feature will
break lines between words for readability.

When a new SMS text message is received the <SMS> annunciator will be lit. When this annunciator is lit,
pressing the <PHONE> key from the RADIO page will automatically force the display of the PHONE SMS
MESSAGE 1/1 page and the most recently received text message will be displayed and the annunciator will then
be turned off.

When the ANSWER discrete input is configured, this page is displayed if only one unread SMS exist.

Display PHONE SMS MESSAGE 1/1 page by pressing:

[RADIO],<PHONE> (when the <SMS> annunciator is lit), or
[RADIO],<PHONE>,<READ SMS>,<mmmdd/yy/hhmm:ssz… mmmdd/yy/hhmm:ssz>, or
[ANS] (when HCS (e.g. GSM phone) and ANS key are configured and there is no new voice call (answering a
voice call message has higher priority)); or Pressing the ANSWER discrete input (if discrete input configured).

NOTE: The PHONE can only be configured in the "vertical" configuration option of the RADIO top page.

PHONE:SMS MESSAGE 1/1

16APR/06/1514:50
1L HELICO SN27153 PICKUP
1R
DATA AT BASE
2L 2R

3L 3R

4L >DELETE 4R

5L <READ SMS FORWARD> 5R

TOP>
6L <PHONE TOP READ NEW> 6R

[1L], [2L], [3L], [2R], [4R]: No function.

[1R], [3R]: (not shown in figure) When the message text contains more than 6 lines, up and down cursors
appear at position 1R and 3R to allow scrolling window movement. The 1R prompt will move the window one
line up and the 3R prompt will move the window one line down.

DELETE [4L]: Deletes the message that is currently displayed. The next message automatically takes its place.

READ SMS [5L]: Access to PHONE: READ SMS 1/1 page.

FORWARD [5R]: This prompt will allow the operator to forward the message received to another user. When
pressing this key, the system will pre-load the SEND SMS 2/3 page with the received text and will jump to the
SEND SMS 1/3 page to allow selection of the name/phone number to whom the message is forward.

PHONE TOP [6L]: Access to PHONE top page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-70
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

READ NEW [6R]: This prompt will only be displayed when a new SMS text message is received (as indicated
by the <SMS> annunciator becoming lit) while this page is already displaying a previously received SMS text
message. Pressing this key while this page is displayed will enable the pilot to view other new messages in
sequence of reception as the <SMS> annunciator becomes lit.

PHONE STORED SMS 1/1

This page allows the pilot to access the stored SMS text messages.
The maximum number of stored SMS text message is 10.

Display PHONE: STORED SMS 1/1 page by pressing [RADIO], <PHONE>, <STORED SMS> (When the PHONE
or HCS is configured)

NOTE: The PHONE can only be configured in the "vertical" configuration option of the RADIO top page.

PHONE: STORED SMS 1/1

1L
<SMS1 SMS6> 1R

2L <SMS2 SMS7> 2R

3L <SMS3 SMS8> 3R

4L <SMS4 SMS9> 4R

5L <SMS5 SMS10> 5R

6L <P H O N E T O P 6R

This page is displayed as follows when SMS2 has been selected for deletion (by pressing CLR key then LSK2L).

PHONE: STORED SMS 1/1

1L
<SMS1 SMS6> 1R

2L <SMS2 SMS7> 2R

3L <SMS3 SMS8> 3R

4L <SMS4 SMS9> 4R

5L <SMS5 SMS10> 5R

6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-71
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SMS1 to SMS10 [1L to 5R]: Access to STORED SMS page x/10 to display the stored SMS text messages.

PHONE TOP [6L]: Access to PHONE top page.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancels the deletion of a saved SMS.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirms the deletion of a saved SMS.

PHONE STORED SMS 1/N

This page allows the pilot to select the stored SMS text message and then subsequently transmit the message.

Display PHONE: STORED SMS 1/N page by pressing [RADIO], <PHONE>, <STORED SMS> (When the
PHONE or HCS is configured), <SMSx>

NOTE: The PHONE can only be configured in the "vertical" configuration option of the RADIO top page.

This page is displayed as follows once the SMS text message has been selected.

PHONE:STORED SMS 1/10

1L RESCUE RESEARCH 1R
SUCCESSFUL. 3 INJURED
2L PEOPLE FOUND. PREPARE 2R
AMBULANCE WHEN HELICO
3L BACK TO BASE. 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <STORED SMS SELECT> 6R

This page is displayed when the SMS text message is more than 10 lines.
PHONE:STORED SMS 1/10

1L RESCUE RESEARCH ^ 1R
SUCCESSFUL.
2L 2R
3 INJURED PEOPLE FOUND.
3L 3R
PREPARE AMBULANCE WHEN
4L HELICO BACK TO BASE. 4R
TARGET ARRIVAL 1723Z.
5L V 5R
NEED EXTRA FUEL FOR
6L <STORED SMS SELECT> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-72
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

[1R] [5R]: When the message text contains more than 10 lines up and down cursors appear at position 1R and
5R to allow scrolling window movement. The 1R prompt will move the window one line up and the 5R prompt
will move the window one line down.

SELECT > [6R]: Pressing this key transfers the entire text message entered into the active SEND SMS 2/3
page and displays automatically the page SEND SMS 1/3. Then the operator simply has to select the name or
phone number to whom the SMS is dedicated.

STORED SMS [6L]: Access to STORED SMS top page.

PHONE DIALED TOP 1/N

This page provides the pilot with access to the last dialed calls made & SMS sent from the FMS. The dialed
calls are listed in order of age (most recent message on top). The calls information contains the following
information:

• name of called person (if available)

• phone number of called person
• type of transmission (CALL or SMS)
• date & time

The time of transmission is of the format selected on the CONFIG->DISPLAY->DATE selection. For example
(ddmmmyy/hhmm : ss or mmmdd/yy/hhmm : ss where, mmm =month alpha, dd =day, yy =year, hh =hours, mm
=minutes and ss =seconds).

NOTE: That if time is UTC a small z is added after the seconds to indicate Zulu time.

Only the most recent 10 calls are listed, older ones (read and unread) are automatically deleted.

Access to the PHONE: DIALED TOP 1/N page, from the vertical configuration, is as follows:
[RADIO], <PHONE>, <DIALED> (When the PHONE or HCS is configured)

NOTE: The PHONE can only be configured in the "vertical" configuration option of the RADIO top page.

PHONE: DIALED TOP 1/N

STEFAN/+41338272442
1L 1R
CALL:15NOV/07/1723:18
2L STEFAN/+41338272442
2R
SMS:15NOV/07/1645:58
3L PETER/+41338271234
3R
CALL:12NOV/07/1151:20
4L JOHN/+41338275678 4R
CALL:11NOV/07/0814:49
5L +15147483000 5R
CALL:29OCT/07/1307:31
6L <P H O N E T O P 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-73
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

[1L]: Display of called name (if available) and called number.

[1R]: Display of date & time the call was made & call type. The call type option is either CALL: or SMS:.

[2L..5L] & [2R.5R]: Display of n+1, n+2,n+3, n+4, n+5 calls made (next in history). Where n is based on the
page number.

PHONE TOP [6L]: Access to PHONE top page.

COM LIBRARY 1/N

This page allows the pilot to view and modify the preset numbers, identifiers and frequencies that are stored in
the COM radio library.

Display COM LIBRARY 1/N page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT]…, <COM> or
[RADIO], <COMx> <LIBRARY>.

Display COM LIBRARY 1/N page from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [PREV], <COM> or
[RADIO], [NEXT], <COMx> <LIBRARY>.

COM LIBRARY 1/N

PR/IDENT/FREQ(MHz)
1L
02/KFTE /120.025 1R
ACT1
2L 04/ABC /121.050 -- 2R
SBY1
3L 07/CYUL1/122.075 -- 3R
ACT2
4L 11/ /121.075 -- 4R
SBY2
5L 63/A /120.050 -- 5R

6L <COM RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

The maximum number of COM LIBRARY entries is 99. The maximum number of COM LIBRARY pages is 20.
The [NEXT] and [PREV] keys are used to scroll forward or backward in the preset numbers.

[1L],[2L],[3L],[4L],[5L]: Display and modify COM library entries.

• To add a new record in the library, key into the scratchpad the preset number, the identifier and the frequency,
each separated by the slash symbol (“/”) and press any of the line select keys that are associated with a library
record (LSK 1L, LSK 2L, LSK 3L, LSK 4L or LSK 5L). The new record will be added to the library. The library
will also be re-sorted and the new entry will be displayed. If the record (identified by preset number) was
already existing then it will be overwritten. An ident is restricted to alphanumeric characters, e.g. “+” and “-” are
not allowed as ident characters.
• A preset number must be specified.
• Also entry of an existing preset number followed by a slash and nothing else will, upon pressing a line select
key associated with a library record, display the entered preset without changing its ident or frequency.
• To delete a record from the library, Press [CLR] key to display DELETE in the scratchpad, and press the line
select key (LSK) corresponding to this record. The record will be deleted and the library will be resorted.
• To modify a library record enter the parameter to be modified using the “slash” rule, e.g. if nothing is entered
before the slash then the field remains unchanged.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-74
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

• Ex: To change 04/ABC /111.050 to 04/ABC /112.075 at LSK 2L press the following keys:
a) “//112.075” and LSK 2L or
b) LSK 2L to transfer the current library record into the scratchpad, press the [CLR] key 5 times to erase
the 5 last characters of the frequency, then enter the new frequency by pressing [2],[.],[0],[7],[5] and
press the LSK 2L to enter the modified record into the library.
• In order to transfer a library record to the active or standby field of the COM LIBRARY page first press the LSK
corresponding to library record. This places the preset number, the identifier and the frequency in the
scratchpad. Then press LSK 1R, LSK 2R, LSK 3R or LSK 4R (as desired) to transfer the contents of the
scratchpad. The identifier will not be displayed on the radio page field even though it was displayed in the
scratchpad.

If COM1 is configured:

ACT1 [2R]: Display active preset number/modify active preset number and frequency of the COM1 radio.

SBY1 [3R]: Display standby preset number/modify standby preset number and frequency of the COM1 radio.

If COM2 is configured:

ACT2 [4R]: Display active preset number/modify active preset number and frequency of the COM2 radio.

SBY2 [5R]: Display standby preset number/modify standby preset number and frequency of the COM2 radio.

COM RADIO [6L]: Access to COM RADIO page.

NOTE: "COM" or "VHF" depending on the configuration.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to RADIO LIBRARY 2/N page.

NOTE: The LIBRARY [6R] prompt is present while the aircraft is on the ground. After take-off it is removed and
access to the LIBRARY page is then accessible from the specific radio equipment only.

The LIBRARY is automatically locked when the aircraft takeoff.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-75
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAV LIBRARY 1/N

This page allows the pilot to view and modify the preset numbers, identifiers and frequencies that are stored in
the NAV radio library.

Display NAV LIBRARY 1/N page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <NAV> or
[RADIO], <NAVx>, <LIBRARY>.

Display NAV LIBRARY 1/N page from the vertical configuration by pressing [RADIO], [PREV], <NAV> or
[RADIO], [NEXT], <NAVx>, <LIBRARY>.

NAV LIBRARY 1/N

PR/IDENT/FREQ(MHz)
1L
01/CYUL2/109.05 1R
ACT1
2L 02/C9J /112.00 -- 2R
SBY1
3L 03/XY /114.35 -- 3R
ACT2
4L 24/KJFK /111.70 -- 4R
SBY2
5L -- 5R

6L <NAV RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

The maximum number of NAV LIBRARY entries is 99. The maximum number of NAV LIBRARY pages is 20.
The [NEXT] and [PREV] keys are used to scroll forward or backward in the preset numbers.

[1L],[2L],[3L],[4L], [5L]: Display and modify NAV library entries. Same comments as for the NAV library entry
apply here. Refer to COM LIBRARY page fields [1L], [2L],[3L],[4L], [5L] for data entry rules.

NAV RADIO [6L]: Access to NAV page.

NOTE: "NAV", “VIR” or "VOR" depending on the configuration.

If NAV1 is configured:
ACT1 [2R]: Display active preset number/modify active preset number of the NAV1 radio.

SBY1 [3R]: Display standby preset number/modify standby preset number and frequency of the NAV1 radio.

If NAV2 is configured:
ACT2 [4R]: Display active preset number/modify active preset number and frequency of the NAV2 radio.

SBY2 [5R]: Display standby preset number/modify standby preset number and frequency of the NAV2 radio.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to RADIO LIBRARY 2/N page.

NOTE: If the NAV1 radio is operating in automatic tuning mode, as soon as any manual entry is made via the
ACT field, the NAV1 radio mode returns to manual tuning. The same applies for the NAV2 radio when an
entry is made via the ACT2 field.

NOTE: The LIBRARY [6R] prompt is present while the aircraft is on the ground. After take-off it is removed and
access to the LIBRARY page is then accessible from the specific radio equipment only.

The LIBRARY is automatically locked when the aircraft takeoff.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-76
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ADF LIBRARY 1/N

This page allows the pilot to view and modify the preset numbers, idents and frequencies that are stored in the
ADF radio library.

The functionality of the page is the same as the COM or NAV LIBRARY page.

ADF LIBRARY 1/N

PR/IDENT/FREQ(KHZ)
1L
01/Q /0203.0 1R
ACT1
2L 05/ /1119.5 -- 2R
SBY1
3L 08/LTUY /2181.0 -- 3R
ACT2
4L 46/KLAX /1799.5 -- 4R
SBY2
5L 56/CBW /0109.0 -- 5R

6L <ADF RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

The maximum number of ADF LIBRARY entries is 99. The maximum number of ADF LIBRARY pages is 20.
The [NEXT] and [PREV] keys are used to scroll forward or backward in the preset numbers.

[1L],[2L],[3L],[4L],[5L]: Display and modify ADF library entries.

Same comments as for the COM library entry apply here. Refer to COM LIBRARY page fields [1L],
[2L],[3L],[4L], [5L] for data entry rules.

ADF RADIO [6L]: Access to ADF RADIO page.

If ADF1 is configured:
ACT1 [2R]: Display active preset number/modify active preset number and frequency of the ADF1 radio.

SBY1 [3R]: Display standby preset number/modify standby preset number and frequency of the ADF1 radio.

If ADF2 is configured:
ACT2 [4R]: Display active preset number/modify active preset number and frequency of the ADF2 radio.

SBY2 [5R]: Display standby preset number/modify standby preset number and frequency of the ADF2 radio.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to RADIO LIBRARY 2/N page.

NOTE: The LIBRARY [6R] prompt is present while the aircraft is on the ground. After take-off it is removed and
access to the LIBRARY page is then accessible from the specific radio equipment only.

The LIBRARY is automatically locked when the aircraft takeoff.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-77
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RS-422 FM1/FM2 LIBRARY 1/N

This page allows the pilot to view and modify the preset numbers, identifiers and channels that are stored in the
FM1/FM2 radio library.

The functionality of the page is the same as the COM or NAV LIBRARY page.
FM1 LIBRARY 1/N
PR/IDENT/CHANNEL
1L
01/Q /348LS 1R
ACT
2L 05/ADBCDE/356UR --> 2R
SBY
3L 10/GHIJK /432LR --> 3R

4L 45/IMN /456US 4R

5L 5R

6L <FM1 RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

The maximum number of FM1/FM2 LIBRARY entries is 99. The maximum number of FM1/FM2 LIBRARY
pages is 20. The [NEXT] and [PREV] keys are used to scroll forward or backward in the preset numbers.

[1L],[2L],[3L],[4L],[5L]: Preset, identifier and frequency entries in the library. Refer to text at the start of this
section.

ACT [2R]: Display active preset number/modify active preset number and Channel of the FUG8/FUG9 radio
and access FM1/FM2 RADIO page.

SBY [3R]: Display standby preset number/modify standby preset number and Channel of the FUG8/FUG9 radio
and access FM1/FM2 RADIO page.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to RADIO LIBRARY page.

FM1 RADIO [6L]: Access to FM1 RADIO page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-78
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RS-422 UHF LIBRARY 1/N

This page allows the pilot to view and modify the preset numbers, identifiers and frequencies that are stored in the
UHF radio library.

The functionality of the page is the same as the FM1 LIBRARY page.
UHF LIBRARY 1/N
PR/IDENT/FREQ(MHz)
1L
01/Q /239.500 1R
ACT
2L 05/ADBCDE/265.000 --> 2R
SBY
3L 10/GHIJK /211.500 --> 3R

4L 45/IMN /267.000 4R

5L 5R

6L <UHF RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

[1L],[2L],[3L],[4L],[5L]: Preset, identifier and frequency entries in the library. Refer to text at the start of this
section.

ACT [2R]: Display active preset number/modify active preset number and frequency of the UHF radio and
access UHF RADIO page.

SBY [3R]: Display standby preset number/modify standby preset number and frequency of the UHF radio and
access UHF RADIO page.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to RADIO LIBRARY page.

UHF RADIO [6L]: Access to UHF RADIO page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-79
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

VUHF LIBRARY 1/N (SRT-651 V/UHF RADIOS)

This page allows the pilot to view and modify the preset frequencies in the VUHF library. It also allows user to
select an entry and set the preset frequency in the active or standby field.

Display VUHF LIBRARY 1/N page by pressing [RADIO], <VUF>, <LIBRARY>.

NOTE: VUHF equipment can also be configured as “COM1” or “COM3”. In that case, “COM LIBRARY” will be
displayed as the page’s name and “COMx RADIO” will be displayed at LSK 6L.

VUHF LIBRARY 1/N

PR/IDENT/FREQ(MHz)
1L
02/KFTE /120.270/FM 1R
ACT1
2L 05/EDMA /123.770/AM -- 2R
SBY1
3L 11/ETSI /129.850/AM -- 3R
ACT2
4L 64/HOME /130.800/AM 4R
SBY2
5L -- 5R

6L <VUHF RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

The maximum number of VUHF LIBRARY entries is 99. The maximum number of VUHF LIBRARY pages is 20.
The [NEXT] and [PREV] keys are used to scroll forward or backward in the preset numbers.

For the SRT-651/N-F radio while in MAR SHIP or MAR COAST mode, the value shown in the active/standby
preset field is the maritime channel number in the for “CXX” (where XX=maritime channel number).
VUHF LIBRARY 1/N
PR/IDENT/FREQ(MHz)
1L 02/KFTE /120.270/AM 1R
ACT1
2L 05/EDMA /123.770/AM C03 2R
SBY1
3L 11/ETSI /129.850/AM C14 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <VUHF RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-80
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

[1L],[2L],[3L],[4L],[5L]: Display and modify VUHF library entries. Same comments as for the COM library entry
apply here except that the modulation must be added with a slash as the last entry. Refer to COM LIBRARY
page fields [1L], [2L],[3L],[4L], [5L] for data entry rules.

If VUHF1 is configured:
ACT1 [2R]: Display active preset number/modify active preset number and frequency of the VUHF1 radio.
For the SRT-651/N-A radio:
• the maritime channel number is displayed in the form MXX (where XX = the maritime channel number).
• when entering a valid library preset number, the entry will be interpreted as a maritime channel (if it is a valid
maritime channel number value) and the MODE will remain MARITIME.
For the SRT-651/N-F radio:
• the maritime channel number is displayed in the form CXX (where XX = the maritime channel number).
• when entering a valid library preset number, the maritime mode will be exited and the MODE will change to
the modulation associated to the preset.

SBY1 [3R]: Display standby preset number/modify standby preset number and frequency of the VUHF1 radio.
For the SRT-651/N-A radio:
• the maritime channel number is displayed in the form MXX (where XX = the maritime channel number).
• when entering a valid library preset number, the entry will be interpreted as a maritime channel.
For the SRT-651/N-F radio:
• the maritime channel number is displayed in the form CXX (where XX = the maritime channel number).

If VUHF2 is configured:
ACT2 [4R]: Display active preset number/modify active preset number and frequency of the VUHF2 radio.

SBY2 [5R]: Display standby preset number/modify standby preset number and frequency of the VUHF2 radio.

VUHF RADIO [6L]: Access to VUHF RADIO page.

LIBRARY [6R]: Access to RADIO LIBRARY page.

PHONE LIBRARY 1/N

This page allows the pilot to view and modify the identifiers that are stored in the Phone library (phone book).

Display PHONE LIBRARY 1/N page by pressing:

[RADIO], [PREV], <PHONE> (When the PHONE or HCS is configured); Or
[RADIO], <PHONE> (When the PHONE or HCS is configured), <LIBRARY>

NOTE: The PHONE can only be configured in the "vertical" configuration option of the RADIO top page.

The [NEXT] and [PREV] keys are used to scroll forward or backwards through the list.

The maximum size of the library is 100 elements therefore the maximum number of pages is 20.
The maximum length of the name entry is ten characters.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-81
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

To add a new record into the Phone Library, key into the scratchpad the name and the phone number separated
by a slash symbol (“/”) and press the line select key associated with the last library record (displayed with
dashes). The new record will be added to the Phone Library in a alpha-numeric ascending order. It is also
possible to add the name and phone number separately. To do this the name must be entered in the scratchpad
followed by a slash and then a line select key should be pressed. This will store the name into the Phone Library
but with no phone number associated with it. The phone number should then be entered in the scratchpad
preceded by a slash (e.g. to enter a new number or update it). The line select key associated with the desired
name should then be pressed to store the phone number.

If the phone number is longer than 24 characters then extra digits can be added using the characters /-. Any
digit after the characters /- will be appended to the current phone number. To delete a record from the Phone
Library, put DELETE in the scratchpad and press the line select key corresponding to this record.

To activate a phone number, press the LSK corresponding to the desired name. This changes the selected
name to inverse video white. Then press either VOICE CALL or SEND SMS. The page will automatically
change to either PHONE: VOICE CALL 1/2 page or PHONE: SEND SMS. The name & number selected will
automatically be set in the proper page.

Page display at start-up (e.g. empty library):

PHONE LIBRARY 1/N

----------
1L
----------------------- 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <VOICE CALL SEND SMS> 6R

Page display after single entry made:

PHONE LIBRARY 1/N

HELICOBASE
1L
51474830009876 1R
----------
2L ----------------------- 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <VOICE CALL SEND SMS> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-82
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAME & PHONE # [1L] - [5L]: Name & phone number. Two mode of operation: entry or selection.
In entry mode, pressing the softkey will transfer the content of the scratchpad to this field. The name will appear
on top of the associated phone number. If the phone number is 24 characters or less, all numbers are display on
1 line. When a phone number exceeds 24 characters, this LSK is also used to return to the display of the first 23
characters. Valid characters for the name are any letters from A to Z and any digits from 0 to 9 and the
character plus "+". The name must start with a letter.
In selection mode, pressing the soft key will display the name selected in inverse video white. When a page is
displayed for the 1st time, the default name in inverse video will always be the one on the top of the page.

PHONE # [1R] - [5R]: When a phone number exceeds 24 characters, this LSK is used to show the extra
characters of the phone number. The character at position 24 is replaced with the ">" symbol. The phone
number is a maximum of 30 characters.

VOICE CALL [6L]: Access to the PHONE: VOICE CALL 1/2 page. The selected name & number will be
inserted on the VOICE CALL 1/2 page.

SEND SMS [6R]:

For the Iridium phone: Access to the PHONE: SEND SMS 1/3 page. The selected name and number will be
inserted on the SEND SMS 1/3 page.

For the GMS phone:

In S/W 300: Access to the PHONE SEND SMS 1/3 page. The selected name and number will be inserted
on the SEND SMS 1/3 page.
in S/W 300V and higher: This prompt is blank.

DF LIBRARY 1/N

This page allows the pilot to view and modify the preset numbers, identifiers and frequencies that are stored in
the DF radio library

Display DF LIBRARY 1/N page from the horizontal configuration by pressing [RADIO], [NEXT], <DF> or
[RADIO], <DF>, <LIBRARY>.
DF LIBRARY 1/N
PR/IDENT/FREQ(MHz)
1L
02/KFTE /393.025 1R
ACT
2L 04/ABC /119.0 -- 2R
SBY
3L 07/ /156.975 -- 3R

4L 23/M16 /156.8 4R

5L 70/M70 /156.525 5R

6L <DF RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

NOTE: The LIBRARY [6R] prompt is present while the aircraft is on the ground. After takeoff it is removed and
access to the LIBRARY page is then accessible from the specific radio equipment only.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-83
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The maximum number of DF LIBRARY entries is 99. The maximum number of DF LIBRARY pages is 20. The
[NEXT] and [PREV] keys are used to scroll forward or backward in the preset numbers.

[1L],[2L],[3L],[4L],[5L]: Preset, identifier and frequency entries in the library. Refer to text at the start of this
section.

ACT [2R]: When a DF radio is installed and configured, display the active preset number and allow modification
to the active preset number and frequency of the DF radio, otherwise the prompt and preset fields are blank.

SBY [3R]: When a DF radio is installed and configured, display the standby preset number and allow
modification to the standby preset number and frequency of the DF radio, otherwise the prompt and preset fields
are blank.

ACT2 [4R]: When a DF radio is installed and configured as DF2, display the active preset number and allow
modification to the active preset number and frequency of the DF2 radio, otherwise the prompt and preset fields
are blank.

SBY2 [5R]: When a DF radio is installed and configured as DF2, display the standby preset number and allow
modification to the standby preset number and frequency of the DF2 radio, otherwise the prompt and preset
fields are blank.

LIBRARY [6R]: The FMS will display the "LIBRARY" prompt only while the aircraft is on the ground (e.g. field is
blank while the aircraft is airborne). When the prompt is present, pressing the line select key will provide access
to the RADIO LIBRARY top level page.

NOTE: The LIBRARY [6R] prompt is present while the aircraft is on the ground. After take-off it is removed and
access to the LIBRARY page is then accessible from the specific radio equipment only.

NOTE: The LIBRARY is automatically locked when the aircraft takeoff.

DF RADIO [6L]: Access to DF RADIO page.

HF LIBRARY 1/N (SRT-170/M2)

Access to the HF Library page, from the horizontal configuration, is as follows:

• [RADIO], [NEXT]..., <HF> (From the RADIO LIBRARY page when a HF radio is installed and the aircraft is
on the ground); or
• [RADIO], <HF>, <LIBRARY> (From the HF radio page when a HF radio is installed and configured).

The FMS will revert to the radio top page where the HF radio prompt is displayed when all the following
conditions occur:
• one of the HF library pages is being displayed on the FMS, and,
• the installation has the HF remote tune discrete configured and it indicates that the FMS is not controlling
the radio.

This page allows the pilot to view and modify the preset numbers, idents and frequencies that are stored in the
HF radio library.

The functionality of the page is the same as the COM LIBRARY page. Refer to COMMUNICATION RADIOS
(HF RADIO) section for frequency range.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-84
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HF LIBRARY 1/N
PR/IDENT/FREQ(KHZ)
1L
01/HF01 /2000.0 1R
ACT
2L 05/HF02 /12345.6 -- 2R
SBY
3L 08/HF03 /10750.0 -- 3R

4L 46/HF04 /29999.9 4R

5L 56/HF05 /18112.2 5R

6L <HF RADIO LIBRARY> 6R

[1L] - [5L]: Preset, ident and frequency entries in the library. Fields have the same functionality as the ones on
the COM library. Refer to the HF section for the frequency range.

ACT [2R]: Display the active preset number and allow modification to the active preset number and frequency
of the HF radio.

SBY [3R]: Display the standby preset number and allow modification to the standby preset number and
frequency of the HF radio.

LIBRARY [6R]: The FMS will display the "LIBRARY" prompt only while the aircraft is on the ground (e.g. field is
blank while the aircraft is airborne). When the prompt is present, pressing the line select key will provide access
to the RADIO LIBRARY top level page.

NOTE: The LIBRARY [6R] prompt is present while the aircraft is on the ground. After take-off it is removed and
access to the LIBRARY page is then accessible from the specific radio equipment only.

NOTE: The LIBRARY is automatically locked when the aircraft takeoff.

HF RADIO [6L]: Access to HF 1/2 RADIO page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-85
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 13-86
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 14 - PERFORMANCE FUNCTIONS

CONTENTS
Subject Page

FUEL PERFORMANCE CALCULATION ........................................................................................................ 14-1

FUEL REMAINING AT ANY WAYPOINT........................................................................................................ 14-5
SIMULATION FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................................. 14-5
A. SIMUL FLY AWAY FUNCTION ...................................................................................................................... 14-6
B. SIMUL OEI CRUISE FUNCTION .................................................................................................................... 14-6
C. SIMUL RTEx FUNCTION................................................................................................................................ 14-6
SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3 (If SIMUL PG option Configured) ............................................................................ 14-7
SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/3 (If SIMUL PG option Configured) .......................................................................... 14-7
SIMUL RTEx 3/3 or 1/1 (If SIMUL PG and RTE2 options is Configured) ................................................... 14-8

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 14-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 14-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 14

PERFORMANCE FUNCTIONS

FUEL PERFORMANCE CALCULATION

From displayed fuel flow and remaining fuel quantity, the CMA-9000 FMS will compute the following parameters
and display them on the FUEL 1/2 page:

• Predicted maximum range with remaining fuel.

• Predicted endurance (in hours plus minutes).
• Predicted quantity of fuel remaining at an operator specified downtrack waypoint.

The CMA-9000 FMS will accept total remaining quantity of fuel and fuel flow information from the fuel computer
system. If a fuel computer system is not configured or has failed, the CMA-9000 FMS allows the operator to
manually enter on the RTE x FUEL page the total fuel quantity and the fuel flow.

The CMA-9000 FMS also provides the means to perform "what if" calculations via the RTE x FUEL page by
allowing operator entry of fuel flow and total remaining fuel quantity. The temporary values entered by the
operator will be replaced by fuel computer data (if available) upon each new access of the Fuel page.

If the FUEL+WEIGHTS option is configured for the FUEL pages, the CMA-9000 FMS provides on the RTE x
FUEL 2/2 page several fields used by the operator to enter the empty weight, optional equipment weight, crew
weight, cargo weight and total fuel weight including reserve. These values are used by the CMA-9000 FMS to
calculate the initial Gross-Weight (GWT) estimate, displayed on FUEL 1/1 page. Once the initial GWT is
accepted by the CMA-9000 FMS, the Gross Weight will be continuously estimated by subtracting the fuel
consumption based on the average fuel flow. The GWT units will match the fuel flow units, that is, if the fuel flow
is in Kg/Hr or Lb/Hr, then the GWT will be in Kg or Lb respectively.

If the FUEL option is configured for the FUEL pages, the CMA-9000 FMS receives the gross weight value from
the Fuel computer in addition to the fuel weight and fuel flow values.

In multiple FMS installation, all fuel data is cross-talked between FMSs.

CAUTION: The unit selection on the FUEL 1/2 and FUEL 2/2 pages has to be consistent with other fuel indicators
installed in the cockpit. Verify units on the FUEL pages and on other fuel indicators.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 14-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Display the INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], [PREV] or [NEXT].
Display the RTE x FUEL 1/2 page by pressing FUEL (LSK 5L) on the INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 page or the [FUEL]
functional key (if configured).

ACT RTE 1 FUEL 1/2

MAX RANGE GROSS WT
1L 760N M 9700K G
1R
ENDURANCE FUEL WT
2L 01+21 1400K G
2R
FUEL FLOW MILEAGE
3L 110K G / H R 100K G / N M
3R
FUEL REMAINING AT FIX
4L 892K G ZCH 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L 6R

1. Key in the current fuel weight (e.g. 9700) and move it into the FUEL WT field by pressing LSK 2R.

2. Key in the current fuel flow (e.g. 110) and move it into the FUEL FLOW field by pressing LSK 3L.

3. UNIT at LSK 6R toggles between LB and KG.

Maximum range and endurance are calculated based on entered fuel quantity and fuel flow rate. The
maximum range is computed along the track to the FIX waypoint (if the FIX is defined) or with the current
track, given current or estimated fuel weight (excluding the reserve), fuel flow, and ground speed (if the FIX is
not defined). The endurance is computed using the given current or estimated fuel weight (excluding the
reserve) and fuel flow.

CAUTION: On power interruptions, the fuel units will revert to the configured units (from maintenance page).
Verify units when reading or entering values.

NOTE: “EST” is displayed after “FUEL” in reverse video on each of the title page (see above) whenever the Active
route is displayed and one of the following conditions is met:
• fuel quantity or fuel flow configured but not received from the sensor; or
• aircraft is on ground; or
• manually entered values for FUEL FLOW (LSK 3L) or FUEL WEIGHT (LSK 2R).

ACT RTE 1 FUEL EST 1/2

MAX RANGE GROSS WT
760N M 9700K G
1L 1R
ENDURANCE FUEL WT
2L 01+21.2 1400K G
2R
FUEL FLOW MILEAGE
3L 110K G / H R 100K G / N M
3R
FUEL REMAINING AT FIX
4L 892K G ZCH 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <RTE 2 FUEL 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 14-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Display the RTE x FUEL 2/2 page by pressing [NEXT] or [PREV].

FUEL option configured:

ACT RTE 1 FUEL 2/2

FUEL+RES
1L 1700K G 1R
RESERVE
2L 300K G 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

In the case of a FUEL+WEIGHTS configuration the following steps can be taken:

4. Key in the fuel weight including reserve (e.g. 1700) and move it into the FUEL+RES field by pressing
LSK 1L. Entry is allowed if the fuel weight is unavailable from the sensor.

5. Key in the fuel reserve weight (e.g. 110) and move it into the RESERVE field by pressing LSK 2L.

FUEL+WEIGHTS option configured:

ACT RTE 1 FUEL 2/2

FUEL+RES EMPTY WT
1L
1700K G 5000K G 1R
RESERVE EQUIP WT
2L 300K G 700K G 2R
CREW WT
3L 300K G 3R
CARGO WT
4L 2000K G 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

6. Key in the aircraft empty weight (e.g. 5000) and move it into the EMPTY WT field by pressing LSK 1R.

7. Key in the optional equipment weight (e.g. 700) and move it into the EQUIP WT field by pressing LSK 2R.

8. Key in the total crew weight (e.g. 300) and move it into the CREW WT field by pressing LSK 3R.

9. Key in the total cargo weight (e.g. 2000) and move it into the CARGO WT field by pressing LSK 4R.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 14-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

10. UNIT at LSK 5R toggles between LB and KG.

NOTE: The quantities on the RTE x FUEL 2/2 page are displayed in white except for the case of an IFDS EFIS
installation when:
• the quantities are displayed in amber as long as the GROSS WT DISCREPANCY alert message is
active; and
• the quantities are displayed in white when there is no difference between the gross weight sent by
the IFDS and the CMA-9000 FMS-computed gross weight.

NOTE: “EST” is displayed after “FUEL” on each of the title page (see below) when specific conditions are met
(refer to the NOTE related to the FUEL 1/2 page description herein).

ACT RTE 1 FUEL EST 2/2

FUEL+RES EMPTY WT
1L 1700K G 5000K G 1R
RESERVE EQUIP WT
2L 300K G 700K G 2R
CREW WT
3L 300K G 3R
CARGO WT
4L 2000K G 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

The inactive fuel route page is displayed in monochrome cyan to distinguish it from the active route:

RTE 2 FUEL 1/2

MAX RANGE GROSS WT
760N M 9700K G
1L 1R
ENDURANCE FUEL WT
2L 01+21.2 1400K G
2R
FUEL FLOW MILEAGE
3L 110K G / H R 100K G / N M
3R
FUEL REMAINING AT FIX
4L 892K G ZCH 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <RTE 1 FUEL 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 14-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FUEL REMAINING AT ANY WAYPOINT

With the desired waypoint identifier in the scratchpad (keyed in, or copied from any other page), move it into the
FIX field by pressing LSK 4R in the RTE x FUEL 1/2 page.

Fuel remaining at the selected waypoint is calculated based on the displayed fuel quantity (excluding reserve), fuel
flow rate and ground speed.

NOTE: By default the last waypoint of the active route is displayed. If an airport destination is entered in the
RTE page, then that destination waypoint is used to decide if the alert message “NOT ENOUGH FUEL”
will be triggered or not. The message is triggered if the fuel required to fly the along track distance from
the present position to the destination airport coordinates (excluding the missed approach procedure) is
not sufficient.

SIMULATION FUNCTIONS

The CMA-9000 FMS provides Fly Away and OEI Cruise simulation functions, which allow the pilot to determine
in advance the consequences of the loss of an engine in hover or cruise operation. The CMA-9000 FMS also
provides a RTE x LEGS page simulation that allows the pilot to perform simulated ETA/EFA computations on
the inactive route.

There is no consequence of these calculations on the active flight data.

Entry of the performance charts required for the Fly Away and OEI Cruise functions is done via the data load
unit. The name and date identification of the loaded tables are displayed on the IDENT 2/2 page.
FMS1 IDENT 2/2

1L 1R
MAGVAR MODEL
2L 2000 (DEF)
2R
OEI MODEL (DEF) DATE
3L SPUMA MKII+ NOV06/01 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <SETUP POS INIT> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 14-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. SIMUL FLY AWAY FUNCTION

Upon opening the SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3 page or selecting the "RESTORE DEFAULTS" prompt on the
same page, the CMA-9000 FMS initializes to the default value (values received from other aircraft sub-
systems) the current gross weight, current baro-corrected altitude, current outside air temperature and
current wind. Then it computes the Fly away height (minimum height to maintain in hover or the maximum
drop in height upon loss of an engine during hover); OEI OGE weight (weight required to maintain the
specified barometric altitude without any drop in height upon loss of an engine); and OGE CEILING height
(minimum altitude at which the ground effect is no longer felt).

The pilot can modify the gross weight, Fly away height, barometric altitude, outside air temperature and
wind. If the gross weight is modified, a new Fly away height, OEI OGE weight and OGE CEILING height are
calculated; similarly, if a Flyaway height is entered, the function determines the required gross weight, OEI
OGE weight and OGE CEILING height. Manual entry is distinguishable by either displaying values in
reverse video (as in the case of the GROSS WT, FLY AWAY HT, BARO ALT fields) or large font size (as in
the case of OAT and WIND fields).

If one of the parameters is out of bounds or invalid, an advisory message is triggered (refer to Appendix E
for details).

B. SIMUL OEI CRUISE FUNCTION

Upon opening the SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/3 page or selecting the "RESTORE DEFAULTS" prompt on the
same page, the CMA-9000 FMS initializes to the default value (values received from other aircraft sub-
systems) the current gross weight, present baro-corrected altitude and present outside air temperature.
Then it computes the jettison weight (weight to lose in order to maintain the current altitude) and the level
altitude (maximum altitude after engine loss if no weight is dropped).

The gross weight, barometric altitude and outside air temperature can be modified by the pilot to determine
different scenarios. Whenever a manual input is done, the gross weight and barometric altitude are
displayed in inverse video and the outside air temperature in large font.

If one of the parameters is out of bounds or invalid, an advisory message is displayed. If more than one
advisory message is activated only the highest priority message is displayed.

The messages "AIR TEMP NOT VALID", "BARO ALTITUDE NOT VALID", "GROSS WEIGHT NOT VALID",
"WIND NOT VALID", and "FLY AWAY HT NOT VALID" are displayed depending on the situation.

C. SIMUL RTEx FUNCTION

While in flight, upon opening the SIMUL RTEx 3/3 page or selecting the "DEFAULT VAL" prompt on the
same page, the CMA-9000 FMS initializes to the default value (values received from other aircraft sub-
systems) the current values of TAS, fuel flow, wind, and fuel weight. Then it computes the ETA/EFA for the
waypoints that are part of the inactive route.

The SIMUL RTEx 3/3 page shown on ground displays the following values:
• CRZ TAS and CRZ WIND as defined in the PLAN DATA page;
• Fuel flow is set at a value of 615 kg/hr;
• Fuel weight is set at a value of 4000 kg.

The pilot can modify one or all the values on this page in order to compute different scenarios for the
ETA/EFA values. Manual entry is distinguishable by displaying the values in large font size.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 14-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3 (If SIMUL PG option Configured)

Display SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT] and < SIMULATE> (LSK 2R).

SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3

GROSS WT FLY AWAY HT
1L 10600K G 100F T
1R

2L 2R
PRESS ALT OEI OGE WT
3L 10300F T 9500K G
3R
OAT
4L +25oC 4R
WIND OGE CEILING
5L 45K T S -500F T 5R

6L RESTORE DEFAULTS> 6R

1. Key in the gross weight (e.g., 10600) and move it into the GROSS WT field by pressing LSK 1L.

2. Key in the fly away height (e.g., 100) and move it into the FLY AWAY HT field by pressing LSK 1R.

3. Key in the pressure altitude (e.g., 10300) and move it to the PRESS ALT field by pressing LSK 3L.

4. Key in the outside air temperature (e.g., +25) and move it to the OAT field by pressing LSK 4L.

5. Key in the wind speed (e.g., 45) and move it to the WIND field by pressing LSK 5L.

SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/3 (If SIMUL PG option Configured)

Display SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT] and <SIMULATE> (LSK 2R) and [NEXT].

SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/3

GROSS WT JETTISON WT
10600K G 100K G
1L 1R

2L 2R
PRESS ALT LEVEL ALT
3L +10300F T 9500F T
3R
OAT
4L +25oC 4R

5L 5R

6L RESTORE DEFAULTS> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 14-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

1. Key in the gross weight (e.g., 10600) and move it into the GROSS WT field by pressing LSK 1L.

2. Key in the pressure altitude (e.g., 10300) and move it to the PRESS ALT field by pressing LSK 3L.

3. Key in the outside air temperature (e.g., +25) and move it to the OAT field by pressing LSK 4L.

SIMUL RTEx 3/3 or 1/1 (If SIMUL PG and RTE2 options is Configured)

Display SIMUL RTEx 3/3 or 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT], <SIMULATE> (LSK 2R), and [PREV].
SIMUL RTE2 3/3
CRZ TAS CRZ WIND
T
130K T 134 / 20K T
1L 1R
FUEL FLOW FUEL WT
2L 130 K G / H R 1400K G
2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L <RTE COPY DEFAULT VAL> 5R

6L <LEGS ETA LEGS POS> 6R

Any of values in the fields 1L, 1R, 2L, 2R can be modified by the pilot by manually entering a desired value.

1. Press the LEGS ETA prompt (LSK 6L) to access the RTE x LEGS ETA 1/X page which presents the
ETA/EFA computed for the waypoints of the inactive route.

NOTE: If the inactive route does not exist, the CMA-9000 FMS copies the active route into the inactive route
when the inactive route LEGS ETA/EFA page is accessed in order to perform simulated ETA/EFA
computations. If an inactive route already exists, the CMA-9000 FMS allows the pilot to copy the active
route into the inactive route in order to perform simulated ETA/EFA computations using the active
route (note: the previous inactive route will be overwritten and unretreivable).

2. Press the LEGS POS prompt (LSK 6R) to access the RTE x LEGS POS 1/X page, which presents the
coordinates of the waypoints of the inactive route.

3. Press the RTE COPY prompt (LSK 5L) to copy the active route into the inactive route

NOTE: The previous inactive route is deleted and un-retrievable). When RTE COPY is selected, LSK 6L is
replaced with “<CANCEL”, LSK 6R is replaced with “CONFIRM>” and “SAVE?” is displayed.

4. Press the DEFAULT VAL prompt (LSK 5R) to override the user-entered simulated settings (CRZ TAS, CRZ
WIND, FUEL FLOW and FUEL WT) with the on-ground or in-air default settings.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 14-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 15 RNP CAPABILITY

CONTENTS
Subject Page

OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................................................................... 15-1

FLIGHT TECHNICAL ERROR.......................................................................................................................... 15-1
PERFORMANCE, MONITORING AND ALERTING ........................................................................................ 15-2
GPS NAVIGATION MODE ............................................................................................................................... 15-2
A. ACCURACY .............................................................................................................................................. 15-2
B. INTEGRITY ............................................................................................................................................... 15-2
C. CONTINUITY............................................................................................................................................. 15-2
DME/DME NAVIGATION MODE...................................................................................................................... 15-3
A. ACCURACY .............................................................................................................................................. 15-3
B. INTEGRITY ............................................................................................................................................... 15-3
C. CONTINUITY............................................................................................................................................. 15-3
VOR/DME NAVIGATION MODE ...................................................................................................................... 15-3
A. ACCURACY .............................................................................................................................................. 15-3
B. INTEGRITY ............................................................................................................................................... 15-3
C. CONTINUITY............................................................................................................................................. 15-3
KALMAN NAVIGATION MODE ....................................................................................................................... 15-4
INERTIAL NAVIGATION MODE ...................................................................................................................... 15-4
A. ACCURACY .............................................................................................................................................. 15-4
B. INTEGRITY ............................................................................................................................................... 15-4
C. CONTINUITY............................................................................................................................................. 15-4

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 15-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 15-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 15

RNP CAPABILITY

OVERVIEW

When installed in accordance with AC 20-130A or equivalent, the CMA-9000 FMS is eligible for TGL-10 P-
RNAV and AC 90-100 approvals. The information to support RNP approvals is contained in this section .

This section describes RNP capabilities for the CMA-9000 Flight Management System (FMS) when the civil
navigation configuration is set. This information is intended to be used by operators and regulatory authorities to
facilitate RNP operational approvals. It does not constitute an operational approval by itself. The intent of the
RNP capability section is to address the 95% Total System Error (TSE) accuracy requirement and to declare the
performance monitoring and alerting capability for the applicable navigation modes.

For all navigation modes, the Actual Navigation Performance (ANP) does not include any consideration of the
Flight Technical Error (FTE). The ANP represents the 95% probable radial error of the estimated aircraft
position.

The CMA-9000 FMS monitors the position estimation error and generates an alert when the ANP exceeds the
current RNP.

In GPS navigation mode, the FMS monitors the Horizontal Integrity Limit (HIL) and activates an integrity lamp
and annunciation when the HIL exceeds the RNP value.

FLIGHT TECHNICAL ERROR

In the current implementation, the Flight Technical Error (FTE) is not integrated in the Performance Monitoring
and Alerting. Operational procedures must be developed taking into consideration the (CDI) scaling, auto-pilot
and flight director capabilities to bound the (FTE) as required to support the (TSE) requirements in the RNP
airspace.

Crew procedures should also be developed to address the case when the (FTE) becomes larger and does not
support the RNP procedure.

The FMS drives a course deviation indicator (CDI) with RNP-dependent full-scale deviation (FSD) as described
in the following table.

Current RNP (NM) HSI FSD [NM]

Enroute default or RNP entry above 1.01 5.0
Terminal default or RNP entry above 0.31 1.0
Approach default or any RNP entry 0.3

Table 15-1 HSI FSD vs RNP

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 15-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PERFORMANCE, MONITORING AND ALERTING

When configured to ANP/HIL=1.0, the ANP presented to the aircrew on the PROGRESS page represents the
99.999% probable radial position estimation error (PEE).

The CMA-9000 FMS monitors the ANP and generates the “CHECK ANP” CDU alert message when the ANP
exceeds the current RNP.

NOTE: That the condition has to be present for 30 seconds before the message is displayed in en-route and
terminal phase of flight and for 10 seconds when in approach phase of flight.

In GPS mode, the CMA-9000 FMS activates the INT (integrity) lamp when the HIL exceeds the current RNP.

GPS NAVIGATION MODE

A. ACCURACY

When installed in accordance with the CMA-9000 Installation Manual, the GPS navigation mode exceeds
the 95% 2D accuracy requirements of AC20-130A. A typical 95% probable position estimation radial error is
0.04 nm.

B. INTEGRITY

GPS-based position integrity is the GPS HIL computed by the Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitor
(RAIM) function of the integrated GPS Sensor Module. HIL is expressed in nautical miles and represents the
radius of a circle centered around the estimated GPS position, such that the probability that the aircraft’s
true position lies within the circle is 99.999% when no satellite failure exists and 99.9% under all conditions
of satellite failure.
-5
This exceeds the 10 per flight hour requirement for containment integrity for RNP operations as defined in
RTCA-DO-236B/DO-283A.

C. CONTINUITY

Based on typical values of the Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) of the GPS receiver and on the
industry-acce pted failure rate of the GPS satellites (10-5/hour/satellite), the CMA-9000 FMS meets the 10-4
per flight hour continuity requirement.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 15-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DME/DME NAVIGATION MODE

The assumptions used to support the accuracy requirements are:

Minimum three DME facilities are required to support the DME/DME navigation mode. It is assumed that the
DME transceiver is compliant with TSO-C66c.

A. ACCURACY

In the DME/DME navigation mode, a typical 95% position error is 0.5 nm in en-route and 0.4 nm in the
terminal area. The DME-DME navigation mode is not available for approach mode.

B. INTEGRITY

Based on typical MTBF values of the DME ground facilities and of the airborne DME transceivers, the CMA-
9000 FMS has a probability of misdetection by hardware of a failure condition that would cause the DME-DME
-4
navigation fix to be outside the containment limit of an order of magnitude of 10 per flight hour.
This probability is improved by line of position reasonableness check internal to the FMS. Reasonableness
checks based on distance and ground stations geometry are applied during the DME facility selection
process and prior to use of the DME slant distance measurements to derive the navigation solution.

C. CONTINUITY

Based on typical values of the Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) of the DME ground facilities and the
airborne DME transceiver, the CMA-9000 FMS meets the 10-4 per flight hour continuity requirement.

VOR/DME NAVIGATION MODE

The assumptions used to support the accuracy requirements are:

A minimum of one VOR and one DME facilities are required to compute a navigation solution. It is assumed
that the VOR receiver is compliant with TSO-C40a and the DME is compliant to TSO-C66c.

A. ACCURACY

In the VOR/DME navigation mode, a typical 95% position error is between 0.6 and 0.8 nm if the distance to
the tuned ground station is less than 7nm and 1.5nm greater distances. The VOR-DME navigation mode is
not available for approach mode.

B. INTEGRITY

Based on typical MTBF values of the VOR ground facilities and of the VOR receivers, the CMA-9000 FMS
has a probability of misdetection by hardware of a failure condition that would cause the VOR-DME
-4
navigation fix to be outside the containment limit of an order of magnitude of 10 per flight hour.
This probability is improved by having an internal FMS line of position reasonableness check.
Reasonableness checks based on bearing and distance are applied prior to use of the VOR bearing
received and the DME distance received in the solution.

C. CONTINUITY

Based on typical values of the Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) of the VOR ground facilities and the
airborne VOR receiver, the CMA-9000 FMS meets the 10-4 per flight hour continuity requirement.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 15-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

KALMAN NAVIGATION MODE

The Kalman navigation mode is based on GPS sensor and APIRS sensor. The APIRS provides attitude,
velocities and accelerations to the FMS. The FMS uses this information to compute a mixed GPS & APIRS
solution. The Kalman navigation mode is not considered applicable for RNP operations.

INERTIAL NAVIGATION MODE

The CMA-9000 is used in combination with an inertial navigation/reference system meeting the requirements of
FAA AC 25-4 and/or 14 CFR Part 121 Appendix G. Subject to a time limitation for the inertial navigation mode.

A. ACCURACY

The inertial drift rate model used for assessment of current inertial navigation accuracy assumes a 2 nautical
miles per hour drift rate in the cross-track direction after the FMS is placed in the inertial navigation mode.
The inertial navigation mode in RNP airspace is time limited based on the current RNP. In Terminal phase of
flight the inertial navigation mode must not be used more than 30 minutes after the CMA-9000 is placed in
the inertial navigation mode. In Enroute phase of flight, its usage can be extended to 60 minutes. The
Inertial navigation mode is not available for the approach mode.

B. INTEGRITY

The CMA-9000 provides an indication of the inertial position integrity by monitoring inertial navigation
accuracy and IRS data output validity status. Based on typical MTBF values of the inertial sensor, the CMA-
9000 FMS has a probability of misdetection by hardware of a failure condition that would cause the inertial
-4
position to be outside the containment limit of an order of magnitude of 10 per flight hour.
This probability is improved when a mixed inertial position is computed using 3 IRS sensors.

C. CONTINUITY

Based on typical values of MTBF of the inertial sensor, the CMA-9000 FMS meets the 10-4 per flight hour
continuity requirement.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 15-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 16 - MCDU FUNCTIONS

CONTENTS

Subject Page
MCDU SUBSYSTEM CONTROL (if configured) ........................................................................................ 16-1
TANDEM MODE (if TANDEM is configured).............................................................................................. 16-2

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 16-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 16-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 16

MCDU FUNCTIONS

MCDU SUBSYSTEM CONTROL (if configured)

The FMS has the built in capability to interface with External Sub-Systems (ESS) through ARINC 739 protocol
and act as a MCDU for these external sub-systems. After a FMS cold start, automatic logon into an ESS is
possible if there is at least one ESS configured in the auto logon priority list. There are 11 FMS hardkeys can
be assigned as key logon functions in the configuration. When a hardkey is pressed, the FMS will logon into the
assigned ESS.

The MCDU MENU page displays all configured external sub-systems and the internal FMS.

Display MCDU MENU X/X page by pressing [MENU].

MCDU MENU 1/1

1L
<FMS1 <REQUESTING> 1R

2L <FMS2 <ACTIVE> 2R

3L 3R

4L <ACARS <TIMED-OUT> 4R

5L 5R

6L COMM> 6R

The sub-systems displayed have a dedicated key. The internal FMS is displayed at LSK 1L. The name of
ESS1 is displayed at LSK 2L, the name of ESS2 is displayed at LSK 3L and so on.

NOTE: That up to 7 external sub-system can be installed, meaning 8 equipments can be displayed on the
MCDU MENU page (including the internal FMS that is always part of the sub-system list), from LSK 1L
to LSK 5L on MCDU MENU 1/2, and from LSK 1L to LSK 3L on MCDU MENU 2/2.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 16-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TANDEM MODE (if TANDEM is configured)

The Tandem Mode consists of 2 FMSs namely the 'Trainer' and 'Student' FMS. The tandem mode implies that
the Trainer’s FMS will act as a MCDU and will be connected through the A739 protocol to one external
subsystem which is the Student FMS.

In the tandem mode, the trainer and student FMSs will display simultaneously: the current display page;
keystroke commands; scratchpad information and annunciators, with the exceptions of the radio volume control
(if configured) and display brightness settings. The trainer’s FMS will have access to both FMSs; his own and
the student. The student will only have access to his own FMS.

Any entry on the trainer’s FMS will result in a modification of the data on the student FMS. The trainer’s FMS
internal system is not affected by the entry. An alpha-numerical value entered in the scratchpad on any FMS is
appended to the scratchpad data that is already being displayed.

Tandem functionality is available either in independent or synchronized mode. When in independent mode and
Tandem is active, the trainer’s FMS will not have radio volume settings. The trainer’s FMS will initiate the
Tandem Mode when logging on into the student’s FMS. The trainer’s FMS will terminate the Tandem Mode
when logging off the student’s FMS.

When the Tandem function is configured, navigation sensor de-selections are cross-talked to the cross-side
FMS in order to de-select the navigation sensors from only one FMS. When Tandem mode is active (both FMSs
have the exact same display), the EFIS Center-Legs mode is cross-talked in order to have the same EFIS
display on both ‘Student’ and ‘Trainer’ EFIS.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 16-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 17 - ABNORMAL PROCEDURES

CONTENTS

Subject Page
POWER INTERRUPTIONS .............................................................................................................................. 17-1
HIGH TEMPERATURE OPERATIONS ............................................................................................................ 17-1
EQUIPMENT DESELECTION .......................................................................................................................... 17-2
TAS INPUT DESELECTION (OPTIONAL)....................................................................................................... 17-3
OPERATION WITH FAILED TAS INPUT......................................................................................................... 17-3
OPERATION WITH A FAILED ALTITUDE INPUT .......................................................................................... 17-4
HEADING INPUT DESELECTION (OPTIONAL) ............................................................................................. 17-4
NAVIGATION IN DEAD RECKONING (DR) MODE ........................................................................................ 17-5
OPERATION WITH FAILED HEADING INPUT ............................................................................................... 17-6
MANUAL POSITION UPDATES ...................................................................................................................... 17-6

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 17-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 17-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 17

ABNORMAL PROCEDURES

POWER INTERRUPTIONS

A short CMA-9000 FMS power interruption, lasting less than 7 seconds in the air or less than 90 seconds on the
ground (depending on the configuration), will have no impact on the active flight plan of the CMA-9000 FMS.
The CMA-9000 FMS will recover and redisplay the active CMA-9000 FMS page (except for duplicate waypoint
pages, where the previously displayed page will be recovered). Verify position and update if necessary. Verify
that the deselected sensors remained deselected and correct if necessary. Navigation and guidance will
continue to operate normally. Re-select the desired flight instrument display and AP/FD modes. It is
recommended that the flight crew review the content of the flight plan specially considering the modifications
made within 5 seconds prior to the power outage.

NOTE: A momentary power interruption (less than 200 milliseconds) will not cause the GPS sensor to transition
to acquisition mode.
A power interruption lasting longer than 7 seconds while the aircraft is airborne will require pilot action to
re-select the active CMA-9000 FMS page and:

1. Enter a valid TO waypoint on the RTE x LEGS 1/X page.

2. Verify position and flight plan, update (if necessary).

3. Re-select the desired flight instrument display and AP/FD modes.

A power interruption lasting longer than 7 or 90 seconds (depending on the configuration selection) when the
aircraft is on the ground will result in the loss of the flight plan. Re-enter the origin and destination airports and
the flight plan.

HIGH TEMPERATURE OPERATIONS

A protection mechanism has been implemented to protect the lamp life duration (Refer to CMA-9000 Installation
Manual section VI Servicing). This mechanism dims the display when the temperature reaches an
environmental temperature higher than approximately +70C. The CMA-9000 FMS has been qualified to
maintain full brightness for a minimum of 30 minutes. It is therefore recommended to manually decrease the
display dimming (using the BRT key or the external display control unit) to the minimum acceptable dimming
setting if and only if the CMA-9000 FMS is to be operated in DAY luminance mode for longer than 30 minutes.
No degraded operation is foreseen in normal operation mode below +70 C.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 17-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

EQUIPMENT DESELECTION

CAUTION: For installations in which GPS is the only navigation sensor, deselection of the GPS input will cause
reversion to dead reckoning mode. See below and refer to the AFMS/RFMS for details.

1. Display the DESELECT page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R) and <DESELECT>
(LSK 6R).

Single GPS installed:

DESELECT 1/1
TAS GPS
1L
>VALID VALID<
1R
HDG DME
2L
>VALID VALID< 2R
DVS VOR/DME/TCN
3L
>ACQ ACQ< 3R
INS/GPS
4L
>ACQ 4R
INS/DVS
5L >ACQ 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

Dual GPS installed:

DESELECT 1/1
TAS
1L
>VALID GPS>
1R
HDG DME
2L
>VALID VALID< 2R
DVS VOR/DME/TCN
3L
>ACQ ACQ< 3R
INS/GPS
4L
>ACQ 4R
INS/DVS
5L >ACQ 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 17-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

When dual GPS is configured, selction of LSK 1R will bring the crew to the GPS DESLECT 1/1 page that
allows the crew to deselect either the military of civil GPS.

GPS DESELECT 1/1

cGPS
1L
VALID<
1R
mGPS
2L
VALID< 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <DESELECT 6R

The DESELECT 1/1 page permits deselection of the TAS, the HDG, a sensor input or a navigation source.

NOTE: VOR, DME, DVS, INS, INS/GPS, INS/DVS, KALMAN and XFMS prompts are only displayed if such
equipments are interfaced with the CMA-9000 FMS. Refer to the AFMS for details.

If an equipment is suspected of being intermittent or unreliable, it should be manually deselected to prevent

the possibility of navigation error.

2. Deselect the equipment by pressing the LSK besides its name until DESEL appears under it.

NOTE: To reselect the deselected equipment, follow step 2 until VALID or ACQ appears in the equipment’s
field.

TAS INPUT DESELECTION (OPTIONAL)

If the TAS input is observed to be intermittent or unreliable, this input should be manually deselected to prevent
the possibility of temporary navigation errors.

1. Display the DESELECT 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R), <DESELECT>
(LSK 6R).

2. Deselect the TAS by pressing LSK 1L until DESEL appears under the TAS line.

NOTE: To reselect a deselected TAS, follow steps 1 and 2 until VALID appears in the TAS field.

OPERATION WITH FAILED TAS INPUT

When operating in a position-fixing navigation mode (e.g. GPS, DME/DME, DME/VOR), long term navigational
accuracy is not degraded due to loss of the TAS input. However, short term accuracy may be degraded during
periods of rapidly changing ground speed and the computation and display of wind will not be available.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 17-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

OPERATION WITH A FAILED ALTITUDE INPUT

When the CMA-9000 FMS is operated with the external CMA-3012/CMA-3024/CMA-3112 GNSSU or the
Trimble TA-12 GPS receiver, the system installation is approved for en-route and terminal operations without
altitude aiding, and for GPS instrument approaches with only an input of pressure altitude rather than
baro-corrected altitude. See the AFMS/RFMS for further details.

If the FMS is configured for VNAV, baro-corrected altitude must be available for the FMS to calculate its Vertical
Deviation. Baro-corrected altitude can be read directly from an Air Data Computer, or generated by the FMS
from an Air Data Computer’s pressure altitude and pilot entry of pressure correction on the PROGRESS 3/3, 4/4
or 4/5 page.

Once in flight, the actual satellite constellation determines whether altitude aiding is required to achieve the level
of integrity to conduct a GPS instrument approach. With a good satellite constellation, no altitude aiding may, in
fact, be necessary. Therefore the loss of the altitude input to the CMA-9000 FMS may have no impact on the
operation of the flight, with the exception that manual waypoint sequencing will be required for
altitude-terminated legs. This can be achieved via the <NEXT WPT> prompt (LSK 6R) on RTE x LEGSs and
PROGRESS pages.

When all altitude inputs are lost, including GPS, manual update of aircraft altitude may be made on PROGRESS
4/4 (or 3/3) page.

HEADING INPUT DESELECTION (OPTIONAL)

If the heading input becomes intermittent or unreliable, it should be manually deselected to prevent navigation
errors.

1. Display the DESELECT 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> (LSK 5R), <DESELECT>
(LSK 6R).

2. Deselect the HDG by pressing LSK 2L, until DESEL message appears in the HDG field.

NOTE: To reselect a deselected HDG follow steps 1 and 2, until VALID appears in the HDG field.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 17-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAVIGATION IN DEAD RECKONING (DR) MODE

CAUTION: IFR operation in dead reckoning mode may not be permitted in certain classes of airspace.

When reversion to DR mode occurs (due to unavailability of all other navigation modes), the CMA-9000 FMS
must rely solely on heading, true airspeed and the last computed value of wind, for navigation. This results in a
position accuracy which degrades continuously during prolonged intervals of DR operation. The rate at which
accuracy degrades depends on the quality of the source of the heading and speed inputs. The CMA-9000 FMS
may therefore only maintain its normal accuracy if DR operation does not exceed three to five minutes duration
(at typical speeds; it will be longer at lower speeds).

Navigation accuracy during prolonged DR operation may be improved by manual updating of present position
and/or the actual track and ground speed and/or the wind speed and wind direction based on external
information. This is particularly necessary during periods of changing winds, since the CMA-9000 FMS
providing navigation data assumes constant wind during DR operation. In an installation where digital True
Airspeed (TAS) is not provided, the CMA-9000 FMS assumes constant ground speed during DR operation,
therefore the latter must be updated manually at regular intervals.

Manual update of the CMA-9000 FMS track and ground speed is accomplished as follows:

1. Display the PROGRESS 1/4 page by pressing [PROG] when the 4-page set of PROGRESS pages is
configured (the PROGRESS 3/3 page when the 3-page set of PROGRESS pages is configured).

ACT PROGRESS 1/4

280T DTGN M ETE
ARRIE 35.2 00+20.2<
1L 1R
280o
2L TOU 88.3 00+32.2
2R
TRUE W I N D TK/GS
3L >020T / 45K T 281T/228K T 3R
TKE/XTK
T
4L R000 /L0.00N M 4R
RNP/ANP
5L 1.00/0.05N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

o
2. Enter the track angle in True (T)/Magnetic ( )and ground speed in knots into the scratchpad, e.g. 281/228.

3. Move the track angle and ground speed to the TK/GS field by pressing LSK 3R.

NOTE: Track angle and ground speed will automatically be updated as soon as the CMA-9000 FMS resumes
normal navigation operation.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 17-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

OPERATION WITH FAILED HEADING INPUT

When the heading input is unavailable, the two main consequences are: the computation of wind is unavailable,
and more importantly, the CMA-9000 FMS accuracy may be temporarily degraded during turns exceeding 20
degrees except when in GPS mode. To prevent this temporary loss of accuracy, it is necessary to manually
enter a new value of track angle each 10 to 20 seconds during a turn and again on completion of the turn.
Follow steps 2. and 3. as described in NAVIGATION IN DEAD RECKONING (DR) MODE, skipping the entry of
ground speed data. The procedure is not required when navigating with a valid GPS position.

MANUAL POSITION UPDATES

Manual position updates can be performed when navigating in Dead Reckoning mode.

The following operator action is required:

1. Prior to reaching a known reference position, get this known reference position coordinates to the scratchpad
by following one of these three methods:
• If the known point is a flight plan waypoint, go to the ACT RTE x LEGS POS 1/X page and line-select the
appropriate waypoint coordinates to the scratchpad;
• If the known point is a NavDataBase element, retrieve its coordinates from the NavDataBase via the WPT
DATA 1/1 page, and line-select them to the scratchpad (LSK 1R);
• Type the coordinates directly into the scratchpad.

2. Display the POS INIT/REF 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <POS INIT> (LSK 2L).

3. When directly overhead the known reference position, enter the scratchpad coordinates into the CMA-9000
FMS POS field by pressing LSK 1R. The CMA-9000 FMS position is immediately updated to the new
coordinates.

POS INIT/REF 1/2

FMS POS DR
1L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R
REF WAYPOINT
2L KBFI N 4 7 o3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o1 8 . 0 0 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z OCT20/04 5R

6L <SETUP 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page 17-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

APPENDIX A - CMA-9000 FMS DISPLAY PAGES - DETAILED

DESCRIPTIONS

CONTENTS

Subject Page
ARRIVALS 1/X....................................................................................................................................................A-1
BULLS EYE 1/3 (if Tactical Config BULLS EYE is configured).....................................................................A-4
BULLS EYE 2/3 (if Tactical Config BULLS EYE is configured).....................................................................A-6
BULLS EYE 3/3 (if Tactical Config BULLS EYE is configured)...................................................................A-10
CARP PLAN 1/3 (If CARP configured)...........................................................................................................A-13
CARP PLAN 2/3 (If CARP configured)...........................................................................................................A-16
CARP PLAN 3/3 (If CARP configured)...........................................................................................................A-19
CARP PROGRESS X/X (when X/X = 4/4 if 3 page set and CARP is configured or X/X = 5/5 if 4 page set
and CARP is configured) ................................................................................................................................A-22
CENTRAL CLEAR ? (if Tactical Config CENTRAL CLEAR is configured) ................................................A-25
COMM STATUS 1/1..........................................................................................................................................A-25
DATA LOAD 1/1 (if aircraft is on ground) .....................................................................................................A-26
DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1 ........................................................................................................................................A-29
DEPARTURES 1/X ...........................................................................................................................................A-31
DES+SAR 1/2 (if CARP and TACTICAL APPR are not configured) ............................................................A-34
DES+SAR 1/4 (if CARP or TACTICAL APPR is configured) ........................................................................A-34
DES+SAR 2/4 (if CARP or TACTICAL APPR is configured) .......................................................................A-36
DESELECT 1/1 .................................................................................................................................................A-37
DISPLAY 1/1 .....................................................................................................................................................A-40
DMAP WPT 1/X (if ELBIT, EURONAV, or EURONAV_A702 DMAP is configured) ....................................A-40
VHF NAV DESELECT 1/X (if DME interface is configured) .........................................................................A-42
DME STATUS 1/1 (if DME/DME interface is configured) .............................................................................A-43
DVS STATUS 1/2 (Only if DOPPLER is configured).....................................................................................A-44
DVS STATUS 2/2 (Only if DOPPLER is configured).....................................................................................A-46
EFIS 1/X (if EFIS interface is configured)......................................................................................................A-47
ESS FAILURE 1/1.............................................................................................................................................A-48
FIX INFO 1/1 .....................................................................................................................................................A-49
FLIGHT LOG 1/1 (if Flight Log is configured)...............................................................................................A-50
FUEL 1/2 page (if FUEL is configured)..........................................................................................................A-51
FUEL 2/2 page (if FUEL or FUEL+WEIGHTS is configured)........................................................................A-55
GLONASS STATUS 1/2 (if GLONASS is configured)...................................................................................A-58
GLONASS STATUS 2/2 (if GLONASS is configured)...................................................................................A-59
GPS DESELECT 1/1.........................................................................................................................................A-60
GPS PREDICT RAIM 1/1(if ARINC 743A is configured) ...............................................................................A-60
GPS SAT DESELECT 1/1 ................................................................................................................................A-61
GPS NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1.........................................................................................................................A-62
GPS STATUS 1/2 or cGPS STATUS 1/2 (if ARINC 743/743A GPS is configured) .....................................A-63
GPS STATUS 2/2 or cGPS STATUS 2/2 (if ARINC 743/743A GPS is configured) .....................................A-64
GPS STATUS 1/2 (EGI is configured) or .......................................................................................................A-65
mGPS STATUS 1/2 (dual GPS: LN-100GT w/ civil GPS)..............................................................................A-65
GPS STATUS 2/2 (EGI is configured) ............................................................................................................A-67
HOLD 1/X ..........................................................................................................................................................A-69
HOVER 1/1 (if HOVER configured, A/C configured as ROTOR, RALT equipment configured and Active
route displayed)...............................................................................................................................................A-74
IDENT 1/2..........................................................................................................................................................A-76

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

APPENDIX A - CMA-9000 FMS DISPLAY PAGES - DETAILED

DESCRIPTIONS
Subject Page

IDENT 2/2..........................................................................................................................................................A-77
INACT DES+SAR 2/2 (if CARP and TACTICAL APPR are not configured) ................................................A-78
INACT DES+SAR 2/4 (if CARP or TACTICAL APPR is configured)............................................................A-78
INACT DES+SAR 4/4 (if CARP or TACTICAL APPR is configured)............................................................A-81
INIT/REF INDEX 1/2 .........................................................................................................................................A-83
INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 .........................................................................................................................................A-85
INS STATUS 1/1 (if LITTON EGI interface is configured) ............................................................................A-86
IRSx STATUS X/Y (if IRS interface is configured; x= 1, 2 or 3; X/Y= 1/1, 1/2, 2/2, 1/3, 2/3 or 3/3)............A-86
INS/DVS STATUS 1/2 (SAGEM EGI configuration only) ..............................................................................A-90
INS/DVS STATUS 2/2 (SAGEM EGI configuration only) ..............................................................................A-91
INS/GPS STATUS 1/2 (if EGI interface is configured)..................................................................................A-91
INS/GPS STATUS 2/2 (if EGI interface is configured)..................................................................................A-92
IRSx ACCURACY X/X (X: 1, 2 or 3; if IRSx is in NAV mode) .......................................................................A-93
IRSx MALF MESSAGE X/X (X: 1, 2 or 3; If an IRS fault is present) ............................................................A-94
KALMAN STATUS 1/1 (if APIRS interface is configured)............................................................................A-95
MAINT MESSAGES 1/X ...................................................................................................................................A-96
MCDU MENU X/X {if there is at least one external sub-system configured}.............................................A-97
MESSAGE RECALL 1/X ..................................................................................................................................A-97
MISSION 1/1 (if ATOS or/and RADAR is configured)...................................................................................A-98
NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 ...............................................................................................................................A-100
NEAREST 1/1 .................................................................................................................................................A-102
NEAREST AIRPORT 1/X................................................................................................................................A-103
NEAREST VHF NAV 1/X (also applicable for NEAREST NDB, CUSTOM WPT, and USER WPT) .........A-104
PARALLAX ADJUST 1/1 ...............................................................................................................................A-105
PLAN DATA 1/1 (if configured) ....................................................................................................................A-105
POS INIT/REF 1/2 (if EGI is configured) OR POS INIT/REF 1/3 (if IRS is configured).............................A-107
POS INIT/REF 2/2 (if EGI interface is configured) or 2/3 (if IRS interface is configured).....................A-112
POS INIT/REF 3/3 (if LTN-92, LTN101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V interface is configured) .......................A-116
PREDEF WPT 1/X (If configured) .................................................................................................................A-117
PREDEF WPT 2/X (If configured) ................................................................................................................A-119
PREDEF WPT 3/3 (If configured) ................................................................................................................A-122
PROGRESS 1/3 (when 3-page set is configured).....................................................................................A-123
PROGRESS 3/3 (when 3-page set is configured).....................................................................................A-126
PROGRESS 1/4 (when 4-page set is configured).......................................................................................A-128
PROGRESS 2/4 (when 4-page set is configured).......................................................................................A-133
PROGRESS 4/4 (when 4-page set is configured).......................................................................................A-135
RADAR ID X-REF 1/1 (if FIAR 1500B RADAR is configured) ....................................................................A-138
RADIAL-TO 1/1...............................................................................................................................................A-139
RTA PROGRESS 2/3 (when 3-page set is configured) .............................................................................A-140
RTA PROGRESS 3/4 (when 4-page set is configured) .............................................................................A-141
RTE x 1/X ........................................................................................................................................................A-143
RTE x 2/X ........................................................................................................................................................A-150
RTE x LADDER 1/1 ........................................................................................................................................A-153
RTE x LEGS 1/X .............................................................................................................................................A-159
RTE x LEGS ETA 1/X.....................................................................................................................................A-166
RTE x LEGS POS 1/X ....................................................................................................................................A-169
RTE x SECTOR 1/1 ........................................................................................................................................A-171
RTE x SQUARE 1/1........................................................................................................................................A-175
SARSAT DATA 1/X ........................................................................................................................................A-179

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

APPENDIX A - CMA-9000 FMS DISPLAY PAGES - DETAILED

DESCRIPTIONS
Subject Page

SARSAT WPT 1/2...........................................................................................................................................A-183

SARSAT WPT 2/2...........................................................................................................................................A-185
SELECT CO ROUTE 1/X................................................................................................................................A-186
SELECT NAVAID {name } 1/X.......................................................................................................................A-187
SELECT WPT {name} 1/X..............................................................................................................................A-187
SETUP 1/1.......................................................................................................................................................A-188
SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3 page (If SIMUL configured and RTE2 configured)...............................................A-190
SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/2 page (if SIMUL configured only) ............................................................................A-190
SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/3 page (if SIMUL configured and RTE2 configured).............................................A-193
SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/2 page (if SIMUL configured only)..........................................................................A-193
SIMUL RTEx 3/3 page or 1/1 (if SIMUL PG and RTE2 is configured) .......................................................A-195
TACTICAL X/Y page (if configured).............................................................................................................A-197
TACTICAL APPR 1/3 page (if configured)...................................................................................................A-201
TACTICAL APPR 2/3 page (if configured)...................................................................................................A-206
TACTICAL APPR 3/3 page (if configured)...................................................................................................A-210
TIMER 1/1 page (if TIMER PG is configured) ..............................................................................................A-214
TMP UPDATE POS 2/2 (If CARP, PREDEF PG and either EGI or IRS are configured) ...........................A-217
UPDATE POS 1/1 (if PREDEF PAGE and IRS, EGI or DVS interface is configured) or UPDATE POS 1/2 (if
CARP is configured) .....................................................................................................................................A-220
USER ROUTES 1/1 ........................................................................................................................................A-226
USER WPT 1/2 ...............................................................................................................................................A-228
USER WPT 2/2 ...............................................................................................................................................A-232
USER WPT LIST 1/X ......................................................................................................................................A-234
VNAV APPR 1/1 Page (if VNAV interfaces is configured) .........................................................................A-236
VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1 Page (if VOR, DME or TACAN interfaces are configured) .........................A-239
WIND 1/1 (If CARP is configured) ................................................................................................................A-241
WPT DATA 1/1 ...............................................................................................................................................A-242
WPT LISTS 1/1 ...............................................................................................................................................A-246

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-iii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-iv
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

APPENDIX A

CMA-9000 FMS DISPLAY PAGES - DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

NOTE: In the key sequences shown to display the pages; square brackets “[ ]” indicate a function key, angle
brackets “< >” indicate a line select key (left and right softkeys).

ARRIVALS 1/X

This page provides a listing of all arrival procedures, approach, tactical approach procedures and runways for
the selected origin/destination. The selected or activated STAR, STAR transition, approach, tactical approach,
approach transition or runway are displayed.
Access the ARRIVALS page either from DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1 page, press <ARR>; or press [DEP/ARR] (if
airborne and past midway point of active route).

A. Initial Display:

PANC ARRIVALS 1/1

STARS RTE 1 APPROACHES
1L AMOTT5 VORD06R 1R
RUNWAYS
2L ELLAM2 06L 2R

3L TAGER1 06R 3R

4L YESKA1 14 4R

5L 24L 5R

6L <DEP/ARR ROUTE> 6R

B. Display after STAR selected and route executed, STAR transition selected, and approach selected:

PANC ARRIVALS 1/1

STARS RTE 1 APPROACHES
1L AMOTT5<ACT> <SEL>VORD06R 1R
TRANS TRANS
2L ODK <SEL> ANC 2R

3L D173J 3R

4L D350J 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE ROUTE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Display after all selections executed:

PANC ARRIVALS 1/1

STARS RTE 1 APPROACHES
1L
AMOTT5<ACT> <ACT>VORD06R 1R
TRANS TRANS
2L ODK <ACT> <ACT> ANC 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <DEP/ARR ROUTE> 6R

D. Inactive arrivals page, when changes not yet confirmed:

PANC ARRIVALS 1/1

STARS RTE 2 APPROACHES
1L
AMOTT5<SEL> <SEL>VORD06R
1R
TRANS TRANS
2L
ODK <SEL> ANC 2R

3L
D173J
3R

4L
D330J 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

E. Inactive arrivals page after all selections confirmed:

PANC ARRIVALS 1/2

STARS RTE 2 APPROACHES
1L
AMOTT5<SEL> <SEL>VORD06R
1R
TRANS TRANS
2L
ODK <SEL> <SEL> ANC 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <DEP/ARR ROUTE> 6R

PANC (title): Airport identifier (all page data applies only to the identified airport).

RTE (#): Display related route number.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STARS [1L,2L,3L,4L,5L]: Alphabetical listing of all STARS applicable to the airport. Line selection of the
desired STAR removes all other STARS and non-applicable approaches/runways and displays a listing of
applicable arrival transitions. Deletion of the Selected/Active STAR cancels any STAR, STAR transition
selections (line selection toggles the STAR, STAR transition status between selected and not selected).

TRANS [2L,3L,4L,5L]: Displayed after STAR selection. Used to select/delete any arrival (enroute) transitions
associated with the selected STAR.

DEP/ARR [6L]: Returns to the DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1 page (unless a route modification is in progress).

ERASE [6L]: Cancel any route modifications and/or any arrival selections. If confirm erase route modifications
is configured, then upon pressing ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying CANCEL/CONFIRM
prompts on line select keys 6L and 6R respectively.

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.
Also refer to the comments about CANCEL/CONFIRM in ERASE [6L] above.

APPROACHES [1R,2R,3R,4R,5R]: Alphabetical listing of all approaches applicable to the airport. Line
selection of the desired approach removes all other approaches/runways and non-applicable STARS and
displays a listing of applicable approach transitions. Deletion of the selected/active approach cancels any
approach, approach transition selection.

TACT APPR [1R,2R,3R,4R,5R]: Alphabetical listing of all tactical approaches applicable to the selected
origin/destination. Line selection of the desired tactical approach removes all other tactical approaches,
approaches/runways and non-applicable STARS. Deletion of the selected/active approach cancels any
approach, approach transition selection. Only displayed if TACTICAL APPR is configured. The displayed name
is right justified.

TRANS [2R,3R,4R,5R]: Displayed after approach selection. Used to select/delete any approach transition
associated with the selected approach.

RUNWAY [2R,3R,4R,5R]: Alphabetical listing of all runways applicable to the airport. Line selection of the
desired runway deletes all approaches and non-applicable STARS. Deletion of the selected/active runway
cancels any runway selection.

ROUTE [6R]: Access to the RTE 1/X page related to the displayed ARRIVAL.

CONFIRM [6R]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.
Also refer to the comments about CANCEL/CONFIRM in ERASE [6L] above.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

BULLS EYE 1/3 (if Tactical Config BULLS EYE is configured)

Display BULLS EYE 1/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <BULLS EYE> {if no CFG KEY is configured to BULL} or
[BULL] {if any CFG KEY is configured to BULL} or [TACT],<BULL TOP> {if TACT key configured, and BULLS
TOP configured on TACTICAL page.}.

A. When no Bulls Eye waypoint and no Bulls Eye Target waypoint have been entered.

BULLS EYE 1/3

PPOS REF
FR<
1L 1R
TGT POS
2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
ETA DELTA ALT
5L FT 5R

6L <EFIS 6R

B. When the Bulls Eye Target rendezvous is achievable and part of the active route.

BULLS EYE 1/3

PPOS REF
o
1L BULL 010 /33.0N M FR<
1R
TGT POS BETGT ACT RTE
2L PPOS 012o/36.0N M
2R
BULL 098o/26.0N M
3L RDV POS BERDV
3R
PPOS 322o/60.0N M
4L BULL 122o/26.3N M 4R
ETA DELTA ALT
5L >1 6 1 5 . 2 Z +4000F T 5R

6L <EFIS 6R

C. When the Bulls Eye Target rendezvous is unachievable.

BULLS EYE 1/3

PPOS REF
o
1L BULL 010 /33.0N M FR<
1R
TGT POS BETGT
2L PPOS 012o/36.0N M
2R
BULL 098o/26.0N M
3L RDV POS UNACHIEVABLE
3R

4L 4R
ETA DELTA ALT
5L > +4000F T 5R

6L <EFIS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

D. When the Bulls EyeTarget is fixed.

BULLS EYE 1/3

PPOS REF
o
BULL 010 /33.0N M FR<
1L 1R
TGT POS BETGT
2L PPOS 012o/36.0N M
2R
BULL 098o/26.0N M
3L 3R

4L 4R
ETA DELTA ALT
5L >1 6 1 5 . 2 Z +4000F T 5R

6L <EFIS 6R

PPOS (1L): Displays the present aircraft position bearing and distance relative to the Bulls eye waypoint. This
field is blank when the Bulls eye waypoint is not defined. The Bulls eye ident always correspond to the one
defined in the BULLS EYE 3/3 page.

REF [1R]: Toggles the bearing/distance reference type displayed of the present aircraft position relative to the
Bulls Eye waypoint. FR: Radial (RAD) from Bulls Eye waypoint to present position. TO: Course (CRS) from
present position to Bulls Eye waypoint. The default value on cold start is FR.

TGT POS (2L,2R): Displays the Bulls Eye Target waypoint ident. When the Bulls eye target is part of the active
route "ACT RTE" is displayed in inverse video white.

TGT POS BRG/DIS (2L,2R, 3L,3R): Displays the Bulls Eye Target bearing/distance relative to the present
aircraft position (PPOS) and relative to the Bulls eye waypoint (BULL). The Bulls eye ident always correspond
to the Bulls eye ident defined on BULLS EYE 3/3 page. When the Bulls eye target is not defined, this field is
blank. If the Bulls eye waypoint is not defined, the bearing/distance relative to Bulls eye waypoint is blank.

RDV POS (3L,3R): Displays the Bulls Eye Target Rendezvous ident or status. When the Bulls Eye Target
Rendezvous is achievable the ident "BERDV" is displayed, otherwise "UNACHIEVABLE" is displayed in inverse
video white. When the Bulls Eye Target is not defined or is a fixed waypoint, the field is blank.

RDV POS BRG/DIS (4L,4R): Displays the Bulls eye Target Rendezvous bearing/distance relative to the aircraft
present position (PPOS) and relative to the Bulls eye waypoint (BULL). The Bulls eye ident always correspond
to the Bulls eye ident defined the BULLS EYE 3/3 page. When the Bulls eye target Rendezvous is not
achievable, this field is blank. If the Bulls eye waypoint is not defined, the bearing/distance relative to Bulls eye
reference is blank.

ETA/ETE [5L]: Estimated time of arrival or estimated time en route to the Bulls Eye Target Rendezvous (or to
the Bulls Eye Target itself if it is not moving). The field is blank if the Bulls Eye Target Rendezvous is not
achievable. On selection will toggle between ETA and ETE.

NOTE: When the aircraft is on ground, if PLAN DATA page is not installed the ETE/ETA field is blank.

DELTA ALT (5R): Displays the altitude difference between the Bulls Eye Target Rendezvous (or the Bulls Eye
Target itself if a) it is not moving or b) the Bulls Eye Target Rendezvous is unachievable) and the aircraft. The
field is blank if the Bulls Eye Target altitude has not been entered on the BULLS EYE 2/3 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

EFIS [6L]: Access to the EFIS 1/1 page. This field is only displayed when one of the following EFIS is
configured: SPERRY, SPERRY2, GAMA, SEXTANT, ROCKWELL, ROCKWELL2, ROCKWELL3, BARCO,
AHCAS2, MEGGIT, or Primus Epic, otherwise, this field is blank.

BULLS EYE 2/3 (if Tactical Config BULLS EYE is configured)

Display BULLS EYE 2/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <BULLS EYE>, [NEXT] {if configured on one of the
INIT/REF pages}
or [TACT],<BULL TGT> {if TACT key configured, and BULLS TGT configured on TACTICAL page.}
or [BULL], [NEXT] {if any CFG KEY is configured to BULL}
or [INIT/REF], <WPT LISTS>, <SARSAT WPT>, <NNN##>, <BULLS TGT>
(Where NNN is "ELT" or "PLB" or "EPI" or "TST" and ## varies from 01 to 99)

The BULLS EYE 2/3 page allows selection or creation of the Bulls Eye Target waypoint. It may be created as a
moving waypoint when the configuration option is selected.

When the Bulls Eye Target waypoint is a moving waypoint and it is present in the active route, an ACT RTE
caption is displayed in reverse video.

When the Bulls Eye Target waypoint is being created or modified and all mandatory fields are entered,
CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts will appear. Leaving the BULLS EYE 2/3 page without confirmation will
automatically perform a CANCEL.

A. The page display is as follow when no Bulls Eye Target waypoint has been entered or after entering
DELETE on the TGT ID field.

BULLS EYE 2/3

BETGT TGT ID/POS
o o
1L
. . 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L --- /---N M 2R
TYPE MSL ALT
3L >FIXED ------F T 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
o o
5L --- --.-- ---- --.-- 5R

6L <SARSAT WPT 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. When no Bulls Eye Target waypoint has been entered but the type is set to MOVING.

BULLS EYE 2/3

BETGT TGT ID/POS
o o
1L . . 1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
2L ---T/---N M T
/ KT
2R
TYPE MSL ALT
3L >MOVING ------F T 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

C. After defining the Bulls Eye Target waypoint manually:

BULLS EYE 2/3

BETGT T G T I D / P O S
1L
N43°26.20 E004°52.32 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L 015 /270N M 2R
TYPE MSL ALT
3L >FIXED ------F T 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L BULL 000 /0.0N M 4R
REF WPT POS
5L N43°26.20 E004°52.32 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

D. After selecting a new Bulls Eye Target:

BULLS EYE 2/3

TGT01 T G T I D / P O S
1L
N43°26.20 E004°52.32 1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
T
2L 015 /270N M 111T/222KT
2R
TYPE MSL ALT
3L MOVING ------F T 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E. After entering DELETE on the Bulls Eye Target waypoint:

BULLS EYE 2/3

TGT01 T G T I D / P O S
1L
N43°26.20 E004°52.32 1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
T
2L 015 /270N M T
111 /222KT
2R
TYPE MSL ALT
3L MOVING ------F T 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

F. When the Bulls Eye Target waypoint is in the active route:

BULLS EYE 2/3

BETGT T G T I D / P O S A C T R T E
1L N43°26.20 E004°52.32 1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
2L 015T/270N M 111T / 222K T 2R
TYPE MSL ALT
3L MOVING ------F T 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <SARSAT WPT DES+SAR> 6R

TGT ID [1L]: Bulls Eye Target waypoint identifier (5 characters max.). Entry of an ID triggers a search in all the
FMS databases for the requested waypoint. Once the selected waypoint is determined, the ID/POS, BRG/DIS,
TYPE and TK/GS (for moving wayoints) fields are updated with the waypoint data. The ident is reset to BETGT
when a manual entry is performed on the POS, BRG/DIS or REF ID/POS/RAD/DIS fields. Entering DELETE in
this field will delete the Bulls Eye Target entry and reset all fields to their default values. The default value of this
field is BETGT.

POS [1R]: Bulls Eye Target waypoint position. Manual entry forces default value to appear in the TGT ID, REF
WPT ID, REF WPT POS and RAD/DIS fields and automatically updates the BRG/DIS field. For a moving Bulls
Eye Target, the value will be recomputed and displayed at a minimum rate of once every second. The default
value is boxes. This field also displays ACT RTE in reverse white video when the Bulls Eye Target waypoint is
present in the active route. Only modification to a manually defined Bulls Eye Target is allowed in this state.

BRG/DIS [2L]: Bearing and distance from the current aircraft position to the Bulls Eye Target waypoint. Manual
entry forces default value to appear in the TGT ID, REF WPT ID, REF WPT POS, and RAD/DIS fields, and
automatically updates the POS field. BRG and DIS values may be entered individually or simultaneously; a ‘/’
symbol preceding a value in the scratchpad indicates only the DIS value must be updated. The values will be
recomputed and displayed at a minimum rate of once every second. The default values are dashes, and the
minimum/maximum values for the bearing are 0/360 degrees and 0/999 NM for the distance.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TK/GS [2R]: Track angle and ground speed of a moving Bulls Eye Target waypoint. This field is only displayed
if the selected Bulls Eye Target is a moving waypoint. Entry is allowed on this field only when the Bulls Eye
Target is manually defined.

TYPE [3L]: Waypoint selection type: FIXED or MOVING. Toggling this field is allowed only when the Bulls Eye
Target is
manually defined and is not in the flight plan, and the moving waypoints are configured.

MSL ALT [3R]: MSL altitude of the Bulls Eye Target waypoint in feet. Default value is dashes and the
minimum/maximum values are -1000/65535 feet.

REF WPT ID [4L]: Reference waypoint identifier with dashes as default value. Entry of an ID triggers a search
in all the FMS databases for the requested waypoint. Once the selected waypoint is determined, its position will
be displayed in the REF WPT POS field, the RAD/DIS and the TGT ID will be reset to their default values and
the POS and BRG/DIS fields will be automatically updated. Entering a moving waypoint as a reference will use
the moving waypoint's position computed at the moment of the entry.

RAD/DIS[4R]: Radial/distance from the reference position to the desired Bulls Eye Target waypoint position.
The values are blanked when no REF WPT POS is defined, otherwise zeros are displayed as the default
values. No entries are allowed when the fields are blanked. Manual entry automatically updates the POS and
BRG/DIS fields. RAD and DIS values may be entered individually or simultaneously; a ‘/’ symbol preceding a
value in the scratchpad indicates only the DIS value must be updated. The minimum/maximum values for the
radial are 0/360 degrees and 0/999 NM for the distance.

REF WPT POS [5L]: Reference position with dashes as default value. It corresponds to the position of the REF
WPT ID or a manually entered value. Upon entry of a value, the RAD/DIS and the TGT ID fields are reset to
their default values, the REF ID field will be set to dash symbols and the POS and BRG/DIS fields will be
automatically updated.

SARSAT WPT [6L]: Access to the SARSAT WPT page. Displayed only if a DF is configured.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancels modifications or deletion of the Bulls Eye Target waypoint. Upon cancellation of a
modification, all
the fields return to their previous values.

DES+SAR [6R] or TACTICAL [6R]: When TACT key is configured, the DES+SAR prompt is replaced by
TACTICAL. In this case, the prompt gives access to the TACTICAL 1/Y page instead of the DES+SAR 1/Y
page. Access to the DES+SAR (or TACTICAL) page and sets the Bulls Eye Target waypoint as reference
waypoint.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirms a modification or deletion of the Bulls Eye Target waypoint. Confirmation of a
modification is rejected when either no position or no tk/gs have been entered. Upon confirmation of the deletion
of the Bulls Eye Target waypoint, all fields are reset to their default values. Note: Unless confirmation is
requested for a deletion, changes are still allowed while CONFIRM is on the screen.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts upon modification of the Bulls Eye Target
waypoint.

(DELETE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts upon deletion of the Bulls Eye Target
waypoint.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

BULLS EYE 3/3 (if Tactical Config BULLS EYE is configured)

Display BULLS EYE 3/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <BULLS EYE>, [PREV] {if not configured on one of the
INIT/REF pages}
or [TACT],<BULL WPT> {if TACT key configured, and BULLS WPT configured on TACTICAL page.}
or [BULL], [PREV] {if CFG KEY 5 is configured to BULL}

The BULLS EYE 3/3 pages allow creation or selection of the Bulls Eye waypoint. For selection from the user
database, the Bulls Eye waypoint can only be defined as a fixed waypoint.

When the Bulls Eye waypoint is being created or modified and all mandatory fields are entered,
CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts will appear. Leaving the BULLS EYE 3/3 page without confirmation will
automatically perform a CANCEL.

A. The page display is as follow when no Bulls Eye waypoint has been entered or after entering DELETE on
the BULL ID field.

BULLS EYE 3/3

BULL BULL ID/POS
o o
1L . . 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L --- /---N M 2R

3L 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
o o
5L --- --.-- ---- --.-- 5R

6L <NEAREST WPT LIST> 6R

B. After a manual entry of the Bulls Eye waypoint:

BULLS EYE 3/3

BULL B U L L I D / P O S
1L
N43°26.20 E004°52.32 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L 015 /270N M 2R

3L 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ABCDE 000 /0.0N M 4R
REF WPT POS
5L N43°26.20 E004°52.32 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. After selection of the Bulls Eye waypoint:

BULLS EYE 3/3

BUL01 B U L L I D / P O S
1L N43°26.20 E004°52.32 1R
BRG/DIS
2L 015T/270N M 2R

3L 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

D. After entering DELETE on the Bulls Eye waypoint:

BULLS EYE 3/3
BUL01 B U L L I D / P O S
1L
N43°26.20 E004°52.32 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L 015 /270N M 2R

3L 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

E. When the Bulls Eye waypoint is in the active route:

BULLS EYE 3/3

BULL B U L L I D / P O S A C T R T E
1L
N43°26.20 E004°52.32 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L 015 /270N M 2R

3L 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <NEAREST WPT LIST> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

BULL ID [1L]: Bulls Eye waypoint identifier (5 characters max.). Entry of an ID triggers a search in all the FMS
databases for the requested waypoint. Once the selected waypoint is determined, the ID/POS, BRG/DIS and
TYPE fields are updated with the waypoint data. The ident is reset to BULL when a manual entry is performed
on the POS, BRG/DIS or REF ID/POS/RAD/DIS fields. Entering DELETE in this field will delete the Bulls Eye
waypoint entry and reset all fields to their default values. The default value for this field is BULL.

POS [1R]: Bulls Eye waypoint position. Manual entry forces default value to appear in the BULL ID, REF WPT
ID, REF WPT POS and RAD/DIS fields and automatically updates the BRG/DIS field. The default value is
boxes. This field also displays ACT RTE in reverse white video when the Bulls Eye waypoint is present in the
active route. Only modification to a manually defined Bulls Eye waypoint is allowed in this state.

BRG/DIS [2L]: Bearing and distance from the current aircraft position to the Bulls Eye waypoint. Manual entry
forces default value to appear in the BULL ID, REF WPT ID, REF WPT POS, and RAD/DIS fields, and
automatically updates the POS field. BRG and DIS values may be entered individually or simultaneously; a ‘/’
symbol preceding a value in the scratchpad indicates only the DIS value must be updated. The values will be
recomputed and displayed at a minimum rate of once every second. The default values are dashes, and the
minimum/maximum values for the bearing are 0/360 degrees and 0/999 NM for the distance.

REF WPT ID [4L]: Reference waypoint identifier with dashes as default value. Entry of an ID triggers a search
in all the FMS databases for the requested waypoint. Once the selected waypoint is determined, its position will
be displayed in the REF WPT POS field, the RAD/DIS and the BULL ID will be reset to their default values and
the POS and BRG/DIS fields will be automatically updated. Entering a moving waypoint as a reference will use
the moving waypoint's position computed at the moment of the entry.

RAD/DIS[4R]: Radial/distance from the reference position to the desired Bulls Eye waypoint position. The
values are blanked when no REF WPT POS is defined, otherwise zeros are displayed as the default values. No
entries are allowed when the fields are blanked. Manual entry automatically updates the POS and BRG/DIS
fields. RAD and DIS values may be entered individually or simultaneously; a ‘/’ symbol preceding a value in the
scratchpad indicates only the DIS value must be updated. The minimum/maximum values for the radial are
0/360 degrees and 0/999 NM for the distance.

REF WPT POS [5L]: Reference position with dashes as default value. It corresponds to the position of the REF
WPT ID or a manually entered value. Upon entry of a value, the REF ID field will be set to dash symbols, the
RAD/DIS and the BULL ID will be reset to their default values and the POS and BRG/DIS fields will be
automatically updated.

NEAREST[6L]: Access to the NEAREST 1/1 page.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancels modification or deletion of the Bulls Eye waypoint. Upon cancellation of a modification,
all the fields return to their previous values.

WPT LIST [6R]: Access to the USER WPT LIST 1/N page. This prompt is present only if at least one user
waypoint is defined in the user database.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirms modification or deletion of the Bulls Eye waypoint. Upon confirmation of the deletion
of the Bulls Eye waypoint, all fields are reset to their default values. Note: Unless confirmation is requested for a
deletion, changes are still allowed while CONFIRM is on the screen.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts upon modification of the Bulls Eye waypoint.

(DELETE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts upon deletion of the Bulls Eye waypoint.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CARP PLAN 1/3 (If CARP configured)

Display CARP PLAN 1/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], <CARP> {when
a CARP procedure is in the displayed flight plan} or
[TACT], <CARP> {when TACT key is configured and a CARP procedure is in the displayed flight plan}
Automatically accessed whenever /C is entered over a CARP procedure on the LEGS page.

The CARP PLAN pages are used to define the parameters for a CARP procedure. The CARP procedure may
be defined in either the active or inactive route.

A. ACTive status and sample inputs – Custom CARP.

ACT RTE1 CARP PLAN 1/3

TYPE
1L
>CUST CARP 1R
CDFB IDENT POINT (IP)
2L N45o00.00 W072o00.00
2R
WPT07 POINT IMPACT (PI)
3L N45o00.02 W072o00.00 3R
WPT08TRAILING EDGE (TE)
o o
4L N45 00.02 W072 00.00 4R
ZONE WIDTH ESC TIME
5L 0.30NM 30SEC 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

B. ACTive status and sample inputs - Custom HARP.

ACT RTE1 CARP PLAN 1/3
TYPE
1L >CUST HARP 1R
CDFB IDENT POINT (IP)
2L N45o00.00 W072o00.00
2R
WPT07 POINT IMPACT (PI)
o o
3L N45 00.02 W072 00.00 3R
WPT08TRAILING EDGE (TE)
o o
4L N45 00.02 W072 00.00 4R
ZONE WIDTH ESC TIME
5L 0.30NM 30SEC 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. ACTive status and sample inputs - Custom HAHO.

ACT RTE1 CARP PLAN 1/3
TYPE
1L >CUST HAHO 1R
CDFB IDENT POINT (IP)
2L N45 00.00 W072o00.00
o
2R
WPT07 POINT IMPACT (PI)
o o
3L N45 00.02 W072 00.00 3R

4L 4R
DROP TIME ESC TIME
5L 50SEC 30SEC 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

D. ACTive status and sample inputs – FREE FALL.

ACT RTE1 CARP PLAN 1/3
TYPE
1L
>FREE FALL 1R
CDFB IDENT POINT (IP)
2L N45 00.00 W072o00.00
o
2R
WPT07 POINT IMPACT (PI)
o o
3L N45 00.02 W072 00.00 3R
WPT08TRAILING EDGE (TE)
4L N45o00.02 W072o00.00 4R
ZONE WIDTH ESC TIME
5L 0.30NM 30SEC 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

ACT/MOD/" " RTEx (title): ACT indicates that the EXECuted CARP procedure is active (CARP Active
discrete is on). MOD indicates the CARP procedure modifications have not been EXECuted yet. A blank field
indicates the CARP procedure:
• Is in the active flight plan, but is not considered Active yet (CARP Active discrete is OFF), or
• The CARP procedure for the Inactive route is being displayed.
Also, RTEx (where 'n' can be 1 or 2) indicates for which route the current CARP procedure is being displayed.

TYPE [1L]: Air Release Type selection key - CUST CARP, CUST HARP, CUST HAHO, FREE FALL. The Air
Release Type affects the CARP parameters displayed.

IP [2L]: Optional Waypoint Identifier of the Identification Point (IP). The entry may be in the form of a place-
bearing-distance (wptidBRG/DIS, e.g. WPT07012/112). If an IP position is entered in LSK [2R], then a
temporary waypoint is automatically created and the identifier (WPTXX) is displayed in [2L]. Otherwise, a
database waypoint identifier may be entered in this field.

IP [2R]: Optional Latitude and Longitude coordinates of the Identification Point (IP). The format of the position
must be in the form of latitude and longitude (“NxxWxxx” or “Nxxxx.xxWxxxxx.xx”). If an identifier is entered in
LSK [2L], then its position is automatically displayed here in normal font.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PI [3L]: Waypoint Identifier of the Point of Impact (PI). The entry may be in the form of a place-bearing-distance
(wptidBRG/DIS, e.g. WPT07012/112). If an PI position is entered in LSK [3R], then a temporary waypoint is
automatically created and the identifier (WPTXX) is displayed in [3L]. Otherwise, a database waypoint identifier
may be entered in this field.

PI [3R]: Latitude and Longitude coordinates of the Point of Impact (PI). The format of the position must be in
the form of latitude and longitude (“NxxWxxx” or “Nxxxx.xxWxxxxx.xx”). If an identifier is entered in LSK [3L],
then its position is automatically displayed here in normal font.

TE [4L]: Waypoint Identifier of the Drop Zone Trailing Edge (TE). The entry may be in the form of a place-
bearing-distance (wptidBRG/DIS, e.g. WPT07012/112). If a TE position is entered in LSK [4R], then a temporary
waypoint is automatically created and the identifier (WPTXX) is displayed in [4L]. Otherwise, a database
waypoint identifier may be entered in this field. Not available for CUST HAHO drops.

TE [4R]: Latitude and Longitude coordinates of the Trailing Edge (TE). The format of the position must be in the
form of latitude and longitude (“NxxWxxx” or “Nxxxx.xxWxxxxx.xx”). If an identifier is entered in LSK [4L], then
its position is automatically displayed here in normal font. Not available for CUST HAHO drops.

ZONE WIDTH [5L]: Drop zone width (nm). Default value is 0.30. Range [0.03..9.99]. This field is not displayed
for CUST HAHO.

DROP TIME [5L]: In case of Custom HAHO. Time, in seconds, needed to perform all the intended drops. Used
to compute the best solution. Default is dashes, range [1..999].

ESC TIME [5R]: Desired elapsed time (s) after reaching the XTE (Red Light) that A/C must maintain current
heading, speed, and altitude. Default value is 30. Range [1..999].

CARP PROGRESS [6L]: Access to CARP PROGRESS page. Displayed for the active route only.

ERASE [6L]: Cancel any active route modifications and/or any CARP parameter changes. Only displayed
when the page is displaying the MOD status. If by pressing ERASE the CARP procedure is removed from the
flight plan, then the LEGS page is automatically displayed.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirm the changes made to the inactive route. If the CARP solution does not exist with the
parameters entered, an advisory message is displayed in the scratchpad and the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts
remain displayed. The user may then correct the parameters, press CANCEL or remove the procedure from the
flight plan.

NOTES:
• Pressing on a waypoint ID or position LSK with an empty scratchpad copies the ID or position to the
scratchpad.

• Waypoint entries may be relative to any waypoint using relative bearing and distance as offsets (e.g.
WPT12123/60 defines a position with a bearing of 123 degrees and distance of 60 nm relative to WPT12).

• Invalid entries in terms of format or range are not accepted by the FMS and an advisory message is
displayed in the scratchpad.

• Pressing the RESET key on the CARP PLAN 3/3 page resets all parameters to their default values (for the
chosen type of CARP/HARP).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-15
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CARP PLAN 2/3 (If CARP configured)

Display CARP PLAN 2/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], <CARP>,
[NEXT] {when a CARP procedure is in the displayed flight plan} or
[TACT], <CARP>,[NEXT] {when TACT key is configured and a CARP procedure is in the displayed flight plan}
Automatically accessed whenever /C is entered over a CARP procedure on the LEGS page, [NEXT].

A. Custom CARP view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 2/3

PI ELEV SD DIST
1L
5000F T 3.1N M
1R
IAS/HAT -DROP- TEMP
2L 156K T / 1560F T +20.0oC 2R

3L WIND> 3R
MEAN -WIND- GROUND
4L 020T/45K T 020T / 15K T 4R
PI QNH
5L 29.92I N H G < 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

B. Custom HARP view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 2/3

PI ELEV SD DIST
1L
5000F T 3.1N M
1R
IAS/HAT -DROP- TEMP
o
2L 156K T / 1560F T +20.0 C
2R
ACTUATION HAT
3L 1560F T WIND> 3R
HI MEAN -WIND- GROUND
4L 020T/45K T 020T / 15K T 4R
LO MEAN WIND GROUND
5L PI QNH 5R
T
0 2 0 /3 5 K T 29.92I N H G <
6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Custom HAHO view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 2/3

PI ELEV SD DIST
1L 5000F T 3.1N M
1R
IAS/HAT -DROP- TEMP
2L 156K T / 1560F T +20.0oC 2R
SAFETY FACTOR
3L 1560F T WIND> 3R
MEAN -WIND- GROUND
4L 020T / 45K T 020T / 15K T 4R
PI QNH
5L 29.92I N H G < 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

D. Free Fall view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 2/3

PI ELEV SD DIST
1L
5000F T 3.1N M
1R
IAS/HAT -DROP- TEMP
2L 156K T / 1560F T +20.0ºC 2R

3L WIND> 3R
MEAN -WIND- GROUND
4L 020T / 45K T 020T / 15K T 4R
PI QNH
5L 29.92I N H G < 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

ACT/MOD/" " RTEx (title): ACT indicates that the EXECuted CARP procedure is active (CARP Active
discrete is on).
MOD indicates the CARP procedure modifications have not been EXECuted yet. A blank field indicates the
CARP procedure:
• Is in the active flight plan, but is not considered Active yet (CARP Active discrete is OFF), or
• the CARP procedure for the Inactive route is being displayed.
Also, RTEx (where 'n' can be 1 or 2) indicates for which route the current CARP procedure is being displayed.

PI ELEV [1L]: Point of Impact (PI) elevation (feet) above Mean Sea Level(MSL). Range [-1000 .. 9999]. The
maximum sum of the DROP HAT and PI ELEV is 19999 feet.

SD DIST [1R]: Display and entry of Slowdown Distance (nm), defined as the distance from the Slowdown point
(SD) to the CARP green light waypoint (CRP). The default is the FMS computed value. If insufficient CARP
parameters are available to compute a value, the FMS displays dashes until sufficient parameters are available,
at which time the default value is displayed. Manual entry overrides the FMS computed value. Manual entry
range: 0.0 to 99.9 nm.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-17
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DROP IAS/HAT [2L]: Mission Indicated Air Speed (knts) and Height Above Terrain (HAT) (ft) planned for the
drop. The default is boxes. A manual entry is required. When the entered HAT is less than the entered VERT
DIST value, an invalid data entry message is displayed. Range [50 .. 175] / [ 0 .. 19999]. The maximum sum of
DROP HAT and PI ELEV is 19999 feet. DROP HAT value must be greater than the ACUATION HAT for CUST
HARP. DROP HAT value must be greater than the entered safety factor for CUST HAHO.

DROP TEMP [2R]: Static air temperature ((C) at the drop altitude. The default is the FMS value taken from the
ADC at the current altitude corrected for temperature deviation. Manual entry may override. When temperature
from ADC is not available, the standard day temperature deviation is used to compute the temperature at the
drop altitude. If the drop HAT has not yet been entered, the ADC static air temperature is displayed, if available.
Otherwise dashes are displayed. Range [-99.9 .. 99.9]

ACTUATION HAT [3L]: Displayed for CUST HARP only. Height, in feet, above PI where the parachute cord is
pulled. Actuation HAT must be less than the entered DROP HAT, and greater than the entered DECEL DIST.
Default display is boxes. Manual entry is required. Range [0 .. 19999].

SAFETY FACTOR [3L]: Displayed for CUST HAHO only. A safety buffer (ft) from exit to assembly of
parachutists under canopy and for assembly at a certain altitude once they arrive over the drop zone. The safety
factor must be less than the entered DROP HAT. Default value is 2,000 feet. Range [0 .. 5000].

WIND [3R]: Access to the CRP01 WIND page.

MEAN WIND [4L]: Mean Effective Wind (MEW) direction and speed (() /(kt) or (T)/(kt) from PI altitude to drop
altitude to be used in the FMS CARP calculations. Unit used depends on current display setup (true or
mag).The default display is computed by the FMS based on current and predicted wind at the mission altitude. A
manual entry is allowed. If a ground wind is entered (GROUND WND), then the displayed value is modified to
take into account both the FMS predicted value at the drop altitude and the entered ground wind. Range [0 ..
360] / [0 .. 99]. Not displayed for CUST HARP.

HI MEAN WIND [4L]: Displayed for CUST HARP only. Mean Effective Wind (MEW) direction and speed (() /(kt)
or (T)/(kt) from the drop altitude to the actuation altitude to be used in the FMS CARP calculations. Unit used
depends on current display setup (true or mag).The default display is computed by the FMS based on current
and predicted wind at the drop and actuation altitudes. A manual entry may force a specific value, which may be
based on observations by a ground team using the procedure defined in AFI 11-217. Range [0 .. 360] / [0 ..
99].

GROUND WIND [4R]: Wind direction and speed (() /(kt) or (T)/(kt) observed by a ground team at PI (Point of
Impact). Unit used depends on current display setup (true or mag). If a Mean Effective Wind (MEW) has been
entered or a LO MEAN WIND for HAHO, this field is cleared. The default display is dashes. Range [0 .. 360] / [0
.. 99]

LO MEAN WIND [5L]: Displayed for CUST HARP only. Mean Effective Wind (MEW) direction and speed (°)
T
/(kt) or ( )/(kt) from PI altitude to actuation altitude to be used in the FMS CARP calculations. Unit used
depends on current display setup (true or mag).The default display is computed by the FMS based on current
and predicted wind at the actuation altitude. A manual entry is allowed. If a ground wind is entered (GROUND
WND), then the displayed value is modified to take into account both the FMS predicted value at the actuation
altitude and the entered ground wind. If the actuation HAT has not yet been entered, dashes are displayed.
Range [0 .. 360] / [0 .. 99].

PI QNH [5R]: Altimeter setting at PI in mb or inHg. The displayed unit (mb or inHg) can be toggled via LSK 5R
when the scratchpad is empty. Displayed, in small font, when the FMS altimeter setting (QNH) is used. Manual
entry is allowed in inches of mercury (in Hg) with a range from 27.0 to 32.0 in Hg or in millibars (mb) with a
range from 915 to 1083 mb. When neither a manual PI QNH entry nor the FMS QNH is available, boxes are
displayed.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-18
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CARP PROGRESS [6L]: Access to CARP PROGRESS page.

ERASE [6L]: Cancel any active route modifications and/or any CARP parameter changes. Only displayed when
the page is displaying the MOD status. If by pressing ERASE the CARP procedure is removed from the flight
plan, then the LEGS page is automatically displayed.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirm the changes made to the inactive route. If the CARP solution does not exist with the
parameters entered, an advisory message is displayed in the scratchpad and the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts
remain displayed. The user may then correct the parameters, press CANCEL or remove the procedure from the
flight plan.

NOTES:
• Entering DELETE on any field causes it to resume its default value.

• Pressing the RESET key on the CARP PLAN 3/3 page resets all parameters to their default values.

CARP PLAN 3/3 (If CARP configured)

Display CARP PLAN 3/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], <CARP>,
[PREV] {when a CARP procedure is in the displayed flight plan} or
[TACT], <CARP>, [PREV] {when TACT key is configured and a CARP procedure is in the displayed flight plan}
Automatically accessed whenever /C is entered over a CARP procedure on the LEGS page, [PREV].

A. Custom CARP view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 3/3

FTT VERT DIST
1L
53.4S E C 1560F T 1R
EXIT TIME FALL CONST
2L 45.0S E C 72.0S E C 2R
DECEL QUO DEPL RATE
3L 8.4S E C 18.0F T / S E C
3R

4L 4R

5L RESET> 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-19
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Custom HARP view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 3/3

FTT VERT DIST
1L 53.4S E C 1560F T 1R
EXIT TIME FALL CONST
2L 45.0S E C 72.0S E C 2R
DECEL QUO DEPL RATE
3L 8.4S E C 18.0F T / S E C 3R
DECEL TIME HV RATE
4L 3.4S E C 156.6F T / S E C 4R
DECEL DIST
5L 380F T RESET> 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

C. Custom HAHO view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 3/3

FTT
53.4S E C
1L 1R
EXIT TIME
2L 45.0S E C 2R
DECEL QUO
3L 8.4S E C 3R
SPEED -DRIVE- FACTOR
4L 20.0K T 190% 4R
K-OPEN
5L 60 RESET> 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

D. Free Fall view:

RTE1 CARP PLAN 3/3

HORIZONTAL DIST
1L
500M 1R
EXIT TIME
2L 45.0S E C 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L RESET> 5R

6L <CARP PROGRESS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-20
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACT/MOD/" " RTEx (title): ACT indicates that the EXECuted CARP procedure is active (CARP Active
discrete is on).
MOD indicates the CARP procedure modifications have not been EXECuted yet. A blank field indicates the
CARP procedure:
• Is in the active flight plan, but is not considered Active yet (CARP Active discrete is OFF), or
• the CARP procedure for the Inactive route is being displayed.
Also, RTEx (where 'n' can be 1 or 2) indicates for which route the current CARP procedure is being displayed.

FTT [1L]: Forward Travel Time (s). The total effective time that the dropped equipment/personnel travels at the
aircraft speed/direction. It is the sum of Exit time and Deceleration Quotient time. When FTT is directly
obtainable from ballistic table, then a manual entry may be performed. The value then appears in large font
while fields DECEL QUO and EXIT TIME show dashes. If the value is calculated from entered values for EXIT
TIME and DECEL QUO, then the value is displayed in normal font. The default value is boxes. If only one of the
two fields EXIT TIME and DECEL QUO is entered, then dashes are displayed for FTT. Operator entry is
mandatory. Range [0.0 .. 99.9]. This field is not displayed for Free Fall.

HORIZONTAL DISTANCE [1L]: Displayed for Free Fall only. Horizontal distance of fall, in meters, travelled by
the load. Extracted from the free fall ballistic data tables. Default display is boxes. Range [0..999].

VERT DIST [1R]: Displayed for CUST CARP and CUST HARP only. Vertical distance (ft) travelled by the load
until stabilization. Data may be extracted from parachute ballistic data tables. The default value is boxes.
Operator entry is required. When the value entered is too large for the value of MISSION HAT, an invalid data
entry message is displayed. Range [1-2999].

EXIT TIME [2L]: Drop Exit Time (s). Elapsed time from the green light signal to the exit of the first element from
the airplane. Value may be extracted from parachute ballistic data tables. The default value is dashes. If a value
is entered for DECEL QUO, then the default display is boxes. When an FTT value is manually entered, then
dashes are displayed. Range [0 .. 99.9]. For Free Fall type this field is a required entry.

FALL CONST [2R]: Displayed for CUST CARP and CUST HARP only. A false time constant, in seconds, used
to determine drift effect during the time the parachutist/load falls after exiting the aircraft until reaching
stabilization. Compensates for the non-linear rate of fall of the load. Data may be extracted from ballistic data
tables. The default value is boxes. Operator entry is required. Range [1..99.9].

DECEL QUO [3L]: Deceleration Quotient (s). Value may be extracted by the operator from the ballistic tables in
AFI 11-231. The default value is dashes. If a value is entered for EXIT TIME, then the default display is boxes.
When an FTT value is manually entered, then dashes are displayed. Range [0 .. 99.9]. Not displayed for Free
Fall.

DEPL RATE [3R]: Displayed for CUST CARP and CUST HARP only. Deployed rate of fall in feet/second. Sea
level standard day rate of fall of the load after the parachute is fully deployed and the drop is stabilized. Data
may be extracted from parachute ballistic tables. The default display is boxes. Operator entry is required. Range
[1..69.9].

DECEL TIME [4L]: Displayed for CUST HARP only. Deceleration time (s). Elapsed time from actuation until
deployment. Extracted from the parachute ballistic data tables. Default display is boxes. Range [0..99.9].

DRIVE SPEED [4L]: Displayed for CUST HAHO only. Speed, in knots, the parachute is capable of travelling at.
Default value is 20.8. Range [0..99.9].

HV RATE [4R]: Displayed for CUST HARP only. High velocity rate of fall in feet/second. Sea level, standard day
vertical velocity of the load under free fall (before the parachute is deployed). Data may be extracted from the
parachute ballistic data tables. Default display is boxes. Range [1..999.9].

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-21
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DRIVE FACTOR [4R]: Displayed for CUST HAHO only. Drive safety factor (%). Percentage of the total
computed drive distance to be used for safety reasons. Default value is 80%. Range [0..100].

DECEL DIST [5L]: Displayed for CUST HARP only. Deceleration Distance (ft). The distance the load descends
from actuation to full deployment of the parachute. Extracted from the parachute ballistic data tables. This
distance must be smaller than the actuation HAT. Range [0..9999].

K-OPEN [5L]: Displayed for CUST HAHO only. Parachute ballistic (glide) constant when deployed
(characteristic to each parachute type). Default value is boxes. Range [0..99].

RESET [5R]: Resets all the CARP parameters on all the CARP PLAN x/3 pages to their default values.

CARP PROGRESS [6L]: Access to CARP PROGRESS page.

ERASE [6L]: Cancel any active route modifications and/or any CARP parameter changes. Only displayed when
the page is displaying the MOD status. If by pressing ERASE the CARP procedure is removed from the flight
plan, then the LEGS page is automatically displayed.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirm the changes made to the inactive route. If CARP data is missing, an advisory message
is displayed in the scratchpad and the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts remain displayed. The user may then
correct the parameters, press CANCEL or remove the procedure from the flight plan.

CARP PROGRESS X/X (when X/X = 4/4 if 3 page set and CARP is configured or X/X = 5/5 if 4 page set
and CARP is configured)

Display ACT PROGRESS X/X page by pressing [PROG], and then [PREV] {If CARP is configured}.

The CARP PROGRESS page is used to display the progress towards the CARP procedure waypoints.
Currently, only one CARP procedure in the active route is supported.

A. Display with no CARP procedure in the flight plan.

ACT CARP PROGRESS 5/5

CARP POS
1L 1R
ATK DISTANCE XTK
2L NM FT
2R
ETE CARP ETA
3L SEC Z
3R
CURRENT TARGET
4L TAS 200K T KT 4R
ALT 11030F T FT
5L 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-22
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Display with CARP procedure in the flight plan.

ACT CARP PROGRESS 5/5

CARP POS NEAR CARP
N45o00.00 W072o00.00
1L 1R
ATK DISTANCE XTK
2L 3.4N M L1560F T
2R
ETE CARP ETA
3L 17S E C 1234:12Z 3R
CURRENT TARGET
4L TAS 200K T 130K T 4R
ALT 11030F T 10000F T
5L 5R

6L <CARP PLAN CARP MARK> 6R

CARP POSITION (1L): Current position, in geographic coordinates, of the Computed Air Release Point (CRP
waypoint).

STATUS (1R): CARP Status: (blank), ACTIVE, NEAR CARP, AT CARP, DROP ZONE, or ESCAPE.

STATUS MEANING
INDICATION
(blank) The CARP procedure is not active.
ACTIVE A CARP procedure is in the active flight plan and the active waypoint in the flight plan is a
CARP procedure waypoint or less than 20 minutes remain to the CARP green light (CRP).
This status is always displayed if the NO CARP SOLUTION alert message is on.

NEAR CARP The CARP mode is active and the A/C is less than 60 seconds before arrival at the CRP
waypoint (green light).

AT CARP The CARP mode is active and the A/C is less than 5 seconds before arrival at the CRP
waypoint (green light).

DROP ZONE The CARP mode is active and the A/C is within the CARP drop zone. This state begins
0.5 seconds before arriving at the CRP waypoint (green light).

ESCAPE The CARP mode is active and the A/C is beyond the CARP drop zone and prior to the
Escape (ESC) waypoint.

ATK DISTANCE (2L): Along Track Distance(nm) to the CRP green light or XTE or ESC waypoint along the path
defined by the flight plan. Prior to reaching the CARP green light, the distance displayed is that to the CARP
green light waypoint. During the drop (after the CRP waypoint has sequenced), the distance displayed is that to
the XTE waypoint. This field is not displayed when CARP procedure is not yet in the active flight plan. Range
[0..99.9]. '*' symbols are displayed when ATK exceeds the range.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-23
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

XTK DISTANCE (2R): Cross Track Offset (feet) from the desired path line defined by the CRP (Green Light)
point and the XTE(Red Light) point as computed by the FMS. Field not displayed when CARP procedure not yet
in flight plan. Range [0..9999]. “****” is displayed when XTK exceeds the range.

CARP ETE (3L): Estimated Time (s) EnRoute (ETE) to CRP (green light) waypoint or XTE (red light) once
CRP has been sequenced or ESC once XTE is sequenced. The “CARP” indication changes to “XTE” upon
sequencing the CRP waypoint. The “XTE” indication changes to “ESC” upon sequencing XTE.

CARP ETA (3R): Estimated Time of Arrival in (hhmm:ss) at CRP (green light) waypoint, or XTE (Red Light)
once CRP has been sequenced or ESC once XTE has been sequenced.

CURRENT TAS (4L): Current True Air Speed (kt).

CURRENT ALT (4L): Current system altitude (feet).

TARGET TAS (4R): Target True Air Speed (kt). Only displayed after crossing the Slow-Down (SD) waypoint or
less than 60 seconds remain to the CRP waypoint, at which point the TAS derived from the Mission IAS is
displayed. Once the TAS used for the CRP waypoint calculations is frozen, this frozen TAS value is then
displayed until the CARP procedure is terminated.

TARGET ALT (4R): Target altitude (feet). Only displayed after crossing the Slow-Down (SD) waypoint or less
than 60 seconds remain to the CRP waypoint, at which point the altitude derived from the Mission HAT is
displayed. . Once the altitude used for the CRP waypoint calculations is frozen, this frozen altitude value is then
displayed until the CARP procedure is terminated.

CARP PLAN [6L]: If a CARP procedure is defined in the active flight plan, accesses the CARP PLAN 1/3 page;
otherwise, the field is not shown.

CARP MARK [6R]: Equivalent to pressing CARP MARK on the TMP UPDATE POS page. The TMP UPDATE
POS page is displayed, and the flight plan is set to MOD state displaying the ERASE prompt and illuminating
the EXEC key. The IP point is displayed as the reference position, the offset from the reference is R0ft. While
the CARP is not active or CARP waypoint positions are frozen or NO CARP SOLUTION is being displayed, the
CARP MARK text disappears and pressing this LSK has no effect.

NOTE: Except for CURRENT TAS and CURRENT ALT, values are only displayed when a CARP procedure is
in the active flight plan.

NOTE: The accuracy of the fields of this page, including the “status indicator” is in accordance with the update
rate of the FMS pages, e.g. 1 second. Better accuracy is obtained via the status advisory messages and
the “AT CARP” discrete output.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-24
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CENTRAL CLEAR ? (if Tactical Config CENTRAL CLEAR is configured)

Display CENTRAL CLEAR ? page by pressing

[INIT/REF], [NEXT], <CENTRAL CLEAR> { if not configured on TACTICAL page}
Or [TACT], <CENTRAL CLEAR> {if TACT key is configured and CENTRAL CLEAR configured on TACTICAL
page}

CENTRAL CLEAR ?

1L 1R

2L ARE YOU SURE YOU 2R

WANT TO PERFORM A
3L CENTRAL CLEAR AND 3R
DELETE ALL DATA?
4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL CONFIRM> 6R

CANCEL [6L]: Cancels the central clear when requested on the INIT/REF 2/2 page. Pressing this prompt also
returns to the INIT/REF 2/2 page.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirms the central clear when requested on the INIT/REF 2/2 page. Pressing this prompt
also returns to the INIT/REF 2/2 page.

COMM STATUS 1/1

Display COMM STATUS 1/1 page by pressing [MENU], <COMM> (one MCDU page displayed) OR
[MENU], [NEXT], <COMM> (two MCDU pages displayed).

The COMM STATUS page displays the installed external sub-systems connected to the MCDU and provides an
interface to the ESS FAILURE page.

COMM STATUS 1/1

1L 1R

2L <FMS2 ACARS> 2R

3L <FMS1 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <MCDU MENU 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-25
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ESS (2L to 5L), (1R to 3R): Displays the installed sub-systems. Prompt leads to the ESS FAILURE page.
When the external sub-system name is unknown (Menu Text Exchange failed), the CMA-9000 FMS displays 4
dashes (----) besides the prompt. The installed sub-systems have a dedicated key. For example, ESS1 is
displayed at LSK 1L, ESS2 is displayed at LSK 2L and so on.

The COMM STATUS page shows only the installed sub-systems.

MCDU MENU [6L]: Returns to MCDU MENU X/X page.

DATA LOAD 1/1 (if aircraft is on ground)

Display DATA LOAD 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT], <DATA LOAD>.

A. With ARINC 615 DLU, initial display:

DATA LOAD 1/1

TYPE
1L
>RADIO DATA 1R
STATUS
2L IDLE 0000K B
2R

3L 3R

4L START> 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

NOTE: If the same runway is deselected and then re-selected, the display shows <ACT> instead of <SEL>.

B. Display of Data Load 1/1 page when Tandem mode is configured (FMSx is displayed where x is the Student
FMS SDI):

FMS1 DATA LOAD 1/1

TYPE
1L >RADIO DATA 1R
STATUS
2L IDLE 0000K B
2R

3L 3R

4L START> 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-26
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. With ARINC 615 DLU, during load:

DATA LOAD 1/1

TYPE
1L
>RADIO DATA 1R
STATUS
LOADING FILE 0014K B
2L 2R

3L 3R

4L
<ABORT 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

D. With PDP/3-DOS DLU, initial display:

DATA LOAD 1/1

TYPE
1L
>CONFIG 0 1R
STATUS
2L IDLE 0000K B
2R

3L 3R

4L LOAD> 4R

5L 5R

6L SAVE> 6R

E. With PDP/3-DOS DLU, during save:

DATA LOAD 1/1

TYPE
1L >RADIO DATA 1R
STATUS
2L SAVING TO DISK 0014K B
2R
56%
3L 3R

4L <ABORT 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-27
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TYPE [1L]: Indicates and allows selection of the the data type to be loaded:
Toggle USER_DATA/NAV_DATA/CUSTOM_DATA/RADIO_DATA/
CONFIG_0/CONFIG_1/CONFIG_2/CONFIG_3/PRECAN_MSG/
MAGVAR_MODEL/DIMMING/OEI_MODEL.

USER_DATA = User database (user routes and waypoints).

NAV_DATA = Navigation database (example: Jeppesen).
CUSTOM_DATA = Custom database (custom routes and waypoints).
RADIO_DATA = Radio Tuning libraries.
CONFIG_0/1/2/3 = FMS configuration files.
PRECAN_MSG = Pre-canned Messages (See PHONE Page for details).
MAGVAR_MODEL = Magnetic variation model database (coefficients).
DIMMING = Dimming curve for display brightness
OEI_MODEL = OEI model data tables.
TACT_APPR = Tactical approaches database
In order to load files from the Targa DLU (e.g. PDP/3-DOS DLU) to the CMA-9000 FMS, the following file
extension convention is used (otherwise, file transfer is not performed):

DATA TYPE FILE EXTENSION

USER_DATA *.UDB
NAV_DATA *.NDB
CUSTOM_DATA *.RTE
RADIO_DATA *.RAD
CONFIG *.CFG
MAGVAR_MODEL *.MVA
PRECAN_MSG *.PCM
OEI_MODEL *.OEI
DIMMING *.DIM
TACT_APPR *.TAC

LOADING BLOCK (2L): Displays number of blocks loaded.

STATUS (2L): Displays STATUS messages, number of 1 kilobyte blocks loaded, and (for the PDP/3-DOS
DLU) the percentage complete.

ABORT [4L]: Abort data load when in progress.

START [4R]: Start data load when A/C on ground (ARINC 615 DLU).

LOAD [4R]: Start data upload (DLU to FMU) when A/C on ground (PDP/3-DOS DLU).

SAVE [6R]: Start data download (FMU to DLU) when A/C on ground. Only displayed for USER_DATA and
CONFIG data type (PDP/3-DOS DLU).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-28
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1

This page provides access to arrival and departure for origin and destination airport.

Display the DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1 page by pressing:

[DEP/ARR] (if on ground). or
[DEP/ARR] (if airborne and midway point of active route not reached yet). or
From ARRIVALS 1/1 page. or
From DEPARTURES 1/1.

A. Active DEP/ARR Index:

DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1

ACT RTE 1
1L
<DEP KSEA ARR> 1R

2L PANC ARR> 2R
RTE 2
3L <DEP KSEA ARR> 3R

4L PANC ARR> 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

B. DEP/ARR Index during a MOD in active RTE2:

DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1

RTE 1
1L
DEP KSEA ARR
1R

2L
PANC ARR> 2R
MOD RTE 2
3L
<DEP KSEA ARR>
3R

4L
PANC ARR> 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-29
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. DEP/ARR Index during an edit of INACTIVE route:

DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1

ACT RTE 1
1L
DEP KSEA ARR
1R

2L PANC ARR> 2R
RTE 2
3L
<DEP KSEA ARR> 3R

4L
PANC ARR> 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

RTE (#): Display related route number.

ACT or MOD: Active or Modified route status displayed before active route number.

DEP [1L/3L]: Access to the DEPARTURES 1/X page for RTE 1 or 2 ORIGIN airport. Arrow (>) disappears
when other route is being changed .

ERASE [6L]: Cancel modifications to flight plan. If confirm and erase route modifications is configured, then
upon pressing ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts on line select
keys 6L and 6R respectively.

RESTORE [6L]: Displayed only if the RTE was erased on the RTE 1/X page. Used to restore the active route.

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

ARR [1R or 3R]: Access to the ARRIVALS 1/X page for RTE 1 or 2 ORIGIN airport. {If RTE 2 is configured}.

ARR [2R or 4R]: Access to the ARRIVALS 1/X page for RTE 1 or 2 DEST airport. {If RTE 2 is configured}.

CONFIRM [6R]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-30
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DEPARTURES 1/X

This page provides a listing of all-departing procedures and runways for the selected airport. The selected or
activated SIDS, SIDS transition, and runways are displayed.

Display the DEPARTURES 1/X page by pressing the corresponding <DEP> prompt on the DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1
page, or
[DEP/ARR] (if on ground and route active).

A. Initial Display:

KBFI DEPARTURES 1/1

SIDS RTE 1 RUNWAYS
1L LACRES 13R 1R

2L QUIET1 31L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <DEP/ARR ROUTE> 6R

B. Display after SIDS selected and runway selected:

KBFI DEPARTURES 1/1

SIDS RTE 1 RUNWAYS
1L
LACRES<SEL> <SEL> 13R 1R
TRANS
2L HUMPPS 2R

3L ORTIN 3R

4L VAMPS 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE ROUTE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-31
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Display after all selections are executed:

KBFI DEPARTURES 1/1

SIDS RTE 1 RUNWAYS
1L LACRES<ACT> <ACT> 13R 1R
TRANS
2L VAMPS <ACT> 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <DEP/ARR ROUTE> 6R

D. Inactive departures page display after SIDS selected and runway selected:

KBFI DEPARTURES 1/1

SIDS RTE 2 RUNWAYS
1L
LACRES<SEL> <SEL> 13R 1R
TRANS
2L HUMPPS 2R

3L ORTIN 3R

4L VAMPS 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

E. Display after all selections confirmed on the inactive route:

KBFI DEPARTURES 1/1

SIDS RTE 2 RUNWAYS
1L LACRES<SEL> <SEL> 13R 1R
TRANS
2L VAMPS <SEL> 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <DEP/ARR ROUTE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-32
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

KBFI (title): Airport identifier (all page data applies only to the identified airport).

RTE(#): Display related route number.

SIDS [1L,2L,3L,4L,5L]: Alphabetical listing of all SIDS applicable to the airport. Line selection of the desired SID
removes all other SIDS and non-applicable runways and displays a listing of applicable departure transitions.
Deletion of the Selected/Active SID cancels any SID and SID transition selections (line selection toggles the SID,
SID transition status between selected and not selected).

TRANS [2L,3L,4L,5L]: Displayed after SID selection. Used to select/delete any departure transitions associated
with the selected SID.

DEP/ARR [6L]: Returns to the DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1 page (unless a route modification is in progress).

ERASE [6L]: Cancel any route modifications and/or any departure selections. If confirm and erase route
modifications is configured, then upon pressing ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying
CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts on line select keys 6L and 6R respectively.

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

RUNWAYS [1R,2R,3R,4R,5R]: Alphabetical listing of all runways applicable to the airport. Line selection of the
desired runway deletes all non-applicable SIDS. Deletion of the selected/active runway cancels any runway
selection.

ROUTE [6R]: Access to the RTE 1/X page related to the displayed DEPARTURE.

CONFIRM [6R]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-33
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DES+SAR 1/2 (if CARP and TACTICAL APPR are not configured)
DES+SAR 1/4 (if CARP or TACTICAL APPR is configured)

The page title is TACTICAL if the TACT key is configured.

Display DES+SAR 1/2 page (or 1/4 if CARP or TACTICAL APPR is configured) by pressing:
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<AIRPORT> and <DES+SAR> or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<VHF NAV> and <DES+SAR> or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<NDB> and <DES+SAR> or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<USER WPTS> and <DES+SAR> or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<CUSTOM WPTS> and <DES+SAR> or
[INIT REF],<DES+SAR> or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<DMAP WPT>,<DES+SAR> or
[INIT REF],<WPT DATA>,<DES+SAR> or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<PREDEF WPT>,<DES+SAR> or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<PREDEF WPT>,[NEXT],<DES+SAR>
{if Tactical Config BULLS EYE is configured}:
[INIT/REF], <BULLS EYE>,[NEXT],<DES+SAR>

NOTE: The ACTIVE route DES+SAR 1/2 (or 1/4 if CARP or TACTICAL APPR is configured) page is
displayed when the DES+SAR prompt is selected and the inactive route is not being modified.

DES+SAR 1/2
REF ID
1L WPT03 RTE DISCON> 1R
RAD/DIS
T
2L --- /----N M HOVER> 2R

3L <SQUARE HOLD> 3R

4L <LADDERACT RADIAL-TO> 4R

5L <SECTOR TACT DTO> 5R

6L <FLY OVER DIRECT-TO> 6R

REF ID [1L]: Storage of the reference identifier. If there is a valid position in the scratchpad when the page is
opened, then the CMA-9000 FMS creates a temporary waypoint at that position and places the identifier in this
field. If the reference identifier is a moving waypoint, the following prompts are blanked and disabled on this page:
<SQUARE, <LADDER, <SECTOR, <FLY OVER, HOVER>, HOLD>, RADIAL-TO> and TACT DTO>.

RTE DISCON [1R]: Brings up the RTE x LEGS 1/X page with discontinuity symbols (□□□□□) in the scratchpad.

RAD/DIS [2L]: The RAD/DIS combination allows the pilot to position a waypoint relative to the REF ID. The
relative position is used to create a temporary waypoint when a new DES+SAR procedure is selected. The
values are blanked, when no REF ID is defined, otherwise dashes are displayed as the default value. No entries
are allowed, when the field is blanked.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-34
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HOVER [2R]: Appears when configured.

• HOVER waypoint not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the Hover page. If a HOVER
pattern is already in the selected route, the active data is displayed.
• HOVER waypoint entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the Hover page with the
identifier stored in the ID field (even when a Hover pattern is currently active). It is not currently possible to
enter a Hover pattern in any route location other than the first; hence, the RTE x LEGS 1/X page is not
displayed as for other leg types.

SQUARE [3L]: Appears when configured.

• The status “ACT” (reverse video white) is appended to the prompt if an activated square search pattern is in
the flight plan.
• SAR waypoint not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the SQUARE page.
• SAR waypoint entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page with the
identifier and /S qualifier in the scratchpad allowing entry anywhere in the flight plan.

LADDER [4L]: Appears when configured.

• The status “ACT” (reverse video white) is appended to the prompt if an activated ladder search pattern is in
the flight plan.
• SAR waypoint not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the LADDER page.
• SAR waypoint entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page with the
identifier and /S qualifier in the scratchpad allowing entry anywhere in the flight plan.

SECTOR [5L]: Appears when configured.

• The status “ACT” (reverse video white) is appended to the prompt if an activated sector search pattern is in
the flight plan.
• SAR waypoint not defined or part of the Route: Display the SECTOR page.
• SAR waypoint entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page with the
identifier and /S qualifier in the scratchpad allowing entry anywhere in the flight plan.

HOLD [3R]:
• HOLD waypoint entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Exact same behaviour as pressing the
HOLD hard key. The HOLD page appears if a holding pattern already exists; otherwise, the RTE x LEGS 1/X
page appears with /H in the scratchpad. The HOLD page has a NEW HOLD LSK to allow a new holding
pattern to be defined.
• HOLD waypoint entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page with the
identifier and /H qualifier in the scratchpad.

FLY OVER [6L]:

• Fly Over waypoint not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page
with only /O in the scratchpad.
• Fly Over waypoint entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page with
the identifier and /O in the scratchpad.

RADIAL-TO [4R]:
• Radial-to waypoint not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page
with only the /R qualifier in the scratchpad.
• Radial-to waypoint entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the RADIAL-TO page with the
identifier in the ID field. The NEW RADIAL-TO field will bring up the LEGS page for insertion in the route.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-35
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TACT DTO [5R]: Appears when the MILITARY NAVIGATION option is configured:
• Tactical Direct-to waypoint not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the RTE x LEGS
1/X page with only /T in the scratchpad.
• Tactical Direct-to waypoint entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page: Display the RTE x LEGS 1/X
page with the identifier and /T in the scratchpad.

DIRECT-TO [6R]:
• Case i. No DES+SAR point defined : Brings up the LEGS page.
• Case ii. DES+SAR point defined : Brings up the LEGS page with the identifier in the scratchpad and perform a
direct-to (add the REF ID to first waypoint of the LEGS page).

DES+SAR 2/4 (if CARP or TACTICAL APPR is configured)

The page title is TACTICAL if the TACT key is configured.

Display DES+SAR 2/4 page by pressing:

[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<AIRPORT>,<DES+SAR> and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<VHF NAV>,<DES+SAR> and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<NDB>,<DES+SAR> and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<USER WPTS>,<DES+SAR> and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<CUSTOM WPTS>,<DES+SAR> and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<DES+SAR> and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<DMAP WPT>,<DES+SAR> and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<WPT DATA>,<DES+SAR> and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<PREDEF WPT>,<DES+SAR> and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<PREDEF WPT>,[NEXT],<DES+SAR> and [NEXT]

NOTE: The DES+SAR 2/4 page is available when the inactive route is not being modified.

DES+SAR 2/4
REF ID
1L
WPT03 1R
RAD/DIS
T
2L --- /----N M 2R

3L CARP> 3R

4L TACT APPR> 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

REF ID [1L]: Storage of the reference identifier. If there is a valid position in the scratchpad when the page is
opened, then the FMS will create a temporary waypoint at that position and places the identifier in this field. If
the reference identifier is a moving waypoint, the following prompts are blanked and disabled: CARP> and
TACT APPR>.

RAD/DIS [2L]: The RAD/DIS combination allows the pilot to position a waypoint relative to the REF ID. The
relative position is used to create a temporary waypoint when a new DES+SAR procedure is selected.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-36
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CARP [3R]: Displayed when CARP is configured. Pressing the line select key:
• If SAR waypoint is not entered in field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and no CARP procedure exists in the
flight plan then display the LEGS page with CRP01/C in the scratchpad.
• If SAR waypoint is not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and a CARP procedure exists in
the flight plan then display the CARP PLAN 1/3 page.
• If SAR waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and no CARP procedure exists in the
flight plan then display the LEGS page with the identifier and /C qualifier in the scratchpad allowing entry in
the flight plan.
• If SAR waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and it is different from the PI of the
existing CARP procedure then display the CARP PLAN 1/3 page with the identifier in the scratchpad.
• If SAR waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and it has the same identifier as PI of
the existing CARP procedure then display the CARP PLAN 1/3 page.

TACT APPR [4R]: Displayed when the TACT APPR option on the CONFIG page is configured.
• If no SAR waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and no previously defined tactical
approach Runway Threshold Waypoint then display default LEGS page with the /A qualifier in the scratchpad
allowing entry in the flight plan.
• If no SAR waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and previously defined the tactical
approach Runway Threshold Waypoint then display the TACTICAL APPR page.
• If SAR waypoint is already defined then display the default LEGS page with the identifier with the /A qualifier
in the scratchpad allowing entry in the flight plan.

DESELECT 1/1

The DESELECT 1/1 page displays the status of the system True Air Speed (TAS) and Heading data. It is also
used to prevent usage of any unsuitable sensor for navigation (GPS, VOR, TAS, HDG, KALMAN, DME, etc).

NOTE: Flight crew must deselect all unwanted sensors after each long power outage. All sensors are
automatically re-selected after a long power outage.

Display DESELECT 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, and <DESELECT>.

A. Display with EGI interfaces configured:

DESELECT 1/1
TAS GPS
1L
>VALID VALID< 1R
HDG DME
2L >VALID VALID< 2R
DVS VOR/DME/TCN
3L >ACQ ACQ< 3R
INS/GPS
4L >ACQ 4R
INS/DVS
5L >ACQ 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-37
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Display with GPS (ARINC 743A format) and APIRS interfaces configured:

DESELECT 1/1
TAS GPS
1L
>FAIL VALID< 1R
HDG DME
2L >VALID DESEL< 2R
DVS VOR/DME/TCN
3L >ACQ ACQ< 3R
KALMAN
4L ACQ< 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

C. Display with IRS interfaces configured:

DESELECT 1/1
TAS GPS
1L >FAIL VALID< 1R
HDG DME
2L >VALID DESEL< 2R
DVS VOR/DME/TCN
3L >ACQ ACQ< 3R
IRS
4L ACQ< 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

D. Display with dual GPS (LN-100GT and civil GPS):

DESELECT 1/1
TAS
1L
>VALID GPS>
1R
HDG DME
2L
>VALID VALID< 2R
DVS VOR/DME/TCN
3L
>ACQ ACQ< 3R
INS/GPS
4L
>ACQ 4R
INS/DVS
5L >ACQ 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-38
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TAS [1L]: Displays the TAS status (VALID or FAIL), when pressed toggles between VALID/DESEL or
ACQ/DESEL options to control usage of true airspeed in the navigation solution.

HDG [2L]: Displays the HDG status (VALID or FAIL), when pressed toggles between VALID/DESEL or
ACQ/DESEL options to control usage of HDG in the navigation solution.

DVS [3L]: When selected it toggles between VALID/DESEL or ACQ/DESEL options to control usage of the DVS
in the navigation solution (if DVS configured).

INS/GPS[4L]: Toggle options: VALID/DESEL or ACQ/DESEL (If EGI interfaces is configured).

INS/DVS [5L]: When pressed toggles between VALID/DESEL or ACQ/DESEL options to control usage of the
INS/DVS hybrid mode in the navigation solution (if SAGEM EGI is configured).

NAV STATUS [6L]: Access to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

GPS [1R]: If single GPS is configured, then when selected, it toggles between VALID/DESEL or ACQ/DESEL
options to control usage of the GPS in the navigation solution. If dual GPS is configured, it acts as a prompt which
opens the GPS DESELECT 1/1 page.

DME[2R]: Toggle options: VALID/DESEL or ACQ/DESEL (If DME interface is configured).

VOR/DME/TCN [3R]: When selected, it toggles between VALID/DESEL or ACQ/DESEL options to control
usage of the VOR/DME/TCN solution in the navigation solution. Field disappears or changes to VOR/DME or
TACAN depending on the configured equipment configuration.

INS [4R]: Toggle options: VALID/DESEL or ACQ/DESEL (If INS interface is configured).

KALMAN [4R]: Toggle options: VALID/DESEL or ACQ/DESEL (If APIRS is configured).

IRS [4R]: When selected, it toggles between VALID/DESEL or ACQ/DESEL options to control usage of the IRS
in the navigation solution (if IRS is configured).

X-FMS [5R]: Not shown. Toggle options: VALID/DESEL or ACQ/DESEL (if X-FMU is configured).

NOTE: ACQ - Acquisition mode.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-39
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DISPLAY 1/1

The DISPLAY 1/1 page allows access to display preference changes and screen position adjustment.

Press [INIT REF], [NEXT] and <DISPLAY> to access the DISPLAY 1/1 page.

The DISPLAY page allows access to display preference changes and screen position adjustment.

DISPLAY 1/1

1L <PARALLAX 1R

2L 2R
DISPLAY
3L >C O L O R 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

PARALLAX [1L]: Provides access to PARALLAX ADJUST 1/1 to adjust screen placement.

DISPLAY [3L]: Selection of (COLOR, MONOCHROME); COLOR displays characteristic, MONOCHROME

displays all text in green.

INIT/REF [6L]: Returns to INIT/REF 1/2 page.

DMAP WPT 1/X (if ELBIT, EURONAV, or EURONAV_A702 DMAP is configured)

Display DMAP WPT 1/X page by pressing [INIT REF], <WPT LISTS> and <DMAP WPT>.
The DMAP WPT page displays the list of waypoints received from the DMAP. Upon entry (manual or
automatic), the CMA-9000 FMS automatically displays the DMAP WPT X/X page containing the last received
waypoint.
DMAP WPT 10/10
FREE= 2
1L 037M 1R
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
2L 038M 2R
N45o38.25 W122o46.20
3L 3R

4L 4R

5L DELETE ALL> 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-40
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FREE= nn: Displays the number of undefined digital map waypoints store positions which are available, where
nn is between 0 and 40.

nnnM (1L-4L): Displays the coordinate position stored in the defined digital map waypoint ‘nnnM’, where nnn is
a CMA-9000 FMS sequence number from 001 to 999 assigned when a new waypoint is received from the digital
map. The only allowed scratchpad entry in those fields is the [CLR] key entry which will delete the selected
DMAP waypoint.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancels deletions of all stored digital map waypoints positions. Displayed after selection of
DELETE ALL sofkey.

DELETE ALL [5R]: Deletes all stored waypoints. This softkey when selected presents the CANCEL and
CONFIRM sofkey options.

NOTE: The delete is cancelled if another page is selected while the CANCEL and CONFIRM sofkeys are
displayed.

NEW USER WPT [6L]: When a defined digital map waypoint label is displayed in the scratchpad, selection of
this line key will open the USER WPT 1/2 page with the coordinates and the DMAP waypoint identifier entered
for the definition of a new user waypoint. The operator has to simply enter the ID field and confirm or cancel this
operation.

CONFIRM [6R]: Upon selecting this sofkey the CMA-9000 FMS deletes all selected waypoints in the digital map
waypoint list.

DES+SAR [6R] or TACTICAL [6R]: When TACT key is configured, the DES+SAR prompt is replaced by
TACTICAL. In this case, the prompt gives access to the TACTICAL 1/Y page instead of the DES+SAR 1/Y
page. This softkey, when selected, will open the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page. If a defined digital
map waypoint label is displayed in the scratchpad, selection of this line key will automatically place this identifier
in the reference i.d field of the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page.

[NEXT]: When more than 4 digital map waypoints are defined, this key cycles to the next series of digital map
waypoints.

[PREV]: When more than 4 digital map waypoints are defined, this key cycles to the previous series of digital
map waypoints.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-41
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

VHF NAV DESELECT 1/X (if DME interface is configured)

This page enables the user to deselect VHF navaids (up to 25 stations can be added to the deselection list) and
prevent the CMA-9000 FMS from using it for DME-DME navigation and VOR auto-tuning logic. It also allows a
deselected station to be reselected by deleting it from the deselection list. The list is not retained on power up.

Display VHF NAV DESELECT 1/X page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, <DME> and < DME DESEL>
{if DME is configured} or
[INIT/REF], <NAV STATUS>, <VOR/DME> or <VOR/DME/TACAN>, and <VOR DESEL> {if NAV and VOR
AUTOTUNING are configured}.

VHF NAV DESELECT 1/1

ID FREQ TYPE
1L YUL 116.30M H Z VORDME
1R

2L BIG 116.90M H Z VORTAC

2R

3L YMM 112.00M H Z VORDME

3R

4L IJFK 109.50M H Z LOCGS 4R

5L ---- 5R

6L <DME STATUS 6R

ID [1L, 2L, 3L, 4L, 5L]: To add a station to the deselect list, type the identifier in the scratchpad and press a
softkey. To remove the station from the list, press CLR key and the corresponding softkey. Up to 25 stations
can be added to the deselection list. A new page is automatically added when it is needed.

TYPE (1L, 2L, 3L, 4L, 5L): Displays VHF navaid type in the third column. The navaid type can be any of the
following:
• DME
• ILSDME
• ILSTACAN
• LOCGS
• LOCONLY
• MLSDMEN
• MLSDMEP
• TACAN
• VNCDME
• VNCTACAN
• VOR
• VORDME
• VORTAC

DME STATUS [6L]: Access to DME STATUS 1/1 page. This prompt only appears if this page was accessed
from the DME STATUS page.

VOR/DME STATUS [6L]: Access to VOR/DME STATUS 1/1 page. This prompt only appears if this page was
accessed from the VOR/DME STATUS page. Not shown on figure.

VOR/DME/TCN STATUS [6L]: Access to VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1 page. This prompt only appears if this
page was accessed from the VOR/DME/TCN STATUS page. Not shown on figure
.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-42
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DME STATUS 1/1 (if DME/DME interface is configured)

The DME STATUS 1/1 page displays the DME stations selected by the CMA-9000 FMS for DME-DME
navigation. Up to six stations are displayed. For each station the identifier (ID), status (STAT), frequency
(FREQ) and distance (DIS) are given. As the CMA-9000 FMS automatically tunes all available DME stations
within the vicinity of the aircraft, the display will continually change.

Display DME STATUS 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <DME>.

CMA-9000 FMS position with Latitude and Longitude coordinates:

DME STATUS 1/1

ID STAT FREQ DIS
YUL 116.30 25.5N M
1L 1R
IJFK N/A 109.50 NM

2L YJN REJ 118.00 64.5N M

2R
PLB 118.80 12.5N M
3L YQA REJ 119.00 39.0N M 3R
YUD 120.25 99.5N M
4L 4R
POSITION
5L N46o43.31 W078o46.07 5R

6L <NAV STATUS DME DESEL> 6R

CMA-9000 FMS position with UTM coordinates:

DME STATUS 1/1

ID STAT FREQ DIS
YUL 116.30 25.5N M
1L 1R
IJFK N/A 109.50 NM

2L YJN REJ 118.00 64.5N M

2R
PLB 118.80 12.5N M
3L YQA REJ 119.00 39.0N M
3R
YUD 120.25 99.5N M
4L 4R
POSITION
5L 10T ET 5200 5529 5R

6L <NAV STATUS DME DESEL> 6R

ID (1L, 2L, 3L): 3 or 4-character DME IDENTIFIER in the first column.

STAT (1L, 2L, 3L): Tuning STATUS in the second column.

REJ: DME station is not used in determining position (due to bad geometry).
N/A: Station not responding to tuning.

FREQ (1L, 2L, 3L): DME frequency (MHz) in the third column.

DIS (1L, 2L, 3L): DME slant range distance (nm) in the fourth column.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-43
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

POSITION (5R): Display DME derived position. Display depends on the selected coordinates system and
datum.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Returns to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

DME DESEL [6R]: Access to VHF NAV DESELECT 1/X page.

DVS STATUS 1/2 (Only if DOPPLER is configured)

Display DVS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, and <DVS>.

The DVS STATUS 1/1 page displays velocity measurements and the status of the Doppler Velocity Sensor.

A. RDN-85 DVS, displayed in Normal Video:

DVS STATUS 1/2

VELOCITIES
1L VX +25.5 KTS 1R
VY +5.56 KTS
2L VZ +2500 FT/MIN 2R
MODE
3L CALM SEA 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

B. RDN-85 DVS, displayed in Reverse Video:

DVS STATUS 1/2
VELOCITIES
1L VX +25.5 KTS 1R
VY +5.56 KTS
2L VZ +2500 FT/MIN 2R
MODE
3L SILENCE 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-44
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. ANV353 DVS

DVS STATUS 1/2

VELOCITIES
1L VX +25.5 K T S 1R
VY +5.56 K T S
2L VZ +2500 F T / M I N 2R
MODE
3L OPER 3R
BEAM STATUS RF MODE
4L 3-BEAMS CONTINUOUS< 4R
STATUS SURFACE
5L LAND AUTO< 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

DVS STATUS 1/2

VELOCITIES
1L VX +25.5 KTS 1R
VY +5.56 KTS
2L VZ +2500 FT/MIN 2R
MODE
3L OPER 3R
BEAM STATUS RF MODE
4L 3-BEAMS INTERMITENT< 4R
STATUS SURFACE
5L SEA SEA< 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

VELOCITIES (1L, 2L): Vx, Vy, and Vz display the Doppler measured aircraft referenced velocities. Fields are
displayed in reverse video when:
• the RDN-85 DVS is in the following modes: TEST, SILENCE or MEMORY or if one specific speed is in
TEST mode.

• The ANV-353 DVS receives frozen velocity labels data.

NOTE: When the ANV-353 DVS is forced to MUTE using the RF MODE field [4R], the Doppler velocities
transition automatically to MEMORY mode.

For all other modes the display is in normal video.

NOTE: When the DVS status is FAILED, or the DVS mode is PREPOSITIONING INS or SPEED NOT
COMPUTED for the RDN-85 DVS the velocities will be displayed as *******.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-45
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MODE (3L): Display Doppler Status.

For RDN85: TEST, SILENCE, LAND, CALM SEA, SEA, MEMORY, SPEED NOT COMPUTED or
PREPOSITIONING INS.

For ANV353: INIT,OPER,MAINT,FAIL,********,blank

******** is displayed if “no activity” from the STATUS word.
Blank is displayed when the CMA-9000 FMS requests:
• a boresight change.
• or a BIT command.

The following fields are displayed only when the ANV353 DVS is configured.

BEAM STATUS (4L): Displays the ANV-353 DVS beam status. Possible values for this field are: MEMORY,
3-BEAMS, 4-BEAMS.

RF MODE [4R]: Sends the RF MODE to the ANV-353 DVS. Possible values for this field are: CONTINUOUS,
INTERMITENT, MUTE. When the command is sent, the status is displayed in large font. When received from
the DVS, the status is displayed in medium font.

STATUS (5L): Displays the Surface status sent by the ANV-353 DVS. Possible values for this field are:
SEA/LAND. This field is displayed only when an ANV353 DVS is configured.

SURFACE [5R]: Sends the surface type to the ANV-353 DVS. Possible values for this field are: LAND,
SEA, AUTO (if SURF CFG is set to AUTO) or LAND, SEA (if SURF CFG is set to MANUAL). This field is
displayed only when an ANV353 DVS is configured.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Access to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

DVS STATUS 2/2 (Only if DOPPLER is configured)

Display DVS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, <DVS> and [NEXT].

The DVS STATUS 2/2 page displays water motion compensation entries and the resulting compensation values.

DVS STATUS 2/2

MAG W I N D
1L >1 2 8 o / 2 6 . 6 K T S 1R
WATER CURRENT
2L 280o/05.0K T S 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-46
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TRUE/MAG WIND [1L]: Display of the current wind direction and speed (in knots). If the wind cannot be
computed by the CMA-9000 FMS, a large font is used and manual entry of a wind value is allowed; otherwise,
manual entries are not permitted and the value is displayed in small font. The direction is in degrees TRUE or
MAG, defaulted to the WIND REF configuration option, and has a 0 to 359 degrees range. When the scratchpad
is empty and A/C is outside the polar region (latitude between N73 and S60), pressing LSK 1L will toggle
between the True and Magnetic display options TRUE/MAG. The wind speed is in knots with a range of 0 to 200
knots. The wind being displayed here is the same as may be observed on the PROGRESS 1/4 page. For the
DVS, the wind value is used by the CMA-9000 FMS in the estimate of a surface water current.

WATER CURRENT [2L]: Entry of the water speed in the direction the current is flowing towards. Speed is
entered in knots with a range of 0 to 40 knots. The direction is entered in degrees, TRUE or MAG following the
TRUE/MAG discrete, with a range of 0 to 359 degrees. Default value on cold start is 0 degree and 0 knot.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Access to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

EFIS 1/X (if EFIS interface is configured)

The EFIS page enables the pilot to selectively filter background data sent to the EFIS by the CMA-9000 FMS.
This page is not available for the IFDS, AHCAS, or EFIS-84 EFISs (which do not allow background data).

Display EFIS 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT], and <EFIS>.

EFIS 1/1
NAVAID AIRPORT
1L >ON ON< 1R
NDB USER WPT
2L >ON ON< 2R
SARSAT BULLS EYE
3L >ON ON< 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

NAVAID [1L]: Enables or disables the output of the navaids to EFIS. Toggle options: ON/OFF.

AIRPORT [1R]: Enables or disables the output of the airports to EFIS. Toggle options: ON/OFF.

NDB [2L]: Enables or disables the output of NDBs to EFIS. Toggle options: ON/OFF.

USER WPT [2R]: Enables or disables the output of User waypoints to EFIS. Toggle options: ON/OFF.

SARSAT [3L]: Enables or disables the output of SARSAT waypoints on the EFIS. Toggle options: ON/OFF.
Displayed only if a DF is configured.

NOTE: When this option is set to ON, only the SARSAT waypoints selected on the SARSAT WPT 1/1 page are
output to the EFIS.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-47
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

BULLS EYE [3R]: Enables or disables the output of Bulls Eye waypoints to EFIS. Toggle options: ON/OFF.
Displayed only if BULLS EYE is configured.

INIT/REF [6L]: Returns to the INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 page.

ESS FAILURE 1/1

The ESS FAILURE 1/1 page displays the error messages when the communication with the selected external
sub-system is failed.

Display ESS FAILURE 1/1 page by pressing MENU], <COMM> and <ESSx>.

FMS1 FAILURES 1/1

1L
NO ANSWER TO LOGON 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <COMM 6R

TITLE: The title shows the external sub-system selected from the COMM page.

All lines: Displays the protocol error message between the MCDU and the external sub-system, starting at
column 2 and line 2 of the page.

COMM [6L]: Returns to COMM STATUS 1/1 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-48
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FIX INFO 1/1

The FIX page provides bearing or course and distance information relative to an entered FIX. Distance To Go
(DTG) and ETA are displayed for radial, distance and abeam intersections. The FIX entry must be a valid
waypoint or navaid. Radial/Distance (RAD/DIS) entries can be radials or distances from the entered FIX. Radial
or distance or abeam intersection data may be entered as waypoints in the route by line selecting into the
scratchpad and transferring to the RTE LEGS 1/X page.

Display FIX INFO 1/1 page by pressing [FIX] or [INIT REF], <FIX INFO>.

FIX INFO 1/1

FIX CRS/DIS REF
o
1L ANN 310 / 456N M TO< 1R

2L -- DOWNTRACK FIXES --
2R
RAD/DIS DTG ETA
3L 175o/ 80 N M 5 4 7 N M 0 3 0 7 . 2 Z 3R
o
4L 163 / 100N M 520N M 0239.2Z 4R

5L ABEAM 5R
216o/ 6 0 N M 5 9 9 N M 0400.6Z
6L <ERASE FIXES 6R
ANN216.3/60.2

FIX [1L]: FIX identifier. Valid entry is any airport, navaid or waypoint identifier found in the
navigation/custom/temporary waypoints/user waypoints databases, the Bulls Eye waypoints or in the Active
route, except for moving waypoints, which are not allowed. Displays selected fix on EHSI. Entry of seven-
character waypoint is allowed.

RAD/DIS [3L, 4L]: Radial and/or distance from FIX. If radial line or distance intersects the active route,
distance to go and ETA at the intersection are displayed. Radial entry is displayed on EHSI as a radial line.
Distances are displayed on EHSI as a circle around the fix.

ABEAM [5L]: Initially, the ABEAM prompt is displayed. Line selecting ABEAM displays radial/distance, distance
to go and ETA at the abeam intersection.

ERASE FIXES [6L]: Removes all downtrack fixes from display. A downtrack fix can also be deleted by using the
CLR key.

DTG (3L,4L,5L): Distance to go along the flight plan to the downtrack fix. The field becomes blank after the
downtrack fix was overflown.

ETA (3L,4L,5L): Estimated Time of Arrival at the downtrack fix. After the downtrack fix was overflown (the DTG
field is blank), this field displays the actual time of arrival at the downtrack fix.

NOTE: On ground, ETEs are displayed instead of ETAs if the PLAN DATA page is configured. If not
configured, the field is blank.

REF [1R]: FR: Radial (RAD) from FIX to present position. TO: Course (CRS) from present position to FIX. The
default value is the last selected value, which is restored after a power interruption.

RAD/DIS(1L): Displayed when REF is FR. Radial/Distance from FIX to present position.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-49
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CRS/DIS(1L): Distance when REF is TO. Course/Distance to FIX from present position.

NOTE: Downtrack fixes are not possible with seven-character waypoints.

FLIGHT LOG 1/1 (if Flight Log is configured)

Display FLIGHT LOG 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT] and <FLIGHT LOG>.
FLIGHT LOG 1/1
TAKEOFF LANDING
1235.4Z 1335.4Z
1L 1R
INFLIGHT AIR MILES
2L 01+00.0 560N M
2R
LANDINGS
3L 12 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

TAKEOFF (1L): Display of initial takeoff zulu time hours and minutes. The time is reset after a cold start on
ground and set after a cold start on ground followed by a ground-air transition.

INFLIGHT (2L): Display of in-flight duration in hours and minutes. It is only reset after a cold start followed by
a takeoff; otherwise, if a landing is detected, the value will be frozen and it will be resumed after the following
take off.

INIT/REF [6L]: Returns to INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 page.

LANDING (1R): Display the last landing zulu time hours and minutes when the aircraft is on the ground.
When the aircraft is airborne, blanks are displayed. The last landing time is updated after each air to ground
transition.

AIR MILES (2R): Display the total nautical miles travelled. It is only reset after a cold start followed by a takeoff;
otherwise, if a landing is detected, the value will be frozen and resumed after take off.

LANDINGS [3R]: Display the number of landings since the last cold start on the ground. The landings count
is increased after every air ground transition. The landings count is reset after a cold start once the aircraft is on
ground.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-50
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FUEL 1/2 page (if FUEL is configured)

Display FUEL 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT] and <FUEL> or [FUEL] (if the FUEL hard-key is
configured).

A. Display of fuel route page when route is activated and executed:

ACT RTE 1 FUEL EST 1/2

MAX RANGE GROSS WT
1L 760N M 9700K G
1R
ENDURANCE FUEL WT
2L 01+21.2 1400K G
2R
FUEL FLOW MILEAGE
3L 110K G / H R 100K G / N M
3R
FUEL REMAINING AT FIX
4L 892K G ZCH 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <RTE 2 FUEL 6R

NOTE: “EST” is displayed after “FUEL” in reverse video on each of the title page (see above) whenever the
Active route is displayed and one of the following conditions is met:
1) fuel quantity or fuel flow configured but not received from the sensor; or
2) aircraft is on ground; or
3) manually entered values for FUEL FLOW (LSK 3L) or FUEL WEIGHT (LSK 2R).

B. The inactive fuel route page (RTE 1 or RTE 2) is displayed in monochrome cyan to distinguish it from the
active route:

RTE 2 FUEL 1/2

MAX RANGE GROSS WT
1L 760N M 9700K G
1R
ENDURANCE FUEL WT
2L 01+21.2 1400K G
2R
FUEL FLOW MILEAGE
3L 110K G / H R 100K G / N M
3R
FUEL REMAINING AT FIX
4L 892K G ZCH 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <RTE 1 FUEL 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-51
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Display of fuel route page when the active RTE is being modified:

MOD RTE 1 FUEL 1/2

MAX RANGE GROSS WT
1L 760N M 9700K G
1R
ENDURANCE FUEL WT
2L 01+21.2 1400K G
2R
FUEL FLOW MILEAGE
3L 110K G / H R 100K G / N M
3R
FUEL REMAINING AT FIX
4L 892K G ZCH 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

D. After performing a RTE COPY or any edit from the Inactive route page, the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts
are displayed on the inactive fuel route page:
RTE 2 FUEL 1/2
MAX RANGE GROSS WT
1L 760N M 9700K G
1R
ENDURANCE FUEL WT
2L 01+21.2 1400K G
2R
FUEL FLOW MILEAGE
3L 110K G / H R 100K G / N M
3R
FUEL REMAINING AT FIX
4L 892K G ZCH 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

ACT FUEL (title): When the fuel sensor is used for calculating the active flight plan.

ACT FUEL EST (title): Displayed when the active route is displayed and:
• either fuel flow or fuel quantity are configured, but are not received from sensors for calculations for the
active flight plan; or
• aircraft on ground; or
• manually entered values for FUEL FLOW (LSK 3L) or FUEL WEIGHT (LSK 2R).

MOD FUEL (title): When the fuel sensor is used for calculating the modified flight plan.

MOD FUEL EST (title): Displayed when Active modified route is displayed and:
• either fuel flow or fuel quantity are configured, but are not received from sensors for calculations for the
active flight plan; or
• aircraft on ground; or
• manually entered values for FUEL FLOW (LSK 3L) or FUEL WEIGHT (LSK 2R).

MAX RANGE (1L): Displays calculated maximum range along track to the FIX waypoint if is defined (nm) or if
it is not with the current track, given current or estimate fuel weight (excluding reserve), fuel flow and ground
speed.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-52
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ENDURANCE (2L): Displays calculated endurance (hours), given current or estimate fuel weight (excluding
reserve) and fuel flow.

FUEL FLOW [3L]: Displays the fuel flow.

• For the active route fuel page, the current rate of fuel consumption from the fuel sensor. A value (0-32728
kg/hr or 0-32728 lb/hr) may be manually entered if the fuel flow rate is unavailable from the sensor or for
estimation purposes and will be displayed in large font. When the fuel flow from the fuel sensor is no longer
received, the last valid fuel flow value received is stored as a manually entered value and the display is
changed from normal to large font. If the CMA-9000 FMS is cold started, the aircraft on ground and the fuel
flow is not available from fuel sensor "-----" is displayed.

• For the inactive route fuel page, the fuel flow value corresponding to the SIMUL RTEx page value is
displayed in medium font if the SIMUL_PG option is configured. Otherwise, the current rate of fuel
consumption from the fuel sensor is displayed in medium font. A value (0-32728 kg/hr or 0-32728 lb/hr) may
be manually entered if the fuel flow rate is unavailable from the sensor or for estimation purposes only if the
SIMUL_PG option is not configured and will be displayed in large font. When the fuel flow from the fuel
sensor is no longer received, the last valid fuel flow value received is stored as a manually entered value
only if the SIMUL_PG option is not configured and the display changed from normal to large font. If the
SIMUL_PG option is configured, any manual entry is rejected and the “!NO ENTRY ALLOWED” advisory
message is displayed.

FUEL REMAINING AT (4L): Displays calculated fuel remaining at a fix, given current fuel weight (excluding
reserve), fuel flow, true airspeed, and wind.

RTE 1 FUEL [6L]: Access to RTE 1 FUEL 1/2 page

RTE 2 FUEL [6L]: Access to RTE 2 FUEL 1/2 page

ERASE [6L]: Cancel modifications to flight plan (Erase modified flight plan). If ERASE_MODS option is
configured to CONFIRM, then upon pressing ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying
CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts on line select keys 6L and 6R respectively.

RESTORE [6L]: Displayed only if the RTE was erased on the RTE 1/X page. Used to restore the active route.

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Cancels the changes made to the inactive route.

GROSS WT (1R): Displays calculated or received total aircraft gross weight.

• Received from Fuel Computer:
If the gross weight is received from an external source, then the received value is displayed (in normal white
font).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-53
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

• Internally Calculated:
If the gross weight is not received from an external source and the CMA-9000 FMS FUEL_PG option is
configured with detailed weights, to FUEL+WEIGHTS, then an internally computed value is displayed (in
normal white font):
Gross weight is the sum of empty weight, optional equipment weight, crew weight, cargo weight, and
total fuel weight including reserve. The Gross weight will be automatically updated so long as the CMA-
9000 FMS receives fuel weight or fuel flow from the fuel computer.
If the gross weight is not received from an external source and the CMA-9000 FMS FUEL_PG option is not
configured with detailed weights, to FUEL+WEIGHTS, then an internally computed value is displayed (in
normal white font):
Gross weight is then calculated from the previous gross weight minus the change in fuel weight. The
Gross weight will be automatically updated so long as the CMA-9000 FMS receives fuel weight or fuel
flow from the fuel computer.
If the gross weight, fuel flow, and fuel weight are not received from an external source and the CMA-9000
FMS FUEL_PG option is configured for detailed weights, to FUEL+WEIGHTS, then the gross weight is
internally computed from the manually entered detailed weight values and is displayed as a computed value
(in normal white font). The gross weight is then recalculated when the user enters new fuel or detailed
weight values.
• Manually Entered:
If the gross weight, fuel flow, and fuel weight are not received from an external source and the CMA-9000
FMS FUEL_PG option is not configured for detailed weights to FUEL+WEIGHTS, then the last received or
computed value is displayed as a manual entry and may be manually updated by the user (in large white
font).

FUEL WT [2R]: Displays the fuel weight excluding reserve.

• For the active route fuel page, the current calculated fuel weight from the fuel sensor is displayed in medium
font. A value may be manually entered if the fuel weight is unavailable from the sensor or for estimation
purposes and displayed in large font, 0 to 655360 kg or lb.
• For the inactive route fuel page, the fuel weight value corresponding to the SIMUL RTEx page value is
displayed in medium font if the SIMUL_PG option is configured. Otherwise, the current calculated fuel
weight from the fuel sensor is displayed in medium font. A value, 0 to 655360 kg or lb, may be manually
entered if the fuel weight is unavailable from the sensor or for estimation purposes only if the SIMUL_PG
option is not configured and is displayed in large font. If the SIMUL_PG option is configured, any manual
entry is rejected and the “!NO ENTRY ALLOWED” advisory message is displayed.

MILEAGE (3R): Displays the calculated mileage in kilograms or pounds per nautical mile.

FIX [4R]: Display or entry of designated Waypoint for “FUEL REMAINING AT” computation. Default is the
last route waypoint as defined on the RTE page in the DEST field. The fuel remaining at that point is computed
based on the along track distance from the present position to the destination airport coordinates (excluding the
missed approach procedure).

UNIT [5R]: Displays/selects current units for weight display (e.g. kilograms (kg) or pounds (lb)).

CONFIRM [6R]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

When a page change is done, the data coming from the fuel computer (if configured) will have the priority and
supersede the manual entry.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-54
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FUEL 2/2 page (if FUEL or FUEL+WEIGHTS is configured)

Display FUEL 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT], <FUEL> and [NEXT] or [FUEL] (if the FUEL hard-key is
configured), and [NEXT].

A. Display of fuel route page, when route is activated and executed:

ACT RTE 1 FUEL EST 2/2

FUEL+RES EMPTY WT
1L 1700K G 5000K G 1R
RESERVE EQUIP WT
2L 300K G 700K G 2R
CREW WT
3L 300K G 3R
CARGO WT
4L 2000K G 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

B. The inactive fuel route page (RTE 1 or RTE 2) is displayed in monochrome cyan to distinguish it from the
active route:

RTE 2 FUEL 2/2

FUEL+RES EMPTY WT
1L 1700K G 5000K G 1R
RESERVE EQUIP WT
2L 300K G 700K G 2R
CREW WT
3L 300K G 3R
CARGO WT
4L 2000K G 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

NOTE: “EST” is displayed after “FUEL” in reverse video on each of the title page (see above) when the Active
route is displayed and specific conditions are met (refer to the NOTE in the FUEL 1/2 page description
herein).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-55
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Display of fuel route page when the active RTE being modified:

MOD RTE 1 FUEL 2/2

FUEL+RES EMPTY WT
1L 1700K G 5000K G 1R
RESERVE EQUIP WT
2L 300K G 700K G 2R
CREW WT
3L 300K G 3R
CARGO WT
4L 2000K G 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

D. After performing a RTE COPY or any edit from the Inactive route page, the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts
are not displayed on the inactive fuel route page:

RTE 2 FUEL 2/2

FUEL+RES EMPTY WT
1L
1700K G 5000K G 1R
RESERVE EQUIP WT
2L 300K G 700K G 2R
CREW WT
3L 300K G 3R
CARGO WT
4L 2000K G 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

E. Display of fuel route page without FUEL_PG option configured to FUEL+WEIGHTS, when route activated
and executed:

ACT RTE 1 FUEL 2/2

FUEL+RES
1L
1700K G 1R
RESERVE
2L 300K G 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
UNIT
5L KG< 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-56
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACT FUEL(title): When the fuel sensor is used for calculating the active flight plan.

ACT FUEL EST(title): For display conditions, refer to corresponding field of FUEL 1/2 page description
herein.

MOD FUEL(title): When the fuel sensor is used for calculating the modified flight plan.

MOD FUEL EST(title): For display conditions, refer to corresponding field of FUEL 1/2 page description
herein.

FUEL+RES [1L]: Display of total fuel weight (including reserve).

• For the active route fuel page, the current calculated total fuel weight from the fuel sensor is displayed in
medium font. A value may be manually entered only if the total fuel weight is unavailable from the sensor.
The value is displayed in large font with a value in between 0 to 655360 kg or lb.

NOTE: The entry of a parameter also revises the FUEL WT value on page FUEL 1/2. This field is periodically
updated based on current fuel flow consumption. When losing the fuel weight from fuel sensor, the last
fuel weight value from fuel sensor is kept until a manual value is entered.

• For the inactive route fuel page, if the SIMUL_PG option is configured, the total fuel weight value
corresponds to the SIMUL RTEx page fuel weight value plus the fuel reserve value and is displayed in
medium font. If the SIMUL_PG option is not configured, the current calculated total fuel weight from the fuel
sensor is displayed in medium font. A value may be manually entered only if the fuel weight is unavailable
from the sensor and if the SIMUL_PG option is not configured. The value is displayed in large font with a
value in between 0 to 655360 kg or lb. In this case, the entry of a parameter also revises the FUEL WT
value on page FUEL 1/2. If the SIMUL_PG option is configured, any manual entry is rejected and the “!NO
ENTRY ALLOWED” advisory message is displayed.

RESERVE [2L]: Display and entry of fuel reserve.

NOTE: A fuel reserve entry also revises the FUEL WT value on page FUEL 1/ 2 for the active route. For the
inactive route, the FUEL WT value on page FUEL 1/ 2 will only be updated if the SIMUL_PG option is
not configured. This field will be periodically updated based on current fuel flow consumption when the
total FUEL+RES value is equal to the fuel reserve value.

INIT/REF [6L]: Returns to INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 page.

ERASE [6L]: Cancel modifications to flight plan (Erase modified flight plan). If ERASE_MODS option is
configured to CONFIRM, then upon pressing ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying
CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts on line select keys 6L and 6R respectively.

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Cancels the changes made to the inactive route.

EMPTY WT [1R]: Display and entry of aircraft empty weight (0 to 45358kg/99999lb) This field is shown only if
FUEL_PG option is configured to FUEL+WEIGHTS.

EQUIP WT [2R]: Display and entry of optional equipment weight (0 to 45358kg/99999lb) This field is shown
only if FUEL_PG option is configured to FUEL+WEIGHTS.

CREW WT [3R]: Display and entry of total crew weight. (0 to 45358kg/99999lb) This field is shown only if
FUEL_PG option is configured to FUEL+WEIGHTS.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-57
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CARGO WT [4R]: Display and entry of total cargo weight (0 to 45358kg/99999lb) This field is shown only if
FUEL_PG option is configured to FUEL+WEIGHTS.

UNIT [5R]: Displays/selects current units for weight display (e.g. kilograms (kg) or pounds (lb)).

NOTE: For a Sextant IFDS EFIS installation, when there is a discrepancy between the gross weight calculated
by the CMA-9000 FMS and the one received from the IFDS, all the data fields are displayed in amber.

CONFIRM [6R]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.

GLONASS STATUS 1/2 (if GLONASS is configured)

Display the GLONASS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <GLONASS>.
GLONASS STATUS 1/2
OP MODE
NAV
1L 1R
SAT VIS SAT TRK
2L 8 5
2R
HOR FOM VER FOM
3L 20 M 65M
3R
HOR DOP VER DOP
4L 1 2 4R
HOR INT
5L O.20N M 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

OP MODE (1L): GLONASS receiver operational mode.

• TEST: Self-Test Mode.

• INI: Initialization Mode.

• ACQ: Acquisition Mode.

• NAV: Navigation Mode.

• NAV/ALT: Altitude/Clock Aided Navigation Mode.

• NAV/DIFF: Differential Navigation Mode.

• NAV/AIDED: Direction/Speed Aided Navigation Mode.

• FAILED: Failure detected.

SAT VIS (2L): Number of healthy satellites visible.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-58
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SAT TRK (2R): Number of satellites tracked.

HOR FOM (3L): Horizontal Figure Of Merit (meters).

VER FOM (3R): Vertical Figure Of Merit (meters).

HOR DOP (4L): Horizontal Dilution Of Precision (no units). This is a measurement of overall positional and
temporal accuracy in the horizontal plane.

VER DOP (4R): Vertical Dilution Of Precision (no units). Measurement of overall positional and temporal
accuracy in the vertical plane. A low VDOP is desirable, a high VDOP undesirable.

HOR INT (5L): Horizontal Integrity Limit (nautical miles).

NAV STATUS [6L]: Returns to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

GLONASS STATUS 2/2 (if GLONASS is configured)

Display the GLONASS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, <GLONASS> and [NEXT].

GLONASS STATUS 2/2

POSITION
N45o30.91 W073o38.02
1L 1R
TK/GS VER SPD
2L 072o/600K T +220F T / M I N
2R
MSL ALT
3L +12000F T
3R

4L 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1506:24Z JUL11/04 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

POSITION (1L,1R): GLONASS position LATITUDE and LONGITUDE.

TK/GS (2L): Track angle (degrees) and Ground Speed (knots).

UTC (5L): GLONASS Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

NAV STATUS [6L]: Access to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

VER SPD (2R): GLONASS Vertical Velocity (feet per minute).

MSL ALT [3R]: GLONASS Mean Sea Level Altitude (in feet).

DATE [5R]: GLONASS Date.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-59
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

GPS DESELECT 1/1

Display the GPS DESELECT 1/1 page by pressing [INIT/ REF], <NAV STATUS>, <DESELECT>, <GPS>

GPS DESELECT 1/1

cGPS
1L
VALID<
1R
mGPS
2L
VALID< 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <DESELECT 6R

cGPS [1R]: When selected, it toggles between VALID/DESEL or ACQ/DESEL options to control usage of the
civil GPS in the navigation solution.

mGPS [2R]: When selected, it toggles between VALID/DESEL or ACQ/DESEL options to control usage of the
military GPS in the navigation solution.

DESELECT [6L]: Access DESELECT 1/1 page.

GPS PREDICT RAIM 1/1(if ARINC 743A is configured)

Used to predict future GPS integrity at any required space/time point.

Display the GPS PREDICT RAIM 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <PREDICT RAIM>.
GPS PREDICT RAIM 1/1
IDENT 1145Z NONE
1L
PANC 1150Z ENRT
1R
ETA 1155Z TERM
2L 1200Z 1200Z APPR
2R
1205Z APPR
3L 1210Z TERM
3R
1215Z NONE
4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS SAT DESEL> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-60
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

IDENT [1L]: Any valid waypoint identifier where GPS integrity predictions are required.

NOTE: Defaults to destination airport on initial display of the page.

ETA [2L]: Estimated time of arrival when GPS integrity predictions are required.

NOTE: Defaults to ETA at the MAP waypoint when page first displayed. If no MAP waypoint yet inserted,
defaults to destination airport reference point. On entry of a flight plan route waypoint identifier, defaults
to ETA at entered route waypoint (based on current wind and speed). When on ground, ETA must be
manually entered. When airborne, predictive RAIM ETA is based on system wind.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Returns to the NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

SAT DESEL [6R]: Access to the GPS SAT DESELECT 1/1 page.

Predicted GPS integrity at entered IDENT/ETA ± 15 minutes: Displays the most restrictive phase of flight
that should be navigable with GPS at the entered position (identifier) and time (ETA) ± 15 minutes by intervals of
5 minutes. Possible GPS integrity status:

• NONE: GPS would not meet en-route navigation requirements.

• ENRT: GPS should meet en-route navigation requirements.

• TERM: GPS should meet terminal and en-route navigation requirements.

• APPR: GPS should meet GPS instrument approach, terminal and en-route navigation requirements.

• ****: Asterisks indicate that the GPS cannot provide a predicted integrity. The most probable reason is
that the GPS almanac needs to be updated. Allow a maximum of 25 minutes for the GPS to
automatically load the most recent satellite constellation almanac.

GPS SAT DESELECT 1/1

Display the GPS SAT DESELECT 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, <PREDICT RAIM> and
<SAT DESEL>.

GPS SAT DESELECT 1/1

DESEL -SATELLITE PRN--
-- 01 02 03 04 05
1L 1R
RESEL 06 07 08 09 10
2L -- 11 12 13 14 15
2R
16 17 18 19 20
3L 21 22 23 24 25 3R
26 27 28 29 30
4L 31 32 4R

5L 5R

6L <PREDICT RAIM 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-61
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DESEL [1L]: Deselect satellite Pseudo Range Number (PRN). The number is 2 digits from 01 to 32.

RESEL [2L]: Reselect satellite Pseudo Range Number (PRN). The number is 2 digits from 01 to 32.

SATELLITE PRN: Matrix of satellite(s) deselected from PRAIM calculations. Deselected satellites are
indicated in WHITE reverse video color.

PREDICT RAIM [6L]: Returns to the GPS PREDICT RAIM 1/1 page.

GPS NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1

Display the GPS NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page by pressing [INIT/REF], <NAV STATUS><GPS> {If dual GPS
are configured}
GPS NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1

1L cGPS> 1R

2L M GPS>
2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

cGPS [1R]: Access to civil cGPS STATUS 1/2 page.

mGPS [2R]: Access to military mGPS STATUS 1/2 page.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Access to NAV STATUS page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-62
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

GPS STATUS 1/2 or cGPS STATUS 1/2 (if ARINC 743/743A GPS is configured)

Display the GPS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <GPS>
or
Display the cGPS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT/REF], <NAV STATUS>, <GPS>,<cGPS> {if dual GPS
(civil & EGI LN_100GT) configured}

GPS STATUS 1/2

OP MODE
1L NAV
1R
SAT VIS SAT TRK
2L 8 5
2R
HOR FOM VER FOM
3L 20 M 65M
3R
HOR DOP VER DOP
4L 1 2 4R
HOR INT
5L O.20N M 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

OP MODE (1L): GPS receiver operational mode.

• TEST: Self-Test Mode.

• INI: Initialization Mode.
• ACQ: Acquisition Mode.
• NAV/SBAS: Satellite Based Augmentation System Navigation Mode.
NAV/ALT: Altitude Aided Navigation Mode.
• NAV/DIFF: Differential Navigation Mode.
• NAV/AIDED: Direction/Speed Aided Navigation Mode.
• FAILED: Failure detected.

SAT VIS (2L): Number of healthy satellites visible.

SAT TRK (2R): Number of satellites tracked.

HOR FOM (3L): Horizontal Figure Of Merit (meters).

VER FOM (3R): Vertical Figure Of Merit (meters).

HOR DOP (4L): Horizontal Dilution Of Precision (no units). This is a measurement of overall positional and
temporal accuracy in the horizontal plane.
VER DOP (4R): Vertical Dilution Of Precision (no units). Measurement of overall positional and temporal
accuracy in the vertical plane. A low VDOP is desirable, a high VDOP undesirable.

HOR INT (5L): Horizontal Integrity Limit (nautical miles).

NAV STATUS [6L]: Returns to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-63
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

GPS STATUS 2/2 or cGPS STATUS 2/2 (if ARINC 743/743A GPS is configured)

Display GPS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, <GPS> and [NEXT]
or
Display cGPS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing [INIT/REF], <NAV STATUS>, <cGPS>, [NEXT] {if dual GPS (civil
& EGI LN_100GT) configured}

GPS STATUS 2/2

POSITION
N45o30.91 W073o38.02
1L 1R
TK/GS VER SPD
o
2L 072 /600K T +220F T / M I N
2R
MSL ALT
3L +1 2 0 0 0 F T 3R
GPS HEIGHT
4L +1 1 9 5 1 F T 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1506:24Z JUL11/04 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

TK/GS (2L): Track angle (degrees) and Ground Speed (knots).

UTC (5L): GPS Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

NAV STATUS [6L]: Access to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

POSITION (1R): GPS position LATITUDE and LONGITUDE.

VER SPD (2R): GPS Vertical Velocity (feet per minute).

MSL ALT [3R]: GPS Mean Sea Level Altitude (in feet).

GPS HEIGHT [4R]: GPS Height (in feet). Only displayed if the GPS type is A743A_4.

DATE [5R]: GPS Date.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-64
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

GPS STATUS 1/2 (EGI is configured) or mGPS STATUS 1/2 (dual GPS: LN-100GT w/ civil GPS)

Display GPS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <GPS>.
or
Display mGPS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT/REF], <NAV STATUS>, <GPS>, <mGPS>, (if dual GPS (civil
& EGI LN_100GT) configured}

A. SIGMA50H:
GPS STATUS 1/2
POSITION
N45o34.25 W073 o38.0
1L 1R
MODE HOR ACCURACY
2L INIT 0.45N M
2R
TK/GS MSL ALT
3L 072o/150KT 5000F T 3R
VERT SPD VER ACCURACY
4L 220 FT/MIN 36F T 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1506:24Z JUL11/04 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

B. LN_100GT:
GPS STATUS 1/2
POSITION
N45o34.25 W073 o38.0
1L 1R
MODE HOR ACCURACY
2L INIT 0.45N M
2R
TK/GS MSL ALT
3L 072o/150KT 5000F T
3R
VERT SPD
4L 220 FT/MIN 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1506:24Z JUL11/04 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

C. LN_100GT w/ civil GPS :

M GPS STATUS 1/2
POSITION
N45o34.25 W073 o38.0
1L 1R
MODE HOR ACCURACY
2L INIT 0.45N M
2R
TK/GS MSL ALT
3L 072o/150KT 5000F T
3R
VERT SPD
4L 220 FT/MIN 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1506:24Z JUL11/04 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-65
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MODE (2L): Displays the GPS operational status. The possible indications depend on the EGI configuration as
indicated in the following table:

LN_100GT SIGMA50H
Mode (EGI) (EGI)
FAIL Fault mode X X
3D 3D position calculation mode X
2D 2D position calculation mode X
ACQ Acquisition mode X
TEST Self-test mode X
INID Almanac Search X
INIC Clock Warm-up X
INIT Initialisation mode X
3D+T 3D position and time calculation mode X
OPER 3D position and time calculation mode X
2D+T 2D position and time calculation mode X
DSEL Deselected X X

TK/GS (3L): Ground track angle (degrees) and Ground Speed (knots).

VERT SPD (4L): Displays GPS vertical velocity (in Ft/min).

UTC (5L): Displays GPS Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

NOTE: Display format does not change with time display mode selection.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Returns to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

POSITION (1R): Displays GPS Position.

HOR ACCURACY (2R): Displays GPS estimated error (95%) of horizontal position (in nm).

MSL ALT (3R): Displays Mean Sea Level GPS altitude (in Ft).

VER ACCURACY (4R): Displays GPS estimated error (95%) of GPS altitude (field available only if
SIGMA50H EGI is configured).

DATE (5R): Displays GPS Date.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-66
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

GPS STATUS 2/2 (EGI is configured)

Display GPS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, <GPS> and [NEXT].

A. SIGMA50H:

GPS STATUS 2/2

KEY STATUS FAIL CODE
1L KEY VER 0000
1R
SAT TRK
2L 5
2R
GDOP PDOP
3L 11.0 40.3
3R
HOR DOP VER DOP
4L 2.1 1.0 4R
RAIM HIL WIND
5L 0.34N M 120T/15K T 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

B. LN_100GT:

GPS STATUS 2/2

KEY STATUS FAIL CODE
1L KEY VER 0000
1R
SAT VIS SAT TRK
2L 8 5
2R
GDOP PDOP
3L 11.0 40.3
3R
HOR DOP VER DOP
4L 2.1 1.0 4R
EHE
5L 20 M 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-67
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

KEY STATUS (1L): Displays GPS key status (highest to lowest display priority):

Key Status LN_100GT SIGMA50H

(EGI) (EGI)
PPS-SM FAIL Circuit failure. X X
ZEROIZE ERR Erase failure. X X
KEY LOAD ERR Key loading error (parity error,…) X X
NO KEY Key is missing. X X
BAD KEY Bad key error. X
2 HR ALERT Keys will expire within 2 hours. X X
INSUFF KEY Insufficient key. X X
KEY UNVER Keys unverified. X
KEY VER Keys verified. X
NOT USED Keys not used. X
USED Keys used. X

SAT VIS (2L): Number of healthy satellites visible {Litton EGI configuration only}.

GDOP (3L): Displays Geometric Dilution of Precision (0.0 to 51.0).

HOR DOP (4L): Horizontal Dilution of Precision (no units). This is a measurement of overall positional and
temporal accuracy in the horizontal plane. A low HDOP is desirable, a high HDOP undesirable.

RAIM HIL (5L): Displays the Horizontal Integrity Limit supplied by the GPS RAIM function. {SIGMA50H
configuration only}.

EHE (5L): Displays GPS estimated error of horizontal position (in meters). {Litton EGI configuration only}.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Returns to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

FAIL CODE (1R): Displays GPS failure code. This code is the hexadecimal value of bits 14 – 26 of GPS
discrete status word.

SAT TRK (2R): Number of satellites used by localization function.

PDOP (3R): Displays Position Dilution of Precision (0.0 to 51.0).

VER DOP (4R): Vertical Dilution of Precision (no units). Measurement of overall positional and temporal
accuracy in the vertical plane. A low VDOP is desirable, a high VDOP undesirable.

WIND [5R]: Displays GPS Wind direction and Wind Speed. {Litton EGI configuration only}.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-68
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HOLD 1/X

• [HOLD] If a holding FIX already exists in the route.

• Automatically accessed whenever a proposed holding fix was entered on the RTE LEGS page (e.g.
appending ‘/H’ to an existing waypoint).

Used to review and/or revise the details of either an existing or proposed holding pattern. A manually exited
holding pattern can be defined by the pilot. A holding pattern termination at an altitude or after one full circuit is
the result of the departure/arrival procedures in the database. The possible display formats are shown below.

A. Prior to EXECution (EXEC annunciator is illuminated):

MOD RTE 1 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L
KILLA 220/ 5000A 1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >RIGHT Z
2R
INBD CRS
3L 050 o
3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L 1.0M I N / - - . - N M 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L MANUAL INACTIVE 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

B. After EXECution, but prior to hold entry:

RTE 1 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L
KILLA 220/ 5000A 1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >RIGHT z
2R
INBD CRS
3L 050 o
3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L 1.0M I N / --.-N M 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L MANUAL ARMED 5R

6L <NEW HOLD 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-69
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. After hold entry initiated:

ACT RTE 1 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L KILLA 220/ 5000A 1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >RIGHT 2332.5Z 2R
INBD CRS
3L 050 o
3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L 1.0M I N / - - . - N M 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L MANUAL IN PROGRESS 5R

6L <NEW HOLD EXIT HOLD> 6R

D. After pressing the EXIT HOLD key:

MOD RTE 1 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L
KILLA 220/ 5000A 1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >RIGHT 2332.5Z 2R
INBD CRS
3L 050o 3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L 1.0M I N / - - . - N M 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L MANUAL EXITING HOLD 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

E. During holding exit procedure (after pressing EXEC key):

ACT RTE 1 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L KILLA 220/ 5000A 1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >RIGHT 2332.5Z 2R
INBD CRS
3L 050 o
3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L 1.0M I N / - - . - N M 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L MANUAL EXIT ARMED 5R

6L <NEW HOLD RESUME HOLD> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-70
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

F. When the exit was armed and the RESUME HOLD prompt was pressed:

MOD RTE 1 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L
KILLA 220/ 5000A 1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >RIGHT 2332.5Z 2R
INBD CRS
3L 050 o
3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L 1.0M I N / - - . - N M 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L MANUAL RESUMING HOLD 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

G. Inactive hold prior to confirmation:

RTE 2 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L KILLA 220/ 5000A
1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >RIGHT Z
2R
INBD CRS
3L 050o 3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L 1.0MIN/--.-NM 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L ONCE INACTIVE 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

H. Inactive route after confirmation:

RTE 2 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L
KILLA 220/ 5000A
1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >RIGHT Z
2R
INBD CRS
3L 050o 3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L 1.0MIN/--.-NM 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L ONCE INACTIVE 5R

6L <NEW HOLD 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-71
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

I. After EXECution, but prior to hold entry (exit type AT TGT ALT displayed):

RTE 1 HOLD 1/1

FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L
FA23 210/ 5000A 1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >LEFT Z
2R
INBD CRS
3L 050 o 3R
LEG TIME/DIS
4L 1.0M I N / - - . - N M 4R
EXIT TYPE STATUS
5L AT TGT ALT INACTIVE 5R

6L <NEW HOLD 6R

ACT/MOD/" "(title): MOD indicates the holding pattern has not been executed. ACT indicates that the aircraft
has entered the holding pattern. A blank field indicates the holding fix has not yet been reached or the route is
inactive.

FIX [1L]: The waypoint identifier of the holding fix. Assigned PPOS for holding pattern at present position.

TURN DIR [2L]: Holding pattern turn direction (right or left).

INBD CRS [3L]: Holding pattern in-bound course to fix. Defaults to inbound course of the preceeding leg to
FIX (0° to 360°).

LEG TIME/DIS [4L]: Holding pattern inbound leg time or leg distance: When a slash ('/') character is entered,
the entry is interpreted as the leg distance, otherwise, the entry is interpreted as the leg time. When leg time is
entered, the leg distance field displays dashes and when leg distance is entered, the leg time field displays
dashes.
Holding pattern inbound leg time: Defaults to 1.0 minute at or below 14,000 feet and 1.5 minutes above 14,000
feet.
Holding pattern inbound leg distance: Dashes normally displayed, valid range is between 1.0 nm to 99.9 nm.

EXIT TYPE [5L]:

• MANUAL - indicates that exit from the holding pattern must be manually initiated (via Direct-To or pressing
EXIT HOLD).
• ONCE - indicates automatic exit at the fix after completion of entry procedure. (Normally used in lieu of a
standard procedure turn).
• AT TGT ALT - indicates automatic exit at the fix after reaching an altitude. The latter types are from the
navigation database.
When this LSK is pressed the exit type toggles between ONCE or AT TGT ALT to MANUAL, it can not be
toggled back to the previous exit type unless the change is erased. When the exit type is MANUAL, the ">"
symbol is not displayed since the MANUAL exit type cannot be changed. The symbol ">" is also not displayed
when the inactive route is displayed since changing the exit type is only allowed in the active route. Changing
the exit type when the holding pattern status is EXIT ARMED has the same effect as pressing the RESUME
HOLD prompt.

NEW HOLD [6L]: Displayed only if there is no route modification in process. Access to the RTE LEGS 1/X
page to define a new holding pattern (/H in scratchpad).

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-72
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ERASE [6L]: Used to erase all route modifications in progress including HOLD definition. The prompt is not
available for inactive route modifications. If confirm erase route modifications is configured, then upon pressing
ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying CANCEL and CONFIRM prompts on line select keys 6L and
6R respectively.

SPD/TGT ALT [1R]: Displays speed/altitude restrictions for corresponding waypoint on the RTE LEGS 1/X
page. Altitude display can be in feet or FL. If waypoint is before the midway point of the active route, Transition
Altitude is used. If waypoint is after the midway point of the active route, Transition Level is used.
The speed/altitude constraints extracted from the navigation database is displayed in small font. Manual entry
of speed/altitude constraints is displayed in large font. Refer to field ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS on RTE LEGS
1/X page for the manual entry format.
If the FMS is configured for VNAV, approach and approach transition waypoint altitude constraints are
temperature-compensated, provided that destination airport temperature was entered on the VNAV page.
Temperature-compensated altitude constraint is displayed in reverse video white.

FIX ETA (2R): Estimated time of arrival over holding fix.

STATUS [5R]: Indicates the status of the holding pattern.

• INACTIVE: The holding pattern is part of the inactive flight plan or active flight plan but not yet reached the
active TO waypoint.
• ARMED: The active TO waypoint is in the holding pattern, but not yet reached.
• IN PROGRESS: The aircraft has entered the holding pattern.
• EXITING HOLD: The holding pattern is in progress and the "EXIT HOLD>" prompt has been pressed.
• EXIT ARMED: The aircraft is exiting the holding pattern, the "EXIT HOLD>" prompt and the EXEC key have
been pressed.
• RESUMING HOLD: The exit is armed and the "RESUME HOLD>" prompt has been pressed.

EXIT HOLD [6R]: Active only when the displayed holding pattern status is IN PROGRESS. Pressing this LSK
causes EXITING HOLD prompt to appear, the route goes in MOD status and the EXEC lamp illuminates. If the
EXEC key is pressed in the EXITING HOLD state, the holding pattern exit is armed

RESUME HOLD [6R]: Displayed when the holding pattern status is EXIT ARMED. Pressing this LSK changes
the status to RESUMING HOLD and causes the route to be in MOD and the EXEC lamp to illuminate. If the
EXEC key is pressed in the RESUMING HOLD state, the holding pattern is resumed and the exit type is
manual.

CONFIRM [6R]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-73
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HOVER 1/1 (if HOVER configured, A/C configured as ROTOR, RALT equipment configured and Active
route displayed)

This page is used to enter the hover point, verify the parameters for the Transdown to hover procedure and
activate the procedure.

Display the HOVER 1/1 page by pressing:

[INIT REF],<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>,<HOVER> or
[INIT REF],<WPT DATA>,<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>,<HOVER> or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<PREDEF WPT>,select waypoint identifier or coordinates,<DES+SAR> or
<TACTICAL>,<HOVER> or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<DMAP WPT>,select DMAP waypoint identifier,<DES+SAR> or
<TACTICAL>,<HOVER> or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<PREDEF WPT>,[NEXT],<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>,<HOVER> or
[INIT REF],<MARK ON TOP>,<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>,<HOVER> or
[MARK] {if CFG KEY 2 configured to MARK},<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, <HOVER> or
{if Flight Transdown command of IFDS is sent} or
[TACT], <HOVER> {if TACT key configured and HOVER configured on the TACTICAL page}

Displayed when a waypoint identifier or waypoint coordinates for mark waypoint are defined and either the
hover procedure is not active (in the active route) or a new mark waypoint is created.

_ _ HOVER 1/1

1L
WPT01 MARK ON TOP POS
1R
N40 o09.61 W089o20.27
2L RADALT HOVER HEIGHT
2R
2560 FT 80 FT
3L TRUE WIND VELOCITIES 3R
020T/45 KT VX +25.5 KT
4L VY +25.5 KT 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL ACTIVATE> 6R

A. Displayed when the Hover procedure has been activated (LSK 6R):

MOD HOVER 1/1

1L WPT01 MARK ON TOP POS

1R
N40 o09.61 W089o20.27
2L RADALT HOVER HEIGHT
2R
2560 FT 80 FT
3L TRUE WIND VELOCITIES
3R
020T/45KT VX +25.5 KT
4L VY +25.5 KT 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-74
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Displayed when the Hover procedure has been executed ([EXEC] key):

ACT HOVER 1/1

1L
WPT01 MARK ON TOP POS
1R
N40 o09.61 W089o20.27
2L RADALT HOVER HEIGHT
2R
2560 FT 80 FT
3L TRUE WIND VELOCITIES
3R
020T/45KT VX +25.5 KT
4L VY +25.5 KT 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

ACT/MOD/blank (STATUS): MOD indicates that the hover waypoints were inserted in the flight plan. ACT
indicates that the procedure was executed.

ID [1L]: Input waypoint ID. Not a mandatory entry field. Used to designate any waypoint stored in the databases
as the mark point. If the entered waypoint ID is not found in one of the databases or the waypoint ID is a moving
waypoint, the entry will be rejected. The waypoint ID is cleared when the active route is erased.

ID COORDINATES [1R]: Coordinates of the mark point. This is a mandatory entry field. A latitude/longitude
format is displayed in this field. The waypoint coordinates are cleared when the active route is erased.

field name (1R): When displayed indicates how the mark point was designated/entered: MARK ON TOP POS,
LAST JSTICK POS. The field name remains blank if the mark point is taken from the database or if the
coordinates were entered manually.

RADALT (2L): Displays the radio altitude (ft).

HOVER HEIGHT (2R): Displays the hover height (ft).

TRUE WIND (3L): Displays the true wind's direction and velocity.

NOTE: The calculation of the aircraft orientation at the mark point will not be based on the wind orientation
when the wind velocity is less than 5 knots. Instead it will be based on the bearing from the aircraft to
the mark point.

VELOCITIES (3R): Displays AFCS X and Y velocities if one of the following EFIS is configured: AHCAS,
AHCAS2, ROCKWELL2 and ROCKWELL3.
Displays Doppler X and Y velocities {If DVS is configured and IFDS EFIS is configured}.

TAS (3R): Displays the true airspeed {If the IFDS EFIS is configured but DVS is not configured or none of the
following EFIS are configured: IFDS, AHCAS, AHCAS2, and ROCKWELL2 and ROCKWELL3}.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-75
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACTIVATE [6R]: ACTIVATE (display in green) inserts the latest entered hover waypoint and the computed
Transdown (TDN) waypoint into the flight plan. The ACTIVATE prompt is displayed when a waypoint identifier or
waypoint coordinates are present on line 1 and either a) the hover procedure is not active (not in the active
route) or b) a new mark waypoint is created. When the hover procedure is activated but not executed (active
route in MOD status), the prompt is suppressed. Activation is possible only if the altitude data received from the
radio altimeter is valid ACTIVATE is displayed (in white) only when the procedure is not active. Confirms the
changes made to the inactive procedure. Inserts the latest entered hover waypoint and the computed TDN
waypoint into the flight plan. It also starts the computation of the TDN waypoint. Activation is possible only if the
altitude data received from the radio altimeter is valid.

CANCEL/ERASE [6L]: CANCEL (reverse video green color) will delete all the fields (identifier and coordinate
of the mark waypoint). It will restore previously defined mark waypoint (in the active route) if existed. The
CANCEL prompt is displayed under the same conditions as the ACTIVATE prompt. See comments on ERASE
[6L] of RTE 1/X page for the ERASE option.

CONFIRM [6R]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM}

Confirm the changes to the active route.

IDENT 1/2

This page displays the effective expiry dates for the current and next cycle databases and enables the pilot to
manually select the active navigation database. The loaded custom and user databases are also identified. The
page allows the identification of the configured software in the CMA-9000 FMS and provide validity check for the
configuration.

NOTE: FMS ID “FMSx” will not be shown when cross-FMS is not configured.

• Display the IDENT 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF] and <IDENT> (LSK 1L) or automatically after power on if
the default power-up page is configured to IDENT.

FMS1 IDENT 1/2

NAV DATABASE ACTIVE
K L M W W 0 6 9 7 OCT10-NOV06/03
1L 1R
SECOND
2L KLMWW0697 NOV07-DEC04/03
2R
OP PROGRAM CFG NO
3L 614876-300 00777 3R
CUSTOM DATABASE DATE
4L EC-RTEST MAR21/04 4R
USER DATABASE DATE
5L EC-UDTEST MAR21/04 5R

6L <SETUP POS INIT> 6R

NAV DATABASE (1L,2L): Navigation database identification.

OP PROGRAM (3L): Operational Program number.

CUSTOM DATABASE (4L): Displays the custom database Identifier. Up to 8 characters may be shown.
Stars “********” are shown when no custom database is loaded. Blanks are shown when the database identifier
is not valid.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-76
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

USER DATABASE (5L): Displays the user database Identifier. Up to 9 characters may be shown. Stars
“********” are shown when no user database is loaded. Blanks are shown when the database identifier is not
valid or the loaded database modified.

SETUP [6L]: Access to SETUP 1/1 page.

ACTIVE [1R]: Displays active database effectivity date. To select the second database as the active database.
Press LSK 2R to copy the second database date to the scratchpad. Press LSK 1R to select it as the ACTIVE
DATABASE. The current active database can be selected when on the ground. Doing so will clear any
previously loaded flight plan.

SECOND [2R]: Displays second database effectivity date. Keypress will copy this date into the scratchpad.

CFG NO (3R): Configuration CRC checksum. This number is verified against the information in the Installation
and Flight Line Manual by maintenance personnel during system installation.

DATE (4R): Display the custom database affectivity date. Stars “*****/**”are shown when no database is
loaded. Blanks are shown when the date is not valid.

DATE [5R]: Display the user database date. Stars “*****/**”are shown when no database is loaded. Blanks are
shown when the date is not valid or the loaded database has been modified.

POS INIT [6R]: Access to POS INIT/REF 1/X page.

IDENT 2/2

This page displays the identification of the loaded flight data.

Display the IDENT 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <IDENT> and [NEXT].

FMS1 IDENT 2/2

1L 1R
MAGVAR MODEL
2L 2005 (DEF)
2R
OEI MODEL (DEF) DATE
3L SPUMA MKII+ NOV06/01
3R

4L 4R
TACTICAL DATABASE DATE
5L SWISS_AREA5 DEC19/08 5R

6L <SETUP POS INIT> 6R

MAGVAR MODEL (2L): Displays the name of the Magnetic Variation Table Model. (DEF) indicates the default
2005 Model is used.

OEI MODEL (3L): Displays the name of the loaded OEI Model used for OEI Cruise and Fly Away simulation.
The OEI model name may contain up to 14 characters.

DATE (3R): Displays the date indicated in the OEI Model data loaded.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-77
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TACTICAL DATABASE (5L): Displays the tactical approach database name. The name may contain up to 14
characters. “**************” is shown when no database is loaded. If Tactical APPR is not configured, this field is
blank.

DATE (5R): Displays the tactical approach database date. The date format is as per the configuration date
format (e.g. DATE from the DISPLAY CONFIG pages). “*****/**” is shown when no database is loaded. If
Tactical APPR is not configured, this field is blank.

SETUP [6L]: Access to SETUP 1/1 page.

POS INIT [6R]: Access to POS INIT/REF 1/X page.

INACT DES+SAR 2/2 (if CARP and TACTICAL APPR are not configured)
INACT DES+SAR 2/4 (if CARP or TACTICAL APPR is configured)

The page title is INACT TACTICAL if the TACT key is configured.

The INACT DES+SAR 2/X page is displayed in cyan.

Displaying the INACT page switches the displayed RTE x LEGS 1/X pages to the inactive route. Also all the
commands available on this page (listed below) can be applied to the respective waypoint in the inactive route.
In the LEGS page it is possible to switch back to the active route.
If the INIT REF hard key is pressed while displaying the INACT DES+SAR 2/2 page, the INIT/REF INDEX 1/2
page is displayed unless the inactive route is being modified.
When the active route is being modified (MOD) and the DES+SAR prompt is being pressed, the DES+SAR 1/2
page is displayed, the access to the INACT DES+SAR 2/2 page is denied, and the advisory message !ACTIVE
ROUTE IN MOD is displayed.
When the inactive route is being modified and the <DES+SAR> prompts being pressed, the INACT DES+SAR
2/2 page is displayed, the access to the DES+SAR 1/2 page is denied, and the advisory message !INACTIVE
ROUTE IN MOD is displayed.

NOTE: The INACTIVE DES+SAR 2/2 (or 2/4 if CARP or TACTICAL APPR is configured) page will be
displayed when the DES+SAR prompt is selected and the inactive route is being modified.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-78
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

To access the INACT DES+SAR 2/X page press:

[INIT REF], <DES+SAR>, [NEXT] and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<DMAP WP >,<DES+SAR>, [NEXT] and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<WPT DATA>,<DES+SAR>, [NEXT] and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<PREDEF WPT>,<DES+SAR>, [NEXT] and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<PREDEF WP>, [NEXT], <DES+SAR>, [NEXT] and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<AIRPORT>,<DES+SAR>, [NEXT] and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<VHF NAV>,<DES+SAR>, [NEXT] and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<NDB>,<DES+SAR>, [NEXT] and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<USER WPTS>,<DES+SAR>, [NEXT] and [NEXT] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<CUSTOM WPTS>,<DES+SAR>, [NEXT] and [NEXT].

INACT DES+SAR 2/2

REF ID
1L
WPT04 RTE DISCON> 1R
RAD/DIS
2L ---T/----N M 2R

3L <SQUAREACT HOLD> 3R

4L <LADDER RADIAL-TO> 4R

5L <SECTOR TACT DTO> 5R

6L <FLY OVER DIRECT-TO> 6R

REF ID [1L]: Storage of the reference identifier. If there is a valid position in the scratchpad when the page is
opened, then the CMA-9000 FMS creates a temporary waypoint at that position and places the identifier in this
field.

RTE DISCON [1R]: Brings up the RTE x LEGS 1/X page with discontinuity symbols (□□□□□) in the scratchpad.

RAD/DIS [2L]: The RAD/DIS combination allows the pilot to position a waypoint relative to the REF ID. The
relative position is used to create a temporary waypoint when a new DES+SAR procedure is selected.

NOTE: HOVER [2R]: Not available (Hover is not possible on the inactive route).

SQUARE [3L]: Appears when configured. The status “ACT” (reverse video cyan) is appended to the prompt if
an activated square search pattern is in the inactive flight plan. Pressing the line select key:
• If SAR waypoint is not entered in field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the SQUARE page.
• If SAR waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page with
the identifier and /S qualifier in the scratchpad allowing entry anywhere in the flight plan.

LADDER [4L]: Appears when configured. The status “ACT” (reverse video cyan) is appended to the prompt if
an activated ladder search pattern is in the inactive flight plan. Pressing the line select key:
• If SAR waypoint is not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the LADDER page.
• If SAR waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page with
the identifier and /S qualifier in the scratchpad allowing entry anywhere in the flight plan.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-79
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SECTOR [5L]: Appears when configured. The status “ACT” (reverse video cyan) is appended to the prompt if
an activated sector search pattern is in the inactive flight plan. Pressing the line select key:
• If SAR waypoint is not defined or is part of the Route, display the SECTOR page.
• If SAR waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page with
the identifier and /S qualifier in the scratchpad allowing entry anywhere in the flight plan.

HOLD [3R]: Pressing the line select key:

• If HOLD waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, yield to the same behaviour as
pressing the HOLD hard key. The HOLD page appears if a holding pattern already exists; otherwise, the
RTE x LEGS 1/X page appears with /H in the scratchpad. The HOLD page has a NEW HOLD LSK to allow a
new holding pattern to be defined.
• If HOLD waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page
with the identifier and /H qualifier in the scratchpad.

FLY OVER [6L]: Pressing the line select key:

• If Fly Over waypoint is not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the RTE x LEGS 1/X
page with only /O in the scratchpad.
• If Fly Over waypoint entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page
with the identifier and /O in the scratchpad.

RADIAL-TO [4R]: Pressing the line select key:

• If Radial-to waypoint is not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the RTE x LEGS 1/X
page with only the /R qualifier in the scratchpad.
• If Radial-to waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the RADIAL-TO page with
the identifier in the ID field. The NEW RADIAL-TO field will display the LEGS page for insertion in the route.

TACT DTO [5R]: Appears when the MILITARY NAVIGATION option is configured. Pressing the line select key:
• If Tactical Direct-to waypoint is not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the RTE x
LEGS 1/X page with only /T in the scratchpad.
• If Tactical Direct-to waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the RTE x LEGS
1/X page with the identifier and /T in the scratchpad.

DIRECT-TO [6R]: Pressing the line select key:

• If Direct-to waypoint is not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the RTE x LEGS 1/X
page.
• If Direct-to waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page, display the RTE x LEGS 1/X page
with the identifier in the scratchpad.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-80
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INACT DES+SAR 4/4 (if CARP or TACTICAL APPR is configured)

The page title is INACT TACTICAL if the TACT key is configured.

Display DES+SAR 4/4 page by pressing:

[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<AIRPORT>,<DES+SAR> and [PREV] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<VHF NAV>,<DES+SAR> and [PREV] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<NDB>,<DES+SAR> and [PREV] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<USER WPTS>,<DES+SAR> and [PREV] or
[INIT REF],<NEAREST>,<CUSTOM WPTS>,<DES+SAR> and [PREV] or
[INIT REF],<DES+SAR> and [PREV] or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<DMAP WPT>,<DES+SAR> and [PREV] or
[INIT REF],<WPT DATA>,<DES+SAR> and [PREV] or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<PREDEF WPT>,<DES+SAR> and [PREV] or
[INIT REF],<WPT LISTS>,<PREDEF WPT>,[NEXT],<DES+SAR> and [PREV]

NOTE: The INACT DES+SAR 3/4 and 4/4 pages are available when the inactive route is being modified.

The INACT DES+SAR 4/4 page is available by pressing [PREV] while displaying the DES+SAR 1/4 page. The
INACT DES+SAR 3/4 and 4/4 pages is displayed in cyan.
Displaying either of the INACT pages will switch the displayed LEGS pages to the inactive route. Also all the
commands available on this page (listed below) can be applied to the respective waypoint in the inactive route.
In the LEGS page it is always possible to switch back to the active route.
If the INIT REF hard key is pressed while displaying the INACT DES+SAR 3/4 or 4/4 pages, the INIT/REF
INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.
When the active route is being modified (MOD) and the DES+SAR prompt is being pressed, the DES+SAR 1/2
page is displayed, the access to the INACT DES+SAR 3/4 and 4/4 pages is denied, and the advisory message
!ACTIVE ROUTE IN MOD is displayed when trying to access the INACT DES+SAR 3/4 or 4/4 pages.
When the inactive route is being modified and the DES+SAR prompt is being pressed, the INACT DES+SAR
3/4 page is displayed, the access to the DES+SAR 1/4 and 2/4 pages is denied, and the advisory message
!INACTIVE ROUTE IN MOD is displayed when trying to access ether the DES+SAR 1/4 or 2/4 pages.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-81
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DES+SAR 4/4
REF ID
1L WPT03 1R
RAD/DIS
2L ---T/----NM
2R

3L CARP> 3R

4L TACT APPR> 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

REF ID [1L]: Storage of the reference identifier. If there is a valid position in the scratchpad when the page is
opened, then the FMS will create a temporary waypoint at that position and places the identifier in this field. If
the reference identifier is a moving waypoint, the following prompts are blanked and disabled: CARP> and
TACT APPR>.

RAD/DIS [2L]: The RAD/DIS combination allows the pilot to position a waypoint relative to the REF ID. The
relative position is used to create a temporary waypoint when a new DES+SAR procedure is selected.

CARP [3R]: Displayed when CARP is configured. Pressing the line select key:
• If SAR waypoint is not entered in field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and no CARP procedure exists in the
flight plan then display the LEGS page with CRP01/C in the scratchpad.
• If SAR waypoint is not entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and a CARP procedure exists in
the flight plan then display the CARP PLAN 1/3 page.
• If SAR waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and no CARP procedure exists in the
flight plan then display the LEGS page with the identifier and /C qualifier in the scratchpad allowing entry in
the flight plan.
• If SAR waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and it is different from the PI of the
existing CARP procedure then display the CARP PLAN 1/3 page with the identifier in the scratchpad.

TACT APPR [4R]: Displayed when the TACT APPR option on the CONFIG page is configured.
• If no SAR waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and no previously defined tactical
approach Runway Threshold Waypoint then display default LEGS page with the /A qualifier in the scratchpad
allowing entry in the flight plan.
• If no SAR waypoint is entered in the field REF ID of the DES+SAR page and previously defined the tactical
approach Runway Threshold Waypoint then display the TACTICAL APPR page.
• If SAR waypoint is already defined then display the default LEGS page with the identifier with the /A qualifier
in the scratchpad allowing entry in the flight plan.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-82
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INIT/REF INDEX 1/2

Display the INIT/REF INDEX 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF].

NOTE: FMS ID “FMSx” will not be shown when cross-FMS is not configured.

Displays {If PREDEF is configured and MARK key is not configured, display {If configured for SEARCH} and if
EFIS Step mode is configured}.
FMS1 INIT/REF INDEX 1/2

1L
<IDENT WPT DATA> 1R

2L <POS INIT WPT LISTS> 2R

3L <CTR LEGS NEAREST> 3R

4L <FIX INFO MARK ON TOP> 4R

5L <SETUP NAV STATUS> 5R

6L <MSG RECALL DES+SAR> 6R

B. Display {If PREDEF is configured and MARK key is not configured, display {If configured for SEARCH} and
{Tactical Config BULLS EYE is configured and none of the CFG KEY is configured to BULL}}.

FMS1 INIT/REF INDEX 1/2

1L <IDENT WPT DATA> 1R

2L <POS INIT WPT LISTS> 2R

3L <BULLS EYE NEAREST> 3R

4L <FIX INFO MARK ON TOP> 4R

5L <SETUP NAV STATUS> 5R

6L <MSG RECALL DES+SAR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-83
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Display MARK key configured and {If PREDEF configured}.

FMS1 INIT/REF INDEX 1/2

1L
<IDENT WPT DATA> 1R

2L <POS INIT WPT LISTS> 2R

3L NEAREST> 3R

4L <FIX INFO 4R

5L <SETUP NAV STATUS> 5R

6L <MSG RECALL DES+SAR> 6R

AIR DATA LOST
D. Display {If PREDEF configured, MARK key configured and, ATOS or/and FIAR 1500B RADAR configured}.

FMS1 INIT/REF INDEX 1/2

1L <IDENT WPT DATA> 1R

2L <POS INIT WPT LISTS> 2R

3L NEAREST> 3R

4L <FIX INFO MISSION> 4R

5L <SETUP NAV STATUS> 5R

6L <MSG RECALL DES+SAR> 6R

[1L] to [6L] and [1R] to [5R]:

These keys permit to access one of the following pages according to the INIT/REF option configuration:

IDENT [1L]: Access to IDENT 1/1 page.

WPT DATA [1R]: Access to WPT DATA 1/1 page.

POS INIT [2L]: Access to POS INIT/REF 1/X page.

WPT LISTS[2R]: Access to WPT LISTS 1/1 page.

CTR LEGS [3L]: Access to the LEGS 1/X page in center step EFIS mode {If EFIS step mode is configured}.

BULLS EYE [3L]: Access to BULLS EYE 1/3 page. {If BULLS EYE is configured}.

NOTE: When the Tactical Config BULLS EYE is configured, the EFIS step mode can not be installed.

NEAREST[3R]: Access to NEAREST 1/1 page.

FIX INFO [4L]: Access to FIX INFO 1/1 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-84
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MARK ON TOP [4R]: Store the current CMA-9000 FMS system position in the predefined store point label
‘ONTOP’, and jump to the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page {if PREDEF WPT configured and MARK key is not
configured}.

MISSION [4R]: Access to MISSION 1/1 page {if the PREDEF PG is not configured or configured with the MARK
key also configured} and {the ATOS and/or the FIAR 1500B RADAR is/are configured}.

SETUP [5L]: Access to SETUP 1/1 page.

NAV STATUS [5R]: Access to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

MSG RECALL [6L]: Access to MESSAGE RECALL 1/X page. This prompt is displayed in:
• amber if at least one alert message has not been acknowledged.
• cyan if no alert message or all messages was acknowledged.

DES+SAR or TACTICAL [6R]: Access to the DES+SAR or TACTICAL 1/2 page.

INIT/REF INDEX 2/2

Display the INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF] and [NEXT].

NOTE: FMS ID “FMSx” will not be shown when cross-FMS is not configured.
FMS1 INIT/REF INDEX 2/2

1L
<CENTRAL CLR DISPLAY> 1R

2L SIMULATE> 2R

3L TIMER> 3R

4L <PLAN DATA EFIS> 4R

5L <FUEL DATA LOAD> 5R

6L <FLIGHT LOG MAINT> 6R

[1L] to [6L] and [1R] to [6R]:

These keys permit to access one of the following pages according to the INIT/REF option configuration.

CENTRAL CLR [1L]: Performs a central clear. Displayed only when configured. Pressing this prompt access
the CENTRAL CLEAR ? page.

PLAN DATA [4L]: Access to PLAN DATA 1/1 page.

FUEL [5L]: Access to FUEL 1/2 page (If FUEL is configured).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-85
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FLIGHT LOG [6L]: Access to FLIGHT LOG 1/1 page (If FLIGHT LOG is configured).

DISPLAY [1R]: Access to DISPLAY 1/1 page, which contains parallax adjustment and display selection.

SIMULATE [2R]: Access to the SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3 page {if SIMUL is configured and RTE2 is configured}
or access to the SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/2 page {if SIMUL is configured only}.

TIMER [3R]: Access to TIMER 1/1 page {If TIMER page is configured}.

EFIS [4R]: Access to EFIS 1/1 page (If EFIS interface is configured and type is not IFDS/AHCAS/EFIS-84).

DATA LOAD [5R]: Access to DATA LOAD 1/1 page.

MAINT [6R]: Access to MAINT MESSAGES 1/X page. Available only if aircraft is on ground and internal FMS
failure(s) present.

INS STATUS 1/1 (if LITTON EGI interface is configured)

IRSx STATUS X/Y (if IRS interface is configured; x= 1, 2 or 3; X/Y= 1/1, 1/2, 2/2, 1/3, 2/3 or 3/3)

(LITTON EGI configuration only)

Display the INS STATUS 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <INS>.

A. Page displayed when INS is in NAV mode:

INS STATUS 1/1

POSITION
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1L 1R
MODE ACCURACY
2L NAVIGATION 2.50N M
2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
o o o
3L 060 /L15 045 /140K T
3R
PITCH/ROLL ALT
4L D15.0o/R10.3o 5000F T 4R
VERT SPD NAV TIME
5L +175 F T / M I N 02H16.7 5R

6L <NAV STATUS UPDATE POS> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-86
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Page displayed when INS is in GROUND ALIGN mode 100 to 50:

INS STATUS 1/1

POSITION
1L 1R
MODE ACCURACY
2L GROUND ALIGN 75 NM
2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
o o o
3L / / KT
3R
PITCH/ROLL ALT
o o
4L / FT 4R
VERT SPD
5L FT/MIN 5R

6L <NAV STATUS STOP ALIGN> 6R

C. Page displayed when INS is in GROUND ALIGN mode 49 to 00:

INS STATUS 1/1

POSITION
1L 1R
MODE ACCURACY
2L GROUND ALIGN 40 NM
2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
o o o
3L / / KT
3R
PITCH/ROLL ALT
o
4L / FT 4R
VERT SPD
5L FT/MIN 5R

6L <NAV STATUS CMD NAV> 6R

(IRS configuration only)

Display the IRS STATUS 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <IRS>.

A. Page displayed for LTN92:

IRS1 STATUS 1/1

POSITION
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1L 1R
MODE PGM NUMBER
2L NAV 92-04-13
2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
o o o
3L 060 / L15 045 /140K T 3R
PITCH/ROLL ALT
4L D15o/ R10o 5000F T 4R
VERT SPD
5L + 1 7 5 FT/MIN MALFUNCT> 5R

6L <NAV STATUS ACCURACY> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-87
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Page displayed for ADIRU, LTN_101 and LASEREF_V:

IRS1 STATUS 1/1

POSITION
1L N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1R
MODE
2L NAV 2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
o o o
3L 060 / R99 045 /140K T 3R
PITCH/ROLL ALT
4L D15o/ R10 5000F T 4R
VERT SPD
5L + 1 7 5 FT/MIN START TEST> 5R

6L <NAV STATUS ACCURACY> 6R

MODE (2L):
• For EGI: Displays INS mode status. Possible Status are: STANDBY, CALIBRATE, TEST nnn [where nn is
the test counter 100 to 0 e.g, TEST 45], ATTITUDE, GROUND ALIGN nnn [where nn is the alignment
counter 100 to 0 e.g., GROUND ALIGN 75], STORE HEADING, NAVIGATION, FLIGHT ALIGN.
• For LTN 92: Displays current IRS mode status. Possible status indications are:
• ALIGN 90,80,70,50,20,10 or 2(alignment code available only for onside INS (If configured))
• ALIGN(for offside IRSs)
• NAV
• ATT
• For LTN_101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V: Displays current IRS mode status. Possible status indications are:
• ALIGN
• NAV
• ATT
• TEST

HDG/DA (3L):
• For EGI: When EGI is configured, display hybrid heading and drift angle. Heading display follows current
Magnetic or True selection.
• For LTN_92, LTN_101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V:Displays IRS True or Mag heading (label 314 or 320) and
drift angle (321) when LTN92, LTN_101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V is configured. For FIX configuration and if
the drift angle >= 100 (degrees), the value is set to 99 (degrees).

PITCH/ROLL (4L):
• For EGI: Displays hybrid pitch and roll angles when EGI is configured.
• For LTN_92, LTN_101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V: Displays IRS pitch and roll angles when LTN92, LTN_101,
ADIRU or LASEREF_V is configured.

VERT SPD (5L): Displays INS Vertical Velocity (feet per minute).

NAV STATUS [6L]: Returns to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-88
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

POSITION (1R):
• For EGI: Displays inertial position.
• For LTN92: Displays pure inertial position.
• For LTN_101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V: Displays pure inertial position.

ACCURACY (2R): For EGI: Displays INS quality factor (in nm).

PGM NUMBER(2R): For LTN92: If configured, Displays IRS software program number.

NOTE: Only displayed on the onside IRS STATUS page.

TK/GS (3R): Displays Inertial track True or Mag angle (degrees) and ground speed (knots).

ALT (4R):
• For EGI: Displays hybrid baro inertial altitude (Ft) when EGI is configured.
• For LTN_92, LTN_101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V: Displays baro inertial altitude (Ft).

NAV TIME (5R): For EGI: This label is displayed only when the INS/GPS is in NAV mode. Displays the amount
of time the INS has been in NAV mode.

START/END TEST [5R]: For LTN_101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V: Initiates the ADIRS Remote Test. Once the
test is initiated, the START TEST prompt is replaced by END TEST to allow the termination of the test in
progress.

MALFUNCT [5R]: When LTN92 is configured, access to the IRS MALF MESSAGE X/X page. Appears only
when an INS fault is present.

UPDATE POS [6R]: For EGI: Access to the UPDATE POS 1/1 page. This label is displayed only when the INS-
GPS is in NAV mode.

STOP ALIGN [6R]: For EGI: This label is displayed only when the INS-GPS is in ALIGN mode and is
interruptible (alignment counter is between 100 and 50). The selection of this softkey when active will send a
command to the INS-GPS to stop alignment.

CMD NAV [6R]: For EGI: This label is displayed only when the INS-GPS is not in NAV mode. The selection of
this softkey will send a command to the INS-GPS to command NAV mode when confirmed.

NOTE: INS-GPS will transition to degraded NAV mode if this selection is made when alignment counter is
between 50 and 00.

ACCURACY [6R]: For LTN92, LTN_101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V: Access to the corresponding IRSx
ACCURACY x/3 page. Appears only when IRSx is in NAV mode.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-89
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INS/DVS STATUS 1/2 (SAGEM EGI configuration only)

Display the INS/DVS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <INS/DVS>.

This page displays the outputs of the INS/DVS navigator as well as some INS/DVS inputs from the EGI. Control
over the hybridization mode is also provided. All status and data fields will show “*” symbols when the EGI is
declared fail and blanks when data is not available.
INS/DVS STATUS 1/2
POSITION
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1L 1R
MODE HOR ACCURACY
2L HYB DVS SEL 0.50N M
2R
TK/GS
o
3L 045 /228K T 3R

4L 4R
HYBRIDIZATION
5L >ON 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

MODE (2L): Displays the current mode of the Hybrid INS/DVS solution. Possible mode indications are:

INIT: Hybrid INS/GPS not in Navigation mode; solution is not available.

FAIL: EGI failure; Hybrid INS/DVS solution is not available.
HYB DVS SEL: Hybrid INS/DVS solution is available but no DVS velocities being incorporated in the INS-
DVS filter because the DVS is unavailable.
HYB DVS ON: Hybrid INS/DVS solution is available and being actively updated by INS-DVS filter.
HYB DVS OFF: Hybrid INS/DVS solution is available but DVS blending turned off.

TK/GS (3L): Track Angle and Ground Speed.

HYBRIDIZATION [5L]: Displays the INS/DVS hybridization mode. The selection of this softkey commands the
EGI to toggle the INS/DVS hybridization mode between ON and OFF.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Access to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

POSITION (1R): Displays Hybrid INS/DVS position. The format displayed will vary with the coordinates
format selection on the SETUP page.

HOR ACCURACY (2R): Displays Hybrid INS/DVS horizontal accuracy (95% quality factor).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-90
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INS/DVS STATUS 2/2 (SAGEM EGI configuration only)

Display the INS/DVS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <INS/DVS> and [NEXT].

INS/DVS STATUS 2/2

1L 1R
HDG/DA
2L 060.0o/L15o
2R
PITCH/ROLL
3L D015.0o/R10.5o
3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

HDG/DA (2L): Displays heading and drift angle. Heading display follows current Magnetic or True selection.

PITCH/ROLL (2L): Displays the INS pitch and roll angles.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Access to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

INS/GPS STATUS 1/2 (if EGI interface is configured)

Display the INS/GPS STATUS 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <INS/GPS>.

This page displays the outputs of the INS/GPS navigator as well as some INS/GPS inputs from the EGI. Control
over the hybridization mode is also provided. All status and data fields will show “*” symbols when the EGI is
declared failed and blanks when data is not available.
INS/GPS STATUS 1/2
POSITION
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1L 1R
MODE HOR ACCURACY
2L HYB GPS SEL 0.50N M
2R
TK/GS INS/GPS ALT
o
3L 045 /228K T 5000F T 3R

4L 4R
HYBRIDIZATION
5L >ON 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

MODE (2L): Displays the status of the Hybrid INS/GPS solution. Possible status indications are:

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-91
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INIT: EGI not in Navigation mode, Hybrid solution is not available.

FAIL: EGI failure of GPS, INS or device, Hybrid solution is not available.
HYB GPS SEL: Hybrid solution is available but no GPS updates being incorporated in the INS-GPS
Kalman filter because GPS unavailable for the last 8 seconds.
HYB GPS ON: Hybrid solution is available and being actively updated by INS-GPS Kalman filter.
HYB GPS OFF: Hybrid solution is available but GPS blending is turned off.

TK/GS (3L): Displays hybrid Ground Track Angle (degrees) and Ground Speed (knots).

HYBRIDIZATION [5L]: Displays the EGI hybridization mode. The selection of this softkey commands the EGI
to toggle the EGI hybridization mode between ON and OFF.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Returns to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

POSITION (1R): Displays hybrid position.

HOR ACCURACY (2R): Displays hybrid horizontal accuracy (95% quality factor) (in nm).

INS/GPS ALT (3R): Displays INS/GPS/Baro altitude (MSL).

INS/GPS STATUS 2/2 (if EGI interface is configured)

Display the INS/GPS STATUS 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, <INS/GPS> and [NEXT].

INS/GPS STATUS 2/2

1L 1R
HDG/DA
2L 060.0o/ L15o
2R
PITCH/ROLL
3L D015.0o/R10.5o 3R

4L 4R
AAIM HIL WIND
5L 0.34N M 120T/15K T 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

HDG/DA (2L): Displays heading and drift angle. Heading display follows current Magnetic or True selection.

PITCH/ROLL (3L): Displays the INS pitch (Up/Down) and roll (Left/Right) angles.

AAIM HIL (5L): Displays Hybrid INS/GPS Horizontal Integrity Limit from the Aircraft Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (AAIM) function (if SAGEM EGI configured).

NAV STATUS [6L]: Access to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

WIND (5R): Displays wind direction and wind speed (if SAGEM EGI configured).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-92
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

IRSx ACCURACY X/X (X: 1, 2 or 3; if IRSx is in NAV mode)

For LTN-92, LTN_101, ADIRU and LASEREF_V

Display IRSx ACCURACY X/X page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <IRS>, <ACCURACY>.
There are three identical pages, one for each INS. The first page accessed refers to the INS previously
displayed on the IRSx STATUS X/3 page. Pressing PREV or NEXT key will display other IRSx ACCURACY X/3
pages.

IRS2 ACCURACY 2/3

FMS POS GPS
1L N47o32.44 E122o18.52
1R
ENTER REF POS
2L N47o32.44 E122o18.52
2R

3L 3R
IRS POS ERR NAV TIME
4L 2.5N M 02H16.4 4R
RESID GS IRS DRIFT
5L 5.2K T 1.1N M / H R 5R

6L <NAV STATUS IRS2 STATUS> 6R

FMS POS (1L or 1R): Displays current FMS position.

ENTER REF POS [2L or 2R]: Valid latitude and longitude entry will enable accuracy test to be performed and
results displayed on following lines. Default value is FMS position, as displayed in LSK 1R.

IRS POS ERR (4L): Displays inertial position error once a valid reference position is entered in LSK 2L or LSK
2R, and IRS in NAV mode.

RESID GS (5L): Displays residual ground speed once a valid reference position is entered in LSK 2L or LSK
2R, and INS in NAV mode.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Returns to the NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

NAV TIME (4R): Displays elapsed time in hours and minutes (tenths) since IRS entered NAV mode (Time-in-
Nav).
• For LTN92: This parameter is computed by the FMU displaying the page.
• For Honeywell ADIRU and Laseref V: This parameter is decoded from label 126.
• For LTN101: This parameter is decoded from label 160.

IRS DRIFT (5R): Displays inertial drift rate (only when IRS Time in NAV > 10 minutes) once a valid reference
position is entered in LSK 2R, and IRS in NAV mode.

IRSx STATUS [6R]: Returns to the corresponding IRSx STATUS X/3 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-93
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

IRSx MALF MESSAGE X/X (X: 1, 2 or 3; If an IRS fault is present)

For LTN-92.
Display IRSx MALF MESSAGE X/X page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <IRS>, <MALFUNCT>.

From IRSx STATUS X/X page, <MALFUNCT>

This page displays hexadecimal strings corresponding to contents of IRS maintenance words. Only the
maintenance words having at least one fault bit set will have their hexadecimals content displayed.

Each malfunction bit of these words is correlated to an action message (scratchpad) to the operator or
maintenance personnel.
There are three identical pages, one for each INS. The first page accessed refers to the INS previously
displayed on the IRSx STATUS X/3 page. Pressing PREV or NEXT key will display other IRSx MAINT
MESSAGE X/3 pages.

IRS2 MALF MESSAGE 2/3

1L MAINT WORD #1 00080096

1R
MAINT WORD #2 00100056
2L MAINT WORD #3 000040D6
2R
MAINT WORD #4 02000036
3L MAINT WORD #5 000100B6
3R
MAINT WORD #6 00000476
4L MAINT WORD #7 002000F6 4R
MAINT WORD #8 0001000E
5L MAINT WORD #9 0000108E 5R

6L <NAV STATUS IRS2 STATUS> 6R

Maintenance word contents are displayed in white. Asterisks indicate that the maintenance word is not received
by the FMU; blanks indicate that the maintenance word is received, but with no valid data.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Returns to the NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

IRSx STATUS [6R]: Returns to the corresponding IRSx STATUS X/3 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-94
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

KALMAN STATUS 1/1 (if APIRS interface is configured)

Display KALMAN STATUS 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <KALMAN>.

A. When LAT/LONG is selected:

KALMAN STATUS 1/1

OP MODE
INI
1L 1R
KALMAN POSITION
o o
2L *** **.** **** **.** 2R
GPS POSITION
3L N45o00.00 W072o00.00
3R
2 SIGMA POSERR
4L 230M 4R
GPS READY APIRS READY
5L YES NO 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

B. When UTM is selected:

KALMAN STATUS 1/1

OP MODE
INI
1L 1R
KALMAN POSITION
2L *** ** **** **** 2R
GPS POSITION
3L 10T ET 5200 5529 3R
2 SIGMA POSERR
4L 230M 4R
GPS READY APIRS READY
5L YES NO 5R

6L <NAV STATUS 6R

OP MODE (1L): Displays operational mode status (INITIALIZE, NAV, STAND ALONE or DR).

KALMAN POSITION (2L): Displays Kalman position.

GPS POSITION (3L): Displays GPS position.

2 SIGMA POSERR (4L): Displays 2 sigma error.

GPS READY (5L): Displays GPS functionality: YES means ready, NO means not ready.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Returns to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

APIRS READY (5R): Displays APIRS functionality: YES means ready, NO means not ready.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-95
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MAINT MESSAGES 1/X

This page displays all CMA-9000 FMS hardware related messages and all maintenance advisory messages
which require maintenance action. It is displayed only if any message related to internal failure are detected,
otherwise MAINT MSG prompt will not be displayed on the MESSAGE RECALL page and this page will not be
available.

Display MAINT MESSAGE 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <MSG RECALL> and <MAINT MSG>.

FMS1 MAINT MESSAGES 1/1

1L
OP CHECKSUM FAILED 1R
H/W RTC FAILED
2L BOOT CHECKSUM FAILED 2R
*TACAN FAILED 1
3L VUHF2 FAILED 1 3R
FMS1 X-TALK FAILED 1
4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <MSG RECALL 6R

Maintenance messages are displayed in amber. Maintenance Advisory messages are displayed in white with
the latest identified by a leading asterisk *. The digit to the extreme right of each maintenance advisory message
indicates which FMU is reporting the message. No digit means that all FMUs are reporting the same message.

MSG RECALL [6L]: Access to the MESSAGE RECALL 1/X page. This prompt is displayed in amber when new
alert messages are displayed.

NOTE: Message(s) will re-appear at power up only if fault is still present.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-96
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MCDU MENU X/X {if there is at least one external sub-system configured}

The MCDU MENU page displays all configured external sub-systems and the internal FMS.

Display MCDU MENU X/X page by pressing [MENU].

MCDU MENU 1/1

1L <FMS1 <REQUESTING> 1R

2L <FMS2 <ACTIVE> 2R

3L 3R

4L <ACARS <TIMED-OUT> 4R

5L 5R

6L COMM> 6R

SUB-SYSTEM [1L to 5L]: Displays the installed external sub-systems, the internal FMS and their status. The
sub-system identifier is displayed in large white font, and the status is displayed between '<>' in large cyan font
(or amber for the TIMED-OUT status) starting at column 9. The status displayed can either be
<REQUESTING>, <ACTIVE> or <TIMED-OUT>.

When Tandem mode is configured and active, the <ACTIVE> or BLANK status is replaced with <TANDEM> on
the ESS1 only. <TANDEM> is displayed in white font.

The CMA-9000 FMS will initiate a communication process with the corresponding selected sub-system when
the key is pressed.

COMM [6R]: The COMM prompt leads to the COMM STATUS 1/1 page. The prompt is displayed on the last
MCDU MENU page.

MESSAGE RECALL 1/X

Only system alert messages are displayed on this page. All messages are displayed in amber, with the latest
identified by a leading asterisk *.

The digit to the extreme right of each message indicates which FMU is reporting the message. No digit means that
all FMUs are reporting the same message or that the FMS is operating in independent mode.

System alert messages will cause both the CMA-9000 FMS MSG annunciator and the remote CMA-9000 FMS
MSG annunciator to illuminate until all new alert messages have been cleared/acknowledged by the pilot. Once
all alert messages have been viewed either via the scratchpad or by going to the MESSAGE RECALL page, the
CMA-9000 FMS MSG annunciator and the remote CMA-9000 FMS MSG annunciator will turn off.

NOTE: All current alert messages may be acknowledged simultaneously by display on the MESSAGE RECALL
1/X page.

These messages are removed automatically when the conditions which caused them have been corrected.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-97
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Display MESSAGE RECALL 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], and <MSG RECALL>. Or [INIT REF] key is held
down for more than 1 second.
MESSAGE RECALL 1/1
FMS
1L *VUHF1 CONTROL LOST 1 1R
*TACAN NAV LOST 1
2L *MC FAILED 1 2R
VUHF2 CONTROL LOST 1
3L INDEPENDENT OP 1 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L MAINT MSG> 6R

FMS (1R): This fixed caption text will appear for a multiple FMS installation.

This text highlights which FMS is reporting the specific message(s) generated on this page (as indicated by the
'1', and/or '2', and/or '3' displayed next to the specific message).

MAINT MSG [6R]: Access to MAINT MESSAGES 1/X page. Prompt appears only if there are maintenance
alert or maintenance advisory messages.

MISSION 1/1 (if ATOS or/and RADAR is configured)

Display the MISSION 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <MISSION> {if the PREDEF PG is not configured or
configured with the MARK key also configured} and {the ATOS and/or the FIAR 1500B RADAR is/are
configured}.

MISSION 1/1
RADAR TARGET 1315:10z
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1L 1R
ATOS TARGET 1319:20z
2L N43o56.78 W095o17.66
2R
ATOS TRANSFER STATUS
3L REQUESTED START> 3R

4L 4R

5L <RADAR ID X-REF 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

RADAR TARGET [1L,1R]: Displays Radar Target position. Selection of 1L or 1R line key will place the Radar
Target position in the scratchpad. A time stamp is displayed above this line, showing the last time a Radar
Target position has been received. If the Radar Target position time is the most recent (compared to the ATOS
Target position when configured and available), then its time is displayed in reverse white video. When the UTC
time is selected (SETUP 1/1 page), a "z" is located after the time to indicate that time is Zulu (UTC). If the time
selected is LOCAL, the "z" is not displayed. This field and title is only displayed when the FIAR1500B RADAR is
configured.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-98
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ATOS TARGET [2L,2R]: Displays ATOS Target position. Selection of 2L or 2R line key will place the ATOS
Target position in the scratchpad. A time stamp is displayed above this line, showing the last time an ATOS Target
position has been received. If the ATOS Target position time is the most recent (compared to the Radar Target
position), then its time is displayed in reverse video white. When the UTC time is selected (via SETUP 1/1 page),
a "z" is located after the time to indicate that time is Zulu (UTC). If the time selected is LOCAL, the "z" is not
displayed. This field and title is only displayed when the ATOS is configured.

ATOS TRANSFER STATUS (3L): This field displays the ATOS flight plan transfer status when the ATOS
equipment is configured, otherwise this field is blank. The status could be one of the following:
1 - IDLE: Default status when no transfer request has been initiated by the ATOS; or
2 - REQUESTED: When the ATOS equipment informs the FMS that it is ready for flight plan transfer; or
3 - IN PROGRESS: When the START prompt has been pressed and the flight plan transfer is in progress; or
4 - COMPLETED: When a flight plan transfer from the ATOS has been completed successfully; or
5- FAILED: When the flight plan transfer has failed.

RADAR ID X-REF [5L]: Access to the RADAR ID X-REF 1/1 page if FIAR 1500B Radar is configured,
otherwise, this prompt is not displayed.

NEW USER WPT [6L]: Access to the USER WPT 1/2 page and transfers the Radar target or the ATOS target
position (the most recent one is selected) into the position field of that page. When the ATOS target is selected,
the REF WPT ID on the user waypoint page is set to "ATOS" and the reference position is set to the ATOS target
position. If the Radar target is selected, the REF WPT ID on the user waypoint page is set to "RADAR" and the
reference position is set to the RADAR target position. When no target (RADAR or ATOS) are displayed on the
page, this prompt is blanked.

START [3R]: This prompt is displayed when the ATOS equipment requests a flight plan transfer to the FMS.
When this prompt is pressed, the flight plan transfer is initiated from the ATOS and the prompt disappears until a
new ATOS transfer request is received from the ATOS. This prompt is only available if the ATOS equipment is
configured. When this prompt is pressed while a route (active or inactive) modification is in progress, the transfer
is prevented and the message !MOD IN PROGRESS is displayed in the scratchpad.

DES+SAR [6R] or TACTICAL [6R]: When TACT key is configured, the DES+SAR prompt is replaced by
TACTICAL. In this case, the prompt gives access to the TACTICAL page instead of the DES+SAR page. Access
to the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page. When there is no data in the scratchpad, selection of this key will
create a temporary waypoint with the Radar Target or the ATOS Target position (the most recent one received is
selected) and the temporary waypoint ID is entered in the REF ID field of the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y)
page. When there is a valid position in the scratchpad, selection of this key will create a temporary waypoint and
enter temporary waypoint identifier in the REF ID field of the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page.
When the inactive route is in modification, instead of accessing the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page, this
prompt gives acess to the INACT DES+SAR 1/X 1/Y (or INACT TACTICAL 1/Y) page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-99
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1

Display the NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF] and <NAV STATUS>.

This page provides an access to the various Navigation Status pages. Only pages for which the equipment is
configured are displayed.

NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1

1L
GPS> 1R

2L <GLONASS DME> 2R

3L <DVS VOR/DME/TCN> 3R

4L <INS/GPS 4R

5L <INS/DVS 5R

6L <INIT/REF DESELECT> 6R

NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1

1L
GPS> 1R

2L <GLONASS DME> 2R

3L <DVS VOR/DME/TCN> 3R

4L <INS/GPS INS> 4R

5L <INS/DVS 5R

6L <INIT/REF DESELECT> 6R

NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1

1L GPS> 1R

2L <GLONASS DME> 2R

3L <DVS VOR/DME/TCN> 3R

4L IRS> 4R

5L 5R

6L <INIT/REF DESELECT> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-100
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PREDICT RAIM [1L]: Not shown. Access to GPS PREDICT RAIM 1/1 page.

GPS [1R]: Access to GPS STATUS 1/2 page or the GPS NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page when dual
GPS(Civil/Military) configured.

GLONASS [2L]: Access to GLONASS STATUS 1/2 page.

DME[2R]: Access to DME STATUS 1/1 page.

DVS[3L]: Access to DVS STATUS 1/2 page.

VOR/DME/TCN [3R]: Access to VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1 page. Disappears or changes to VOR/DME or
TACAN depending on the configured equipment.

INS/GPS[4L]: Access to INS/GPS STATUS 1/2 page.

INS[4R]: For EGI: Access to INS STATUS 1/1 page.

IRS[4R]: For LTN 92, LTN 101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V: Access to the IRS STATUS Onside/x page.

KALMAN [4R]: Not shown. Access to KALMAN 1/1 page.

INS/DVS [5L]: Access to INS/DVS STATUS 1/2 page.

X-FMS [5R]: Not shown. Access to X-FMS POS DIF 1/1 page.

INIT/REF [6L]: Access to the INIT/REF INDEX 1/2 menu page.

DESELECT [6R]: Access to DESELECT 1/1 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-101
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NEAREST 1/1

Display a selectable, categorized list of navigation types to which the function NEAREST is to be applied by
pressing [INIT REF], <NEAREST> or [INIT/ REF], <BULLS EYE>, [PREV], <NEAREST> {if Tactical Config
BULLS EYE is configured}. By selecting the navigation data type, an ordered list based on proximity will appear.

NEAREST 1/1

1L <AIRPORT USER WPTS> 1R

2L <VHF NAV CUSTOM WPTS> 2R

3L <NDB 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

AIRPORT [1L]: Access to the NEAREST AIRPORT page.

VHF NAV [2L]: Access to the NEAREST VHF NAV page.

NDB [3L]: Access to the NEAREST NDB page.

USER WPTS [1R]: Access to the NEAREST USER WPTS 1/X page.

CUSTOM WPTS [2R]: Access to the NEAREST CUSTOM WPTS 1/X page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-102
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NEAREST AIRPORT 1/X

Display the NEAREST AIRPORT 1/X page by pressing [INIT REF], <NEAREST> and <AIRPORT>.

This page displays an ordered list by distance of the closest 50 airports that are within a radius of 640 nm with
respect to the center reference identifier. The bearing and distance from the center reference waypoint are
displayed under each waypoint identifier. A maximum of 4 waypoints is displayed per page. The first 24 characters
of the airport name are displayed next to each waypoint identifier. The first time this nearest page is accessed after
a cold start, the center reference waypoint is set to the present position (PPOS). When the reference waypoint is
set to PPOS, the bearing/distance of each waypoint is refreshed every 10 seconds. The first airport on the page is
displayed in reverse video. The selection changes by pressing any active LSK (corresponding to a nearest airport).

NEAREST AIRPORT 1/13

ID/BRG/DIS/NAME
1L CFYF125o/ 0.4N M
1R
FORT YOUTH
2L KPT0 205o/ 9.4N M
2R
POINTS ZERODE INTERNATIO
3L CYUL 125o/19.4N M
3R
DORVAL INTERNATIONAL
4L KBBF 165o/53.4N M 4R
BOX BAY
5L <DIRECT-TO R E F I D P P O S 5R

6L <NEAREST DES+SAR> 6R
CFYF

WPT IDENT [1L-4L]: Select the respective airport and display it in reverse video. The waypoint identifier
corresponding to the selected key is copied into the scratchpad if it is available. Each new selection of an LSK
updates the scratchpad with the corresponding waypoint identifier.

DIRECT-TO [5L]: Transfer the highlighted waypoint to the first waypoint on the LEGS page and display the
LEGS page.

NEAREST [6L]: Return to the NEAREST 1/1 page.

REF ID [5R]: The center reference identifier can be selected from any of the following database: the navigation
database, the custom database, the user database, the temporary waypoints list, the active route or the inactive
route.
Whenever the REF ID center is modified, the list is recalculated and re-ordered by proximity using the new
entered center reference waypoint In the case of multiple waypoints with the same identifier, the SELECT WPT
page is displayed for selection.
After cold start or when [CLR] key is pressed in this field PPOS is set as the center reference waypoint.

DES+SAR [6R] or TACTICAL [6R]: When TACT key is configured, the DES+SAR prompt is replaced by
TACTICAL. In this case, the prompt gives access to the TACTICAL page instead of the DES+SAR page.
Access to DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page. If there is a valid position in the scratchpad, it will
automatically be converted to a temporary waypoint and placed in the REF ID field on the DES+SAR 1/Y page
(or TACTICAL 1/Y). If there is a valid identifier in the scratchpad, it will automatically be placed in the REF ID
field on the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-103
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NEAREST VHF NAV 1/X (also applicable for NEAREST NDB, CUSTOM WPT, and USER WPT)

Display the NEAREST VHF 1/X page by pressing [INIT REF], <NEAREST> and <VHF NAV>.
{also applicable for NEAREST NDB, CUSTOM WPT AND USER WPT}.

This page provide an ordered list of the closest 50 VHF Navigation Aids defined as follows: within a 640 nm radius
around the aircraft present position, the 50 waypoints closest to the center reference waypoint are displayed. The
bearing and distance from the center reference waypoint are displayed under each waypoint identifier. The
bearings and distances are refreshed every 10 seconds in the NEAREST USER WPT page, and in the other
nearest pages they are refreshed every 10 seconds when the center reference waypoint is the present position or
a user waypoint. A maximum of 8 waypoints are displayed per page. When accessing the page, the first VHF NAV
on the page 1/X (or subsequent pages) is displayed in reverse video. The selection change by pressing any active
LSK (corresponding to a nearest VHF NAV).

NEAREST VHF NAV 1/5

ID/BRG/DIS ID/BRG/DIS
1L MRS ML
1R
036o/0.09N M 306o/0.73N M
2L MBO MTG
2R
127o/5.99N M 242o/6.38N M
3L AN AVN
3R
335o/31.2N M 329o/39.2N M
4L LUC DGN 4R
094o/45.5N M 049o/50.8N M
5L <DIRECT-TO REF ID PPOS 5R

6L <NEAREST DES+SAR> 6R

WPT LIST [1L-4L], [1R-4R]: Selection of the LSK select the respective VHF NAV and display it in reverse
video. The waypoint identifier corresponding to the selected key is copied into the scratchpad if it is available. Each
new selection of an LSK updates the scratchpad with the corresponding waypoint identifier. For the NEAREST
USER WPT page, when a user waypoint is deleted by cross-talk, no sorting is done and the user waypoint is
blanked. When a user waypoint is created by cross-talk, no sorting is triggered for the nearest USER WPT list.

DIRECT-TO [5L]: Transfer the highlighted waypoint to the first waypoint on the LEGS page and display the
LEGS page.

NEAREST [6L]: Selection of this LSK return to the NEAREST 1/1 page.

REF ID [5R]: Entry of any waypoint identifier from the navigation database, the custom database, the user
database, the temporary waypoints list, the active route or the inactive route.
Whenever the REF ID center is modified, the list is recalculated and re-ordered by proximity using the new
entered center reference waypoint In the case of multiple waypoints with the same identifier, the SELECT WPT
page is displayed for selection.
After cold start or when [CLR] key is entered in this field PPOS is set as the center reference waypoint.

DES+SAR [6R] or TACTICAL [6R]: When TACT key is configured, the DES+SAR prompt is replaced by
TACTICAL. In this case, the prompt gives access to the TACTICAL page instead of the DES+SAR page.
Access to DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page. If there is a valid position in the scratchpad, it will
automatically be converted to a temporary waypoint and placed in the REF ID field on the DES+SAR 1/Y (or
TACTICAL 1/Y) page. If there is a valid identifier in the scratchpad, it will automatically be placed in the REF ID
field on the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-104
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PARALLAX ADJUST 1/1

This page provides vertical and horizontal display adjustment. The operator can move up, down, left and/or
right of the display to adjust for parallax errors.

PARALLAX ADJUST 1/1 page is accessed by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT], <DISPLAY> and <PARALLAX>.

PARALLAX ADJUST 1/1

1L
- - 1R

2L - MOVE UP> 2R

3L <LEFT --MOVE-- RIGHT> 3R

4L - MOVE DOWN> 4R

5L - - 5R

6L <DISPLAY - 6R

LEFT [3L]: Moves the display 1 column left.

DISPLAY [6L]: Provides access to DISPLAY 1/1 page.

MOVE UP [2R]: Moves the display 1 line up.

RIGHT [3R]: Moves the display 1 column right.

MOVE DOWN [4R]: Moves the display 1 line down.

PLAN DATA 1/1 (if configured)

Display PLAN DATA 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT] and <PLAN DATA>.

PLAN DATA 1/1

TRANS ALT CRZ WIND
1L
18000F T 300T / 90K T 1R
TRANS LVL CRZ TAS
2L F L 180 360K T 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <INIT/REF 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-105
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TRANS ALT [1L]: When a modification is made to the origin airport or associated departure procedure, this
field will be updated to show the navigation database extracted value, if one exists, otherwise the FMS default
value will be displayed.

The valid enterable range for this field is 0 to 450 or 1000 to 45000.

NOTE: if a value between 0 and 450, inclusive, is entered, it will be converted and shown as a transition
altitude in feet.

Entering DELETE on this field, when a manually entered value had previously been entered, will restore this
field to the navigation database extracted value or to the FMS default. Deletion of the default value or navigation
database values is inhibited.

Crew entries will not be erased by a new value extracted from the navigation database as a result of the latest
flight plan modifications. However, if this new extracted value is different from the crew entered value, the FMS
will generate the TRANS ALT/LVL MISMATCH message.

The FMS will also generate the CHECK TRANS/ALT LVL status advisory message if there is no value in the
navigation database for the selected origin and/or associated departure procedure(s) and no manual crew entry
exists to the TRANS ALT field at the moment the flight plan is executed.

NOTE: The TRANS ALT value defines the altitude at which the crew should change from local pressure
altimeter setting to standard pressure altimeter setting. The TRANS ALT value is used in triggering the
SET QNH message.

TRANS LVL [2L]: When a modification is made to the destination airport or associated arrival procedure, this
field will be update to show the navigation database extracted value, if one exists, otherwise the FMS default
value (as configured) will be displayed.

The valid enterable range for this field is 0 to 450 or 1000 to 45000.

NOTE: If a value between 1000 and 45000, inclusive, is entered, it will be converted and shown as a transition
level in Flight Level units.

Entering DELETE on this field, when a manually entered value had previously been entered, will restore this
field to the navigation database extracted value or to the FMS default. Deletion of the default value or navigation
database values is prohibited.

Crew entries will not be erased by a new value extracted from the navigation database as a result of the latest
flight plan modifications. However, if this new extracted value is different from the crew entered value, the FMS
will generate the TRANS ALT/LVL MISMATCH message.

The FMS will also generate the CHECK TRANS/ALT LVL status advisory message if there is no value in the
navigation database for the selected destination and/or associated arrival/approach procedure(s) and no manual
crew entry exists to the TRANS LVL at the moment the flight plan is executed.

If tactical approach is configured, the CHECK TRANS/ALT LVL status advisory message is generated when
making the inactive route containing a tactical approach into the now active route.

Also, if tactical approach is configured, this field is identical and shared with the TRANS LVL field seen on the
TACTICAL APPR page.

NOTE: The TRANS LVL value defines the altitude at which the crew should change from standard pressure
altimeter setting to local pressure altimeter setting. The TRANS LVL value is used in triggering the SET
QNH message.

INIT/REF [6L]: Returns to INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-106
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CRZ WIND [1R]: Enter the wind at cruise altitude (direction-true/speed-knots). Used for flight planning.

NOTE: This is not the system computed wind (0° to 360°/0 Knots to 200 Knots).

CRZ TAS [2R]: TAS (knots) at cruise altitude. Used for flight planning. This is not the system TAS (0 to 999
Knots). Upon a change in configuration, the Cruise TAS values will be set in accordance with the aircraft type:
130 Knots (if configured ROTOR) or 480 Knots (if configured FIX).

POS INIT/REF 1/2 (if EGI is configured) OR POS INIT/REF 1/3 (if IRS is configured)

Display the POS INIT/REF 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF] and <POS INIT> or [INIT REF], <IDENT> and
<POS INIT>.

A. POS INIT/REF 1/2 page after EGI is powered on:

POS INIT/REF 1/2

FMS POS DR
1L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R
REF WAYPOINT
2L KBFI N 4 7 o3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o1 8 . 0 0 2R
INS MODE SET ALT
3L STANDBY -----F T 3R
ALIGN SET INS POS
o o
4L >GND . . 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z OCT20/04 5R

6L <SETUP START ALIGN> 6R

B. POS INIT/REF 1/2 page after position entered (EGI SIGMA50H only):

POS INIT/REF 1/2

FMS POS DR
1L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R
REF WAYPOINT
2L KBFI N 4 7 o3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o1 8 . 0 0 2R
INS MODE SET ALT
3L STANDBY -----F T 3R
ALIGN SET INS POS
o o
4L >GND . . 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z OCT20/04 5R

6L <SETUP STOP ALIGN> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-107
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. POS INIT/REF 1/2 page after START ALIGN selection:

POS INIT/REF 1/2

FMS POS DR
1L N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R
REF WAYPOINT
2L KBFI N 4 7 o3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o1 8 . 0 0 2R
INS MODE SET ALT
3L STANDBY 1234F T 3R
ALIGN SET INS POS
4L >SEA N47o26.28 W122o18.67 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z OCT20/04 5R

6L <CANCEL CONFIRM> 6R

D. POS INIT/REF 1/2 page in Interruptible Alignment mode:

POS INIT/REF 1/2

FMS POS DR
1L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R
REF WAYPOINT
2L KBFI N 4 7 o3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o1 8 . 0 0 2R
INS MODE SET ALT
3L GROUND ALGIN 078 1234F T 3R
ALIGN SET INS POS
o o
4L GND N47 26.28 W122 18.67 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z OCT20/04 5R

6L <SETUP STOP ALIGN> 6R

E. POS INIT/REF 1/2 page when Degraded NAV Mode is possible:

POS INIT/REF 1/2

FMS POS DR
1L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R
REF WAYPOINT
2L KBFI N 4 7 o3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o1 8 . 0 0 2R
INS MODE SET ALT
3L GROUND ALGIN 025 1234F T 3R
ALIGN SET INS POS
o o
4L GND N47 26.28 W122 18.67 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z OCT20/04 5R

6L <SETUP CMD NAV> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-108
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

F. POS INIT/REF 1/2 page in NAV mode:

POS INIT/REF 1/2

FMS POS GPS
1L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R

2L 2R
INS MODE NAV TIME
3L NAVIGATION 00H34.7
3R

4L 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z OCT20/04 5R

6L <SETUP UPDATE POS> 6R

If LTN-92, LTN_101, ADIRU and LASEREF_V are configured:

G. When inertial in NAV mode (SET IRS POS field is not displayed):

POS INIT/REF 1/3

FMS POS GPS
1L N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

UTC DATE
5L 5R
1757:04z DEC11/00
6L 6R
<SETUP

H. When inertial in Align mode (SET IRS POS field is displayed):

POS INIT/REF 1/3

FMS POS GPS
1L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R
REF AIRPORT
2L KBFI N 4 7 o 3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o 1 8 . 0 0 2R
GATE
3L BF1 N 4 7 o 3 2 . 3 0 W 1 2 2 o 1 8 . 7 0 3R
SET IRS POS
o o
4L . . 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z DEC11/00 5R

6L <SETUP 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-109
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

If LTN_101 or ADIRU is configured:

I. When inertial in Attitude mode (SET IRS HDG field is displayed):

POS INIT/REF 1/3

FMS POS GPS
1L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67 1R
REF AIRPORT
2L KBFI N 4 7 o 3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o 1 8 . 0 0 2R
GATE
3L BF1 N 4 7 o 3 2 . 3 0 W 1 2 2 o 1 8 . 7 0 3R
SET IRS HDG
4L 4R
UTC DATE
5L 1757:04z DEC11/00 5R

6L <SETUP 6R

FMS POS [1L or 1R]: FMS position on power up, this corresponds to the last computed position stored in the
CMA-9000 FMS. Manual entry is allowed (in DR modes only). The navigation mode is also displayed.

REF WAYPOINT [2L]: If ROTOR is configured. Reference waypoint; any waypoint accepted . Blank on liftoff.

REF AIRPORT [2L]: If FIX mode is configured. Reference airport; Valid entry is four character ICAO airport;
Blank on liftoff; Entry deletes previous gate number.

INS MODE (3L): If EGI is configured. Displays INS mode status. Possible Status are:

SAGEM SIGMA 50H LITTON LN-100GT

STANDBY STANDBY
CALIBRATE
INITIALIZATION
ATTITUDE
STORE HEADING
GROUND ALIGN nn1 GROUND ALIGN nn1
SEA ALIGN nn1
FLIGHT ALIGN nn1 FLIGHT ALIGN
NAVIGATION NAVIGATION
TEST tt2
FAIL FAIL
1
nn is the alignment counter 0 to 99
2
tt is the test counter 0 to 99

GATE [3L]: If FIX mode is configured. Gate entry possible only after valid airport entry in LSK 2L. Blanks at
liftoff or returns to dashes upon REF AIRPORT entry.

GATE coordinates (3R): If FIX mode is configured. Displays after valid entry in LSK 3L.

NAV TIME (3R): If EGI is configured. This label is displayed only when the INS is in NAV mode. Displays the
amount of time the INS was in NAV mode.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-110
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SET ALT [3R]: If EGI is configured. (SIGMA50H EGI configuration only) Set altitude (MSL) entry line to be
provided to the EGI. This input may optionally be set to a specific value prior to starting an alignment.

ALIGN [4L]: If EGI is configured. (SIGMA50H EGI configuration only) Alignment type: GND or SEA.

SET INS POS [4R]: If EGI is configured. Set INS position entry line. Boxes are displayed when INS in
STANDBY mode and no position is entered in the field or when EGI is in test mode and test is completed. Manual
entry is only allowed for as long as the INS is in STANDBY mode. Manual entry can be via keyboard or line
selecting CMA-9000 FMS POS or REF WAYPOINT coordinates (N/S 00° to 90°, E/W 000° to 180°). A DELETE
from the scratchpad clears the field if no alignment was performed.

SET IRS POS [4R]: If LTN92, LTN_101 or ADIRU is configured.

• If LTN-92 is configured: Inertial Sensor Initial Position entry field. In synchronized mode, boxes displayed
when any INS in align mode and requesting initial position. Automatic entry of FMS position upon acquisition
of GPS with integrity. Manual entry also allowed for as long as any INS is in align mode and GPS integrity
not available. Position entry is sent to all IRSs, provided that FMS cross-talk is available. Field (title and
data) is blanked when no INS is in ALIGN mode.
In independent mode, boxes displayed when onside IRS in ALIGN mode and requesting initial position.
Automatic entry of FMS position upon acquisition of GPS with integrity. Manual entry allowed as long as
onside INS is in align mode and GPS integrity not available. Position entry is sent only to the onside INS.
Field (title and data) is blanked when onside INS not in ALIGN mode.
• If LTN_101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V is configured: Inertial Sensor Initial Position entry field. Boxes displayed
when any IRS in align mode. Automatic entry of FMS position upon acquisition of GPS with integrity (GPS
HIL less or equal to 0.3 nm). Manual entry also allowed for as long as any IRS is in align mode and GPS
integrity not available (GPS HIL greater than 0.3 nm). Field (title and data) is blanked when no IRS is in
ALIGN mode.

NOTE: IRSx ENTER PPOS message appears in scratchpad when position rejected by IRS (3+3T test or
latitude check).

SET IRS HDG [4R]: If LTN_101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V is configured: IRS Magnetic Heading entry field. Boxes
displayed when any IRS in Attitude mode and requesting magnetic heading entry. Field (title and data) is
blanked when no IRS is in Attitude mode.

UTC/LOCAL [5L]: Display and entry of UTC or LOCAL time (hour, minute, second). On power up, the UTC is
updated by GPS UTC after GPS acquisition is completed. Manual entry is allowed if GPS time not available (0hr
00min 00sec to 23hr 59min 59sec).

DATE [5R]: Display an entry of the CMA-9000 FMS system date. Date format will depend on aircraft's installation.
American format: MMMDD/YY, European format: DDMMM/YY. Manual entry allowed if GPS date not available.

NOTE: Displays CMA-9000 FMS real time clock date when GPS date not available.

CANCEL [6L]: If EGI is configured. Cancels INS data initialization.

SETUP [6L]: Access to the SETUP 1/1 page.

START ALIGN [6R]: If EGI is configured. (SIGMA50H EGI configuration only) This label is displayed only
when the INS is in STANDBY mode. The selection of this softkey will lead to a CANCEL or CONFIRM request.

CONFIRM [6R]: If EGI is configured. After this softkey is pressed, the CMA-9000 FMS will transmit the
initialization data displayed on this page to the INS unit.

STOP ALIGN [6R]: If EGI is configured. This label is displayed only when the INS is in an alignment mode
and is interruptible. The alignment mode is not interruptible in FLIGHT ALIGN mode in the SAGEM SIGMA50H
configuration. The selection of this softkey will command the INS to stop alignment.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-111
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CMD NAV [6R]: If EGI is configured. This label is displayed only when the INS is in an alignment mode and a
degraded Navigation mode may be activated. The selection of this softkey will command the INS to enter NAV
mode.

UPDATE POS [6R]: If EGI or IRS is configured. Access to the UPDATE POS 1/1 page.

POS INIT/REF 2/2 (if EGI interface is configured) or 2/3 (if IRS interface is configured)

Display the POS INIT/REF 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], <POS INIT> and [NEXT] or [INIT REF], <IDENT>,
<POS INIT> and [NEXT].

The CMA-9000 FMS continuously monitors and displays the CMA-9000 FMS position, bearing and range of
each navigation mode position with respect to the CMA-9000 FMS position, and the accuracy of the navigation
sensor positions.
The accuracy shown is the sensor accuracy except for the INS (valid for an inertial sensor but not for the inertial
frame of an EGI). For the INS the value displayed is the accuracy of the inertial navigation mode (the accuracy
is the accuracy of the previous sensor at the time the INS was selected then the accuracy degrades with the
INS drift).
Accuracy and bearing share the same column and toggling between the two is done with LSK [2R]. Accuracy is
always displayed by default upon entering the page.

A. This display is shown when in LAT/LONG and ACCURACY selected and CMA-9000 FMS is airborne.

POS INIT/REF 2/2

FMS POS GPS
N47o32.42 E122o18.51
1L 1R

2L MODE STS DIS ACCUR<

2R
INS/GPS HSEL 0.00 0.10N M
3L GPS 3D 0.13 0.17N M 3R
DME/DME NAV 1.60 2.73N M
4L VORDMTC ACQ NM 4R
INS/DVS NAV 0.24 0.36N M
5L DVS NAV 0.47 0.86N M 5R

6L <SETUP ROUTE> 6R

B. This display is shown when in LAT/LONG and BEARING selected and CMA-9000 FMS is airborne.

POS/INIT REF 2/2

FMS POS GPS
N47o32.42 E122o18.51
1L 1R

2L MODE STS DIS BRG<

2R
INS/GPS HSEL 0.00 122o
3L GPS 3D 0.13 5o 3R
DME/DME NAV 1.60 112o
o
4L VORDMTC ACQ 4R
INS/DVS NAV 0.24 33o
5L DVS NAV 0.47 10o 5R

6L <SETUP ROUTE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-112
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

POS/INIT REF 2/2

FMS POS GPS
1L N47o32.42 E122o18.51
1R

2L MODE STS DIS BRG<

2R
o
3L GPS 3D 0.00 5
3R
DME/DME NAV 1.60 112o
o
4L VORDME ACQ 4R
IRS(xN) NAV 0.24 33o
5L DVS NAV 0.47 10o 5R

6L <SETUP ROUTE> 6R

Dual GPS (e.g. LN-100GT EGI and civil GPS is configured):

POS INIT/REF 2/2

FMS POS INS/GPS
1L N47°32.42 E122°18.51
1R

2L MODE STS DIS BRG<

2R
INS/GPS HSEL 0.00 000°
3L mGPS 3D 00.1 220°
3R
cGPS 3D 00.2 5°
4L DME/DME NAV 0.63 112° 4R
VOR/DME ACQ °
5L INS NAV 1.47 33° 5R
DVS NAV 0.84 10°
6L <SETUP ROUTE> 6R

FMS POS [1L]: Displays current CMA-9000 FMS system position and the navigation mode.

MODE [2L]: Displays the names for each of the navigation modes that are configured. The active
navigation mode will be highlighted.

NOTE: For LTN92, LTN_101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V: N corresponds to the number of the IRS used for the
triple mix solution.

STS (2L): Displays the current status of each navigation mode. The following are the possible values for each
navigation mode:

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-113
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INS/GPS GPS (cGPS/mGPS) (see note 2) INS (not shown - same line as
INS/DVS)
H ON Hybrid ON FAIL Fault mode A### Alignment mode
HSEL Hybrid 3D 3D navigation mode T### Test mode
Mode
selected
HOFF Hybrid 3D+T 3D+T (OPER) navigation mode ATT Attitude
OFF or
OPE
R
FAIL Fault 2D 2D navigation mode STBY Standby mode
mode
INIT Initialisatio 2D+T 2D+T navigation mode HDG Memorized heading
n mode mode
DSEL Deselecte ACQ Acquisition mode NAV Navigation mode
d
TEST Selftest mode IFA In Flight Alignment
mode
INID Almanac Search CAL Calibration mode
INIC Clock Warm-up DSEL Deselected
INIT Initialization mode
NAV Navigation mode
AID Direction/
speed aiding mode
SBAS Satellite Based Augmentation
System Navigation Mode.

INS/GPS GPS (see note 2) INS (not shown - same line as

INS/DVS)
ALT Altitude/
clock aiding mode
DIF Differential mode
DSEL Deselected

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-114
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DME/DME VOR/DMTC KALMAN (not shown– below

INS)
NAV Navigation mode NAV Navigation mode HON Hybrid ON
(Navigation mode)
ACQ Acquisition mode ACQ Acquisition mode INITIALIZE Initialization mode
CONV Converging mode CONV Converging mode HOFF Hybrid OFF (Stand-
Alone mode)
FAIL Fault mode FAIL Fault mode DSEL Deselected
DSEL Deselected DSEL Deselected DR DR mode

DVS INS/DVS
FAIL Fault mode H ON Hybrid ON
INIT Initialisation mode HSEL Hybrid Mode selected
DR Independent mode HOFF Hybrid OFF
NAV Navigation mode FAIL Fault mode
DSEL Deselected INIT Initialisation mode
DSEL Deselected

NOTE 1: ‘*’ are displayed when the status labels are not received from the sensor, and blanks are displayed
when the status labels have NCD SSMs.
NOTE 2: Some configured equipment may provide only a subset of these modes. Refer to the GPS 1/2
status page.

For LTN-92, LTN101 or ADIRU:

IRS
ALIGN ALIGN mode
NAV Navigation mode
ATT ATTITUDE mode
DSEL Deselected

DIS (2L): Display the distance in nautical miles between the CMA-9000 FMS position and each navigation mode
positions (only if sensor is in NAV).

ACCUR (2R): Displayed only if the LSK is toggled to display ACCUR. Display the estimated navigation
accuracy (95%) of each navigation mode.

BRG (2R): Displayed only if the LSK is toggled to display BRG. Bearing from the CMA-9000 FMS position to
each navigation mode position is displayed relative to True (superscript T indicates true North) or Magnetic
North (based on the setting on the SETUP page).

SETUP [6L]: Access to the SETUP 1/1 page.

ROUTE [6R]: When on the ground, access to the active RTE 1/X page.

NAV STATUS [6R]: When airborne, access to the NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-115
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

POS INIT/REF 3/3 (if LTN-92, LTN101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V interface is configured)

Display the POS INIT/REF 3/3 page by pressing [INIT REF], <POS INIT>, [NEXT] and [NEXT] or [INIT REF],
<IDENT>, <POS IINIT>, [NEXT] and [NEXT].

This page allows the crew to verify the individual IRS position and ground speed against the FMS system
position and ground speed. It also allows verifying the individual IRS status, action code, and update mode.

A. For LTN92:

POS INIT/REF 3/3

FMS POS GPS GSK T
1L N47o32.4 E122o18.50 250
1R

2L 2R
IRS1
3L N47o32.3 o
E122 18.66 249
3R
IRS2
4L N47o32.4 E122o18.55 250 4R
IRS3
5L N47o32.3 E122o18.77 251 5R

6L <SETUP 6R

B. For LTN101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V:

POS INIT/REF 3/3

FMS POS GPS GSK T
1L N47o32.4 E122o18.50 250
1R

2L 2R
IRS1 (14 MIN)
3L N47o32.3 E122o18.66 249
3R
IRS2 (ATT)
4L N47o32.4 E122o18.55 250 4R
IRS3 REJ
N47 32.3 E122o18.77
o
5L 251 5R

6L <SETUP 6R

FMSx POS (1L): Displays current FMS system position. Navigation mode displayed in white on field title line
(GPS, DME, VOR/DME, INERTIAL or DR).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-116
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

IRSx (3L, 4L, 5L): If LTN-92 is configured. Displays IRSx updated inertial position.
Data line displays:
• When position valid: position data;
• When position invalid: blanks;
• When position failed or not received: asterisks.
Title line displays:
• When IRS in ALIGN: time to alignment in minutes (counting down from 7 minutes);
• When IRS in ATTITUDE: ATT.
• When the FMS has automatically deselected this IRS in polar navigation: REJ.

IRSx (3L, 4L, 5L): If LTN101, ADIRU or LASEREF_V is configured. Displays IRSx inertial position.
Data line displays:
• When position is valid: position data;
• When position is invalid: blanks;
• When position is failed or not received: asterisks.
Title line displays: If ADIRU or LASEREF_V is configured. When IRS in ALIGN: time to alignment in minutes
(counting down from 14 minutes).

NOTE: For an alignment time greater than 14 minutes, the FMS will display the value of 15.if LTN101 is
configured:
• When IRS in ALIGN: time to alignment in minutes (counting down from 7 minutes).
• When IRS in ATTITUDE: ATT.
• When the FMS has automatically deselected this IRS in polar navigation: REJ.

SETUP [6L]: Returns to the SETUP 1/1 page.

GS (1R, 3R, 4R, 5R): Displays current FMS, IRS1, IRS2, and IRS3 ground speed. Displays blank field when not
in NAV.

PREDEF WPT 1/X (If configured)

Display the PREDEF WPT 1/X page by pressing [INIT REF], <WPT LISTS> and <PREDEF WPT> or [MARK]
and [NEXT] {if one of the configurable function keys is configured to MARK}.

NOTE: Page number X will be either 2 or 3 based on the elements configured. X=3 when FLIR is configured.

PREDEF WPT 1/2

FMS POS GPS
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1L 1R
JFK TO WAYPOINT
2L N45o34.25 W122o45.12
2R
CYUL SAR ORIGIN
3L N45o34.25 W122o45.12 3R
001M LAST DMAP POS
4L N45o34.25 W122o45.12 4R
BKA DMAP CENTER
5L N56o51.57 W135o33.08 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-117
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FMS POS [1L,1R]: Displays the CMA-9000 FMS system current position solution and its source. Selection of
1L or 1R line key will place the present position in the scratchpad.

TO WAYPOINT [2L]: Displays the identifier of the current TO waypoint. Selection of 2L line key will place the
identifier of the TO Waypoint in the scratchpad (provided the waypoint is not a conditional waypoint).

SAR ORIGIN [3L]: Displays the identifier of the search pattern origin waypoint, if one is defined in the active
route. Selection of 3L line key will place the identifier of the search pattern origin waypoint in the scratchpad {if
Search function is configured}.

LAST DMAP POS [4L]: Displays the identifier of the last waypoint received from the digital map. Selection of 4L
line key will place the identifier of the last DMAP waypoint in the scratchpad {if DMAP ELBIT, EURONAV or
EURONAV_A702 is configured}.

DMAP CENTER [5L]: Displays the identifier of the DMAP Center waypoint, if one was entered manually or will
default to the identifier of the last waypoint of the active route. Following a manual entry, the DMAP Center
waypoint identifier is displayed in large font. Dashes are displayed in the DMAP Center identifier field when no
manual entry was made and no active route exists or when a position was entered manually via selection of 5R
line key. Selection of 5L line key will place the identifier of the DMAP Center waypoint in the scratchpad if the
waypoint is not a conditional waypoint. This field (including title) is only displayed when DMAP ELBIT or
EURONAV_A702 is configured.

NEW USER WPT [6L]: Access to USER WPT 1/2 page.

TO WAYPOINT [2R]: Displays the position of the current TO waypoint. Selection of 2R line key will place the
position of the TO Waypoint in the scratchpad.

SAR ORIGIN [3R]: Displays the position of the search pattern origin. Selection of 3R line key will place the
position of the search pattern origin in the scratchpad {if Search function is configured}.

LAST DMAP POS [4R]: Displays the last position coordinate received from the digital map. Selection of 4R line
key will place the position of the last DMAP waypoint in the scratchpad {if DMAP ELBIT, EURONAV or
EURONAV_A702 is configured}.

DMAP CENTER [5R]: Displays the position of the DMAP Center waypoint , if one was entered manually or
defaults to the position of the last waypoint of the active route. Following a manual entry, the DMAP Center
waypoint position is displayed in large font and the identifier field is filled with dashes. Dashes are displayed in
the DMAP Center position field when no manual entry was made and no active route exists. Selection of 5L line
key will place the identifier of the DMAP Center waypoint in the scratchpad {if DMAP ELBIT or EURONAV_A702
is configured}.

DES+SAR [6R] or TACTICAL [6R]: When TACT key is configured, the DES+SAR prompt is replaced by
TACTICAL. In this case, the prompt gives access to the TACTICAL 1/Y page instead of the DES+SAR 1/Y
page. Access to DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page. If there is a valid position in the scratchpad, it will
automatically be converted to a temporary waypoint and placed in the REF ID field on the DES+SAR 1/Y (or
TACTICAL 1/Y) page. If there is a valid identifier in the scratchpad, it will automatically be placed in the REF ID
field on the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-118
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PREDEF WPT 2/X (If configured)

Display the PREDEF WPT 2/X page by pressing [INIT REF], <WPT LISTS>, <PREDEF WPT> and [NEXT] or
[MARK] {if CFG KEY 2 configured to MARK and UPDATE POS page not being displayed} or {if Joystick position
fix received {WXR or AHCAS EFIS is configured}.

NOTE: Page number X will be either 2 or 3 based on the elements configured. X=3 when FLIR is configured.

A. PLS AN_ARS6 configured:

PREDEF WPT 2/2

MARK ON TOP 1234:12z
N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1L 1R
LAST JOYSTICK 1148:57z
2L N44o12.34 W100o01.02
2R
LAST PLS 1315:10z
3L N43o56.78 W095o17.66 3R
PLS DATA 123.12N M /122o
4L >E N A B L E D 4R

5L <UPDATE POS MARK> 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

B. PlS CUBIC_V12 configured:

PREDEF WPT 2/2

MARK ON TOP 1234:12z
1L N45o34.25 W122o45.12
1R
LAST JOYSTICK 1148:57z
2L N44o12.34 W100o01.02
2R
LAST PLS(BURST)1315:10z
3L N43o56.78 W095o17.66
3R
PLS DATA 123.12NM/122o
4L >E N A B L E D SV001 4R

5L <UPDATE POS MARK> 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

MARK ON TOP POSITION [1L,1R]: Displays the Mark On Top position. Selection of 1L or 1R line key will
place the Mark On Top position in the scratchpad. A time stamp is displayed above the coordinates, showing
the last time a Mark On Top was executed. If the Mark On Top position time is the most recent (compared to
PLS and Last Joystick), then its time is displayed in reverse video white.

LAST JOYSTICK [2L,2R]: Displays the last joystick position received from the Weather Radar interface or the
AHCAS/AHCAS2 EFIS interface, along with the time of reception. If the Last Joystick position time is the most
recent (compared to PLS and Mark On Top), then its time is displayed in reverse video white.
Selection of 2L or 2R line select key will place the PLS position in the scratchpad.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-119
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

LAST PLS [3L,3R]:

• PLS AN/ARS6 configured:
Displays the last Personnel Locator System position received. Selection of 3L or 3R line select key will place
the PLS position in the scratchpad. A time stamp is displayed above this line, showing the last time a PLS
position has been received. If the PLS position time is the most recent (compared to Mark On Top and Last
Joystick), then its time is displayed in reverse video white.
• PLS CUBIC V12 configured:
Displays the last Personnel Locator System position. Selection of 3L or 3R line select key will place the PLS
position in the scratchpad. A time stamp is displayed above this line, showing the last time a PLS position
has been received. If the PLS position time is the most recent (compared to Mark On Top and Last
Joystick), then its time is displayed in reverse video white.
Depending on the PLS operating mode (received and decoded by the FMS) different parameters are
received by the FMS as follows:
• DATA and GPS (URX-3000) operating modes: Latitude and Longitude received from PLS, update/no
update received on the Status Matrix; Bearing and distance are computed by the FMS.
• BURST and CONT operating modes: Bearing and Range received from PLS, update/no update
received on each label; Latitude and Longitude are computed by the FMS.
The PLS operating mode is displayed on this line. Possible values are: (DATA), (URX), (BURST), or
(CONT).

When the PLS operating mode or position are:

• Normal and, the Central Clear is active (refer to CENTRAL CLEAR page above) or the heading is
failed, then the FMS will blank the PLS data.
• Invalid, then the FMS will display stars in the PLS data fields corresponding to the failed data and
blank the other fields.
In addition, the display of this field is "frozen" when one of the following set of data is received as no
computed data:
• Operating Mode, Surviving Number, Bearing or distance during the operating mode BURST or
CONTINUOUS.
• Operating Mode, Surviving Number or both Latitude and longitude during the operating mode GPS
(URX-3000) or DATA.

LAST PLS [4R]:

PLS AN/ARS6 configured:
• Displays the last received relative distance from the aircraft and bearing. The bearing is displayed relative to
True or Magnetic North based on the TRUE/MAG selection (a T superscript indicates True North). When the
PLS relative distance or the bearing are:
• Normal and, the Central Clear is active (refer to CENTRAL CLEAR page above) or the heading is failed,
then the FMS will blank the PLS data.
• Not computed, then the FMS will blank the PLS data.
• Invalid, then the FMS will display stars in the PLS data fields and blank the other fields.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-120
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PLS CUBIC V12 configured:

• Displays the Surviving number received from the PLS, SV001 to SV127. The surviving number is updated
based on the Status Matrix of the label received from the CUBIC V12 PLS.

NOTE: Selection of 4R line select key will not place the PLS Surviving Number in the scratchpad.

• Displays also the relative distance from the aircraft and the bearing. Bearing is displayed relative to True or
Magnetic North based on the TRUE/MAG selection (a T superscript indicates True North).
• When the PLS surviving number, relative distance or the bearing are:
• Normal and, the Central Clear is active (refer to CENTRAL CLEAR page above) or the heading is failed,
then the FMS will blank the PLS data.
• Invalid, then the FMS will display stars in the PLS data fields corresponding to the failed data and blank
the other fields.
• In addition, the display of this field is "frozen" when one of the following set of data is invalid:
• Operating Mode, Surviving Number, Bearing or distance during the operating mode BURST or
CONTINUOUS.
• Operating Mode, Surviving Number or both Latitude and longitude during the operating mode GPS
(URX-3000) or DATA.

PLS DATA [4L]: Displays the PLS data. Possible values are ENABLED or DISABLED. When ENABLED is set,
if the PLS information is received then all PLS displayed parameters are updated by the FMS (e.g. PLS's time,
position, bearing, distance for all the types of PLS. As well, PLS surviving number & operating mode for PLS
CUBIC V12). When DISABLED is set, if the PLS information is received then all PLS displayed parameters are
not updated by the FMS, and remain unchanged.

NOTE: Enabling/Disabling the PLS data is used for display purposes only, and the FMS continues to output the
PLS waypoint position regardless of this prompt value).

MARK [4R]: Not Shown. {Displayed if MARK hard key not configured}. Store the current CMA-9000 FMS On
Top position and display in the MARK ON TOP field (1R). The positions on the UPDATE POS page are also
frozen.

UPDATE POS [5L]: Access to the UPDATE POS 1/1 page. This prompt is only available if an EGI or IRS is
configured or a DVS navigator is available.

NEW USER WPT [6L]: Accesses the USER WPT 1/2 page and enters the last updated position of the Mark On
Top position or last Joystick position or last PLS position into the position field of that page.

NOTE: This prompt is only displayed when a mark on top or last joystick or last PLS position exists.

DES+SAR [6R] or TACTICAL [6R]: When TACT key is configured, the DES+SAR prompt is replaced by
TACTICAL. In this case, the prompt gives access to the TACTICAL 1/Y page instead of the DES+SAR 1/Y
page. Access to the DES+SAR 1/Y page. When there is no data in the scratchpad, selection of this key will
enter the last updated waypoint of the Mark On Top or the Joystick waypoint or the last PLS position in the REF
ID field of the DES+SAR 1/Y page. When there is a valid position in the scratchpad, selection of this key will
create a temporary waypoint at this position and enter the identifier in the REF ID field of the DES+SAR 1/2
page.

NOTE: If the PLS position time is the most recent and the PLS position is not valid, then pressing NEW USER
WPT or DES+SAR prompts will transfer the last computed position and surviving number.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-121
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PREDEF WPT 3/3 (If configured)

Display the PREDEF WPT 3/3 page by pressing [INIT/REF], <WPT LISTS>, <PREDEF WPT>, [NEXT], [NEXT]
[MARK], [NEXT] {if CFG KEY configured to MARK and UPDATE POS page not being displayed}
[TACT], <FLIR> { if TACT key configured and FLIR configured on TACTICAL page}

PREDEF WPT 3/3

FLIR POS
1L N45°34.25 W122°45.12
1R
PPOS 270°/30.0NM
2L BULL 220°/20.0NM
2R
REL BRG ALT
3L +020° 3047 F T
3R

4L 4R

5L <BULLS EYE TGT 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

FLIR POS [1L,1R]: Displays the last FLIR position received from the FLIR interface when available. If the
position is not received or received as FAIL, stars will be displayed. If the position cannot be computed, the
position will be blank.
When LSK is pressed, the position will be copied in the scratchpad.

PPOS/BULL [2L,2R]: Displays the FLIR bearing/distance relative to the present aircraft position (PPOS) and
relative to the Bulls eye waypoint (BULL). If the Bulls eye is not defined (or not configured) or the position is not
received, this field is blank. The “BULL” string changes according to the BULLS EYE name defined in the
BULLS EYE page.

REL BRG [3L]: Displays the FLIR relative bearing. The FLIR relative bearing is computed using the received
FLIR Azimuth minus the aircraft true heading. If the FLIR Azimuth is not received, the relative bearing is blank.

ALT [3R]: Displays the FLIR MSL altitude in feet. If the altitude is not received, the altitude is blank.

BULLS EYE TGT [5L]: Access to the BULLS EYE 2/3 page (e.g. bulls eye target page) and enters the last
received position and altitude of the FLIR into the BULLS EYE TARGET position (via the bulls eye target
reference wpt) and MSL altitude field. This prompt is only displayed when the BULLS EYE function is
configured and a valid FLIR position is displayed.

NEW USER WPT [6L]: Access to the USER WPT 1/2 page and enters the last updated position of the FLIR
into the position field of that page. This prompt is only displayed when a valid FLIR position is displayed.

DES+SAR [6R] or TACTICAL [6R]: When TACT key is configured, the DES+SAR prompt is replaced by
TACTICAL. In this case, the prompt gives access to the TACTICAL page instead of the DES+SAR page.
Access to the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page. When there is no data in the scratchpad, selection of
this key will enter the last updated FLIR position in the REF ID field of the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y)
page. When there is a valid position in the scratchpad, selection of this key will create a temporary waypoint at
this position and enter the identifier in the REF ID field of the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-122
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PROGRESS 1/3 (when 3-page set is configured)

This page provides the progress of various parameters to the user. Access PROGRESS 1/3 page by pressing
[PROG].

This page becomes PROGRESS 1/4 when CARP is configured.

A. When ETA is selected:

PROGRESS 1/3
FROM ALT ATA
1L DOWNE/ O FL005 2048.5Z
1R
TO DTGN M ETA
2L OS FAF 275 2209.5Z <
2R
NEXT
3L RW24R/O M A P 3 2 0 2 2 2 3 . 9 z 3R
DEST
4L CYUl 552 2335.8z 4R
RNP/ANP HSI SCALES
5L 2.00/0.05N M 1200F T / 5.0N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

PROGRESS 1/3
FROM ALTF T ATA
1L DIRECT 127 2048.5Z
1R
TO DTGN M ETA
2L JFK 275 2209.5Z <
2R
NEXT
3L JFK01 320 2223.9z
3R
DEST
4L CYUl 552 2335.8z 4R
RNP/ANP HSI SCALE
5L 2.00/0.05N M 5.0N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

B. When ETE selected:

PROGRESS 1/3
FROM ALTF T ATA
1L
DIRECT 127 2048.5Z
1R
TO DTGN M ETE
2L JFK 275 01+05.2<
2R
NEXT
3L JFK01 320 01+18.9 3R
DEST
4L CYUl 552 02+09.5 4R
RNP/ANP HSI SCALE
5L 2.00/0.05N M 5.0N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-123
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. When SAR part of the active route:

PROGRESS 1/3
FROM ALT ATA
1L
DIRECT FL005 2048.5Z
1R
TO DTGN M ETA
2L JFK /S 275 2209.5Z <
2R
NEXT
3L 01 SAR 320 2223.9 3R
DEST
4L CYUl 552N M 2335.8Z 4R
RNP/ANP HSI SCALES
5L 2.00/0.05N M 1200F T / 5.0N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

D. When a HOVER procedure is part of the active route:

PROGRESS 1/3
FROM ALT ATA
1L
DIRECT FL005 2048.5Z
1R
TO DTGN M ETA
2L WPT02/oT D N 5 . 0 5 2 2 0 9 . 5 Z < 2R
NEXT
3L WPT01/oM R K 9 . 3 1 2 2 2 3 . 9 z 3R
DEST
4L DEST 9.31 2223.9z 4R
RNP/ANP HSI SCALES
5L 2.00/0.05N M 1200F T / 5.0N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

FROM (1L): Identifier of the last (FROM) waypoint overflown. Displays "GROUND" after takeoff before reaching
the active waypoint. Special attributes are displayed in inverse video white (refer to NOTE 2).

NOTE: If SAR waypoint ident displayed (e.g. 01 - 79), then the ident will not be transferred to the scratchpad.

ALT (1L): Crossing altitude over the FROM waypoint. Display can be either in feet or FL. If waypoint is before
the midway point of the active route, Transition Altitude criterion is used. If waypoint is after the midway point of
the active route, Transition Level criterion is used.

ATA (1R): Actual time of arrival at the FROM waypoint.

TO (2L): Identifier of active TO waypoint. Special attributes are displayed in inverse video white (refer to NOTE
2).

NOTE: If SAR waypoint ident displayed e.g. 01 - 79), then the ident will not be transferred to the scratchpad.

DTG (2L): Cumulative distance-to-go from present position to waypoint along the flight plan route.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-124
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ETA (2R): Display Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) at waypoint.

NOTE: When the aircraft is on ground, the ETE (estimated time en route) to the waypoint is displayed instead of
the ETA if the PLAN DATA page is configured. If they are not configured, the field is blank.

ETE (2R): Display Estimated Time En-route (ETE) to waypoint (displayed only on ground).

NOTE: When the aircraft is on ground, the ETE to the waypoint is displayed instead of the ETA if the PLAN DATA
page is configured. If it is not configured, the field is blank.

NEXT (3L): Identifier of NEXT waypoint. Special attributes are displayed in inverse video white (refer to NOTE
2).

NOTE: If SAR waypoint ident displayed (e.g. 01 - 79), then the ident will not be transferred to the scratchpad.

DEST (4L): Identifier of the destination airport/waypoint.

RNP/ANP [5L]: Used for entry and/or display of the Required Navigation Performance (RNP) for the phase of
flight and displays Actual Navigation Performance (ANP). RNP is defined as a statement of the navigation
performance necessary for operation within a defined airspace (adapted from ICAO definitions). RNP includes
requirements for accuracy, integrity, continuity and availability of navigation signals and equipment. The Actual
Navigation Performance field displays one of the following (depending on the navigation mode): GPS ANP, INS
quality factor, or dead reckoning quality factor. Refer to Section 15, RNP Capability for additional information.

HSI SCALE [5R] or (5R): Entry and display of HSI full scale deviation (in nautical miles). Entry is only allowed
during the en-route phase of flight. Either 1 nm or 5 nm can be entered as the HSI scale. {Displayed only if EFIS
is configured and not configured for en-route navigation}. If VNAV option is configured the title becomes “HSI
SCALES” and an additional field for full scale value of vertical deviation (in ft) is displayed.

NAV MODE [6L]: Current sensor used for navigation. Pressing LSK 6L will access the POS REF 2/X page.
Possible navigation modes:

• INS/GPS{if EGI installed}

• cGPS {if dual GPS installed}
• mGPS {if dual GPS installed}
• GPS {if EGI only or CIVIL GPS only configured}
• DME
• VOR/DME
• INS/DVS
• INERTIAL
• DVS
• KALMAN {if APIRS installed}
• DR

MISSED APPR [6R]: Not Shown. If the prompt display is configured, prompt appears during final GPS
instrument approach with no route modification in progress. Pressing this key will automatically sequence the
Missed Approach Point (MAP) to the missed approach procedure. The function of this key is limited to the FMS,
and has no impact on any missed approach or take-off/go-around mode of the flight guidance system.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-125
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NEXT WPT [6R]: Not Shown. Prompt is displayed when automatic waypoint sequencing is not possible.
Examples include when the active leg is vector, or an altitude-terminated leg without a Baro-corrected altitude
input. Pressing NEXT WPT results in an immediate transition of navigation and guidance to the next waypoint
in the flight plan.

NOTE 1: The destination DTG and ETA are not affected by any route modification procedure that has not yet
been EXECuted. In addition, when the aircraft is on ground, the ETE (estimated time en route) to the
point is displayed instead of the ETA if either the PLAN DATA page is configured. If they are not
configured, the field is blank.

NOTE 2: Special attributes associated with waypoints identifiers are:

• FAF: When a Final approach fix waypoint identifier is displayed.
• MAP: When a Missed approach fix waypoint identified is displayed.
• SAR: When a Search pattern waypoint except for the search pattern origin is displayed.
• TDN: When a Hover Transition down waypoint identifier is displayed.
• MRK: When a Hover Mark waypoint identifier is displayed.
• IP: When the CARP Identification Point is displayed.
• TP: When the CARP Turning Point is displayed.
• SD: When the CARP Slow-Down waypoint is displayed.
• CRP: When the CARP Greenlight waypoint is displayed.
• XTE: When the CARP Redlight waypoint is displayed.
• ESC: When the CARP Escape waypoint is displayed.

PROGRESS 3/3 (when 3-page set is configured)

This page provides the progress of various data to the user. Access PROGRESS 3/3 page by pressing [PROG]
and [PREV].

This page becomes PROGRESS 3/4 if CARP is configured.

PROGRESS 3/3
HEADWIND CROSSWIND
1L 027K T R44K T 1R
TRUE W I N D TAS
2L >020T/45K T 240K T 2R
HDG/DA TK/GS
3L 178T/ L10o 177T/220K T
3R
MAGVAR TKE/XTK
4L W015.6o L002o/RO.10N M 4R
ALT(CORR) METRIC ALT
5L 3424F T 1044M 5R
QNH SET QNH REF
6L >1 0 1 3 M B 1013M B 6R

HEADWIND/TAILWIND (1L): Present headwind or tailwind component (in knots).

CROSSWIND (1R): Present crosswind component (left or right in knots, direction from which wind is blowing).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-126
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TRUE/MAG WIND [2L]: Current true wind direction and speed (in knots). Displayed in small font when the wind
value is computed by the FMS, in large font when the value is frozen. When the scratchpad is empty, and A/C is
outside the polar region (latitude between N73 and S60), pressing LSK 2L will toggle between the True and
Magnetic display options. TRUE/MAG toggling is disabled, the > is not displayed, and TRUE is displayed in the
title line when the A/C is in the polar region. When the scratchpad contains a valid wind entry, pressing LSK 2L
will enter the wind overriding the displayed wind, if the wind value is frozen. The wind is frozen at low speed and
under failure conditions (TAS or heading input failure). Wind entry is also allowed when TAS and heading are
valid in DME/DME and VOR/DME navigation modes. After a cold start on ground, the wind value is not
displayed (field blank).

TAS (2R): True Air Speed (in knots).

HDG/DA (3L): Aircraft heading and drift angle.

TK/GS [3R]: Current aircraft track and ground speed (in knots). Entry allowed only when navigating in DR
mode, to aid the navigation solution.

MAGVAR (4L): Magnetic variation at aircraft position.

TKE/XTK (4R): Present track angle error (Left or Right) from course of active leg and present cross-track error
(Left or Right) in nautical miles from the active leg. When a ROCKWELL3 EFIS is configured, the XTK value
displayed will be either the crosstrack relative to the arc (when the arc is being flown) or to the active leg
otherwise. In the case of procedure turn and hover procedure, the XTK will be blanked when:
• Active leg is a CF leg, and
• XTK distance is greater than 0.2nm, and
• Track angle error is greater than 20 degrees

The appropriate altitude value field is displayed at LSK 5L key in the order of priority:

ALT (CORR) (5L): When a baro-corrected altitude is available. The baro-corrected altitude can be:
• A baro-corrected altitude received from the ADC, or
• A standard pressure altitude received from the ADC with a QNH baro-correction applied, or
• A baro-inertial altitude received from the IRS with a QNH baro-correction applied.

ALT (STD) (5L): When a standard pressure altitude is received from the ADC.

ALT (IRS) (5L): When a baro-inertial altitude is received from the IRS.

ALT (GPS) (5L): When a geometric altitude is received from the GPS.
In the case of a dual GPS configuration (e.g. civil & military), the GPS altitude is the one received from the
active selected sensor (either military or civil GPS).

ALT (INS) (5L): When a hybrid inertial altitude is received from the EGI.
ALT (MAN) (5L): When none of the altitude sources are available, manual entry is allowed. Displayed in
large font.

METRIC ALT [5R]: FMS system altitude, displayed in meters. Displayed only if selected in the display
configuration.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-127
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

QNH SET [6L]: Displayed when no baro-corrected altitude is received from the ADC and either a pressure or an
IRS baro-inertial altitude is available. Displayed, in small font, when a baro-correction (QNH) is received from an
external source. Otherwise, allows the entry of a barometric correction (QNH) in inches of mercury (in Hg) with a
range from 27.0 to 32.0 in Hg or in millibars (mb) with a range from 915 to 1083 mb. When a QNH altimeter
setting is entered, a correction is applied to the pressure altitude and the resulting baro-corrected value is
displayed as ALT(CORR) (5L). The displayed unit (mb or inHg) can be toggled via LSK 6L when the scratchpad
is empty.
This field is also displayed, in small font, when both the QNH and baro-corrected altitude are received by the
FMS. This field is not displayed when the baro-corrected altitude is received, but no external QNH is available to
the FMS. This field is not displayed when the altitude source is GPS, INS (EGI) or manual.

QNH REF [6R]: Displayed when only pressure altitude from the ADC and hybrid inertial altitude from the EGI
are available and the QNH SET field is displayed. Displays a computed value of the mean sea-level (QNH)
pressure as a reference value to the pilot. The units of this field will be slave to the selected unit on the QNH
SET (6L) field. This field is right justified.

NOTE: The manually entered altimeter setting is cancelled and the field displays dashes (“--.--“) on leaving
the terminal area (distance from the departure airport is greater than 33 nm, or the altitude is greater
than 16,000 feet above airport elevation.

When no altimeter setting is defined field displays boxes (" ") on entering the terminal area
(distance from the destination airport is less than 30 nm, or the altitude is less than 15,000 feet above
airport elevation).This indicates a mandatory input is required for a VNAV approach.

PROGRESS 1/4 (when 4-page set is configured)

The PROGRESS 1/4 page allows the pilot to monitor current dynamic data concerning progress along the active
route. Two display formats are possible as shown below.

Display ACT PROGRESS 1/4 page by pressing [PROG].

This page becomes ACT PROGRESS 1/5 if CARP is configured.

A. When ETA is selected:

ACT PROGRESS 1/4

280T DTGN M ETA
1L ARRIE 35.2 1817.9Z <
1R
280T
2L TOU /o 88.3 1830.5Z
2R
TRUE W I N D TK/GS
3L >020T/ 45K T 281T/228K T
3R
TKE/XTK
4L R000T/L0.00N M 4R
RNP/ANP HSI SCALE
5L 1.00/0.05N M 1.0N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-128
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. When ETE is selected:

ACT PROGRESS 1/4
280T DTGN M ETE
ARRIE 35.2 00+20.2<
1L 1R
280T
2L TOU 88.3 00+32.2
2R
TRUE W I N D TK/GS
3L >020T/ 45K T 281T/228K T 3R
TKE/XTK
4L R000T/L0.00N M 4R
RNP/ANP HSI SCALE
5L 1.00/0.05N M 1.0N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

C. When SAR is part of active route:

ACT PROGRESS 1/4
280T DTGN M ETA
SAL /S 35.2 1817.9Z <
1L 1R
280T
2L 01 SAR 88.3 1830.5Z
2R
TRUE W I N D TK/GS
3L >020T/ 45K T 281T/228K T 3R
MAX SAR GS TKE/XTK
4L 107K T R000T/L0.00N M 4R
RNP/ANP HSI SCALE
5L 1.00/0.05N M 1200F T /1.0N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

D. When a HOVER procedure is part of the active route:

ACT PROGRESS 1/4

090T DTGN M ETA
1L
WPT02/ oT D N 5 . 2 5 1 8 1 7 . 9 Z < 1R
020T
2L WPT01/ oM R K 9 . 3 0 1 8 3 0 . 5 Z 2R
TRUE W I N D TK/GS
3L >020T/ 20K T 281T/ 75K T 3R
TKE/XTK
4L R000T/L0.00N M 4R
RNP/ANP HSI SCALES
5L 1.00/0.05N M 1200F T /1.0N M 5R
NAV MODE
6L <G P S 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-129
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DESIRED TRACK (DSTK) (1L): True (superscript T)/Magnetic (o) Desired track to the active waypoint changed
to "HOLD AT" during holding pattern, or “EXIT HOLD” when holding pattern exit is armed.

NOTE: Prefix: turn direction (Left, either, Right)Suffix: Angle type (crs-course, hdg-heading)

ACTIVE WAYPOINT (1L): Active waypoint identifier in reverse video. Special attributes are displayed in inverse
video white (refer to NOTE 1).

NOTE: If SAR waypoint ident displayed (e.g. 01 - 79), then the ident will not be transferred to the scratchpad.

ACTIVE WAYPOINT PROCEDURE (1L): Special procedure associated to the active waypoint.
"/H": Holding pattern.
"/O": Fly over waypoint.
"/S": Search pattern for search pattern origin only.
"/T": Tactical direct-to
"/A": Tactical approach
"/C" CARP Greenlight waypoint.

DTG (ACTDTG) (1L): Distance to go (2nd column) from present position to the active waypoint.

ETA (ACTETA) (1R): Estimated time of arrival at the active waypoint. On selection will change to ETE (also
effects a change on PROGRESS 2/4).

ETE (1R): Displays estimated time en-route to active waypoint.

NOTE: When the aircraft is on ground, if PLAN DATA page is not configured the ETE/ETA field is blank.
o
NEXT COURSE (2L): NEXT flight plan course True (superscript T)/Magnetic ( ).

NEXT WAYPOINT (2L): Display the identifier at the waypoint following the active waypoint. Special attributes
are displayed in inverse video white (refer to NOTE 1).

NOTE: If SAR waypoint ident displayed (e.g. 01 - 79), then the ident will not be transferred to the scratchpad.

PROCEDURE AT NEXT WPT (2L): Display special procedure associated with the next waypoint.
"/H": Holding pattern.
"/O": Overfly.
"/S": Search pattern for search pattern origin only.
"/A”: Tactical approach
"/C": CARP Greenlight waypoint.

DTG (2L): Distance to go (2nd column) from present position to next waypoint.

ETA (2R): Display estimated time of arrival at the next waypoint.

ETE (2R): Displays estimated time en-route to the next waypoint.

NOTE: When the aircraft is on ground, if PLAN DATA page is not configured the ETE/ETA field is blank.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-130
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TRUE/MAG WIND [3L]: Current true wind direction and speed (in knots). Displayed in small font when the
wind value is computed by the FMS, in large font when the value is frozen (see definition below). When the
scratchpad is empty and A/C is outside the polar region (latitude between N73 and S60), pressing LSK 3L will
toggle between the True and Magnetic display options. TRUE/MAG toggling is disabled, the > is not displayed,
and TRUE is displayed in the title line when the A/C is in the polar region. When the scratchpad contains a valid
wind entry, pressing LSK 3L will enter the wind overriding the displayed wind, if the wind value is frozen. The
wind is frozen at low speed and under failure conditions (TAS or heading input failure). Wind entry is also
allowed when TAS and heading are valid in DME/DME and VOR/DME navigation modes. After a cold start on
ground, the wind value is not displayed (field blank).

CAUTION: The crew must be aware of the reference for heading indication as it may differ from the wind
reference selected on this page.

MAX SAR GS [4L]: Maximum ground speed to perform the SAR pattern without any overshoot. This field is
only displayed when the SAR waypoint is the active TO waypoint and when the SAR is active. Otherwise the
complete field is blank (fixed caption & dynamic data).

RNP/ANP [5L]: Used for entry and/or display of the Required Navigation Performance (RNP) for the phase of
flight and displays Actual Navigation Performance (ANP). RNP is defined as a statement of the navigation
performance necessary for operation within a defined airspace (adapted from ICAO definitions). RNP includes
requirements for accuracy, integrity, continuity, and availability of navigation signals and equipment. The Actual
Navigation Performance field displays one of the following, the actual navigation performance, or a quality factor
depending on the navigation mode. Refer to Section 15, RNP Capability for additional information.

NAV MODE [6L]: Current navigation mode. Pressing LSK 6L will access POS INIT/REF 2/X page. The CMA-
9000 FMS can have the following navigation modes:

• INS/GPS{if EGI installed}

• cGPS {if dual GPS installed}
• mGPS {if dual GPS installed}
• GPS {if EGI only or CIVIL GPS only configured}
• DME
• VOR/DME
• INS/DVS
• INERTIAL
• DVS
• KALMAN {if APIRS installed}
• DR

TK/GS [3R]: Current aircraft track and ground speed (in knots). Entry allowed only when navigating in DR
mode, to aid the navigation solution.

TKE/XTK (4R): Present track angle error (Left or Right) from course of active leg and present cross-track error
(Left or Right) in nautical miles from the active leg. When a ROCKWELL3 EFIS is configured, the XTK value
displayed will be either the crosstrack relative to the arc (when the arc is being flown) or to the active leg
otherwise. In the case of procedure turn and hover procedure, the XTK will be blanked when:
• Active leg is a CF leg, and
• XTK distance is greater than 0.2nm, and
• Track angle error is greater than 20 degrees

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-131
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HSI SCALE (5R): Entry and display of HSI full scale deviation (in nautical miles). Entry is only allowed during
the en-route phase of flight. Either 1 nm or 5 nm can be entered as the HSI scale. {Displayed only if EFIS is
configured and not configured for en-route navigation}. If VNAV option is configured the title becomes “HSI
SCALES” and an additional field for full scale value of vertical deviation (in ft) is displayed.

MISSED APPR [6R]: Not Shown. If the prompt display is configured, prompt appears during final GPS
instrument approach with no route modification in progress. If configured for display, pressing the line select
key adjacent to this prompt, the FMS will automatically sequence the Missed Approach Point (MAP) to the
missed approach procedure otherwise it will have no effect. {Active when flying final approach}.

NEXT WPT [6R]: Not Shown. Prompt is displayed when automatic waypoint sequencing is not possible.
Examples include when the active leg is vector, or an altitude-terminated leg without a Baro-Corrected altitude
input. Pressing NEXT WPT results in an immediate transition of navigation and guidance to the next waypoint
in the flight plan. {Active when flying a manually terminated leg (ex. VECTOR)}.

NOTE 1: Special attributes associated with waypoints identifiers are:

• FAF: When a Final approach fix waypoint identifier is displayed.
• MAP: When a Missed approach fix waypoint identified is displayed.
• SAR: When a Search pattern waypoint except for the search pattern origin is displayed.
• TDN: When a Hover Transition down waypoint identifier is displayed.
• MRK: When a Hover Mark waypoint identifier is displayed.
• IP: When the CARP Identification Point is displayed
• TP: When the CARP Turning Point is displayed.
• SD: When the CARP Slow-Down waypoint is displayed.
• CRP: When the CARP Greenlight waypoint is displayed.
• XTE: When the CARP Redlight waypoint is displayed.
• ESC: When the CARP Escape waypoint is displayed.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-132
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PROGRESS 2/4 (when 4-page set is configured)

Display ACT PROGRESS 2/4 page by pressing [PROG] and then [NEXT].

This page becomes ACT PROGRESS 2/5 when CARP is configured.

A. When ETE selected:

ACT PROGRESS 2/4
FROM ALTF T ATA
1L
SEA 1300 1803.1Z
1R
TO DTGN M ETE
2L ARRIE 17.2 00+17.9<
2R
NEXT
3L TOU 68.7 00+30.5
3R
DEST
4L PANC 1279 05+47.2 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

ACT PROGRESS 2/4

FROM ALT ATA
1L
DOWNE/ O FL130 1803.1Z
1R
TO DTGN M ETE
2L OS FAF 17.2 00+17.9<
2R
NEXT
3L RW24R/OMAP 68.7 00+30.5
3R
DEST
4L KLAX 1279 05+47.2 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

B. When ETA selected:

ACT PROGRESS 2/4
FROM ALTF T ATA
1L SEA 1300 1803.1Z
1R
TO DTGN M ETA
2L ARRIE 17.2 1817.9Z <
2R
NEXT
3L TOU 68.7 1830.5Z
3R
DEST
4L PANC 1279 2347.2Z 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-133
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. When SAR part of the active route:

ACT PROGRESS 2/4

FROM ALT ATA
1L
DIRECT 500F T 1803.1Z
1R
TO DTGN M ETE
2L SAL /S 17.2 00+17.9<
2R
NEXT
3L 01 SAR 68.7 00+30.5 3R
DEST
4L KLAX 1279 05+47.2 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

D. When a HOVER procedure is part of the active route:

ACT PROGRESS 2/4

FROM ALT ATA
1L SEA 500F T 1803.1Z
1R
TO DTGN M ETA
2L WPT02/ O T D N 7 . 2 5 00+02.9<
2R
NEXT
3L WPT01/OMRK 9.75 00+03.5
3R
DEST
4L DEST 9.75 00+03.5 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

FROM (1L): Identifier of the last (FROM) waypoint overflown. Displays "GROUND" after takeoff before reaching
the active waypoint. Special attributes are displayed in inverse video white (refer to NOTE 1).

NOTE: If SAR waypoint ident displayed (e.g. 01 - 79), then the ident will not be transferred to the scratchpad.

ALT (1L): Crossing altitude over the FROM waypoint. Display can be either in feet or FL. If waypoint is before
the midway point of the active route, Transition Altitude criterion is used. If waypoint is after the midway point of
the active route, Transition Level criterion is used.

ATA (1R): Actual time of arrival at the FROM waypoint.

TO (2L): Identifier of active TO waypoint. Special attributes are displayed in inverse video white (refer to NOTE
1).

NOTE: If SAR waypoint ident displayed (e.g. 01 - 79), then the ident will not be transferred to the scratchpad.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-134
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DTG (2L): Cumulative distance-to-go from present position to waypoint along the flight plan route.

ETA (2R): Estimated time of arrival at waypoint. On selection will change to ETE (also effects a change on
PROGRESS 1/4).

ETE (2R): Displays Estimated time en-route at waypoint.

NOTE: When the aircraft is on ground, if PLAN DATA page is not configured the ETE/ETA field is blank.

NEXT (3L): Identifier of NEXT waypoint. Special attributes are displayed in inverse video white (refer to NOTE
1).

NOTE: If SAR waypoint ident displayed (e.g. 01 - 79), then the ident will not be transferred to the scratchpad.

DEST (4L): Identifier of the Destination airport/waypoint.

NOTE 1: Special attributes associated with waypoints identifiers are:

• FAF: When a Final approach fix waypoint identifier is displayed.
• MAP: When a Missed approach fix waypoint identified is displayed.
• SAR: When a Search pattern waypoint except for the search pattern origin is displayed.
• TDN: When a Hover Transition down waypoint identifier is displayed.
• MRK: When a Hover Mark waypoint identifier is displayed.
• IP: When the CARP Identification Point is displayed.
• TP: When the CARP Turning Point is displayed.
• SD: When the CARP Slow-Down waypoint is displayed.
• CRP: When the CARP Greenlight waypoint is displayed.
• XTE: When the CARP Redlight waypoint is displayed.
• ESC: When the CARP Escape waypoint is displayed.

PROGRESS 4/4 (when 4-page set is configured)

Display ACT PROGRESS 4/4 page by pressing [PROG], and then [PREV].

This page becomes ACT PROGRESS 4/5 when CARP is configured.

If QNH is not available (via proper configuration).

ACT PROGRESS 4/4

HEADWIND CROSSWIND
1L
027K T R44K T 1R
HDG/DA TAS
2L 290o/ L11o 240K T
2R
MAGVAR
3L E019.9o 3R

4L 4R
ALT(GPS)
5L 0 FT 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-135
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

If QNH is available (via proper configuration).

ACT PROGRESS 4/4

HEADWIND CROSSWIND
1L
027K T R44K T 1R
HDG/DA TAS
2L 290o/ L11o 240K T
2R
MAGVAR
3L E019.9o 3R

4L 4R
ALT(GPS)
5L 0 FT 5R
QNH SET
6L 28.63 6R

ACT PROGRESS 4/4

HEADWIND CROSSWIND
027K T R44K T
1L 1R
HDG/DA TAS
2L 290o/ L11o 240K T
2R
MAGVAR
3L E019.9o
3R

4L 4R
ALT(CORR) METRIC ALT
5L 3424F T 1044H 5R
QNH SET QNH REF
6L 29.92I N H G 29.92I N H G 6R

HEADWIND/TAILWIND (1L): Present headwind or tailwind component. Display in knots.

CROSSWIND (1R): Present crosswind component (left or right in knots, direction from which wind is blowing).
Display in knots.

HDG/DA (2L): Aircraft Heading and Drift angle. Display in degrees.

TAS (2R): True Air Speed (in knots).

MAGVAR (3L): Magnetic variation at aircraft position. Display in degrees.

ALT (xxx) [5L]: FMS system altitude, displayed in feet. The (xxx), displayed in white font, identifies the type of
altitude displayed. It can be, in order of priority:
• (CORR): When a baro-corrected altitude is available. The baro-corrected altitude can be:
• a baro-corrected altitude received from the ADC, or
• a standard pressure altitude received from the ADC with a QNH baro-correction applied, or
• a baro-inertial altitude received from the IRS with a QNH baro-correction applied.
• (STD): When a standard pressure altitude is received from the ADC.
• (IRS): When a baro-inertial altitude is received from the IRS.
• (GPS): When a geometric altitude is received from the GPS.
• (INS): When a hybrid inertial altitude is received from the EGI.
• (MAN): When none of the altitude sources are available, manual entry is allowed. Displayed in large font.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-136
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

METRIC ALT [5R]: CMA-9000 FMS system altitude, displayed in meters. Displayed only if selected in the
display configuration.

QNH SET [6L]: Displayed when no baro-corrected altitude is received from the ADC and either a pressure or an
IRS baro-inertial altitude is available. Displayed, in small font, when a baro-correction (QNH) is received from an
external source. Otherwise, allows the entry of a barometric correction (QNH) in inches of mercury (in Hg) with a
range from 27.0 to 32.0 in Hg or in millibars (mb) with a range from 915 to 1083 mb. When a QNH altimeter
setting is entered, a correction is applied to the pressure altitude and the resulting baro-corrected value is
displayed as ALT(CORR) (LSK 5L). The displayed unit (mb or inHg) can be toggled via LSK 6L when the
scratchpad is empty.
This field is also displayed, in small font, when both the QNH and baro-corrected altitude are received by the
FMS. This field is not displayed when the baro-corrected altitude is received but no external QNH is available to
the FMS. This field is not displayed when the altitude source is GPS, INS or manual.

QNH REF [6R]: Displayed only when the Pressure Altitude input from the ADC is available, Hybrid INS/GPS
navigation solution from the EGI is computed and available, the INS/GPS AAIM altitude is not failed, and the
QNH SET field is displayed.. Displays a computed value of the mean sea-level (QNH) pressure as a reference
value to the pilot. The units of this field will be slave to the selected unit on the QNH SET (LSK 6L) field. This
field is right justified. Both fields display asterisks if the ADC or INS/GPS is failed or blanks if no altitude data is
received.

NOTE: The manually entered altimeter setting is cancelled and the field displays dashes ("--.--") on leaving
the terminal area (distance from the departure airport is greater than 33 nm, or the altitude is greater
than 16,000 feet above airport elevation.)
When no altimeter setting is defined, field displays boxes (" ") on entering the terminal area
(distance from the destination airport is less than 30 nm, or the altitude is less than 15,000 feet above
airport elevation). This indicates a mandatory input is required.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-137
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RADAR ID X-REF 1/1 (if FIAR 1500B RADAR is configured)

Display the RADAR ID X-REF 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <MISSION>, <RADAR ID X-REF {if the
PREDEF PG is not configured or configured with the MARK key also configured} and {the FIAR 1500B RADAR
is configured}.

This page is used to associate the waypoint naming transmitted to the EFIS with the waypoint naming used by
the FIAR 1500B RADAR. The EFIS receives waypoint names containing up to 12 alphanumeric characters
while the RADAR uses sequential numbers from 00 to 99.

Some waypoint identifiers displayed on this page are intermediate waypoints created by the FMS that are not
part of the flight plan presented on the LEGS page. The intermediate waypoints could be for example, the
search pattern waypoints (01-79) that are displayed on the EFIS but not on the LEGS page.

RADAR ID X-REF 1/1

EFIS RADAR
FROM ( ) 0
1L 1R
TO YMX 1
2L NEXT YM01 2
2R
UHU 3
3L UHU01/H 4
3R
UHU02 5
4L UHU03 6 4R
UHU04 7
5L UHU05 8 5R

6L MISSION> 6R

FROM (1L,1R): Display the FROM waypoint identifier transmitted to the EFIS and the corresponding waypoint
number used on the RADAR display. For waypoints without identifier created by the FMS, parenthesis (e.g.:"( )")
are displayed to indicate that no identifier is defined. For example, when a direct-to is executed, the FROM
waypoint will be shown as "( )" on the EFIS column.

TO (2L,2R): Display the TO waypoint identifier transmitted to the EFIS and the corresponding waypoint number
used on the RADAR display.

NEXT (2L,2R): Display the NEXT waypoint identifier transmitted to the EFIS and the corresponding waypoint
number used on the RADAR display. For waypoints without identifier created by the FMS, parenthesis (e.g.:"( )")
are displayed to indicate that no identifier is defined.

FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINTS (3L, 4L, 5L, 3R, 4R, 5R): Display the flight plan waypoint transmitted to the EFIS
and the corresponding waypoint numbers used on the RADAR display.

MISSION [6R]: Access the MISSION 1/1 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-138
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RADIAL-TO 1/1

Display RADIAL-TO 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, enter identifier in the REF ID
field, and <RADIAL-TO> or [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, <RADIAL-TO> or appending ‘/R’ to an
existing waypoint on the RTE LEGS page.

Used to enter the parameters defining a Radial-To procedure: waypoint identifier, inbound course and distance.

RTE 1 RADIAL-TO 1/1

FIX
1L
YUL 1R
INBD CRS
o
2L 016 2R
DISTANCE
3L 10.0N M 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NEW RADIAL-TO 6R

FIX [1L]:Destination waypoint of the radial-to procedure. The identifier entered is checked to ensure that:
• All characters are alphanumeric; and
• the maximum size of the identifier is 5 characters; and
• the identifier exists in one of the following databases: NDB, LIB, TMP, USR or RTE; or is one of the Bulls
Eye waypoints and
• the identifier is not a moving waypoint.

INBD CRS [2L]: Radial on which the temporary waypoint will be created. Acceptable range is 0 to 360
degrees.

DISTANCE [3L]: Distance from the FIX in nautical miles. Acceptable range is 0 to 99.9 nautical miles.

NEW RADIAL-TO [6L]: Used to place the procedure (example: YUL016/10/R) in the scratchpad and switch to
the RTE x LEGS 1/X page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-139
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RTA PROGRESS 2/3 (when 3-page set is configured)

This page is used to evaluate the required True airspeed (TAS) to reach a waypoint at the required time of
arrival (RTA), or to evaluate the estimated time of arrival at the RTA waypoint under different TAS and wind
conditions.

Display ACT RTA PROGRESS 2/3 page by pressing [PROG] and [NEXT].

This page becomes PROGRESS 2/4 when CARP is configured.

A. Normal ACTIVE format:

ACT RTA PROGRESS 2/3
RTA WPT RTA
1L CAFTA 1938.0Z
1R
RTA TAS DIS
2L 248K T 288N M
2R
RTA WIND
3L 020T / 45K T
3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

B. PROGRESS during a MOD:

MOD RTA PROGRESS 2/3

RTA WPT RTA
1L
CAFTA 1938.0Z
1R
RTA TAS DIS
2L 248K T 288N M
2R
RTA WIND
3L 020T / 45K T
3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

RTA WPT [1L]: RTA Waypoint identifier, must be in the route. Field contains dashes and page is blank when
no identifier is entered. Deletion of the RTA waypoint blanks the page but does not remove the waypoint from
the route. Automatically blanked after sequencing the RTA waypoint out of the flight plan.

RTA TAS [2L]: Displayed only after entry of the RTA waypoint. TAS used for RTA computation or
recommended TAS to reach the waypoint at the required time. In flight, default value is system TAS; on ground,
default value is cruise TAS from the PLAN DATA 1/1 page (if configured); otherwise default value is 0. Manually
entered RTA TAS is displayed in large font. Deletion will bring back default value.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-140
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RTA WIND [3L]: Displayed only after entry of the RTA waypoint. Wind used for RTA or recommended RTA
TAS computation. In flight, default value is system wind; on ground, default value is cruise wind from the PLAN
DATA 1/1 page (if configured); otherwise default value is 0. Manual entry is displayed in large font, and does not
change the system or cruise wind. Deletion will bring back default value. Down track winds from LEGS page
should be used (0° to 360°/0KT to 200KT).

ERASE [6L]: Displayed only when a route modification is in progress. Pressing ERASE (LSK 6L) will undo all
changes to the route. If confirm erase route modifications is configured, then upon pressing ERASE a
confirmation is requested by displaying CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts on line select keys 6L and 6R respectively.

RESTORE [6L]: Displayed only if the RTE was erased on the RTE 1/X page. Used to restore the active route.

RTA [1R]: Estimated time of arrival at the RTA waypoint is displayed in small characters. Required time of
arrival entered manually is displayed in large font.

DIS (2R): Along track distance from present position to the RTA waypoint.

RTA PROGRESS 3/4 (when 4-page set is configured)

Used to evaluate the required true air speed (TAS) to reach a waypoint at the required time of arrival (RTA), or
to evaluate the estimated time of arrival at the RTA waypoint under different TAS and wind conditions.

Display ACT RTA PROGRESS 3/4 page by pressing [PROG], [NEXT] and then [NEXT].

This page becomes RTA PROGRESS 3/5 when CARP is configured.

A. Normal ACTIVE format:

ACT RTA PROGRESS 3/4
RTA WPT RTA
1L
CAFTA 1938.0Z
1R
RTA TAS DIS
2L 248K T 288N M
2R
RTA WIND
3L 020T / 45K T
3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-141
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. PROGRESS Index during a MOD:

MOD RTA PROGRESS 3/4
RTA WPT RTA
1L
CAFTA 1938.0Z
1R
RTA TAS DIS
2L 248K T 288N M
2R
RTA WIND
3L 020T / 45K T
3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

RTA WPT [1L]: RTA Waypoint identifier, must be in the route. Field contains dashes and page is blank when
no identifier is entered. Deletion of the RTA waypoint blanks the page but does not remove the waypoint from
the route. Automatically blanked after sequencing the RTA waypoint out of the flight plan.

RTA TAS [2L]: Displayed only after entry of the RTA waypoint. TAS used for RTA computation or
recommended TAS to reach the waypoint at the required time. In flight, default value is system TAS; on ground,
default value is cruise TAS from the PLAN DATA 1/1 page (if configured); otherwise default value is 0. Manually
entered RTA TAS is displayed in large font. Deletion will bring back default value.

RTA WIND [3L]: Displayed only after entry of the RTA waypoint. Wind used for RTA or recommended RTA
TAS computation. In flight, default value is system wind; on ground, default value is cruise wind from the PLAN
DATA 1/1 page (if configured); otherwise default value is 0. Defaults to system wind in flight and cruise wind on
ground. Manual entry is displayed in large font, and does not change the system or cruise wind. Deletion will
bring back default value.

ERASE [6L]: Displayed only when a route modification is in progress. Pressing ERASE (LSK 6L) will undo all
changes to the route. If confirm erase route modifications is configured, then upon pressing ERASE a
confirmation is requested by displaying CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts on line select keys 6L and 6R respectively.

RESTORE [6L]: Displayed only if the RTE was erased on the RTE 1/X page. Used to restore the active route.

RTA [1R]: Estimated time of arrival at the RTA waypoint is displayed in small characters. Required time of
arrival entered manually is displayed in large font.

DIS (2R): Along track distance from present position to the RTA waypoint.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-142
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RTE x 1/X

Access RTE 1 1/X page by either pressing [RTE]; or

from POS INIT/REF 2/X page, <ROUTE>; or
from ARRIVALS 1/X page, <ROUTE>.or
from DEPARTURES page, <ROUTE> or
from USER ROUTES page, <ROUTE> or
from SELECT CO ROUTE page, <ROUTE> or
from SELECT CO ROUTE page, route name selected.

A. Page display of active RTE being modified:

MOD RTE 1 1/3

ORIGIN DEST
1L
KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF KSEAPANC1 3R

4L CO ROUTES> 4R

5L USER ROUTES> 5R
OFFSET
6L <ERASE R0.0N M 6R

B. The following page is displayed when a user route or custom route is activated in DIRECT mode and
executed, and aircraft is airborne (single CMA-9000 FMS installation):

ACT RTE 1 1/2

ORIGIN DEST
1L
KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF KSEAPANC1 3R

4L <ERASE RTE1 CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <BACKTRACK USER ROUTES> 5R

OFFSET
6L <RTE 2 R0.0N M 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-143
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Page display when route activated and executed, and aircraft airborne (dual/triple CMA-9000 FMS
installation):

ACT RTE 1 1/2

ORIGIN DEST
1L
KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF KSEAPANC1 3R

4L <RTE XFILL CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <BACKTRACK USER ROUTES> 5R

OFFSET
6L <RTE 2 R0.0N M 6R

D. Page display after a DELETE (press [CLR] key) to the ORIGIN or ERASE RTE1 key is pressed:

MOD RTE 1 1/2

ORIGIN DEST
1L 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- -------- 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF ---------- 3R

4L CO ROUTES> 4R

5L USER ROUTES> 5R
OFFSET
6L <RESTORE R0.0N M 6R

E. The inactive route (RTE 1 or RTE 2) is displayed in monochrome cyan to distinguish it from the active route
(for FIX wing aircraft type configuration):

RTE 2 1/2
ORIGIN DEST
1L 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- -------- 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF ---------- 3R

4L CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <RTE COPY USER ROUTES> 5R

6L <RTE 1 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-144
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

F. Page display after a DELETE of the ORIGIN or ERASE RTE1 key is pressed (for ROTOR aircraft type
configuration):

MOD RTE 1 1/2

ORIGIN DEST
1L
----- ----- 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- -------- 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF ---------- 3R

4L CO ROUTES> 4R

5L USER ROUTES> 5R
OFFSET
6L <RESTORE R0.0N M 6R

G. The inactive route (RTE 1 or RTE 2) is displayed in monochrome cyan to distinguish it from the active route
(for ROTOR aircraft type configuration):

RTE 2 1/2
ORIGIN DEST
1L
----- ----- 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- -------- 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF ---------- 3R

4L CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <RTE COPY USER ROUTES> 5R

6L <RTE 1 6R

H. After performing a RTE COPY or any edit, the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts are displayed:

RTE 2 1/2
ORIGIN DEST
1L KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF KSEAPANC1 3R

4L CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <RTE COPY USER ROUTES> 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-145
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

I. Page display after selecting CONFIRM (in a single CMA-9000 FMS configuration):

RTE 2 1/2
ORIGIN DEST
1L
KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF KSEAPANC1 3R

4L <ERASE RTE2 CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <RTE COPY USER ROUTES> 5R

6L <RTE 1 ACTIVATE> 6R

J. Page display after performing a RTE 2 <ACTIVATE> from the RTE2 page and [EXEC] key pressed. When
RTE 2 is activated the Backtrack route will begin appending en-route waypoints from the new route as they are
flown past. In this way when <BACKTRACK> is pressed some time later the Backtrack Route loaded in the
MOD RTE will contain RTE 1 waypoints from the initial origin until RTE 2 was activated and RTE 2 waypoints
from there on:

ACT RTE 2 1/2

ORIGIN DEST
1L
KSEA PANC 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF KSEAPANC1 3R

4L <ERASE RTE2 CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <BACKTRACK USER ROUTES> 5R

OFFSET
6L <RTE 1 R0.0N M 6R

K. The following page is displayed when a user route or custom route is activated in INVERSE mode and
executed, and aircraft is airborne:

ACT RTE 1 1/2

ORIGIN DEST
1L PANC KSEA 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF INVKSEAPANC1 3R

4L <ERASE RTE1 CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <BACKTRACK USER ROUTES> 5R

OFFSET
6L <RTE 2 R0.0N M 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-146
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

L. The following page is displayed when a user route or custom route is appended to an active route in
INVERSE mode and executed:

ACT RTE 1 1/2

ORIGIN DEST
1L KLAX KSEA 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF INVKSEAPANC1+ 3R

4L <ERASE RTE1 CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <BACKTRACK USER ROUTES> 5R

OFFSET
6L <RTE 2 R0.0N M 6R

M. The following page is displayed when a user route or custom route is appended to an inactive route in
INVERSE mode and executed:

RTE 2 1/2
ORIGIN DEST
1L
KLAX KSEA 1R
RUNWAY FLT NO
2L ----- KL007 2R
DMAP APPEND ROUTE
3L >OFF INVKSEAPANC1+ 3R

4L <ERASE RTE2 CO ROUTES> 4R

5L <RTE COPY USER ROUTES> 5R

6L <RTE 1 ACTIVATE> 6R

ORIGIN [1L]: Used for entry and/or display of the origin identifier (any navigation database, user database,
digital map, temporary waypoint and position if configured for tactical approach). Entry or re-entry, or deletion
clears any existing route. Following entry, selections can be made on the ARRIVALS page for the origin, in case
the origin is an airport. For the active route, deletion erases all waypoints from the modified route and triggers the
RESTORE prompt. For the inactive route, deletion erases all waypoints from the inactive route and triggers the
CANCEL and CONFIRM prompts. Entry of an origin is mandatory for FIX wing aircraft configuration but is not for
ROTOR.

DEST [1R]: Used for entry and/or display of the destination identifier (any navigation database, user database,
digital map, temporary waypoint and position if configured for tactical approach). Entry or re-entry clears arrival
procedures of the previous destination. Following entry, selections can be made on the ARRIVALS page for the
destination, in case the destination is an airport. Entry of a destination is mandatory for FIX wing aircraft
configuration but is not for ROTOR.
A new destination entry after all arrivals/approaches have been completely sequenced will cause the
arrival/approach procedural attributes of the procedural waypoints to be cleared; the overflown procedural
waypoints will consequently assume the form of enroute waypoints and consequently no enroute waypoints
downpath will be deleted from the flight plan.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-147
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RUNWAY [2L]: Runway entry. Valid entries are origin airport runways. Line may be selected via DEPARTURE
page. Deleted upon reaching first waypoint.

FLT NO [2R]: Flight number. Displays entered company flight number. Displays dashes until valid flight
number is entered. Valid flight number may only be alphanumeric and up to 8 characters long.

NOTE: When the M425 IFF is configured, the flight ID seen on this page corresponds to the flight number as
seen on the IFF page, e.g. changing this field changes the value seen on the IFF page, and vice-versa.

DMAP APPEND [3L]: This prompt appears only if DMAP ELBIT, EURONAV or EURONAV_A702 type is
configured. Pressing this key toggles the DMAP append mode On/Off. If the DMAP append mode is ON, and a
valid DMAP waypoint is received from the DMAP unit, and the DMAP waypoint was successfully stored in the
DMAP Reserved waypoint List, then the received DMAP waypoint is appended to the end of the route, or before
the first encountered discontinuity. If an inactive route page is being displayed, then the DMAP waypoint is
included in the inactive route.

ROUTE [3R]: Enter Custom Route or User Route (name) and press [EXEC] key.
• Custom Route Name displayed when route has been loaded using USER ROUTES or SELECT CO ROUTE
pages.
• Custom Route Name or User Route name entered by the operator and executed with the [EXEC] key.

ERASE RTEx [4L]: Erases the current displayed non-empty route (active or inactive – e.g. origin, destination
and all waypoints on the LEGS page). This option is only displayed when the displayed route is not empty and
when the CMA-9000 FMS is configured for single mode of operation.

NOTE: RTEx corresponds to RTE1 or RTE2 depending on which route is being displayed.

For the active route:

• When LSK 4L is selected, the active route is erased, the route status becomes MOD and RESTORE is
displayed at LSK 6L to allow the user to undo the erase operation. Pressing RESTORE returns to the
previous active route. Pressing the EXEC key accepts the erase operation (active route becomes empty).

For the inactive route:

• When LSK 4L is selected, the inactive route is erased, CANCEL is displayed at LSK 6L and CONFIRM is
displayed at LSK 6R. Pressing CANCEL returns to the previous inactive route. Pressing CONFIRM accepts
the erase operation (inactive route becomes empty).

RTE XFILL [4L]: This prompt appears only in independent mode of operation. Key press transfers the active
route to the off-side FMSs. Press [EXEC] key on the off-side FMSs to activate transferred route. This prompt
disappears when using this key to cross-fill the route to the off-side FMS and reappears if the route is modified on
one of the CMA-9000 FMSs.

CO ROUTES [4R]: Access to SELECT CO ROUTE 1/X page

RTE COPY [5L]: Displayed only on an inactive route page and when at least one waypoint is present in the active
route. Key press copies active route onto inactive route.

BACKTRACK [5L]: Pressing this key will create a modified route containing:
• as a configurable item, the active TO waypoint followed by a discontinuity; then
• the waypoints of the backtrack route at the moment the key was pressed.
The MOD RTE x LEGS page will be displayed. As for any route modification, the backtrack route may then be
modified and executed. This key is only available on the active route page.

USER ROUTES [5R]: Access to USER ROUTES 1/1 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-148
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RTE 1 [6L]: Access to RTE 1 1/X page

RTE 2 [6L]: Access to RTE 2 1/X page

ERASE [6L]: Displayed only when a route modification is in progress. Pressing this key will undo all changes to
the route and return to the ACT Route status. If confirm erase route modifications is configured, then upon
pressing ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying CANCEL and CONFIRM prompts on line select keys
6L and 6R respectively.

RESTORE [6L]: Displayed only when the route's origin is deleted in flight or on ground or when the erase active
route key is pressed. It will cause a return to the previous route and ACT RTE status.

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

CONFIRM [6R]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.

OFFSET [6R]: This prompt appears only if the “OFFSET” display element is configured. To initiate offset (parallel
track) navigation enter lateral offset (L99.9-R99.9) and press [EXEC]. Maximum desired lateral offset distance left
or right of course is 99.9 nm. Entry is allowed only in flight if the path to the active waypoint is a track to fix leg or a
Direct-To; and not part of an approach procedure; and not terminated by an outbound leg of type Search or
Hold; and; not part of an active CARP procedure. Entry of 0 or performing a [CLR] key will cancel the offset. The
default OFFSET display when an offset has not been entered or after a cancellation will be R0.0.

ACTIVATE [6R]: Prompt displayed only when route is not active and at least one waypoint is present in the
inactive route. Key press will cause the EXEC key to illuminate. This function is rejected when a moving waypoint
is present in the active route.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-149
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RTE x 2/X

Access RTE x 2/X page by either pressing [RTE], [NEXT]; or

from POS INIT/REF 2/X page, <ROUTE>, [NEXT]; or
from ARRIVALS 1/X page, <ROUTE>, [NEXT], or
from DEPARTURES 1/X page, <ROUTE>, [NEXT], or
from USER ROUTES 1/X page, <ROUTE>, [NEXT], or
SELECT CO ROUTE 1/X page, <ROUTE>, [NEXT].

A. Page displayed of an Active route:

ACT RTE 1 2/3

VIA TO
1L
LACRE3 HUMPP 1R

2L DIRECT RADDT 2R

3L J20 OCS 3R

4L J154 RAMMS 4R

5L DIRECT GWENS 5R
OFFSET
6L <RTE 2 R0.0 6R
NM
B. Active route during modification:
MOD RTE 1 2/3
VIA TO
1L
LACRE3 HUMPP 1R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
2L 2R

3L J20 OCS 3R

4L J154 RAMMS 4R

5L DIRECT GWENS 5R
OFFSET
6L <ERASE R0.0 NM 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-150
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Inactive route page before editing:

RTE 2 2/3
VIA TO
1L LACRE3 HUMPP 1R

2L DIRECT RADDT 2R

3L J20 OCS 3R

4L J154 RAMMS 4R

5L DIRECT GWENS 5R

6L <RTE 1 ACTIV 6R
TE>

D. Inactive route during modification:

RTE 2 2/3
VIA TO
1L LACRE3 HUMPP 1R

2L DIRECT RADDT 2R

3L J20 OCS 3R

4L J154 RAMMS 4R

5L DIRECT GWENS 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

VIA [1L to 5L]: Via lines:

• Valid entries are DIRECT or an airway identifier only.
• Procedure names automatically appear when selected on the DEPARTURE or ARRIVAL pages.
• Defaults to direct if no entry is made.
• Entry of an airway with the previous or next TO entry not on that airway is invalid.
• Entry of an airway on the first via line initiates an airway intercept. Boxes will appear in the first TO line;
• Entering a waypoint in the boxes will cause the first VIA line to be dashed, and pushes the airway and TO
waypoint down to the next line. The first fix on the airway that is closest to being abeam of the aircraft is
displayed on the first TO line.
• Subsequent entry of an airway determines the intersection waypoint.
• If the waypoint is unnamed, a waypoint is created in latitude/longitude, identified by an X followed by the
entered airway name (e.g. XJ532).
• CARP procedures show “CARP” in the VIA field. CARP procedures can not be defined on the RTE 2/2
page.
• Approach transition show "APPR TRANS" in the VIA field when selected from the DEPARTURE or
ARRIVAL pages.
• Missed approach show "MISSED APPR" in the VIA field when selected from the DEPARTURE or ARRIVAL
pages.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-151
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TO [1R to 5R]: To waypoints:

• Valid entries are published waypoints, VHF navaids, runways, and ICAO airport identifiers.
• Valid created waypoint types are: Place-Bearing-Distance (PBD), Lat/Long and Place-Bearing-Place-Bearing
(PB-PB).
• Waypoint on airway.
• Seven (7) character waypoint identifier for oceanic latitude/longitude waypoints.
• CARP procedures show the “ESC01” waypoint in the TO field. It is not allowed to define a CARP procedure
on the RTE 2/2 page. Pressing this key with the CARP procedure “ESC01” waypoint ID displayed and an
empty scratchpad brings “CRP01” in the scratchpad.

RTE 1 [6L]: Access to RTE 1 1/X page

RTE 2 [6L]: Access to RTE 2 1/X page

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

ERASE [6L]: Displayed only when a route modification is in progress. Pressing ERASE (LSK 6L) will undo all
changes to the route and return to the ACT Route status. If confirm erase route modifications is configured, then
upon pressing ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts on line select
keys 6L and 6R respectively.

RESTORE [6L]: Displayed (in amber) only when the route's origin is deleted in RTE 1/X page. Used to restore
the active route.

ACTIVATE [6R]: Displayed only when route is not active. Key pressed will cause the EXEC key to illuminate.

OFFSET [6R]: Displayed only when in flight or en-route. To initiate offset (parallel track) navigation enter
lateral offset (L99.9-R99.9) and press [EXEC]. Maximum desired lateral offset distance left or right of course is
99.9 nm. Entry is allowed only in flight if the path to the active waypoint is a track to fix leg or a Direct-To; and
not part of an approach procedure; and not terminated by an outbound leg of type Search or Hold; and not part
of an active CARP procedure. Entry of 0 or performing a [CLR] key will cancel the offset. The default OFFSET
display when an offset has not been entered or after a cancellation will be R0.0.

CONFIRM [6R]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-152
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RTE x LADDER 1/1

Display RTE x LADDER 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, and <LADDER>
(active route) or [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], <LADDER> (inactive route) or [LEGS], “/S”
in the scratchpad entered next to the Search waypoint already defined as a Ladder pattern. Or [TACT],
<LADDER> {if TACT key configured and LADDER configured on the TACTICAL page}.

Automatically accessed whenever a route is executed when a search pattern that has not been activated is
present in the modified route. The displayed SAR page is selected in the following order of priority:
• the current page, if already in a SAR page; or
• the last modified SAR page; or
• the last selected SAR page from DES+SAR or TACTICAL page.

NOTE: Each pressing of the [NEXT]/[PREVIOUS] key will cause the display of the three search pattern pages:
SQUARE, SECTOR, or LADDER.

Listed below are the different ways to create a search pattern waypoint if no search pattern was already defined
in the route:

A. Search Pattern at a Route Waypoint – Active Route & modified Active Route only:
1. Enter “/S” or a valid waypoint identifier followed by “/S” in the scratchpad.
2. Display the desired waypoint location in the route by pressing [LEGS] (and [NEXT] as desired) and
press the appropriate LSK to append the “/S” to the desired waypoint or to enter the waypoint followed
by “/S” into the route (MOD RTE X SQUARE 1/1 page is displayed).
3. Using [NEXT] or [PREV] keys, select the desired Search pattern page: RTE X SQUARE 1/1, RTE X
SECTOR 1/1 or RTE X LADDER 1/1.
4. Enter desired Search parameters.
5. Press <ACTIVATE> softkey to store the desired Search parameters into the Search route waypoint
record.
6. Arm the search by pressing EXEC.

B. Search Pattern Waypoint Created from SAR Pages (e.g. Off-Route Waypoint) – Active Route & modified
Active Route only:
1. Display RTE X SQUARE 1/1, RTE X LADDER 1/1 or RTE X SECTOR 1/1 by pressing [INIT REF],
<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, <SQUARE> or <LADDER> or <SECTOR>.
2. Enter a valid waypoint identifier in ID [LSK 1L] field or REF ID [LSK 2L] field.
3. Enter desired Search parameters.
4. Press <ACTIVATE> softkey to create a Search pattern waypoint with the desired Search parameters
into the MOD route.
5. Arm the search by pressing EXEC.

C. Search Pattern at the Present Position (A/C must be Airborne) – Active Route & modified Active Route only:
1. Display RTE X SQUARE 1/1, RTE X SECTOR 1/1 or RTE X LADDER 1/1 by pressing [INIT REF],
<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, <SQUARE> or <LADDER> or <SECTOR>.
2. Select the present position search mode by pressing <PPOS> at [LSK 5L].
3. Enter desired Search parameters.
4. Press <ACTIVATE> softkey to store the desired Search parameters into the Search route waypoint
record.
5. Initiate an immediate search at present position by pressing EXEC.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-153
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

D. Search Pattern at a Route Waypoint – Inactive Route & modified Inactive Route only:
1. Enter “/S” or a valid waypoint identifier followed by “/S” in the scratchpad.
2. Display the desired waypoint location in the route by pressing [LEGS] (and [NEXT] as desired) and
press the appropriate LSK to append the “/S” to the desired waypoint or to enter the waypoint followed
by “/S” into the route (RTE X SQUARE 1/1 page is displayed).
3. Using [NEXT] or [PREV] keys, select the desired Search pattern page: RTE X SQUARE 1/1, RTE X
SECTOR 1/1 or RTE X LADDER 1/1.
4. Enter desired Search parameters.
5. Press <CONFIRM> softkey to store the desired Search parameters into the Search route waypoint
record and confirm the modifications to the inactive route.

E. Search Pattern Waypoint Created from SAR Pages (e.g. Off-Route Waypoint) – Inactive Route & modified
Inactive Route only:
1. Display RTE X SQUARE 1/1, RTE X LADDER 1/1 or RTE X SECTOR 1/1 by pressing [INIT REF],
<DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], <SQUARE> or <LADDER> or <SECTOR>
2. Enter a valid waypoint identifier in ID [LSK 1L] field or REF ID [LSK 2L] field.
3. Enter desired Search parameters.
4. Press <CONFIRM> softkey to create a Search pattern waypoint with the desired Search parameters
into the inactive route. Any other modification in the modified inactive route is confirmed at the same
time.

To define a new search pattern or a search pattern at present position, it is necessary to delete any previous
search pattern.

To cancel an active search pattern, it is necessary to perform a direct-to procedure to any waypoint or to land
the aircraft.

To delete an inactive search pattern, type ‘/’ in the scratchpad, then press the softkey corresponding to the
search anchor waypoint.

NOTE: The parameters of the inactive SAR may be lost if not confirmed before a page change is performed.

F. Creating a LADDER SAR from the Active route LADDER 1/1 page (before pressing <ACTIVATE> (LSK 6R),
before pressing [EXEC]):
RTE 1 LADDER 1/1
ID LEG LENGTH
1L
YUL02 2.0N M 1R
REF ID TRACK SPACING
2L ----- 1.0N M 2R
SAR BRG
3L 155T 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 72 K T NONE 4R

5L <PPOS 5R

6L <CANCEL ACTIVATE> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-154
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

G. LADDER SAR from the Active route LADDER 1/1 page (after pressing <ACTIVATE> (LSK 6R), before
pressing [EXEC]):
MOD RTE 1 LADDER 1/1
ID LEG LENGTH
1L
YUL02 2.0N M 1R
REF ID TRACK SPACING
2L ----- 1.0N M 2R
SAR BRG
3L 155T 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 72 K T LADDER 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

H. LADDER SAR from the Active route LADDER 1/1 page (after pressing [EXEC]):
RTE 1 LADDER 1/1
ID LEG LENGTH
1L
YUL02 2.0N M 1R
REF ID TRACK SPACING
2L ----- 1.0N M 2R
SAR BRG
3L 155T 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 72 K T LADDER 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

I. When LADDER SAR is in progress in the Active route LADDER 1/1 page:
RTE 1 LADDER 1/1
ID LEG LENGTH
1L
YUL02 2.0N M 1R
REF ID TRACK SPACING
2L ----- 1.0N M 2R
SAR BRG
3L 155T 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 72 K T LADDER 4R

5L CURRENT WPT ENTRY WPT 5R

01 00
6L INTERRUPT> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-155
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

J. Resuming a LADDER SAR from the Active route RTE x LADDER 1/1 page (before pressing [EXEC]):

MOD RTE 1 LADDER 1/1

ID LEG LENGTH
1L
YUL02 2.0N M 1R
REF ID TRACK SPACING
2L ----- 1.0N M 2R
SAR BRG
o
3L 155 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 72 K T LADDER 4R
CURRENT WPT ENTRY WPT
5L 01 03 5R

6L <ERASE RESUME 6R

K. When inserting or modifying a LADDER SAR from the Inactive route LADDER 1/1 page:

RTE 2 LADDER 1/1

ID LEG LENGTH
1L
OLT 2.0N M 1R
REF ID TRACK SPACING
2L ----- 1.0N M 2R
SAR BRG
o
3L 155 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 72 KT NONE 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

L. LADDER SAR from the Inactive route LADDER 1/1 page (after pressing CONFIRM)

RTE 2 LADDER 1/1

ID LEG LENGTH
1L OLT 2.0N M 1R
REF ID TRACK SPACING
2L ----- 1.0N M 2R
SAR BRG
o
3L 155 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 72 KT LADDER 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-156
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACT/MOD/blank(STATUS): MOD indicates the search is not being executed. ACT indicates that the search
pattern is being executed. "blank" indicates an executed search fix has not been reached or the search pattern
for the inactive route is being displayed.

ID [1L]: Name of starting search pattern waypoint. If a search pattern waypoint is defined in route, its identifier
is displayed in the field and it cannot be overwritten. Otherwise, waypoint entries are allowed, except for moving
waypoint, and the entered identifier is displayed, if any. If no entries were made to both ID & REF ID fields, 5
boxes “ ” are displayed. Else, if an entry was made in REF ID field, 5 dashes “-----“ are displayed.

NOTE: When a new ID is entered, the operator should clear the relative bearing and distance data field relative
to the previous ID by pressing [NEXT] then [PREV].

REF ID [2L]: Name of waypoint considered to be a reference for the relative bearing/distance elements
entered in the fields 3L and 4L. If a search pattern waypoint is defined in the route, the field is filled with 5
dashes “-----“ and no entry is allowed. Otherwise, entries are allowed and the entered identifier is displayed, if
any. If no entries were made to both ID & REF ID fields, 5 boxes “ ” are displayed. Else, if an entry was
made in ID field, 5 dashes “-----“ are displayed.

LEG LENGTH [1R]: Value of the leg length (between 0.1 and 40 nm). The parameter is kept in non-volatile
memory (NVM) and its initial default value is 2.0 nm. Subsequent change of the parameter value, validated by
pressing the <ACTIVATE> softkey followed by the EXEC key, will become the new default value kept in non-
volatile memory (NVM). This default value is preserved even after a cold-start.

RELATIVE BRG [3L]: The relative bearing of the search pattern entry waypoint compared to the reference
REF ID. This field is displayed as long as REF ID contains an entry (000T True or 000° Magnetic is the default
value).

TRACK SPACING [2R]: Value of the width length (between 0.1 and 40 nm). The parameter is kept in NVM
and its initial default value is 1.0 nm. Subsequent change of the parameter value, validated by pressing the
<ACTIVATE> softkey followed by the EXEC key, will become the new default value kept in NVM. This default
value is preserved even after a cold-start.

SAR BRG [3R]: Value of the bearing (TRUE or MAG) of the first leg in the Search pattern (000T or 000° is the
default value).

DISTANCE [4L]: The distance of the search pattern entry waypoint from the reference REF ID. This field is
displayed as long as REF ID contains an entry and the displayed default value is 10.0 nm. Minimum and
maximum valid values are 0.1 nm and 99.9 nm respectively.

MAX GS (4L): The maximum Ground Speed required to fly the pattern without overshoot. This field is displayed
only after a valid waypoint identifier has been entered, and is mutually exclusive with the DISTANCE field.
This maximum ground speed is re-computed every time a modification is performed on the search parameters
(track spacing, leg length, diameter or angle).

ACTIVE SAR [4R]: Type of the active search pattern present in the flight plan. When there is no active search
pattern “none” is displayed.

PPOS [5L]: The search pattern is started at the present position. Toggles between PPOS and CURRENT
WPT # (displayed only after the search pattern is active). The PPOS prompt becomes available only for active
route in the air and if the active route does not contain another search pattern waypoint.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-157
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CURRENT WPT (5L): Number of the search waypoint towards which the aircraft flies. Displayed only for a
search pattern waypoint in progress and only on the Search page of the selected pattern. The field value
increases as the aircraft overflies the search waypoints. The range of values for this field is:
• [02->80] if an EFIS of type IFDS is configured;
• [01->79] for all other EFIS types.

ENTRY WPT [5R]: Number of the search pattern entry waypoint. Displayed only for a search pattern
waypoint in progress and only on the search page of the selected pattern. The field value remains fixed but can
be modified manually by first interrupting (via INTERRUPT prompt) the search pattern and then resuming it (via
RESUME prompt) at a new ENTRY WPT value. At the beginning of a new search, the value of this field goes
back to its default value:
• 01 if an EFIS of type IFDS is configured;
• 00 for all other EFIS types.
The allowed range of input values for this field is:
• [02->80] if an EFIS of type IFDS is configured;
• [01->79] for all other EFIS types.

ERASE [6L]: Cancel the changes made to the modified active route. If confirm erase route modifications is
configured, then upon pressing ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying CANCEL and CONFIRM
prompts on line select keys 6L and 6R respectively.

CANCEL [6L]: Erase all the fields and sets the Search parameters back to their default values. For the inactive
route only, it will also cancel the modifications made to the inactive route and will command display of LEGS
page, if the cancellation follows modifications to the inactive route.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

RESTORE [6L]: Is displayed only if the route was erased on the RTE 1/X page. Used to restore the active
route.

NOTE: CANCEL appears when NOT in modified and when the ACTIVATE key is present (e.g. Search pattern
parameters are entered in the SAR page but no Search pattern waypoint defined in route yet).

ACTIVATE/INTERRUPT/RESUME/CONFIRM [6R]:
• ACTIVATE is displayed (in green) only when the pattern is not active in the active route or the modified active
route. It creates the Search pattern waypoint into the modified active route, if no search pattern waypoint
already exists. Otherwise, it is used to confirm further modifications to the search pattern waypoint. Once the
search pattern waypoint is activated but not in progress yet, the search pattern parameters can be modified at
will (TRACK SPACING, LEG LENGTH, DIAMETER, ANGLE, TRUE BRG, ENTRY WPT #) causing
CANCEL/ERASE/ACTIVATE prompts to reappear every time a parameter is modified. If the search procedure
is created using the Search menu ([INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, <SQUARE> or <LADDER> or
<SECTOR>, ACTIVATE enters the search waypoint as the first waypoint in the flight plan (followed by a
discontinuity and the rest of the waypoints). If the search procedure is created using “/S” on the LEGS page,
the <ACTIVATE> softkey updates the search pattern waypoint parameters.
• INTERRUPT is used to initiate an interruption of the Search pattern. When the INTERRUPT LSK is pressed,
its color changes from green to inverse green, the active search pattern becomes a modified one, and the
EXEC lamp illuminates. The current waypoint field freezes to the number of the last TO search waypoint and
the CMA-9000 FMS disables the steering command (upon EXEC key press).
• RESUME is used when an interrupted SAR pattern needs to be restarted from a search waypoint entered in
the ENTRY WPT field (LSK 5R). When the RESUME LSK is pressed, its color changes from green to inverse
green, the EXEC lamp illuminates, and a value can be entered in the ENTRY WPT field (entry is permitted
only after RESUME was pressed).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-158
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

• For modified active route: CONFIRM is displayed if ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM. For modified
inactive route: CONFIRM is used to confirm the changes made to the inactive route. However, when it is
displayed following the creation of a search pattern waypoint into the modified inactive route or following
modifications to the search parameters in the inactive route, then pressing the CONFIRM prompt will
confirm the changes made to the search pattern and other changes made to the inactive route (same
functionality as the ACTIVATE prompt for the active route & modified active route).

NOTES:
• The INTERRUPT/RESUME keys is displayed only on the search pattern page corresponding to the executed
pattern (e.g. if a LADDER pattern was executed, INTERRUPT/RESUME appears only on the LADDER pattern
page).
• Using the [NEXT]/[PREV] keys on one of the search pattern pages causes selection of the next/previous
search pattern page respective of the following order: SQUARE, SECTOR, LADDER.
• Re-entry into the pattern using RESUME is not permitted on the search origin, e.g. ENTRY WPT cannot be
equal to:
• 01 if an EFIS of type IFDS is configured
• 00 for all other EFIS types
• Pressing the <ACTIVATE> prompt, while valid entries exist for REF ID, RELATIVE BRG & DISTANCE fields,
will cause the creation of a Search pattern waypoint located at the position of the REF ID waypoint offset by
the BRG/DIS elements. A new waypoint identifier will be created and displayed in the ID field. The REF ID
field will be filled with dashes and the RELATIVE BRG & DIST fields (title and data) will disappear.
• Entering a valid waypoint identifier in the ID field, while valid entries already exist for REF ID, RELATIVE
BRG and DISTANCE fields, will cause the REF ID field to be filled with dashes and the RELATIVE BRG and
DISTANCE fields (title and data) to disappear.

RTE x LEGS 1/X

The RTE x LEGS page is used to display and modify the active flight plan. Waypoints can be created, inserted
and deleted. This also applies to approach procedure waypoints preceeding the missed approach point (MAP).
A holding pattern can be defined on any waypoint. Waypoints can be converted from fly-by (with turn
anticipation) to fly-over (no turn anticipation). Exceptions to this are moving waypoints, which can be only fly-
over. Moving waypoints may also be inserted or removed from the flight plan; however, no procedures may be
attached. The seven illustrations below demonstrate the different display formats this page may have depending
on the function being performed.

When a DMAP waypoint is received and the DMAP Append mode is ON, the LEGS page containing the
appended waypoint is displayed {ELBIT, EURONAV , EURONAV_A702 or DMAP configuration only}.

Display ACT RTE LEGS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS].

A. Normal ACTIVE format:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/2

264o 12.8N M
1L
JOH /H
1R
262o 113N M
2L D173J 280/1600A 2R
263o RARCANC 10.6N M
3L D233J 1600A 3R
053o CRS 10.0N M
4L ANC FAF 4R
053o CRS 5.09N M
5L RW06R / O MAP 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-159
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Active route with Route Discontinuity:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 2/2

299o 39.6N M
1L N51W125 300-320 1R
298o 154N M
2L YZP FL350B 2R
320o 45.0N M
3L YZP01 3R
THEN
4L 4R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
5L KILLA 5R

6L LEGS ETA> 6R

C. Inactive route with Discontinuity:

RTE 2 LEGS 2/2

299o 39.6N M
1L
N51W125 300-320 1R
298o 154N M
2L YZP FL350B 2R
320o 45.0N M
3L YZP01 3R
THEN
4L 4R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
5L KILLA 5R

6L <RTE 1 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

D. Route modification in progress:

MOD RTE 1 LEGS 1/2

188o P-T 2.25N M
1L
ANCPTR 1600A 1R
R053o CRS 4.86N M
2L ANC FAF 2R
053o CRS 5.09N M
3L RW06R / O MAP 3R
THEN
4L 4R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
5L RW014 / O 194 5R

6L <ERASE LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-160
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E. Inactive route modification in progress:

RTE 2 LEGS 1/2

188o P-T 2.25N M
1L ANCPTR 1600A 1R
R053o CRS 4.86N M
2L ANC /H
2R
053o CRS 5.09N M
3L RW06R / O 3R
THEN
4L 4R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
5L RW014 / O 194 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

F. LEGS page in PLAN mode:

CTR RTE 1 LEGS 1/2

264o 12.8N M
1L JOH CTR 1R
262o 120N M
2L D173J 280/1600A 2R
263o RARCANC 10.6N M
3L D233J 1600A 3R
053o CRS 10.0N M
4L ANC FAF 4R
053o CRS 5.09N M
5L RW06R /OMAP 5R
MAP CTR
6L STEP> 6R

G. Active route erased:

MOD RTE 1 LEGS 1/4

1L
. 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <RESTORE LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-161
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

H. Normal Active page with Temperature compensated altitudes:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/1
312T 13.1N M
1L
AGBEK 2785
1R
314T 13.6N M
2L L FAF 2348 2R
314T 3.6N M
3L RW33 /OMAP 596
3R
314T 10.6N M
4L (3000) 3000A 4R
314T 3.0N M
5L YSO 5000 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

I. Normal ACTIVE page with CARP procedure:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/1
312T 13.1N M
1L IP01 /OIP .
1R
314T 13.6N M
2L TP01 / O TP . 2R
314T 3.6N M
3L SD01 /OSD .
3R
314T 10.6N M
4L CRP01 / O CRP 4R
314T 3.0N M
5L XTE01 XTE 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

ACT/MOD/CTR(title): ACT: Displaying active route legs.

MOD: Displaying modified route legs.
CTR: EFIS center step mode active.

PAGE NUMBER (title): Number of available LEGS pages. The Active TO waypoint is located on the first page:
RTE LEGS 1/X.

LEG COURSE: For the active waypoint: Present course/heading to be flown. For all downtrack waypoints: 1)
Initial course for that leg. 2) Stored procedural course. 3) Stored procedural heading (Heading have the suffix
HDG). Courses and headings are magnetic (°) or true course (T) based on configuration. Field is blank if the
leg direction is undefined (e.g. for a route discontinuity).

LEG DISTANCE: For the active waypoint: Distance to go from present position to the waypoint.

NOTE: For vectors and altitude legs: Blank. For the next (upcoming) leg: Flight plan leg distance.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-162
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

WAYPOINT IDENTIFIER [1L, 2L, 3L, 4L, 5L]: Up to 7 characters (5 characters if Tactical Approach is
configured). Used for entry and/or display of any valid waypoint identifier. Valid entries are: Identifier, Latitude
Longitude, Place/Bearing/Distance, Place/Bearing-Place/ Bearing and Along Track Distance. The active
waypoint identifier is displayed on top of RTE LEGS 1/X page in reverse video (black on white or black on
magenta, or magenta), depending on the installation. The active waypoint cannot be deleted but may be
overwritten. Conditional waypoints cannot be manually entered. They appear as a result of procedure selection
via the DEPARTURES and/or ARRIVALS pages.
If CARP is configured and CRP01/C is entered manually, the waypoints of the CARP procedure (TP, SD, CRP,
XTE, and ESC), except IP, are immediately inserted in the LEGS page and the CARP PLAN 1/3 page is
displayed. If an identifier followed by /C is entered, the waypoints of the CARP procedure (TP, SD, CRP, XTE,
and ESC), except IP, are immediately inserted in the LEGS page and the CARP PLAN 1/3 page is displayed
with the waypoint identifier as PI. IP is only shown in the LEGS pages once it is defined in the CARP PLAN 1/3
page. The CARP procedure waypoints (IP, TP, SD, CRP, XTE, and ESC) are an indivisible group, with no
possibility of removal of a single waypoint or insertion of a waypoint in between. Pressing the LSK of any CARP
procedure waypoint when the scratchpad is empty brings “CRP01” to the scratchpad.

WAYPOINT PROCEDURE [1L, 2L, 3L, 4L, 5L]: Slash symbol legends indicate a special procedure is
associated with a waypoint: "/H" for holding pattern procedure at waypoint, "/O" for overfly waypoint, "/S" for
search waypoint, “/C” for CARP procedures, "/T" for tactical direct-to, “/A” for tactical approach runway threshold
waypoints. Procedures are cancelled by entering “/” into the scratchpad and pressing the appropriate LSK.
Entering /C over any CARP procedure waypoint displays the CARP PLAN 1/3 page. Entering /C over any other
existing waypoint in the flight plan is not allowed. Entering / over any CARP procedure waypoint removes the
CARP procedure and CRP01 waypoint from the flight plan. From the point of view of the following operations,
the CARP procedure waypoints are an indivisible group and are treated as one waypoint (e.g. the operation on
any waypoint in the procedure produces the same effect as if the procedure was one waypoint): “DELETE”,
close-up of a down path waypoint, insertion of an off-route waypoint. If a CARP procedure is being flown and
some of its points are sequenced, then a direct-to operation deletes the CARP procedure from the flight plan.
If Tactical Approach is present in the flight plan, the following 3 methods can be used to delete the tactical
approach from the flight plan:
• Entering a forward slash / in the scratchpad and inserting this at the LSK location next to the tactical
approach runway threshold waypoint (e.g. MAP waypoint) in the flight plan (provided none of the tactical
approach procedure related waypoints is currently an active waypoint)
• Closing out a route. This will completely remove all 3 tactical approach waypoints.
• Selecting a new destination.

NOTE: That the last item above will not generate any scratchpad message indicating that an approach already
exists in the flight plan. The rationale for this that the crew would be well aware of their intent to enter a
new destination and as such would be no different in philosophy than them selecting a destination to a
new civil destination (e.g. any approach existing in the flight plan would automatically be deleted).

SPEED CONSTRAINTS (or RESTRICTIONS) [1R, 2R, 3R, 4R, 5R]: Display of mandatory speed in knots
(coming from the Navigation Database or pilot-entered) at the waypoint identified on the same line. Speed
constraints require an altitude constraint at same waypoint. Speed constraints may be manually entered,
modified and deleted (1 to 999 Knots).
The speed/altitude constraints extracted from the navigation database are displayed in small font.
The field to scratchpad transfer of speed constraint is rejected.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-163
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS (or RESTRICTIONS) [1R, 2R, 3R, 4R, 5R]: Display of mandatory altitude -
constraints (coming from the Navigation Database or pilot-entered) in one of the following ways:
• The suffix A identifies a crossing restriction at or above the displayed value (example display A: 1600A
means cross D173J at or above 1600 feet).
• The suffix B identifies a crossing restriction at or below the displayed value (example display B: FL350B
means cross YZP at or below flight level 350).
• Two flight level values separated by "-" identify an altitude window crossing restriction (example display B:
300-320 means cross N51W125 between flight levels 300 and 320).

The speed/altitude constraints extracted from the navigation database are displayed in small font.If the FMS is
configured for VNAV, approach and approach transition waypoint altitude constraints are temperature-
compensated, provided that destination airport temperature was entered on the VNAV page. Temperature-
compensated altitudes constraints are displayed in reverse video white.

Altitude constraints may be manually entered, modified and deleted, given the following rules:
• Navigation Database constraints can never be deleted. They can only be modified. Deletion of pilot-
entered constraint brings back the original constraint (if any) from the Navigation Database.
• For SIDS, approach, tactical approach (if configured), approach-transition and missed approach waypoints
(except for altitude terminated legs), the pilot cannot enter an altitude restriction lower than the one from the
Navigation Database or the one as determined by the tactical approach geometry computation if configured
for tactical approaches.
• For altitude terminated legs, the altitude constraint cannot be modified. The range for constraint is from 1 to
65000 Feet.
• Entries of three digits or less are considered as a flight level unless the waypoint is part of the final
approach, in which case all entries are interpreted in feet.
• Entries of four or five digits are considered to be an altitude in feet.
• Entries with a decimal point are rejected.

The field to scratchpad transfer of altitude constraints are rejected.

ROUTE TERMINATION: Dash prompts follow the last waypoint of the route.

ROUTE DISCONTINUITY: The route is not forming a continuous path of linked waypoints. A discontinuity will
be inserted into the flight plan if the end of the leg is indeterminate. The route discontinuity can be removed by
close up, e.g. by copying a waypoint following the discontinuity to a position preceding or on the discontinuity.

ERASE [6L]: Displayed only when a route modification is in progress. Used to erase modifications. If confirm
erase route modifications is configured, then upon pressing ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying
CANCEL and CONFIRM prompts on line select keys 6L and 6R respectively.

RESTORE [6L]: Displayed only if the Route was erased on the RTE 1/X page. Used to restore the active
route.

RTE 1 LEGS [6L]: Access to the RTE 1 LEGS 1/X page.

RTE 2 LEGS [6L]: Access to the RTE 2 LEGS 1/X page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-164
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

LEGS ETA [6R]: Access to the corresponding RTE LEGS ETA Y/X page.

MAP CTR STEP [6R]: Prompt appears when EFIS CP is in PLAN mode. Used to move the center of the EFIS
MAP display to the next waypoint in the flight plan.

INTC CRS XXX° [6R]: Not shown. Prompt appears on a Direct-To leg entry, except for a moving waypoint. A
desired inbound course to the Direct-To Waypoint may be entered by keying the course into the scratchpad and
pressing LSK 6R.

HOLD PPOS [6R]: Not shown. Prompt appears on pressing of HOLD key in flight. Used to define a Holding
Pattern at present position. Access to the HOLD 1/X page.

MISSED APPR [6R]: Not shown. If configured for display, prompt appears during final GPS instrument
approach with no route modification in progress. If the prompt is configured for display, pressing the line select
key adjacent to the prompt, the FMS will automatically sequence the Missed Approach Point (MAP) to the
missed approach procedure.

NEXT WPT [6R]: Not shown. Prompt is displayed when automatic waypoint sequencing is not possible.
Examples include when the active leg is vector, or an altitude-terminated leg without a Baro-Corrected Altitude
input. Pressing NEXT WPT results in an immediate transition of navigation and guidance to the next waypoint
in the flight plan.

CONFIRM [6R]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

FAF,MAP,CTR, MOV: FAF is displayed when the waypoint is defined as the Final Approach Fix. MAP is
displayed when waypoint is defined as the Missed Approach Point. CTR also appears in the title when in MAP
CTR STEP mode. MOV is displayed when the waypoint is a moving waypoint. All are displayed in reverse white
color.

IP, TP, SD, CRP, XTE, ESC: CARP Procedure waypoint indications are displayed in reverse white.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-165
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RTE x LEGS ETA 1/X

Provides the ETA and EFA for each waypoint on the corresponding RTE LEGS Y/X page.

Display ACT RTE LEGS ETA Y/X page by pressing [LEGS] and <LEGS ETA>.

A. Normal ACTIVE format:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS ETA 1/4

ETA EFA
1L
CAFTA 1916.4Z 1328K G
1R

2L YZP 1950.2Z 1 1 8 5 KG
2R

3L MOCA1 2000.7Z 1 1 7 9 KG 3R

4L BKA 2044.5Z 9 5 0 KG 4R

5L KILLA 2127.0Z 7 9 2 KG 5R

6L <LEGS LEGS POS> 6R

B. LEGS ETA during a MOD:

MOD RTE 1 LEGS ETA 1/4
ETA EFA
1L CAFTA 1916.4Z 1328K G
1R

2L YZP 1950.2Z 1 1 8 5 KG
2R

3L MOCA1 2000.7Z 1 1 7 9 KG
3R

4L BKA 2044.5Z 9 5 0 KG 4R

5L KILLA 2127.0Z 7 9 2 KG 5R

6L <ERASE LEGS POS> 6R

C. LEGS ETA Index of Inactive route:

RTE 2 LEGS ETA 2/4

ETA EFA
1L
CAFTA 1916.4z 1 3 2 8 KG
1R

2L YZP 1950.2z 1 1 8 5 KG
2R

3L MOCA1 2000.7z 1 1 7 9 KG 3R

4L BKA 2044.5z 9 5 0 KG 4R

5L KILLA 2127.0z 7 9 2 KG 5R

6L <LEGS SIMUL RTE2> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-166
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

D. Active route erased:

MOD RTE 1 LEGS ETA 1/1

ETA EFA
1L -END OF ROUTE-
1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <RESTORE LEGS POS> 6R

E. Active route restored:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS ETA 1/4

ETA EFA
1L CAFTA 1916.4Z 1328K G
1R

2L YZP 1950.2Z 1 1 8 5 KG
2R

3L MOCA1 2000.7Z 1 1 7 9 KG
3R

4L BKA 2044.5Z 9 5 0 KG 4R

5L KILLA 2127.0Z 7 9 2 KG 5R

6L <LEGS LEGS POS> 6R

F. Fuel page not configured:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS ETA 1/4

ETA
1L
CAFTA 1916.4Z
1R

2L YZP 1950.2z
2R

3L MOCA1 2000.7z 3R

4L BKA 2044.5z 4R

5L KILLA 2127.0z 5R

6L <LEGS LEGS POS> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-167
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

G. Units configured to lbs using 5R prompt on FUEL page:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS ETA 1/4

ETA EFA
1L
CAFTA 1916.4Z 2927L B
1R

2L YZP 1950.2z 2 6 1 2 LB
2R

3L MOCA1 2000.7z 2 5 9 9 LB
3R

4L BKA 2044.5z 2 0 9 4 LB 4R

5L KILLA 2127.0z 1 7 4 6 LB 5R

6L <LEGS LEGS POS> 6R

WAYPOINT IDENTIFIER [1L, 2L, 3L, 4L, 5L]: Displays the same identifiers as on the corresponding RTE
LEGS Y/X page.

ETA (1L,2L,3L,4L,5L): Displays ETA of the waypoint identified on the same line. If a route discontinuity exists,
subsequent ETAs are based on an assumed great circle course across the discontinuity.
On ground, TAS is set to zero hence ETA is blank.

NOTE: On ground, ETEs are displayed instead of ETAs if the PLAN DATA page is configured. If it is not
configured, the field is blank.

LEGS [6L]: Returns to the corresponding RTE LEGS Y/X page. To display the RTE LEGS 1/X page and the
active waypoint, press the LEGS function key.

ERASE [6L]: Erases route modifications (if any). If confirm erase route modifications is configured, then upon
pressing ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying CANCEL and CONFIRM prompts on line select keys
6L and 6R respectively.

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

RESTORE [6L]: Displayed only if the route was erased on the RTE 1/X page. Used to restore the active route.

EFA (1R, 2R, 3R, 4R, 5R): Estimated Fuel at Arrival. Estimated remaining Fuel quantity at waypoint based on
the fuel consumption rate. If a route discontinuity exists, subsequent EFAs are based on an assumed great
circle course across the discontinuity. Field is not displayed when fuel weight (excluding reserve) or fuel flow or
true airspeed or wind are not available. For the active route, this field is not displayed if the FUEL page is not
configured. For the inactive route, this field is not displayed if the FUEL page or Simulation pages are not
configured. Units are toggled from the 5R field on the FUEL 1/2 page (units of kg or lb).

LEGS POS [6R]: Access to the corresponding RTE LEGS POS Y/X page. Display depends on the selected
coordinates system and datum.

SIMUL RTEx [6R]: Access to the SIMUL RTEx 3/3 page (only available on the inactive route LEGS ETA page
when the SIMULATION pages have been configured and when ACTIVATE has not been selected).

NOTE: RTEx can correspond to RTE1 or RTE2 based on which route is the inactive route.

CONFIRM [6R]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-168
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RTE x LEGS POS 1/X

Provides the position in latitude and longitude, using the WGS 84 Earth model, for each waypoint on the
corresponding RTE LEGS Y/X page.
Display ACT RTE LEGS POS 1/X page by pressing [LEGS], <LEGS ETA> and <LEGS POS > (active route) or
[LEGS], <LEGS ETA>, <SIMUL RTEx >, <LEGS POS> (inactive route - only when the SIMULATION pages are
configured).

A. Normal ACTIVE format:

ACT RTE 1 LEGS POS 1/2

1L CAFTA .
1R
N51o17.72 W129o05.32
2L YZP 2R
N53o15.13 W131o48.42
3L MOCA1 3R
N54o30.18 W133o01.90
4L BKA 4R
N56o51.57 W135o33.08
5L KILLA 5R
N58o44.98 W140o35.10
6L <LEGS ETA LEGS> 6R

B. LEGS POS during a MOD:

MOD RTE 1 LEGS POS 1/2

1L
CAFTA .
1R
N51o17.72 W129o05.32
2L
YZP 2R
N53o15.13 W131o48.42
3L
MOCA1
3R
N54o30.18 W133o01.90
4L
BKA 4R
N56o51.57 W135o33.08
5L KILLA 5R
N58o44.98 W140o35.10
6L <ERASE LEGS> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-169
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. LEGS POS of INACTIVE route (when SIMUL page is configured:

RTE 2 LEGS POS 1/2

1L
CAFTA
1R
N51o17.72 W129o05.32
2L
YZP 2R
N53o15.13 W131o48.42
3L
MOCA1
3R
N54o30.18 W133o01.90
4L
BKA 4R
N56o51.57 W135o33.08
5L KILLA 5R
N58o44.98 W140o35.10
6L <SIMUL RTE2 LEGS> 6R

D. LEGS POS Index of INACTIVE route during a mod:

RTE 2 LEGS POS 1/2

1L
CAFTA
1R
N51o17.72 W129o05.32
2L
YZP 2R
N53o15.13 W131o48.42
3L
MOCA1
3R
N54o30.18 W133o01.90
4L
BKA 4R
N56o51.57 W135o33.08
5L KILLA 5R
N58o44.98 W140o35.10
6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

WAYPOINT IDENTIFIER (1L,2L,3L,4L,5L): Displays the same identifiers as on the corresponding RTE LEGS
Y/X page.

LEGS ETA [6L]: Returns to the corresponding RTE LEGS ETA Y/X page.

ERASE [6L]: Erase route modifications. If confirm erase route modifications is configured, then upon pressing
ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying CANCEL and CONFIRM prompts on line select keys 6L and
6R respectively.

RESTORE [6L]: Displayed only if the RTE was erased on the RTE 1/X page. Used to restore the active route.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

SIMUL RTEx [6L]: Access to the SIMUL RTEx 3/3 page (only available on the inactive route LEGS POS
page when the SIMULATION pages have been configured and when ACTIVATE has not been selected).

NOTE: RTEx can correspond to RTE1 or RTE2 based on which route is the inactive route.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-170
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

LAT-LONG (1R, 2R, 3R, 4R, 5R): Display position of the waypoint identified on the previous line.

LEGS [6R]: Returns to the corresponding RTE LEGS Y/X page.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.

NOTE: Flight plan waypoint modifications are not permitted on the LEGS POS page.

RTE x SECTOR 1/1

To access SECTOR 1/1page, press

[INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL> and <SECTOR> (on the active route) or
[INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], and <SECTOR> (on the inactive route) or
[TACT], <SECTOR> {if TACT key configured and SECTOR configured on the TACTICAL page} or
[LEGS], “/S” in scratchpad entered next to the Search waypoint already defined as a Sector pattern.
Automatically accessed whenever a route is executed when a search pattern that has not been activated is
present in the modified route. The displayed SAR page is selected in the following order of priority:
• the current page, if already in a SAR page; or
• the last modified SAR page; or
• the last selected SAR page from DES+SAR or TACTICAL page.

NOTE: Each pressing of the [NEXT]/[PREV] key will cause the display of the three search pattern pages:
SQUARE, SECTOR, or LADDER.

A. Interrupting a SECTOR SAR from the active route SECTOR 1/1 page:

MOD RTE 1 SECTOR 1/1

ID DIAMETER
1L CYUL 4.0N M 1R
REF ID ANGLE
o
2L ----- 30 2R
SAR BRG
T
3L 120 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 76 K T SECTOR 4R
CURRENT WPT ENTRY WPT
5L 01 01 5R

6L <ERASE INTERRUPT 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-171
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. When inserting of modifying a SECTOR SAR from the Inactive route SECTOR 1/1 page:

RTE 2 SECTOR 1/1

ID DIAMETER
1L
CMQ 10.0N M 1R
REF ID ANGLE
o
2L ----- 15 2R
SAR BRG
T
3L 120 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 93 K T NONE 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

C. SECTOR SAR from the Inactive route SECTOR 1/1 page (after pressing CONFIRM).

RTE 2 SECTOR 1/1

ID DIAMETER
1L
CMQ 10.0N M 1R
REF ID ANGLE
o
2L ----- 15 2R
SAR BRG
T
3L 120 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 93 K T NONE 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

ACT/MOD/blank(STATUS): MOD indicates the search is not being executed. ACT indicates that the search
pattern is being executed. "blank" indicates an executed search fix has not been reached.

ID [1L] ]: Name of starting search pattern waypoint. If a search pattern waypoint is defined in the route, its
identifier is displayed in the field and no entry is allowed. Otherwise, entries are allowed and the entered
identifier is displayed, if any. If no entries were made to both ID & REF ID fields, 5 boxes “ ” are
displayed. Else, if an entry was made in REF ID field, 5 dashes “-----“ are displayed.

NOTE: When a new ID is entered the operator should clear the relative bearing and distance data field relative
to the previous ID by pressing [NEXT] then [PREV].

DIAMETER [1R]: Value of the leg diameter (between 0.1 and 40 nm), default value is 4 nm. Subsequent
change of the parameter value, validated by pressing the <ACTIVATE> softkey followed by the EXEC key, will
become the new default value. This default value is preserved even after a cold-start.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-172
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

REF ID [2L]: Name of waypoint considered being a reference for the relative bearing/distance elements
entered in the fields 3L and 4L. If a Search pattern waypoint is defined in route, the field is filled with 5 dashes “-
----“ and no entry is allowed. Otherwise, entries are allowed and the entered identifier is displayed, if any. If no
entries were made to both ID & REF ID fields, 5 boxes “ ” are displayed. Else, if an entry has been made
in ID field, 5 dashes “-----“ are displayed.

ANGLE [2R]: Value of the angle (between 5 and 90°) of the search sector “slice”, default value is 30°.
Subsequent change of the parameter value, validated by pressing the <ACTIVATE> softkey followed by the
EXEC key, will become the new default value. This default value is preserved even after a cold-start.

RELATIVE BRG [3L]: The relative bearing of the search pattern entry waypoint compared to the reference REF
ID. This field is displayed as long as REF ID contains an entry and the displayed default value is 000°.

SAR BRG [3R]: Value of the bearing (TRUE or MAG) of the first leg in the Search pattern (000T or 000° is the
default value).

DISTANCE [4L]: The distance of the search pattern entry waypoint from the reference REF ID. This field is
displayed as long as REF ID contains an entry and the displayed default value is 10.0 nm.

MAX GS (4L): The maximum Ground Speed required to fly the pattern without overshoot. This field is displayed
only after a valid waypoint identifier has been entered, and is mutually exclusive with the DISTANCE field.
This maximum ground speed is re-computed every time a modification is performed on the search parameters
(track spacing, leg length, diameter or angle).

ACTIVE SAR [4R]: Type of the active search pattern present in the flight plan. When there is no active search
pattern “none” is displayed.

PPOS [5L]: The search pattern is started at the present position. Toggles between PPOS and CURRENT WPT
# (displayed only after the search pattern is active). The PPOS prompt becomes available only for the active route
in the air and if the active route does not contain another search pattern waypoint.

CURRENT WPT (5L): Number of the search waypoint towards which the aircraft flies. This value increases as
the aircraft overfly the search waypoints. The default value for this field is 01.

ENTRY WPT [5R]: Number of the search pattern entry waypoint. Displayed only for a search pattern waypoint
in progress and only on the Search page of the selected pattern. The default value of this field is 01 and can be
manually entered (changed) as long as the search was not executed. After the search was executed, the value
of this field stays fixed and cannot be manually changed (unless INTERRUPT/RESUME was pressed). The field
value remains fixed but can be modified manually by first interrupting (via INTERRUPT prompt) the search
pattern and then resuming it (via RESUME prompt) at a new ENTRY WPT value. If a search is cancelled or
erased (before being execution) the value of this field returns to its default value.
• 01 if an EFIS of type IFDS is configured;
• 00 for all other EFIS types.
The allowed range of input values for this field is:
• [02->80] if an EFIS of type IFDS is configured;
• [01->79] for all other EFIS types.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

ERASE [6L]: Cancels the changes made to the modified modifications is configured, then upon pressing
ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts on line select keys 6L and 6R
respectively.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-173
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Erase all the fields and set the Search parameters
back to their default values. For the inactive route only, it also cancel the modifications made to the inactive route
and command display of the LEGS page, if the cancellation follow modifications to the inactive route. CANCEL
appears:
• In active route (not modified) only when the <ACTIVATE> softkey is present (e.g. Search pattern
parameters are entered in the SAR page but no Search pattern waypoints are defined in the route) in the
modified inactive route.

RESTORE [6L]: Is displayed only if the RTE was erased on the RTE 1/X page. Used to restore the active
route.

ACTIVATE/INTERRUPT/RESUME/CONFIRM [6R]:
• ACTIVATE is displayed (in green) only when the pattern is not active in the active route or the modified active
route and after the fields on the page are filled. It creates the search pattern waypoint into the modified active
route, if no search pattern waypoint already exists. Otherwise, it is used to confirm further modifications to the
search pattern waypoint. Once the search pattern waypoint is activated but not in progress yet, the search
pattern parameters can be modified at will (LENGTH, WIDTH, TRUE BRG, ENTRY WPT #) causing
CANCEL/ERASE/ ACTIVATE prompts to reappear every time a parameter is modified. If the search procedure
is created using the Search menu ([INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, <SQUARE> or <LADDER> or
<SECTOR>, ACTIVATE enters the search waypoint as the first waypoint in the flight plan (followed by a
discontinuity and the rest of the waypoints). If the search procedure is created using “/S” on the LEGS page, the
ACTIVATE softkey updates the search pattern waypoint parameters.
• INTERRUPT is used to initiate an interruption of the search pattern. When the INTERRUPT LSK is pressed, its
color changes from green to inverse green, the active search pattern becomes a modified one, and the EXEC
lamp illuminates. The current waypoint # field freezes to the number of the last TO search waypoint and
disables the steering command (upon [EXEC] key press).

• RESUME is used when a SAR pattern needs to be restarted from a search waypoint entered in the ENTRY
WPT # field (LSK 5R). When the RESUME LSK is pressed, its color changes from green to inverse green, the
EXEC lamp illuminates, and a value can be entered in the ENTRY WPT # field (an entry the ENTRY WPT # is
permitted only after <RESUME> was pressed).
• For modified active route: CONFIRM is displayed if ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM. For modified
inactive route: CONFIRM is used to confirm the changes made to the inactive route. However, when it is
displayed following the creation of a search pattern waypoint into the modified inactive route or following
modifications to the search parameters in the inactive route, then pressing the CONFIRM prompt will confirm
the changes made to the search pattern and other changes made to the inactive route (same functionality as
the ACTIVATE prompt for the active route & modified active route).

After an INTERRUPT on the first leg of a search pattern, the re-entry into the pattern using RESUME is not
permitted on the search origin (e.g. ENTRY WPT # cannot be equal to 1).

NOTES:
• The INTERRUPT/RESUME keys is displayed only on the search pattern page corresponding to the executed
pattern (e.g. if a LADDER pattern was executed, INTERRUPT/RESUME appears only on the LADDER pattern
page).
• Pressing the ACTIVATE prompt, while valid entries exist for REF ID, RELATIVE BRG & DISTANCE fields,
will cause the creation of a search pattern waypoint located at the position of the REF ID waypoint offset by
the BRG/DIS fields elements. A new waypoint identifier will be created and displayed in the ID field. The
REF ID field will be filled with dashes and the RELATIVE BRG & DIST fields (title and data) will disappear.

• Entering a valid waypoint identifier in the ID field, while valid entries already exist for REF ID, RELATIVE
BRG and DISTANCE fields, will cause the REF ID field to be filled with dashes and the RELATIVE BRG and
DISTANCE fields (title and data) to disappear.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-174
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RTE x SQUARE 1/1

To access SQUARE 1/1page, press [INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL> and <SQUARE> (active route) or
[INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], and <SQUARE> (inactive route) or
[TACT], <SQUARE> {if TACT key configured and SQUARE configured on the TACTICAL page} or
LEGS], “/S” in scratchpad entered next to the Search waypoint already defined as a Square pattern or by default
upon creation of a Search pattern waypoint.
Automatically accessed whenever a route is executed when a search pattern that has not been activated is
present in the modified route. The displayed SAR page is selected in the following order of priority:
• the current page, if already in a SAR page; or
• the last modified SAR page; or
• the last selected SAR page from DES+SAR or TACTICAL page.

NOTE: Each pressing of the [NEXT]/[PREV] key will cause the display of the three search pattern pages:
SQUARE, SECTOR, or LADDER.

A. When creating a SQUARE SAR from the Active route SQUARE 1/1 page (before pressing <ACTIVATE>):

RTE 1 SQUARE 1/1

ID TRACK SPACING
1L
----- 1.0N M 1R
REF ID
2L YUL 2R
RELATIVE BRG SAR BRG
3L 000 T
000 T
3R
DISTANCE ACTIVE SAR
4L 10.0N M NONE 4R

5L <PPOS 5R

6L <CANCEL ACTIVATE> 6R

B. When SQUARE SAR is in progress in the Active route SQUARE 1/1 page:

ACT RTE 1 SQUARE 1/1

ID TRACK SPACING
1L
YUL01 1.0N M 6L
REF ID
2L ----- 2R
SAR BRG
3L 125 T
3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 72 K T SQUARE 4R
CURRENT WPT ENTRY WPT
5L 05 01 5R

6L INTERRUPT> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-175
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. When inserting or modifying a SQUARE SAR from the Inactive route SQUARE 1/1 page:

RTE 2 SQUARE 1/1

ID TRACK SPACING
1L
CMQ 0.5N M 1R
REF ID
2L ----- 2R
SAR BRG
3L 000T 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 21 K T NONE 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

D. SQUARE SAR from the Inactive route SQUARE 1/1 page (after pressing CONFIRM).

RTE 2 SQUARE 1/1

ID TRACK SPACING
1L
CMQ 0.5N M 1R
REF ID
2L ----- 2R
SAR BRG
3L 000T 3R
MAX GS ACTIVE SAR
4L 21 K T NONE 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

ACT/MOD/blank(STATUS): MOD indicates the search is not being executed. ACT indicates that the search
pattern is being executed. "blank" indicates an executed search fix has not been reached.

ID [1L]: Name of starting search pattern waypoint. If a search pattern waypoint is defined in the route, its
identifier is displayed in the field and no entry is allowed. Otherwise, entries are allowed and the entered
identifier is displayed.

NOTE: When a new ID is entered the operator should clear the relative bearing and distance data field relative
to the previous ID by pressing [NEXT] then [PREV].

TRACK SPACING [1R]: Value of the leg length (between 0.1 and 40 nm). The parameter is kept in NVM and
its initial default value is 2.0 nm. Subsequent change of the parameter value, validated by pressing the
<ACTIVATE> softkey followed by the EXEC key, will become the new default value. This default value is
preserved even after a cold-start.

REF ID [2L]: Name of waypoint considered being a reference for the relative bearing/distance elements
entered in the fields 3L and 4L. If a search pattern waypoint is defined in route, the field is filled with 5 dashes “--
---“ and no entry is allowed. Otherwise, entries are allowed and the entered identifier is displayed.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-176
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RELATIVE BRG [3L]: The relative bearing of the search pattern entry waypoint compared to the reference
REF. This field is displayed as long as REF ID contains an entry and the displayed default value is 000T or
000°.

SAR BRG [3R]: Value of the bearing (TRUE or MAG) of the first leg in the Search pattern (000T or 000° is the
default value).

DISTANCE [4L]: The distance of the search pattern entry waypoint from the reference REF ID. This field is
displayed as long as REF ID contains an entry and the displayed default value is 10.0 nm.

MAX GS (4L): The maximum Ground Speed required to fly the pattern without overshoot. This field is displayed
only after a valid waypoint identifier has been entered, and is mutually exclusive with the DISTANCE field.
This maximum ground speed is re-computed every time a modification is performed on the search parameters
(track spacing, leg length, diameter or angle).

ACTIVE SAR [4R]: Type of the active search pattern present in the flight plan. When there is no active search
pattern “none” is displayed.

PPOS [5L]: The search pattern is started at the present position. Toggles between PPOS and CURRENT WPT
# (displayed only after the search pattern is active). The PPOS prompt becomes available only for the active route
in the air and if the active route does not contain another search pattern waypoint.

CURRENT WPT (5L): Number of the search waypoint towards which the aircraft flies. This value increases as
the aircraft overfly the search waypoints. The default value for this field is:
• [02->80] if an EFIS of type IFDS is configured;
• [01->79] for all other EFIS types.

ENTRY WPT [5R]: Number of the search pattern entry waypoint. Displayed only for a search pattern waypoint
in progress and only on the Search page of the selected pattern. The default value of this field is 01 and can be
manually entered (changed) as long as the search hasn't been executed. After the search was executed, the
value of this field stays fixed and cannot be manually changed (unless INTERRUPT/RESUME was pressed).
The field value remains fixed but can be modified manually by first interrupting (via INTERRUPT prompt) the
search pattern and then resuming it (via RESUME prompt) at a new ENTRY WPT value. If a search is cancelled
or erased (before being execution) the value of this field returns to its default value:
• 01 if an EFIS of type IFDS is configured;
• 00 for all other EFIS types.
The allowed range of input values for this field is:
• [02->80] if an EFIS of type IFDS is configured;
• [01->79] for all other EFIS types.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

ERASE [6L]: Cancel the changes made to the modified active route. If confirm erase route modifications is
configured, then upon pressing ERASE a confirmation is requested by displaying CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts
on line select keys 6L and 6R respectively.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-177
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Erase all the fields and set the search parameters
back to their default values. For the inactive route only, it also cancel the modifications made to the inactive route
and command display of the LEGS page, if the cancellation follow modifications to the inactive route. CANCEL
appears:
• in active route (not modified) only when the <ACTIVATE> softkey is present (e.g. Search pattern
parameters are entered in the SAR page but no search pattern waypoints are defined in the route) in the
modified inactive route.

RESTORE [6L]: Is displayed only if the RTE was erased on the RTE 1/X page. Used to restore the active
route.

ACTIVATE/INTERRUPT/RESUME/CONFIRM [6R]:
• ACTIVATE is displayed (in green) only when the pattern is not active in the active route or the modified active
route and after the fields on the page are filled. It creates the search pattern waypoint into the modified active
route, if no search pattern waypoint already exists. Otherwise, it is used to confirm further modifications to the
search pattern waypoint. Once the search pattern waypoint is activated but not in progress yet, the search
pattern parameters can be modified at will (LENGTH, WIDTH, TRUE BRG, ENTRY WPT #) causing
CANCEL/ERASE/ ACTIVATE prompts to reappear every time a parameter is modified. If the search procedure
is created using the Search menu ([INIT REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, <SQUARE> or <LADDER> or
<SECTOR>, ACTIVATE enters the search waypoint as the first waypoint in the flight plan (followed by a
discontinuity and the rest of the waypoints). If the search procedure is created using “/S” on the LEGS page, the
<ACTIVATE> softkey updates the Search pattern waypoint parameters.
• INTERRUPT is used to initiate an interruption of the search pattern. When the INTERRUPT LSK is pressed, its
color changes from green to inverse green, the active search pattern becomes a modified one, and the EXEC
lamp illuminates. The current waypoint # field freezes to the number of the last TO-search waypoint and
disables the steering command (upon [EXEC] key press).
• RESUME is used when a SAR pattern needs to be restarted from a search waypoint entered in the ENTRY
WPT # field (LSK 5R). When the RESUME LSK is pressed, its color changes from green to inverse green, the
EXEC lamp illuminates, and a value can be entered in the ENTRY WPT # field (an entry the ENTRY WPT # is
permitted only after <RESUME> was pressed).
• For modified active route: CONFIRM is displayed if ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM. For modified
inactive route: CONFIRM is used to confirm the changes made to the inactive route. However, when it is
displayed following the creation of a search pattern waypoint into the modified inactive route or following
modifications to the search parameters in the inactive route, then pressing the CONFIRM prompt will confirm
the changes made to the search pattern and other changes made to the inactive route (same functionality as
the ACTIVATE prompt for the active route & modified active route).

After an INTERRUPT on the first leg of a search pattern, the re-entry into the pattern using RESUME is not
permitted on the search origin (e.g. ENTRY WPT # cannot be equal to 1).

NOTES:
• The INTERRUPT/RESUME keys is displayed only on the search pattern page corresponding to the executed
pattern (e.g. if a LADDER pattern was executed, INTERRUPT/RESUME appears only on the LADDER pattern
page).
• Pressing the ACTIVATE prompt, while valid entries exist for REF ID, RELATIVE BRG & DISTANCE fields,
will cause the creation of a search pattern waypoint located at the position of the REF ID waypoint offset by
the BRG/DIS field elements. A new waypoint identifier will be created and displayed in the ID field. The REF
ID field will be filled with dashes and the RELATIVE BRG & DISTANCE fields (title and data) will disappear.

• Entering a valid waypoint identifier in the ID field, while valid entries already exist for REF ID, RELATIVE
BRG and DISTANCE fields, will cause the REF ID field to be filled with dashes and the RELATIVE BRG and
DIST fields (title and data) to disappear.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-178
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SARSAT DATA 1/X

The SARSAT DATA X/X page displays the COSPAS/SARSAT specific data regarding a SARSAT waypoint
received from the DF equipment. Where the page number (X) varies from 1 to 8.

Display SARSAT DATA 1/1 page:

(if a DF is configured) press [INIT/REF], <WPT LISTS>, <SARSAT WPT> and <NNN##>.
(if a DF-430-102 is configured) press [RADIO], <DF>, <SARSAT WPT>and <NNN##>.
(if TACT key is configured and SARSAT is configured on the TACTICAL page) press [TACT], <SARSAT> and
<NNN##>.

(Where NNN is "ELT" or "PLB" or "EPI" or "TST and ## varies from 01 to 99).

A. Waypoint ELT01 is a distress message received from an ELT and the waypoint is transmitted to the EFIS.
Position resolution is 4 seconds.

SARSAT DATA 1/3

ELT01 ID/POSP00 DISTRESS
N45o12.07 W043o32.13
1L 1R
BEACON ID(OPER) RX AT
2L ACA1234 2014:57z<
2R
COUNTRY AUX LOC DEV
3L CANADA 121.5MHZ
3R
15 HEX ID DISPLAY
4L A25BC F2D3E 4751F ON< 4R

5L <SARSAT WPT BULLS TGT> 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

B. Waypoint PLB02 is a test message received from a PLB, the beacon does not transmit specific ID and the
waypoint is not selected for transmission to EFIS if DISPLAY option is set to SELECTION on the SARSAT
WPT 1/2 page. Position resolution is 15 minutes.

SARSAT DATA 2/3

PLB02 ID/POSP15 TEST
N45o15.00 W043o30.00
1L 1R
BEACON ID RX AT
2L 2122:57z<
2R
COUNTRY AUX LOC DEV
3L SWITZERLAND NONE
3R
15 HEX ID DISPLAY
4L A25BC F2D3E 4751F OFF< 4R

5L <SARSAT WPT BULLS TGT> 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-179
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Same as previous display (PLB02) except that last SARSAT waypoint update had an invalid position.

SARSAT DATA 2/3

PLB02 ID/POSP15 TEST
1L OLD N45o15.00 W043o30.00
1R
BEACON ID RX AT
2L 2125:57z<
2R
COUNTRY AUX LOC DEV
3L SWITZERLAND NONE
3R
15 HEX ID DISPLAY
4L A25BC F2D3E 4751F OFF< 4R

5L <SARSAT WPT BULLS TGT> 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

D. Waypoint EPI03 is a distress message received from an EPIRB, the position is not displayed since this
beacon cannot provide its position, the transmission of this SARSAT waypoint is then forced to OFF. The
SARSAT waypoint reception age is displayed instead of the received time.

SARSAT DATA 2/3

EPI03 ID/POS
1L 1R
BEACON ID(MMSI) AGE
2L 690123 (06)<
2R
COUNTRY AUX LOC DEV
3L SWITZERLAND 121.5M H Z
3R
15 HEX ID DISPLAY
4L A25BC F2D3E 4751F OFF 4R

5L <SARSAT WPT 5R

6L 6R

ID [1L]: Display of the SARSAT waypoint ID. The ID format is as follow:

• For ELT beacon: "ELT##"
• For PLB beacon: "PLB##"
• For EPIRB beacon: "EPI##"
• For TEST beacon: "TST##"
Where ## is a sequential number between 01 and 99.

POS [1R]: Display of the SARSAT waypoint position (when available). If a SARSAT waypoint gets updated with
an invalid position the text "OLD" is displayed in inverse video white before the position.

RESOLUTION (1R): The position resolution is displayed next to the "ID/POS" static field when the position is
available, otherwise the resolution is not displayed. The position resolution is displayed using the following
format:
"P00": Resolution of 4 seconds, displayed in inverse video green.
"P02": Resolution of 2 minutes, displayed in inverse video white.
"P04": Resolution of 4 minutes, displayed in inverse video white.
"P15": Resolution of 15 minutes, displayed in inverse video white.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-180
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MESSAGE TYPE (1R): Displays “TEST” in reverse video white when the beacon is in Test mode. Otherwise the
field is blank when the beacon is in normal operating mode (Distress).

BEACON ID (2L): Display the vehicle identification. The identification can be one of these following possibilities
for an aircraft (ELT beacon type):
• (NATI): The aircraft nationality and registration marking is a unique alphanumeric code assigned by national
administrations in accordance with Annex 10 to the Convention on International Civil Aviation (see REF
[E1]). The code is made of up to 7 characters as per the Modified-Baudot code
• (ADDR): Aircraft 24-bit address as assigned by the responsible administration in accordance with ICAO
guidance in Annex 10 of the ICAO convention on Civil Aviation the aircraft address is displayed as 6
hexadecimal characters (see REF [E1]).
• (OPER): The aircraft operator identified with a 3-letter designation agreed by ICAO (see REF [E1]) and the
serial number (ranging from 1 to 4095) normally assigned by the aircraft operator.
• (SN): The beacon unique serial identification code number ranging from 0 to 1,048,575 and the COSPAS-
SARSAT type approval certificate number ranging from 0 to 1023 if available.
• (NIN): The beacon National Identification Number (ranging from 0 to 262143) assigned by the appropriate
national authority.

The identification can be one of these possibilities for a ship (EPIRB beacon type):
• (MMSI): Marine Mobile Service Identity number, display the last 6-digit of the 9-digit MMSI.
• (RCS): Radio Call Signs of up to seven characters that comply with the ITU Radio Regulations on the
formation of call signs (see REF [E1]).
• (SN): The beacon unique serial identification code number ranging from 0 to 1,048,575 and the COSPAS-
SARSAT type approval certificate number ranging from 0 to 1023 if available.
• (NIN): The beacon National Identification Number (ranging from 0 to 262143) assigned by the appropriate
national authority.

The identification can be one of these possibilities for a personal beacon (PLB beacon type):
• (SN): The beacon unique serial identification code number ranging from 0 to 1,048,575 and the COSPAS-
SARSAT type approval certificate number ranging from 0 to 1023 if available.
• (NIN): The beacon National Identification Number (ranging from 0 to 262143) assigned by the appropriate
national authority.

If the beacon id cannot be decoded, this field is blank.

RX AT/AGE [2R]: Toggle option RX AT/AGE.

"RX AT": Time stamp at which the SARSAT waypoint has last been received.
"AGE": Elapsed time (in minutes) since last SARSAT waypoint reception.
The default display is "RX AT".

COUNTRY (3L): Display the country of beacon registration. If the country cannot be decoded, the 3-digit
decimal country/territory code is displayed.

NOTE: The country code is based on the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) and listed as Maritime
Identification Digits (MID) in Appendix 43 of the ITU Radio Regulations. This country code designates
the country of beacon registration and it is used to obtain additional information on the owner of the
distress beacon using the MID to interrogate the appropriate beacon registration database.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-181
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

AUX LOC DEV (3R): Display the auxiliary radio-location device available on board of the distress aircraft or
ship. The possible display are:
• "NONE": No auxiliary radio-locating device
• "121.5 MHz": 121.5MHz locator beacon
• "9 GHz": Maritime 9 GHz (SART)
• "OTHER": Other auxiliary radio-locating device(s)

This field is blank for the PLB beacon type or if the data cannot be decoded.

15 HEX ID (4L): Display the received 15 hexadecimal characters (15 HEX ID) identifying each 406 MHz
COSPAS-SARSAT beacon.

DISPLAY [4R]: Toggle options: ON/OFF. When set to ON, the current SARSAT waypoint is selected for output
to the EFIS. When set to OFF, the current SARSAT waypoint is not transmitted to the EFIS. If the POS is not
available, this option is forced to OFF and the field cannot be toggled (the "<" is not displayed). This field is only
displayed when one of the following EFIS is configured: SPERRY, SPERRY2, GAMA, SEXTANT, ROCKWELL,
ROCKWELL2, ROCKWELL3, BARCO, AHCAS2, MEGGIT or Primus Epic, otherwise, this field is blank.

SARSAT WPT [5L]: Access to SARSAT WPT 1/1 page.

BULLS TGT [5R]: Access the BULLS EYE 2/3 page and put the SARSAT waypoint coordinates as default
BULLS EYE TARGET waypoint coordinates and the SARSAT waypoint as the REF waypoint. This prompt will
only be displayed when the SARSAT waypoint coordinates are valid and the BULLS EYE is configured.

NEW USER WPT [6L]: Access to USER WPT 1/2 page and put the SARSAT waypoint coordinates and ident as
default user waypoint coordinates and ident. This prompt will only be displayed when the SARSAT waypoint
coordinates are valid.

DES+SAR [6R] or TACTICAL [6R]: When TACT key is configured, the DES+SAR prompt is replaced by
TACTICAL. In this case, the prompt gives access to the TACTICAL page instead of the DES+SAR page.
Access to DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page. The SARSAT waypoint will automatically be converted to a
temporary waypoint and placed in the REF ID field on the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page. This field
will only be displayed when the SARSAT waypoint coordinates are valid.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-182
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SARSAT WPT 1/2

The SARSAT WPT page displays the COSPAS/SARSAT waypoint(s) received from the Direction Finder (DF)
equipment.

Display SARSAT WPT 1/2 page:

(if a DF is configured) press [INIT/REF], <WPT LISTS> and <SARSAT WPT>.
(if Tactical Config BULLS EYE is configured) press [INIT/REF], <BULLS EYE>, [NEXT] and <SARSAT WPT>.
(if DF-430-102 is configured) press [RADIO], <DF> and <SARSAT WPT>.
(if TACT key is configured and SARSAT is configured on the TACTICAL page) press [TACT] and <SARSAT>.

A. When 8 SARSAT waypoints have been received and ELT01, EPI03, ELT04, PLB07 and PLB08 are
transmitted to the EFIS.

SARSAT WPT 1/2

ID/AGE/BRG/DIS
1L <E L T 0 1 ( * * ) ( 1 8 ) E L T 0 5 > 1R
090T/20.0N M 190T/10.0N M
2L <P L B 0 2 ( 2 6 ) ( 3 2 ) E L T 0 6 > 2R
150T/22.1N M 023T/70.6N M
3L <E P I 0 3 ( 0 0 ) ( 0 5 ) P L B 0 7 > 3R
000T/25.1N M 011T/20.5N M
4L <E L T 0 4 ( 0 2 ) ( 1 0 ) P L B 0 8 > 4R
352T/80.5N M 180T/40.0N M
5L REF ID PPOS 5R
DISPLAY
6L >S E L E C T I O N DELETE ALL> 6R

B. When waypoint PLB02 has been selected for deletion.

SARSAT WPT 1/2
ID/AGE/BRG/DIS
1L
<E L T 0 1 ( * * ) ( 1 8 ) E L T 0 5 > 1R
090T/20.0N M 190T/10.0N M
2L <P L B 0 2 ( 2 6 ) ( 3 2 ) E L T 0 6 > 2R
150T/22.1N M 023T/70.6N M
3L <E P I 0 3 ( 0 0 ) ( 0 5 ) P L B 0 7 > 3R
000T/25.1N M 011T/20.5N M
4L <E L T 0 4 ( 0 2 ) ( 1 0 ) P L B 0 8 > 4R
352T/80.5N M 180T/40.0N M
5L REF ID PPOS 5R
DISPLAY
6L <CANCEL D E L E T E ? CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-183
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. When deletion of waypoint PLB02 has been confirmed.

SARSAT WPT 1/2

ID/AGE/BRG/DIS
1L
<E L T 0 1 ( * * ) ( 1 8 ) E L T 0 5 > 1R
090T/20.0N M 190T/10.0N M
2L <E P I 0 3 ( 0 0 ) ( 0 5 ) P L B 0 7 > 2R
000T/25.1N M 011T/20.5N M
3L <E L T 0 4 ( 0 2 ) ( 1 0 ) P L B 0 8 > 3R
352T/80.5N M 180T/40.0N M
4L <E L T 0 5 ( 1 8 ) 4R
190T/10.0N M
5L REF ID PPOS 5R
DISPLAY
6L >A L L DELETE ALL> 6R

ID/AGE/BRG/DIS[1L-4L], [1R-4R]: Displays the SARSAT waypoint ident, age of last message reception in
minutes and bearing/distance relative to the REF ID. Bearing/distance field is displayed only when a valid
beacon position is available. When the ident is displayed in reverse video green it means that the SARSAT
waypoint is selected (on SARSAT DATA X/X page) for transmission to the EFIS. Entering DELETE on a
SARSAT waypoint will bring up CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts for the deletion of the selected SARSAT waypoint.
The waypoint selected for deletion will be displayed in reverse video white. Selection of the LSK will display the
corresponding SARSAT DATA page.

REF ID [5R]: Entry of any waypoint identifier from the navigation database, the custom database, the user
database, the temporary waypoints list, the Bulls Eye waypoints, the active route or the inactive route. In the
case of multiple waypoints with the same ID, the SELECT WPT page is displayed for selection. The first time
this page is accessed after a cold start, the reference waypoint is set to the present position. Entering delete will
return to PPOS.

DISPLAY[6L]: Toggle options: SELECTION/ALL. When “SELECTION” is chosen, the selected SARSAT
waypoints (displayed in reverse video green) are transmitted to the EFIS. When ALL is selected, all SARSAT
waypoints are transmitted to the EFIS. The selection (SELECTION or ALL) is kept in memory during a power
down. Upon a cold start on ground, the transmit option is default to SELECTION. This field is blank when the
SARSAT transmission is set to OFF on the EFIS 1/1 page. This field is only displayed when one of the following
EFIS is configured: SPERRY, SPERRY2, GAMA, SEXTANT, ROCKWELL, ROCKWELL2, ROCKWELL3,
BARCO, AHCAS2, MEGGIT or Primus Epic, otherwise, this field is blank.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancels the deletion of a SARSAT waypoint or all SARSAT waypoints as applicable.

DELETE ALL [6R]: Request to delete all SARSAT waypoints and triggers the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts.
When this prompt is pressed, all SARSAT waypoints will be displayed in reverse video white. If no SARSAT
waypoint is available this prompt is not displayed.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirms the deletion of a SARSAT waypoint or all SARSAT waypoints as applicable.

(DELETE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts upon deletion of SARSAT waypoint(s).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-184
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SARSAT WPT 2/2

This page enables the pilot to select the FMS update mode and the type of messages decoded from the DF.

Display SARSAT WPT 2/2 page:

(if a DF is configured) press [INIT/REF], <WPT LISTS> <SARSAT WPT> and [NEXT].
(if DF-430-102 is configured) press [RADIO], <DF>, <SARSAT WPT> and [NEXT].
(if TACT key is configured and SARSAT is configured on the TACTICAL page) press [TACT], <SARSAT> and
[NEXT].

SARSAT WPT 2/2

1L 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
UPDATE TEST BEACON
5L >A U T O OFF< 5R
AUDIO ALERT
6L ON< 6R

UPDATE [5L]: Toggle options: AUTO/MANUAL. When the AUTO mode is selected, the FMS compares the
new COSPAS-SARSAT message received with the SARSAT waypoints, if a SARSAT waypoint already exists
for this message, the waypoint information is updated, otherwise a new SARSAT waypoint is created. When the
MANUAL mode is selected, the FMS decodes and displays all messages received even if the messages
decoded is an update of an existing SARSAT waypoint. The default setting is AUTO. When toggling this option
from MANUAL to AUTO, the FMS keeps only the latest SARSAT waypoint received from a beacon, all duplicate
SARSAT waypoints are deleted. When toggling from AUTO to MANUAL, no deletion is performed.

This field is only applicable when DF-935-12 is configured. Otherwise, it is blanked.

TEST BEACON [5R]: Toggle options: ON/OFF. When the message filter is set to "OFF", only the distress
messages are decoded and displayed. When the message filter is set to "ON", the distress and test messages
are decoded and displayed. The default setting is OFF. When toggling this option from ON to OFF, all TEST
SARSAT waypoints are deleted. When toggling from OFF to ON, no deletion is performed.

AUDIO ALERT [6R]: Toggle options: ON/OFF. Upon reception of a new sarsat waypoint, when ON is selected,
a pulse is generated on the discrete output DF_SARSAT to activate an audio alert signal. When OFF is
selected, the audio alert is muted. The default setting is ON (reset on a cold start on ground).
This field is only displayed when DF_SARSAT discrete output is configured; otherwise, it is blanked.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-185
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SELECT CO ROUTE 1/X

Display SELECT CO ROUTE 1/1 page by pressing [RTE] and <CO ROUTES>.

SELECT CO ROUTE 1/1

1L 1201 1401
1R

2L 1202
2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
LOAD
5L >DIRECT 5R

6L <ROUTE 6R

SELECT CO ROUTE 1/1

1L 1201 1401
1R

2L 1202
2R

3L 3R

4L 4R
LOAD
5L >INVERSE 5R

6L <ROUTE 6R

When a company route is selected for the inactive route, all the fields are displayed in cyan (as shown in the figure
above right).

ROUTE [1L,2L,3L,4L,1R,2R,3R,4R]: Custom Route Name. Pressing the corresponding LSK will load the custom
route (DIRECT or INVERSE mode) in the sequence selected in LSK 5L into the modified route and return to the
RTE 1/1 page. If the display of the CO ROUTE is configured to ORIG_DEST, only the particular routes associated
with the entered origin and destination will be displayed. If CO ROUTES is configured to ALL, every CO ROUTE in
the database will be displayed.

NOTE: When airborne, a custom route name selected on page SELECT CO ROUTE 1/1 will replace the current
active route without replacing the origin.

LOAD [5L]: Toggle DIRECT/INVERSE direction of the route to be loaded.

ROUTE [6L]: Access to the RTE 1/X page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-186
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SELECT NAVAID {name } 1/X

Automatically displayed on entry of a navaid identifier that has duplicates in the navigation database. It is displayed
only if the entry was made from the NAV radio page.

SELECT NAV ANC 1/1

CAN PA 114.30MHZ
N61o09.05 W150o12.40
1L 1R
EUR LI 110.65MHZ
2L N43o35.15 E013o28.28
2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

TITLE LINE: Displays duplicated navaid identifier.

NAVAID DESCRIPTION [all LSK's]: Displays all unique locations that are associated with the common identifier.
Title line of each navaid indicates ICAO region code, ICAO country code (or terminal area airport identifier) and
frequency. Navaids are sorted in order of increasing distance from present position.

Pressing one of the appropriate LSKs will automatically select the navaid description and return to the previous
page from which this page was accessed. The navaid identifier will then be displayed on the line where entry was
previously attempted.

SELECT WPT {name} 1/X

Automatically displayed on entry of a waypoint identifier that has duplicates in the navigation database.

SELECT WPT MEL 1/1

EUR LF VHF NAV
N48o27.35 E002o48.83
1L 1R
EUR LJ NDB NAV
o o
2L N45 39.33 E015 18.6 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-187
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TITLE LINE: Displays duplicated waypoint identifier.

WAYPOINT DESCRIPTION [all LSK's]: Displays all unique locations which are associated with the common
identifier. Title line of each waypoint indicates ICAO region code, ICAO country code (or terminal area airport
identifier) and waypoint type (see also explanation of WPT DATA page). Waypoints are sorted in the following
manner:

a. For manual insertions into the route, waypoints are listed in order of increasing distance from the previous
flight plan waypoint.
b. For Direct-To procedures, waypoints are listed in order of increasing distance from present position.
c. For custom routes, resolution of duplicated waypoints occurs automatically, with the waypoint closest to the
previous flight plan waypoint being selected.

Pressing one of the appropriate LSKs will automatically select the waypoint description and return to the
previous page from which this page was accessed. The waypoint identifier will then be displayed on the line
where entry was previously attempted.

NOTE: The ICAO region field will be blanked if the waypoint is found from the Custom or User database, or the
waypoint is a temporary waypoint.

SETUP 1/1

This page allows the user to setup selected parameters. Display

SETUP 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF] and <SETUP>.

NOTE: FMS ID “FMSx” will not be shown when cross-FMS is not configured.

FMS1 SETUP 1/1

DISPLAY
1L
>MAG 1R
TIME OFFSET
2L >UTC +5.0H R S 2R
COORD DATUM
3L >LAT_LONG WGS84< 3R

4L 4R
FMS OPERATION
5L >SYNCHRONIZED 5R

6L <POS INIT ROUTE> 6R

DISPLAY [1L]: Display Reference of all courses, tracks and bearings and angular outputs to the EHSI. Toggle
options: MAG/TRUE. When the A/C is in the polar region (latitude > N73 or S60), TRUE/MAG toggling is
disabled, the > is not displayed, and TRUE is displayed in the data field. Otherwise, if the TRUE/MAG discrete
input is configured, the current state of the discrete is displayed in small font (the prompt ">" is not
displayed).The DISPLAY default value is configurable.

NOTE: This toggle option is not available if the BARCO EFIS is configured and label 171 is properly received from
the CMA-9000 FMS. The current status is displayed in small font (the prompt ">" is not displayed).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-188
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TIME [2L]: Toggle options: GPS Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) and LOCAL Time.

COORD [3L]: Selection of displayed coordinate system: {LAT_LONG, UTM, MGRS, SWISS_GRID}.

OFFSET [2R]: Entry for local time offset from the UTC time. Validity checking ensures entry is between +/-12.0
hours and steps are 0.5 hours.

DATUM [3R]: Selection of Datum used to display the position coordinates. For example if WGS72 is selected
then displayed coordinates are in this datum and entries are assumed at this datum as well. Choices are
WGS84, WGS72, etc.

NOTE: All navigation functions use Lat/Long in WGS84, this function only affect display/entry to pilot of
positional information. When COORD is SWISS GRID, DATUM is forced to CH1903 and cannot be
modified.

FMS OPERATION [5L]: CMA-9000 FMS cross-talk mode of operation. Toggle options:
INDEPENDENT/SYNCHRONIZED. Mode changes need to be confirmed (Field is not displayed if the FMS is
configured not to be synchronized).

CANCEL [6L]: Used to cancel request to change CMA-9000 FMS cross-talk mode of operation.

POS INIT [6L]: Accesses the POS INIT/REF 1/X page.

CONFIRM [6R]: Used to confirm request to change CMA-9000 FMS cross-talk mode of operation (independent
or synchronized).

ROUTE [6R]: Accesses the RTE 1/1 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-189
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3 page (If SIMUL configured and RTE2 configured)
SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/2 page (if SIMUL configured only)

Display SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3 or 1/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT] and < SIMULATE>.

The SIMUL FLY AWAY page is used to perform performance simulations with one engine inoperative during
hover operation. Star (*) symbols will be displayed and the advisory FUNCTION NOT COMPUTED message will
appear when calculated values exceed the permitted range. Fields will be left empty when default values are not
available.

A. Default Display:

SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3

GROSS WT FLY AWAY HT
1L 10600K G 100F T
1R

2L 2R
PRESS ALT OEI OGE WT
3L +10300F T 9500K G
3R
OAT
4L +25oC 4R
WIND OGE CEILING
5L 45K T S -5 0 0 F T 5R

6L RESTORE DEFAULTS> 6R

B. Display after manual entry of Gross Wt:

SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3

GROSS WT FLY AWAY HT
1L
7600 KG 220F T
1R

2L 2R
PRESS ALT OEI OGE WT
3L +10300F T 9500K G
3R
OAT
4L +25oC 4R
WIND OGE CEILING
5L 45K T S -500F T 5R

6L RESTORE DEFAULTS> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-190
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Display after manual entry of Pressure-Altitude:

SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3

GROSS WT FLY AWAY HT
9800 K G 20F T
1L 1R

2L 2R
PRESS ALT OEI OGE WT
3L +9300 FT 9500K G
3R
OAT
4L +25oC 4R
WIND OGE CEILING
5L 45K T S -500F T 5R

6L RESTORE DEFAULTS> 6R

D. Display after manual entry of Fly Away Height:

SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/3

GROSS WT FLY AWAY HT
9600K G 20F T
1L 1R

2L 2R
PRESS ALT OEI OGE WT
3L +10300F T 9500K G 3R
OAT
4L +25oC 4R
WIND OGE CEILING
5L 45K T S -500F T 5R

6L RESTORE DEFAULTS> 6R

GROSS WT [1L]: Total aircraft gross weight. Range 6000kg to 11000kg. Initially displays in normal video the
current active value per the FUEL 1/2 page. May be manually overwritten for simulation causing the value to
appear in reverse video and forcing the calculation of a new fly away height. Inversely, entry of a fly away height
will cause this field to display a new gross weight in normal video. When computed, the advisory NO FLY AWAY
will appear if:
Current active gross weight minus fuel weight (excluding reserve) is greater than Computed gross weight.
The advisory will disappear if the pilot clears it or the page is exited or new simulated values are entered
causing the fly away condition to be met. If the default value is not available or its value exceeds the range of
computation, the advisory GROSS WT NOT VALID will appear. Upon manual entry, pilot clearance of the
message or exiting the page, the advisory will disappear.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-191
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FLY AWAY HT [1R]: Fly away height. Minimum height to maintain in hover. This corresponds to the
maximum drop in height upon loss of an engine during Hover. Calculated and displayed in normal video initially
and upon entry of gross weight. Manual entry will be displayed in reverse video and cause a recalculation of
gross weight. The advisory NO FLY AWAY will appear if:
Radio Altimeter Height minus fly away height is less than 15ft
The advisory will disappear if the pilot clears it, or the page is exited, or new simulated values are entered
causing the FLY AWAY condition to be met.

NOTE: As the fly away height data chart depends upon wind speed and mass index the minimum/maximum
range varies infinitely for different scenarios and as such the input range cannot be specified.

PRESS ALT [3L]: Pressure altitude. Valid range -2000ft to +12000ft. Defaults to the current pressure altitude
in normal video. Manual entry is displayed in reverse video and causes a recalculation of Gross Weight or Fly
Away Height depending on which data was being simulated as well as a recalculation of One Engine Inoperative
Out of Ground Effect Weight if the Outside Air Temperature is available and valid. If the default value is not
available or its value exceeds the range of computation, the advisory PRESS ALT NOT VALID will appear.
Upon manual entry, or pilot clearance of the message, or exiting the page, the advisory will disappear.

OEI OGE WT [3R]: Display of One Engine Inoperative Out of Ground Effect Weight. This is the weight
required to maintain the specified pressure altitude without any drop in height upon loss of an engine. The
OEI/OGE WT is obtained only when the OAT and PRESS ALT are available and valid.

OAT [4L]: Outside Air Temperature. Valid range -40°C to +50°C. Defaults to the current temperature in small
font. Manual entry is displayed in large font and causes a recalculation of Gross Weight or Fly Away Height
depending on which data was being simulated as well as a recalculation of One Engine Inoperative Out of
Ground Effect Weight if the PRESS ALT is available and valid. If the default value is not available or its value
exceeds the range of computation, the advisory AIR TEMP NOT VALID will appear. Upon manual entry, or pilot
clearance of the message, or exiting the page, the advisory will disappear.

WIND [5L]: Wind speed. Range 0 to +50 Knots. Defaults to the current wind value in small font. Manual entry
is displayed in large font and causes a recalculation of Gross Weight or Fly Away Height depending on which
data was being simulated. If the default value is not available or its value exceeds the range of computation, the
advisory WIND NOT VALID will appear. Upon manual entry, or pilot clearance of the message, or exiting the
page, the advisory will disappear.

OGE CEILING (5R): Displays the Out of Ground Effects Ceiling height. This is the minimum altitude at which
the ground effect is no longer felt (lift increases due to the ground). This value is calculated from the entered
parameters and cannot be modified by the user.

RESTORE DEFAULTS [6R]: Restores the default values for GROSS WT, PRESS ALT, OAT, and WIND. Fly
Away Height and One Engine Inoperative Out of Ground Effect Weight are re-calculated.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-192
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/3 page (if SIMUL configured and RTE2 configured)
SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/2 page (if SIMUL configured only)

Display SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/3 or 2/2 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT] and <SIMULATE> and [NEXT].

The SIMUL OEI CRUISE page is used to perform performance simulations with one engine inoperative during
cruise operation. Star (*) symbols will be displayed and the advisory FUNCTION NOT COMPUTED message
will appear when calculated values exceed the permitted range. Fields will be left empty when default values are
not available.

A. Default Display:

SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/3

GROSS WT JETTISON WT
10600K G 100K G
1L 1R

2L 2R
PRESS ALT LEVEL ALT
3L +10300F T 9500F T
3R
OAT
4L +25oC 4R

5L 5R

6L RESTORE DEFAULTS> 6R

B. Display after manual entry of Pressure Altitude:

SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/3

GROSS WT JETTISON WT
10600K G 100K G
1L 1R

2L 2R
PRESS ALT LEVEL ALT
3L +10300F T 9500F T 3R
OAT
4L +25oC 4R

5L 5R

6L RESTORE DEFAULTS> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-193
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Display after manual entry of Outside Air Temperature:

SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/3

GROSS WT JETTISON WT
10600K G 100K G
1L 1R

2L 2R
PRESS ALT LEVEL ALT
3L +10300F T 9500F T 3R
OAT
4L +25o C 4R

5L 5R

6L RESTORE DEFAULTS> 6R

D. Display after manual entry of Gross Weight:

SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/3

GROSS WT JETTISON WT
1L 10600K G 100K G
1R

2L 2R
PRESS ALT LEVEL ALT
3L +10300F T 9500F T
3R
OAT
4L +25oC 4R

5L 5R

6L RESTORE DEFAULTS> 6R

GROSS WT [1L]: Total aircraft gross weight. The validity range is specified in the loaded OEI model data
tables. Initially displays in normal video the current active value per the FUEL 1/2 page. May be manually
overwritten for simulation causing the value to appear in reverse video and forcing the calculation of a new
jettison weight and level altitude. If the default value is not available or its value exceeds the range of
computation, the advisory GROSS WT NOT VALID message will appear. Upon manual entry, or pilot clearance
of the message, or exiting the page, the advisory will disappear.

JETTISON WT [1R]: Display of weight to drop in order to maintain the current altitude.

PRESS ALT [3L]: Pressure altitude. Valid range -2000 ft to +12000ft. Defaults to the current pressure altitude
in normal video. Manual entry is displayed in reverse video and causes a recalculation of Gross Weight and Fly
Away Height depending on which data was being simulated as well as a recalculation of One Engine Inoperative
Out of Ground Effect Weight. If the default value is not available or its value exceeds the range of computation,
the advisory PRESS ALT NOT VALID message will appear. Upon manual entry, or pilot clearance of the
message, or exiting the page, the advisory will disappear.

LEVEL ALT [3R]: Display of maximum altitude after engine loss if no weight is dropped.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-194
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

OAT [4L]: Outside Air Temperature. Valid range -40°C to +50°C. Defaults to the current temperature in small
font. Manual entry is displayed in large font and causes a recalculation of gross weight or fly away height
depending on which data was being simulated as well as a recalculation of one engine inoperative out of
ground effect weight. If the default value is not available or its value exceeds the range of computation, the
advisory AIR TEMP NOT VALID message will appear. Upon manual entry, or pilot clearance of the message, or
exiting the page, the advisory will disappear.

RESTORE DEFAULTS [6R]: Restores the default values for GROSS WT, PRESS ALT, and OAT. Jettison
Weight and Level Altitude are re-calculated.

SIMUL RTEx 3/3 page or 1/1 (if SIMUL PG and RTE2 is configured)

Display SIMUL RTE x 3/3 or 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT] and <SIMULATE> and [PREV].

The SIMUL RTEx page enables the user to use a simulated ground speed, TAS or wind and simulated fuel
weight/flow inputs in order to perform ETA/EFA computations for the inactive route.

NOTE: This page is not accessible when ACTIVATE was selected (but not executed) on the active or the
inactive route (active or inactive route in MOD). Also, this page is displayed in monochrome cyan since it
is only applicable to the inactive route. RTEx can correspond to RTE1 or RTE2 based on which route is
the inactive route.

A. Normal format:

SIMUL RTE2 3/3

CRZ TAS CRZ WIND
T
130K T 134 /100K T
1L 1R
FUEL FLOW FUEL WT
2L 615 K G / H R 4000K G
2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L <RTE COPY DEFAULT VAL> 5R

6L <LEGS ETA LEGS POS> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-195
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. RTE COPY was selected:

SIMUL RTE2 3/3

CRZ TAS CRZ WIND
T
130K T 134 /100K T
1L 1R
FUEL FLOW FUEL WT
2L 615 K G / H R 4000K G
2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L <RTE COPY DEFAULT VAL> 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

CRZ TAS [1L]: Display or entry of the simulated/default cruise TAS value. A simulated TAS value is displayed
in large font. The range of entry is 0-999 Knots. A default TAS value is displayed in medium font. When the
aircraft is on the ground, the default cruise TAS is the TAS specified on the PLAN DATA page. When the aircraft
is in the air, the default cruise TAS is the actual aircraft TAS. Entering DELETE resets the field to its default
value.

CRZ WIND [1R]: Display or entry of the simulated/default cruise wind value. A simulated wind value is
displayed in large font. The range of entry is from 0-200 Knots. A default wind value is displayed in medium font.
When the aircraft is on the ground the default cruise wind is the wind specified on the PLAN DATA page. When
the aircraft is in the air, the default cruise wind is the actual wind. Entering DELETE resets the field to its default
value.

FUEL FLOW [2L]: Display or entry of the simulated/actual rate of fuel consumption. A simulated fuel flow value
is displayed in large font. The range of entry is from 0-32728 kg/hr or 0-72153 lb/hr. A default fuel flow value is
displayed in medium font. When the rate of fuel consumption is available from the fuel sensor, the default fuel
flow is provided by the fuel sensor, otherwise, the default fuel flow value is 615 kg/hr (1356 lb/hr). Entering
DELETE resets the field to its default value.

FUEL WT [2R]: Display or entry of the simulated/actual fuel weight excluding reserve. A simulated fuel weight
value is displayed in large font. The range of entry is from 0-655360 kg or lb. When the fuel weight is available
from the fuel sensor, the default fuel weight is provided by the fuel sensor, otherwise, the default fuel weight
value is 4000 kg (8818 lb). Entering DELETE resets the field to its default value.

RTE COPY [5L]: Copies the active route into the inactive route. When RTE COPY is selected LSK 6L is
replaced with “<CANCEL”, LSK 6R is replaced with “CONFIRM>” and “SAVE?” is displayed.

NOTE: The previous inactive route is deleted and un-retrievable.

DEFAULT VAL [5R]: Overrides the user-entered simulated settings (CRZ TAS, CRZ WIND, FUEL FLOW
and FUEL WT) with the on-ground or in-air default settings.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-196
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

LEGS ETA [6L]: Access to RTE x LEGS ETA 1/X page.

NOTE: If the inactive route does not exist, the CMA-9000 FMS copies the active route into the inactive route
when the inactive route LEGS ETA/EFA page is accessed in order to perform simulated ETA/EFA
computations. If an inactive route already exists, the CMA-9000 FMS allows the pilot to copy the active
route into the inactive route in order to perform simulated ETA/EFA computations using the active
route. The previous inactive route is overwritten and irretrievable.

CANCEL [6L]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Cancels the changes made to the inactive route.

LEGS POS [6R]: Access to RTE x LEGS POS 1/X page.

CONFIRM [6R]: {If ERASE MODS is configured as CONFIRM} Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

TACTICAL X/Y page (if configured)

These pages are only accesible if the TACT key is configured. Otherwise, the name of the page is DES+SAR.

[TACT]
[INIT/REF], <BULLS EYE>, [NEXT], <TACTICAL>
[INIT/REF], <WPT DATA>, <TACTICAL>
[INIT/REF], <WPT LISTS>, <DMAP WPT>, <TACTICAL>
[INIT/REF], <WPT LISTS>, <SARSAT WPT>, <NNN##>, <BULLS TGT>, <TACTICAL>
[INIT/REF], <WPT LISTS>, <PREDEF WPT>, <TACTICAL>
[INIT/REF], <WPT LISTS>, <PREDEF WPT>, [NEXT], <TACTICAL>
[INIT/REF], <WPT LISTS>, <PREDEF WPT>, [PREV], <TACTICAL>
[INIT/REF], <NEAREST>, <AIRPORT>, <TACTICAL>
[INIT/REF], <NEAREST>, <VHF NAV>, <TACTICAL>
[INIT/REF], <NEAREST>, <VHF NDB>, <TACTICAL>
[INIT/REF], <NEAREST>, <VHF CUSTOM WPT>, <TACTICAL>
[INIT/REF], <NEAREST>, <USER WPT>, <TACTICAL>
[INIT/REF], <MISSION>, <TACTICAL>
[MARK] , <TACTICAL>
[MARK], [NEXT] , <TACTICAL>
[MARK], [PREV] , <TACTICAL>
[RADIO], <DF>, <SARSAT WPT>, <NNN##>, <TACTICAL>

These pages give access to the configured tactical functions. Pages 1/2, 1/4 and 2/4 are used for the active
route and pages 2/2, 3/4 and 4/4 are used for the inactive route. When the TACT key or the TACTICAL prompt
is selected and the inactive route is in modification, the INACT TACTICAL 2/2 or 3/4 will be displayed. When an
inactive page is displayed, all text are displayed in cyan.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-197
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Page display example when 2 pages (one for the active and one for the inactive route) are used. In this
example, SQUARE, LADDER, SECTOR, HOVER, BULLS EYE and TACT APPR are configured.

TACTICAL 1/2
REF ID
1L
WPT03 BULL TOP> 1R
RAD/DIS
2L ---T/----NM BULL WPT> 2R

3L <SQUARE TACT APPR> 3R

4L <LADDERACT 4R

5L <SECTOR 5R

6L <HOVER 6R

Display of the inactive tactical page when 2 pages set is used.

INACT TACTICAL 2/2

REF ID
1L
WPT03 1R
RAD/DIS
2L ---T/----NM
2R

3L <SQUARE TACT APPR> 3R

4L <LADDER 4R

5L <SECTOR 5R

6L 6R

Page display example when 4 pages (two for the active and two for the inactive route) are used. In this
example, SQUARE, LADDER, SECTOR, HOVER, BULLS EYE, CENTRAL CLR, FLIR and TACT APPR are
configured.
TACTICAL 1/4
REF ID
1L WPT03 BULL TOP> 1R
RAD/DIS
2L ---T/----NM BULL WPT> 2R

3L <SQUARE TACT APPR> 3R

4L <LADDER CENTRAL CLR> 4R

5L <SECTOR FLIR> 5R

6L <HOVER SARSAT> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-198
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TACTICAL 2/4
REF ID
1L WPT03 1R
RAD/DIS
2L ---T/----NM
2R

3L <TACT DTO 3R

4L <CARP 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

Display of the inactive tactical page when 4 pages set is used.

INACT TACTICAL 3/4 INACT TACTICAL 4/4

REF ID REF ID
1L WPT03 1R 1L WPT03 1R
RAD/DIS RAD/DIS
2L ---T/----NM 2L ---T/----NM
2R 2R

3L <SQUARE TACT APPR> 3R 3L <TACT DTO 3R

4L <LADDER 4R 4L <CARP 4R

5L <SECTOR 5R 5L 5R

6L 6R 6L 6R

PAGE NUMBER [title]:

X: When all options are configured on one page only, X varies between 1 and 2. The first page is for the active
route and the second page is for the inactive route. When the options are configured on two tactical pages,
X varies between 1 and 4. The first 2 pages are for the active route and the second 2 pages are for the
inactive route.
Y: When all options are configured on one page, Y equals to 2. If the options are configured on 2 tactical
page, the value of Y is 4..

INACT [title]: "INACT" string is displayed to indicate that the inactive route is displayed, which is for page 2/2
and 4/4.

REF ID [1L]: Storage of the reference identifier. If there is a valid position in the scratchpad when the page is
opened, then the FMS will create a temporary waypoint at that position and places the identifier in this field.
Moving waypoint identifier is not allowed on this field.

RAD/DIS [2L]: The RAD/DIS combination allows the pilot to position a waypoint relative to the REF ID. The
relative position is used to create a temporary waypoint when a new procedure is selected. Creating a
temporary waypoint from a moving waypoint is not allowed. By default, the RAD/DIS fields show dashes.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-199
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

[3L] to [6L] and [1R] to [6R]:

These keys permit to access one of the following pages according to the TACTICAL PG CONFIG option
configuration:

BULL TOP: Access the BULLS EYE 1/3 page. This prompt is not displayed for the inactive (INACT)
TACTICAL page(s).

BULL TGT:
Case i. NO TACTICAL REF ID defined : Access the BULLS EYE 2/3 page.
Case ii. TACTICAL REF ID defined : Access the BULLS EYE 2/3 page and put the TACTICAL waypoint
coordinates as default BULLS EYE TARGET waypoint coordinates and the TACTICAL REF ID
waypoint as the REF waypoint.
This prompt is not displayed for the inactive (INACT) TACTICAL page(s).

BULL WPT: Access the BULLS EYE 3/3 page. This prompt is not displayed for the inactive (INACT)
TACTICAL page(s).

CARP:
Case i. No TACTICAL REF ID defined and no CARP procedure exists in the flight plan: Brings up the
LEGS page with CRP01/C in the scratchpad.
Case ii. No TACTICAL REF ID defined and a CARP procedure exists in the flight plan: Brings up the
CARP PLAN 1/3 page.
Case iii. TACTICAL REF ID defined and no CARP procedure exists in the flight plan: Brings up the LEGS
page with the identifier and /C qualifier in the scratch pad allowing entry in the flight plan.
Case iv. TACTICAL REF ID defined and different from the PI of the existing CARP procedure: Brings up
the CARP PLAN 1/3 page with the identifier in the scratchpad.
Case v. TACTICAL REF ID defined and has the same identifier as PI of the existing CARP procedure:
Brings up the CARP PLAN 1/3 page.

CENTRAL CLR: Access the CENTRAL CLEAR? page.

FLIR: Access the PREDEF WPT 3/3 page (FLIR dedicated page). This prompt is not displayed for the
inactive (INACT) TACTICAL page(s).

HOVER:
Case i. No TACTICAL REF ID defined : Brings up the Hover page. If a HOVER pattern is already in the
selected route, the active data is displayed.
Case ii. TACTICAL REF ID defined : Brings up the Hover page with the identifier stored in the ID field
(even when a Hover pattern is currently active).It is not currently possible to enter a Hover pattern
in any route location other than the first; hence, the LEGS page is not displayed as for other leg
types.
This prompt is not displayed for the inactive (INACT) TACTICAL page(s).

LADDER: The status “ACT” (reverse video white) is appended to the prompt if an activated ladder search
pattern is in the flight plan.
Case i. No TACTICAL REF ID defined : Brings up the LADDER page.
Case ii. TACTICAL REF ID defined : Brings up the LEGS page with the identifier and /S qualifier in the
scratchpad allowing entry anywhere in the flight plan.

MISSION: Access the MISSION 1/1 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-200
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SARSAT: Access the SARSAT WPT page. This prompt is not displayed for the inactive (INACT) TACTICAL
page(s).

SECTOR: The status “ACT” (reverse video white) is appended to the prompt if an activated sector search
pattern is in the flight plan.
Case i. No TACTICAL REF ID defined : DES+SAR point defined : Brings up the SECTOR page.
Case ii. No TACTICAL REF ID defined : Brings up the LEGS page with the identifier and /S qualifier in the
scratchpad allowing entry anywhere in the flight plan.

SQUARE: The status “ACT” (reverse video white) is appended to the prompt if an activated square search
pattern is in the flight plan.
Case i. No TACTICAL REF ID defined : Brings up the SQUARE page.
Case ii. TACTICAL REF ID defined : Brings up the LEGS page with the identifier and /S qualifier in the
scratchpad.

TACT APPR :
Case i. No TACTICAL REF ID defined and no previously defined tactical approach Runway Threshold
Waypoint: Brings up the default LEGS page with the /A qualifier in the scratchpad allowing entry
in the flight plan.
Case ii. No TACTICAL REF ID defined and previously defined the tactical approach Runway Threshold
Waypoint: Brings up the TACTICAL APPR page.
Case iii. TACTICAL REF ID is already defined: Brings up the default LEGS page with the identifier with

TACTICAL DTO:
Case i. No TACTICAL REF ID defined : Brings up the LEGS page with only /T in the scratchpad.
Case ii. TACTICAL REF ID defined : Brings up the LEGS page with the identifier and /T in the scratchpad.

TACTICAL APPR 1/3 page (if configured)

Display TACTICAL APPR 1/3 page:

1. For the active route press[TACT], <TACT APPR> if TACT key is configured and TACT APPR configured on
the TACTICAL page.
[INIT/ REF], <DES+SAR > or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], <TACT APPR> if a valid tactical approach waypoint
had previously been entered.
For the inactive route press [TACT], <TACT APPR>, [NEXT], if TACT key is configured and TACT APPR
configured on the TACTICAL page.
[INIT/ REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [PREV], <TACT APPR> if a valid tactical approach waypoint
had previously been entered The REF ID field of the TACTICAL page can optionally be used. If the crew
chooses to enter the REF ID field on the TACTICAL page and then select TACT APPR, then inserting REF
ID field tactical approach runway threshold waypoint can subsequently be entered into the flight plan by
using the method described in b) or c).
If a valid tactical approach runway threshold waypoint had not previously been entered, then upon selecting
the TACT APPR prompt, the FMS will automatically insert a /A in the scratchpad and display LEGS page
1/X. After inserting this tactical approach runway threshold waypoint into the flight plan, the TACTICAL
APPR page is displayed.
If a valid tactical approach runway threshold waypoint had previously been entered and the tactical
approach runway threshold waypoint has been sequenced in the flight plan, then the tactical approach page
showing the previously entered parameters can be displayed again by selecting TACT APPR> on
TACTICAL page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-201
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

2. Automatically accessed whenever a proposed tactical approach has been entered on the LEGS page.
This is done by inserting a waypoint,, say ABCDE, as the tactical approach runway threshold waypoint by
typing ABCDE/A and inserting this into the LEGS page flight plan at the desired location
3. /A is entered on existing tactical approach on LEGS page. The crew manually enter a /A in the scratchpad
and then inserts this at the LSK location next to the pseudo-MAP (e.g. Tactical Approach Runway Threshold
Waypoint) on the LEGS page.
The TACTICAL APPR page displays the parameters defining the tactical approach procedure.

NOTE: This page is only available if the TACTICAL APPROACH option is configured.

A. Default page:
TACTICAL APPR 1/3
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
----- / NM
1L o 1R
TIAF (-3.0 ) ALT
o
2L
090 /3 . 0 0 N M 2711FT
2R
TFAF FAF ALT
o
3L
090 /5 . 0 0 N M 1757FT
3R
PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
4L
090 117F T 4R
VPA TRANS LVL
5L -3.0o FL060 5R

6L 6R

B. Prior to EXECution:

MOD TACTICAL APPR 1/3

REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
----- / NM
1L o 1R
TIAF (-3.0 ) ALT
o
--- /3.00NM FT
2L 2R
TFAF FAF ALT
o
/5.00NM FT
3L 3R
PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
4L
aaa 4R
aaaaaF T
5L VPA TRANS LVL 5R
o
-3.0 FL060
6L <ERASE 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-202
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. If “ERASE MODS” option is set to "CONFIRM"

MOD TACTICAL APPR 1/3

REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
----- / NM
1L o 1R
TIAF (-3.0 ) ALT
o
2L
090 /3 . 0 0 N M 2711FT
2R
TFAF FAF ALT
o
3L
090 /5 . 0 0 N M 1757FT
3R
PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
4L
090 117F T 4R
VPA TRANS LVL
5L -3.0 o FL060 5R

6L <CANCEL CONFIRM< 6R

D. After EXECution, but not tracking the tactical approach profile:

TACTICAL APPR 1/3

REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
----- / NM
1L o 1R
TIAF (-3.0 ) ALT
o
2L
090 /3 . 0 0 N M 2711FT
2R
TFAF FAF ALT
o
3L
090 /5 . 0 0 N M 1757FT
3R
PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
4L
090 117F T 4R
VPA TRANS LVL
5L -3.0o FL060 5R

6L 6R

E. When VNAV tactical approach is active:

ACT TACTICAL APPR 1/3

REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
----- / NM
1L o 1R
TIAF (-3.0 ) ALT
o
2L
090 /3 . 0 0 N M 2711FT
2R
TFAF FAF ALT
o
3L
090 /5 . 0 0 N M 1757FT
3R
PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
4L
090 117F T 4R
VPA TRANS LVL
5L -3.0 o FL060 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-203
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

F. nactive tactical approach page prior to confirmation:

TACTICAL APPR 1/3

REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
----- / NM
1L o 1R
TIAF (-3.0 ) ALT
o
2L
090 /3 . 0 0 N M 2711FT
2R
TFAF FAF ALT
o
3L
090 /5 . 0 0 N M 1757FT
3R
PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
4L
090 117F T 4R
VPA TRANS LVL
5L -3.0 o FL060 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

G. Inactive tactical approach page after confirmation:

TACTICAL APPR 1/3

REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
----- / NM
1L o 1R
TIAF (-3.0 ) ALT
o
2L
090 /3 . 0 0 N M 2711FT
2R
TFAF FAF ALT
o
3L
090 /5 . 0 0 N M 1757FT
3R
PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
4L
090 117F T 4R
VPA TRANS LVL
5L -3.0 o FL060 5R

6L 6R

ACT/MOD/" " (title): ACT will appear when the active waypoint is part of the tactical approach procedure.
MOD will appear when the crew is in the process of modifying the flight plan. A blank field will indicate the
tactical approach has been defined but is not yet active.

REF WPT ID [1L]: This field will allow the crew to enter a reference waypoint identifier in order to set the
position of the TIAF waypoint in the horizontal plane. Upon entry of the REF WPT ID, the fields RAD/DIS are
set to 0 deg/0.00 nm and the TIAF waypoint is located at the REF WPT ID position. The valid range for radial
and distance are angle between 0 and 360 degrees and distance between 0 and 999 nm respectively. When
EXEC button is pressed or DELETE is entered on this field, the REF WPT ID is deleted. If the reference
position does locate the TIAF waypoint outside the permitted range, an advisory message will be displayed in
the scratchpad indicating that the TIAF location is invalid.

TIAF [2L]: This field will allow the crew to select the Initial Approach Course and the TIAF-to-TFAF distance.
i) Initial Approach Course:
By default, the Initial Approach Course is displayed as dashes if no course is entered at the LSK 4L. When
the Final Approach Course (LSK 4L) is entered, the Initial Approach Course is updated with its value. Refer
to SWOP40603 for the minimum, maximum and default value of IAC.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-204
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ii) TIAF-to-TFAF distance:

The distance is left justified and displayed with 4 characters. A slash "/" must be typed before this value in
the scratch pad followed by the desired distance. Refer to SWOP40603 for the minimum, maximum and
default value of of
TIAF-toTFAF distance.

IAA (2L): This field will display the FMS computed Intermediate Approach Angle. This angle shown in this field
is display only and cannot be modified by the operator. The value is left justified and always displayed with one
decimal. Refer to SWOP40603 for the minimum, maximum and default value of IAA.

TFAF [3L]: This field will allow the crew to visualize the Final Approach Course to change the TFAF-to-TMAP
distance.
i) Final Approach Course:
The Final Approach Course is the same value that is entered at the LSK 4L.
ii) TFAF-to-MAP distance:
The distance is left justified and displayed with 4 characters. A slash "/" must be typed before this value in
the scratch pad followed by the desired distance. Refer to SWOP40603 for the minimum, maximum and
default value of TFAF-to-MAP distance.

FINAL APPROACH COURSE (FAC) [4L]: This field will allow the crew to enter the Final Approach Course,
which is the runway course. This field is a mandatory entry, when no course has been entered, boxes are
displayed ([][][]). This field is always displayed in white large font. The field title display the runway threshold
waypoint ident (MAP waypoint). Value will be between 0 and 360 degrees inclusively.

VPA [5L]: The FMS will allow crew entry/modification of the VPA (Vertical Path Angle) in degrees required to
define the tactical approach geometry. The value is left justified and always displayed with one decimal. Refer to
SWOP40603 for the minimum, maximum and default value of the VPA. VPA entries can be either positive or
negative. As such, the FMS will show the value as a negative number on the TACTICAL APPR page and will
(for internal computational purposes) accordingly change the sign convention to properly
define the geometry.

ERASE [6L]: When selected, the FMS will allow the crew to erase any route modifications associated to tactical
approach
selections.

CANCEL [6L]: When selected, the FMS will cancel changes made to the inactive route (or active route if the
'ERASE
MODS' option is set to 'CONFIRM').

RAD/DIS [1R]: Radial/distance from the reference position to the desired TIAF waypoint position. The values
are blanked, when no REF WPT ID is defined, otherwise zeros are displayed as the default values. No entries
are allowed, when the fields are blanked. Manual entry automatically updates the TIAF location. RAD and DIS
values may be entered individually or simultaneously; a '/' symbol preceding a value in the scratchpad indicates
only the DIS value must be updated.

ALT [2R]: This field will allow the crew to enter the altitude constraint at the TIAF in ft. The entry is valid as long
as the computed IAA is within the permitted range.
ALT [3R]: This field will display as well as allow the crew to enter the altitude constraint at the TFAF in ft. The
entry is valid as long as the computed VPA and IAA are within the permitted range.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-205
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RWY ELEV [4R]: This field is a mandatory crew entry of the runway threshold elevation for the tactical
approach. This field is used in defining the tactical approach geometry. The valid range for this field is -1000 to
25000. If the selected tactical approach runway threshold waypoint entered by the crew exists in the user
database as a user airport waypoint, then the FMS will automatically store its corresponding elevation value into
this field. The user database's airport waypoint value for the field elevation will then become the default value for
this entry.

TRANS LVL (5R): This field will display the current transition level defined on the PLAN DATA page. This field
is a display only field.

CONFIRM [6R]: When selected, the FMS will allow the crew to confirm tactical approach changes made to the
inactive route (or active route if the 'ERASE MODS' option is set to 'CONFIRM').

TACTICAL APPR 2/3 page (if configured)

Display TACTICAL APPR 2/3 page:

1. press [TACT], <TACT APPR>, [NEXT] if TACT key is configured and TACT APPR configured on the
TACTICAL page.

2. [INIT/ REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], <TACT APPR>, [NEXT] if a valid tactical approach
waypoint had previously been entered.

3. For the inactive route:

[TACT], <TACT APPR>, [NEXT] if TACT key is configured and TACT APPR configured on the TACTICAL
page.
[INIT/ REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [PREV], <TACT APPR>, [NEXT] if a valid tactical approach
waypoint had previously been entered.

This page is used to customize the tactical missed approach when the tactical approach is created manually.
When the missed approach point (MAP) has not been defined, only the default parameters are displayed on the
page. Once the MAP course and elevation have been defined from the TACTICAL APPR 1/3 page, the altitudes
constraints and leg courses are computed and displayed.

A. Default page:
MOD TACTICAL APPR 2/3
PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
/2.00NM FT
1L 1R
TMAP1 ALT
o
2L --- / 4 . 0 0 N M FT
2R
TMAP2 ALT
3L FT
3R
CLIMB GRADIENT
4L 2.5 %/2.5 % 4R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
5L ----- / NM 5R

6L
<ERASE 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-206
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. After modification of the TMAP1 to TMAP2 distance, but prior to execution:

MOD TACTICAL APPR 2/3

PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
090 /2.00 NM 117FT
1L 1R
TMAP1 ALT
o
2L --- / 5.00 N M 421FT
2R
TMAP2 ALT
3L 1029FT
3R
CLIMB GRADIENT
4L 2.5 %/2.0 % 4R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
5L ----- / NM 5R

6L
<ERASE 6R

C. If “ERASE MODS” option is set to "CONFIRM":

MOD TACTICAL APPR 2/3

PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
090 /2.00NM 117FT
1L 1R
TMAP1 ALT
o
2L 0 9 0 / 5.00N M 421FT
2R
TMAP2 ALT
3L 1029FT
3R
CLIMB GRADIENT
4L 2.5 %/2.0 % 4R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
5L ----- / NM 5R

6L
<CANCEL CONFIRM> 6R

D. After EXECution, but not tracking the tactical approach profile:

TACTICAL APPR 2/3

PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
1L 090 /2.00NM 117FT
1R
TMAP1 ALT
o
2L 0 9 0 / 5.00N M 421FT
2R
TMAP2 ALT
3L 1029FT
3R
CLIMB GRADIENT
4L 2.5 %/2.0 % 4R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
5L ----- / NM 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-207
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E. When VNAV tactical approach is active:

ACT TACTICAL APPR 2/3

PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
1L 090 /5.00NM 117FT
1R
TMAP1 ALT
o
2L 090 /2.00NM 1617FT
2R
TMAP2 ALT
3L 3117FT
3R
CLIMB GRADIENT
4L 2.5 %/2.5 % 4R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
5L ----- / NM 5R

6L 6R

F. Inactive tactical approach page prior to confirmation:

TACTICAL APPR 2/3

PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
090 /2.00NM 117FT
1L 1R
TMAP1 ALT
o
2L 0 9 0 / 5.00N M 421FT
2R
TMAP2 ALT
3L 1029FT
3R
CLIMB GRADIENT
4L 2.5 %/2.0 % 4R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
5L ----- o
/ NM 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

G. Inactive tactical approach page after confirmation:

TACTICAL APPR 2/3

PARKKMAP RWY ELEV
o
090 /2.00NM 117FT
1L 1R
TMAP1 ALT
o
2L 0 9 0 / 5.00N M 421FT
2R
TMAP2 ALT
3L 1029FT 3R
CLIMB GRADIENT
4L 2.5 %/2.0 % 4R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
5L ----- o
/ NM 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-208
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACT/MOD/" " (title): ACT will appear when the active waypoint is part of the tactical approach procedure.
MOD will appear when the crew is in the process of modifying the flight plan. A blank field will indicate the
tactical approach has been defined but is not yet active.

WAYPOINT IDENTIFIER [1L]: This field displays on the title, the ruway threshold waypoint (MAP) identifier.
This field will allow the crew to review the final approach (runway) course and edit the MAP-to-TMAP1 distance.
The distance is left justified and displayed with 4 characters. To enter a value, a slash ("/") must be typed in the
scracth pad first followed by the desired distance.

TMAP1 [2L]: This field will allow the crew to enter the Turn Missed Approach Course and the TMAP1-to-TMAP2
distance in nm.
i) Missed Approach Course
By default, dashes are display on the course entry section of the field to indicate that the information is
optional. If nothing is entered, upon execution of the flight plan, the value of the Final Approach Course
course is copied to this field to create a straight segment.
ii) TMAP1-to-TMAP2 distance
A slash ("/") must be typed before entering a value for the TMAP1-TMAP2 distance. The distance is left
justified and displayed with 4 characters.

TMAP2 (3L): This field displays the TMAP2 text in the title which is the second missed approach reserved
identifier.

CLIMB GRADIENT (4L): Displays the climb gradient of the vertical path defined by the MAP-to-TMAP1 altitude
constraint/distance and the climb gradient defined by the TMAP1-to-TMAP2 altitude constraint/distance. The
two climb gradients are separated by a slash ("/"). No input is allowed on this field. The values displayed are left
justified and displayed with one decimal. Refer to SWOP40603 for the minimum, maximum and default value of
the Climb Gradient.

REF WPT ID [5L]: This field will allow the crew to enter a reference waypoint identifier in order to set the
position of the TMAP2 waypoint in the horizontal plane. Upon entry of the REF WPT ID, the field RAD/DIS are
set to 0deg/0.00 nm and the TMAP2 waypoint is located at the REF WPT ID position. The Turn Missed
Approach Course and TMAP1-to-TMAP2 distance is then computed based on the REF WPT ID and the vertical
profile is updated by recomputing the TMAP1-TMAP2 climb angle. When EXEC button is pressed or DELETE is
entered on this field, the REF WPT ID is deleted.

ERASE [6L]: When selected, the FMS will allow the crew to erase any route modifications associated to tactical
approach selections.

CANCEL [6L]: When selected, the FMS will cancel changes made to the inactive route (or active route if the
'ERASE MODS' option is set to 'CONFIRM').

RWY ELEV (1R): This field displays the runway elevation in feet entered on the TACT APPR 1/3 page. No entry
is allowed on this
field.

TMAP1 ALT [2R]: This field displays and allows entry of the altitude constraint at the first missed approach
point (TMAP1). The entry is valid as long as the computed climb gradients are within the permitted range.

TMAP2 ALT [3R]: This field displays and allows entry of the altitude constraint at the second missed approach
point (TMAP2). The entry is valid as long as the computed Climb angle 2 is within the permitted range.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-209
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RAD/DIS [5R]: Radial/distance from the reference position to the desired TMAP2 waypoint position. The values
are blanked, when no REF WPT ID is defined, otherwise zeros are displayed as the default values. No entries
are allowed, when the fields are blanked.
Manual entry automatically updates the TMAP2 location. RAD and DIS values may be entered individually or
simultaneously; a '/' symbol preceding a value in the scratchpad indicates only the DIS value must be updated.

CONFIRM [6R]: When selected, the FMS will allow the crew to confirm tactical approach changes made to the
inactive route (or active route if the 'ERASE MODS' option is set to 'CONFIRM').

TACTICAL APPR 3/3 page (if configured)

Display TACTICAL APPR 3/3 page by pressing

1. [INIT/REF], <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], <TACT APPR>, [PREV] if TACT key is configured and
TACT APPR configured on the TACTICAL page.

2. Or, from DEP/ARR INDEX 1/1 page, <ARR>, <TACT APPR> if a valid tactical approach is selected in the
ARRIVALS page {If the TACT key is configured)} [TACT], TACT APPR>, [PREV]

This page is used to review the complete tactical approach procedure. No entry is allowed on this page. When a
tactical approach is loaded from the tactical approach database, a name is displayed next to the "TACT APPR:"
field, otherwise, no name is displayed.

A. Display of default page presented with the default tactical approach parameters:

MOD TACTICAL APPR 3/3

TACT APPR:
TIAF
1L o o 1R
3.00NM/-3.0
2L TFAF FAF
o 2R
5.00NM/-3.0 o
3L PARKK MAP
o 3R
2.00NM/2.5 %
4L TMAP1 4R
o
4.00NM/2 . 5 %
5L TMAP2 5R

6L <CANCEL 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-210
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Display prior to EXECution:

MOD TACTICAL APPR 3/3
TACT APPR:
TIAF 2711FT
1L o o 1R
090 3.00NM/-3.0
2L TFAF FAF 1757FT
o o 2R
090 5.00NM/-3.0
3L PARKK MAP 117FT
o 3R
090 2.00NM/2.5 %
4L TMAP1 421FT 4R
o
090 4.00NM/2.5 %
5L TMAP2 1029FT 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

C. Display if “ERASE MODS” option is set to "CONFIRM":

MOD TACTICAL APPR 3/3
TACT APPR:
1L TIAF 2711FT
o o 1R
090 3.00NM/-3.0
2L TFAF FAF 1757FT
o o 2R
090 5.00NM/-3.0
3L PARKK MAP 117FT
o 3R
090 2.00NM/2.5 %
4L TMAP1 421FT 4R
o
090 4.00NM/2.5 %
5L TMAP2 1029FT 5R

6L <CANCEL CONFIRM> 6R

D. Display after EXECution, but not tracking the tactical approach profile:

TACTICAL APPR 3/3

TACT APPR:
1L TIAF 2711FT
o o 1R
090 3.00NM/-3.0
2L TFAF FAF 1757FT
o 2R
090 5.00NM/-3.0 o
3L PARKK MAP 117FT
o o 3R
090 2.00NM/3.0
4L TMAP1 421FT 4R
o o
090 4.00NM/3.0
5L TMAP2 1029FT 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-211
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E. Display when VNAV tactical approach is active:

ACT TACTICAL APPR 3/3
TACT APPR:
1L TIAF 2711FT
o o 1R
090 3.00NM/-3.0
2L TFAF FAF 1757FT
o 2R
090 5.00NM/-3.0 o
3L PARKK MAP 117FT
o 3R
090 2.00NM/2.5 %
4L TMAP1 421FT 4R
o
090 4.00NM/2.5 %
5L TMAP2 1029FT 5R

6L 6R

F. Display of inactive tactical approach page prior to confirmation:

TACTICAL APPR 3/3

TACT APPR:
TIAF 2711FT
1L o o 1R
090 3.00NM/-3.00
2L TFAF FAF 1757FT
o 2R
090 5.00NM/-3.00 o
3L PARKK MAP 157FT 3R
o
090 2.00NM/2.5%
4L TMAP1 421FT 4R
o
090 4.00NM/2.5%
5L TMAP2 1029FT 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

G. Display of inactive tactical approach page after confirmation:

TACTICAL APPR 3/3

TACT APPR:
1L TIAF 2711FT
o o 1R
090 10.0NM/-3.0
2L TFAF FAF 1757FT
o 2R
090 5.00NM/-3.0 o
3L PARKK MAP 117FT
o 3R
090 2.00NM/2.5 %
4L TMAP1 421FT 4R
o
090 4.00NM/2.5 %
5L TMAP2 1029FT 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-212
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ACT/MOD/" " (title): ACT will appear when the active waypoint is part of the tactical approach procedure.
MOD will appear when the crew is in the process of modifying the flight plan. A blank field will indicate the
tactical approach has been defined but is not yet active.

TACT APPR (1L,1R): This field displays the tactical approach name loaded from the tactical approache
database. The approach name is limited to 7 characters and it is displayed in small white font for the active
route and cyan for the inactive route. When the tactical approach is created manually from the FMS MCDU
interface, the tactical approach name is blank but the title remains display.

TIAF (1L): This field displays the Initial Approach Course.

TFAF (2L): This field displays the Final Approach Course.

MAP (3L): This field displays the Final Approach Course (equals to runway course).

TMAP1 (4L): This field displays the Turn Missed Approach Course.

TMAP2 (5L): This field displays only the "TMAP2" text to easily associate the altitude display at LSK 5R with the
TMAP2 waypoint.

ERASE [6L]: When selected, the FMS will allow the crew to erase any route modifications associated to tactical
approach selections.

CANCEL [6L]: When selected, the FMS will cancel changes made to the inactive route (or active route if the
'ERASE MODS' option is set to 'CONFIRM').

TIAF ALT/DIS/IAA [1R]: This field displays the altitude constraint in ft at the TIAF waypoint, the distance
between the TIAF waypoint and the TFAF waypoint in nm and the Intermediate Approach Angle between those
two waypoints. When the altitude constraint is temperature compensated, it is displayed in inverse video white.
Note: that when the vnav approach is active and a VDEV is presented in the VNAV APPR 1/1 page, this VDEV
is not relative to this IAA but to the VPA defined for the TFAF-MAP segment.

TFAF ALT/DIS/VPA [2R]: This field displays the altitude constraint in ft at the TFAF waypoint, the distance
between the TFAF waypoint and the MAP waypoint in nm and the Vertical Path Angle between those two
waypoints. When the altitude constraint is temperature compensated, it is displayed in inverse video white.

MAP ALT/DIS/GRADIENT [3R]: This field displays the altitude constraint in ft at the MAP waypoint, the
distance between the
MAP waypoint and the TMAP1 waypoint in nm and the climb gradient between those two waypoints.

TMAP1 ALT/DIS/GRADIENT [4R]: This field displays the altitude constraint in ft at the TMAP1 waypoint, the
distance between the TMAP1 waypoint and the TMAP2 waypoint in nm and the climb gradient between those
two waypoints.

TMAP2 ALT [5R]: This field displays the altitude constraint in ft at the TMAP2 waypoint.

CONFIRM [6R]: When selected, the FMS will allow the crew to confirm tactical approach changes made to the
inactive route (or
active route if the 'ERASE MODS' option is set to 'CONFIRM').

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-213
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TIMER 1/1 page (if TIMER PG is configured)

Display TIMER 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], [NEXT] and <TIMER>.

The TIMER page is used to generate a “TIMER ALARM” alert message after a user specified alarm time was
reached (count-up timer) or a certain time duration has elapsed (countdown timer).

A. Display when no data is entered or after pressing CLEAR:

TIMER 1/1
ALARM TIME COUNTDOWN
1L
----:--z 0000:00 1R

2L ADD 5 MIN> 2R

3L ADD 15 MIN> 3R

4L ADD 30 MIN> 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

B. Display after an alarm time is entered:

TIMER 1/1
ALARM TIME COUNTDOWN
1L
1234:12z ----:-- 1R

2L ADD 5 MIN> 2R

3L ADD 15 MIN> 3R

4L ADD 30 MIN> 4R

5L <START CLEAR> 5R

6L 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-214
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Display after a countdown time is entered:

TIMER 1/1
ALARM TIME COUNTDOWN
1L
----:--z 2354:56 1R

2L ADD 5 MIN> 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L <START CLEAR> 5R

6L 6R

D Display after timer is activated. Countdown decrements:

TIMER 1/1
ALARM TIME COUNTDOWN
1L 1234:12z 2329:53 1R

2L ADD 5 MIN> 2R

3L ADD 15 MIN> 3R

4L ADD 30 MIN> 4R

5L <STOP CLEAR> 5R

6L 6R

E. Display after timer alarm triggered:

TIMER 1/1
ALARM TIME COUNTDOWN
1L
1234:12z ----:-- 1R

2L ADD 5 MIN> 2R

3L ADD 15 MIN> 3R

4L ADD 30 MIN> 4R

5L <START CLEAR> 5R

6L 6R
TIMER ALARM

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-215
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TITLE: TIMER

ALARM TIME [1L]: Display and entry of a count-up alarm event time (UTC or local time based on SETUP
page selection). If a countdown time was entered and activated (with START LSK 5L), the time at which the
countdown timer will expire is displayed. Upon data entry when the timer is active, the countdown time is
adjusted accordingly. Upon data entry when the timer is not active, the countdown time shows dashes. If the
timer is not activated and an alarm time is being displayed, pressing [CLR] puts dashes for the alarm time and
sets the countdown time to 0000:00; otherwise, resetting is not permitted and an advisory message is displayed.
Entering a non-valid time format or out of range value generates an invalid format or out of range advisory
message respectively.

COUNTDOWN [1R]: Time display and entry for countdown timer. Decreases to 0000:00 when the timer is
activated and then shows dashes automatically. The allowable data entry range is from 0000:00 to 2359:59. If
an alarm time was entered and activated (with START), the time remaining to reach the alarm time is displayed.
Upon data entry when the timer is active, the alarm time is adjusted accordingly. Upon data entry when the timer
is not active, the alarm time shows dashes. If the timer is not activated and a non-zero countdown time is being
displayed, pressing [CLR] sets the countdown time to 0000:00; otherwise, resetting is not permitted and an
advisory message is displayed. Entering a non-valid time format or out of range value generates an invalid
format or out of range advisory message respectively.

ADD 5 MIN [2R]: Adds 5 minutes to the alarm and/or countdown time, whichever is being displayed. If no
alarm or countdown time is being displayed, the countdown time will be set to 5 minutes. Displayed only if
adding 5 minutes to the countdown value will not cause it to exceed its maximum range value.

ADD 15 MIN [3R]: Adds 15 minutes to the alarm and/or countdown time, whichever is being displayed. If no
alarm or countdown time is being displayed, the countdown time will be set to 15 minutes. Displayed only if
adding 15 minutes to the countdown value will not cause it to exceed its maximum range value.

ADD 30 MIN [4R]: Adds 30 minutes to the alarm and/or countdown time, whichever is being displayed. If no
alarm or countdown time is being displayed, the countdown time will be set to 30 minutes. Displayed only if
adding 30 minutes to the countdown value will not cause it to exceed its maximum range value.

START [5L]: Pressing this softkey activates the timer. Displayed only if an alarm time or non-zero countdown
time is being displayed and the timer is not already activated. With the TIMER ALARM alert message set but
not cleared, starting the timer removes the alert message.

STOP [5L]: Pressing this softkey deactivates the timer. The countdown time stops decreasing and the alarm
time shows dashes. Displayed only if the timer is activated and has not expired.

CLEAR [5R]: Clears the TIMER ALARM alert message (if timer expired), deactivates the timer (if activated),
sets the alarm time to dashes and sets the countdown time to 0000:00. Displayed only if the alarm time and/or
non-zero countdown time is being displayed.

NOTE: “TIMER ALARM” message will be displayed in the scratchpad when the alarm timer goes off. This is an
Alert message type and will not illuminate the MSG annunciator.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-216
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TMP UPDATE POS 2/2 (If CARP, PREDEF PG and either EGI or IRS are configured)

Display TMP UPDATE POS 2/2 page by pressing:

[INIT/REF], <POS INIT>, <UPDATE POS> and [NEXT] or
[INIT/REF], <WPT LISTS>, <PREDEF WPT> and [NEXT], <UPDATE POS> and [NEXT] or
[INIT/REF], <NAV STATUS>, <INS>, <UPDATE POS> and [NEXT]
[PROG], [PREV] and <MARK>

This page is used for applying temporary position offsets on CARP procedure waypoint. The position update is
performed by a mark on top operation. The mark on top operation can be performed by over flying a reference
waypoint or flying by the waypoint and entering a relative bearing/distance that could be obtained from radar or
other device.

During temporary position updates, the FMS position is not affected, but the flight plan waypoints for the CARP
tactical function are shifted while and only while the procedure is active.

Upon exit and re-entry to the TMP UPDATE POS page via the UPDATE POS 1/2 page, all user data entry fields
maintain their previous values.

No entry is allowed, in any field on this page, when any of the following conditions occur:
• The inactive route is in a modified state, or
• CARP is not active, or
• CARP calculations are frozen, or
• NO CARP SOLUTION is being displayed.
A. Display after pressing CARP MARK LSK on the default display. The CANCEL prompt appears. The EXEC
key lights up only after entering a REF or UPDATE POSITION:

TMP UPDATE POS 2/2

REF BRG/DIST
1L
>----- 000o /0.00N M < 1R
UPDATE POSITION
o o
2L . . 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
o
4L INS 0.07 / 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-217
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E. Display after toggle of [1L] on default display:

TMP UPDATE POS 2/2

REF BRG/DIST
1L >FMS 000o /0.00N M 1R
UPDATE POSITION
o o
2L N45 28.08 W073 44.48 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L VOR/DME 0.07 000o/0.00 4R

5L 5R

6L <CARP PROG CARP MARK> 6R

F. Display after pressing CARP MARK LSK and entering an UPDATE POSITION for a temporary position
update:

MOD TMP UPDATE POS 2/2

REF BRG/DIST
1L >----- 000o /0.00N M 1R
UPDATE POSITION
2L N45o30.15 W073o43.96 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L INS 0.07 011o/0.10 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

G. Display after EXECution of a temporary position update:

TMP UPDATE POS 2/2

REF BRG/DIST
1L
>CYUL 010o /2.10N M < 1R
UPDATE POSITION
o o
2L N45 30.15 W073 43.96 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L INS 0.07 011o/0.10 4R

5L CANCEL UPDATE> 5R

6L <CARP PROG CARP MARK> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-218
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

H. Display after pressing CANCEL UPDATE LSK:

MOD TMP UPDATE POS 2/2

REF BRG/DIST
1L
>CYUL 010o /2.10N M < 1R
UPDATE POSITION
o o
2L N45 30.15 W073 43.96 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L INS 0.07 011o/0.10 4R

5L 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

MOD/" " (title): MOD indicates an active flight plan modification has not been EXECuted yet; otherwise, the
field is blank.

REF [1L]: This field displays the reference position. Successively pressing this LSK with an empty scratchpad,
the REF changes between the system position (FMS), and a waypoint ID entry prompt (----).
When the waypoint ID entry prompt (----) is displayed the user can specify a waypoint ID via the scratchpad.
When this page is accessed via the MARK key on the CARP PROGRESS page this field will contain the IP
identifier by default. When FMS is displayed the FMS computed position is used as reference. This is the default
state when accessed via the UPDATE POS 1/2 page.

BRG/DIST/XTK OFFSET [1R]: This field displays the vector that is added to the REF ID position to generate
the UPDT POS position. Two formats are supported. Except when the reference is FMS, pressing the LSK with
an empty scratchpad causes the display to toggle between the two formats.
The default format is BRG/DIST: bearing (in degrees clockwise from North - either True or Magnetic depending
on setup page) and distance (in nautical miles). The default values for the BRG/DIST format are 0 with valid
range of 0 to 360 degrees and 0.00 to 99.9 nautical miles.
The second format is XTK OFFSET and is not available when REF is FMS: cross-track distance from the REF
position to the closest point along the path passing through the aircraft position and in the direction of the
heading. L indicates the aircraft is to the left of the ID point, R is to the right. The default value is R0 with valid
range from 000 to 999 feet.

UPDATE POSITION [2L]: This field displays the position from which the marked FMS position is to be
subtracted to compute a position correction vector. Once the position update is completed and executed, this
position correction vector is subtracted from the CARP procedure waypoint positions. UPDATE POSITION may
be entered manually via the scratchpad; otherwise it is computed as the sum of the REF position and the
BRG/DIST or XTK OFFSET vector.
When entered manually, the REF and BRG/DIST fields are set to ----; otherwise
When the REF is FMS, this field changes value as the FMS position changes until the MARK LSK is pressed, at
which time it is frozen.
When the REF is a waypoint ID, this field is static.

MODE (4L): This field displays the marked FMS navigation mode.

ACCUR (4L): This field displays the horizontal position accuracy of the marked FMS position (in nautical miles).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-219
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

POS DIFF (4R): This field displays the bearing and distance from the FMS position to the UPDATE POSITION.
Prior to pressing the MARK key, the current FMS position is used, and after pressing the MARK key, the marked
FMS position is used. When the REF is FMS, this field equals that of the BRG/DIST. The default values are 0
and 0.00 respectively. Range is from 0 to 360 degrees and from 0.00 to 999 nautical miles.

CANCEL UPDATE [5R]: This LSK is used to perform manual cancellation of the temporary position update.
Pressing the LSK triggers the ERASE prompts to appear, the MOD status to be displayed, and the EXEC key to
be lit. When no temporary position update is active or mark has been pressed (and not cancelled), this field is
blank and pressing the LSK has no effect.

CARP PROG [6L]: This LSK is used to access the CARP PROGRESS page.

CANCEL [6L]: This LSK is used to cancel the marked position. Displayed only once the CARP MARK key has
been pressed.

ERASE [6L]: Cancels any route modifications and any temporary offset that has not yet been executed. Only
displayed when the page is displaying the MOD status.

CARP MARK [6R]: This LSK is used to mark the current FMS position.

UPDATE POS 1/1 (if PREDEF PAGE and IRS, EGI or DVS interface is configured) or UPDATE POS 1/2 (if
CARP is configured)

Display UPDATE POS 1/1 page by pressing:

[INIT REF], <POS INIT> and <UPDATE POS> or

[INIT REF], <WPT LISTS>, <PREDEF WPT> and [NEXT], <UPDATE POS> or
[INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, <INS> and <UPDATE POS>.

This page allows manual updates of the following navigation mode positions to be performed:
INS/GPS {SIGMA50H EGI configuration only},
INS/DVS {SIGMA50H EGI configuration only},
INS {IRS or LN_100GT EGI configuration only}, and/or
DVS {DVS configuration only}.
For the SIGMA50H EGI, a manual update of the INS/DVS will automatically update the INS/GPS, and vice-
versa.

Three basic methods of performing a navigation mode position update are supported:
Update by Overfly and Mark of a Known Position,
Update by Weather Radar Joystick Position Selection {Weather Radar (WXR) configuration only or
AHCAS/AHCAS2 EFIS configuration}, and
Update using another navigation mode position.
These methods are briefly described below.

Update by Overfly and Mark of a Known Position

1. The user flies to the known position and presses the MARK key as the known position is overflown. The
MARK key may be the physical hard key or the softkey on the UPDATE POS page per CFG KEY
configuration settings.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-220
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

2. If the MARK hard key was pressed, the PREDEF WPT page automatically appears with the MARK ON TOP
field containing the CMA-9000 FMS position at the time the MARK key was pressed. If the MARK softkey
was pressed, the UPDATE POS page is already being displayed.
3. The user selects <UPDATE POS>, bringing forth the UPDATE POS page with the CMA-9000 FMS position
as reference. The displayed data corresponds to the positions when the MARK key was pressed.
4. The user presses <REF>, bringing forth an entry prompt ( ).
5. The user enters the known position. The position may be entered directly in the UPDATE POS field, or
indirectly with an identifier with or without an offset.
6. The user selects the navigators for which a position update is sought.
7. The user presses <CONFIRM>. The CMA-9000 FMS then updates the selected navigators with the position
indicated in the UPDATE POS field.

Update by Weather Radar Joystick Position Selection {WXR or AHCAS/AHCAS2 configuration only}

1. The user selects a known position on the weather radar using a joystick.
2. The PREDEF WPT page automatically appears with the LAST JOYSTICK field containing the position
transmitted by the weather radar or received from AHCAS/AHCAS2 EFIS.
3. The user selects <UPDATE POS>, bringing forth the UPDATE POS page with JOYSTICK as reference. The
displayed data corresponds to the positions when the joystick position was received.
4. The user enters the true josytick position. The position may be entered directly or with an identifier. The
UPDATE POS field will get automatically updated by the CMA-9000 FMS.
5. The user selects the navigators for which a position update is sought.
6. The user presses <CONFIRM>. The CMA-9000 FMS then updates the selected navigators with the position
indicated in the UPDATE POS field.

Update using another navigation mode position

1. The user verifies the CMA-9000 FMS Navigation mode on the PROGRESS or POS INIT pages corresponds
to the mode from which an update position will be obtained. The user may deselect some navigation modes
by pressing [INIT REF],<NAV STATUS>, <DESELECT>.
2. The user presses the MARK key. The MARK key may be the physical hard key or the softkey on the
UPDATE POS page per CFG KEY configuration settings.
3. If the MARK hard key was pressed, the PREDEF WPT page automatically appears. If the MARK softkey
was pressed, the UPDATE POS page is already being displayed.
4. The user selects <UPDATE POS>, bringing forth the UPDATE POS page with the CMA-9000 FMS position
as reference. The displayed data corresponds to the positions when the MARK key was pressed.
5. The user selects the navigators for which a position update is sought.
6. The user presses <CONFIRM>. The CMA-9000 FMS then updates the selected navigators with the position
indicated in the UPDATE POS field.

A. Update POS 1/1 page default state, the CMA-9000 FMS position is used by default.
UPDATE POS 1/1
REF
1L
>F M S ( I N S / D V S ) 1R
ACCUR 0.07N M
2L N45o28.08 W073o44.48
2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L INS/DVS 0.07 000o/0.00 4R
INS/GPS 1.10 090o/1.00
5L DVS 2.01 180o/2.00 5R

6L <PREDEF WPT MARK> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-221
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Update POS 1/1 page by pressing the MARK key, all positions are frozen and sensors are selectable:

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF
1L
>F M S ( I N S / D V S ) 1R
ACCUR 0.07N M
2L N45o28.08 W073o44.48
2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L <I N S / D V S 0 . 0 7 000o/0.00 4R
INS/GPS 1.10 090o/1.00
5L <D V S 2.01 180o/2.00 5R

6L <UNMARK MARK> 6R

C UPDATE POS 1/1 waypoint ID entered, MARK key pressed and EGI selected.
UPDATE POS 1/1
REF BRG/DIST
1L
>CYUL ---o /-.--N M 1R
ACCUR 0.27N M
o o
2L N45 28.08 W073 44.48 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L <I N S / D V S 0 . 0 7 180o/0.00 4R
INS/GPS 1.10 045o/1.00
5L <D V S 2.01 180o/2.00 5R

6L <CANCEL CONFIRM> 6R

D. Update POS 1/1 offset entered, the update position is updated and CHECK UPDATE appears:
UPDATE POS 1/1
REF BRG/DIST
1L
>CYUL 180o /1.00N M 1R
ACCUR 0.27N M
o o
2L N45 28.08 W073 44.48 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L <I N S / D V S 0 . 0 7 180o/1.00 4R
INS/GPS 1.10 045o/1.41
5L <D V S 2.01 180o/1.00 5R

6L <CANCEL CONFIRM> 6R
CHECK UPDATE

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-222
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E. Update POS 1/1 page pressing LSK 1L, the identifier entry prompt appears:

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF
1L
>----- 1R
ACCUR
o o
2L . . 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
o
4L INS/DVS 0.07 / 4R
o
INS/GPS 1.10 /
o
5L DVS 2.01 / 5R

6L <PREDEF WPT MARK> 6R

F. UPDATE POS 1/1 page by pressing LSK 1L, the joystick prompts appear.

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF
1L >JOYSTICK 1R
ACCUR 0.27N M
2L ---o--.-- ----o--.--
2R
TRUE JOY POS
o o
3L . . 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
o
4L INS/DVS 0.07 / 4R
o
INS/GPS 1.10 /
o
5L DVS 2.01 / 5R

6L <PREDEF WPT MARK> 6R

G. UPDATE POS 1/1 position entered (INS/GPS unavailable because hybridization is on).

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF
1L
>- - - - - 1R
ACCUR 0.27N M
o o
2L N45 28.08 W073 44.48 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L INS/DVS 0.07 000o/0.00 4R

5L DVS 2.01 180o/2.00 5R

6L <PREDEF WPT MARK> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-223
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

H. UPDATE POS 1/1 entering the true joystick position computes the update position.

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF
1L
>JOYSTICK 1R
ACCUR 0.27N M
2L N45o28.08 W073o44.48
2R
----- T R U E J O Y P O S
o o
3L N45 21.19 W073 27.00 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L INS/DVS 0.07 000o/0.00 4R
INS/GPS 1.10 090o/1.00
5L DVS 2.01 180o/2.00 5R

6L <PREDEF WPT MARK> 6R

I. UPDATE POS 1/1 pressing [1L] LSK, the ident entry prompt appear. IRS configured.

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF
1L
>----- 1R
ACCUR
o o
2L . . 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
o
4L INS 0.07 / 4R

5L 5R

6L <PREDEF WPT MARK> 6R

J. UPDATE POS 1/1 waypoint ID entered, MARK key is pressed and INS (IRS) is selected.

UPDATE POS 1/1

REF BRG/DIST
1L
>CYUL ---o /-.--N M 1R
ACCUR 0.27N M
o o
2L N45 28.08 W073 44.48 2R

3L 3R
ACCUR POS DIFF
4L <I N S 0.07 000o/0.00 4R

5L 5R

6L <CANCEL CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-224
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

REF [1L]: This field displays the reference identifier. Successively pressing this button with an empty
scratchpad, the reference selection changes between the system position (FMS – default state = active nav),
INS/GPS, GPS, the joystick prompt (JOYSTICK), and a waypoint identifier entry prompt (-----) (in this order).
• When the system is used as the reference, the CMA-9000 FMS active navigation mode is displayed in
parenthesis next to it.
• When the CMA-9000 FMS - INS/GPS navigation is used as the reference, INS/GPS is displayed in
parenthesis next to it.
• When the CMA-9000 FMS - GPS navigation is used as the reference, GPS is displayed in parenthesis next
to it.
• When the entry prompt is selected, this button allows the pilot to specify a waypoint ID via the scratchpad.
• When the joystick prompt is selected, a prompt appears to specify the true joystick marked position by
entering the waypoint ID at LSK 3L or the position coordinates at LSK 3R.
• When a position is specified via field at LSK 2R, the reference ID is dashed.

NOTE: When this softkey is pressed, the entry prompt data fields are reset.

ACCUR (2L): This field displays the reference’s accuracy. When the reference is a fix location or joystick
derived position, the value is set to the configurable option value.

BRG/DIST [1R]: This optional prompt is displayed when a waypoint ID was entered as the reference. This
field can be used to offset the identifier position by entering the desired bearing and range. Pressing [CLR], then
the LSK key in this field forces the offset back to its default (no offset).

UPDATE POS [2R]: This field displays the final position which be used to perform the update. It can also be
used to enter coordinates via the scratchpad. When a position is manually entered, the REF prompt becomes
dashed. When an offset is entered, the update position corresponds to the offset reference’s position.

TRUE JOY POS [3R]: {WEATHER RADAR or AHCAS EFIS configured} This field is displayed only when the
joystick prompt is selected. This field allows the true joystick position coordinates to be entered via the
scratchpad.

TRUE JOY POS ID [3L]: {WEATHER RADAR or AHCAS EFIS configured} This field is displayed only when
the joystick prompt is selected. This field allows the true joystick position ID to be entered via the scratchpad.

INS/DVS or INS/GPS [4L]: {SIGMA50H EGI configured} This field selects/deselects the INS/GPS and
INS/DVS navigators. The INS/GPS is displayed only when hybridization is off. This prompt is available for
selection only if a valid update position was entered and the MARK key was pressed. When selected, the
navigators are highlighted in white. The “CHECK UPDATE” advisory message appears if a sensor is selected
whose accuracy is smaller than its position difference with the update position.

INS [4L]: {IRS or LN_100GT EGI configured} This field selects/deselects the INS navigator. When the
LN_100GT EGI is installed, this prompt is available for selection only if a valid update position was entered and
the MARK key was pressed. When the IRS is installed, this prompt is available for selection only if in Inertial
navigation mode. If a valid update position was entered and if the MARK key was pressed. When selected, the
navigator is highlighted in white. The “CHECK UPDATE” advisory message appears if a sensor is selected
whose accuracy is smaller than its position difference with the update position.

DVS [5L]: {DVS configured} This field selects/deselects the DVS navigator. This prompt is available for
selection only if a valid update position was entered and the MARK key is pressed. When selected, the
navigator is highlighted in green. The “CHECK UPDATE” advisory message appears if a sensor is selected
whose accuracy is smaller than its position difference with the update position.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-225
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

POS DIFF (4R, 5R): These fields display the position difference between the sensor navigation position and
the update position in nautical miles.

ACCUR (4R, 5R): These fields display the sensor navigation accuracy in nautical miles.

PREDEF WPT [6L]: Displayed only when the CANCEL and UNMARK prompt are not displayed. Pressing
this softkey will bring the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page.

CANCEL [6L]: Displayed only when at least one sensor is selected for update. Pressing this softkey will
unselect all sensors.

CONFIRM [6R]: Displayed only when at least one sensor is selected for update. Selecting this softkey will
cause the CMA-9000 FMS to update the selected sensors’ position to the update position and then unselect all
sensors. The "!OUT OF RANGE" advisory message appears if the INS/GPS position difference with the
reference position is greater than 15 nautical miles. When the "!OUT OF RANGE" message is displayed, the
INS, INS/DVS and/or INS/GPS position are not updated.

MARK [6R]: {MARK softkey configuration only} Displayed only when the CONFIRM prompt is not
displayed. Pressing this softkey will freeze all positions and allow the sensors to be selected.

UNMARK [6L]: Displayed only once the MARK key is pressed and the CANCEL prompt is not displayed.
Pressing this softkey will unfreeze all positions and unselect all sensors.

USER ROUTES 1/1

Display USER ROUTES 1/1 page by pressing [RTE] and <USER ROUTES> or [RTE], <RTE X> and
<USER ROUTES>.

A. Normal display:

USER ROUTES 1/1

0001M0009M WPT01WPT09
1L 1R

2L WPT01WPT10 STATION010
2R

3L STATION015 ---------- 3R

4L 4R
LOAD
5L >DIRECT 5R

6L <ROUTE DELETE ALL> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-226
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. When route is deleted:

USER ROUTES 1/1

0001M0009M WPT01WPT09
1L 1R

2L WPT01WPT10 STATION010
2R

3L STATION015 ----------
3R

4L 4R
LOAD
5L >DIRECT 5R

6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

ROUTE [1L,2L,3L,4L,5L,1R,2R,3R,4R,5R]: User Route name. When a name is entered from the scratchpad in
the field containing dashes, the CANCEL and CONFIRM prompts are displayed. Press CONFIRM in order to
save a new user route identical to the route that is being displayed on the RTE and LEGS pages. Pressing
[CLR], then the LSK key on a user route name will bring up the CANCEL and CONFIRM prompts. Press
CONFIRM for the deletion of that user route. Selecting a user route name with the scratchpad empty will bring
forth the RTE page with the selected user route loaded (but not activated).

NOTE: When airborne, a user route name selected on page USER ROUTES 1/1 will replace the current active
route without replacing the origin.
When a route name is entered over an existing one, the advisory message “!INVALID ENTRY” will be
th
displayed. In the case where an 11 route name would have to be entered (which is not allowed in the
system), one of the existing 10 route names has to be deleted in order to make room for that new route
since the maximum number of user routes is 10.

LOAD [5L]: Toggle DIRECT/INVERSE direction of the route to be loaded. DIRECT is the default.

ROUTE [6L]: Return to the RTE X 1/1 page.

DELETE ALL [6R]: Delete all user routes. Pressing this key causes the CANCEL and CONFIRM prompts to
appear. Press CONFIRM to delete. This prompt only appear if at least one user route exists.

(DELETE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts upon deletion of a user waypoint.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancels the creation of a new user route or deletion of a single user route or of all user
routes, as applicable.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirms the creation of a new user route or deletion of a single user route or of all user
routes, as applicable. Cross-talks the creation or deletion to the cross-side FMS if FMSs are in synchronized
mode.

NOTE: An advisory message “!USER ROUTE EXISTS” will be displayed if a duplicated name of user route is
entered. The entry will be rejected.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-227
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

USER WPT 1/2

Display the USER WPT 1/2 page, press [INIT REF], <WPT DATA>,<NEW USER WPT>.

The USER WPT pages allow for the creation or modification of user waypoints. Moving waypoints can be
created or modified if Moving waypoint is configured.

When any moving waypoint identifier that is present in the active route is entered, an ACT RTE caption is
displayed in reverse video.

When any identifier is entered and all mandatory fields are entered, CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts will appear.
Leaving the USER WPT pages without confirmation will automatically perform a CANCEL.

A. Page displayed for creation of a new fixed user waypoint:

USER WPT 1/2

ID/POS FREE= 459
o o
1L . .
1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L --- /---N M 2R
TYPE
3L >FIXED 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <WPT DATA WPT LIST> 6R

USER WPT 1/2

ID/POS FREE= 459
o o
1L . .
1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
T T
2L --- /---N M / KT
2R
TYPE
3L >FIXED 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <WPT DATA WPT LIST> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-228
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. After modifying data for an existing moving waypoint identifier in the active route:

USER WPT 1/2

ADFF ID/POS ACT RTE
1L N45o12.23 W043o32.12 1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
T T
2L 223 /115N M 111 /222K T 2R
TYPE
3L >MOVING 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
4L ADED 000o/0.00N M 4R
REF WPT POS
5 N45o12.23 W043o32.12 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

C. After entering a new identifier and all mandatory fields or modifying data for an existing fixed waypoint
identifier or moving waypoint identifier is not in the active route:

USER WPT 1/2

ADFF ID/POS FREE= 459
1L N45o12.23 W043o32.12 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L 223 /115N M 2R
TYPE
3L FIXED 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ----- / . NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

USER WPT 1/2

ADFF ID/POS FREE= 459
1L N45o12.23 W043o32.12 1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
T T
2L 223 /115N M 111 /222K T 2R
TYPE
3L >MOVING 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ADED 000 /0.00N M 4R
REF WPT POS
o o
5L N45 12.23 W043 32.12 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-229
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

D. After entering DELETE on an existing user waypoint identifier:

USER WPT 1/2

ADFF ID/POS FREE= 459
1L
N45o12.23 W043o32.12 1R
BRG/DIS
T
2L 223 /115N M 2R
TYPE
3L FIXED 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ---- / . NM 4R
REF WPT POS
5L ---o--.-- ----o--.-- 5R

6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

USER WPT 1/2

ADFF ID/POS FREE= 459
1L
N45o12.23 W043o32.12 1R
BRG/DIS TK/GS
T T
2L 223 /115N M 111 /222N M 2R
TYPE
3L >MOVING 3R
REF WPT ID RAD/DIS
o
4L ADED 000 /0.00N M 4R
REF WPT POS
5L N45o12.23 W043o32.12 5R

6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

ID [1L]:User waypoint identifier (5 characters max.).

When the identifier entered exists as a non-user waypoint, the entry is allowed and an advisory !DUPLICATE
WAYPOINT appears. When the identifier entered exists as a user waypoint, its parameters are automatically
displayed in all fields. If a modification is in progress, entering a new identifier will delete the previously
displayed information and display the information corresponding to the newly entered identifier. Pressing [CLR]
in this field will bring the DELETE? prompt. Deletion of a moving user waypoint in the active route or modified
route is not permitted. The default value is boxes.

POS [1R]: User waypoint position in the selected coordinate system and datum. Automatically displayed if the
user waypoint identifier entered exists. Manual entry forces default value to appear in the REF WPT ID and REF
WPT POS and RAD/DIS fields and automatically updates the BRG/DIS field. For moving waypoints, the value
will be recomputed and displayed at a minimum rate of once every second. The default value is boxes.

FREE(1R): Number of user waypoint free slots in user database (460 user waypoints max.) The number
displayed is always the difference between 460 and number of fixed and moving waypoints (460 - no of fixed
waypoint - no of moving waypoint).

BRG/DIS [2L]: Bearing and distance from the current aircraft position to the waypoint. Manual entry forces
default value to appear in the REF WPT ID and REF WPT POS and RAD/DIS fields and automatically updates
the POS field. BRG and DIS values may be entered individually or simultaneously; a ‘/’ symbol preceding a
value in the scratchpad indicates only the DIS value must be updated. The values will be recomputed and
displayed at a minimum rate of once every second. The default values are dashes, and the minimum/maximum
values for the bearing are 0/360 degrees and 0/999 nm for the distance.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-230
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

TK/GS [2R]: Track angle and ground speed of moving waypoint. TK and GS values may be entered
individually or simultaneously; a ‘/’ symbol appended to a value in the scratchpad indicates only the TK value
must be updated. The default value is boxes, and the minimum/ maximum values for the track angle are 0/360
degrees and 0/999 Kts for the ground speed.

TYPE [3L]: FIXED or MOVING waypoint type indication. The default upon entry in the page will be FIXED, as
applicable. The toggling is only possible when adding a new user waypoint.

REF WPT ID [4L]: Reference waypoint identifier with dashes as default value. Entry of an identifier will display
its position in the REF WPT POS field and the POS and BRG/DIS fields will be automatically updated. When
entering a moving waypoint as a reference waypoint, the waypoint's position computed at the time of the entry
will be used. In the case of a MARK ON TOP position used as a reference from the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page, the
REF WPT ID field displays the identifier "ONTOP". In the case of a LAST JOYSTICK position used as a
reference from the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page, the REF WPT ID field displays the identifier "JSTCK". In the case of
a LAST PLS position used as a reference from the PREDEF WPT 2/2 page, the REF WPT ID field displays
either the identifier "PLS" when PLS CUBIC AN/ARS6 is configured, or the identifier "SVxxx" where xxx is a
number between 001 and 127 when PLS CUBIC V12 is configured. In the case of a FLIR position used as a
reference from the PREDEF WPT 3/3 page, the REF WPT ID field displays the identifier “FLIR”.

RAD/DIS[4R]: Radial/distance from the reference position to the desired user waypoint position. The values are
blanked, when no REF WPT POS is defined, otherwise zeros are displayed as the default values. No entries are
allowed, when the fields are blanked. Manual entry automatically updates the POS and BRG/DIS fields. RAD
and DIS values may be entered individually or simultaneously; a '/' symbol preceding a value in the scratchpad
indicates only the DIS value must be updated. The minimum/maximum values for the radial are 0/360 degrees
and 0/999 NM for the distance.

REF WPT POS [5L]: Reference position with dashes as default value. It corresponds to the position of the
reference waypoint identifier or a manually entered value. Upon entry of a value, the REF ID field will be set to
dash symbols and the POS and BRG/DIS fields will be automatically updated.

WPT DATA [6L]: Access to the WPT DATA 1/1 page.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts upon modification of a user waypoint.

(DELETE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts upon deletion of a user waypoint.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancels the definition, modifications, or deletion of a user waypoint. All the fields return to their
default value (when cancelling the creation of a user waypoint), or to their original value (when cancelling a user
waypoint modification).

NOTE: If one user waypoint has been created, some new changes are made and cancelled, all the latest
changes are lost.

WPT LIST [6R]: Access to the USER WPT LIST 1/N page.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirms the definition, modifications, or deletion of a user waypoint.

NOTE: Changes are still allowed while CONFIRM is on the screen.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-231
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

USER WPT 2/2

Display USER WPT 2/2 page to modify parameters of an existing waypoints by pressing [INIT_REF],
<WPT DATA>, <NEW USER WPT> and [NEXT].

The USER WPT pages allows for the creation of new user waypoints of different class and types or the
modification of existing user waypoints. USER WPT 1/2 allows to enter basic property of waypoint such its ID
and position. USER WPT 2/2 allows the definition of the type and class of the new waypoint along with their
additional properties.(mandatory and optional field):
When the new waypoint created is of type other than WAYPOINT, mandatory fields must be entered as
indicated by the display of the page.

USER WPT 2/2 USER WPT 2/2

ID FREE=459 TYPE ID ACT RTE TYPE
1L
YUL AIRPORT> 1R YYV WAYPOINT<
1L 1R
REGION
2L CAN/CY 2R 2L 2R

3L 3R 3L 3R

4L 4R 4L 4R
ELEVATION
5L 10323F T 5R 5L 5R

6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R 6L <CANCEL SAVE? CONFIRM> 6R

USER WPT 2/2 USER WPT 2/2

ID FREE=459 TYPE ID FREE=459 TYPE
1L YKL VHF NAV< 1R 1L YUL WAYPOINT< 1R
REGION CLASS REGION
2L ---/-- TACAN 2R 2L ---/-- 2R

3L HIGH LEVEL< 3R 3L 3R
CHAN
4L 4R 4L 4R
DECLIN ELEVATION
5L ----o FT 5R 5L 5R

6L <WPT DATA DELTE ALL> 6R 6L DELETE ALL> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-232
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ID [1L]: User waypoint identifier with boxes as default value. Identical to USER WPT 1/1 page.

FREE: Number of user waypoint free slots in user database (460 user waypoints max.) The number displayed
is always the difference between 460 and number of fixed and moving waypoints (460 - no of fixed waypoints -
no of moving waypoint).

TYPE [1R]: Identifier type. Possible values are:

VHF NAV: TACAN (only TACAN fixed stations)
AIRPORT: Airports
WAYPOINT: Position Waypoint
The default upon power up is WAYPOINT. Moving waypoints may only be of type WAYPOINT.

REGION [2L]: The REGION and the ICAO code (not displayed for MOVING waypoints). This field allows also
entry of REGION and/or ICAO. The default values are dashes.

Complete list of region codes:

AFR: Africa MES: Middle East/South Asia
CAN: Canada PAC: Pacific
EEU: Eastern Europe SAM: South America
EUR: Europe SPA: South Pacific
LAM: Latin America USA: United States of
America
CUS: Specific to customer

Sample ICAO country codes (2 characters):

EH= Europe, Netherlands EG= Europe, UK

Complete list of the ICAO country code are contained in ARINC 424 document.

NAVAID CLASS TYPE (2R): TACAN

NOTE: The only available user waypoint VHF NAV type is TACAN.

NAVAID CLASS LEVEL [3R]: Toggle between: HIGH LEVEL, LOWLEVEL, TERMINAL and UNDEFINED. The
default value is High Level.

CLASS [2R], [3R]: NAVAID Class: (VHF NAV only).

[2R] [3R]
H-High Level
L- Low Level
TACAN T-Terminal
U-Undefined

The default upon selection of VHF NAV type will be TACAN.

CHAN [4L]: TACAN NAVAID channel. The default value is boxes,

and the range is 1 to 126 with X or Y appended.

DECLIN [5L]: VHF NAV Aid station declination (VHF NAV only). The default value is boxes, and the
minimum/maximum values are W127/E127 degrees.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-233
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ELEVATION [5R]: Enter the elevation in feet (Airport and VHF NAV only). The default value is boxes, and the
minimum/maximum values are –9999/+9999 ft.

WPT DATA [6L]: Access to the WPT DATA 1/1 page.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts upon modification of a user waypoint.

(DELETE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts upon deletion of a user waypoint.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancels the definition, modifications or deletion of a user waypoint or performs a deletion of all user
waypoints as indicated by the question above the prompt. All the fields return to their default value (when
cancelling the creation of a user waypoint), or to their original value (when cancelling a user waypoint
modification).

NOTE: If one user waypoint was created, some new changes were made and cancelled, then all the latest
changes are lost.

DELETE ALL [6R]: Request to delete all user waypoints and triggers the CANCEL and CONFIRM prompts. If a
moving waypoint is present in the active or modified route, then the advisory message “!MOV WPT IN ROUTE” is
displayed.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirms the definition, modifications or deletion of a user waypoint or performs a deletion of all
user waypoints as indicated by the question.

NOTE: Changes are still allowed while CONFIRM is on the screen.

USER WPT LIST 1/X

Display USER WPT LIST 1/X page by pressing:

[INIT_REF], <WPT LISTS>, <USER WPT> or
[INIT/REF], <WPT DATA>, <NEW USER WPT>, <WPT LIST> {if Tactical Config BULLS EYE is configured} or
[INIT/ REF], <BULLS EYE>, [PREV], <WPT LIST> {if no CFG KEY is configured to BULL} or
[BULL], [PREV], <WPT LIST> {if any CFG KEY is configured to BULL}.
The user waypoints are displayed in alphabetical order.

USER WPT LIST 1/2

DIS NM DIS NM
1L <BASET 2 0 . 1 GABRE 0 . 7 9 > 1R
MOV
2L <BINDY 28.9 HEC 82.7>
2R

3L <CIVET 36.3 INTC 32.6>

3R
MOV
4L <DAG 81.6 LAHAB 24.1> 4R

5L <DOWNE 21.5 LAX16 23.8> 5R

MOV
6L <NEW USER WPT DEL ALL> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-234
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

USER WPT LIST 1/1

DIS NM DIS NM
1L <BASET 2 0 . 1 GABRE 0 . 7 9 > 1R

2L <BINDY 28.9 HEC 82.7>

2R
MOV
3L <CIVET 36.3 INTC 32.6>
3R

4L <DAG 81.6 LAHAB 24.1> 4R

5L <DOWNE 21.5 LAX16 23.8> 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DEL ALL> 6R

Other pages 1/X are viewed using the key [NEXT]. The distance between present position (PPOS) and waypoints
are updated every second.
User waypoint can be deleted by pressing [CLR] followed by the LSK corresponding the waypoint to be deleted.
USER WPT LIST 1/2
DIS NM DIS NM
1L
<BASET 2 0 . 1 GABRE 0 . 7 9 > 1R
MOV
2L <BINDY 28.9 HEC 82.7>
2R

3L <CIVET 36.3 INTC 32.6> 3R

MOV
4L <DAG 81.6 LAHAB 24.1> 4R

5L <DOWNE 21.5 LAX16 23.8> 5R

MOV
6L <CANCEL DELETE? CONFIRM> 6R

USER WPT ID [1L,2L,3L,4L,5L,1R,2R,3R,4R,5R]: User waypoint identifier and distance from the present
position (PPOS). Selecting the waypoint will display the WPT DATA 1/1 page with all the information pertaining
to that waypoint.

FIXED or MOVING waypoint type:

• When MOV is displayed on the line below the waypoint and it refers to the situation when the waypoint is a
moving waypoint. It is displayed in reverse white color.
• if there is no indication, the user waypoint is FIXED.

NEW USER WPT [6L]: Access to the USER WPT page for user waypoint creation/modification.

(DELETE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts upon deletion of a user waypoint.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancel the deletion of the USER WPT.

CONFIRM [6R]: Delete the selected waypoint. Cross-talks the deletion to the cross-side FMS if FMSs are in
synchronized mode.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-235
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DEL ALL [6R]: Request to delete all user waypoints and triggers the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts. If a moving
waypoint is present in the active or modified route, then the error message “!MOV WPT IN ROUTE” will be
displayed instead of the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts.

VNAV APPR 1/1 Page (if VNAV interfaces is configured)

This page applies only to the selected approach of the active route.
Display VNAV 1/X page by pressing [VNAV].

A. Only pressure altitude available to the FMS from the Air Data Computer:
ACT VNAV NDB24L 1/1
MDA-DA
1L 660 1R
239o 6.2N M -3.00o
2L M FAF 1500A
2R
239o 10.0N -3.00o
3L RWY24 /OMAP 2167
3R
MAG W I N D GS VDEV
4L >2 4 3 o / 3 0 K T 1 3 0 K T 34 4R
CYUL TEMP TGT VS
5L ---o C -1200F P M 5R
QNH VPA
6L >1 0 1 3 M B -3.00o 6R

B. Baro-corrected altitude available to the FMS from the Air Data Computer:
ACT VNAV NDB24L 1/1
MDA-DA
1L 660 1R
239o 6.2N M -3.00o
2L M FAF 1500A
2R
239o 10.0N M -3.00o
3L RWY24 /OMAP 2167
3R
MAG W I N D GS VDEV
4L >2 4 3 o / 3 0 K T 1 3 0 K T 34 4R
CYUL TEMP TGT VS
5L ---o C -1200F P M 5R
VPA
6L -3.00o 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-236
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Destination Airport temperature is entered:

ACT VNAV NDB24L 1/1

MDA-DA
1L
999 1R
239o 308N M -3.00o
2L AGBEK 2785 2R
239o 314N M -3.00o
3L L FAF 2348 3R
MAG W I N D GS VDEV
4L >2 4 3 o / 3 0 K T 130K T 34 4R
CYUL TEMP TGT VS
5L -10o C -1200F P M 5R
QNH VPA
6L >1 0 1 3 M B -3.00o 6R

TITLE:“ACT” is displayed when the VNAV approach (glide path) is active. Destination approach/runway
identifier of the active route is displayed. “MOD” is displayed if the active route is being modified.

COURSE / DISTANCE / WAYPOINT IDENTFIER [2L, 3L]: Displays leg course/heading and distance-to-go to
the active and next waypoints respectively. Field is blank if the information is undefined (e.g. for a route
discontinuity). The Course/Distance field of the active waypoint can be replaced by one of the following active
procedure status:
• Hold procedure: HOLD AT
• Hold procedure exit armed: EXIT HOLD
• Search procedure: SEARCH

Additionally, active and next waypoint identifiers may be followed by one of the following special procedures:
• "/H" : Holding pattern
• "/O" : Fly over waypoint
• “/S" : Search pattern
• "/T" : Tactical direct-to
• "/A": Tactical approach
• "/C" : CARP procedure

TRUE/MAG WIND and GS [4L]: Displays current wind direction and speed and ground speed. Wind direction is
crew selectable to magnetic or true North reference when the A/C is outside the polar region (latitude between
N73 and S60). TRUE/MAG toggling is disabled and TRUE is displayed in the title line when the A/C is in the
polar region.

Destination Airport TEMP [5L]: Enables entry of surface air temperature reported for the destination airport.
When the entered temperature differs from the ISA temperature, entry is used to provide temperature correction
of MDA-DA, approach and approach transition waypoint altitudes, vertical deviation and target vertical speed.
Corrected altitudes and vertical deviation are displayed in reverse video white. Valid airport temperature range is
-55°C to +55 °C.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-237
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

QNH [6L]: When no baro-corrected altitude from an Air Data Computer is available to the FMS, and pressure or
INS altitude is valid, then this field displays the altimeter setting (QNH) entry.

When the QNH value is derived from an FMS synchro input, the QNH value is displayed in normal fonts within a
range of 27.00 to 32.35 inches of mercury (inHg). No manual entry of QNH is allowable. Pressing LSK 6L
toggles the displayed QNH unit system between inches of mercury and millibars (mb).

When a synchro input of QNH is not available to the FMS, this field allows manual entry of the altimeter setting.
The allowable entry format can be either in inches of mercury within a range of 27.00 to 32.00, or in millibars
within a range of 915 to 1083. The QNH unit system is automatically detected from the entered value. The
decimal point entry is not required. The entered QNH value is displayed in large fonts. Pressing LSK 6L with the
scratchpad empty toggles the displayed QNH unit system between inches of mercury and millibars. The
altimeter setting entries (including unit system toggling) are copied between VNAV and PROGRESS pages, and
cross-talked between FMS. Upon leaving the terminal area, an altimeter setting entered from the CMA-9000
Display Panel is cancelled and the field displays boxes (" ").

ERASE [6L]: Prompt appears while flight plan is in MOD status, caused by lateral or vertical modifications.
EXEC key required to activate any change.

MDA-DA [1R]: Enables manual entry of minimum descent altitude/decision altitude in feet. Temperature
compensated if a temperature is entered at LSK [5L]. Valid MDA-DA range is between the MAP altitude and the
FAF altitude. Temperature compensated MDA is displayed in reverse video white. Field is always displayed in
LARGE font.

VPA | ALTITUDE [2R]: Displays (VPA) and altitude restriction for ACTIVE waypoint. VPA field is blank if the
waypoint is not the FAF or MAP or step-down fix. Temperature-compensated altitude constraints are displayed
in reverse video white. The altitude is displayed in NORMAL font if the altitude is coming from the navigation
database. The altitude is displayed in LARGE font if it is a manually entered altitude.

VPA | ALTITUDE [3R]: Displays vertical path angle and altitude restriction for "NEXT" waypoint. VPA field is
blank if the waypoint is not FAF or MAP. Temperature-compensated altitude constraints are displayed in reverse
video white. The altitude is displayed in NORMAL font if the altitude is coming from the navigation database.
The altitude is displayed in LARGE font if it is a manually entered altitude.

VDEV [4R]: Displays the vertical deviation in feet with respect to the computed approach vertical profile
(negative value indicates aircraft below vertical path). Maximum displayed value is 9999 feet. The vertical
deviation is displayed in reverse video white.

TGT VS [5R]: Displays target vertical speed (feet/min) based on current ground speed and the approach
vertical path angle (VPA). This value is temperature compensated if a temperature is entered at LSK 5L. The
field is blank when the vertical deviation is invalid. The target vertical speed is displayed in reverse video white.

VPA (6R): Displays glide-path descent angle in degrees when approach selected and missed approach prompt
is not displayed.

ARR [6R]: Prompt appears when no approach selected and [VNAV] key is pressed. Provides access to the
ARRIVALS page.

MISSED APPR [6R]: If configured for display by the selected configuration, this prompt enables transition within
the FMS to the missed approach phase of flight, allowing sequencing of MAP waypoint. If the display of this
prompt is configured, the prompt is displayed after transition to GPS approach mode (normally occurs at 2 nm
inbound to the FAF if all GPS approach conditions are met). The function of this key is limited to the FMS, and
has no impact on any missed approach or take-off/go-around mode of the flight guidance system.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-238
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NEXT WPT [6R]: Prompt is displayed when automatic waypoint sequencing is not possible. Examples include
when the active leg is vector, or an altitude-terminated leg without a baro-corrected altitude input. Pressing
NEXT WPT results in an immediate transition of navigation and guidance to the next waypoint in.

VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1 Page (if VOR, DME or TACAN interfaces are configured)

The VOR/DME/TCN page displays the VOR, DME, and TACAN sensor inputs used in CMA-9000 FMS
radial/distance radio navigator and the resulting position fix.

Display VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, and <VORDMETCN> or
<VORDME> or <TACAN>.

NOTE: The title will change to VOR/DME or TACAN, as applicable, if some of the equipment is not
configured.

A. Single VOR and DME configuration.

Single TACAN.

VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1

SOURCE/ID FREQ RAD/DME
1L VOR YJN 115.80 260°
1R
DME YJN 115.80 130NM
2L 2R

3L 3R
TCN UHU 99X 150°/ 110NM
4L 4R
POSITION
5L N45°00.00 W072°00.00 5R

6L <NAV STATUS VOR DESEL> 6R

B. Dual VOR and single DME configuration, VOR1 and VOR2 connected to DME.
Dual VOR and DME configuration, VOR1 connected to DME1 and VOR2 connected to DME2.
Single TACAN.

When LAT/LONG is selected:

VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1

SOURCE/ID FREQ RAD/DME
1L VOR1 YJN 115.80 260°
1R
DME YJN 115.80 130NM
2L VOR2 YUL 116.30 180°
2R
DME IABC 109.30H 12.0NM
3L 3R
TCN UHU 99X 150°/ 110NM
4L 4R
POSITION
5L N45°00.00 W072°00.00 5R

6L <NAV STATUS VOR DESEL> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-239
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

C. Dual VOR and DME configured, VOR1 connected to DME1 channel 1 and DME2 channel 2, VOR2
connected to DME1 channel 2 and DME2 channel 1.
Single TACAN.

When UTM selected:

VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1

SOURCE/ID FREQ RAD/DME
1L VOR1 YJN 115.80 260°
1R
DME YJN 115.80 130NM
2L VOR2 YUL 116.30 180°
2R
DME IABC 109.30H 12.0NM
3L 3R
TCN UHU 99X 150°/ 110NM
4L 4R
POSITION
5L 19T 263560 04987374 5R

6L <NAV STATUS VOR DESEL> 6R

VORx ID/FREQ/RAD (1L-Line 3, 2L-Line 5): Displays VOR station identifier and tuning frequency (MHz) from
the interface (1 and 2 indicate the source of the VOR information). This field is blanked when the CMA-9000
FMS is unable to find the requested station (either due to invalid bearing, distance or values outside of
thresholds) or when the value of the frequency is changed and is searching for the new station identifier.

DMEx ID/FREQ/DME Slant range (1L-Line 4, 2L- Line 6): Display of DME station identifier, tuned frequency
(MHz) and slant range from the station (always in nautical mile). The fields are blanked when the FMS is unable
to find the requested station (e.g. invalid distance) or when the value of the frequency is changed and the FMS
is searching for the new station ident. An inverse white "H" appears next to the frequency when the DME is in
"HOLD" mode. The frequency and slant range are values received from the radio interface

TCN ID/CHAN RAD/DME Slant range (4L -Line 8): Display of TACAN station identifier, tuning channel radial
from station (always in MAG) and TACAN slant range from station. The fields are blanked when the CMA-9000
FMS is unable to find the requested station (either due to invalid channel, bearing, distance or values outside of
thresholds) or when the value of the channel is changed and the CMA-9000 FMS is searching for the new
station ident.

NAV STATUS [6L]: Returns to NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page.

POSITION (5R): Displays position LATITUDE and LONGITUDE or UTM.

VOR DESEL [6R]: Access to VHF NAV DESELECT 1/X page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-240
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

WIND 1/1 (If CARP is configured)

Allows entry and display of wind speed and direction for the selected waypoints at up to four different levels.

Display WIND 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], and <DES+SAR> or <TACTICAL>, [NEXT], <CARP>, [NEXT]
and <WIND> {when a CARP procedure is in the active flight plan}.

A. Normal ACTIVE format:

ACT CRP01 WIND 1/1

ALT DIR/SPD
F L ---
1L 1R

2L 2R

3L F L 355 310 / 95
T
3R

4L F L 100 280T /110 4R

5L CARP PLAN> 5R

6L 6R

B. WIND page during a MOD

MOD CRP01 WIND 1/1

ALT DIR/SPD
FL---
1L 1R

2L 2R

3L F L 355 310T / 95 3R

4L F L 100 280 /110

T
4R

5L CARP PLAN> 5R

6L <ERASE 6R

TITLE LINE: Displays the CRP01 waypoint name, page number and the ACT/MOD status.

ALT [1Lto 4L]: Flight level corresponding to wind data.

NOTE: The altitude data can only be entered at LSK 1L. Altitudes are displayed in descending order at (1L),
(2L), (3L), (4L). If four altitudes already exist, one of these must be deleted prior to the manual entry of
a new altitude.

ERASE [6L]: Displayed only when a CARP plan/route modification is in progress. Pressing ERASE (LSK 6L)
will undo all changes to the route and return to the ACT Route status.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-241
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CANCEL [6L]: Cancel the changes made to the inactive route.

DIR/SPD [1R, 2R, 3R, 4R]: Allows entry of wind direction and speed for the given waypoint at the corresponding
flight level. Entry is only allowed once a flight level has been entered.

CARP PLAN [5R]: Access to the CARP PLAN 2/3 page. Displayed on page WIND 1/1.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirm the changes made to the inactive route.

WPT DATA 1/1

The WPT DATA 1/1 page allows for the display and partial modification of waypoint information from the
navigation, temporary, custom, or user databases. Moving (if configured) and fixed waypoints information may
be viewed. It also provides access to the USER WPT page for modification of all user waypoint parameters.

Display WPT DATA 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF], and <WPT DATA>.

A. Display upon entry into the page (with no identifier being supplied from the previous page):

WPT DATA 1/1

ID
1L ----- 1R

2L 2R

3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-242
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. Display upon entry of an existing identifier in the fixed user waypoint database. The displayed page differs
depending if displaying a moving or fixed waypoint and depending on the type and class. Large font used for
modifiable fields:

WPT DATA 1/1 WPT DATA 1/1

AFVRD WPT POS AFVRD MOVING WPT POS
N03o21.12 W123o25.56 1L N03o21.12 W123o25.56
1L 1R 1R
BRG/DIS 134T/123NM BRG/DIS 134T/123NM

2L 2L 2R
2R DATABASE USER
DATABASE USER
3L TK/GS 134T/123KT
3L 3R 3R
REGION CAN CY
4L TYPE/CLASS TACAN 4R 4L 4R
ELEVATION +2309F T
5L CHAN 126X 5R 5L 5R
DECLIN W116o
6L <EDT/NEW WPT DES+SAR> 6R 6L <EDT/NEW WPT DES+SAR> 6R

C. Display upon entry of an existing identifier custom or navigation waypoint database. Display varies with the
waypoint type or class:

WPT DATA 1/1 WPT DATA 1/1

JOVVY WPT POS AFVRD WPT POS
1L N03o21.12 W123o25.56 1L N03o21.12 W123o25.56
1R 1R
BRG/DIS 134T/123N M BRG/DIS 134T/123N M
2L 2R 2L 2R
DATABASE CUSTOM DATABASE CUSTOM
3L 3R 3L 3R

4L 4R 4L 4R

5L 5R 5L 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R 6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

D. Display upon entry of an existing identifier in the temporary waypoint database:

WPT DATA 1/1

WPT02 WPT POS
1L N03o21.12 W123o25.56
1R
BRG/DIS 134T/123N M
2L 2R
DATABASE TEMPORARY
3L 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NEW USER WPT DES+SAR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-243
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E. Display after deleting the user fixed waypoint, or moving waypoint. Deletion of a moving waypoint that is
present in the active route or the modified route is rejected:

WPT DATA 1/1

FVRD WPT POS
1L N03o21.12 W123o25.56
1R
BRG/DIS 134T/123N M
2L 2R
DATABASE USER
3L 3R
REGION CAN CY
4L TYPE/CLASS TACAN/C/H 4R
ELEVATION +2309F T
5L CHAN 126X 5R
DECLIN W116o
6L <CANCEL D E L E T E ? CONFIRM> 6R

ID [1L]: Waypoint identifier (5 characters max.). Entry of an identifier will display all the parameters of that
waypoint. In the case of multiple waypoints with the same identifier, the SELECT WPT page will be displayed
for specification. Pressing this key with an empty scratchpad copies the identifier to the scratchpad. To delete a
user waypoint, press CLR to get the DELETE message and select identifier LSK key. Entry of an invalid
identifier will cause the advisory !NOT IN DATABASE message to appear. If a modification is in progress,
entering a new identifier will automatically cancel the deletion, as applicable. Because the Bulls Eye waypoints
have their own dedicated pages, entering the Bulls Eye waypoint in this field will display the BULLS EYE 3/3
page and the Bulls Eye Target waypoint will display the BULLS EYE 2/3 page.

WPT POS [1R]: Display of waypoint position. Pressing this key with an empty scratchpad copies the position to
the scratchpad.

BRG/DIS [1R]: Bearing and distance from the current aircraft position to the waypoint. The values will be
recomputed and displayed at a minimum rate of once every second.

NAME (2L),(2R): Airport waypoint names, 24 characters max.

DATABASE (2L),(2R): Display of the database containing the waypoint. Possible values are NAVIGATION,
CUSTOM, USER, and TEMPORARY.

TK/GS [3R]: Track angle and ground speed of moving waypoint.

REGION (3L), (3R) lower line: Display of REGION and ICAO code.

Complete list of region codes:

AFR: Africa MES: Middle East/South Asia

CAN: Canada PAC: Pacific
EEU: Eastern Europe SAM: South America
EUR: Europe SPA: South Pacific
LAM: Latin America USA: United States of America
CUS: Specific to customer

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-244
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Sample ICAO country codes (2 characters):

EH= Europe, Netherlands EG= Europe, UK

TYPE/CLASS (4L), (4R) upper line: Display of identifier type or VHF NAVAID class. Possible values are:

AIRPORT: Airports
NDB: Non-Directional Beacon waypoint
WAYPOINT: Simple Position Waypoint

VHF Navigation Aids classes: a/b/c

a b c
DME C - Co-located H - High Level
ILSDME N - Non co-located L - Low Level
ILSTACAN O - Out of Service T - Terminal
LOCGS * - N/A U - Undefined
LOCONLY
MLSDMEN
MLSDMEP
TACAN
VNCDME(DME component
of a VORDME)
VNCTACAN
(TACAN component of a
VORTAC)
VOR
VORDME
VORTAC

ELEVATION (4L), (4R) lower line: Display of elevation in feet (Airport and VHF NAV only).

FREQ (5L), (5R) upper line: Display of NAVAID frequency (MHz) (DME, ILSDME, VOR, and VORDME VHF
NAV only).

CHAN (5L), (5R) upper line: Display of TACAN channel.

CH/FREQ (5L), (5R): Display of TACAN channel and corresponding NAVAID frequency (MHz) (VORTAC VHF
NAV only).

DECLIN (5L), (5R) lower line: Display of VOR Station Declination (VHF NAV only).

MAGVAR (5L), (5R) lower line: Display of magnetic variation (WAYPOINT only).

NEW USER WPT [6L]: Displayed only for non-user waypoints. Access the USER WPT pages allowing creation
of a new user waypoint or modification of any field of an existing one.

EDT/NEW WPT [6L]: Access the USER WPT pages allowing modification of any field of the selected waypoint
or creation of a new user waypoint. The user waypoint data being displayed will automatically appear on the
USER WPT pages.

(SAVE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-245
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

(DELETE?): Displayed between the CANCEL/CONFIRM prompts when the inactive route is in modification.

CANCEL [6L]: Cancels the modifications performed to a user waypoint.

CONFIRM [6R]: Confirms the modifications performed to a user waypoint.

DES+SAR [6R] or TACTICAL [6R]: When TACT key is configured, the DES+SAR prompt is replaced by
TACTICAL. In this case, the prompt gives access to the TACTICAL 1/Y page instead of the DES+SAR 1/Y
page. Transfer the waypoint information to the REF ID on the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page and
display the DES+SAR 1/Y (or TACTICAL 1/Y) page depending on the configuration.

WPT LISTS 1/1

Display WPT LISTS 1/1 page by pressing [INIT REF] and <WPT LISTS>.

WPT LISTS 1/1

1L <USER WPT SARSAT WPT> 1R

2L <DMAP WPT 2R

3L <PREDEF WPT 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L 6R

USER WPT [1L]: Access to USER WPT 1/X page.

SARSAT WPT [1R]: Access to the SARSAT WPT page. Displayed only if a DF is configured.

DMAP WPT [2L]: Access to DMAP WPT 1/X page. Displayed only if a DMAP (DMAP ELBIT, DMAP EURONAV,
or DMAP EURONAV_A702) is configured.

PREDEF WPT [3L]: Access to PREDEF WPT 1/2 page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page A-246
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

APPENDIX B - NAVIGATION LEG

TYPE DEFINITIONS

CONTENTS

Subject Page
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................B-1
DIRECT TO A FIX (WAYPOINT – DF LEG).......................................................................................................B-1
TRACK BETWEEN FIXES (TF LEG) .................................................................................................................B-1
COURSE TO A FIX (CF LEG) ............................................................................................................................B-2
DME ARC TO A FIX OR CONSTANT RADIUS TO A FIX (AF AND RF LEGS)...............................................B-3
PROCEDURE TURN (PI LEG) ...........................................................................................................................B-4
HOLDING PATTERN (HM, HF, HA LEGS)........................................................................................................B-5
COURSE TO AN ALTITUDE (CA LEG).............................................................................................................B-6
COURSE TO A DME DISTANCE (CD LEG)......................................................................................................B-7
COURSE TO A COURSE INTERCEPT (CI LEG) ..............................................................................................B-8
COURSE TO A RADIAL (CR LEG)....................................................................................................................B-9
COURSE FROM A FIX TO AN ALTITUDE (FA LEG) .....................................................................................B-10
COURSE FROM A FIX TO A DISTANCE ........................................................................................................B-11
COURSE FROM A FIX TO A DME DISTANCE (FD LEG) ..............................................................................B-12
COURSE FROM A FIX TO A MANUAL TERMINATION (FM LEG)................................................................B-13
HEADING TO AN ALTITUDE (VA LEG)..........................................................................................................B-14
HEADING TO A DME DISTANCE (VD LEG)...................................................................................................B-15
HEADING TO A COURSE INTERCEPT (VI LEG) ...........................................................................................B-16
HEADING TO A MANUAL TERMINATION (VM LEG) ....................................................................................B-17
HEADING TO A RADIAL (VR LEG).................................................................................................................B-18
RADIAL-TO.......................................................................................................................................................B-19
SEARCH PATTERN .........................................................................................................................................B-20

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

APPENDIX B

NAVIGATION LEG TYPE DEFINITIONS

INTRODUCTION

For lateral guidance, the desired lateral route is entered into the CMA-9000 FMS through keyboard entries such
as custom route, origin, destination, SID, waypoints, STAR and/or approach. Entries and selections of
published procedures are translated using 20 different types of navigation legs to define the lateral path. Each
of these types of legs is graphically illustrated with accompanying display in the following paragraphs.

DIRECT TO A FIX (WAYPOINT – DF LEG)

Refer to Section 9 for detailed information.

TRACK BETWEEN FIXES (TF LEG)

This navigation leg is a great circle path from a starting to an ending waypoint.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/1

113o 112N M
1L TOU 1R
098o 52.6N M
2L ARRIE 2R
099o 54.1N M
3L SEA 3R

4L ----- 4R

5L 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COURSE TO A FIX (CF LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by an ending waypoint and a course into the waypoint.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/2

053o CRS 4.86N M
1L
ANC /O FAF 1R
053o CRS 5.09N M
2L RW06R /O MAP 2R
053o 0.74N M
3L (544) 3R
R200o HDG 12.4N M
4L (INTC) 4R
173o CRS 13.5N M
5L NAPTO /H 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DME ARC TO A FIX OR CONSTANT RADIUS TO A FIX (AF AND RF LEGS)

This navigation leg is an arc about a center fix. The leg goes clockwise (right arc), or counterclockwise (left arc)
starting at a waypoint, or an intercept point on the radius, and terminates at a waypoint with a terminating
tangential course.
ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/2
264o 12.8N M
1L
JOHH 1R
262o 113N M
2L D173J 2R
263o RA R C ANC 10.6N M
3L D233J 3R
053o CRS 10.0N M
4L ANC /O FAF 4R
053o CRS 5.09N M
5L RW06R /O MAP 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

TRUE NORTH

ANC
(CENTER FIX)
J: 10 NM RADIUS
R2330
D10

R1730
D233J
D10

RIGHT
TURN ARC 0
262
STARTING COURSE
D173J
NLD6/NLD6-3B.CDR

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PROCEDURE TURN (PI LEG)

Refer to Section 7 for detailed information.

This navigation leg is defined by a starting waypoint, an initial direction, a turn direction and a course to intercept
on the following course to fix navigation leg.
ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/4
042o 36.8N M
1L
ANC 1R
233o P-T 3.00N M
2L ANCPTL 2R
188o P-T 2.25N M
3L ANCPTR 3R
R053o CRS 4.86N M
4L ANC /O FAF 4R
053o CRS 5.09N M
5L RW06R /O MAP 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

TRUE NORTH

ANC
233 (STARTING POINT)
D3.0

ANCPTL
(FIRST TURN POINT - LEFT TURN)
053

188
D2.25

ANCPTR
(SECOND TURN POINT - RIGHT TURN)

NLD6/NLD6-4C.CDR

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HOLDING PATTERN (HM, HF, HA LEGS)

Refer to Section 10 for detailed information.

This navigation leg is defined by a waypoint, a turn direction, an inbound course and a time or distance length.
The leg terminates when:

• Crossing the waypoint and a hold exit has been initiated by the pilot (manually ended hold).

• Crossing the waypoint after completing the entry procedure (hold for course reversal, the hold page TITLE
field display HOLD ONCE).

• Crossing the waypoint and reaching the target altitude (hold to an altitude, the hold page TITLE field display
HOLD TO ALT).
RTE 1 HOLD 1/1
FIX SPD/TGT ALT
1L
REEFO 220/ 2000A 1R
TURN DIR FIX ETA
2L >RIGHT 2332.5Z 2R
INBD CRS
3L 038o 3R
LEG TIME
4L 1.0M I N 4R
LEG DIS EXIT TYPE
5L --.-N M MANUAL 5R

6L <NEW HOLD 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COURSE TO AN ALTITUDE (CA LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by a course from previous leg termination position and a target altitude.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/1

053o CRS 3.09N M
1L RW06R /O MAP 1R
053o CRS 0.74N M
2L (544) 2R
R200o HDG 12.4N M
3L (INTC) 3R
173o CRS 13.5N M
4L NAPTO /H 4R

5L ----- 5R

6L MISSED APPR> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COURSE TO A DME DISTANCE (CD LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by a course from current aircraft position and terminates when reaching a distance
from a DME Navaid.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 2/2

071o CRS 1.50N M
1L
FFM-15 /O 764A 1R
R200o CRS 8.80N M
2L DFW2 2500A 2R
200o CRS 4.55N M
3L (INTC) 3R
173o CRS 13.5N M
4L WPT01 /H 4R

5L ----- 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COURSE TO A COURSE INTERCEPT (CI LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by a course from current aircraft position and terminates when a desired course
which is referenced to a waypoint is intercepted and captured.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 2/2

330o CRS 4.70N M
1L
MA36 /O 1R
330o CRS 1.97N M
2L (INTC) 1107A 2R
L224o CRS 4.42N M
3L SWETT /H 3000A 3R

4L ----- 4R

5L 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COURSE TO A RADIAL (CR LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by a course from current aircraft position and terminates when crossing a radial
from a referenced waypoint.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/1

080o CRS 8.23N M
1L
YUL020A 1R
200o CRS 15.1N M
2L YUL 2500A 2R
194o 299N M
3L JFK 3R

4L ----- 4R

5L 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COURSE FROM A FIX TO AN ALTITUDE (FA LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by a waypoint, a course and an altitude termination.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/4

142o FR RW14 5.00N M
1L (2900)A 1R
L322o CRS 16.3N M
2L YOW 2R

3L ----- 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COURSE FROM A FIX TO A DISTANCE

This navigation leg is defined by a waypoint, a course and a distance to travel from the waypoint.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/1

233o FR CMCM3 3.71N M
1L CMC10 /O 220/ 5000A 1R
L233o CRS 5.62N M
2L CMCM1 /H 040-050 2R
053o CRS 5.64N M
3L CMCM2 3000A 3R

4L ----- 4R

5L 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

TRUE NORTH

CMCM3

0
233 COURSE
D10

CMC10 NLD6/NLD6-11B.CDR

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COURSE FROM A FIX TO A DME DISTANCE (FD LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by a waypoint and a course and terminates when reaching a distance from a DME
Navaid.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 2/2

038o FR RWO6R 18.5N M
1L
DPK10 5000A 1R
150o CRS 10.0N M
2L DPK 500A 2R

3L ----- 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

DPK10

D10

DPK
0
038 COURSE

TRUE
NORTH

RW06R NLD6/NLD6-12B.CDR

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COURSE FROM A FIX TO A MANUAL TERMINATION (FM LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by a waypoint and a course and terminates on pilot request.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/1

251o FR AGLIN NM

1L (VECT)A 1R
060o 7.80N M
2L FANOL 2500 2R
235o CRS 9.13N M
3L OW /O 2000A 3R

4L ----- 4R

5L 5R

6L NEXT WPT> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HEADING TO AN ALTITUDE (VA LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by a heading from current aircraft position and terminates when reaching a target
altitude.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 2/3

058o CRS 3. 91N M
1L
RW06R /O MAP 1R
057o HDG 1.04N M
2L (1100) 2R
090o HDG 8.96N M
3L (INTC) 3R

4L ----- 4R

5L 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HEADING TO A DME DISTANCE (VD LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by a heading from current aircraft position and terminates when reaching a
distance from a DME Navaid.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 2/3

071o HDG 2.00N M
1L
FFM-15 764A 1R
200o CRS 6.80N M
2L DFW2 2500A 2R
200o CRS 4.55N M
3L (INTC) 3R

4L ----- 4R

5L 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-15
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HEADING TO A COURSE INTERCEPT (VI LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by a heading from current aircraft position and terminates when a desired course
which is referenced to a waypoint is intercepted and captured.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 2/3

057o FR RW06R 1.04N M
1L
(1100) /O 1100A 1R
090o HDG 8.96N M
2L (INTC) 2R
070o CRS 25.5N M
3L OO 3100 3R

4L ----- 4R

5L 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

TRUE NORTH

0
070 COURSE
0
OO
090 HEADING
(INTC)
NLD6/NLD6-16B.CDR

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HEADING TO A MANUAL TERMINATION (VM LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by a heading from current aircraft position and terminates on pilot request.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 1/1

320o HDG NM

1L (VECT)F 1R
336o 14.1N M
2L FINEY 2000 2R
142o CRS 3.99N M
3L KAYTN /O 1500A 3R

4L ----- 4R

5L 5R

6L NEXT WPT> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-17
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

HEADING TO A RADIAL (VR LEG)

This navigation leg is defined by a heading from current aircraft position and terminates when crossing a radial
from a referenced waypoint.

ACT RTE 1 LEGS 2/3

280o CRS 3.50N M
1L
RW08 /O MAP 1R
053o HDG 2.30N M
2L (2000) 2R
053o HDG 11.6N M
3L YRQ256 3R

4L ----- 4R

5L 5R

6L <RTE 2 LEGS LEGS ETA> 6R

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-18
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

RADIAL-TO

This navigation leg is defined by an entry waypoint and a reference waypoint. The entry waypoint is created by
the reverse to a radial and a distance to the reference waypoint. The reference waypoint can be a waypoint in
the route or another waypoint. The new leg in inserted in the route.

RADIAL-TO 1/1
FIX
1L REF 1R
INBD CRS
o
2L 076 2R
DISTANCE
3L 10.0N M 3R

4L 4R

5L 5R

6L <NEW RADIAL-TO 6R

TRUE NORTH

Radial

Distance
REF01 REF

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-19
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SEARCH PATTERN

Refer to Section 11 for detailed information.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page B-20
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

APPENDIX C - NAVIGATION DISPLAYS

CONTENTS

Subject Page
APPENDIX C-1 NAVIGATION DISPLAYS – EHSI/EFIS..................................................................................C-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................C-1
MAP MODE.........................................................................................................................................................C-2
PLAN MODE.......................................................................................................................................................C-3
EHSI DISPLAYS -- SYMBOLOGY AND COLORS............................................................................................C-4
NAVIGATION MODE AND ADVISORY MESSAGES........................................................................................C-5
EHSI/EFIS DISPLAYS -- NAVIGATION MODE AND ADVISORY MESSAGES...............................................C-9
APPENDIX C-2 NAVIGATION DISPLAYS - EFIS (GAMA STANDARDS)....................................................C-10
INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................................................C-10
EFIS DISPLAYS ...............................................................................................................................................C-12
TYPICAL ROUTE .............................................................................................................................................C-12
DIRECT-TO/INTERCEPT NAVIGATION..........................................................................................................C-13
HOLDING PATTERN NAVIGATION ................................................................................................................C-13
STANDARD HOLD/DIRECT ENTRY ...............................................................................................................C-14
PARALLEL ENTRY ..........................................................................................................................................C-14
OFFSET ENTRY ...............................................................................................................................................C-15
DME ARC..........................................................................................................................................................C-15
PROCEDURE TURN ........................................................................................................................................C-16
OFFSET NAVIGATION.....................................................................................................................................C-16
ROUTE DISCONTINUITY.................................................................................................................................C-17
MAP CENTER STEP ........................................................................................................................................C-17

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAVIGATION DISPLAYS

APPENDIX C-1

NAVIGATION DISPLAYS – EHSI/EFIS

INTRODUCTION

The information displayed by the CMA-9000 FMS on the EHSI/EFIS flight instrument panel can be viewed in
one of two modes: MAP or PLAN. The MAP mode can be configured to show a CENTER display. The two
EHSI/EFIS modes and the CENTER mode are selected via the mode switch on the control panel.

MAP 40 80 160
VOR/ILS PLAN 20 320
CADI CTR CHSI 10 640
DH
MODE RANGE
POS NAV AID ARPT RTE DATA

ON ON ON ON ON

KLM00049

Typical EHSI/EFIS Control Panel

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MAP MODE

In MAP mode, the EHSI/EFIS displays active and/or modified routes and background data relative to the aircraft
position and the current heading. The background data, route data, navigation aids and airports, may be
selectively removed using the NAVAID, ARPT and RTE DATA push buttons usually found on a typical
EHSI/EFIS control panel (as shown above).

184
GS 210 LEKKO
TAS 240 HDG TRU 1420.0z
179° /29 19.2NM

18
21
15
THN

EHN
40

INKET

LEKKO

KLM00047

Typical MAP Mode

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PLAN MODE

In PLAN mode the EHSI/EFIS displays the active and/or modified routes relative to true north and the center
waypoint displayed on the CMA-9000 FMS RTE LEGS page. The center waypoint can be stepped through each
waypoint in the route by pressing the MAP CTR STEP prompt on the RTE LEGS page.

182
GS 210 LEKKO
TAS 240 HDG TRU 1420.0z
180° /29 17.0NM

18
21
15 EHAM

LEKKO

INKET

EHN

KLM00051

Typical PLAN Mode

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

183
GS 210 LEKKO
TAS 240 HDG TRU 1420.0z
179° /29 18.1NM

EHBK S
15 21
THN

EHN 40 24
12
INKET
LEKKO
W
E
EHAM

30
6 40

3 33
N

KLM00052

Typical CTR Mode

In both MAP and PLAN modes the EHSI displays dynamic data and position pointers. The range of the MAP
and PLAN display modes can be set to 51, 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320 or 640 nautical miles via the range switch on
the EHSI control panel.

EHSI DISPLAYS -- SYMBOLOGY AND COLORS

The color conventions used on the EHSI/EFIS display are as follows.

Green (G) position data

White (W) armed flight modes, present status situation
Magenta (M) fly-to condition, engaged flight modes
Cyan (C) background information
Black (B) blank areas, ‘OFF’ condition

1
The 5 nm range is only available on certain installations. On such installations, the range may span from either
5 to 640 nm or from 5 to 320 nm.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAVIGATION MODE AND ADVISORY MESSAGES

The EHSI/EFIS uses CMA-9000 FMS data to generate symbology and information described below.
Presentation may vary from one EHSI/EFIS type to another.

NAME SYMBOL APPLICABLE REMARKS

MODE(S)
PRESENT TRACK LINE MAP Indicates ground track
and RANGE SCALE (W) which will result with
MAP CTR present heading and winds.
80 VOR/ILS Displayed range mark and
figure is ½ the actual
selected range.

ACTIVE WAYPOINT ABCDE MAP, MAP CTR, Indicates active flight plan
IDENTIFIER (M) PLAN waypoint (top right corner).
ETA DISPLAY(W) 0834.5z MAP Indicates FMS calculated
MAP CTR ETA for the active waypoint
based on present
PLAN groundspeed (top right
corner).
DISTANCE 123.4 NM MAP Distance is displayed to
DISPLAY (W) MAP CTR next FMS waypoint in NM
(top right corner)
PLAN
GROUND SPEED GS 123 ALL Indicates current ground
INDICATOR (W) speed (top left).
WIND DIRECTION MAP Indicates wind direction
ARROW (W) and DIGITAL MAP CTR, with respect to the map
DIRECTION/ SPEED (W) 120°/20 display orientation and
VOR/ILS compass reference and
VOR/ILS CTR digital wind direction and
speed (top left).
WAYPOINT: MAP Active - Represents the
ACTIVE (M) ABCDE MAP CTR waypoint the aircraft is
currently navigating to.
INACTIVE (W) PLAN
Inactive-
Represents a navigation
point making up the
selected active route.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAME SYMBOL APPLICABLE REMARKS

MODE(S)
ACTIVE ROUTE (M) MAP The active route is
ACTIVE ROUTE
AMBOY
MAP CTR displayed with a continuous
KILMR
lines (M) between
MODIFICATIONS PLAN waypoints. Active route
(W) modifications are displayed
PARBY with short dashes (W)
INACTIVE ROUTES between waypoints. When
ARO
( C) a change is activated in the
FMC, the short dashes are
replaced with a continuous
line (M). Inactive routes are
displayed with long dashes
(C) between waypoints.
OFFSET PATH (M) MAP Presents a dot-dash line
MAP CTR parallel to an offset from the
PLAN active route.

AIRPORT MAP Appears when selected.

IDENTIFIER and
KABC
MAP CTR Available when HSI range
RUNWAY (W) is 80, 160, 320 or 640 nm.
22L PLAN
For tactical approaches, no
airport identifier pr runway
number is displayed.
AIRPORT and MAP Appears when selected.
RUNWAY (W) MAP CTR Available when HSI range
22L is 10, 20 or 40 nm. Dashed
PLAN centerlines extend outward
14.2 nm.
For tactical approaches, no
airport identifier pr runway
number is displayed.
VERTICAL MAP Displays vertical deviation
POINTER (M) and MAP CTR from selected vertical
DEVIATION SCALE (W) profile (pointer) in MAP
mode during descent only.
Scale indicates ±400 ft
deviation.
VERTICAL MAP Represents an PMS
ALTITUDE O T/C MAP CTR calculated point and is
labeled on the flight plan
PROFILE POINT O S/C PLAN path as T/C (top-of-climb),
and IDENTIFIER (G) O T/D T/D (top-of-descent), S/C
(step climb), and E/D (end-
O E/D of-descent). Deceleration
points have no identifier.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAME SYMBOL APPLICABLE REMARKS

MODE(S)
HOLDING PATTERN MAP A fixed size holding pattern
ACTIVE (M) MAP CTR is displayed when selected
MODIFICATION (W) or an instrument procedure
PLAN with a holding pattern is
INACTIVE (C ))
selected into the route.
Actual holding pattern size
is displayed when holding
waypoint is active and HSI
range 80 nm or less.
PROCEDURE MAP A fixed size procedure turn
TURN MAP CTR is displayed when an
instrument approach
ACTIVE (M) PLAN procedure with a procedure
MODIFICATION (W) turn is selected into route.
Actual procedure turn size
INACTIVE (C)) is displayed when
procedure turn is active and
HSI range is 40 or less.
NORTH POINTER N PLAN Indicates map background
(G) is oriented and referenced
to true north.

SELECTED MAP Displays the reference point

REFERENCE MAP CTR selected on the FIX page.
Bearing and/or distance
POINT and BEARING ABC PLAN from the Fix are displayed
DISTANCE with dashes.
INFORMATION (G)
VOR (C,G) MAP When NAVAID P/B is ON,
DME/TACAN (C,G) MAP CTR all appropriate navaids in
range appear in addition to
VORTAC (C,G) those navaids which are
NDB (M) standard or active. Tuned
nav aids are displayed
regardless of the NAVAID
P/B and appear green.
When HSI is 80, 160, 320
or 640 only high altitude
navaids are displayed.
Otherwise, both high and
low altitude navaids are
displayed.
AIRPORT (C ) MAP When the ARPT P/B is ON,
MAP CTR airports within the map area
are displayed. Origin and
KTEB destination airports are
always displayed
independent of ARPT P/B.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NAME SYMBOL APPLICABLE REMARKS

MODE(S)
ROUTE DATA MAP When the RTE DATA P/B is
(M, W MAP CTR ON, altitude and ETA for
KILMR
12000
route waypoints can be
0835Z
PLAN displayed.

IRS POSITION * (W) MAP When POS P/B is ON

MAP CTR indicates IRS position.

TREND MAP Predicts aircraft directional

VECTOR (W) MAP CTR trend at the end of 30, 60
and 90 second intervals.
Based on bank angle and
ground speed. 3 segments
are displayed when
selected range is greater
than 20 nm, 2 segments
are displayed on the 20 nm
scale and one segment on
10 nm scale.
ALTITUDE MAP When intersected with the
RANGE MAP CTR track line, it predicts the
point where the reference
ARC (G) altitude will be reached,
based on current vertical
speed.
DME ARC MAP Predicts the track over the
MAP CTR ground of an aircraft flying
at a constant distance from
a navigational aid by
reference to distance
measuring equipment
(DME).
MAP SOURCE FMS 1, 2 or 3 MAP Display EHSI source when
ANNUNCIATION (G) MAP CTR alternate source is
selected.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

EHSI/EFIS DISPLAYS -- NAVIGATION MODE AND ADVISORY MESSAGES

The EHSI/EFIS displays messages related to procedures, nav modes and nav alerts, as well as FMS alerts. The
following are various type of messages that can be displayed:

• Holding pattern entry types: parallel, teardrop, direct

• Search active indication
• GPS approach armed status
• GPS integrity lost
• Unable RNP
• Offset route active (with magnitude and direction of offset)
• Active navigation mode (e.g. GPS, VOR/DME/TACAN, DME, INERTIAL, DR)
• Position offset active
• CARP active
• FMS alert level scratchpad message triggered

An example of navigation mode and advisory message display is given below:

174
GS 000 LEKKO
TAS 000 HDG TRU 0z
000° /00 23.0NM

THN 18
15

21
EHN

40

INKET

LEKKO

INS
GPS INT THAM

KLM00050

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

APPENDIX C-2

NAVIGATION DISPLAYS - EFIS (GAMA STANDARDS)

INTRODUCTION

NOTE: The information presented in this section may not apply to all GAMA type EFIS systems as some systems
have fewer capabilities than others. For example, the Rockwell Collins EFIS-84 does not support
displaying of background data.

The information displayed by the CMA-9000 FMS on the EFIS Navigation Display can be viewed in one of the
following three modes: MAP, ARC, or ROSE, selectable via the EFIS Mode Select Panel.

In MAP mode, the CMA-9000 FMS is the primary source of data for the EFIS display. In this mode, the EFIS
display shows the aircraft position relative to the route and other earth-referenced data, including VHF navaids,
NDBs and airports. For EFIS’s that support displaying background data, these different categories of data may
be selectively removed via the EFIS 1/1 page* of the FMS to de-clutter the map display. A summary of MAP
mode symbology is presented below:
* EFISs which do not support background data do not have this page available for display on the FMS.

1. Active Route - these symbols represent waypoints on the active route within current EFIS map range. The
active waypoint identifier is displayed in magenta.

2. Airport - airports within current EFIS map range are displayed when the AIRPORT option is selected on the
EFIS 1/1 page of the FMS.

3. VHF navaid - this symbol represents any of the following types of navaids: DME, TACAN, VOR, VOR/DME,
VORTAC. Navaids within current EFIS map range are displayed when the NAVAID option is selected on
the EFIS 1/1 page of the FMS.

4. Non-Directional Beacon (NDB) - NDBs within current EFIS map range are displayed when the NDB option is
selected on the EFIS 1/1 page of the FMS.

In Rose mode or Arc mode, the information is displayed on the EFIS in a format similar to a conventional HSI,
with the difference being that in Arc mode, the display is restricted to a 90Ε arc facing the aircraft. Information
displayed in these modes may come from different sources such as ILS, VOR, or NAV. A NAV indication
identifies the CMA-9000 FMS as the source.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Navigation Display MAP Mode

Navigation Display Arc Mode

Navigation Display Rose Mode

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The following information is displayed in one or more of the EFIS modes:

1. Distance to Waypoint (DTW) - the distance to the active waypoint.

NOTE: For the IFDS type EFIS the distance indicated may be erroneous if the the actual DTW is greater than
655.35 nm.

2. Desired Course - the CMA-9000 FMS desired course when the source of course/track data is NAV.

3. Drift Angle - the drift angle is the difference between the computed track angle and the actual aircraft
heading.

4. Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) - the estimated time of arrival at the active waypoint. The Z indicates Zulu
(the phonetic call for GMT).

5. Source of Course/Track Data - the source of course/track and deviation data: ILS, VOR, or NAV. NAV
indicates CMA-9000 FMS as the source.

6. Course Deviation - the CMA-9000 FMS lateral deviation when the source of course/track data is NAV.

7. Waypoint Alert - announces an upcoming flight leg change by the CMA-9000 FMS. The annunciation
appears 60 seconds (ground speed of 250 knots or greater) or 10 seconds (ground speed less than 250
knots) prior to the leg change and extinguishes at the moment of the leg change, at the bisector line or at
the start of turn if a ROCKWELL3 EFIS is configured.

EFIS DISPLAYS

Examples of MAP mode displays for different types of routes are illustrated in the following paragraphs. In all of
these examples, it is assumed that the NAVAID, NDB and AIRPORT options have been deselected via the EFIS
1/1 page of the FMS.

TYPICAL ROUTE

This display represents an active route in which only two waypoints are within the EFIS map range of 160 nm,
YZP01 being the active waypoint.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DIRECT-TO/INTERCEPT NAVIGATION

This example illustrates what would appear on the EFIS display after a Direct-To waypoint has been manually
entered and executed via the FMS. A Direct-To waypoint with an Intercept is displayed in a similar manner. For
more information on Direct-To/Intercept navigation, refer to Section 9.

NOTE: The Rockwell Collins 3 EFIS has the capability to display Direct-To intercepts using arcs.

HOLDING PATTERN NAVIGATION

Holding pattern waypoints are identified by a /H is appended at the end of the holding fix identifier (refer to Note
1). Examples of EFIS displays for the standard holding pattern and for the different types of entry procedures
are provided in the following paragraphs. For more information on Holding Pattern navigation, refer to Section
10.

NOTE 1: On the Rockwell Collins EFIS-84 a /HL (for left-hand turn direction) or /HR (right-hand turn direction) is
appended instead since the holding pattern itself is not seen on the display. The purpose of this is to
continuously provide the flight crew with an indication of the turn direction from the holding fix since no
other visual cues are available on the display.

NOTE 2: The Rockwell Collins 3 EFIS has the capability to display holding patterns using arcs.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STANDARD HOLD/DIRECT ENTRY

Standard holding patterns and direct hold entries are both displayed in an identical manner on the EFIS. The
display consists of four waypoints positioned in a rectangular pattern. The holding fix is labelled with the
waypoint identifier, while the remaining waypoints are numbered from 01 to 03, in an order indicative of the
holding pattern orientation and turn direction. This example represents a direct entry into a right-turn hold with
an inbound course of 173°, as it would appear after completion of the outbound turn.

PARALLEL ENTRY

A parallel entry is represented as a single line extending from the holding fix to the end of the outbound leg,
labelled 02. The aircraft initially flies on a course parallel to this line and starts turning inbound upon reaching
waypoint 02. This example represents a parallel entry into a left-turn hold with an inbound course of 056°, as it
would appear after the initial crossing of the fix.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

OFFSET ENTRY

An offset entry is displayed as a triangular pattern in which the holding fix is labelled with the waypoint identifier.
The remaining waypoints are numbered 01 and 02, in an order indicative of the holding pattern orientation and
turn direction. The aircraft initially flies on a course parallel to the outbound leg and starts turning inbound on
reaching waypoint 01. This example represents an offset entry into a left-turn hold with an inbound course of
234°, as it would appear on the initial crossing of the fix.

DME ARC

DME arcs are represented by a series of straight line segments designed to approximate the circular path of the
arc (refer to Note 1). The waypoints located between the arc’s initial fix and final fix have no identifier. They are
positioned at 20-degree intervals along the arc. The DME arc in this example is represented by five segments
located between the arc’s initial fix D350J and final fix D233J. For more information on DME arc navigation,
refer to Section 7.

NOTE 1 :On the Rockwell Collins EFIS-84 either a /ARCL (indicating a left-hand arc turn direction is required at
the arc’s initial fix) or /ARCR (indicating a right-hand arc turn direction is required at arc’s initial fix) is
appended to the arc’s initial and final fixes. The reason for this is to continuously provide better
situational awareness by proving an indication of the turn direction from the arc’s initial fix since the arc
itself is not visible on the display system.

NOTE 2: The Primus Epic EFIS and the Rockwell Collins 3 EFIS have the capability to display DME arcs using
arcs. Furthermore, for the Rockwell Collins 3 EFIS, the cross-track error computed by the FMS is
relative to the arc.

16.9NM 06 1729.3z
DTW
03 ETA
045
09
00
(544)
D350J RW06R/0

ANC
20 (INTC)

D233J

NAV
0603002

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-15
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PROCEDURE TURN

Procedure turns are typically represented by three waypoints arranged in a V-shaped pattern. The naming
convention for these waypoints indicates the turn direction at the end of each leg. Thus, in this example, a left
turn is performed at ANCPTL and a right turn at ANCPTR.

NOTE: The Rockwell Collins 3 EFIS has the capability to display procedure turns using arcs.

OFFSET NAVIGATION

This example shows a typical EFIS display for an aircraft flying a route with a right offset of 20 nm relative to the
original flight plan. Although the offset route itself is not displayed, lateral guidance relative to the offset route is
provided when Rose mode or Arc mode is selected via the EFIS Mode Select Panel. For more information on
offset route navigation, refer to Section 5.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ROUTE DISCONTINUITY

When the active route contains a discontinuity, all route waypoints within the current EFIS map scale are shown
on the EFIS display. Waypoints following the discontinuity are left unconnected*. This example represents an
active route with a discontinuity between waypoints YZT and PRYCE. For more information on route
discontinuities, refer to Section 5.

* For the Rockwell Collins EFIS-84, the entire flight plan disappears from the Navigation Display once the last
waypoint before a discontinuity is sequenced. For such as case, ideally, the crew should have taken action in their
flight plan to ensure that discontinuities are removed prior to sequencing the last waypoint before the discontinuity.
This would ensure continuous availability of flight data throughout the route.
If the FMS does sequence the last waypoint prior to a discontinuity and the flight plan disappears from the display
system, the operator can, amongst other things, perform a DIRECT-TO in order to restore the flight plan.

MAP CENTER STEP

The reference position of the EFIS map display is normally the aircraft position, represented by a triangular
symbol at the bottom of the display. With the Map Center Step feature, this reference position can be changed
to the position of any route waypoint, making it possible to preview the entire route on the EFIS without
changing aircraft position. This example shows the resulting EFIS display after waypoint YZT in the previous
example has been moved to the bottom of the display using the Map Center Step feature.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-17
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

To change the reference position to the position of any route waypoint, proceed as follows:

CTR RTE 1 LEGS 1/2

264o 10.42N M
1L
TOU CRT 1R
304o 178N M
2L YZT 2R
THEN
3L †††††
3R
-- ROUTE DISCONTINUITY -
4L PRYCE 4R
308o 55.1N M
5L DUGGS 5R
MAP CTR
6L STEP> 6R

1. Go to the INIT/REF INDEX 1/2 page and press the <CTR LEGS> prompt (LSK 6L).

The CTR RTE x LEGS 1/X page is displayed with the MAP CTR STEP prompt at LSK 6R, along with a
<CTR> cursor next to the active waypoint.

2. Press the MAP CTR STEP prompt repeatedly until the <CTR> cursor appears beside the desired waypoint.

The waypoint with the <CTR> cursor now appears at the bottom of the EFIS map display.

3. To return to an aircraft-centered display, go to any CMA-9000 FMS page other than the RTE x LEGS 1/X
page, or press [LEGS].

On the RTE x LEGS 1/X page, the MAP CTR STEP prompt has disappeared, along with the <CTR> cursor.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page C-18
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

APPENDIX D - CMA-9000 FMS DISPLAY

PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS

CONTENTS

Subject Page
FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 1 of 12) ............................................................................. D-1
FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 2 of 12) ............................................................................. D-3
FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 3 of 12) ............................................................................. D-5
FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 4 of 12) ............................................................................. D-7
FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 5 of 12) ............................................................................. D-9
FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 6 of 12) ........................................................................... D-11
FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 7 of 12) ........................................................................... D-13
FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 8 of 12) ........................................................................... D-15
FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 9 of 12) ........................................................................... D-17
FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 10 of 12) ......................................................................... D-19
FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 11 of 12) ......................................................................... D-21
FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 12 of 12) ......................................................................... D-23

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page D-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page D-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NOTE: This is a top down flow diagram.

Dash lines represent configured items.

FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 1 of 12)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference Page D-1/(D-2 blank)

November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NOTE: Dash lines represent configured items.

FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 2 of 12)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference Page D-3/(D-4 blank)

November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 3 of 12)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference Page D-5/(D-6 blank)

November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 4 of 12)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference Page D-7/(D-8 blank)

November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NOTE: Dash lines represent configured items.

FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 5 of 12)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference Page D-9/(D-10 blank)

November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NOTE: Dash lines represent configured items.

FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 6 of 12)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference Page D-11/(D-12 blank)

November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

NOTE: Dash lines represent configured items.

FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 7 of 12)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference Page D-13/(D-14 blank)

November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 8 of 12)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference Page D-15/(D-16 blank)

November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 9 of 12)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference Page D-17/(D-18 blank)

November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 10 of 12)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference Page D-19/(D-20 blank)

November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 11 of 12)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference Page D-21/(D-22 blank)

November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FMS DISPLAY PAGES FLOW DIAGRAMS (Sheet 12 of 12)

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference Page D-23/(D-24 blank)

November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

APPENDIX E - SYSTEM MESSAGES AND

REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS

CONTENTS

Subject Page
SYSTEM ALERT MESSAGES ........................................................................................................................... E-1
MAINTENANCE ALERT MESSAGES ............................................................................................................. E-19
MAINTENANCE ADVISORY MESSAGES ...................................................................................................... E-21
STATUS ADVISORY MESSAGES................................................................................................................... E-29
DATA ENTRY ADVISORY MESSAGES.......................................................................................................... E-38
REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS............................................................................................................................. E-51
A. ANNUNCIATORS ................................................................................................................................... E-51
B. NAVIGATION FLAG ............................................................................................................................... E-52

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-i
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-ii
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

APPENDIX E

SYSTEM MESSAGES AND REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS

The CMA-9000 FMS can generate the following types of system messages:

• System Alert Messages: messages that require immediate pilot action;

• Maintenance Alert Messages: messages that indicate a particular CMA-9000 FMS failure condition;
• Maintenance Advisory Messages: messages that do not require immediate pilot action but indicate a
particular equipment failure condition;
• Status Advisory Messages: messages that do not require immediate pilot action but require pilot awareness;
• Data Entry Advisory Messages: messages that indicate that the user-entered data is incorrect.

SYSTEM ALERT MESSAGES

System Alert Messages are messages that require immediate pilot action. Alert Messages are the highest
priority scratchpad messages (cannot be typed over or overwritten by any other message type).

Alert messages are displayed in amber color in the scratchpad and on the MESSAGE RECALL page. These
messages disappear automatically when the condition that caused them no longer exists.

Alert messages cause both the CMA-9000 FMS front panel MSG annunciator and the remote MSG annunciator
to illuminate until all messages are cleared/acknowledged by the pilot. Alert messages are cleared (thus
acknowledged) from the scratchpad by pressing the CLR key.

New messages that have not yet been acknowledged are displayed with an asterisk (*) prefix on the MESSAGE
RECALL page. Bringing in view the MESSAGE RECALL page(s) acknowledges all messages at once.

Alert messages have the highest priority and supersede any advisory message or typed-in data displayed in the
scratchpad.

Alert messages that are related to navigation sensor performance are displayed only if the sensor is interfaced
with the CMA-9000 FMS and configured through the CMA-9000 FMS maintenance pages (see Installation
Manual).

Alert messages are prioritized internally by the CMA-9000 FMS, with the highest displayed at the top and the
lowest at the bottom of the MESSAGE RECALL page.

Unless otherwise noted, the CMA-9000 Master Caution is inactive (e.g. FMS is still functional) for all the System
Alert messages.

Collector Alert messages are messages that combine several fault conditions into a single alert message (e.g.
AIR DATA LOST combines ADC1 FAILED and ADC2 FAILED Maintenance Advisory messages).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-1
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
2 HOURS GPS The SA/AS GPS key will expire Enter the new key to avoid EGI interface
KEY ALERT in two hours. the loss of the GPS
navigation.
ADF CONTROL The FMS has detected a failure Control ADF from another ADF interface
LOST of the identified ADF radio or a source.
ADF1 CONTROL failure of the ADF receiver ADF receiver is no longer
LOST communication bus. operational, use other
ADF2 CONTROL navigation aids.
LOST
NOTE: This message will be Advise maintenance
triggered only if configured and
will be inhibited in polar area or if
the roll angle is greater than 20
degrees.
AHRS/IRS HDG The FMS detects a difference of Select appropriate source of If the message is
MISMATCH about 6 degrees plus 0.5 times heading. configured
the absolute value of the roll Advise maintenance
angle between AHRS and IRS IRS interface
provided heading for at least one AHRS interface
second.
AIR DATA LOST The FMS detects a total loss of Ensure that ADC is powered. ADC interface
ADC data on the onside and Verify if the ADC(s) operate(s)
offside FMSs. normally.
Advise maintenance.
AMU CONTROL The FMS cannot set a radio Control the AMU from another AMU interface
LOST volume level or has detected a source.
failure of the AMU or the AMU Advise maintenance.
communication bus.
ARM APPROACH The FMS detects that at 30 nm Arm the destination airport at Approach mode configured
to the destination airport, that the 30 nm. Arm the FAF at 3 nm. to MANUAL
approach mode has not been
enabled (armed).
The FMS repeats the check at 3
nm to the FAF.
ATC CONTROL The FMS cannot control the Control transponder from ATC transponder interface
LOST transponder. another source.
ATC1 CONTROL Advise maintenance.
LOST
ATC2 CONTROL
LOST
ATOS INPUT LOST The FMS has detected a failure Ensure that ATOS is Installations in which the
or a loss of communication from powered. ATOS equipment is
the ATOS equipment. Verify that the ATOS operates configured.
normally.
Advise maintenance.
CARP ALT NOT This message is enabled when Correct altitude to achieve the Configurations supporting
MET the current altitude (AGL) is not mission altitude. CARP/HARP
within 150 feet of the Mission
HAT from 60 seconds prior to
reaching the CARP Green Light
(CRP) waypoint until the CARP
Red Light (XTE) waypoint is
sequenced.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-2
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
CARP TAS NOT This message is enabled when Correct speed to achieve the Configurations supporting
MET the TAS is not within 20 knots of mission TAS. CARP/HARP
the TAS derived from the
Mission IAS from 60 seconds
prior to reaching the CARP
Green Light (CRP) waypoint until
the CARP Red Light (XTE)
waypoint is sequenced.
CARP XTK TOO This message is enabled when Stop the drop and steer the Configurations supporting
LARGE the aircraft is flying the CARP aircraft back on track. CARP/HARP
procedure between the CRP
(Green Light) and XTE (Red
Light) waypoints and the cross-
track error is either:
• Greater than half the drop
zone width for Custom CARP,
Custom HARP or Free Fall
procedures.
• Or greater than 150 meters for
Custom HAHO procedures.
CDU2 INPUT LOST Communication with external Use another CDU. Advise External CDU configured
CDU3 INPUT LOST CDUx is not available. maintenance.
cGPS NAV LOST Civil GPS sensor is not being Use another sensor for Civil GPS
used for the active navigation. navigation. and EGI interface installed
at the same time.
cGPS POS The FMS is using civil GPS Verify GPS position and Civil GPS
UNCERTAIN position data for which the monitor Horizontal Integrity and EGI interface installed
integrity does not meet Limit (HIL). at the same time.
requirements for the phase of Revert to an alternate
flight, and cannot back it up with navigation means if GPS
any other sensor. position becomes too
This message does not imply unreliable.
that the civil GPS position is in
error, only that confidence in the
position accuracy is reduced.
GPS integrity is lost. GPS INT
remote annunciator (if installed)
illuminates.

The FMS is not using the civil

GPS as active sensor but it
detects a loss of integrity and a
procedure (SID, Star, Transition,
Approaches or Tactical
Approaches. is loaded in the
active flight plan.
CHECK ANP The FMS ANP (Actual Verify RNP/ANP values on All configurations
Navigation Performance) value PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4 page.
exceeds the RNP (Required Monitor FMS position,
Navigation Performance) value. perform manual position
update if necessary (not
possible in GPS Nav mode).
Otherwise revert to an
alternate means of
navigation.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-3
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
CHECK TRUE/MAG Phase of flight is Approach or If required, change Angle All configurations
REF Terminal and the angle reference to MAG via FMS
reference is TRUE. SETUP page (or alternatively
via external switch).
COM CONTROL The FMS cannot control the Control COM/VUHF from • COM radio interface
LOST COM radio or the VUHF radio. another source. • VUHF radio interface
COM1 CONTROL Advise maintenance. • COM or VUHF radio
LOST configured as COM1 or
COM2 CONTROL COM3
LOST
COM3 CONTROL
LOST
COM4 CONTROL
LOST
COURSE The FMS detects that the course As deemed necessary, Message configured to
CHANGE>125 change of a fly-by leg transition modify flight plan if such a alert.
AHEAD (from the active leg to the next course change is not desired.
leg) is greater than 125 degrees
and within 2 minutes from the
turn anticipation point (triggered
for non-published procedures
only).
DATABASE OUT Navigation Database selected is Select correct database or All configurations
OF DATE not the current cycle. advise maintenance crew to
load current database cycle.
DATUM In a dual/triple FMS installation Pilot to ensure that any datum Multi-FMS installations
MISMATCH with the FMSs synchronized, the mismatches are resolved
FMS detects that the datum (DATUM selection line on
selection received from the off- SETUP 1/1 page.
side FMS is not configured in the
FMS’s preferred datum list.
Displayed as long as the
mismatch persists.
DCU INPUT LOST If IS&S EFIS (configuration Ensure that EFIS IS&S EFIS configuration
option IS_S) is configured and is powered. only.
the FMS has detected a failure Verify if the
of all configured onside and EFIS(s)
offside DCUs. operate(s)
normally.
Advise maintenance.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-4
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
DF CONTROL The FMS has detected one of Control DF DF-430-102 or
LOST the following conditions: radio from DF-935 interface
if a DF-430-102 is configured: another source
• The FMS detects a DF radio Advise maintenance.
failure or it cannot tune the DF
radio (requested tuning does
not match feedback for 10
seconds).
if a DF-935 is configured:
The following conditions are
detected during a period of 10
seconds:
• The command echo is not
received from the Direction
Finder equipment (DF); or
A bad command echo is
received (Bad<CR>) from the
DF.
DF INPUT LOST The FMS has detected a failure Ensure that DF is powered. DF 430-112 interface
or a loss of communication from Verify if the DF operates
the DF radio. normally.
Advise maintenance.
DIRECT TO FIX When flying a VI or CI leg Review the intercept course All configurations
followed by a CF leg (these legs entered.
being part of a published
procedure), the FMS detects that
the predicted intercept point is
so close to the CF leg
termination that the intercept
path cannot be calculated.
DISCONTINUITY Select RTE LEGS page to All configurations
60 seconds before the end of the
AHEAD enter next waypoint or close
active leg or at the beginning of
up route discontinuity.
the active leg when its duration
is shorter than 60 seconds, and
the FMS detects that the next
waypoint is followed by a
discontinuity.
The message remains displayed
as long as the FMS flies into the
route discontinuity.
NOTE: The FMS will invalidate
its roll command output when
reaching the discontinuity.
DMAP INPUT LOST The FMS detects a total loss of Ensure that DMAP is DMAP interface
DMAP input data on the onside powered.
and offside FMSs. Verify if the DMAP operates
normally.
Advise maintenance.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-5
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
DME/DME NAV DME-DME navigation can no Verify if identified DME DME interface
LOST longer be used as a means of transceiver operates
navigation. normally.
If FMS was in DME-DME
navigation mode, it automatically Use another navigation
reverts to the next available sensor as a means of primary
navigation mode. navigation.
CAUTION: Advise maintenance.
In aircraft installations consisting
of dual FMS interfaced with dual
DME transceivers, the alert
message “DME/DME NAV
LOST” could be erroneously
triggered upon the loss of one of
the two DME receivers. The
problem occurs when one FMS
has lost its single DME input: the
DME/DME navigation is still
provided by the off-side FMS via
FMS cross-talk. The DME/DME
NAV LOST message should be
ignored in this case.
DME CONTROL The FMS cannot control the Control DME from another DME interface
LOST DME which is paired with the source.
DME1 CONTROL NAV radio. DME receiver is no longer
LOST The FMS detects a failure with operational, use other
DME2 CONTROL the DME channel used for navigation aids.
LOST manual tuning via the NAV radio.
Advise maintenance.
DVS NAV LOST The FMS detects a total loss of Ensure that DVS is powered. Doppler interface
DVS input data on the onside Verify if the DVS operates
and offside FMSs. normally.
DVS sensor can no longer be Advise maintenance.
used for navigation.
EFIS INPUT LOST The FMS detects a total loss of Ensure that EFIS is powered. EFIS interface
EFIS input data on the onside Verify if the EFIS(s)
and offside FMSs. operate(s) normally.
Advise maintenance.
EGI POS DIFF The FMS detects a position Use another navigation EGI Interface
difference between pure GPS sensor as a means of primary and
solution and INS/GPS solution navigation. Nav cross-check configured
greater than maximum accuracy
of the two sensors Advise maintenance.
or
The FMS detects a degraded
operation mode of the EGI.
END OF ROUTE Passing the last waypoint in the Select RTE LEGS page to All configurations
route. FMS steering becomes enter additional waypoints to
invalid. resume FMS steering.
ENTER FMS battery failure detected Enter date, time and position. All configurations
POS/DATE/TIME invalidating the RTC date/time
and current position. Advise maintenance. Master
Caution is active.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-6
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
FLIR INPUT LOST The FMS detects a total loss of Ensure that FLIR is powered. FLIR interface
Forward Looking Infrared Radar
input data. Verify if the FLIR operates
normally.
Advise maintenance.
FMS ALTITUDES Excessive difference between Verify altimeter setting on all Multi-FMS installations
DISAGREE two baro-corrected altitude systems.
inputs, two FMS-calculated baro-
corrected
altitudes or two pressure altitude
inputs.
FMS-D/D POS DIFF The FMS detects a difference in Verify if DME receiver Nav cross-check configured
FMS position and DME/DME operates normally.
position greater than maximum
accuracy of the two sensors. Advise maintenance.
FMS DEGRADED The FMS has detected an Continue to use the FMS user All configurations
internal hardware fault related to interface. Backup systems will
its I/O interface. The fault takeover the affected
prevents full function of the FMS. operations. See MAINT
This fault is not critical to the MESSAGES page for fault
operation of the FMS user trouble shooting.
interface or processing. Advise maintenance.
FMS-V/D POS DIFF The FMS detects a difference in Verify if DME and VOR Nav cross-check configured
FMS position and VOR/DME receivers operate normally.
position greater than maximum
accuracy of the two sensors. Advise maintenance.
FMS FAILED The FMS has detected an Do not use the FMS for radio All configurations
internal hardware fault. tuning or navigation. See
MAINT MESSAGES page for
more details.
Advise maintenance crew.
Master Caution is active.
FUEL INPUT LOST The FMS detects a total loss of Verify if Fuel Computer(s) Fuel Computer interface
Fuel Computer data on the operate(s) normally.
onside and offside FMSs. Manually enter fuel quantity
and fuel flow on FUEL 1/1
page. Advise maintenance.
FMS-INS POS DIFF The FMS detects a difference in Verify if EGI receiver operates EGI Interface
FMS position and INS position normally. and
greater than maximum accuracy Nav cross-check configured
of the two sensors. Advise maintenance.
FUEL RESERVE Reserve fuel is being used. Plan to land before the fuel is Fuel Computer interface
exhausted.
GLONASS INPUT The FMS has detected a failure GLONASS is not longer GLONASS is configured.
LOST of all configured onside and operational.
offside GLONASS sensors.
GPP CONTROL The FMS has detected a loss of GPP receiver is no longer HCS, FM1, FM2, UHF
LOST communication with the operational. interfaces.
Gessellschaft fur
Prozessrechner Advise maintenance.
Programmierung (GPP) unit.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-7
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
GPS-GPS POS The position difference between If during approach, perform Single civil GPS interface
DISAGREE the two/three GPS exceeds the missed approach. per FMS
position check limit defined in On each FMS, access the Multi-FMS installations
Section 15 (RNP Capability), onside FMS “GPS STATUS
even though each GPS position 2/2” page.
respects the position check limit. Compare the two/three GPS
positions and determine
which position is the most
probable one.
Select Independent Mode and
ensure that the A/P in
command is being driven by
the FMS with the most
probable position.
GPS-GPS POS Synchronized Mode can be
DISAGREE (cont’d) re-established when the
message disappears from
each FMS “MESSAGE
RECALL” page.
Report problem to
maintenance.
GPS NAV LOST Neither the GPS nor the Maintain the flight path within GPS interface
INS/GPS sensor is being used the range of NAVAIDS. or
for the active navigation. EGI interface
GPS POS DIFF The FMS detects a position Verify if EGI and civil GPS Civil GPS and EGI interface
difference between civil GPS receivers operate normally. installed at the same time.
solution and military GPS (from
EGI) solution greater than Advise maintenance. Nav cross-check configured
maximum accuracy of the two
sensors
GPS POS No IFR approved navigation GPS approaches cannot be GPS interface
UNCERTAIN sensor (including GPS) meets flown. EGI interface
requirements for the phase of Verify GPS position and
flight. monitor Horizontal Integrity GPS and EGI are not
The FMS is using GPS position Limit (HIL). configured at the same time
data for which the GPS integrity Revert to an alternate
does not meet requirements for navigation means if GPS Error limits is set to POF
the phase of flight, and cannot position becomes too
back it up with any other sensor. unreliable.
This message does not imply
that the GPS position is in error,
only that confidence in the
position accuracy is reduced.
GPS integrity is lost. GPS INT
remote annunciator (if installed)
illuminates.
GPS POS UNCERTAIN is
mutually exclusive with GPS
NAV LOST.
GROSS WT FMS has detected a significant One of the weight fields on • IFDS EFIS interface
DISCREPANCY difference between the gross the FUEL 2/2 page has to be
weight received from the IFDS updated in order to clear the
EFIS and the gross weight message.
computed by the FMS.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-8
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
HEADING INPUT Total loss of heading input. Refer to Operator’s Manual AHRS interface
LOST When not in GPS navigation, the Section 16 for operation with
FMS builds up an error during a failed heading input.
rapid turns, and should be used
with caution. No wind
computation is available.
HF CONTROL The FMS has detected a HF Ensure that HF radio is Installations in which the
LOST radio failure powered. HF radio is configured.
Verify that the HF radio
operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
HIGH ARC EXIT The combination of current TAS Reduce speed prior to exiting All configurations
SPEED and computed wind may cause the arc.
the aircraft to overshoot the next
flight plan leg.
HIGH GLIDEPATH Computed glide-path angle for Check VPA displayed on VNAV configuration
ANGLE the selected approach exceed VNAV APPR page.
the maximum VPA allowed.
If VPA is appropriate conduct
approach normal.
If VPA is not appropriate stop
using the FMS for advisory
VNAV of this approach and
report issue to maintenance
operations.
HIGH HOLDING The combination of current TAS Reduce speed prior to If the message is
SPEED and computed wind may cause reaching the holding fix. configured.
the ICAO holding pattern
protected airspace to be
exceeded. This message is
displayed one (1) minute prior to
reaching the holding fix and on
passage over the fix.
HIGH SAR SPEED The FMS detects that the ground Reduce speed to make sure SAR is configured.
speed (e.g. combination of that the search area is
current TAS and computed wind) covered.
will cause the search and rescue
pattern to overshoot. This
message is displayed starting
from one (1) minute prior to
reaching the SAR entry point
until the SAR entry point is
reached. This message is only
displayed when airborne.
IFF CONTROL The FMS has detected an IFF Ensure that IFF transponder Installations in which the
LOST failure (CBIT) or it cannot tune is powered. IFF transponder is
the IFF e.g. the requested tuning Verify that the IFF configured.
does not match the feedback transponder operates
received for 10 seconds when in normally.
normal (non-maintenance) mode Advise maintenance.
of operation.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-9
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
INDEPENDENT OP In a dual/triple-FMS installation, Any automatically Multi-FMS installations
the identified FMS is now synchronized item listed in
operating independently of the Section 3-5 of the Operator’s
off-side FMS(s), because of at Manual, dual-FMS
least one of the following Operations, must be now
reasons: performed independently on
Independent mode manually each FMS.
requested on SETUP 1/1 page. 1. Clear message.
An inter-FMS communication
failure has occurred. 2. See MESSAGE RECALL
The Operational Software and/or MAINT MESSAGE
programs are not the same in all page(s) for more details.
FMSs. Advise mainten-ance.
The active navigation database
is not the same in all FMSs. 3. Verify tactical approach
The user database is not the database on IDENT 2/2
same in all FMSs. page, select appropriate
The tactical approach database database if possible,
is not the same in all FMSs. otherwise advise mainten-
The FMSs have been in a ance.
different phase of flight for more
than thirty seconds.
INDEPENDENT OP 4. Verify Op Program on
(cont’d) IDENT 1/1 page and advise
mainten-ance if different.
5. Verify active navigation
database on IDENT 1/1
page, select appropriate
database if possible,
otherwise advise mainten-
ance.
Verify consistency of
altitude input of each FMS.
6. Verify user waypoints list on
the USER WPT LIST X/X
pages and verify the user
routes list on the USER
ROUTES 1/1 page.
7. Verify consistency of
altitude input of each FMS
INS NAV LOST INS function in EGI has failed on INS cannot be used for EGI interface
the onside and offside FMSs. navigation.
Advise maintenance.
INS/DVS NAV No INS/DVS navigation solution INS/DVS solution cannot be • EGI interface
LOST is available due to an INS and a used for navigation. • Doppler interface
DVS failure (SIGMA50H EGI Advise maintenance.
only).
INS/GPS NAV Communication failure with the INS/GPS cannot be used for EGI interface
LOST EGI on the onside and offside navigation.
FMSs. Advise maintenance.
INS-GPS POS DIFF Excessive drift of the INS Verify aircraft position with a EGI interface without civil
position with respect to the GPS different sensor. Deselect this GPS interface
position. sensor if necessary.
Advise maintenance.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-10
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
INS/GPS POS The FMS is using embedded Verify INS/GPS position and EGI interface
UNCERTAIN INS/GPS (EGI) sensor position monitor HIL (Horizontal and no civil GPS interface
data for which the sensor Integrity Limit). configured.
integrity does not meet
requirements for the phase of Error limits is set to POF
flight and there are no other IFR
approved navigation sensors
available to cross check the EGI
position. This message does not
imply that the EGI position is in
error, only that confidence in the
position accuracy is reduced.
INS/IRS reports alignment failure. LTN-92: Ensure that entered IRS interface configured
IRSx ALIGN FAIL Message enabled for LTN-92 and position meets LTN-92 latitude
ADIRS interfaces. check and 3+3T check. Retry
INS initialization on POS INIT
page.
ADIRS: Ensure that entered
position meets
Reasonableness Test and
System Performance Test.
Retry IRS initialization on POS
INIT page.
IRSx CHECK INS reports that some of its Move appropriate INS/IRS IRS interface configured
ACCURACY navigation parameters may have Mode Selector Unit to
become unreliable. ATTitude position.
or If attitude data of INS/IRS
FMS determined that INS inertial seems unreliable, switch this
position drift exceeds 3+3T nm, INS/IRS to OFF.
where T is the INS Time in Nav in
hours.
Message enabled for ADIRS
interfaces.
IRSx CYCLE ADIRS alignment fault. Cycle Mode Selector Unit ADIRS interface configured
OFF/NAV through OFF and back to
either NAV or ALIGN.
IRSx ENTER In Attitude mode, magnetic Magnetic heading must be ADIRS interface configured
HEADING heading must be manually manually entered in SET IRS
updated. HDG field of POS INIT 1/2
Message enabled for ADIRS page every 15 minutes.
interface.
IRSx ENTER PPOS INS requests position Perform INS/IRS initialization IRS interface configured
initialization. on POS INIT page.
Message enabled for LTN-92 and For LTN-92, ensure that
ADIRS interfaces. entered position meets latitude
test and 3+3T test, and retry
INS initialization on POS INIT
page.
For ADIRS: Ensure that
entered position meets
Reasonableness Test and
System Performance Test.
Retry IRS initialization on POS
INIT page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-11
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
IRSx ON BAT INS/IRS reports that AC power is Verify IRS AC power. IRS interface configured
too low and is operating on DC
backup power. If the backup
power source is a battery unit, 15
to 30 minutes of operation are
available with a fully charged
battery. If primary power is not
restored promptly, the battery
voltage will fall below the level
required to operate the INS/IRS.
Message enabled for LTN-92 and
ADIRS interfaces.
IRSx ON SEC. Honeywell Laseref V: Upon Advise maintenance. IRS interface configured
POWER detection of the IRS is on
secondary power for more than
10 seconds.
IRSx SELECT LTN-92 INS reports invalid Move appropriate INS Mode IRS interface configured
ATTITUDE navigation data. INS outputs still Selector Unit switch position to
valid: pitch, roll and platform ATT position.
heading.
INS cannot be used in FMS-
based inertial navigation mode.
FMS-based inertial navigation
mode, heading and altitude inputs
still available as long as one
inertial sensor is still operating
normally.
KALMAN NAV Kalman filter navigator is not Avoid conducting a low-level APIRS interface
LOST available as a backup navigation altitude mission where GPS
source. signal may be affected.
The APIRS measurements for
the Kalman filter are not ready.
The APIRS measurements for
the Kalman filter are out of
range.
LOW BATTERY The power level of the internal After any power interruption, All configurations
POWER battery is low. Manually-entered monitor system performance
data may be lost if there is a and re-enter data as required.
primary power interruption Advise maintenance.
during flight.
LOW GLIDEPATH Computed glide-path angle for Check VPA displayed on VNAV configuration
ANGLE the selected approach is lower VNAV APPR page.
than 2.75 degrees.
If VPA is appropriate conduct
approach normal.
If VPA is not appropriate stop
using the FMS for advisory
VNAV of this approach and
report issue to maintenance
operations.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-12
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
MANUAL WPT Sequencing to the next waypoint Press NEXT WPT prompt All configurations
SEQUENCE needs to be manually initiated by (LSK 6R) when required on
the pilot. the PROGRESS 1/4 or LEG
This message is displayed in 1/X pages.
conjunction with the NEXT WPT
prompt with legs requiring a
manual termination.
This message also appears
when the FMS is flying an
altitude-terminated leg and a
baro-corrected altitude is not
available.
MC FAILED The FMS detects a failure with AMU radio volume control AMU interface
the Mission Computer. must be performed from the
FMS.
mGPS NAV LOST Military GPS (from EGI) sensor Use another sensor for Civil GPS and
is not being used for the active navigation. EGI interface installed at
navigation. the same time.
mGPS POS The FMS is using military GPS Use another sensor for Civil GPS and
UNCERTAIN position data for which the navigation. EGI interface installed at
integrity does not meet the same time.
requirements for the phase of
flight, and cannot back it up with
any other sensor.
This message does not imply
that the military GPS position is
in error, only that confidence in
the position accuracy is reduced.

The FMS is not using the military

GPS as active sensor but it
detects a loss of integrity and a
procedure (SID, Star, Transition,
Approaches or Tactical
Approaches. is loaded in the
active flight plan.
NAV CONTROL The FMS detects that it cannot Control NAV radio from • NAV radio interface
LOST control the NAV (VOR/ILS) another source. • NAV radio name is
NAV1 CONTROL radio. Advise maintenance. configured to NAV
LOST
NAV2 CONTROL
LOST
NO APPR The predicted or actual GPS Activate the missed approach • GPS interface
INTEGRITY integrity does not meet the or use alternate means of • EGI interface
requirements for approach. navigation (if available) to
perform the approach.
NO CARP This message is enabled: Ensure inertial sensor inputs, All CARP/HARP
SOLUTION • in independent mode, the on- baro correction (as seen on configurations.
side CARP solution is CARP PLAN 2/3 page), and
unachievable or baro corrected altitude are
• in synchronized mode, all the available to FMS otherwise
on-side and off-side CARP adjust the aircraft altitude or
solutions are unachievable. speed.
NO NAV No navigation database has Advise maintenance to reload All configurations
DATABASE been loaded. navigation database.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-13
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
NOT ENOUGH Not enough fuel to get to Re- route to a closer Fuel computer interface
FUEL destination. (Endurance Reserve destination.
not included) is below Time To
Go (TTG).
NOT ON Current aircraft heading does not Fly the aircraft to an All configurations
INTERCEPT HDG intercept desired course to fix. appropriate intercept heading.
This alert message appears after Re-engage LNAV.
executing a Direct-To with
Intercept-Course, or when flying
a Heading-to-Intercept leg of a
NavDataBase procedure
(SID/STAR).
NOT ON Current aircraft track does not Fly the aircraft to an All configurations
INTERCEPT TRK intercept desired course to fix. appropriate intercept course.
This alert message appears after Re-engage LNAV to capture
executing a Direct-To with new active leg.
Intercept-Course, or when flying
a Course-to-Intercept leg of a
NavDataBase procedure
(SID/STAR).
QNH DISAGREE Difference between the onside Adjust QNH to same level on Multi-FMS installations
external QNH source and the both sides.
offside external QNH source
(from cross-talk) exceeds 0.07
inch of mercury.
PHONE CONTROL The FMS has detected a loss of Iridium phone cannot be Phone interface
LOST communication with the Iridium controlled by the FMS
phone Advise maintenance.
PLS INPUT LOST The FMS has detected a total Ensure that PLS is powered. PLS interface
loss of PLS input data on the Verify if PLS operates
onside and offside FMSs. normally.
Advise maintenance.
Take alternate means for
location missions.
POSITION SHIFT While LNAV is engaged, the Crew to monitor that the All configurations
FMS transitions from one aircraft smoothly recaptures
navigation mode (e.g: position the lateral flight plan.
fixing) to another thus inducing a
position jump larger than 1nm.
RADAR INPUT The FMS has detected a failure Ensure that FIAR 1500B Installations in which the
LOST or a loss of communication from Radar is powered. FIAR 1500B Radar is
the FIAR 1500B Radar. Verify if Radar operates configured.
normally.
Advise maintenance.
RENDEZVOUS The moving waypoint is the Change flight parameter to Moving waypoint
UNACHIEVABLE active waypoint and interception reach this moving waypoint.
of the moving waypoint is not
possible within a traveling
distance of 500 nautical miles of
the current position because
conditions have changed.
ROUTE Current route is corrupted. Reload route from Custom All configurations
CORRUPTION Route Database.
SARSAT WPT LIST The FMS detects that the A new SARSAT beacon has DF-935 or DF-430
FULL SARSAT waypoint list is full and been received. To display it, interface.
a new message is received from delete a beacon already
the DF. displayed.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-14
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
SET AIRPORT Outside Air Temperature at the Enter temperature. VNAV
TEMP destination airport is required.
SET INS POS Manual alignment of the INS Perform alignment. EGI interface
(EGI) is required.

SET QNH 1) Executing a flight plan For items 1) & 2): If the message is
containing a SID without baro- Enter ALTIMETER SETTING configured, and the FMS is
corrected altitude input available. (current pressure in inches of in terminal and approach
mercury (in Hg) or in millibars operations
2) When pressure altitude or IRS (mb) on PROGRESS 4/4 (or
baro-inertial altitude is available 3/3) page.
to the FMS and the crew selects The FMS will correct its
corrected altitude using the pressure altitude input
altitude selection switch, but no accordingly.
baro-corrected altitude is
available
(ROCKWELL/ROCKWELL2/RO
CKWELL3/AHCAS2/BARCO/IS
&S EFISs only).

3) The FMS detects, while For item 3):

airborne, that it is within a 30 nm Set altimeter to barometric
distance from the destination setting.
airport and below the transition
level (TRANS LVL) specified on
the PLAN DATA page while the
system altitude is standard.
SET QNH (cont’d) 4) The FMS detects that: For item 4): If the message is
Set altimeter to standard configured, and the FMS is
a) the FMS detects that it is at setting. in terminal and approach
least 33 nm away from the operations
origin airport, or
is above the transition altitude
(TRANS ALT) specified on
the PLAN DATA page, and,
b) an installed cockpit
baro/standard altimeter
reference selector is set to
“baro” reference or the FMS
receives a QNH input greater
than 29.93 or less than 29.91
Hg.

5) The FMS detects that it is For item 5):

within a 30 nm distance from the Set altimeter to barometric
destination airport and below the setting.
transition level (TRANS LVL)
specified on the PLAN DATA
page and that the system
altitude is standard.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-15
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
SET QNH (cont’d) If the IS&S EFIS is installed: If the message is
If this message has been configured, and the FMS is
triggered as a result of being in terminal and approach
within a 30 nm distance from the operations
destination airport while below
the transition level (TRANS LVL)
specified on the PLAN DATA
page, then this message is reset
if barometric pressure reference
is selected by the crew and
barometric corrected altitude is
available.

If the IS&S EFIS is installed:

If this message has been
triggered as a result of being at
least 33 nm away from the origin
airport, and, is above the
transition altitude (TRANS ALT)
specified on the PLAN DATA
page, then this message is
reset if standard pressure
reference is selected by the
crew.
SET QNH (cont’d) NOTE: For ROTOR aircraft, If the message is
airport terminal areas are only configured, and the FMS is
detected around navigation in terminal and approach
database airports. operations
TACAN NAV LOST No TACAN sensor data is Ensure that identified TACAN TACAN interface
available for the onside and receiver is powered.
offside FMSs. Verify if TACAN receiver
TACAN navigation mode is no operates normally.
longer available. Advise maintenance.
If FMS was in TACAN navigation
mode, it automatically reverts to
the next available navigation
mode.
TACT APPR DB The FMS detects a tactical Tactical approach already Tactical Approach
INVALID approach database corruption. loaded in the flight plan is configured
still considered valid and can
be used but attempt to re-
select a tactical approach
from the
database is prohibited.

Advise maintenance.
TDN FUNCTION The FMS has detected a failure Ensure that Radio Altimeter is • Hover function
LOST of all configured onside and powered. • Radar Altimeter interface
offside Radio Altimeters. As a Verify if Radio Altimeter
result, the TDN functionality has operates normally.
been lost. Advise maintenance.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-16
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
TDN NOT During a hover maneuver, when The roll steering command is • Hover function
POSSIBLE over-flying the TDN waypoint automatically disabled and • Radar Altimeter interface
one of the two conditions occurs: the hover has to be re-
cross track value greater than activated and re-executed.
0.2 nm or cross track error value
greater than 20°. This message
appears in order to protect the
autopilot against excessive
maneuvers.
TIMER ALARM Timer has expired. Perform required post-timeout Timer page
action.
TPDR CONTROL The FMS cannot control the ATC Control transponder from • ATC transponder
LOST transponder. another source. interface
TPDR1 CONTROL Advise maintenance. • ATC transponder name
LOST configured as TPDR
TPDR2 CONTROL
LOST
VERIFY RNP A manually entered RNP value The crew is responsible for All configurations
VALUE greater than that approved for monitoring navigation
the phase of flight is used. performance and ensuring
that the aircraft remains within
protected airspace at all
times.
Verify that the RNP value is
appropriate for the phase of
flight. Modify as necessary.
VHF CONTROL The FMS cannot control the Control COM radio from • COM radio interface
LOST COM radio another source. • COM radio name
VHF1 CONTROL Advise maintenance. configured as VHF
LOST
VHF2 CONTROL
LOST
VIR CONTROL The FMS cannot tune the NAV Control NAV radio from • NAV radio interface
LOST (VOR/ILS) radio another source. • NAV radio name
VIR1 CONTROL Advise maintenance. configured as VIR
LOST
VIR2 CONTROL
LOST
VOR CONTROL The FMS detects that it cannot Control NAV radio from • NAV interface
LOST control the NAV (VOR/ILS) radio another source. • NAV radio name is
VOR1 CONTROL Advise maintenance. configured as VOR
LOST
VOR2 CONTROL
LOST
VOR/DME NAV The FMS has detected a VOR Control the VOR or DME • NAV interface
LOST and/or DME receiver failure on receivers from another • DME interface
the onside and offside FMSs. source.
VOR-DME navigation mode is Verify if VOR and DME
no longer available. receivers operate normally.
If FMS was in VOR-DME Advise maintenance
navigation mode, it automatically
reverts to the next available
navigation mode.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-17
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

SYSTEM ALERT DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
VOR/DME/TCN TACAN failure has been Control the VOR or DME • NAV interface
NAV LOST detected in addition to a VOR receivers from another • DME interface
and/or DME receiver failure on source. • TACAN interface
the onside and offside FMSs. Ensure that identified TACAN
VOR-DME-TCN navigation receiver is powered.
mode is no longer available. Verify if TACAN, VOR and
If FMS was in VOR-DME-TCN DME receivers operate
navigation mode, it automatically normally.
reverts to the next available Advise maintenance.
navigation mode.
VUHF CONTROL FMS cannot control the VUHF Control VUHF radio from • VUHF radio interface
LOST radio another source. • VUHF radio name
VUHF1 CONTROL Advise maintenance. configured as VUHF
LOST
VUHF2 CONTROL
LOST
WXR INPUT LOST No Weather Radar data is Ensure that WXR is powered. Weather Radar interface
available for the onside and Verify if WXR operates
offside FMSs. normally.
Advise maintenance.
XPDR CONTROL The FMS cannot control the Control the transponder from • ATC transponder
LOST transponder another source. interface
XPDR1 CONTROL Advise maintenance. • ATC transponder name
LOST configured as XPDR
XPDR2 CONTROL
LOST

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-18
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE ALERT MESSAGES

Maintenance Alert messages are messages that indicate a particular CMA-9000 FMS failure condition:

• Displayed in amber on the MAINT MESSAGES page.

• Never displayed on the scratchpad.
• Always associated with a specific system alert message.
• Unless otherwise noted, the CMA-9000 Master Caution is active (e.g. FMS is not functional) for all the
Maintenance Alert messages.
• The associated message alert FMS DEGRADED suggests that the cause of the problem may be
determined and that the FMS may be used in a degraded navigation mode. However: Do not use the FMS
for navigation if the cause of the problem cannot be determined.

MAINTENANCE DESCRIPTION ACTION ASSOCIATED SYSTEM

ALERT MESSAGE ALERT MESSAGE
BAD SDI The FMS detects that both SDI In flight: Discontinue use of FMS FAILED
STRAPPING pins are open. the given by pulling FMS
circuit breaker.
On ground: Advise
maintenance.
BOOT CHECKSUM Boot software failure. Do not use the FMS for None
FAILED SYSTEM cannot be navigation.
reprogrammed with new Master Caution is inactive.
operational software. Advise maintenance.
H/W A429 IP# ARINC 429 receiver failure Do not use the FMS to FMS DEGRADED
FAILED detected. communicate with the
Where # is 1 to 24. equipment configured at the
SYSTEM DEGRADED displayed failed input port.
on MESSAGE RECALL page. Master Caution is inactive.
Advise maintenance.
H/W A429 TX# ARINC 429 transmitter failure Do not use the FMS to FMS DEGRADED
FAILED detected. communicate with the
Where # is 1 to 8. equipment(s) configured at
SYSTEM DEGRADED displayed the failed output port.
on MESSAGE RECALL page. Master Caution is inactive.
Advise maintenance.
H/W CPU CLKMUL K6 CPU frequency is not 220 Do not use the FMS for FMS FAILED
FAILED MHz. navigation.
SYSTEM FAILED displayed on
MESSAGE RECALL page. Advise maintenance.
H/W CPU FAILED CPU failure detected. Do not use the FMS for FMS FAILED
SYSTEM FAILED displayed on navigation.
MESSAGE RECALL page.
Advise maintenance.
H/W FLASH The SYSTEM detects a failure Do not use the FMS for FMS FAILED
FAILED during the internal flash test. navigation.
SYSTEM FAILED displayed on
MESSAGE RECALL page. Advise maintenance.
H/W FPU FAILED FPU failure detected. SYSTEM Do not use the FMS for FMS FAILED
FAILED displayed on MESSAGE navigation.
RECALL page.
Advise maintenance.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-19
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE DESCRIPTION ACTION ASSOCIATED SYSTEM

ALERT MESSAGE ALERT MESSAGE
H/W PIT FAILED Programmable Interval Timer Do not use the FMS for FMS FAILED
failure detected. SYSTEM navigation.
FAILED displayed on MESSAGE
RECALL page. Advise maintenance.
H/W PWR SUPP The SYSTEM detects a supply Do not use the FMS for FMS FAILED
FAILED +5 voltage out of limit on the 5, 12 navigation.
H/W PWR SUPP or -12 Volts supplies.
FAILED +12 SYSTEM FAILED displayed on Advise maintenance.
H/W PWR SUPP MESSAGE RECALL page.
FAILED -12
H/W RAM FAILED SYSTEM random access Do not use the FMS for FMS FAILED
memory (RAM) test failure. navigation.
SYSTEM FAILED displayed on
MESSAGE RECALL page. Advise Maintenance.
H/W RTC FAILED Real Time Clock failure Do not use the FMS for None
detected. navigation.
Time cannot be retained during Manually enter date/time.
SYSTEM power-off. Master Caution is inactive.
Advise maintenance.
H/W SERIAL I/O The SYSTEM detects a failure CDU keyboard, discretes and FMS FAILED
FAILED with the SERIAL I/O Controller. annunciators may no longer
SYSTEM FAILED displayed on operate.
MESSAGE RECALL page.
Advise Maintenance.
H/W UART RX# The SYSTEM detects a failure Do not use the FMS to FMS DEGRADED
FAILED with the SERIAL I/O Controller. communicate with the
Where # is 1 to 4. equipment configured at the
SYSTEM DEGRADED displayed failed input port.
on MESSAGE RECALL page. Master Caution is inactive.
Advise Maintenance.
H/W UART TX# The SYSTEM detects a failure Do not use FMS to FMS DEGRADED
FAILED with the SERIAL I/O Controller. communicate with the
Where # is 1 to 4. equipment configured at the
SYSTEM DEGRADED displayed failed output port.
on MESSAGE RECALL page. Master Caution is inactive.
Advise Maintenance.
MAG VAR CRC Magnetic Variation Tables Do not use the FMS for FMS FAILED
FAILED checksum failure. navigation.
SYSTEM FAILED displayed on
MESSAGE RECALL page. Advise maintenance.
OP CHECKSUM Operation Program checksum Do not use the FMS for FMS FAILED
FAILED failure. The SYSTEM is navigation.
unreliable for communication
SYSTEM FAILED displayed on Advise maintenance.
MESSAGE RECALL page.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-20
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE ADVISORY MESSAGES

Maintenance advisory messages are messages that do not require immediate pilot action but that indicate a
particular equipment failure condition:

• Displayed in white on the MAINT MESSAGES page.

• Displayed on the scratchpad unless an associated collector message exists and is active (until
acknowledged).
• Lowest priority scratchpad messages (can be typed over and overwritten by any other message type).
• Unless otherwise noted, the CMA-9000 Master Caution is inactive (e.g. FMS is still functional) for all the
Maintenance Advisory messages.
• Collector messages are messages that combine several fault conditions into a single alert message. (e.g.
AIR DATA LOST combines ADC1 FAILED and ADC2 FAILED Maintenance Advisory messages).

ADVISORY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
AAIM ALT FAILED Out of bounds GPS altitude If in TERMINAL or ENROUTE EGI interface
failure (SAGEM EGI installation phase of flight the INS/GPS
only). navigation mode is kept, but
the pilot can manually
deselect this mode.
Advise Maintenance to verify
the SAGEM EGI
AAIM SAT FAILED Non-isolated satellite failure. As above. EGI interface
ADC1 FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Ensure that ADC is powered. ADC interface
ADC2 FAILED of the ADC receiver or the ADC Verify that ADC operates
communication BUS. normally.
Advise maintenance.
Refer to Section 15 of the
Operator’s Manual for
operation with a failed
TAS/Altitude input if an
alternate TAS/Altitude source
is not available.
ADF1 FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Control ADF from another ADF interface
ADF2 FAILED of the identified ADF radio or a source.
failure of the ADF receiver ADF receiver is no longer
communication bus. operational, use other
navigation aids.

Advise maintenance.
AHRS1 FAILED AHRS input failure or a failure of Ensure that AHRS is AHRS interface
AHRS2 FAILED the AHRS communication bus or powered.
AHRS3 FAILED AHRS is in alignment mode or
AHRS is in manual heading Verify if AHRS operates
update mode (in directional normally.
mode).
When this message is present, Advise maintenance.
another heading source is
available. Otherwise, the
HEADING INPUT LOST alert
message will be displayed.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-21
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ADVISORY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
AMU FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Control the AMU from another AMU interface
of the AMU or a failure of the source.
AMU communication bus. Advise maintenance.
AMU CH1 FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Use another channel to AMU interface
AMU CH2 FAILED of a particular AMU Audio Board. control the AMU.
AMU CH3 FAILED Advise maintenance.
APIRS FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Ensure that APIRS is APIRS interface
of the identified APIRS or a powered.
failure of the APIRS
communication bus. Verify if APIRS operates
normally.

Advise maintenance.
APU FAILED The FMS detects a failure or a Be aware that the total fuel APU Interface
loss of communication with the flow does not include the APU
APU. fuel flow; inform maintenance.
APU FUEL FLOW The FMS detects it is not Be aware that the total fuel APU Interface
FAILED receiving the fuel flow from the flow does not include the APU
APU or the received fuel flow is fuel flow; inform maintenance.
invalid.
ATC1 ALT FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Do not use transponder Mode • ATC transponder
ATC2 ALT FAILED of the transponder altitude bus. C capability. interface
• ATC transponder name
Advise maintenance. configured as ATC
ATC1 FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Control the ATC transponder • ATC transponder
ATC2 FAILED of the ATC transponder or a from another source. interface
failure of the ATC transponder • ATC transponder name
communication bus. Advise maintenance. configured as ATC
ATOS FAILED The FMS detects a failure or a Ensure that ATOS is • ATOS interface
loss of communication with the powered.
Airborne Tactical Observation
and Surveillance System. Verify if ATOS operates
normally.

Advise maintenance
AUTO RESET Upon an exceptional fault the The unit has detected a All configurations
FMS has restarted. problem and has attempted to
restart. No action required
except to verify it is
functioning as expected.

Advise maintenance.
BORESIGHT Discrepancy between the Enter new values for roll, EGI interface
DISCREPANCY boresight values of the EGI and pitch, and yaw boresight in
the newly entered FMS INS the EGI - BORESIGHT 1/1
values. maintenance page.
CAPT EHSI Failure of the Capt. EHSI or Ensure that Capt EHSI is EHSI interface
FAILED failure of the Capt. EHSI powered. Verify if EHSI
communication bus. operates normally.
Map display available on F/O
EHSI.
Advise maintenance.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-22
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ADVISORY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
COM1 FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Control the COM/VUHF radio • COM radio interface
COM2 FAILED of the COM radio or its from another source. • VUHF radio interface
COM3 FAILED communication bus or VUHF COM/VUHF radio is no longer • COM or VUHF radio
COM4 FAILED radio or its communication bus. operational, use other name configured as
communication radios. COM1 or COM3

Advise maintenance.
CONC1 FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Control the Concentrator interface
CONC2 FAILED of the CONCENTRATOR or its CONCENTRATOR from
communication bus. another source.
Loss of the
CONCENTRATOR input
alone does not cause any
adverse effect, the specific
equipment affected by the
failure will be annunciated
directly.
CONFIG INVALID The FMS detects an installation Do not use the FMS for any All configurations
configuration failure. function. Advise maintenance
This message automatically crew to load a valid
generates an associated “FMS configuration
FAILED” alert message. Master Caution is active.
DATUM LISTS In a dual/triple FMS installation Advise maintenance crew to Multi-FMS installations
MISMATCH with the FMSs synchronized, the ensure that the same
FMS detects that the preferred preferred datum list is
datum list configured differs from selected on all configured
that of the off-side FMS. FMSs.
DCU1 FAILED If IS&S EFIS (configuration Ensure that DCU is powered. DCU interface
DCU2 FAILED option IS_S) is configured and Verify if the EFIS operates
DCU3 FAILED the FMS detects a failure or a normally.
loss of communication with the Advise maintenance.
specific DCU (Data Concentrator
Unit).
DF FAILED The FMS detects a failure or a Ensure that DF is powered. DF interface
loss of communication with the Verify if the DF can be
DF-430 radio. controlled by any other
sources (such as alternate
FMS(s) or control panel).
Advise maintenance.
DMAP1 FAILED DMAP failure or DMAP Check DMAP power. DMAP interface
DMAP2 FAILED communication bus failure. Do not use the DMAP to
DMAP3 FAILED FMS’s failed functionality.
Advise maintenance.

DME1 FAILED The FMS detects a failure with Control the DME from another DME interface
DME2 FAILED the DME communication bus. source.

Advise maintenance.
DVS/GPS SPEED A difference of more than 15 None. • GPS interface
DIFF knots has occurred for more • Doppler interface
than two minutes between the
GPS and the Doppler North-East
velocities.
DVS FAILED Doppler velocity sensor failure or Ensure that DVS is powered. Doppler interface
a DVS communication bus Verify if the DVS operates
failure detected. normally.
Advise maintenance.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-23
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ADVISORY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
DVS CTRL FAILED Missing control data from the Degraded mode of operation Doppler interface
Doppler velocity sensor. may still be available.
Advise maintenance.
EFIS1 FAILED EFIS failure or EFIS Ensure that EFIS is powered. EFIS interface
EFIS2 FAILED communication bus failure Verify if the EFIS operates
detected. normally.
Advise maintenance.
FLIR FAILED The FMS detects a failure or a Ensure that FLIR is powered. FLIR interface
loss of communication with the
Forward Looking Infrared Radar. Verify if the FLIR operates
normally.

Advise maintenance.
FMS CLOCK The FMS detected failure of its Manually enter date and time. All configurations
FAILED real time clock. Master Caution is active.
FMS1 X-TALK 1. Offside FMS input failure. 1. Ensure that identified FMS Multi-FMS installations
FAILED is powered.
FMS2 X-TALK 2. In a dual/triple configuration, Verify if identified FMS
FAILED the synchronized mode of operates normally.
FMS3 X-TALK operation and manual flight plan Advise maintenance.
FAILED synchronization are not possible.
2. Any automatically
3. Possible loss of ATC or DME synchronized item listed in
Hold channel control. Section 3 of the Operator’s
Manual, dual-FMS
4. Failure of the cross-talk bus Operations, must be
detected. performed independently on
each FMS.

3. Verify if ATC is still

operational. Navigate without
the ATC and the DME HOLD
function.

4. Advise maintenance.
FUEL1 FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Ensure that the identified Fuel Fuel Computer
FUEL2 FAILED of the Fuel Computer or a failure Computer is powered.
of the Fuel Computer Verify if the Fuel Computer
communication bus. operates normally. Advise
maintenance.

NOTE: In installations that

FUEL FLOW SDI is
configured to SUM_DUAL,
the fuel flow indicated
represents only that for the
engine whose fuel computer
has not failed and the
indicated fuel quantity may be
less than actual.
FUEL FLOW Fuel Computer input failure. Verify Fuel Computer Fuel Compute
FAILED operation. Advise
Maintenance.
FUEL QTY FAILED Fuel quantity from fuel computer Advise maintenance. Fuel computer installed.
is not available or valid.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-24
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ADVISORY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
F/O EHSI FAILED The FMS has detected a F/O Ensure that F/O EHSI is EHSI interface
EHSI input failure or a F/O EHSI powered. Verify F/O EHSI
communication bus failure. operates normally.
Map display available on
Capt. EHSI.
Advise maintenance.
GLONASS FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Advice maintenance. GLONASS interface
GLONASS1 or a loss of communication with configured
FAILED the GLONASS sensor.
GLONASS2 NOTE: GLONASSx is displayed
FAILED in a multiple-FMS configuration
only.
GPP FAILED The FMS detects a failure to GPP Receiver is no longer HCS, FM1, FM2, UHF
communicate with Gessellschaft operational. interfaces
fur Prozessrechner
Programmierung (GPP) unit. Advise maintenance
GPS ANTENNA The EGI GPS in DR mode and Advise maintenance. EGI LN-100GT or SIGMA-
FAILED not using satellite data for 50H configured.
navigation as it is not tracking
any satellite for more than 5
seconds.
GPS BATTERY The EGI GPS battery is low or Advise Maintenance. EGI interface
LOW has failed.
GPS (EGI) FAILED FMS detected a failure of the Advise Maintenance. EGI interface
GPS in the identified EGI
sensor.
GPS FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Entry of date and time may be GPS interface
GPS1 FAILED of the GPS unit or a failure of the required. Functions requiring Multi-FMS installations
GPS2 FAILED GPS unit communication bus. GPS position/time will not
operate.
Advise maintenance.
GPS ZEROIZE Failure in the zeroization GPS cannot be used for EGI interface
FAILED process of the SA/AS key. navigation.
The FMS automatically selects Advise maintenance if the
the next best sensor for message is persistent.
navigation.
HF FAILED The FMS detects a HF radio Ensure that HF radio is Installations in which the
failure. powered. HF radio is configured.
Verify that the HF radio
operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
IFF FAILED The FMS detects a failure or a Ensure that IFF transponder Installations in which the
loss of communication with the is powered. IFF transponder is
IFF. Verify that the IFF configured.
transponder operates
normally.
Advise maintenance.
INS FAILED INS function in EGI has failed. INS cannot be used for EGI interface
navigation.
Advise maintenance if the
message persists.
INS/GPS FAILED Communication failure with the INS/GPS cannot be used for EGI interface
EGI. navigation.
Advise maintenance if the
message persists.
IRSx BAT WARN ADIRS DC input power out of Call maintenance. ADIRS interface configured
range.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-25
Revision 2 March 01, 2010
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ADVISORY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
IRSx CHECK ADC LTN-92 INS or ADIRS reports LTN-92: Take note of INS IRS interface configured
invalid ADC inputs. No usage of maintenance word contents on
some or all ADC info. appropriate INS MAINT
INS/IRS may not be able to MESSAGE page.
provide baro-inertial altitude data. Advise maintenance.
Depending of the installation, the
FMS may have lost its only
source of altitude. The
ALTITUDE FAILED message
would then also be displayed.
IRSx CHECK REF INS reports analog output failure. Verify following INS analog IRS interface configured
outputs: attitude, heading, drift
angle, platform heading.
LTN-92: Take note of INS
maintenance word contents on
appropriate INS MAINT
MESSAGE page.
Advise maintenance.
IRSx COOL FAIL ADIRS overheat detected. Cycle Mode Selector Unit ADIRS interface configured
Internal temperature exceeds 72 through OFF.
degrees C. Call maintenance.
IRSx DELAYED LTN-92 INS reports an internal Take note of INS maintenance IRS interface configured
MAINT soft failure. word contents on appropriate
INS MAINT MESSAGE page.
Advise maintenance to service
INU when convenient.
IRSx EXCESS LTN-92 INS or ADIRS reports Ensure that aircraft remains IRS interface configured
MOTION excessive motion during stationary during alignment
alignment phase. ALIGN mode period.
automatically re-sequences to 10
minutes (32 seconds if in rapid
re-align mode).
IRSx FAILED Inertial sensor input failure. Ensure that inertial sensor is IRS interface configured
Inertial Navigation mode, heading powered.
and altitude inputs (if applicable) Verify if inertial sensor
still available as long as one operates normally.
inertial sensor is still operating Turn off INU/IRU and advise
normally. maintenance.
LTN-92 INS:
Take note of INS
maintenance word contents
on appropriate INS MAINT
MESSAGE page.
IRSx SEC. POWER LASEREF V IRS: Upon Advice maintenance IRS interface configured
WARN detection of the IRS is on
secondary power for more than
10 seconds.
LEVER ARM Discrepancy between the lever Verify the lever arm values EGI interface
DISCREPANCY arm values in the EGI and the and re-enter if necessary.
new values in the FMS.
MAG VAR OUT OF Magnetic variation tables out of Advise maintenance to load All configurations
DATE date (more than 5 years old). up-to-date magnetic variation
Message displayed at power-up, tables.
or after loading tables via data
loader.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-26
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ADVISORY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
NAV1 FAILED The FMS detects a failure with Try to control the NAV radio • NAV radio interface
NAV2 FAILED the NAV (VOR/ILS) radio or the from another source. NAV • NAV radio name is
NAV radio communication bus. receiver is no longer configured to NAV
operational, use other
navigation aids.
Advise maintenance.
GPS ANTENNA The GPS sensor detects a GPS Advise Maintenance. EGI interface
FAILED antenna failure and goes in GPS
DR navigation.
PHONE FAILED The FMS detects a failure of the Advise Maintenance. Iridium Phone interface
Iridium Phone communication
bus.
PLS FAILED The FMS detects a failure of the Take alternate means for PLS interface
PLS range or the PLS steering location missions.
or a failure of the PLS
communication bus. Advise maintenance.
RADAR FAILED The FMS detects either: Ensure that the RADAR is Installations in which the
1) A failure or loss of powered. FIAR 1500B Radar is
communication with the FIAR Verify if the Radar operate(s) configured.
1500B Radar equipment, or, normally.
2) Latitude and longitude labels Advise maintenance.
received from the FIAR 1500B
Radar equipment have different
SSMs from each other for 5
seconds.
RALT FAILED The FMS detects a failure of the Ensure that RALT is powered. Radar Altimeter interface
RALT1 FAILED Radio Altimeter or a failure of the Verify if the RALT operates
RALT2 FAILED Radio Altimeter communication normally.
bus. Advise maintenance.
TACAN FAILED TACAN receiver input failure or Ensure that the identified TACAN interface
a failure of the TACAN receiver TACAN receiver is powered.
or a receiver communication bus Verify if the TACAN receiver
has been detected. operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
TPDR1 ALT The FMS has detected a failure Do not use transponder Mode • ATC transponder
FAILED of the transponder altitude bus C capability. interface
TPDR2 ALT • ATC transponder name is
FAILED Advise maintenance. configured as TPDR
TPDR1 FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Control transponder from • ATC transponder
TPDR2 FAILED of the ATC transponder or a another source. interface
failure of the ATC transponder • ATC transponder name is
communication bus. Advise maintenance. configured as TPDR

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-27
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ADVISORY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

MESSAGE CONFIGURA-TION
UNABLE FMS-FMS In a dual-FMS installation, Any automatically Multi-FMS installations
SYNC operator’s or automatic attempt synchronized item listed in
to synchronize FMSs failed Section 3 of the Operator’s
because: Manual, dual-FMS
1. An inter-FMS communication Operations, must be now
failure has occurred. performed independently on
2. The Operational Software each FMS.
programs is not the same in See MESSAGE RECALL
all FMSs. and/or MAINT MESSAGE
3. The active navigation page(s) for more details.
database is not the same in Advise maintenance.
all FMSs. Verify Op Program on IDENT
1/1 page and advise
maintenance if different.
Verify active navigation
database on IDENT 1/1 page,
select appropriate database if
possible, otherwise advise
maintenance.
VHF1 FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Control the COM radio from • COM radio interface
VHF2 FAILED of the COM radio or a failure of another source. • COM radio name
the COM radio communication COM radio is no longer configured as VHF
bus. operational, use other
communication radios.
Advise maintenance.
VIR FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Try to control the NAV radio • NAV radio interface
VIR1 FAILED with the NAV (VOR/ILS) radio or from another source. NAV • NAV radio name
VIR2 FAILED a NAV radio communication bus receiver is no longer configured as VIR
failure. operational, use other
navigation aids.
Advise maintenance.
VUHF FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Try to control the VUHF radio • VUHF interface
VUHF1 FAILED of the identified VUHF receiver from another source. VUHF • VUHF radio name
VUHF2 FAILED or a failure of the radio radio is no longer operational, configured as VUHF
communication bus. use other communication
radios.
Advise maintenance.
VOR1 FAILED The FMS detects a failure with Try to control the NAV radio • NAV radio interface
VOR2 FAILED the NAV (VOR/ILS) radio or a from another source. NAV • NAV radio name
failure of the radio receiver is no longer configured as VOR
communication bus. operational, use other
navigation aids.
Advise maintenance.
WXR FAILED A communication failure has Ensure that WXR is powered. Weather radar interface
occurred with the weather radar. Verify if WXR operates
normally.
Advise maintenance.
XPDR1 ALT The FMS has detected a failure Do not use transponder Mode • ATC transponder radio
FAILED of the transponder altitude bus. C capability. interface
XPDR2 ALT Advise maintenance. • ATC transponder
FAILED configured as XPDR
XPDR1 FAILED The FMS has detected a failure Control the transponder from • ATC transponder radio
XPDR2 FAILED of the ATC transponder or a another source. interface
failure of the transponder Advise maintenance. • ATC transponder
communication bus. configured as XPDR

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-28
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STATUS ADVISORY MESSAGES

• Status Advisory messages are messages which do not require immediate pilot action but require pilot
awareness: Displayed in white on the scratchpad (until acknowledged).
• Never displayed on the MESSAGE RECALL or MAINT MESSAGES page.
• Second lowest scratchpad priority (can be typed over and overwritten by any message type except
maintenance advisory messages).

STATUS DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
1 MIN TO CARP The FMS detects that 1 minute Prepare for CARP per the Configurations supporting
remains prior to reaching the CARP procedure checklist. CARP/HARP
CRP waypoint.
5 SEC TO CARP The FMS detects that 5 seconds Prepare for CARP per the Configurations supporting
remains prior to reaching the CARP procedure checklist. CARP/HARP
CRP waypoint.
10 MIN TO CARP The FMS detects that 10 minute Prepare for CARP per the Configurations supporting
remains prior to reaching the CARP procedure checklist. CARP/HARP
CRP waypoint.
20 MIN TO CARP The FMS detects that 20 minute Prepare for CARP per the Configurations supporting
remains prior to reaching the CARP procedure checklist. CARP/HARP
CRP waypoint.
AIR TEMP NOT Air temperature is invalid or out Advise maintenance to verify • Simulation page
VALID of bounds (valid range: -40C to and reload OEI_FLYAWAY • OEI Fly Away database
50C). file.
NOTE: This message is
enabled only on the SIMUL FLY
AWAY 1/3 and SIMUL OEI
CRUISE 2/3 pages.
ATOS XFER The FMS detects that a mission At the crew’s discretion, a Installations in which the
REQUESTED data is ready to be transferred mission data transfer from the ATOS equipment is
from the ATOS to the FMS. ATOS can be initiated using configured.
the START> prompt on the
MISSION 1/1 page.
AUTOMATIC HOLD A holding pattern will be exited N/A All configurations
EXIT automatically by the FMS
NOTE: Applicable to HA, HF leg
types (holding patterns from
Navigation Database).
BACKTRACK The backtrack route has been Check the route and reduce Backtrack route
ROUTE FULL filled up to its maximum of 199 number of waypoints.
waypoints and there is an
attempt to record the 200th
waypoint in the backtrack route
flight plan (first waypoint entered
manually by the operator or
waypoint overflown in the active
route).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-29
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STATUS DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
BERDV The FMS detects that Check if the entered BULLS if Tactical Config BULLS
UNACHIEVABLE interception of the moving Bulls EYE TARGET parameters EYE is
Eye Target is not possible. and correct. configured
NOTE: This message is
generated only once upon
selection or modification of the
moving Bulls Eye Target if it is
not in the active route.
CAPT MAP The FMS detects that Capt and Capt or F/O to select another SMITHS_5ATI or
CONTROL IN USE F/O are using the same FMS to FMS if individual map displays ASTRONAUTICS EHSI
drive their EFIS map. are required. configured installations.
NOTE: Selected FMS is using
Captain EFIS panel selections.
F/O EFIS control panel
selections are ignored.
CDU ENTRY The FMS detects conflict of Insure no conflicting action Multi-FMS installations
CONFLICT entry in dual/triple-FMS between flight crew members.
operations.
cGPS NAV The civil GPS sensor has been Ensure GPS navigation mode Civil GPS and
DESELECTED de-selected by the crew. should be deselected. EGI interface installed at
the same time and
DESELECT page
configured.
CHECK TRANS The FMS detects that all the Ensure that correct TRANS If the message is
ALT/LVL following have occurred: ALT and/or TRANS LVL is configured.
a) the operator presses the set.
EXEC button and activates the
flight plan; and,
b) a value for transition altitude
or transition level does not exist
in the navigation database for
the selected
ORIGin/DESTination airport or
departure/arrival procedure(s);
and,
c) the change in the MODified
flight plan includes a change to
the ORIGin/DESTination airport
or departure/arrival
procedure(s); and,
d) no manual entry has been
made for:

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-30
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STATUS DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
CHECK TRANS i) the TRANS ALT field (for the
ALT/LVL (cont’d) case that a new ORIGin or
departure procedure(s) was
added to the active flight plan);
or
ii) the TRANS LVL field (for the
case that a new DESTination or
arrival procedure(s) was added
to the active flight plan)

If Tactical Approach is
configured and:
a) The operator has made the
inactive route, containing a
tactical approach in its flight
plan, into the now active route;
and
b) A value for transition altitude
or transition level does not exist
in the tactical approach
database for the selected
tactical approach procedure.
CHECK TRUE/MAG If the TRUE/MAG cockpit switch If required, change Angle
REF is not installed and the A/C has reference to MAG via FMS
transitioned out of the Polar SET-UP page (or alternatively
region. via external switch).
CHECK UPDATE The FMS detects that the Review the position update. All configurations
position difference between the
sensor to be updated and the
reference position is greater
than the accuracy of the sensor
to be updated. This message is
only available on the UPDATE
POS 1/1 page.
COURSE The FMS detects that the course As deemed necessary, modify Message configured to
CHANGE>125 change of a fly-by leg transition flight plan if such a course advisory.
AHEAD (from the active leg to the next change is not desired.
leg) is greater than 125 degrees
and within 2 minutes from the
turn anticipation point (triggered
for non-published procedures
only).
DIMMING External control source for Use internal dimming mode. External dimming control
INTERNAL MODE display dimming is providing a source installed.
signal of less than 0.3 VDC for
more than 2 seconds.
DIRECT HOLD The FMS detects holding pattern Acknowledge the holding All configurations
ENTRY entry procedure to be used on pattern entry.
crossing of holding fix.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-31
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STATUS DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
DIRECT TO FIX The FMS detects Upon flying a Review the intercept course All configurations
Direct-To with intercept course entered.
that the predicted intercept point
is so close to the leg's
termination waypoint such that
the intercept path cannot be
calculated.
The FMS then calculates a path
direct to the waypoint.
DMAP WPT LIST DMAP Reserved Waypoint List Limit the DMAP list to ten DMAP interface
FULL is full. waypoints
DMAP WPT NOT All the following conditions are When the flight pan currently EURONAV_A702 DMAP
APPENDED required for this message to be in view is no longer in the configured installations.
displayed: MOD state, retransmit DMAP
1) EURONAV_A702 DMAP is waypoint as required.
configured, and
2) The DMAP auto-append
feature is ON, and
3) The FMS logic prevents
appending a newly received
DMAP waypoint due to the
currently viewed FMS flight plan
(active or inactive) being
modified by an off-side FMS.
DMAP XFER Loss of communication with Verify the DMAP power and DMAP interface
FAILED Digital Map Display System self-test status. Advise
Interface maintenance.
DME NAV DME Sensor manually de- Ensure DME navigation • DME interface
DESELECTED selected by the pilot. sensor should be deselected. • DESELECT page
EMERGENCY Emergency tuning switch has Acknowledge emergency • Emergency discrete
ENGAGED been engaged to set the status. • At least one of the
emergency frequencies following radio is
configured:
COM
VUHF
ATC
END OF OFFSET End of offset navigation. Acknowledge the end of the All configurations
offset.
END OF SEARCH End of search. Acknowledge end of search All configurations
pattern.
F/O MAP Capt and F/O are using the Capt or F/O to select another SMITHS_5ATI or
CONTROL IN USE same FMS to drive their EFIS FMS if individual map displays ASTRONAUTICS EHSI
map. are required. configured installations.
NOTE: Selected FMS is using
F/O EFIS panel selections. Capt
EFIS control panel selections
are ignored.
FLY AWAY HT Fly away height out of tabular Advise maintenance (to verify • Simulation page
NOT VALID bounds. and reload OEI_FLYAWAY • OEI Fly Away database
NOTE: This message is file).
enabled only on the SIMUL FLY
AWAY 1/2 and SIMUL OEI
CRUISE 2/2 pages.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-32
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STATUS DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
FMS NAV IN DR The FMS is receiving insufficient Take appropriate measure to All configurations
navigation information from fly in manual mode. Verify
other sensors. sensors power status and
NOTE: The FMS is in dead self-test status.
reckoning navigation mode
using heading and speed inputs
and last computed value of wind.
FUNCTION NOT Weight index out of tabular Advise maintenance (to verify • Simulation page
COMPUTED bounds. and reload OEI_FLYAWAY • OEI Fly Away database
NOTE: This message is file).
enabled only on the SIMUL FLY
AWAY 1/2 and SIMUL OEI
CRUISE 2/2 pages.
GPS INTEGRITY GPS sensor has just acquired Advisory • GPS interface
VALID integrity that satisfies the limit • EGI interface (except
requirement for the phase of LN-100GT
flight.
NOTE: This message is turned
on when the integrity lamp goes
from ON to OFF. Similarly, the
message is turned off when the
lamp comes ON.
GPS NAV GPS sensor has been de- Ensure GPS navigation mode • GPS interface
DESELECTED selected by the pilot. should be deselected. • DESELECT page
GREEN LIGHT CARP (Green Light) waypoint Start CARP drop. Configurations supporting
has been reached. CARP/HARP
Message is enabled when the
CARP function is configured.
GROSS WEIGHT Gross weight invalid or out of Advise maintenance (to verify • Simulation page
NOT VALID bounds (valid range: 6000kg to and reload OEI_FLYAWAY • OEI Fly Away database
11000kg). file).
NOTE: This message is
enabled only on the SIMUL FLY
AWAY 1/3 and SIMUL OEI
CRUISE 2/3 pages.
HOLD EXIT TYPE A modified route that contains a
CHANGED holding pattern for which the exit
type has been changed is
executed.
HSI SCALES The FMS is commanding HSI Acknowledge HSI scale EHSI or EFIS interface in
CHANGING lateral scale deviation sensitivity change (change of POF). terminal phase of flight
change from 5 nm to 1 nm full
scale when entering the terminal
area
HSI SCALES TO At 3 nm inbound to the FAF and Acknowledge HSI scale EHSI or EFIS interface in
CHANGE the GPS approach is enabled change (change of POF). terminal phase of flight.
(armed).
NOTE: The HSI lateral
deviation sensitivity will change
from 1 nm to 0.3 nm full scale at
2 nm to the FAF waypoint.
INS/DVS NAV INS/DVS navigator has been de- Ensure INS/DVS navigation • EGI interface
DESELECTED selected by the pilot. mode should be deselected. • Doppler interface
• DESELECT page

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-33
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STATUS DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
INS DRIFT FMS detects a position Advisory Civil GPS and
EXCEEDS 2NM difference between the FMS EGI interface installed at
current position and the INS the same time.
pure position greater than 2 nm.
INS/GPS NAV INS/GPS navigator has been de- Ensure INS/GPS navigation • EGI interface
DESELECTED selected by the pilot. mode should be deselected. • DESELECT page
IN INERTIAL MODE Reversion to Inertial navigation Acknowledge inertial • EGI interface
mode. navigation mode. Verify GPS
integrity by monitoring the
NAV STATUS page.
KALMAN NAV KALMAN navigator has been Ensure KALMAN navigation • APIRS interface
DESELECTED de-selected by the pilot. mode should be deselected. • DESELECT page
MAINTENANCE Not enough memory is available Advise maintenance to verify All configurations
LOG FULL to save a file. the content of the Log file and
delete some entries.
mGPS NAV The military GPS sensor (from Ensure military GPS Civil GPS and
DESELECTED the EGI) has been de-selected navigation mode should be EGI interface installed at
by the crew. deselected. the same time and
DESELECT page
configured.
NEW SARSAT The FMS has received a new Press WPT LISTS then DF-935 or DF430 interface.
WPT SARSAT waypoint. SARSAT LSKs to display the
NOTE: When an existing information about the new
SARSAT waypoint gets updated SARSAT beacon received.
this message is not raised.
NEW TARGET The FMS has received a new At crew’s discretion, process Installations in which the
POSITION valid target position from the the received waypoint as FIAR 1500B Radar and/or
FIAR 1500B Radar or the ATOS. operationally necessary. ATOS equipment is/are
configured.
NO FLY AWAY (Active gross weight – fuel Advise maintenance to verify • Simulation page
weight) > computed gross and reload OEI_FLYAWAY • OEI Fly Away database
weight OR (radio altitude – fly file.
away height) < 15 ft
NOTE: This message is
enabled only on the SIMUL FLY
AWAY 1/2 and SIMUL OEI
CRUISE 2/2 pages.
NOT ON When a Direct-To with Intercept- Verify intercept course entry All configurations
INTERCEPT HDG Course is pending (modified and the heading of the
route), The FMS detects that aircraft.
current aircraft heading does not
intercept desired course to fix.
NOT ON When a Direct-To with Intercept- Verify intercept course entry All configurations
INTERCEPT TRK Course is pending (modified and the track.
route), The FMS detects that
current aircraft track does not
intercept desired course to fix.
PRESS ALT NOT Pressure altitude is invalid or out Enter a valid pressure altitude. N/A
VALID of bounds.
PARALLEL HOLD Holding pattern entry procedure Acknowledge the holding All configurations
ENTRY to be used at crossing of holding pattern entry.
fix.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-34
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STATUS DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
PASSWORD The library password has been N/A One of following radio is
CHANGED successfully changed. configured COM
VUHF
VOR/ILS
ADF
RED LIGHT The FMS detects the XTE (Red Stop CARP drop. Configurations supporting
Light) CARP waypoint has been CARP/HARP
reached.
Message is enabled when the
CARP function is configured.
RENDEZVOUS The interception of the moving Take appropriate measures to Moving waypoint
UNACHIEVABLE waypoint is not possible (greater meet the moving waypoint.
than500 nm).
NOTE: This message is
generated when the moving
waypoint is not the active
waypoint.
SLOWDOWN The FMS detects the slowdown CARP Slowdown waypoint Configurations supporting
waypoint for CARP has been has been reached. CARP/HARP
reached.
Message is enabled when the
CARP function is configured.
SMS NOT The FMS detects that SMS was Retry to send the SMS. Iridium Phone interface.
TRANSMITTED not transmitted by the Iridium
phone.
SMS The FMS detects that SMS was Advisory Iridium Phone interface.
TRANSMITTED OK transmitted by the Iridium phone.
TARGET XFER The FMS detects a target The crew should retransmit Installations in which the
FAILED waypoint transmission from the the target position. If the FIAR 1500B Radar and/or
ATOS LW or FIAR 1500B Radar problem persists the interface ATOS equipment is/are
for which the position received is between FMS and the configured.
out of range. transmitting equipment should
be checked.
TEARDROP HOLD The FMS detects holding pattern Acknowledge the holding All configurations
ENTRY entry procedure to be used at pattern entry.
crossing of holding fix.
TEMP POS The FMS detects the termination None. Configurations supporting
UPDATE END of an active temporary position CARP/HARP
update.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-35
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STATUS DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
TRANS ALT/LVL The FMS detects that all the Ensure that the correct If the message is
MISMATCH following have occurred: TRANS ALT and TRANS LVL configured.
a) the operator presses the are selected.
EXEC button and activates the
flight plan; and,
b) a transition altitude/level is
stored in the navigation
database for the selected
ORIGin/DESTina-tion airport or
departure/arrival procedure(s);
and,
c) a manual entry currently
exists in the TRANS ALT or
TRANS LVL field; and,
d) operator entered value for the
TRANS ALT does not match the
new TRANS ALT extracted from
the nav database or operator
entered value for the TRANS
LVL does not match the new
TRANS LVL extracted from the
nav database.
TRANS ALT/LVL If Tactical Approach is
MISMATCH (cont’d) configured and:
a) the operator presses the
EXEC button and activates the
flight plan; and,
b) a transition altitude/level is
stored in the tactical approach
database for the selected
tactical approach procedure;
and,
c) a manual entry currently
exists in the TRANS ALT or
TRANS LVL field; and,
d) operator entered value for the
TRANS ALT does not match the
new TRANS ALT extracted from
the tactical approach database
or operator entered value for the
TRANS LVL does not match the
new TRANS LVL extracted from
the tactical approach database
database; and,
e) a PLAN DATA page is
configured.
TRANSITION Hover procedure execution. Acknowledge the hover • Hover function
DOWN Displayed until the TDN procedure. • Radar Altimeter
waypoint is reached, at which configured
point the message is removed
automatically.
USING MAG REF If the TRUE/MAG cockpit switch The flight crew decides if the All configuration
is installed and is set to MAG navigation angles and wind
upon the A/C transitioning out of direction reference must be
the polar region. preserved as MAG or switched
back to TRUE

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-36
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STATUS DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
USING TRUE REF The FMS automatically reverts None. All configuration
to True north angular reference
upon entry in the polar region The flight crew acknowledges
and the angular reference used that the navigation and wind
before entry in polar region was direction are referenced to
Magnetic north. True North

VOR/DME NAV VOR Sensor manually Ensure VOR/DME navigation • NAV interface
DESELECTED deselected by the pilot. mode is deselected. • DME interface
NOTE: Message enabled only
when DESELECT page
configured.
WAYPOINT FMS detects that the airplane Acknowledge that the FMS Leg sequencing
BYPASSED crosses the wayline sequences both the active
(perpendicular line to the next and the next leg.
leg at the waypoint) of the next
leg before the bisector or the
wayline of the active leg.
WIND NOT VALID Wind speed invalid. Advise maintenance (to verify • Simulation page
and reload OEI_FLYAWAY • OEI Fly Away database
file).
X-FMS NAV FMS-FMS synchronized Ensure cross FMS navigation Multi-FMS installations
DESELECTED navigation manually deselected mode should be deselected.
by the pilot.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-37
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY ADVISORY MESSAGES

Data Entry Advisory messages are messages that are only displayed on the scratchpad. They indicate that the
CMA-9000 FMS has determined that the user-entered data is incorrect.

• Displayed in white on the scratchpad (until acknowledged)

• Never displayed on the MESSAGE RECALL or MAINT MESSAGES page
• Second highest scratchpad priority (can be typed over and overwritten by system alert messages only).

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!25 kHz STEP One of following radio is
The frequency entered is not a Enter a frequency which is a
ERROR configured:
multiple of 25 kHz. multiple of 25 kHz.
COM
VUHF
VUHF
VHF
!2ND APP/ARR If tactical approach is
The FMS detects the operator is As appropriate,
NOT ALLOWED configured.
attempting to enter a tactical deselect/remove any currently
approach in the active or selected approach and/or
modified flight plan while an arrival procedures to be able to
approach, arrival procedure, enter the new approach/arrival
STAR, or STAR transition procedure.
waypoint is already present in
the flight plan.
!2ND MOV WPT Moving waypoint
Operator is attempting to enter a Cancel entry or cancel the first
NOT ALLOWED second moving waypoint in the moving point then enter the
active or in the modified flight new one.
plan.
!2ND SEARCH The operator is attempting to Search patterns
Cancel the old search
NOT ALLOWED enter a second search procedure in the flight plan
procedure in the flight plan when before entering a new one.
one is already defined.
!ACTIVE ROUTE IN All configurations
The operator attempts to access Execute active route prior to
MOD the INACT DES+SAR or accessing DES+SAR or
TACTICAL 2/2 page TACTICAL 2/2 page.
!ACTIVATE Complete search pattern N/A
Operator attempting to execute a
SEARCH modification or cancel it.
flight plan with a search pattern
in modification.
!APPROACH All configurations
Operator is attempting to modify Review the route modification.
WPT/LEG the final approach or missed
approach segments.
!ATC NOT ACTIVE ATC transponder interface
Operator is attempting to Perform the squawk on an
!XPDR NOT
squawk the ID of an inactive active transponder.
ACTIVE
ATC transponder.
!TPDR NOT
ACTIVE
!ATC NOT ACTIVE ATC transponder interface
Cannot Squawk ATC because Change ATC status to active
!XPDR NOT
status is standby. before Squawking.
ACTIVE
!TPDR NOT
ACTIVE

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-38
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!BULLS EYE NOT if Tactical Config BULLS
Operator is attempting to enter a Enter the Bulls Eye
ALLOWED EYE is
Bulls Eye or Bulls Eye Target waypoint(s) in the active flight
configured
waypoint in the inactive flight plan only.
plan.
!BULLS EYE IN if Tactical Config BULLS
Operator is attempting to select a Remove Bulls Eye waypoint
ROUTE EYE is
different Bulls Eye waypoint while from flight plan before
configured
the Bulls Eye waypoint is part of selecting a new Bulls Eye
the active flight plan. waypoint.
Operator is attempting to define a
second Bulls Eye waypoint in the
active flight plan while there is
already one defined.
!BULLS TGT IN if Tactical Config BULLS
Operator is attempting to select a Remove Bulls Eye Target
ROUTE EYE is
different Bulls Eye Target waypoint from flight plan
waypoint while the Bulls Eye configured
before selecting a new Bulls
Target waypoint is part of the Eye Target waypoint.
active flight plan.
Operator is attempting to define a
second Bulls Eye Target
waypoint in the active flight plan
while there is already one
defined.
!BULLS EYE DATA if Tactical Config BULLS
Operator is attempting to confirm Ensure LAT/LON have been
MISSING EYE is
a Bulls Eye or Bulls Eye Target defined.
configured
modification without having
defined all mandatory
information. Ensure track and ground
speed have been defined for
moving Bulls Eye Target.
!CARP DATA Configurations supporting
Upon EXECution of the active Enter missing data in CARP
MISSING CARP/HARP
flight plan or confirmation of plan pages.
inactive route modifications, the
FMS detects that mandatory
CARP PLAN data is missing.
Message is enabled when the
CARP function is configured.
!CARP IN Configurations supporting
The operator attempts to change The operator attempts to
PROGRESS CARP/HARP
CARP data entry when it is no change CARP data entry
longer allowed. Message is when it is no longer allowed.
enabled when the CARP function
is configured.
!CDU ENTRY Multi-FMS installations
Conflict of entry in dual-FMS Check entry and re-enter data
CONFLICT operations. as required.
!CONFIG_0 All Configuration
While computing the CRC Review the configuration.
INVALID
checksum on a new configuration
!CONFIG_1
to be uploaded to the RS-422
INVALID
DLU, the FMS detects an invalid
!CONFIG_2
configuration.
INVALID
!CONFIG_3
INVALID

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-39
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!CONFIRM Complete inactive route VNAV configured and
Operator is trying to enter
INACTIVE ROUTE modification or cancel it. second route configured
temperature at destination
airport while the inactive route is
being modified.
!DATA LOADER IN Data loader interface
Operator is attempting to access Wait until data loader transfer
USE database while data loader is is completed.
active.
!DISPLAY REF All configuration
Operator is attempting to move a Select magnetic display on
TRUE waypoint along a DME arc while SETUP 1/1 page.
in True North reference display.
!DUPLICATE Iridium Phone interface
Operator is attempting to define a Choose another ident.
IDENT phone book entry with a name
that is already defined.
!DUPLICATE All configuration
Operator is attempting to enter a Choose another ident.
WAYPOINT waypoint with an identifier already
existing in the database, except
the user database.
!DUPLICATE USER All configuration
Operator is attempting to enter an Enter another ident.
WAYPOINT user waypoint with an identifier
already existing in the user
database.
!EDITOR BUFFER The FMS detects that the text Stop adding text or delete HCS interface configured
FULL editor buffer is full. existing text before adding
more text.
!EMPTY DME interface
Operator is attempting to delete None.
an item from an emptied list
(DME DESELECTION page).
!END OF EDITOR HCS interface configured
Last editor line has been Delete empty lines or move
LINE reached. cursor up.
!ENTER ACT Occurs with a power-up restart of All configurations
Execute a Direct-To or leg
WPT/LEG FMS in-flight or with an attempt to intercept to create an active
execute (or when LEGS key TO waypoint.
pressed) a flight plan without an
active TO waypoint.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-40
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!ENTER All configurations except for
Operator is attempting to execute Enter the DESTINATION
DESTINATION ROTOR
a flight plan without a destination airport.
airport.
!ENTER PHONE Iridium phone interface
Operator is attempting to perform Enter a phone number.
NUMBER a call or send a SMS without
indicating the phone number to
call.
!ENTER MODE 1 Installations in which the
Following an attempt to turn the Enter a valid mode 1 code on
CODE IFF transponder is
IFF mode 1 to "ON", the FMS IFF page 2/2.
configured.
detects that there is no valid
mode 1 code entered.
!ENTER MODE 2 Installations in which the
Following an attempt to turn the Enter a valid mode 2 code on
CODE IFF transponder is
IFF mode 2 to "ON", the FMS IFF page 2/2.
configured.
detects that there is no valid
mode 2 code entered.
!ENTER MODE S Installations in which the
Following an attempt to turn the Enter a valid mode S code on
CODE IFF transponder is
IFF mode S to "ON", the FMS IFF page 2/2.
configured.
detects there is no valid mode S
code entered.
!ENTER ORIGIN All configurations except for
Operator is attempting to execute Enter the ORIGIN airport.
ROTOR
a flight plan without an origin
airport, or to enter the destination
airport prior to the ORIGIN
airport.
!ENTER PHONE HCS interface
The FMS detects that the Enter the phone number.
NUMBER command sent to the HCS
(Helicopter Communication
System) has no associated
phone number.
!FIXED WPT LIST All configurations
Operator is attempting to create Cancel entry.
FULL more than 450 fixed waypoints.
!FMS NOT IN HF or V/UHF configurations
The FMS detects an attempt to As necessary, the crew should
CONTROL where the respective HF or
access the either the HF or first switch to FMS control for
V/UHF tune discrete
V/UHF page, or, to tune the HF or the given radio when
configuration option has
V/UHF when the FMS is not attempting to access either the
been configured.
controlling the respective radio. HF or V/UHF radio page.
!FREQ/CHAN IS Operator is attempting to enter a Enter the frequency after the • One of the following radio
NEEDED radio library entry without Preset and Ident. is configured:
frequency or channel COM
information. VUHF
VOR/ILS
ADF
!FULL DME interface
Operator is attempting to de- Review DME de-selection list
select more than 25 DME for possible deletions.
stations.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-41
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!FUNCTION NOT Function invoked by the FMS None. • One of the following radio
AVAILABLE function key just pressed is not is configured:
yet implemented in the FMS COM
(ATC) or not configured (FUEL, VUHF
MARK, FREQ). VOR/ILS
ADF
ATC
Fuel computer
!GPS DATE Operator is attempting to enter a Do not enter date. • GPS interface
new system date when the • EGI interface
system date is coming from the
GPS sensor.
!GPS NOT GPS interface
GPS almanac is not available for Check GPS power, wait at
AVAILABLE Predictive RAIM request. least 25 minutes for a new
almanac to be acquired and
or
re-initiate the request for RAIM
Operator is invoking the GPS prediction.
PRAIM function while the GPS
or
sensor is failed.
If FMS is fed by an external
GPS sensor (other than
internal GSM), verify power of
external GPS sensor.
!GPS UTC Operator is attempting to enter a Do not enter time. • GPS interface
new system time when the • EGI interface
system time is coming from the
GPS sensor.
!GUARD BAND VUHF radio interface
Operator is attempting to enter a Enter a frequency not in a
frequency that is in a guard band guard band based on the
based on the preset maritime preset maritime offset mode.
offset mode.
!HOLD EXIT IN All configurations
Operator is attempting to change Cancel entry.
PROGRESS a holding pattern parameter
while hold exit is armed.
!HOLDING IN Operator is attempting to delete Exit holding pattern or execute • All configurations
PROGRESS the active holding procedure or to a Direct-To. • Multi-FMS installations
synchronize the FMSs while
active in a holding pattern.
!HOVER IN HOVER enable.
The FMS detects the operator is If FMS synchronization is
PROGRESS attempting to synchronize the required, cancel the hover
FMSs while active in a hover procedure prior to re-
procedure. synchronize FMSs.
!HOVER MRK WPT The operator attempts to insert a Cancel the hover procedure • Hover function
waypoint between the TDN and before entering a waypoint in • Radar Altimeter interface
MRK waypoints. the LEGS page.
!IDENT/FREQ IS Only frequency was entered in Enter the Ident before the • One of the following radio
NEEDED the radio library. frequency. is configured:
COM
VUHF
VOR/ILS
ADF

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-42
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!IDENT NOT Entered radio station ident was Check identifier or re-enter a • One of the following
FOUND not found in the navigation valid identifier. element is configured:
database or in the radio tuning COM
library. VUHF
VOR/ILS
ADF
!IN APPROACH Operator is attempting to Wait until the approach is • All configurations
synchronize the FMSs while in completed before • Multi-FMS installations
approach. synchronizing the FMSs.
!IN FLIGHT Operator is attempting to enter Do not enter data in flight. • All configurations
data while the aircraft is airborne
into a data field legal only for use
on the ground.
Examples that would generate
this message when the FMS is
configured to fixed wing:
• Active database selection
• Origin airport (if an entry
already exists)
• SID selection
• Departure runway selection
!IN MISSED Operator is attempting to Wait until the missed approach • All configurations
APPROACH synchronize the FMSs while in is completed before • Multi-FMS installations
missed approach. synchronizing the FMSs, or
cancel missed approach by
executing a DIRECT-TO
procedure.
!INACTIVE ROUTE The operator attempts to access Execute or delete the inactive • All configurations
IN MOD the HOVER or DES+SAR or route before trying to reach the • Multi-FMS installations
TACTICAL 1/2 page while the HOVER or DES+SAR or
inactive route is being modified TACTICAL 1/2 page.
(inactive route in MOD).
!INCORRECT The password entered to unlock Enter a valid password. • One of the following
PASSWORD the radio library is incorrect. element is configured:
COM
VUHF
VOR/ILS
ADF
!INVALID AIRWAY The airway entered in the VIA If possible, select an alternate • All configurations
field of the RTE page is not airway. • Multi-FMS installations
found in the NavDataBase.
!INVALID The selected approach is invalid If possible, select an alternate • All configurations
APPROACH or corrupted. approach. • Multi-FMS installations
NOTE The preceding message is generated when there are coding or packing errors in
the Navigation Database which cause an invalid leg type, a reference point
required in a procedure is missing or a procedure calls up an invalid intersection
point. This also applies to !INVALID SID, !INVALID SID TRANS, !INVALID STAR,
!INVALID STAR TRANS, !INVALID APPR TRANS, and !INVALID RUNWAY
messages.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-43
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!INVALID APPR The selected approach transition If possible, select an alternate All configurations
TRANS is invalid or corrupted. approach or approach
transition.
!INVALID An invalid channel was entered in Enter a valid channel. FM1 or FM2 interface.
CHANNEL FM library.
!INVALID Operator is attempting to activate Check database. All configurations
DATABASE an invalid database.
!INVALID DELETE Operator is attempting to Select correct field for deletion All configurations
DELETE an undeletable field. or overwrite the field data.
!INVALID ENTRY Operator is attempting to enter Enter correct data for the All configurations
incorrect data to the selected desired field.
field.
!INVALID FORMAT Operator is attempting to enter Enter correct data for the All configurations
data having an incorrect format desired field.
for the selected field.
!INVALID Entered frequency does not fall Re-enter valid frequency. • One of the following
FREQUENCY within the valid range. element is configured:
COM
VUHF
VOR/ILS
ADF
!INVALID IDENT An invalid Ident was entered in Enter a valid Ident (5 • One of the following
the library. characters max). element is configured:
COM
VUHF
VOR/ILS
ADF
!INVALID Place/Bearing-Place/Bearing Review data entry. Modify as All configurations
INTERSECTION inputs do not intersect to form a necessary.
valid waypoint or the entered
downtrack intersection does not
exist.
!INVALID LINE Invalid line select key was Choose valid LSK when • One of the following
SELECT pressed. deleting RADIO library element is configured:
element. COM
VUHF
VOR/ILS
ADF
!INVALID MODE RADIO cannot operate in this Before selecting this mode • One of the following
mode. change the other RADIO element is configured:
parameter(s). VUHF

!INVALID PRESET Invalid Preset was entered in the Enter a valid Preset (00 to 99). • One of the following
library. element is configured:
COM
VUHF
VOR/ILS
ADF
!INVALID All configurations
Operator selected an invalid Select a runway in the
RUNWAY runway (error in database). database or enter runway
manually.
!INVALID SID Operator selected an invalid SID If possible, select alternate All configurations
(error in database). SID.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-44
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!INVALID SID Operator selected an invalid SID If possible, select alternate SID All configurations
TRANS TRANS (error in database). or SID transition.
!INVALID STAR Operator selected an invalid If possible, select alternate All configurations
STAR (error in database). STAR or manually enter STAR
waypoints.
!INVALID STAR Operator selected an invalid If possible, select alternate All configurations
TRANS STAR TRANS (error in STAR or STAR transition.
database).
!INVALID X-TALK All configurations
Operator is attempting to Advise maintenance to verify
CONFIG synchronize FMSs despite dual FMS system Multi-FMS installations
invalid X-talk installation/ interconnects.
configuration.
!IP TO PI OUT OF Configurations supporting
The entered PI or IP position on Correct IP or PI position on the
RANGE CARP/HARP
the CARP PLAN pages causes CARP PLAN pages.
the distance from the PI to IP
waypoints to be greater than
30NM. Message is enabled
when the CARP function is
configured.
!LIBRARIES IN Operator trying to access the N/A
Complete or cancel the other
USE libraries while another has systems access to the
another system is already libraries.
accessing the libraries.
!LIBRARY IS Library is locked. Unlock the library before • One of the following
LOCKED saving the Preset frequencies. element is configured:
COM
VUHF
VOR/ILS
ADF
!MC IN CONTROL The FMS detects that the Audio Management Unit
Tune the radio volume settings
operator is attempting to: configured.
or the transponder from the
mission computer.
• modify a radio volume level ATC configured with MC
when the mission computer control option
(MC) is in control of the Audio
Management Unit or
• modify any transponder entry
when MC CTL is configured
and the MC is in control of the
ATC.
!MEMORY Operator is attempting to modify Unlock maintenance memory. All configurations
LOCKED protected memory.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-45
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!MOD IN The message is generated due to
PROGRESS one of the following 2 conditions:
1) Cannot access the CTR RTE
LEGS pages to preview the flight
plan on the EFIS display because 1) Execute changes and then 1) GAMA EFIS configured
there is a route modification in preview flight plan. installations.
progress.
or
2) When the ATOS is configured 2) Execute changes and re-
and an active or inactive route is initiate the mission transfer
in modification and the FMS 2) For ATOS configured
request from the ATOS.
detects a request to start a installations
mission data transfer from the
ATOS.
!MOV WPT IN Operator is attempting to delete Ensure that the moving Moving waypoint
ROUTE a moving waypoint from user waypoint is not part of the
database when the moving route before deletion.
waypoint is also in the route.
Operator is attempting to
activate or copy an inactive route
while a moving waypoint is
defined in the active route.
!MOV WPT NOT The operator is attempting to Cancel entry. Moving waypoint
ALLOWED enter a moving waypoint in the
second route.
!MOVING The operator is attempting to Cancel entry. Moving waypoint
WAYPOINT remove the fly-over procedure
from a moving waypoint or to
insert a search pattern a holding
pattern or a tactical direct-to on a
moving waypoint.
!MOVING WPT The operator is attempting to Cancel entry. Moving waypoint
LIST FULL create more than 10 moving
waypoints.
!MULTIPLE AWY All configurations
On RTE page, multiple common Enter desired intersection
INTERSECTS waypoints are found between waypoint in TO-field of first
two successive airways. airway.
!NO AIRWAY All configurations
No intersection is found when an Enter proper waypoint in TO-
INTERSECTION operator is trying to link two field of first airway.
airways on RTE page.
!NO AWY WPTS All configurations
On RTE page, the waypoint Enter proper waypoint in TO-
TO LOAD entered in the TO-field of a field of pending airway.
pending airway is the same as
the starting waypoint of the
airway (TO-field of previous
line).

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-46
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!NO ENTRY Operator is attempting to enter All configurations
Select correct data field for
ALLOWED data into a non-entry data field. entry.
For example, in a SID/STAR
modification of some
combinations of waypoints is not
allowed.
!NO LEG PROC All configurations
On RTE page, entry of Enter these special procedures
ALLOWED procedures (holding pattern, on the RTE LEGS page.
search patterns, fly-over) are not
allowed in TO-field.
This refers to the procedures
preceded by a “/” (“/H”, “/S”, “/O”).
!NO SUCH CO Route not found in custom route Access SELECT CO ROUTE All configurations
ROUTE database. pages to determine correct
custom route name or
manually define flight plan by
entering waypoints on RTE
LEGS pages.
!NOT All configurations
Element Not Configured - Illegal Advise maintenance to ensure
CONFIGURED Entry. that all configuration pages are
correctly set.
!NOT IN All configurations
FMS could not find entered Check identifier or re-enter the
DATABASE identifier in the navigation desired identifier.
database, or in the company
route database, or in the user
database,, or as a Bulls Eye
waypoint or a Bulls Eye Target
waypoint.
!NOT IN LIBRARY FMS could not find entered Verify desired preset • One of the following
preset number or identifier in the number/identi-fier. element is configured:
radio tuning library. COM
VUHF
VOR/ILS
ADF
!NOT IN PHONE HCS interface.
The Ident entered was not found Enter a valid Ident from the
BOOK in the phone book. phone book.
!NOT IN ROUTE On RTA PROGRESS page or All configurations
Check the identifier or verify
FUEL page, FMS could not find identifier from RTE LEGS
the entered identifier in flight plan. page.
!NOT REMOVABLE All configurations
The operator is trying to remove Cancel entry.
the WGS84 datum from the
datum list.
!OUT OF RANGE All configurations
Operator is attempting to enter Enter correct data for the
data having an incorrect range for desired field.
selected field. Also displayed
when inserting an along track
waypoint which would overlap an
adjacent waypoint.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-47
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!PHONE BOOK The FMS detects that the Cancel entry or remove HCS interface.
ALREADY FULL operator tried to add a new unnecessary data to allow new
phone identifier and number entry.
when the phone library is
already full.
!PRESET NEEDED The entry of +/- to Enter a valid preset number • One of the following
FIRST increment/decrement the explicitly. The +/- key can be element is configured:
active/standby preset number used afterwards. COM
requires a valid preset number VUHF
already appears in the entry VOR/ILS
field. ADF

!PRESET NOT IN The Preset entered was not Enter a valid Preset. • One of the following
LIBRARY found in the radio tuning library. element is configured:
COM
VUHF
VOR/ILS
ADF
!PRESS RESUME Search pattern
Operator is attempting to resume The RESUME key has to be
FIRST an interrupted search pattern by pressed before entering a
entering a waypoint number in waypoint number.
the ENTRY WPT # field.

!RADIO TUNING Operator is attempting to change Verify reason for radio tuning • One of the following
DISABLED a radio frequency while FMS inhibit. element is configured:
radio tuning is inhibited. COM
ADF
VOR/ILS
DME
!RALT FAILED Radio Altimeter interface
At hover execution the FMS Ensure RALT is powered and
detects that the radio altitude data working properly.
is not available. Advise maintenance.
!RESERVED Operator trying to create a user N/A
Enter a different identifier.
IDENTIFIER waypoint with one of the
following reserved identifiers:
"ORIG", "DEST", "PPOS",
"RDZVS", "BULL", "BETGT",
"BERDV", “TIAF”, “TFAF”,
“TMAP1”, “TMAP2”,"###M"
where # is a number (DMAP
waypoint format).
!ROUTE FULL All configurations
Operator is attempting to enter Review the flight plan for
more than 199 waypoints in the possible deletions.
flight plan.

!ROUTE The selected custom route or All configurations

Review the flight plan for
TRUNCATED arrival procedure has been possible deletions and
truncated to fit flight plan capacity re-select arrival path.
(199 waypoints maximum).
!RUNWAY N/A All configurations
Runway not applicable for SID. Not applicable.
FOR SID
!SEARCH IN Search pattern
Search pattern is active. Terminate search pattern and
PROGRESS redo procedure.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-48
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!SELECT Selection of the STAR transition All configurations
Select STAR transition,
TRANS/APPR/RWY or approach or runway is required approach, or runway as
before the STAR waypoints can appropriate.
be loaded into a route from the
navigation database.
!SELECT All configurations
Selection of the SID transition or Select SID transition or runway
TRANS/RUNWAY runway is required before the SID as appropriate.
waypoints can be loaded in route
from the navigation database.
!TACT APPR If tactical approach is
The FMS detects that there is Enter all mandatory fields
DATA MISSING configured
mandatory data missing from the require to define tactical
TACTICAL APPR page after the approach.
crew has attempted to insert the
tactical approach runway
threshold waypoint. by pressing
the EXECute CMA-9000 Display
Panel hard key.
!TACT APPR IN If tactical approach is
The FMS detects that that the Ensure that no tactical
PROGRESS configured
crew is attempting to redefine an approach procedure waypoint
already entered tactical is the TO. Then proceed with
approach when one of the five modification to the tactical
waypoints for the already approach procedure.
existing tactical approach is the
active waypoint (e.g. TO
waypoint)
!TE TO IP OUT OF Configurations supporting
The entered TE or IP position on Correct TE or IP position on
RANGE CARP/HARP
the CARP PLAN pages causes the CARP PLAN pages.
the distance from the TE to IP
waypoints to be greater than
50NM. Message is enabled
when the CARP function is
configured.
!TE TO PI OUT OF Configurations supporting
The entered TE or PI position on Correct TE or PI position on
RANGE CARP/HARP
the CARP PLAN pages causes the CARP PLAN pages.
the distance from the TE to PI
waypoints to be greater than
20NM. Message is enabled
when the CARP function is
configured.
!TEMP DATABASE All configurations
Temporary database is full (99 Use existing temporary
FULL waypoints or 50 waypoints with waypoints or reload the custom
the first three letters are different). route (for waypoints not in
Navigation database).

!TEMP OFST OUT The FMS detects that the Enter a temporary offset Configurations supporting
OF RANGE difference between the current position less than 100 NM CARP/HARP
FMS position and the entered from current aircraft position.
temporary position update is
greater than or equal to 100 NM.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-49
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DATA ENTRY DESCRIPTION ACTION APPLICABLE

ADVISORY CONFIGURA-TION
MESSAGE
!TOO MANY HCS interface
The operator has entered more Check the number and make
DIGITS than 30 digits for the phone sure that the number of digits
number. is less than 31.

!UNABLE FMS- Multi-FMS installations

In a dual-FMS installation, Any automatically
FMS SYNC operator’s attempt to synchronize synchronized item listed in
FMSs failed because of an inter- Section 3, dual-FMS
FMS communication failure. Operations, must be now
performed independently on
each FMS.
See MESSAGE RECALL
and/or MAINT MESSAGE
page(s) for more details.
Advise maintenance.
!USER ROUTE All configurations
The entered user route name is Enter a different user route
EXISTS the same as an existing user name.
route

!USER WPT LIST All configurations

The operator attempts to add a Cancel entry or delete
FULL new waypoint whilst the FMS list unnecessary waypoints to
is full (450 fixed and 10 moving make room for the new
waypoints) one(s)
!VERIFY POSITIVE Ascertain that new positive VNAV configured
Operator entering a positive
TEMP temperature is correct.
temperature for the airport
temperature on the VNAV APPR
page after a valid VNAV
approach has been loaded.
!VERT DIST The current VERT DIST value Correct VERT DIST or HAT Configurations supporting
EXCEEDS HAT exceeds current HAT value on fields on the CARP PLAN CARP/HARP
the CARP PLAN pages. This pages accordingly.
advisory message is generated
on both data entry, HAT and
VERT DIST whenever this
condition is met. Message is
enabled when the CARP
function is configured.
!WAIT Data loader interface
Custom Route load in process. Wait until the FMS has
completed loading of the
custom route.

!WPT NOT IN All configurations

On RTE page, waypoint entered Enter proper waypoint in TO-
AIRWAY in TO-field of a pending airway is field of pending airway.
not found on this airway.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-50
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS

A. ANNUNCIATORS

Outputs are provided to drive external annunciators to alert the pilot of system status or flight plan sequencing.

NOTE: The actual legends and colors of the remote annunciators may vary depending on the installation.
Refer to the AFMS/RFMS for details.

ANNUNCIATOR DESCRIPTION ACTION

FAIL (Amber) Illuminates when an FMS failure condition Revert to an alternate means of navigation.
has been detected.
MSG (Amber) The message annunciator will illuminate Check alerting message in the scratchpad or on
when a new alert message has been the MESSAGE RECALL page and take
generated by the FMS. appropriate action.
POS (Amber) Illuminates when the FMS is in DR Take appropriate measures to fly in DR mode.
navigation mode.
OFST (Green) The offset annunciator will illuminate when Monitor parallel offset navigation.
the FMS is in parallel offset navigation.
NPA (Green) GPS Approach Capture annunciator Proceed with GPS approach.
illuminates at 2 nm inbound to FAF when all
conditions for a GPS instrument approach
procedure have been met.
TX1 (Green) Illuminates when the VUHF1 radio is None.
emitting RF power.
TX2 (Green) Illuminates when the VUHF2 radio is None.
emitting RF power.
GSM (Green) Illuminates when a voice call is being Answer the phone.
received or a call is in progress from either
the IRIDIUM AeroPhone or from the
Helicopter Communications System.
SMS (Green) Illuminates when a new SMS text message Read the new SMS message.
has been received from either the IRIDIUM
AeroPhone or from the Helicopter
Communications System, and has not been
read yet.
RNP (Amber) Illuminates when the FMS ANP exceeds the Verify RNP/ANP values on PROGRESS 1/3 or 1/4
RNP for the phase of flight. page. Monitor FMS position, perform manual
position update if necessary (not possible in GPS
Nav mode). Otherwise revert to an alternate
means of navigation.
IND (Amber) Illuminates when the onside FMS is Manage independent FMS operations as required.
operating in independent mode. Advise maintenance.
ATC (Green) Illuminates when a connection is None.
established with an Air Traffic Control
Center.
V/UHF (Green) Illuminates when the V/UHF radio reports to None.
the FMS that it is transmitting.
HF (Green) Illuminates when the HF radio reports to the None.
FMS that it is transmitting.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-51
November 19, 2009
 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

B. NAVIGATION FLAG

The EFIS annunciator, will be displayed under the operational or system hardware conditions listed below. At
the same time, the validity of the CMA-9000 roll steering output signal will be set to INVALID, resulting in the
disengagement of the autopilot/flight director LNAV mode.

1. OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS

a. The aircraft is airborne and the speed is below the minimum take-off speed. ACTION: None. If the
NAV flag has appeared during the take-off roll, it will disappear shortly after.

b. The active waypoint is undefined (e.g. at a route discontinuity, at the end of the route, or if no route is
loaded). The NAV flag will be accompanied by a !SELECT ACT WPT/LEG advisory message.
ACTION: Select the active waypoint.

c. During direct-to intercept navigation when engaging the LNAV autopilot mode before being on an
appropriate intercept heading. The NAV flag will be accompanied by a NOT ON INTERCEPT CRS
advisory message. ACTION: Fly to an intercept heading before re-engaging the LNAV mode.

d. At 2 nm inbound to the FAF for a GPS approach when all conditions necessary for the approach have
not been met (e.g. no GPS integrity, loss of GPS navigation, a route discontinuity exists before the FAF,
or the aircraft is not in the approach zone). The NAV flag will be accompanied by a number of possible
alert or advisory messages, depending on the cause. ACTION: Depending on the cause, eliminate or
change the operational condition, or, if related to the GPS function, initiate a missed approach.

e. When the active route leg loaded from the navigation database is a heading or course to intercept the
next leg and the aircraft is not on the correct course or heading. The NAV flag will be accompanied by
a NOT ON INTERCEPT HDG or NOT ON INTERCEPT CRS advisory message. ACTION: Fly to the
correct intercept heading or course before re-engaging the AP/FD LNAV mode.

2. HARDWARE CONDITIONS

a. A CMA-9000 hardware failure condition (including loss of communication with the CMA-9000 FMS) is
detected by the built-in test function. ACTION: Revert to an alternate means of navigation.

b. Loss of power input to the CMA-9000. ACTION: Check circuit breakers. Restore power input only if no
evidence of a hardware failure exists.

c. The CMA-9000 FMS has been turned off. ACTION: Turn on the CMA-9000 FMS.

d. A heading input failure occurs when navigating in dead reckoning modes, or when flying any heading
leg. ACTION: Switch to an alternate heading source, or revert to another navigation mode or to an
alternate means of navigation.

e. A True Airspeed input failure occurs when navigating in dead reckoning. ACTION: Revert to an
alternate means of navigation.

This page is printed under user's responsibility

and must not be retained for reference

Page E-52
November 19, 2009